PowerScale OneFS

[Link] Web Administration Guide

[Link]

August 2025
Notes, cautions, and warnings

NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid
the problem.

WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

Copyright © 2016 - 2024 Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved. Dell Technologies, Dell, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its
subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be trademarks of their respective owners.
 Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction to this guide........................................................................................... 24

About this guide.................................................................................................................................................................24
PowerScale NAS overview............................................................................................................................................. 24
Where to get help............................................................................................................................................................. 24
Additional options for getting help.......................................................................................................................... 25

Chapter 2: PowerScale scale-out NAS......................................................................................... 26

OneFS storage architecture........................................................................................................................................... 26
Node components............................................................................................................................................................. 26
Internal and external networks...................................................................................................................................... 28
PowerScale cluster........................................................................................................................................................... 29
Cluster administration................................................................................................................................................ 29
Quorum.......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Splitting and merging..................................................................................................................................................30
Node pools.................................................................................................................................................................... 30
The OneFS operating system..........................................................................................................................................31
Mixed data-access protocol environments............................................................................................................31
Identity management and access control...............................................................................................................31
Structure of the file system............................................................................................................................................32
Data layout.................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Striping...........................................................................................................................................................................32
Writing files................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Reading files..................................................................................................................................................................33
Metadata layout...........................................................................................................................................................33
Locks and concurrency.............................................................................................................................................. 33
Data protection overview................................................................................................................................................34
N+M data protection.................................................................................................................................................. 34
Data mirroring...............................................................................................................................................................35
The file system journal............................................................................................................................................... 35
Virtual hot spare (VHS)............................................................................................................................................. 35
Balancing protection with storage space.............................................................................................................. 35
Data compression..............................................................................................................................................................35
Software modules............................................................................................................................................................. 36

Chapter 3: Dell PowerScale for AWS........................................................................................... 38

Dell PowerScale for AWS introduction........................................................................................................................ 38
Dell PowerScale for AWS guidelines.......................................................................................................................38
Dell PowerScale for AWS supported configurations.......................................................................................... 38
Dell PowerScale for AWS unsupported OneFS features................................................................................... 39
Dell PowerScale for AWS infrastructure and deployment................................................................................ 40

Chapter 4: Dell PowerScale for Azure.......................................................................................... 41

Dell PowerScale for Azure introduction....................................................................................................................... 41
Dell PowerScale for Azure features.............................................................................................................................. 41

Contents 3
 Dell PowerScale for Azure supported configuration parameters.......................................................................... 42
Dell PowerScale for Azure configuration options......................................................................................................42

Chapter 5: General cluster administration................................................................................... 44

General cluster administration overview..................................................................................................................... 44
User interfaces...................................................................................................................................................................44
Connecting to the cluster............................................................................................................................................... 45
Log in to the web administration interface........................................................................................................... 45
Open an SSH connection to a cluster.................................................................................................................... 45
Licensing..............................................................................................................................................................................46
Software licenses........................................................................................................................................................ 46
Hardware tiers..............................................................................................................................................................46
License status.............................................................................................................................................................. 46
Adding and removing licenses.................................................................................................................................. 47
Activating trial licenses.............................................................................................................................................. 49
Certificates......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Viewing and Editing TLS Authority Certificates ................................................................................................. 49
Importing TLS Authority Certificates .................................................................................................................... 49
Replacing TLS Authority Certificates - Overview............................................................................................... 50
Deleting TLS Authority Certificates ...................................................................................................................... 50
Viewing and Editing TLS Server Certificates ...................................................................................................... 50
Importing TLS Server Certificates ......................................................................................................................... 50
Configuring TLS Certificate Settings .....................................................................................................................51
TLS certificate data example.................................................................................................................................... 51
Cluster identity................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Set the cluster name and contact information.................................................................................................... 52
Cluster date and time.......................................................................................................................................................52
Set the cluster date and time...................................................................................................................................52
Specify an NTP time server......................................................................................................................................52
Email settings..................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Configure SMTP email settings............................................................................................................................... 53
Configuring the cluster join mode................................................................................................................................. 53
Specify the cluster join mode................................................................................................................................... 54
File system settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 54
Enable or disable access time tracking.................................................................................................................. 54
Specify the cluster character encoding.................................................................................................................54
Security hardening............................................................................................................................................................ 55
Cluster monitoring............................................................................................................................................................ 55
Monitor the cluster..................................................................................................................................................... 56
View node status......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Monitoring cluster hardware.......................................................................................................................................... 56
View node hardware status...................................................................................................................................... 56
Chassis and drive states............................................................................................................................................ 57
Check battery status..................................................................................................................................................58
SNMP monitoring........................................................................................................................................................ 58
Events and alerts............................................................................................................................................................... 61
Events overview........................................................................................................................................................... 61
Alerts overview............................................................................................................................................................. 61
Alert channel overview............................................................................................................................................... 61
Event groups overview.............................................................................................................................................. 62

4 Contents
 Viewing and modifying event groups......................................................................................................................62
Managing alert rules................................................................................................................................................... 63
Managing channels......................................................................................................................................................64
Managing event thresholds.......................................................................................................................................67
Maintenance and testing........................................................................................................................................... 67
Healthcheck Evaluations................................................................................................................................................. 69
Terminology.................................................................................................................................................................. 69
List, run, and view details of all checklists............................................................................................................ 69
List all items and view details about items............................................................................................................ 70
Listing evaluations and reviewing results.............................................................................................................. 70
Scheduling evaluations................................................................................................................................................71
Auto Remediation through HealthCheck............................................................................................................... 72
Cluster maintenance......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Maintenance mode...................................................................................................................................................... 73
Replacing node components..................................................................................................................................... 74
Upgrading node components....................................................................................................................................74
Automatic Replacement Recognition (ARR) for drives......................................................................................74
Managing drive firmware........................................................................................................................................... 75
Managing cluster nodes............................................................................................................................................. 78
Upgrading PowerScale OneFS................................................................................................................................. 79
Patching OneFS...........................................................................................................................................................80
Dell Technologies connectivity services .....................................................................................................................80
Dell Technologies connectivity services prerequisites....................................................................................... 80
Obtaining an Access Key and PIN............................................................................................................................ 81
Enabling Dell Technologies connectivity services overview.............................................................................. 81
Viewing Dell Technologies connectivity services settings overview.............................................................. 82
Configuring Dell Technologies connectivity services overview....................................................................... 82
Secure Remote Services (SRS) Summary.................................................................................................................. 83

Chapter 6: Access zones............................................................................................................. 84

Data Security overview .................................................................................................................................................. 84
Base directory guidelines.................................................................................................................................................84
Access zones best practices.......................................................................................................................................... 85
Access zones on a SyncIQ secondary cluster............................................................................................................85
Access zone limits.............................................................................................................................................................86
Quality of service.............................................................................................................................................................. 86
Zone-based Role-based Access Control (zRBAC)................................................................................................... 86
Integrated roles in non-System zones....................................................................................................................87
Zone-specific authentication providers....................................................................................................................... 88
Managing access zones...................................................................................................................................................88
Create an access zone............................................................................................................................................... 88
Assign an overlapping base directory..................................................................................................................... 89
Manage authentication providers............................................................................................................................89
Manage authentication providers in an access zone..........................................................................................89
Associate an IP address pool with an access zone............................................................................................. 90
Modify an access zone.............................................................................................................................................. 90
Delete an access zone............................................................................................................................................... 90
View a list of access zones........................................................................................................................................91
Modify a role in an access zone................................................................................................................................91

Contents 5
 Chapter 7: Authentication........................................................................................................... 93
Authentication overview..................................................................................................................................................93
Authentication provider features.................................................................................................................................. 93
Security Identifier (SID) history overview...................................................................................................................94
Supported authentication providers............................................................................................................................. 94
Active Directory.................................................................................................................................................................95
LDAP.................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
NIS........................................................................................................................................................................................ 96
Kerberos authentication.................................................................................................................................................. 96
Keytabs and SPNs overview.....................................................................................................................................97
MIT Kerberos protocol support................................................................................................................................97
File provider........................................................................................................................................................................ 97
Local provider.....................................................................................................................................................................98
Multifactor authentication (MFA).................................................................................................................................98
Root Lockdown Mode...................................................................................................................................................... 98
Enable Root Lockdown Mode.................................................................................................................................. 99
Disable Root Lockdown Mode................................................................................................................................ 100
CAC/PIV authentication................................................................................................................................................ 100
Single sign-on overview................................................................................................................................................. 100
Multi-instance active directory..................................................................................................................................... 101
LDAP public keys.............................................................................................................................................................. 101
Managing Active Directory providers.......................................................................................................................... 101
Configure an Active Directory provider................................................................................................................102
Modify an Active Directory provider..................................................................................................................... 102
Delete an Active Directory provider...................................................................................................................... 103
Active Directory provider settings.........................................................................................................................103
Managing LDAP providers............................................................................................................................................. 104
Configure an LDAP provider................................................................................................................................... 104
Modify an LDAP provider.........................................................................................................................................105
Delete an LDAP provider..........................................................................................................................................105
LDAP query settings................................................................................................................................................. 105
LDAP advanced settings..........................................................................................................................................106
Managing NIS providers................................................................................................................................................. 107
Configure an NIS provider....................................................................................................................................... 107
Modify an NIS provider............................................................................................................................................ 108
Delete an NIS provider............................................................................................................................................. 108
Managing MIT Kerberos authentication.....................................................................................................................108
Managing MIT Kerberos realms..............................................................................................................................108
Managing MIT Kerberos providers......................................................................................................................... 110
Managing MIT Kerberos domains........................................................................................................................... 112
Managing file providers...................................................................................................................................................113
Configure a file provider........................................................................................................................................... 114
Generate a password file.......................................................................................................................................... 114
Password file format..................................................................................................................................................115
Group file format........................................................................................................................................................ 116
Netgroup file format.................................................................................................................................................. 116
Modify a file provider.................................................................................................................................................116
Delete a file provider.................................................................................................................................................. 117
Managing local users and groups..................................................................................................................................117

6 Contents
 View a list of users or groups by provider............................................................................................................ 117
Create a local user...................................................................................................................................................... 117
Create a local group................................................................................................................................................... 118
Naming rules for local users and groups............................................................................................................... 119
Modify a local user..................................................................................................................................................... 119
Modify a local group...................................................................................................................................................119
Delete a local user......................................................................................................................................................120
Delete a local group...................................................................................................................................................120
Configure a login delay............................................................................................................................................. 120
Set a concurrent session limit.................................................................................................................................120
Set a new user account to disable when inactive.............................................................................................. 121
Set an existing user account to disable when inactive......................................................................................121
Configure minimum password requirements........................................................................................................121
Configure the password hash type........................................................................................................................ 121
Set password expiration............................................................................................................................................121
Set minimum new password changes....................................................................................................................121
Set lock users criteria............................................................................................................................................... 122
Reset a user password............................................................................................................................................. 122
Managing CAC/PIV......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Add a certificate for CAC/PIV authentication....................................................................................................122
Modify the certificate for CAC/PIV authentication.......................................................................................... 122
Managing SSO .................................................................................................................................................................122
Configure the Identity Provider to communicate with OneFS ...................................................................... 123
Configure the SSO UPN/Kerberos Principal Name SAML NameID .............................................................124
Configure the SSO Windows Qualified Domain Name SAML NameID ........................................................ 124
Configure SSO in OneFS ........................................................................................................................................ 125
Enable and test SSO................................................................................................................................................. 126

Chapter 8: Administrative roles and privileges........................................................................... 127

Role-based access........................................................................................................................................................... 127
Roles....................................................................................................................................................................................127
Custom roles............................................................................................................................................................... 128
OneFS roles................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Privileges............................................................................................................................................................................135
Restricted role............................................................................................................................................................ 136
Supported OneFS privileges....................................................................................................................................136
Data backup and restore privileges....................................................................................................................... 145
Command-line interface privileges........................................................................................................................ 146
Managing roles................................................................................................................................................................. 149
Create a custom role................................................................................................................................................ 150
Modify a role............................................................................................................................................................... 150
Copy a role.................................................................................................................................................................. 150
Add a privilege to a custom role............................................................................................................................. 151
Add a member to a role.............................................................................................................................................151
Delete a custom role.................................................................................................................................................. 151
View a role....................................................................................................................................................................151
View privileges............................................................................................................................................................152

Chapter 9: Identity management................................................................................................153

Contents 7
 Identity management overview.................................................................................................................................... 153
Identity types.................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Access tokens...................................................................................................................................................................154
Access token generation............................................................................................................................................... 154
ID mapping...................................................................................................................................................................155
User mapping.............................................................................................................................................................. 156
On-disk identity.......................................................................................................................................................... 157
Managing ID mappings................................................................................................................................................... 158
Create an identity mapping..................................................................................................................................... 158
Modify an identity mapping..................................................................................................................................... 158
Delete an identity mapping......................................................................................................................................159
View an identity mapping.........................................................................................................................................159
Flush the identity mapping cache.......................................................................................................................... 159
View a user token...................................................................................................................................................... 160
Configure identity mapping settings..................................................................................................................... 160
View identity mapping settings.............................................................................................................................. 160
Managing user identities.................................................................................................................................................161
View user identity....................................................................................................................................................... 161
Create a user-mapping rule..................................................................................................................................... 162
Test a user-mapping rule......................................................................................................................................... 162
Merge Windows and UNIX tokens.........................................................................................................................163
Retrieve the primary group from LDAP................................................................................................................164
Mapping rule options.................................................................................................................................................164
Mapping rule operators............................................................................................................................................ 165

Chapter 10: Home directories..................................................................................................... 167

Home directories overview............................................................................................................................................167
Home directory permissions..........................................................................................................................................167
Authenticating SMB users............................................................................................................................................. 167
Home directory creation through SMB...................................................................................................................... 168
Create home directories with expansion variables............................................................................................ 168
Create home directories with the --inheritable-path-acl option....................................................................169
Create special home directories with the SMB share %U variable............................................................... 170
Home directory creation through SSH and FTP...................................................................................................... 170
Set the SSH or FTP login shell .............................................................................................................................. 170
Set SSH/FTP home directory permissions...........................................................................................................171
Set SSH/FTP home directory creation options.................................................................................................. 171
Provision home directories with dot files............................................................................................................. 172
Home directory creation in a mixed environment.................................................................................................... 173
Interactions between ACLs and mode bits................................................................................................................173
Default home directory settings in authentication providers................................................................................173
Supported expansion variables..................................................................................................................................... 174
Domain variables in home directory provisioning..................................................................................................... 175

Chapter 11: Data access control..................................................................................................176

Data access control overview.......................................................................................................................................176
ACLs....................................................................................................................................................................................176
UNIX permissions............................................................................................................................................................. 177
Mixed-permission environments...................................................................................................................................177

8 Contents
 NFS access of Windows-created files.................................................................................................................. 177
SMB access of UNIX-created files........................................................................................................................ 177
Managing access permissions.......................................................................................................................................178
View expected user permissions............................................................................................................................ 178
Configure access management settings.............................................................................................................. 179
Modify ACL policy settings......................................................................................................................................179
ACL policy settings....................................................................................................................................................180
Run the PermissionRepair job................................................................................................................................. 184

Chapter 12: File sharing............................................................................................................. 186

File sharing overview...................................................................................................................................................... 186
Mixed protocol environments................................................................................................................................. 186
Write caching with SmartCache............................................................................................................................ 187
SMB security.................................................................................................................................................................... 188
SMB shares in access zones...................................................................................................................................188
SMB Multichannel......................................................................................................................................................189
SMB share management through MMC.............................................................................................................. 190
SMBv3 encryption......................................................................................................................................................191
SMB server-side copy............................................................................................................................................... 191
SMB continuous availability.....................................................................................................................................192
SMB file filtering........................................................................................................................................................ 192
Symbolic links and SMB clients.............................................................................................................................. 193
Anonymous access to SMB shares....................................................................................................................... 194
Managing SMB settings........................................................................................................................................... 194
Managing SMB shares..............................................................................................................................................198
NFS security.....................................................................................................................................................................203
NFS exports............................................................................................................................................................... 203
NFS aliases................................................................................................................................................................. 203
NFS log files............................................................................................................................................................... 204
Managing the NFS service......................................................................................................................................204
Managing NFS exports............................................................................................................................................ 206
Managing NFS aliases................................................................................................................................................211
FTP......................................................................................................................................................................................212
Enable and configure FTP file sharing.................................................................................................................. 213
HTTP and HTTPS security............................................................................................................................................ 213
Enable and configure HTTP.....................................................................................................................................213

Chapter 13: File filtering............................................................................................................ 215

File filtering in an access zone......................................................................................................................................215
Enable and configure file filtering in an access zone.............................................................................................. 215
Modify file filtering settings in an access zone........................................................................................................ 216
View file filtering settings.............................................................................................................................................. 216

Chapter 14: Auditing.................................................................................................................. 217

Auditing overview............................................................................................................................................................ 217
Syslog................................................................................................................................................................................. 218
Syslog forwarding and TLS .......................................................................................................................................... 218
OpenBSM service............................................................................................................................................................ 219
Protocol audit events..................................................................................................................................................... 219

Contents 9
 Supported audit tools...............................................................................................................................................220
Delivering protocol audit events to multiple CEE servers...............................................................................220
Supported event types for protocol auditing......................................................................................................221
Audit log purging..............................................................................................................................................................221
Managing audit settings................................................................................................................................................ 222
Enable configuration change auditing.................................................................................................................. 222
Forward configuration changes to syslog........................................................................................................... 222
Enable protocol access auditing............................................................................................................................ 223
Forward protocol access events to syslog ........................................................................................................ 223
Configure protocol audited zones.........................................................................................................................224
Configure protocol event filters............................................................................................................................ 224
Enable system auditing and forwarding ..............................................................................................................224
Import certificate for TLS syslog forwarding..................................................................................................... 225
Set the audit hostname........................................................................................................................................... 225
View audit settings................................................................................................................................................... 226
Automatic deletion....................................................................................................................................................226
Manual deletion..........................................................................................................................................................228
Integrating with the Common Event Enabler...........................................................................................................229
Install CEE for Windows.......................................................................................................................................... 229
Configure CEE for Windows...................................................................................................................................229
Configure CEE servers to deliver protocol audit events................................................................................. 230
Tracking the delivery of protocol audit events........................................................................................................230
View the time stamps of delivery of events to the CEE server and syslog................................................ 231
Move the log position of the CEE forwarder...................................................................................................... 231
View the rate of delivery of protocol audit events to the CEE server......................................................... 231

Chapter 15: Snapshots...............................................................................................................232

Snapshots overview....................................................................................................................................................... 232
Data protection with SnapshotIQ............................................................................................................................... 232
Snapshot disk-space usage.......................................................................................................................................... 233
Snapshot schedules........................................................................................................................................................233
Snapshot aliases..............................................................................................................................................................233
File and directory restoration....................................................................................................................................... 234
Best practices for creating snapshots.......................................................................................................................234
Best practices for creating snapshot schedules..................................................................................................... 234
File clones......................................................................................................................................................................... 235
Shadow-store considerations................................................................................................................................ 236
Snapshot locks.................................................................................................................................................................236
Snapshot reserve............................................................................................................................................................ 236
Writable snapshots......................................................................................................................................................... 237
SnapshotIQ license functionality................................................................................................................................. 237
Creating snapshots with SnapshotIQ.........................................................................................................................238
Create a SnapRevert domain................................................................................................................................. 238
Create a snapshot schedule................................................................................................................................... 238
Create a snapshot.....................................................................................................................................................239
Snapshot naming patterns......................................................................................................................................239
Managing snapshots ..................................................................................................................................................... 242
Reducing snapshot disk-space usage.................................................................................................................. 242
Delete snapshots.......................................................................................................................................................242
Modify snapshot attributes.....................................................................................................................................243

10 Contents
 Assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot..................................................................................................................243
View snapshots..........................................................................................................................................................243
Snapshot information............................................................................................................................................... 243
Restoring snapshot data............................................................................................................................................... 244
Revert a snapshot.....................................................................................................................................................244
Restore a file or directory using Windows Explorer..........................................................................................244
Restore a file or directory through a UNIX command line.............................................................................. 245
Clone a file from a snapshot...................................................................................................................................245
Managing snapshot schedules..................................................................................................................................... 246
Modify a snapshot schedule................................................................................................................................... 246
Delete a snapshot schedule....................................................................................................................................246
View snapshot schedules........................................................................................................................................ 246
Managing snapshot aliases........................................................................................................................................... 247
Configure a snapshot alias for a snapshot schedule.........................................................................................247
Assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot..................................................................................................................247
Reassign a snapshot alias to the live file system...............................................................................................247
View snapshot aliases...............................................................................................................................................247
Snapshot alias information......................................................................................................................................248
Managing with snapshot locks.....................................................................................................................................248
Create a snapshot lock............................................................................................................................................ 248
Modify a snapshot lock expiration date...............................................................................................................249
Delete a snapshot lock.............................................................................................................................................249
Snapshot lock information...................................................................................................................................... 249
Configure SnapshotIQ settings................................................................................................................................... 250
SnapshotIQ settings.................................................................................................................................................250
Set the snapshot reserve.............................................................................................................................................. 251
Managing changelists..................................................................................................................................................... 251
Create a changelist....................................................................................................................................................251
Delete a changelist.................................................................................................................................................... 251
View a changelist...................................................................................................................................................... 252
Changelist information.............................................................................................................................................252

Chapter 16: Deduplication with SmartDedupe............................................................................ 253

Deduplication overview................................................................................................................................................. 253
Deduplication jobs...........................................................................................................................................................253
Data replication and backup with deduplication......................................................................................................254
Snapshots with deduplication...................................................................................................................................... 254
Deduplication considerations....................................................................................................................................... 255
Shadow-store considerations...................................................................................................................................... 255
SmartDedupe license functionality............................................................................................................................. 255
Managing deduplication.................................................................................................................................................256
Assess deduplication space savings..................................................................................................................... 256
Specify deduplication settings............................................................................................................................... 256
Start or schedule a deduplication job...................................................................................................................256
View deduplication space savings......................................................................................................................... 257
View a deduplication report.................................................................................................................................... 257
Deduplication job report information.................................................................................................................... 257
Deduplication information....................................................................................................................................... 258

Contents 11
 Chapter 17: Data replication with SyncIQ...................................................................................259
SyncIQ data replication overview............................................................................................................................... 259
Replication policies and jobs.........................................................................................................................................259
SmartLock considerations for SyncIQ................................................................................................................. 260
Automated replication policies...............................................................................................................................260
Source and target cluster association.................................................................................................................. 261
Configuring SyncIQ source and target clusters with NAT..............................................................................262
Full and differential replication...............................................................................................................................263
Controlling replication job resource consumption............................................................................................. 263
Replication policy priority........................................................................................................................................ 263
Replication reports....................................................................................................................................................263
Replication snapshots.................................................................................................................................................... 264
Source cluster snapshots........................................................................................................................................264
Target cluster snapshots.........................................................................................................................................264
Data failover and failback with SyncIQ......................................................................................................................264
Data failover............................................................................................................................................................... 265
Data failback...............................................................................................................................................................265
SmartLock compliance mode failover and failback...........................................................................................266
SmartLock replication limitations.......................................................................................................................... 266
Recovery times and objectives for SyncIQ...............................................................................................................267
RPO Alerts.................................................................................................................................................................. 267
Replication policy priority.............................................................................................................................................. 267
SyncIQ license functionality......................................................................................................................................... 268
Replication for nodes with multiple interfaces........................................................................................................ 268
Restrict SyncIQ source nodes..................................................................................................................................... 268
Creating replication policies......................................................................................................................................... 268
Excluding directories in replication....................................................................................................................... 269
Excluding files in replication................................................................................................................................... 269
File criteria options....................................................................................................................................................270
Configure default replication policy settings....................................................................................................... 271
Create a replication policy.......................................................................................................................................272
Assess a replication policy.......................................................................................................................................276
Set RPO alerts for SyncIQ policy.......................................................................................................................... 277
Managing replication to remote clusters................................................................................................................... 277
Start a replication job............................................................................................................................................... 277
Pause a replication job..............................................................................................................................................277
Resume a replication job..........................................................................................................................................278
Cancel a replication job............................................................................................................................................ 278
View active replication jobs.................................................................................................................................... 278
Replication job information..................................................................................................................................... 278
Initiating data failover and failback with SyncIQ..................................................................................................... 279
Fail over data to a secondary cluster................................................................................................................... 279
Revert a failover operation..................................................................................................................................... 279
Fail back data to a primary cluster........................................................................................................................280
Run the ComplianceStoreDelete job in a Smartlock compliance mode domain.........................................280
Managing replication policies........................................................................................................................................ 281
Modify a replication policy....................................................................................................................................... 281
Delete a replication policy........................................................................................................................................ 281
Enable or disable a replication policy.................................................................................................................... 282

12 Contents
 View replication policies...........................................................................................................................................282
Replication policy information................................................................................................................................ 282
Replication policy settings...................................................................................................................................... 283
Managing replication to the local cluster.................................................................................................................. 284
Cancel replication to the local cluster..................................................................................................................285
Break local target association................................................................................................................................ 285
View replication policies targeting the local cluster......................................................................................... 285
Remote replication policy information................................................................................................................. 285
Managing replication performance rules................................................................................................................... 286
Create a network traffic rule..................................................................................................................................286
Create a file operations rule................................................................................................................................... 286
Modify a performance rule......................................................................................................................................286
Delete a performance rule.......................................................................................................................................287
Enable or disable a performance rule................................................................................................................... 287
View performance rules........................................................................................................................................... 287
Managing replication reports........................................................................................................................................287
Configure default replication report settings..................................................................................................... 287
Delete replication reports........................................................................................................................................288
View replication reports...........................................................................................................................................288
Replication report information............................................................................................................................... 288
Managing failed replication jobs.................................................................................................................................. 289
Resolve a replication policy.....................................................................................................................................289
Reset a replication policy........................................................................................................................................ 289
Perform a full or differential replication.............................................................................................................. 290

Chapter 18: Data Encryption with SyncIQ...................................................................................291

SyncIQ data encryption overview................................................................................................................................291
SyncIQ traffic encryption.............................................................................................................................................. 291
Per-policy throttling overview......................................................................................................................................291
SyncIQ encrypted connection......................................................................................................................................292
Activate SyncIQ license........................................................................................................................................... 292
Enable SyncIQ encryption....................................................................................................................................... 292
Manage certificates for target clusters.................................................................................................................... 292
Add target cluster certificate.................................................................................................................................292
View target cluster certificate............................................................................................................................... 293
Modify target cluster certificate........................................................................................................................... 293
Delete target cluster certificate............................................................................................................................ 293
Manage certificates for source clusters................................................................................................................... 294
Add source cluster certificate................................................................................................................................294
View source cluster certificate.............................................................................................................................. 294
Modify source cluster certificate.......................................................................................................................... 295
Delete source cluster certificate........................................................................................................................... 295
Manage SyncIQ policies with encryption enabled...................................................................................................295
Create SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled..................................................................................................295
View SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled..................................................................................................... 296
Modify SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled..................................................................................................296
Delete SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled...................................................................................................296

Chapter 19: Data Transfer with SmartSync (Datamover)........................................................... 298

Contents 13
 SmartSync (Datamover) overview............................................................................................................................. 298

Chapter 20: Data layout with FlexProtect.................................................................................. 301

FlexProtect overview......................................................................................................................................................301
File striping........................................................................................................................................................................ 301
Requested data protection............................................................................................................................................301
FlexProtect data recovery............................................................................................................................................ 302
Smartfail...................................................................................................................................................................... 302
Node failures.............................................................................................................................................................. 302
Requesting data protection..........................................................................................................................................303
Requested protection settings.................................................................................................................................... 303
Requested protection for disk space usage............................................................................................................. 304

Chapter 21: Large file size support............................................................................................ 306

Large file support............................................................................................................................................................306
Feature enablement requirements..............................................................................................................................306
Restrictions after enabling large file support........................................................................................................... 306

Chapter 22: NDMP backup and recovery....................................................................................308

NDMP backup and recovery overview...................................................................................................................... 308
NDMP two-way backup................................................................................................................................................ 309
NDMP three-way backup............................................................................................................................................. 309
Support for NDMP sessions on Generation 6 hardware....................................................................................... 309
Setting preferred IPs for NDMP three-way operations........................................................................................ 309
NDMP multi-stream backup and recovery................................................................................................................ 310
Snapshot-based incremental backups........................................................................................................................310
NDMP backup and restore of SmartLink files........................................................................................................... 311
NDMP protocol support................................................................................................................................................. 312
Supported DMAs..............................................................................................................................................................312
NDMP hardware support............................................................................................................................................... 312
NDMP backup limitations...............................................................................................................................................312
NDMP performance recommendations......................................................................................................................313
Excluding files and directories from NDMP backups.............................................................................................. 314
Configuring basic NDMP backup settings.................................................................................................................315
Configure and enable NDMP backup.................................................................................................................... 315
View NDMP backup settings.................................................................................................................................. 315
Disable NDMP backup.............................................................................................................................................. 315
Managing NDMP user accounts.................................................................................................................................. 315
Create an NDMP administrator account..............................................................................................................315
View NDMP user accounts......................................................................................................................................316
Modify the password of an NDMP administrator account.............................................................................. 316
Delete an NDMP administrator account.............................................................................................................. 316
NDMP environment variables overview..................................................................................................................... 316
Managing NDMP environment variables..............................................................................................................316
NDMP environment variable settings................................................................................................................... 317
Add an NDMP environment variable..................................................................................................................... 317
View NDMP environment variables....................................................................................................................... 318
Edit an NDMP environment variable..................................................................................................................... 318
Delete an NDMP environment variable................................................................................................................ 318

14 Contents
 NDMP environment variables................................................................................................................................. 318
Setting environment variables for backup and restore operations............................................................... 322
Managing NDMP contexts............................................................................................................................................323
NDMP context settings........................................................................................................................................... 323
View NDMP contexts...............................................................................................................................................324
Delete an NDMP context........................................................................................................................................ 324
Managing NDMP sessions............................................................................................................................................ 324
NDMP session information..................................................................................................................................... 324
View NDMP sessions............................................................................................................................................... 326
Abort an NDMP session.......................................................................................................................................... 326
Managing NDMP Fibre Channel ports....................................................................................................................... 327
NDMP backup port settings................................................................................................................................... 327
Enable or disable an NDMP backup port............................................................................................................. 327
View NDMP backup ports.......................................................................................................................................328
Modify NDMP backup port settings.....................................................................................................................328
Managing NDMP preferred IP settings..................................................................................................................... 328
Create an NDMP preferred IP setting................................................................................................................. 328
Modify an NDMP preferred IP setting................................................................................................................. 328
List NDMP preferred IP settings...........................................................................................................................329
View NDMP preferred IP settings........................................................................................................................ 329
Delete NDMP preferred IP settings......................................................................................................................329
Managing NDMP backup devices............................................................................................................................... 329
NDMP backup device settings...............................................................................................................................329
Detect NDMP backup devices...............................................................................................................................330
View NDMP backup devices.................................................................................................................................. 330
Modify the name of an NDMP backup device.................................................................................................... 331
Delete an entry for an NDMP backup device..................................................................................................... 331
NDMP dumpdates file overview...................................................................................................................................331
Managing the NDMP dumpdates file.................................................................................................................... 331
NDMP dumpdates file settings...............................................................................................................................331
View entries in the NDMP dumpdates file.......................................................................................................... 332
Delete entries from the NDMP dumpdates file..................................................................................................332
NDMP restore operations............................................................................................................................................. 332
NDMP parallel restore operation........................................................................................................................... 332
NDMP serial restore operation.............................................................................................................................. 332
Specify a NDMP serial restore operation............................................................................................................ 332
Sharing tape drives between clusters........................................................................................................................333
Managing snapshot based incremental backups..................................................................................................... 333
Enable snapshot-based incremental backups for a directory........................................................................ 333
View snapshots for snapshot-based incremental backups............................................................................. 334
Delete snapshots for snapshot-based incremental backups.......................................................................... 334
Managing cluster performance for NDMP sessions...............................................................................................334
Enable NDMP Redirector to manage cluster performance............................................................................ 334
Managing CPU usage for NDMP sessions................................................................................................................335
Enable NDMP Throttler........................................................................................................................................... 335

Chapter 23: File retention with SmartLock................................................................................ 336

SmartLock overview...................................................................................................................................................... 336
Compliance mode............................................................................................................................................................336
Enterprise mode.............................................................................................................................................................. 337

Contents 15
 SmartLock directories....................................................................................................................................................337
Replication and backup with SmartLock................................................................................................................... 337
SmartLock license functionality...................................................................................................................................338
SmartLock considerations............................................................................................................................................ 338
Set the compliance clock.............................................................................................................................................. 338
View the compliance clock........................................................................................................................................... 338
Creating a SmartLock directory.................................................................................................................................. 339
Retention periods...................................................................................................................................................... 339
Autocommit time periods........................................................................................................................................ 339
Create an enterprise directory for a non-empty directory............................................................................. 339
Create a SmartLock directory................................................................................................................................339
Managing SmartLock directories................................................................................................................................ 340
Modify a SmartLock directory............................................................................................................................... 340
Delete a SmartLock directory................................................................................................................................ 340
View SmartLock directory settings....................................................................................................................... 341
SmartLock directory configuration settings........................................................................................................341
Managing files in SmartLock directories................................................................................................................... 342
Set a retention period through a UNIX command line..................................................................................... 342
Set a retention period through Windows Powershell.......................................................................................342
Commit a file to a WORM state through a UNIX command line................................................................... 343
Commit a file to a WORM state through Windows Explorer..........................................................................343
Override the retention period for all files in a SmartLock directory............................................................. 343
Delete a file committed to a WORM state ........................................................................................................ 343
View WORM status of a file................................................................................................................................... 344

Chapter 24: Protection domains................................................................................................ 345

Protection domains overview...................................................................................................................................... 345
Protection domain considerations.............................................................................................................................. 345
Create a protection domain..........................................................................................................................................345
Delete a protection domain.......................................................................................................................................... 346

Chapter 25: Data-at-rest-encryption......................................................................................... 347

Data-at-rest encryption overview...............................................................................................................................347
Self-encrypting drives....................................................................................................................................................347
Data security on self-encrypting drives.....................................................................................................................347
Data migrations and upgrades to a cluster with self-encrypting drives............................................................348
Enabling external key management............................................................................................................................ 348
Migrate nodes and SEDs to external key management.........................................................................................348
Chassis and drive states............................................................................................................................................... 349
Smartfailed drive REPLACE state.............................................................................................................................. 350
Smartfailed drive ERASE state.....................................................................................................................................351

Chapter 26: S3 Support.............................................................................................................352

S3 .......................................................................................................................................................................................352
S3 concepts................................................................................................................................................................352
Server Configuration......................................................................................................................................................353
Global S3 settings..................................................................................................................................................... 353
S3 zone settings........................................................................................................................................................354
Certificates................................................................................................................................................................. 355

16 Contents
 Bucket handling ..............................................................................................................................................................355
Managing buckets.....................................................................................................................................................355
Object handling ...............................................................................................................................................................357
Object key...................................................................................................................................................................358
Object Metadata....................................................................................................................................................... 358
Multipart upload........................................................................................................................................................ 358
Etag.............................................................................................................................................................................. 358
PUT object..................................................................................................................................................................359
Cross protocol locking............................................................................................................................................. 359
Authentication................................................................................................................................................................. 359
Access keys................................................................................................................................................................ 359
Access control........................................................................................................................................................... 359
Anonymous authentication..................................................................................................................................... 362
Access key management...............................................................................................................................................362
Managing keys........................................................................................................................................................... 363

Chapter 27: SmartQuotas.......................................................................................................... 365

SmartQuotas overview..................................................................................................................................................365
Quota types......................................................................................................................................................................365
Default quota type..........................................................................................................................................................366
Usage accounting and limits.........................................................................................................................................367
Disk usage calculations.................................................................................................................................................. 368
Quota notifications......................................................................................................................................................... 369
Quota notification rules................................................................................................................................................. 369
Quota reports...................................................................................................................................................................370
Creating quotas............................................................................................................................................................... 370
Create an accounting quota................................................................................................................................... 370
Create an enforcement quota.................................................................................................................................371
Managing quotas............................................................................................................................................................. 372
Search for quotas......................................................................................................................................................372
Manage quotas.......................................................................................................................................................... 372
Export a quota configuration file........................................................................................................................... 373
Import a quota configuration file........................................................................................................................... 373
Managing quota notifications.......................................................................................................................................373
Configure default quota notification settings.....................................................................................................373
Configure custom quota notification rules..........................................................................................................374
Map an email notification rule for a quota...........................................................................................................374
Email quota notification messages..............................................................................................................................375
Custom email notification template variable descriptions...............................................................................376
Customize email quota notification templates................................................................................................... 376
Managing quota reports................................................................................................................................................ 377
Create a quota report schedule............................................................................................................................. 377
Generate a quota report.......................................................................................................................................... 377
Locate a quota report.............................................................................................................................................. 378
Basic quota settings....................................................................................................................................................... 378
Advisory limit quota notification rules settings........................................................................................................379
Soft limit quota notification rules settings................................................................................................................380
Hard limit quota notification rules settings............................................................................................................... 381
Limit notification settings............................................................................................................................................. 382
Quota report settings.................................................................................................................................................... 382

Contents 17
 Chapter 28: Storage Pools.........................................................................................................384
Storage pools overview................................................................................................................................................. 384
Storage pool functions.................................................................................................................................................. 385
Autoprovisioning..............................................................................................................................................................386
Node pools........................................................................................................................................................................386
Node compatibilities................................................................................................................................................. 386
Compatibility restrictions........................................................................................................................................ 388
Manual node pools.................................................................................................................................................... 388
Virtual hot spare..............................................................................................................................................................388
Spillover.............................................................................................................................................................................389
Suggested protection.................................................................................................................................................... 389
Protection policies.......................................................................................................................................................... 389
SSD strategies................................................................................................................................................................. 390
Other SSD mirror settings.............................................................................................................................................391
Global namespace acceleration.................................................................................................................................... 391
L3 cache overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 391
Migration to L3 cache..............................................................................................................................................392
L3 cache on archive-class node pools................................................................................................................. 393
Tiers....................................................................................................................................................................................393
File pool policies.............................................................................................................................................................. 393
FilePolicy job...............................................................................................................................................................394
Managing node pools in the web administration interface................................................................................... 394
Add node pools to a tier.......................................................................................................................................... 394
Change the name or requested protection of a node pool.............................................................................394
Create a node class compatibility......................................................................................................................... 395
Merge compatible node pools................................................................................................................................ 395
Delete a node class compatibility.......................................................................................................................... 396
Create an SSD compatibility...................................................................................................................................396
Delete an SSD compatibility................................................................................................................................... 397
Managing L3 cache from the web administration interface.................................................................................397
Set L3 cache as the default for node pools........................................................................................................397
Set L3 cache on a specific node pool...................................................................................................................397
Restore SSDs to storage drives for a node pool............................................................................................... 398
Managing tiers................................................................................................................................................................. 398
Create a tier............................................................................................................................................................... 398
Edit a tier.....................................................................................................................................................................398
Delete a tier................................................................................................................................................................ 399
Creating file pool policies.............................................................................................................................................. 399
Create a file pool policy........................................................................................................................................... 400
File-matching options for file pool policies......................................................................................................... 400
Valid wildcard characters.........................................................................................................................................401
SmartPools settings................................................................................................................................................. 402
Managing file pool policies............................................................................................................................................ 404
Configure default file pool protection settings..................................................................................................405
Default file pool requested protection settings................................................................................................. 405
Configure default I/O optimization settings.......................................................................................................406
Default file pool I/O optimization settings.......................................................................................................... 407
Modify a file pool policy........................................................................................................................................... 407
Prioritize a file pool policy....................................................................................................................................... 407

18 Contents
 Create a file pool policy from a template............................................................................................................ 408
Delete a file pool policy............................................................................................................................................408
Monitoring storage pools.............................................................................................................................................. 408
Monitor storage pools..............................................................................................................................................408
View subpools health............................................................................................................................................... 409
View the results of a SmartPools job................................................................................................................... 409

Chapter 29: Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze (FSA)........................................................ 410

FSAnalyze (FSA)..............................................................................................................................................................410
Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze (FSA)........................................................................................................ 410

Chapter 30: System jobs............................................................................................................ 411

System jobs overview......................................................................................................................................................411
System jobs library.......................................................................................................................................................... 412
Job operation....................................................................................................................................................................415
Job performance impact................................................................................................................................................ 417
Job priorities......................................................................................................................................................................417
Managing system jobs.................................................................................................................................................... 417
View active jobs......................................................................................................................................................... 418
View job history.......................................................................................................................................................... 418
Start a job.................................................................................................................................................................... 418
Pause a job.................................................................................................................................................................. 418
Resume a job...............................................................................................................................................................419
Cancel a job................................................................................................................................................................. 419
Update a job................................................................................................................................................................ 419
Modify job type settings.......................................................................................................................................... 419
Managing impact policies.............................................................................................................................................. 420
Create an impact policy........................................................................................................................................... 420
Copy an impact policy.............................................................................................................................................. 420
Modify an impact policy........................................................................................................................................... 421
Delete an impact policy............................................................................................................................................ 421
View impact policy settings.................................................................................................................................... 422
Viewing job reports and statistics...............................................................................................................................422
View statistics for a job in progress..................................................................................................................... 422
View a report for a completed job........................................................................................................................ 422

Chapter 31: Networking............................................................................................................. 423

Networking overview..................................................................................................................................................... 423
About the internal network...........................................................................................................................................424
Internal IP address ranges.......................................................................................................................................424
Internal network failover......................................................................................................................................... 424
About the external network..........................................................................................................................................424
IPv6 support...............................................................................................................................................................425
Groupnets................................................................................................................................................................... 426
Subnets........................................................................................................................................................................427
IP address pools.........................................................................................................................................................428
SmartConnect module............................................................................................................................................. 428
Node provisioning rules............................................................................................................................................432
Routing options..........................................................................................................................................................433

Contents 19
 Host-based firewall...................................................................................................................................................434
Configuring the internal network................................................................................................................................ 436
Modify the internal IP address range................................................................................................................... 437
Modify the internal network netmask.................................................................................................................. 437
Configure and enable internal failover ................................................................................................................ 437
Disable internal network failover........................................................................................................................... 438
Managing IPv6................................................................................................................................................................. 438
Enable and configure IPv6...................................................................................................................................... 438
Enable duplicate address detection (DAD) ........................................................................................................439
View IPv6 settings.................................................................................................................................................... 439
Managing groupnets...................................................................................................................................................... 440
Create a groupnet.....................................................................................................................................................440
Modify a groupnet..................................................................................................................................................... 441
Delete a groupnet......................................................................................................................................................442
View groupnets..........................................................................................................................................................442
Managing external network subnets.......................................................................................................................... 442
Create a subnet......................................................................................................................................................... 443
Modify a subnet.........................................................................................................................................................444
Delete a subnet..........................................................................................................................................................444
View subnet settings................................................................................................................................................444
Configure a SmartConnect service IP address..................................................................................................444
Enable or disable VLAN tagging............................................................................................................................ 445
Add or remove an IP address range per subnet................................................................................................ 445
Managing IP address pools........................................................................................................................................... 445
Create an IP address pool....................................................................................................................................... 445
Modify an IP address pool.......................................................................................................................................446
Delete an IP address pool........................................................................................................................................446
View IP address pool settings................................................................................................................................ 446
Add or remove an IP address range..................................................................................................................... 446
Managing SmartConnect Settings..............................................................................................................................447
Modify a SmartConnect DNS zone.......................................................................................................................447
Specify a SmartConnect service subnet............................................................................................................. 447
Suspend or resume a node..................................................................................................................................... 448
Configure IP address allocation............................................................................................................................. 448
Configure a connection balancing policy.............................................................................................................449
Configure an IP failover policy............................................................................................................................... 450
Configure an IP rebalance policy............................................................................................................................451
Managing network interface members......................................................................................................................452
Add or remove a network interface......................................................................................................................452
Configure link aggregation......................................................................................................................................452
Internal and external networks.................................................................................................................................... 454
Managing node provisioning rules...............................................................................................................................455
Create a node provisioning rule.............................................................................................................................455
Modify a node provisioning rule.............................................................................................................................455
Delete a node provisioning rule..............................................................................................................................456
View node provisioning rule settings....................................................................................................................456
Managing routing options............................................................................................................................................. 456
Enable or disable source-based routing...............................................................................................................456
Add or remove a static route................................................................................................................................. 456
Managing DNS cache settings.....................................................................................................................................457

20 Contents
 Flush the DNS cache................................................................................................................................................457
Modify DNS cache settings.................................................................................................................................... 457
DNS cache settings.................................................................................................................................................. 457
Managing host-based firewalls and DSCP settings................................................................................................458
Enable or disable the DSCP setting......................................................................................................................458
Modify the OneFS firewall service ...................................................................................................................... 459
Create a firewall policy............................................................................................................................................ 459
View a firewall policy................................................................................................................................................ 459
Create a firewall rule................................................................................................................................................ 459
View a firewall rule....................................................................................................................................................459
Modify a firewall rule................................................................................................................................................460
Delete a firewall rule.................................................................................................................................................460
Clone a firewall policy.............................................................................................................................................. 460
Delete a firewall policy............................................................................................................................................. 460
Associate a network subnet or pool to a firewall policy.................................................................................. 460
Reset the global default firewall policies............................................................................................................. 460
Managing TCP ports....................................................................................................................................................... 461
Add or remove TCP ports........................................................................................................................................461

Chapter 32: NFSoRDMA............................................................................................................ 462

RDMA support for NFSoRDMA...................................................................................................................................462
Enable NFSoRDMA.........................................................................................................................................................462
Disable NFSoRDMA........................................................................................................................................................463
View interface details of a node..................................................................................................................................463
View IP address pool details.........................................................................................................................................463
Create an IP address pool with NFSoRDMA capabilities...................................................................................... 463
Modify an existing IP address pool............................................................................................................................. 464

Chapter 33: Smart QoS............................................................................................................. 465

Smart QoS........................................................................................................................................................................ 465
Workload monitoring...................................................................................................................................................... 465
Create a standard dataset............................................................................................................................................465
View datasets.............................................................................................................................................................466
Modify details of dataset........................................................................................................................................ 466
Delete dataset .......................................................................................................................................................... 466
Pin a workload................................................................................................................................................................. 466
View a pinned workload...........................................................................................................................................466
Unpin a workload.......................................................................................................................................................466
Throttle a workload........................................................................................................................................................ 467
Modify a workload throttle..................................................................................................................................... 467
Remove a workload throttle................................................................................................................................... 467
Additional information.................................................................................................................................................... 467

Chapter 34: Antivirus................................................................................................................ 468

Antivirus overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
On-access scanning....................................................................................................................................................... 468
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning.................................................................................................................................... 469
Individual file scanning using ICAP..............................................................................................................................469
WORM files and antivirus............................................................................................................................................. 469

Contents 21
 Antivirus scan reports.................................................................................................................................................... 470
ICAP servers.....................................................................................................................................................................470
CAVA servers....................................................................................................................................................................471
ICAP threat responses....................................................................................................................................................471
CAVA threat responses................................................................................................................................................. 472
Configuring global antivirus settings.......................................................................................................................... 472
Exclude files from antivirus scans......................................................................................................................... 472
Configure on-access scanning settings............................................................................................................... 473
Configure antivirus threat response settings..................................................................................................... 473
Configure antivirus report retention settings.....................................................................................................473
Enable or disable antivirus scanning..................................................................................................................... 473
Managing ICAP servers................................................................................................................................................. 474
Add and connect to an ICAP server..................................................................................................................... 474
Test an ICAP server connection............................................................................................................................474
Modify ICAP connection settings..........................................................................................................................474
Temporarily disconnect from an ICAP server.....................................................................................................475
Reconnect to an ICAP server.................................................................................................................................475
Remove an ICAP server...........................................................................................................................................475
Managing CAVA servers................................................................................................................................................475
Add and connect to a CAVA server......................................................................................................................476
List or view CAVA servers ..................................................................................................................................... 476
Modify CAVA connection settings........................................................................................................................ 476
Disable connection to a CAVA server ................................................................................................................. 476
Delete connection to a CAVA server .................................................................................................................. 476
Add a job to a CAVA server.................................................................................................................................... 476
View an IP pool in a CAVA server..........................................................................................................................477
Create an Active Directory authentication provider for the AvVendor access zone............................... 477
Update the role in the access zone...................................................................................................................... 477
Scan CloudPool files in a CAVA server................................................................................................................ 477
Create an antivirus policy.............................................................................................................................................. 477
Managing ICAP antivirus policies................................................................................................................................ 478
Modify an antivirus policy........................................................................................................................................478
Delete an antivirus policy.........................................................................................................................................478
Enable or disable an antivirus policy..................................................................................................................... 479
View antivirus policies.............................................................................................................................................. 479
Managing antivirus scans.............................................................................................................................................. 479
Scan a file....................................................................................................................................................................479
Manually run an ICAP antivirus policy.................................................................................................................. 479
Stop a running antivirus scan................................................................................................................................. 479
Managing antivirus threats...........................................................................................................................................480
Manually quarantine a file....................................................................................................................................... 480
Rescan a file............................................................................................................................................................... 480
Remove a file from quarantine...............................................................................................................................480
Manually truncate a file........................................................................................................................................... 480
View threats................................................................................................................................................................ 481
Antivirus threat information.................................................................................................................................... 481
Managing antivirus reports............................................................................................................................................481
View antivirus reports...............................................................................................................................................481
View antivirus events................................................................................................................................................481

22 Contents
Chapter 35: File System Explorer.............................................................................................. 483
File System Explorer overview.....................................................................................................................................483
Browse the file system.................................................................................................................................................. 483
Create a directory...........................................................................................................................................................483
Modify file and directory properties........................................................................................................................... 484
View file and directory properties...............................................................................................................................484
File and directory properties........................................................................................................................................ 484

Chapter 36: Multi-Party Authorization...................................................................................... 485

Multi-Party Authorization............................................................................................................................................. 485
Multi-Party Authorization privileged actions......................................................................................................486
Register an Approval Administrator......................................................................................................................487
Enable Multi-Party Authorization.......................................................................................................................... 487
Add a member to the ApprovalAdmin role.......................................................................................................... 487
View a pending request........................................................................................................................................... 488
Approve a pending request.....................................................................................................................................488
Reject a pending request........................................................................................................................................ 488
Cancel a pending request........................................................................................................................................488

Contents 23
 1
Introduction to this guide
Topics:
• About this guide
• PowerScale NAS overview
• Where to get help

About this guide

This guide describes how the PowerScale OneFS web administration interface provides access to cluster configuration,
management, and monitoring functionality. For information about APEX File Storage Services, see the Dell Technologies APEX
File Storage Services Administration Guide.

PowerScale NAS overview

The PowerScale NAS storage platform combines modular compute, network, and storage with unified software to harness
unstructured data. The OneFS operating system powers the platform to deliver a scalable pool of storage with a global
namespace.
The unified software platform supports centralized administration through PowerScale OneFS. OneFS administrators manage:
● A cluster that runs a distributed file system
● Scale-out nodes that add capacity and performance
● Storage options that manage files and tiering
● Flexible data protection and high availability
● Software modules that control costs and optimize resources.
As a File Services storage administrator or application owner, you can perform self-service cluster data management tasks such
as:
● Managing folders and the file hierarchy structure
● Monitoring SMB shares, NFS exports, and HDFS access
● Managing storage pools policies
● Monitoring quotas
● Monitoring snapshots
● Viewing reports
● Managing users
See the PowerScale OneFS Administration Guides for details.

Where to get help

The Dell Technologies Support site contains important information about products and services including drivers, installation
packages, product documentation, knowledge base articles, and advisories.
A valid support contract and account might be required to access all the available information about a specific Dell Technologies
product or service.

24 Introduction to this guide

Additional options for getting help
This section contains resources for getting answers to questions about PowerScale products.

Dell Technologies Support ● Contact Technical Support

Telephone support ● United States: 1-800-SVC-4EMC (1-800-782-4362)
● Canada: 1-800-543-4782
● Worldwide: 1-312-725-5401
● Local phone numbers for a specific country or region are available at Contact
Technical Support.
PowerScale OneFS Documentation ● PowerScale OneFS Info Hubs
Info Hubs
Dell Knowledge Base (KB) articles KB articles are available on the Dell Technologies support site.

Introduction to this guide 25

 2
PowerScale scale-out NAS
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• OneFS storage architecture
• Node components
• Internal and external networks
• PowerScale cluster
• The OneFS operating system
• Structure of the file system
• Data protection overview
• Data compression
• Software modules

OneFS storage architecture

PowerScale takes a scale-out approach to storage by creating a cluster of nodes that runs a distributed file system. OneFS
combines the three layers of storage architecture—file system, volume manager, and data protection—into a scale-out NAS
cluster.
Each node adds resources to the cluster. Because each node contains globally coherent RAM, as a cluster becomes larger,
it becomes faster. Meanwhile, the file system expands dynamically and redistributes content, which eliminates the work of
partitioning disks and creating volumes.
Nodes work as peers to spread data across the cluster. Striping—the process of segmenting and distributing data—protects
data. Striping also enables users connecting to any node to take advantage of the performance of the entire cluster.
OneFS uses distributed software to scale data across commodity hardware. Primary devices do not control the cluster, and
secondary devices do not invoke dependencies. Each node helps to control data requests, boost performance, and expand
cluster capacity.

Node components
As a rack-mountable appliance, a PowerScale storage node includes the following components in a 1U, 2U, or 4U rack-mountable
chassis with an LCD front panel: CPUs, RAM, NVRAM or M.2 for journal, network adapters and interfaces, disk controllers,
and storage media. PowerScale cluster is made up of three or more nodes, up to 252. The 4U chassis, and four nodes per 4U
chassis, applies to Generation 6 and PowerScale Archive and Hybrid node types. There are four nodes in one 4U chassis in
Generation 6; therefore, a quarter chassis makes up one node.
When you add a node to a supported PowerScale cluster, you increase the aggregate disk, cache, CPU, RAM, and network
capacity. OneFS groups RAM into a single coherent cache so that a data request on a node benefits from data that is cached
anywhere. NVRAM is grouped to write data with high throughput and to protect write operations from power failures. As the
cluster expands, spindles and CPU combine to increase throughput, capacity, and input-output operations per second (IOPS).
The minimum cluster for Generation 6 and PowerScale Archive and Hybrid are four nodes.
The PowerScale F200, F210, F600, and F710 nodes are 1U models that require a minimum cluster size of three nodes.
Generation 6, PowerScale Archive and Hybrid, and PowerScale F210 and F710 with the introduction of the Software Defined
Persistent Memory (SDPM) and the use of Vault Optimized Storage Solution (VOSS) do not use NVRAM. Instead, journals are
stored in RAM and M.2 flash is used for a backup if there is a node failure. PowerScale F900 nodes are 2U models that require a
minimum cluster size of three nodes. Clusters can be expanded to a maximum of 252 nodes in single node increments.
There are several types of nodes, all of which can be added to a cluster to balance capacity and performance with throughput or
IOPS:

26 PowerScale scale-out NAS

Table 1. Storage Node Use Cases
Node Use Case
PowerScale F710 (The F710 is supported with OneFS [Link] All-flash solution, software inline data compression, and data
and later releases only) deduplication.
PowerScale F210 (The F210 is supported with OneFS [Link] All-flash solution, software inline data compression, and data
and later releases only) deduplication.
PowerScale F200 (The F200 is supported with OneFS [Link] All-flash solution, software inline data compression, and data
and later releases only) deduplication.
PowerScale F600 (The F600 is supported with OneFS [Link] All-flash solution, software inline data compression, and data
and later releases only) deduplication.
Isilon F800 and F810 (The F810 is supported with OneFS All-flash solution. F800 does not support software inline data
[Link] and later releases only) compression or data deduplication.

PowerScale F900, supported with OneFS [Link] and later All-flash solution, fast data access using direct-attached
releases only. NVMe (Non-Volatile Memory Express) SSDs with integrated
parallelism.
Software inline data compression and data deduplication on
the F900.

Isilon Hardware H-Series ● H600, performance spinning solution

● H500, performance capacity
● H400, capacity performance
● H5600, large capacity in a performance node, data
compression: requires PowerScale 9.0.0 and later releases
for in-line compression and in-line deduplication support)
PowerScale Hardware H-series, supported with OneFS [Link] ● H700, performance solution, support for inline software
and later releases only. data compression and data deduplication
● H7000, performance solution, support for inline software
data compression and data deduplication
Isilon Hardware A-Series ● A200, active archive
● A2000, deep archive
PowerScale Hardware A-Series, supported with OneFS [Link] ● A300, active archive
and later releases only ● A3000, deep archive
S-Series IOPS-intensive applications
X-Series High-concurrency and throughput-driven workflows
NL-Series Near-primary accessibility, with near-tape value
HD-Series Maximum capacity

The following Dell Technologies PowerScale nodes improve performance:

Table 2. Accelerator Node Functions

Accelerator Node Function
A-Series Performance Accelerator Independent scaling for high performance
A-Series Backup Accelerator High-speed and scalable backup-and-restore solution for tape
drives over Fibre Channel connections
B100 Backup Accelerator High-speed and scalable backup-and-restore solution for tape
drives over Fibre Channel connections
P100 Performance Accelerator Independent scaling for high performance

PowerScale scale-out NAS 27

Internal and external networks
A cluster includes two networks: an internal network to exchange data between nodes and an external network to handle client
connections.
Nodes exchange data through the internal network with a proprietary, unicast protocol over InfiniBand (IB) or Ethernet,
depending on the node model. Each node includes redundant InfiniBand or Ethernet ports for a second internal network in case
the first port fails. Ethernet is the only supported external network.

Supported network configurations are as follows:

Table 3. Network Connectivity

Generation/Node Type External Network Configurations Internal Network Configurations
Generation 5
X210 1 GigE, 10 GigE IB

Generation 6
A200 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

A2000 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

F800 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

F810 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE

H400 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

H500 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

H5600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

H600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

PowerScale Archive
A300 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, or IB

A3000 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Hybrid
H700 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

H7000 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Nodes
B100 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F200 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F210 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or

10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE
IB

F600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F710 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or

40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or IB
IB

F900 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

28 PowerScale scale-out NAS

Table 3. Network Connectivity (continued)
Generation/Node Type External Network Configurations Internal Network Configurations
F910 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or
40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or IB
IB

P100 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Archive, Hybrid, and PowerScale Flash nodes support InfiniBand and Ethernet for the internal network. You can mix
Generation 5, PowerScale, and PowerScale F200 and F600 nodes in the same cluster.
Clients reach the cluster using Ethernet or InfiniBand on the frontend network. Since every node includes Ethernet ports, the
cluster bandwidth scales with performance and capacity as nodes are added.

NOTE: InfiniBand for the frontend network is only supported on F710 and F910 node types.

CAUTION: Only Isilon or PowerScale nodes should be connected to the internal network, depending on the node
model. Information that is exchanged on the backend network is not encrypted. Connecting anything other than
Isilon or PowerScale nodes to the internal network creates a security risk.

PowerScale cluster
OneFS and APEX File Storage Services administrators perform cluster management tasks.
A PowerScale cluster consists of three or more hardware nodes, up to 252. Each node runs the PowerScale OneFS operating
system, the distributed file-system software that unites the nodes into a cluster. The storage capacity of a cluster ranges from a
minimum of 11 TB raw with three PowerScale F200 nodes to approximately 181 PB with F910 nodes using 30 TB NVMe drives.

Cluster administration
OneFS centralizes cluster management through a web administration interface and a command-line interface. Both interfaces
provide methods to activate licenses, check the status of nodes, configure the cluster, upgrade the system, generate alerts,
view client connections, track performance, and change various settings.
In addition, OneFS simplifies administration by automating maintenance with a Job Engine. OneFS and APEX File Storage
Services administrators can schedule jobs that scan for viruses, inspect disks for errors, reclaim disk space, and check the
integrity of the file system. The engine manages the jobs to minimize impact on the performance of the cluster.
OneFS and APEX File Storage Services administrators can monitor hardware components, CPU usage, switches, and network
interfaces remotely using SNMP versions 2c and 3 and InsightIQ. Dell Technologies PowerScale supplies management
information bases (MIBs) and traps for the OneFS operating system.
OneFS also includes an application programming interface (API) that is divided into two functional areas: One area enables
cluster configuration, management, and monitoring functionality, and the other area enables operations on files and directories
on the cluster. You can send requests to the OneFS API through a Representational State Transfer (REST) interface, which
is accessed through resource URIs and standard HTTP methods. The API integrates with OneFS role-based access control
(RBAC) to increase security. See the PowerScale API Reference.

Quorum
A PowerScale cluster must have a quorum to work correctly. A quorum prevents data conflicts—for example, conflicting
versions of the same file—in case two groups of nodes become unsynchronized. If a cluster loses its quorum for read and write
requests, you cannot access the OneFS file system.
For a quorum, more than half the nodes must be available over the internal network. A seven-node cluster, for example, requires
a four-node quorum. A 10-node cluster requires a five-node quorum. If a node is unreachable over the internal network, OneFS
separates the node from the cluster, an action referred to as splitting. After a cluster is split, cluster operations continue as long
as enough nodes remain connected to have a quorum.
In a split cluster, the nodes that remain in the cluster are referred to as the majority group. Nodes that are split from the cluster
are referred to as the minority group.

PowerScale scale-out NAS 29

When split nodes can reconnect with the cluster and resynchronize with the other nodes, the nodes rejoin the cluster's majority
group, an action referred to as merging.
A OneFS cluster contains two quorum properties:
● read quorum ([Link].has_quorum)
● write quorum ([Link].has_super_block_quorum)
By connecting to a node with SSH and running the sysctl command-line tool as root, you can view the status of both types
of quorum. Here is an example for a cluster that has a quorum for both read and write operations, as the command output
indicates with a 1, for true:

sysctl [Link].has_quorum
[Link].has_quorum: 1
sysctl [Link].has_super_block_quorum
[Link].has_super_block_quorum: 1

The degraded states of nodes—such as smartfail, read-only, offline—effect quorum in different ways. A node in a smartfail or
read-only state affects only write quorum. A node in an offline state, however, affects both read and write quorum. In a cluster,
the combination of nodes in different degraded states determines whether read requests, write requests, or both work.
A cluster can lose write quorum but keep read quorum. Consider a four-node cluster in which nodes 1 and 2 are working
normally. Node 3 is in a read-only state, and node 4 is in a smartfail state. In such a case, read requests to the cluster succeed.
Write requests, however, receive an input-output error because the states of nodes 3 and 4 break the write quorum.
A cluster can also lose both its read and write quorum. If nodes 3 and 4 in a four-node cluster are in an offline state, both write
requests and read requests receive an input-output error, and you cannot access the file system. When OneFS can reconnect
with the nodes, OneFS merges them back into the cluster. Unlike a RAID system, a PowerScale node can rejoin the cluster
without being rebuilt and reconfigured.

Splitting and merging

Splitting and merging optimize the use of nodes without your intervention.
OneFS monitors every node in a cluster. If a node is unreachable over the internal network, OneFS separates the node from
the cluster, an action referred to as splitting. When the cluster can reconnect to the node, OneFS adds the node back into the
cluster, an action referred to as merging.
When a node is split from a cluster, it will continue to capture event information locally. You can connect to a split node
with SSH and run the isi event events list command to view the local event log for the node. The local event log
can help you troubleshoot the connection issue that resulted in the split. When the split node rejoins the cluster, local events
gathered during the split are deleted. You can still view events generated by a split node in the node's event log file located
at /var/log/isi_celog_events.log.
If a cluster splits during a write operation, OneFS might need to reallocate blocks for the file on the side with the quorum, which
leads allocated blocks on the side without a quorum to become orphans. When the split nodes reconnect with the cluster, the
OneFS Collect system job reclaims the orphaned blocks.
Meanwhile, as nodes split and merge with the cluster, the OneFS AutoBalance job redistributes data evenly among the nodes in
the cluster, optimizing protection and conserving space.

Node pools
Node pools segment nodes and files into logical divisions to simplify the management and storage of data.
A tier consists of one or more node pools. Node pools group equivalent nodes to protect data and ensure reliability. Tiers
combine node pools to optimize storage by need, such as a frequently used high-speed tier or a rarely accessed archive.
The SmartPools module groups nodes and files into pools. If you do not activate a SmartPools license, the module provisions
node pools and creates one file pool. If you activate the SmartPools license, you receive more features. You can, for example,
create multiple file pools and govern them with policies. The policies move files, directories, and file pools among node pools or
tiers. You can also define how OneFS handles write operations when a node pool or tier is full. SmartPools reserves a virtual hot
spare to reprotect data if a drive fails regardless of whether the SmartPools license is activated.

30 PowerScale scale-out NAS

The OneFS operating system
A distributed operating system based on FreeBSD, OneFS presents a PowerScale cluster's file system with a central point of
administration.
The OneFS operating system does the following:
● Supports common data-access protocols, such as SMB and NFS
● Connects to multiple identity management systems, such as Active Directory and LDAP
● Authenticates users and groups
● Controls access to directories and files

Mixed data-access protocol environments

With the OneFS operating system, you can access data with multiple file-sharing and transfer protocols. As a result, Microsoft
Windows, UNIX, Linux, and macOS X clients can share the same directories and files.
NOTE: On new installations of OneFS [Link] and later, all protocols are disabled by default. To enable the protocols that
you plan to use, run the following CLI command:

isi services <protocol> enable

Where <protocol> is one of smb, nfs, hdfs, ftp, http, https, or s3.

OneFS supports the following protocols:

SMB The Server Message Block (SMB) protocol enables Windows users to access the cluster. OneFS
supports the following SMB protocol versions: 1, 2.0, 2.1, 3.0, 3.0.2, and 3.1.1. SMB MultiChannel is
supported for SMB 2.0 and later. SMB Continuous Availability is supported for SMB 3.0 and later.
Client Oplocks (Opportunistic Locks) and large (1 MB) MTU sizes are supported in 2.1 and later.
NFS The Network File System (NFS) protocol enables UNIX, Linux, and Mac OS X systems to remotely
mount any subdirectory, including subdirectories created by Windows users. OneFS supports NFS v3,
v4, and v4.1. NFS over RDMA is supported with NFS v3 and NFS v4.1.
S3 The S3-on-OneFS technology enables using the Amazon Web Services Simple Storage Service (AWS
S3) protocol with OneFS. S3 support on OneFS enables storing data in the form of objects on top of
the OneFS file system storage.
HDFS The Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS) protocol enables a cluster to work with Apache Hadoop,
a framework for data-intensive distributed applications. OneFS supports Ranger ACL. OneFS [Link]
and later adds support for HDFS ACL. HDFS integration requires that you activate a separate license.
FTP FTP allows systems with an FTP client to connect to the cluster and exchange files.
HTTP and HTTPS HTTP and its secure variant, HTTPS, give systems browser-based access to resources. OneFS
includes limited support for WebDAV.

Identity management and access control

OneFS works with multiple identity management systems to authenticate users and control access to files. OneFS also features
access zones that allow users from different directory services to access different resources. Meanwhile, role-based access
control (RBAC) segments administrative access by role.
OneFS authenticates users with the following identity management systems:
● Microsoft Active Directory (AD)
● Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
● Network Information Service (NIS)
● Local users and local groups
● A file provider for accounts in /etc/[Link] and /etc/group files
Use the file provider to add an authoritative third-party source of user and group information.

PowerScale scale-out NAS 31

You can manage users with different identity management systems; OneFS maps the accounts so that Windows and UNIX
identities can co-exist. A Windows user account managed in Active Directory, for example, is mapped to a corresponding UNIX
account in NIS or LDAP.
To control access, a PowerScale cluster works with both the access control lists (ACLs) of Windows systems and the POSIX
mode bits of UNIX systems. When OneFS must transform file permissions from ACLs to mode bits or from mode bits to ACLs,
OneFS merges the permissions to maintain consistent security settings.
OneFS presents protocol-specific views of permissions so that NFS exports display mode bits and SMB shares show ACLs. You
can, however, manage not only mode bits but also ACLs with standard UNIX tools, such as the chmod and chown commands.
ACL policies also enable you to configure how OneFS manages permissions for networks that mix Windows and UNIX systems.

Access zones OneFS includes an access zones feature. Access zones allow users from different authentication
providers, such as two untrusted Active Directory domains, to access different OneFS resources
based on an incoming IP address on the cluster. An access zone can contain multiple authentication
providers and SMB namespaces.
RBAC for OneFS includes role-based access control for administration. In place of a root or administrator
administration account, RBAC lets you manage administrative access by role. A role limits privileges to an area
of administration. For example, you can create separate administrator roles for security, auditing,
storage, and backup.

Structure of the file system

OneFS presents all the nodes in a cluster as a global namespace.
In the file system, directories are inode number links. An inode contains file metadata and an inode number, which identifies
location of a file. OneFS dynamically allocates inodes. Inodes are limited by the amount of free space on the cluster.
To distribute data among nodes, OneFS sends messages with a globally routable block address through the internal network of a
cluster. The block address identifies the node and the drive storing the block of data.
NOTE: The design of your data storage structure should be planned carefully. A well-designed directory optimizes cluster
performance and cluster administration.

Data layout
OneFS evenly distributes data among a cluster's nodes with layout algorithms that maximize storage efficiency and
performance.
OneFS breaks data down into smaller sections that are called blocks, and then the system places the blocks in a stripe unit. By
referencing either file data or erasure codes, a stripe unit helps safeguard a file from a hardware failure. The maximum size of
a stripe unit is 128 KB. Files larger than 128 KB consist of multiple stripe units. After OneFS divides the data into stripe units,
OneFS allocates, or stripes, the stripe units across nodes in the cluster.
When a client connects to a node, the client's read and write operations take place on multiple nodes. For example, when a
client connects to a node and requests a file, the node retrieves the data from multiple nodes and reassembles the file. You can
optimize how OneFS lays out data to match your dominant access pattern—concurrent, streaming, or random.

Striping
In a process known as striping, OneFS segments files into units of data and then distributes the units across nodes in a cluster.
Striping protects your data and improves cluster performance.
To distribute a file, OneFS reduces it to blocks of data, arranges the blocks into stripe units, and then allocates the stripe units
to nodes over the internal network.
At the same time, OneFS distributes erasure codes that protect the file. The erasure codes encode the file's data in a
distributed set of symbols, adding space-efficient redundancy. With only a part of the symbol set, OneFS can recover the
original file data.
Taken together, the data and its redundancy form a protection group for a region of file data. OneFS places the protection
groups on different drives on different nodes—creating data stripes.

32 PowerScale scale-out NAS

Because OneFS stripes data across nodes that work together as peers, a user connecting to any node can take advantage of
the entire cluster's performance.
By default, OneFS optimizes striping for concurrent access. If your dominant access pattern is streaming—that is, lower
concurrency, higher single-stream workloads, such as with video—you can change how OneFS lays out data to increase
sequential-read performance. To better handle streaming access, OneFS stripes data across more drives. Streaming is most
effective on clusters or subpools serving large files.

Writing files
On a node, the input-output operations of the OneFS software stack split into two functional layers: A top layer, or initiator, and
a bottom layer, or participant. In read and write operations, the initiator and the participant play different roles.
When a client writes a file to a node, the initiator on the node manages the layout of the file on the cluster. First, the initiator
divides the file into blocks of 8 KB each. Second, the initiator places the blocks in one or more stripe units. At 128 KB, a stripe
unit consists of 16 blocks. Third, the initiator spreads the stripe units across the cluster until they span a width of the cluster,
creating a stripe. The width of the stripe depends on the number of nodes and the protection setting.
After dividing a file into stripe units, the initiator writes the data first to non-volatile random-access memory (NVRAM) and then
to disk. NVRAM retains the information when the power is off.
During the write transaction, NVRAM guards against failed nodes with journaling. If a node fails mid-transaction, the transaction
restarts without the failed node. When the node returns, it replays the journal from NVRAM to finish the transaction. The node
also runs the AutoBalance job to check the file's on-disk striping. Meanwhile, uncommitted writes waiting in the cache are
protected with mirroring. As a result, OneFS eliminates multiple points of failure.

Reading files
In a read operation, a node acts as a manager to gather data from the other nodes and present it to the requesting client.
Because a PowerScale cluster's coherent cache spans all the nodes, OneFS can store different data in each node's RAM. Hybrid
and Archive nodes using the internal network can retrieve file data from another node's cache faster than from its own local
disk. If a read operation requests data that is cached on any node, OneFS pulls the cached data to serve it quickly.
For files with an access pattern of concurrent or streaming, OneFS pre-fetches in-demand data into a managing node's local
cache to further improve sequential-read performance.

Metadata layout
OneFS protects metadata by spreading it across nodes and drives.
Metadata—which includes information about where a file is stored, how it is protected, and who can access it—is stored in
inodes and protected with locks in a B+ tree, a standard structure for organizing data blocks in a file system to provide instant
lookups. OneFS replicates file metadata across the cluster so that there is no single point of failure.
Working together as peers, all the nodes help manage metadata access and locking. If a node detects an error in metadata, the
node looks up the metadata in an alternate location and then corrects the error.

Locks and concurrency

OneFS includes a distributed lock manager that orchestrates locks on data across all the nodes in a cluster.
The lock manager grants locks for the file system, byte ranges, and protocols, including SMB share-mode locks and NFS
advisory locks. OneFS also supports SMB opportunistic locks.
Because OneFS distributes the lock manager across all the nodes, any node can act as a lock coordinator. When a thread from
a node requests a lock, the lock manager's hashing algorithm typically assigns the coordinator role to a different node. The
coordinator allocates a shared lock or an exclusive lock, depending on the type of request. A shared lock allows users to share
a file simultaneously, typically for read operations. An exclusive lock allows only one user to access a file, typically for write
operations.

PowerScale scale-out NAS 33

Data protection overview
A PowerScale cluster is designed to serve data even when components fail. By default, OneFS protects data with erasure
codes, enabling you to retrieve files when a node or disk fails. As an alternative to erasure codes, you can protect data with two
to eight mirrors.
When you create a cluster with five or more nodes, erasure codes deliver up to 80 percent efficiency. On larger clusters, erasure
codes provide up to four levels of redundancy.
OneFS includes the following features to help protect the integrity, availability, and confidentiality of data:

Table 4. Data Protection Features

Feature Description
Anti-virus OneFS can send files to servers running the Internet Content
Adaptation Protocol (ICAP) or Common AntiVirus Agent
(CAVA) to scan for viruses and other threats.
NDMP backup and restore OneFS can back up data to tape and other devices through
the Network Data Management Protocol. Although OneFS
supports both three-way and two-way backup, two-way
backup requires a PowerScale Backup Accelerator Node.

The following software modules help protect data, but you must activate a separate license to use them:

Table 5. Licensed Software Features

Licensed Feature Description
SyncIQ SyncIQ replicates data on another PowerScale cluster. If
a cluster becomes unusable, you can fail over to another
PowerScale cluster .
SnapshotIQ You can protect data with a snapshot—a logical copy of data
that is stored on a cluster.
SmartLock The SmartLock tool prevents users from modifying and
deleting files. You can commit files to a write-once, read-many
state. SmartLock can help you comply with Securities and
Exchange Commission Rule 17a-4.

N+M data protection

OneFS uses data redundancy across the entire cluster to prevent data loss resulting from drive or node failures. Protection is
built into the file system structure and can be applied down to the level of individual files.
Protection in OneFS is modeled on the Reed-Solomon algorithm, which uses forward error correction (FEC). Using FEC, OneFS
allocates data in 128KB chunks. For each N data chunk, OneFS writes M protection, or parity, chunks. Each N+M chunk,
referred to as a protection group, is written on an independent disk in an independent node. This process is referred to as data
striping. By striping data across the entire cluster, OneFS is able to recover files in cases where drives or nodes fail.
In OneFS, the concepts of protection policy and protection level are different. The protection policy is the protection setting
that you specify for storage pools on your cluster. The protection level is the actual protection that OneFS achieves for data,
based on the protection policy and the actual number of writable nodes.
For example, if you have a three-node cluster, and you specify a protection policy of [+2d:1n], OneFS is able to tolerate the
failure of two drives or one node without data loss. However, on that same three-node cluster, if you specify a protection
policy of [+4d:2n], OneFS cannot achieve a protection level that would allow for four drive failures or two node failures. This is
because N+M must be less than or equal to the number of nodes in the cluster.
By default, OneFS calculates and sets a recommended protection policy based on your cluster configuration. The recommended
protection policy achieves the optimal balance between data integrity and storage efficiency.
You can set a protection policy that is higher than the cluster can support. In a four-node cluster, for example, you can set the
protection policy at [5x]. However, OneFS would protect the data at 4x until you add a fifth node to the cluster, after which
OneFS would automatically re-protect the data at 5x.

34 PowerScale scale-out NAS

Data mirroring
You can protect on-disk data with mirroring, which copies data to multiple drives across different nodes in the cluster. OneFS
supports two to eight mirrors. You can use mirroring instead of erasure codes, or you can combine erasure codes with mirroring.
Mirroring, however, consumes more space than erasure codes. Mirroring data three times, for example, duplicates the data
three times, which requires more space than erasure codes. As a result, mirroring suits transactions that require high
performance.
You can also mix erasure codes with mirroring. During a write operation, OneFS divides data into redundant protection groups.
For files protected by erasure codes, a protection group consists of data blocks and their erasure codes. For mirrored files, a
protection group contains all the mirrors of a set of blocks. OneFS can switch the type of protection group as it writes a file to
disk. By changing the protection group dynamically, OneFS can continue writing data despite a node failure that prevents the
cluster from applying erasure codes. After the node is restored, OneFS automatically converts the mirrored protection groups to
erasure codes.

The file system journal

A journal, which records file-system changes in persistent memory, recovers the file-system after failures, such as a power loss.
When a node restarts, the journal replays file transactions to restore the file system.

Virtual hot spare (VHS)

When a drive fails, OneFS uses space that is logically reserved from the total free space in the cluster instead of a dedicated hot
spare drive. The reserved space is known as a virtual hot spare.
In contrast to a spare drive, a virtual hot spare automatically resolves drive failures and allows the cluster to continue to write
data. If a drive fails, the OneFS FlexProtect job automatically recreates the lost data writing it to free space on the cluster. You
can reserve the equivalent of up to four drives or 20% of the overall capacity of the cluster for VHS use.

Balancing protection with storage space

You can set protection levels to balance protection requirements with storage space.
Higher protection levels typically consume more space than lower levels because they allow the cluster to handle larger failures.
The overhead for the erasure codes depends on the protection level, the file size, and the number of nodes in the cluster. Since
OneFS stripes both data and erasure codes across nodes, the overhead declines as you add nodes.

Data compression
OneFS supports inline data compression and decompression.
Compression and decompression are performed in parallel as clients read and write data to the cluster. This distributed model
allows compression to scale linearly across the node pool as supported nodes are added to a cluster.
You can enable inline data compression on the Dell PowerScale F900 and F600-NVMe and F200 SSD nodes, PowerScale
H700/7000 and A300/3000 node, and the PowerScale F810 and H5600 platforms.
The following table lists the nodes and OneFS release combinations that support inline data compression.

Table 6. Nodes and Release Combinations

Nodes Required OneFS releases
F810 8.1.3 or 8.2.1 and later
F900 nodes [Link]. and later
H5600 nodes 8.2.0 or 8.2.2 and later
H700, H7000 nodes [Link] and later
F200, F600 nodes [Link] and later

PowerScale scale-out NAS 35

Table 6. Nodes and Release Combinations (continued)
Nodes Required OneFS releases
A300, A3000 nodes [Link] and later
P100 and B100 accelerator nodes [Link] and later
F210, F710, F910 nodes [Link] and later
A310, A3100, H710, H7100, PA110 [Link] and later

Mixed Clusters
In a mixed cluster environment, data is stored in a compressed form on F810, H5600, F200, and F600 node pools. Data that is
written or tiered to storage pools of other node types is uncompressed when it moves between pools.

Software modules
Dell Technologies PowerScale software modules offer advanced features such as SmartLock for data protection, HDFS for
big data analysis, and SyncIQ for failover and failback between clusters. Additional modules include Security hardening,
SnapshotIQ, SmartDedupe, SmartPools, CloudPools, SmartConnect Advanced, InsightIQ, SmartQuotas, and S3 for efficient
data management. These modules provide a range of capabilities to optimize storage resources, forecast capacity, and ensure
compliance with regulations.

SmartLock SmartLock protects critical data from malicious, accidental, or premature alteration or deletion to help
you comply with SEC 17a-4 regulations. You can automatically commit data to a tamper-proof state
and then retain it with a compliance clock.
HDFS OneFS works with the Hadoop Distributed File System protocol to help clients running Apache
Hadoop, a framework for data-intensive distributed applications, analyze big data.
SyncIQ failover and SyncIQ replicates data on another PowerScale cluster and performs failover and failback between
failback clusters. If a cluster becomes unusable, you can fail over to another PowerScale cluster. Failback
replicates the changes that are made while running at the alternate site back to the primary cluster
once it becomes available again.
Security hardening Security hardening is the process of configuring your system to reduce or eliminate as many security
risks as possible. You can apply a hardening policy that secures the configuration of OneFS, according
to policy guidelines.
SnapshotIQ SnapshotIQ protects data with a snapshot—a logical copy of data that is stored on a cluster. A
snapshot can be restored to its top-level directory.
SmartDedupe You can reduce redundancy and storage consumption on a cluster by running SmartDedupe.
Deduplication reduces storage consumption by consolidating duplicate blocks. This activity is
transparent to end users.
SmartPools SmartPools enables you to create multiple file pools governed by file-pool policies. The policies
move files and directories among node pools or tiers. You can also define how OneFS handles write
operations when a node pool or tier is full.
CloudPools Built on the SmartPools policy framework, CloudPools enables you to archive data to cloud storage,
defining the cloud as another tier of storage. CloudPools supports Dell Technologies PowerScale, Dell
Technologies ECS Appliance, Amazon S3, Amazon C2S, Alibaba Cloud, Google Cloud, and Microsoft
Azure as cloud storage providers.
SmartConnect The SmartConnect Advanced license is free and autoactivated for all customers in OneFS [Link]
Advanced and later versions. With SmartConnect Advanced, you can balance policies to evenly distribute CPU
usage, client connections, or throughput. You can also define IP address pools to support multiple
DNS zones in a subnet. SmartConnect also supports IP failover, also known as Dynamic IPs, to
support NFS failover. It is recommended that you define a static pool that encompasses all nodes for
management purposes. Dynamic IP addresses are configured only on nodes with quorum to ensure
client connectivity. Defining a static pool for all nodes avoids administration difficulties for out of
quorum nodes that will not have dynamic IP addresses configured for SSH connections.

36 PowerScale scale-out NAS

InsightIQ The InsightIQ virtual appliance monitors and analyzes the performance of your PowerScale cluster to
help you optimize storage resources and forecast capacity.
SmartQuotas The SmartQuotas module tracks disk usage with reports and enforces storage limits with alerts.
S3 The S3 feature of PowerScale OneFS allows access to file-based data stored on OneFS clusters using
the Amazon S3 protocol. This integration combines the benefits of traditional NAS storage with object
storage, making it possible to manage unstructured data efficiently across different applications.
Also, OneFS S3 includes features like multipart uploads, support for chunked uploads to improve large
data transfer, and compatibility with directory objects to facilitate better data management. It also
supports pre-signed URLs for accessing objects without requiring credentials.

PowerScale scale-out NAS 37

 3
Dell PowerScale for AWS
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Dell PowerScale for AWS introduction

Dell PowerScale for AWS introduction

Dell PowerScale for AWS is a software-defined cloud solution for PowerScale OneFS deployed on AWS infrastructure. This
documentation is intended as a supplement to the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) documentation and the Dell
PowerScale for AWS Deployment Guide.
Amazon Web Services (AWS) administrators and PowerScale storage administrators can use this chapter to get started with
the configuration of OneFS as a virtual machine on AWS. For step-by-step deployment instructions, see the Dell PowerScale for
AWS Deployment Guide.

Prerequisites
In order to deploy Dell PowerScale for AWS, PowerScale OneFS administrators must be familiar with AWS infrastructure.
Familiarity includes creating, scaling, replacing, and terminating the virtual cluster in AWS using the AWS CLI or AWS
Management Console.
Users must be experienced in AWS virtual machine deployment, configuration procedures, and the following:
● Using the AWS Management Console and AWS CLI
● Familiarity with using Terraform to deploy AWS resources.
● Creating AWS services, such as security groups
● Creating subnets

Dell PowerScale for AWS guidelines

For product specifications and limitations, see the PowerScale OneFS Technical Specifications Guide for this product release.
Also see the Dell PowerScale for AWS Deployment Guide for deployment guidelines and configuration details.

Dell PowerScale for AWS supported configurations

Dell PowerScale for AWS includes the following supported configurations:
● IPv4
● HDFS, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, NFS, S3, SCP, SMP, and SFTP protocols
● NDMP three-way backup
● Large file support
● SmartPools
● SmartQoS and Partitioned Performance
● STIG Hardening

Table 7. Dell PowerScale for AWS

Configuration parameter Description
Number of nodes in cluster Minimum 4, maximum 6

38 Dell PowerScale for AWS

Table 7. Dell PowerScale for AWS (continued)
Configuration parameter Description
Supported instance types ● m5dn.8xlarge and up
● m6idn.8xlarge and up
● m5d.24xl*
● i3en.12xl*
● *Allowed after a successful proof of concept (POC)
Instance types per cluster One—all nodes in the cluster must be of the same instance
type
Volume types per cluster One—all EBS drives in the cluster must be of the same EBS
volume type
Supported storage ● gp3 (SSD)
● st1 (HDD)
Volume counts per node ● 5 or 6 on st1 (HDD)
● 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 18, or 20 on gp3 (SSD)
Volumes sizes per cluster One—all EBS drives in the cluster must be of the same raw
capacity
EBS volume sizes ● 4 TiB or 10 TiB (st1)
● 1 TiB–16 TiB (gp3)
Capacity scalability ● 80 TiB–360 TiB on st1 (HDD)
● 20 TiB–1.6 PB on gp3 (SSD)
Default cluster protection level +2n

The following OneFS features are supported:

● IPv4
● HDFS, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SCP, and SFTP protocols
● NDMP-based backup
● Large file support
● SmartPools
● SmartQoS and Partitioned Performance
● STIG Hardening
● SmartLock (Compliance and Enterprise modes)
The virtual cluster has the same user interface as a PowerScale OneFS on-premises cluster and supports the OneFS CLI and
APIs.
To view the complete set of supported configurations for Dell PowerScale for AWS, see the PowerScale OneFS OneFS
Technical Specifications Guide corresponding to this release on the Dell Technologies Services site: Support for PowerScale
OneFS | Documentation | Dell US.

Dell PowerScale for AWS unsupported OneFS features

Dell PowerScale for AWS includes a list of PowerScale OneFS features that are not supported. Use of these unsupported
OneFS features could cause issues with your Dell PowerScale for AWS cluster.
The following PowerScale OneFS features are not supported in Dell PowerScale for AWS:
● Data at Rest Encryption (DARE)
● Dell Technologies connectivity services - gateway connections (direct connections are supported)
● Instant Secure Erase (ISE)
● L3 cache
● LAGG
● Multiple Storage Pools
● RMDA and RoCE requirements that require specialized networking endpoints
● Secure Boot

Dell PowerScale for AWS 39

● Secure Remote Services (SRS)
● Smartlock Compliance Mode

Dell PowerScale for AWS infrastructure and deployment

Dell PowerScale for AWS allows you to create and deploy PowerScale OneFS clusters through the resources available with
Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) on the Amazon Web Services (AWS) Cloud infrastructure.
See the Dell PowerScale for AWS Deployment Guide for infrastructure and deployment details.

40 Dell PowerScale for AWS

 4
Dell PowerScale for Azure
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Dell PowerScale for Azure introduction
• Dell PowerScale for Azure features
• Dell PowerScale for Azure supported configuration parameters
• Dell PowerScale for Azure configuration options

Dell PowerScale for Azure introduction

Dell PowerScale for Azure is a software-defined cloud solution for PowerScale OneFS deployed on Microsoft Azure
infrastructure.
Dell PowerScale for Azure brings the Dell Technologies PowerScale OneFS distributed file system into the public cloud to
provide users with the same management experience as an on-premises PowerScale cluster. You can run OneFS on multiple
Azure virtual machines and instance types.

Prerequisites
The Dell PowerScale for Azure unified software solution supports centralized administration through PowerScale OneFS cluster
administration and Azure administration.
You should be familiar with Azure Virtual Machine (VM) deployment, configuration procedures and the following:
● Using the Azure portal and Azure CLI
● Creating, scaling, replacing, and terminating Azure virtual machines using the Azure CLI or Azure portal
● Managing Azure services, such as network security groups (NSG) and subnets

Planning your Dell PowerScale for Azure deployment

Cluster performance is generally correlated to your cluster size. The more cluster nodes (up to a maximum of 18), the higher the
throughput and IOPS. Therefore, before creating a cluster in Azure, consider the capacity of storage and the number of nodes
that you need for your business workflow.
Administrators deploy PowerScale OneFS clusters through the resources available on the Microsoft Azure Cloud infrastructure.
Adding nodes and replacing failed nodes or drives requires working with both PowerScale OneFS and Microsoft Azure.
This guide is intended as a supplement to the Virtual machines in Azure Microsoft documentation and the Dell PowerScale for
Azure Deployment Guide on the following InfoHub: Cloud | Dell Technologies InfoHub.

Dell PowerScale for Azure features

The Dell PowerScale for Azure virtual cluster has the same user interface as a PowerScale OneFS on-premises cluster and
supports the OneFS CLI and APIs as well as the following features:
● IPv4 only or mixed mode IPv4 and IPv6 networking
● HDFS, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, S3, SCP, SMB, NFS, and SFTP protocols
● NDMP-based backup
● Large file support
● SmartPools
● SmartQoS and Partitioned Performance

Dell PowerScale for Azure 41

● STIG Hardening

Unsupported features
The following features are not supported:
● IPv6 only networking
● Link aggregation
● Multiple Storage Pools
● RDMA over Converted Ethernet (RoCE)
● SmartLock Compliance Mode
● VLAN tagging

Dell PowerScale for Azure supported configuration

parameters
Dell PowerScale for Azure includes the following supported configurations.

Table 8. Dell PowerScale for Azure configuration parameters

Configuration parameter Description
Number of nodes in cluster Minimum 4, maximum 18 (see max scale)
Supported Azure instances ● Edv5 and Edsv5 series Azure Virtual Machines (instances
sizes E32d and above
● Ddv5 and Ddsv5 series Azure Virtual Machines (instances
sizes D32d and above)
Azure managed disk types (used as OneFS disks) ● Premium SSDs (solid state drives)
● Standard SSDs
● Standard HDDs (hard disk drives)
Instance types per cluster One—all nodes in a cluster must be of the same instance type
Disk types per cluster One—all Azure managed disks must be the same type
Disk sizes per cluster One—all Azure managed disks must be the same raw capacity
as shown by Azure
Aggregate raw cluster capacity See individual volume type section
Default cluster protection level +2
Disk counts per node 5, 10, 15, 20 (instances support up to 32)
Geo Availability Globally available

Dell PowerScale for Azure configuration options

You can choose and configure optional Dell PowerScale for Azure VM instance types, Azure managed disk capacity, and the
number of nodes that you need for your business workflow
The following configuration options are available:

Azure VM instance types

General purpose and memory optimized Azure virtual machine (VM) instances types options are as follows:
● Ddsv5-series
● Edsv5-series

42 Dell PowerScale for Azure

Table 9. Azure VM instance type options
Instance type vCPU count Memory (GiB) Max data disks Local instance Network Data storage
storage (TiB) bandwidth throughput
(Gbps) (MBps)
D32ds_v5 32 128 32 1.2 16 865
D48ds_v5 48 192 32 1.8 24 1315
D64ds_v5 64 256 32 2.4 30 1735
D96ds_v5 96 384 32 3.6 35 2600
E32ds_v5 32 256 32 1.2 16 865
E48ds_v5 48 384 32 1.8 24 1315
E64ds_v5 64 512 32 2.4 30 1735
E96ds_v5 96 672 32 3.6 35 2600
E104ids_v5 104 672 64 3.6 100 4000

Azure managed disk types

Table 10. Azure managed disk options
Drive family Description Workflow
Premium SSD locally redundant storage Locally Redundant Premium SSD High performance, low latency, I/O-
(LRS) intensive workloads. Premium SSDs
are for mission-critical production
applications.
Standard SSD locally redundant storage Locally Redundant Standard SSD Consistent performance with lower IOPS
(LRS) levels. Standard SSds are for lightly used
enterprise applications or workloads.
Standard HDD locally redundant storage Locally Redundant Standard HDD Latency tolerant workloads.
(LRS) Development testing and less critical
workloads.

More documentation
This guide is intended as a supplement to the Virtual machines in Azure Microsoft documentation and the Dell PowerScale for
Azure Deployment Guide. Step-by-step deployment instructions for configuration of PowerScale OneFS as a virtual machine in
Azure are on the Cloud | Dell Technologies InfoHub.
To view the complete set of supported configurations for Dell PowerScale for AWS, see the PowerScale OneFS OneFS
Technical Specifications Guide corresponding to this release on the Dell Technologies Services site: Support for PowerScale
OneFS | Documentation | Dell US.

Dell PowerScale for Azure 43

 5
General cluster administration
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• General cluster administration overview
• User interfaces
• Connecting to the cluster
• Licensing
• Certificates
• Cluster identity
• Cluster date and time
• Email settings
• Configuring the cluster join mode
• File system settings
• Security hardening
• Cluster monitoring
• Monitoring cluster hardware
• Events and alerts
• Healthcheck Evaluations
• Cluster maintenance
• Dell Technologies connectivity services
• Secure Remote Services (SRS) Summary

General cluster administration overview

General cluster administration covers several areas such as the following:
● Manage general settings such as cluster name, date and time, and email.
● Monitor the cluster status and performance, including hardware components.
● Configure how to handle events and notifications.
● Perform cluster maintenance such as adding, removing, and restarting nodes.
● Configure security hardening and compliance settings for the cluster.
● Perform Healthcheck evaluations on specific software and hardware components of the cluster.
You can accomplish management tasks using either the web administration or the command-line interface.

User interfaces
OneFS provides several interfaces for managing PowerScale clusters.

Table 11. User Interfaces

Interface Description Comment
OneFS web administration interface The browser-based OneFS web The OneFS web administration interface
administration interface provides secure uses port 8080 as its default port.
access with OneFS-supported browsers.
Use this interface to view robust
graphical monitoring displays and to
perform cluster-management tasks.

44 General cluster administration

Table 11. User Interfaces (continued)
Interface Description Comment
OneFS command-line interface Run OneFS isi commands in the The OneFS command-line interface
command-line interface to configure, provides an extended standard UNIX
monitor, and manage the cluster. Access command set for managing the cluster.
to the command-line interface is through
a secure shell (SSH) connection to any
node in the cluster.
OneFS API The OneFS application programming You should have a solid understanding
interface (API) is divided into two of HTTP/1.1 and experience writing
functional areas: one area enables HTTP-based client software before
cluster configuration, management, and you implement client-based software
monitoring functionality, and the other through the OneFS API.
area enables operations on files and
directories on the cluster. You can send
requests to the OneFS API through a
Representational State Transfer (REST)
interface, which is accessed through
resource URIs and standard HTTP
methods.
Node front panel Except for accelerator nodes, the front Node status, events, cluster details,
panel of each node contains an LCD capacity, IP and MAC addresses,
screen with five buttons that you can throughput, and drive status are
use to monitor node and cluster details. available through the node front panel.

Connecting to the cluster

PowerScale cluster access is provided through the web administration interface or through SSH. You can use a serial connection
to perform cluster administration tasks through the command-line interface.
You can also access the cluster through the node front panel to accomplish a subset of cluster management tasks. For
information about connecting to the node front panel, see the installation documentation for your node.

Log in to the web administration interface

You can monitor and manage your PowerScale cluster from the browser-based web administration interface.
1. In a browser window, enter the URL for your cluster in the address field. In the following examples, replace
<yourNodeIPaddress> with the first IP address you provided when you configured ext-1.

IPv4 [Link]
IPv6 [Link]

If your security certificates have not been configured, the system displays a message. Resolve any certificate configurations,
then continue to the website.
2. Log in to OneFS by typing your OneFS credentials in the Username and Password fields.
After you log in to the web administration interface, there is a 4-hour login timeout.

Open an SSH connection to a cluster

You can use any SSH client such as OpenSSH or PuTTY to connect to a PowerScale cluster.
You must have valid OneFS credentials to log in to a cluster after the connection is open.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster, using the IP address of the node and port number 22.
2. Log in with your OneFS credentials.
At the OneFS system prompt, you can use isi commands to monitor and manage your cluster.

General cluster administration 45

Licensing
All PowerScale software and hardware must be licensed through Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC).
A license file contains a record of your active software licenses and your cluster hardware. One copy of the license file is stored
in the SLC repository, and another copy of the license file is stored on your cluster. The license file on your cluster and the
license file in the SLC repository must match. The license file contains a record of the following:
● OneFS license
● Optional software module licenses
● Hardware information

Software licenses
Your OneFS license and optional software module licenses are contained in the license file on your cluster. Your license file must
match your license record in the Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC) repository.
Ensure that the license file on your cluster, and your license file in the SLC repository, match your upgraded version of OneFS.
Advanced cluster features are available when you activate licenses for the following OneFS software modules:
● Security hardening
● HDFS
● SmartConnect Advanced is autoenabled and included with OneFS [Link] and later
● SmartDedupe
● SmartLock
● SmartPools
● SmartQuotas
● SnapshotIQ
● SyncIQ
For more information about optional software modules, contact your Dell Technologies sales representative.

Hardware tiers
Your license file contains information about the PowerScale hardware that is installed in your cluster.
Your license file lists nodes by tiers. Nodes are placed into a tier according to their compute performance level, capacity, and
drive type.
NOTE: Your license file contains line items for every node in your cluster. However, Generation 5 hardware is not in the
OneFS licensing model.

License status
The status of a OneFS license indicates whether the license file on your cluster reflects your current version of OneFS. The
status of a OneFS module license indicates whether the functionality that is provided by a module is available on the cluster.
Licenses exist in one of the following states:

Table 12. OneFS License Statuses

Status Description
Unsigned The license has not been updated in Dell Technologies
Software Licensing Central (SLC). You must generate and
submit an activation file to update your license file with your
new version of OneFS.
Inactive The license has not been activated on the cluster. You cannot
access the features that are provided by the corresponding
module.

46 General cluster administration

Table 12. OneFS License Statuses (continued)
Status Description
Evaluation The license has been temporarily activated on the cluster.
You can access the features that are provided by the
corresponding module for 90 days.
Activated The license has been activated on the cluster. You can access
the features that are provided by the corresponding module.
Expired The license has expired on the cluster. After the license
expires, you must generate and submit an activation file to
update your license file.

View license information

You can view information about the current license status for OneFS, hardware, and optional PowerScale software modules.
1. Click Cluster Management > Licensing.
You can review information about licenses, including status and expiration date.
You can find information that is related to OneFS licenses in the OneFS cluster license overview area.
You can find information that is related to optional software modules in the Software licenses overview area.

2. You can view active alerts that are related to your licenses by clicking Alerts about licenses in the upper corner of the
Cluster Management > Licensing page.

Adding and removing licenses

You can allow OneFS to update your license file automatically, or you can update your license file manually.
The automated process to update a license file requires that Dell Technologies connectivity services is connected to Dell
Technologies Support and that the remote support option is enabled.
NOTE: SRS has reached end-of-service-life. It is recommended that new OneFS clusters use Dell Technologies
connectivity services. It is recommended that existing OneFS clusters migrate from SRS to Dell Technologies connectivity
services immediately to avoid service disruption.

The manual process to update a license file requires generating an activation file, submitting the activation file to Dell
Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC), and then uploading an updated license file to your cluster. Your license file
should be updated when you:

● Require the activation of an optional software module.

● Add new hardware.
● Upgrade existing hardware.

Enable OneFS to update your license file automatically

You can enable OneFS to keep your license file updated automatically using Dell Technologies connectivity services.

Dell Technologies connectivity services

To allow OneFS to automatically update your license file using Dell Technologies connectivity services, follow these instructions:
1. Enable Dell Technologies connectivity services.
2. Enable remote support.

NOTE: When you first enable Dell Technologies connectivity services, remote support is enabled by default.

General cluster administration 47

Update a license activation file manually
To update the license file, generate a license activation file and submit it to Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC).
1. Click Cluster Management > Licensing.
2. In the OneFS License Management area, click Open Activation File Wizard.
3. Click the checkboxes next to the software modules to select or de-select the contents of your activation file.
Modules that are pre-selected are included in your license file. You can de-select a module to remove the license.
To undo changes that were made to the list, click Revert changes at the bottom of the page.

4. Click Review Changes.

5. Review the changes that you are planning to make to the activation file.
The Contents of activation file area contains a list of all licenses that are included in the activation file.
This page also lists licenses that you selected to remove from the activation file, and licenses that were selected to add.

6. Click Create file.

7. Review the full contents of the activation file.
The OneFS license and a summary of the hardware tiers are also displayed on this summary page.
8. Click Accept.
9. Click Download activation file.
Save the activation file to the local machine.
10. Click Complete process.
Now that you have a copy of the activation file on your local machine, you can submit the file to Dell Technologies Software
Licensing Central (SLC).

Submit a license activation file to SLC

After you generate an activation file in OneFS, submit the activation file to Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC)
to receive a signed license file for your cluster.
Before you submit your activation file to SLC, you must generate the activation file through OneFS and save the file to your
local machine.
1. From your local, internet-connected system, go to Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC).
2. Log into the system using your Dell Technologies credentials.
3. Click ACTIVATE at the top of the page.
A menu appears with two options: Activate and Activate by File.
4. Click Activate by File
The Upload Activation File page appears.
5. Confirm that your company name is listed next to Company.
If your company name is not displayed, click Select a Company and search with your company name and ID.
6. Click Upload.
7. Locate the activation file on your local machine and click Open.
This is an XML file. The file was originally generated with the name [Link] but you may have saved it with a
different name.
8. Click the Start the Activation Process button.
The Apply License Authorization Code (LAC) page appears.
9. In the Missing Product & Quantities Summary table, confirm that there is a green check in the column on the far right.
If any row is missing a green check in that column, you can search for a different LAC by clicking the Search button and
selecting a different available LAC.
10. Click the Next: Review button.
11. Click the Activate button.
When the signed license file is available, SLC will send it to you as an attachment to an email.
NOTE: Your signed license file may not be available immediately.

48 General cluster administration

 The signed license file is an XML file with a name in the following format:

ISLN_nnn_date.xml

For example, ISLN_15002_13-[Link]

12. Download the signed license file to your local machine, in a directory where you can locate it for the next procedure. For
example, save it in /ifs on your local machine.

Upload the updated license file

After you receive an updated license file from Dell Technologies Software Licensing Central (SLC), upload the updated file to
the cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Licensing.
2. In the Upload and activate a signed license file area, click Browse and select the signed license file.
3. Click Upload and Activate.

Activating trial licenses

You can activate a trial license that allows you to evaluate an optional software module for 90 days.

Activate a trial license

You can activate a trial license to evaluate a OneFS software module for 90 days.
1. Click Cluster Management > Licensing.
2. In the Manage trial versions of software modules area, click Manage Trials.
3. Click the check box next to the software modules you want to evaluate.
4. Click Start Trial.

Certificates
All OneFS API communication, which includes communication through the web administration interface, is over Transport Layer
Security (TLS). You can renew the TLS certificate for the OneFS web administration interface or replace it with a third-party
TLS certificate.
To configure, import, replace, or renew a TLS certificate, you must be logged in as root.

NOTE: OneFS defaults to the best supported version of TLS for each request.

Viewing and Editing TLS Authority Certificates

View and edit the TLS authority certificates that are installed on the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Authority tab.
3. Next to the certificate that you want to view or edit, click the View/Edit button.
4. Make any needed changes and click the Save button.

Importing TLS Authority Certificates

Import a TLS authority certificate onto the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Authority tab.
3. Click the Import authority button.

General cluster administration 49

4. In the Import certificate authority window, browse to the certificate file, select the certificate file, and then click Select.
5. In the Import certificate authority window, enter the Alias name and Description for the authority certificate, and then
click Save.

Replacing TLS Authority Certificates - Overview

The Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificate is used to access the cluster through a browser. The cluster initially contains a
self-signed certificate for this purpose. You can continue to use the existing self-signed certificate, or you can replace it with a
third-party certificate authority (CA)-issued certificate.
If you continue to use the self-signed certificate, you must replace it when it expires, with either:
● A third party (public or private) CA-issued certificate.
● Another self-signed certificate that is generated on the cluster.

Replacing TLS Authority Certificates

Replace a TLS authority certificate on the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Authority tab.
3. Next to the certificate that you want to replace, click the Replace button.
4. Confirm the replacement by clicking the Replace button.
5. In the Replace certificate authority window, browse to the certificate file, select the certificate file, and then click
Select.
6. In the Replace certificate authority window, enter the Alias name and Description for the authority certificate, and then
click Save.

Deleting TLS Authority Certificates

Delete a TLS authority certificate from the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Authority tab.
3. Next to the certificate that you want to delete, click the Delete button.
4. Confirm the deletion by clicking the Delete button.

Viewing and Editing TLS Server Certificates

View and edit the TLS server certificates that are installed on the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Server tab.
3. Next to the certificate that you want to view or edit, click the View/Edit button.
4. Make any needed changes and click the Save button.

Importing TLS Server Certificates

Import a TLS server certificate onto the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Server tab.
3. Click the Import certificate button.
4. In the Import server certificate window, browse to the certificate file, select the certificate file, and then click Select.
5. In the Import server certificate window, enter the Certificate key password, the Alias name, and the Description for
the server certificate, and then click Save.

50 General cluster administration

Configuring TLS Certificate Settings
Configure the TLS certificates settings for the cluster by performing the following steps:
1. In the Access drop-down, click TLS Certificates.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. To enable the certificate monitor, click the Enable certificate monitor button.
4. Select the number of days to use for the Certificate pre expiration threshold.
5. Select the Default HTTPS certificate from the drop-down.
6. Make any needed changes and click the Save button.

TLS certificate data example

TLS certificate renewal or replacement requires you to provide data such as a fully qualified domain name and a contact email
address.
When you renew or replace a TLS certificate, you are asked to provide data in the format that is shown in the following
example:

You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated

into your certificate request.
What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN.
There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank
For some fields there will be a default value,
If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
-----
Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:US
State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]:Washington
Locality Name (eg, city) []:Seattle
Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]:Company
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:System Administration
Common Name (e.g. server FQDN or YOUR name) []:[Link]
Email Address []:support@[Link]

In addition, if you are requesting a third-party CA-issued certificate, you should include additional attributes that are shown in
the following example:

Please enter the following 'extra' attributes

to be sent with your certificate request
A challenge password []:password
An optional company name []:Another Name

Cluster identity
You can specify identity attributes for a PowerScale cluster.

Cluster name The cluster name appears on the login page, and it makes the cluster and its nodes more easily
recognizable on your network. Each node in the cluster is identified by the cluster name plus the node
number. For example, the first node in a cluster that is named Images may be named Images-1.
Cluster description The cluster description appears below the cluster name on the login page. The cluster description is
useful if your environment has multiple clusters.
Login message The login message appears as a separate box on the login page of the OneFS web administration
interface, or as a line of text under the cluster name in the OneFS command-line interface. The
login message can convey cluster information, login instructions, or warnings that a user should know
before logging into the cluster. Set this information in the Cluster Identity page of the OneFS web
administration interface.

General cluster administration 51

Set the cluster name and contact information
You can specify a name, description, login message, and contact information for the PowerScale cluster.
Cluster names must begin with a letter and can contain only numbers, letters, and hyphens. If the cluster is joined to an Active
Directory domain, the cluster name must be 15 characters or fewer.
1. Click Cluster Management > General Settings > Cluster Identity.
2. Optional: In the Cluster Identity area, type a name for the cluster in the Cluster Name field and type a description in the
Cluster Description field.
3. Optional: In the Login Message area, type a title in the Message Title field and a message in the Message Body field.
4. In the Contact Information area, enter the name and location of your company.
5. In the Primary Administrator Information area, enter the name, phone numbers, and email address of the primary OneFS
administrator for the cluster.
6. In the Secondary Administrator Information area, enter the name, phone numbers, and email address of the secondary
OneFS administrator for the cluster.
7. Click Save Changes..
You must add the cluster name to the DNS servers.

Cluster date and time

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) service is configurable manually, so you can ensure that all nodes in a cluster are
synchronized to the same time source.
The NTP method automatically synchronizes cluster date and time settings through an NTP server. Alternatively, you can set
the date and time reported by the cluster by manually configuring the service.
Windows domains provide a mechanism to synchronize members of the domain to a main clock running on the domain
controllers, so OneFS adjusts the cluster time to that of Active Directory with a service. If there are no external NTP servers
that are configured, OneFS uses the Windows domain controller as the NTP time server. When the cluster and domain time that
is become out of sync by more than 4 minutes, OneFS generates an event notification.
NOTE: If the cluster and Active Directory that is become out of sync by more than 5 minutes, authentication does not
work.

Set the cluster date and time

You can set the date, time, and time zone that is used by the PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > General Settings > Date & Time.
The Date and Time page displays a list of each node's IP address and the date and time settings for each node.
2. From the Date and time lists, select the month, date, year, hour, and minute settings.
3. From the Time zone list, select a value.
If the time zone that you want is not in the list, select Advanced from the Time zone list, and then select the time zone
from the Advanced time zone list.

4. Click Submit.

Specify an NTP time server

You can specify one or more Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to synchronize the system time on the PowerScale cluster.
The cluster periodically contacts the NTP servers and sets the date and time using information from the NTP servers.
1. Click Cluster Management > General Settings > NTP.
2. In the NTP Servers area, type the IPv4 or IPv6 address of one or more NTP servers. If you want to use a key file, type the
key numbers in the field next to the server IP address.
Click Add Another NTP Server if you are specifying multiple servers.
3. Optional: If you are using a key file for the NTP server, type the file path for that file in the Path to Key File field.

52 General cluster administration

4. In the Chimer Settings area, specify the number of chimer nodes that contact NTP servers (the default is 3).
5. To exclude a node from chiming, type its logical node number (LNN) in the Nodes Excluded from Chiming field.
6. Click Save Changes.

Email settings
If your network environment requires the use of an SMTP server or if you want to route PowerScale cluster event notifications
with SMTP through a port, you can configure email settings.
Email settings include the SMTP relay address and port number that email is routed through. You can specify an origination
email and subject line for all event notification email messages sent from the cluster.
If your SMTP server is configured to support authentication, you can specify a username and password. You can also specify
whether to apply encryption to the connection.

Configure SMTP email settings

You can send event notifications through an SMTP mail server. You can also enable SMTP authentication if your SMTP server is
configured to support it.
1. Click Cluster Management > General Settings > Email Settings.
2. In the SMTP Settings area, enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address or the fully qualified domain name of the SMTP relay in the
SMTP relay address field.
3. In the SMTP relay port field, type the port number.
The default port number is 465.
4. Click the Use SMTP Authentication check box to require SMTP authentication.
Fields in which you can enter the authentication username and password display. Go to step 7 if you do not want to use
SMTP authentication.
5. Enter the authentication username and password, and confirm the password.
6. Specify the connection security. In OneFS [Link] and later, SMTP Encryption is enabled by default. In OneFS 9.10 and
later, multiple encryption types are available. The encryption type defaults to SSL/TLS. Select STARTTLS for backwards
compatibility with certain older SMTP relays that require an unencrypted handshake before initiating encrypted transport.
7. In the Event group notification settings area, type the originating email address that is displayed in the To line of the
email in the Send email as field.
8. In the Subject field, type the text that will be displayed in the Subject line of the email.
9. If you want to batch event notification email messages, select an option from the Notification Batch Mode drop-down
menu. The default is No batching.
10. In the Default Email Template drop-down menu, select whether to use the default template that is provided with OneFS or
a custom template. If you select a custom template, the Custom Template Location field appears. Enter a path name for
the template.
11. Click Save Changes.
You can test your configuration by sending a test event notification.

Configuring the cluster join mode

The cluster join mode specifies how a node is added to the PowerScale cluster and whether authentication is required. OneFS
supports manual and secure join modes for adding nodes to the cluster.

Table 13. Cluster Join Mode

Mode Description
Manual Allows you to manually add a node to the cluster without
requiring authorization.
Secure Requires authorization of every node added to the cluster.
The node must be added through the web administration
interface or through the isi devices -a add -d

General cluster administration 53

Table 13. Cluster Join Mode (continued)
Mode Description
<unconfigured_node_serial_no> command in the
command-line interface.
NOTE: If you specify a secure join mode, you cannot join
a node to the cluster through serial console wizard option
[2] Join an existing cluster.

Specify the cluster join mode

You can specify a join mode that determines how nodes are added to the PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Hardware Configuration > Cluster (tab) > Select join mode (section).
2. In the Settings area, select the mode that determines how nodes can be added to the cluster.

Option Description
Manual Joins can be manually initiated
Secure Joins can be initiated only by the cluster and require authentication
3. Click Save join mode setting.

File system settings

You can configure global file system settings on a PowerScale cluster for access time tracking and character encoding.
You can enable or disable access time tracking, which monitors the time of access on each file. If necessary, you can also
change the default character encoding on the cluster.

Enable or disable access time tracking

You can enable access time tracking to support features that require it.
By default, the PowerScale cluster does not track the timestamp when files are accessed. You can enable this feature to
support OneFS features that use it. For example, access-time tracking must be enabled to configure SyncIQ policy criteria that
match files based on when they were last accessed.

NOTE: Enabling access-time tracking may affect cluster performance.

1. Click File system > File system settings > Access time tracking.
2. In the Access time tracking area, click the Enable access time tracking check box to track file access time stamps. This
feature is disabled by default.
3. In the Precision fields, specify how often to update the last-accessed time by typing a numeric value and by selecting a unit
of measure, such as Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, or Years.
For example, if you configure a Precision setting of one day, the cluster updates the last-accessed time once each day, even
if some files were accessed more often than once during the day.
4. Click Save changes.

Specify the cluster character encoding

You can modify the character encoding set for thePowerScale cluster after installation.
Only OneFS-supported character sets are available for selection. UTF-8 is the default character set for OneFS nodes.
NOTE: If the cluster character encoding is not set to UTF-8, SMB share names are case-sensitive.

You must restart the cluster to apply character encoding changes.

54 General cluster administration

 CAUTION: Character encoding is typically established during installation of the cluster. Modifying the character
encoding setting after installation may render files unreadable if done incorrectly. Modify settings only if
necessary after consultation with Dell Technologies Support.
1. Click File system > File system settings > Character encoding.
2. Optional: From the Character encoding list, select the character-encoding set that you want to use.
3. Click Save changes, and then click Yes to acknowledge that the encoding change becomes effective after the cluster is
restarted.
4. Restart the cluster.
After the cluster restarts, the OneFS web administration interface reflects your change.

Security hardening
Security hardening is the process of configuring a system to reduce or eliminate security risks. The OneFS Security Hardening
Module is primarily for use by United States federal government accounts.
OneFS is secure in its default configuration. The United States federal government requires configurations and limitations that
are more strict than the default.
The Security Hardening Module provides a hardening profile that you can apply to a OneFS cluster. A hardening profile is a
collection of rules that changes the cluster configuration so that the cluster complies with strict security rules.
The predefined STIG hardening profile is designed to enforce security principles that are defined in the United States
Department of Defense (DoD) Security Requirements Guides (SRGs) and Security Technical Implementation Guides (STIGs).
The STIG hardening profile applies controls to the OneFS cluster that reduce security vulnerabilities and attack surfaces.
For more about the STIG profile and how to apply it, see the "United States Federal and DoD Standards and Compliance"
chapter in the PowerScale OneFS Security Configuration Guide. That chapter also includes instructions for running periodic
compliance reports after applying the profile.
The Security Hardening Module is a separately licensed OneFS module. For licensing information, see the Licensing section in
the "General Cluster Administration chapter" of this guide.

Cluster monitoring
You can monitor the health, performance, and status of the PowerScale cluster.
Using the OneFS dashboard from the web administration interface, you can monitor the status and health of the OneFS system.
Information is available for individual nodes, including node-specific network traffic, internal and external network interfaces, and
details about node pools, tiers, and overall cluster health. You can monitor the following areas of the PowerScale cluster health
and performance:

Node status Health and performance statistics for each node in the cluster, including hard disk drive (HDD) and
solid-state drive (SSD) usage.
Client connections Number of clients connected per node.
New events List of event notifications generated by system events, including the severity, unique instance ID, start
time, alert message, and scope of the event.
Cluster size Current view: Used and available HDD and SSD space and space reserved for the virtual hot spare
(VHS).
Historical view: Total used space and cluster size for a one-year period.
Cluster throughput Current view: Average inbound and outbound traffic volume passing through the nodes in the cluster
(file system) for the past hour.
Historical view: Average inbound and outbound traffic volume passing through the nodes in the
cluster for the past two weeks.
CPU usage Current view: Average system, user, and total percentages of CPU usage for the past hour.
Historical view: CPU usage for the past two weeks.

General cluster administration 55

Monitor the cluster
You can monitor the health and performance of an PowerScale cluster with charts and tables that show the status and
performance of nodes, client connections, events, cluster size, cluster throughput, and CPU usage.
1. Click Dashboard > Cluster Overview > Cluster Status.
2. Optional: View cluster details.
● Status: To view details about a node, click the ID number of the node.
● Client connection summary: To view a list of current connections, click Dashboard > Cluster Overview > Client
Connections .
● New events: To view more information about an event, click View details in the Actions column.
● Cluster size: To switch between current and historical views, click Historical or Current near the Monitoring section
heading. In historical view, click Used or Cluster size to change the display.
● Cluster throughput (file system): To switch between current and historical views, click Historical or Current next to
the Monitoring section heading. To view throughput statistics for a specific period within the past two weeks, click
Dashboard > Cluster Overview > Throughput Distribution.

NOTE: You can hide or show inbound or outbound throughput by clicking Inbound or Outbound in the chart legend.
To view maximum throughput, next to Show, select Maximum.

● CPU usage: To switch between current and historical views, click Historical or Current near the Monitoring section
heading.

NOTE:

You can hide or show a plot by clicking System, User, or Total in the chart legend. To view maximum usage, next to
Show, select Maximum.

View node status

You can view the current and historical status of a node.
1. Click Dashboard > Cluster Overview > Cluster Status.
2. Optional: In the Status area, click the ID number for the node that you want to view the status for.
3. View node details.
● Status: To view networks settings for a node interface or subnet or pool, click the link in the Status area.
● Client connections: To view current clients that are connected to this node, review the list in this area.

Monitoring cluster hardware

You can manually check the status of hardware on the PowerScale cluster as well as enable SNMP to remotely monitor
components.

View node hardware status

You can view the hardware status of a node.
1. Click Dashboard > Cluster Overview > Cluster Status.
2. Optional: In the Status area, click the ID number for a node.

56 General cluster administration

Chassis and drive states
You can view chassis and drive state details in the OneFS WebUI under Cluster Management → Hardware Configuration.
In a cluster, the combination of nodes in different degraded states determines whether read requests, write requests, or both
work. A cluster can lose write quorum but keep read quorum. OneFS provides details about the status of chassis and drives in
your cluster. The following table describes all the possible states that you may encounter in your cluster.

Table 14. Chassis and Drive State

State Description Interface Error state
HEALTHY All drives in the node are functioning correctly. Command-line
interface, web
administration interface
L3 A solid state drive (SSD) was deployed as level 3 Command-line interface
(L3) cache to increase the size of cache memory
and improve throughput speeds.
SMARTFAIL or The drive is being removed safely from the file Command-line
Smartfail or system, either because of an I/O error or by user interface, web
restripe in request. Nodes or drives in a smartfail or read- administration interface
progress only state affect only write quorum.
NOT AVAILABLE A drive is unavailable for various reasons. You can Command-line X
click the bay to view detailed information about interface, web
this condition. administration interface
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state includes the ERASE and
SED_ERROR command-line interface states.

SUSPENDED This state indicates that drive activity is Command-line

temporarily suspended, and the drive is not in interface, web
use. The state is manually initiated and does not administration interface
occur during normal cluster activity.
NOT IN USE A node in an offline state affects both read and Command-line
write quorum. interface, web
administration interface
REPLACE The drive was smartfailed successfully and is Command-line interface
ready to be replaced. only
STALLED The drive is stalled and undergoing stall Command-line interface
evaluation. Stall evaluation is the process of only
checking drives that are slow or having other
issues. Depending on the outcome of the
evaluation, the drive may return to service or be
smartfailed. STALLED is a transient state.
NEW The drive is new and blank. NEW is the state Command-line interface
that a drive is in when you run the isi dev only
command with the -a add option.
USED The drive was added and contained a Command-line interface
PowerScaleGUID but the drive is not from this only
node. This drive will likely be formatted into the
cluster.
PREPARING The drive is undergoing a format operation. Command-line interface
The drive state changes to HEALTHY when the only
format is successful.
EMPTY No drive is in this bay. Command-line interface
only

General cluster administration 57

Table 14. Chassis and Drive State (continued)
State Description Interface Error state
WRONG_TYPE The drive type is wrong for this node. For Command-line interface
example, a non-SED drive in a SED node, SAS only
instead of the expected SATA drive type.
BOOT_DRIVE Unique to the A100 drive, which has boot drives Command-line interface
in its bays. only
SED_ERROR The drive cannot be acknowledged by the OneFS Command-line X
system. interface, web
NOTE: In the web administration interface, administration interface
this state is in Not available.

ERASE The drive is ready for removal but needs your Command-line interface
attention because the data has not been erased. only
You can erase the drive manually to guarantee
that data is removed.
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state is included in Not available.

INSECURE Data on the self-encrypted drive is accessible Command-line interface X

by unauthorized personnel. Self-encrypting drives only
should never be used for non-encrypted data
purposes.
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state is labeled Unencrypted SED.

UNENCRYPTED Data on the self-encrypted drive is accessible Web administration X

by unauthorized personnel. Self-encrypting drives interface only
should never be used for non-encrypted data
purposes.
NOTE: In the command-line interface, this
state is labeled INSECURE.

Check battery status

You can monitor the status of NVRAM batteries and charging systems. This task may only be performed at the OneFS
command-line interface on node hardware that supports the command.
1. Open an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. Run the isi batterystatus list command to view the status of all NVRAM batteries and charging systems on the
node.
The system displays output similar to the following example:

Lnn Status1 Status2 Result1 Result2

----------------------------------------
1 Good Good - -
2 Good Good - -
3 Good Good - -
----------------------------------------

SNMP monitoring
You can use SNMP to remotely monitor the PowerScale cluster hardware components, such as fans, hardware sensors, power
supplies, and disks. Use the default Linux SNMP tools or an SNMP tool of your choice for this purpose.
SNMP is enabled or disabled cluster wide: nodes are not configured individually. You can monitor cluster information from
any node in the cluster. Generated SNMP notifications correspond to CELOG events. You can configure the cluster to send

58 General cluster administration

such SNMP notifications using a command similar to the following (modifying the values depending on your specific SNMP
infrastructure:

isi event channels create snmpchannel snmp --host=<[Link]> --

snmp-auth-password=<string> --snmp-security-name=<string> --snmp-priv-password=<string>
--snmp-engine-id=<string>

The location where you send traps is specified in the isi event channels command. Event notification rules specify which
types of event types are sent to those locations. SMTP is disabled by default and both SNMP version 2c and SNMP version 3
are turned off . You must enable SNMP and then select the versions that you want to support.
OneFS does not support SNMP version 1. Although the command isi snmp settings modify includes the option
--snmp-v1-v2-access, OneFS monitors only through SNMP version 2c.
You can configure settings for SNMP version 3 alone or for both SNMP version 2c and version 3.
Elements in an SNMP hierarchy are arranged in a tree structure, similar to a directory tree. As with directories, identifiers move
from general to specific as the string progresses from left to right. Unlike a file hierarchy, however, each element is not only
named, but also numbered.
For example, the SNMP entity
[Link].0 maps
to .[Link].4.1.12124.[Link]. The element 12124 refers to the OneFS SNMP namespace. Anything further to the
right of that number is related to OneFS-specific monitoring.
Management Information Base (MIB) documents define human-readable names for managed objects and specify their datatypes
and other properties. You can download MIBs that are created for SNMP-monitoring of a PowerScale cluster from the OneFS
web administration interface or manage them using the command-line interface (CLI). MIBs are stored in /usr/share/snmp/
mibs/ on a OneFS node. The OneFS ISILON-MIBs serve two purposes:
● Augment the information available in standard MIBs.
● Provide OneFS-specific information that is unavailable in standard MIBs.
ISILON-MIB is a registered enterprise MIB. PowerScale clusters have two separate MIBs:

ISILON-MIB Defines a group of SNMP agents that respond to queries from a network monitoring system (NMS)
called OneFS Statistics Snapshot agents. These agents snapshot the state of the OneFS file system
at the time that it receives a request and reports this information back to the NMS.
ISILON-TRAP-MIB Generates SNMP traps to send to an SNMP monitoring station when relevant circumstances occur
that are defined in the trap protocol data units (PDUs).

The OneFS MIB files map the OneFS-specific object IDs with descriptions. Download or copy MIB files to a directory where your
SNMP tool can find them, such as /usr/share/snmp/mibs/.
To enable Net-SNMP tools to read the MIBs to provide automatic name-to-OID mapping, add -m All to the command, as in
the following example:

snmpwalk -v2c I$ilonpublic -m All <node IP> isilon

During SNMPv2c configuration, it is required that you set the community string using a command similar to the following:

isi snmp settings modify -c <newcommunitystring>

You are not allowed to enable SNMPv2 unless the community string has been changed from the default.
If the MIB files are not in the default Net-SNMP MIB directory, specify the full path, as in the following example. All three lines
are a single command.

snmpwalk -m /usr/local/share/snmp/mibs/[Link]:/usr \
/share/snmp/mibs/[Link]:/usr/share/snmp/mibs \
/[Link] -v2c -C c -c public isilon

NOTE: The previous examples are run from the snmpwalk command on a cluster. Your SNMP version may require
different arguments.

General cluster administration 59

Managing SNMP settings
You can use SNMP to monitor cluster hardware and system information. You can configure settings through either the web
administration interface or the command-line interface.
The default SNMP v3 username (general) and password can be changed to anything from the CLI or the WebUI. The username
is only required when SNMP v3 is enabled and making SNMP v3 queries.
Configure a network monitoring system (NMS) to query each node directly through a static IPv4 address. If a node is configured
for IPv6, you can communicate with SNMP over IPv6.
The SNMP proxy is enabled by default, and the SNMP implementation on each node is configured automatically to proxy for all
other nodes in the cluster except itself. This proxy configuration allows the PowerScale Management Information Base (MIB)
and standard MIBs to be exposed seamlessly by using context strings for supported SNMP versions. This approach allows you
to query a node through another node by appending _node_<node number> to the community string of the query. For example,
snmpwalk -m /usr/share/snmp/mibs/[Link] -v 2c -c 'I$ilonpublic_node_1' localhost
<nodename>.

Configure the cluster for SNMP monitoring

You can configure your PowerScale cluster to remotely monitor hardware components using SNMP.
1. Click Cluster Management > General Settings > SNMP Monitoring.
2. In the SNMP Service Settings, click the Enable SNMP Service check box. The SNMP service is disabled by default.
3. Download the MIB file that you want to use (base or trap).
Follow the download process that is specific to your browser.
4. Copy the MIB files to a directory where your SNMP tool can find them, such as /usr/share/snmp/mibs/.
To have Net-SNMP tools read the MIBs to provide automatic name-to-OID mapping, add -m All to the command, as in
the following example:

snmpwalk -v2c -c public -m All <node IP> isilon

5. If your protocol is SNMPv2, ensure that the Allow SNMPv2 Access check box is selected. SNMPv2 is selected by default.
6. In the SNMPv2 Read-Only Community Name field, enter the appropriate community name. The default is
I$ilonpublic.
7. To enable SNMPv3, click the Allow SNMPv3 Access check box.
8. Configure SNMP v3 Settings:
a. In the SNMPv3 Read-Only User Name field, type the SNMPv3 security name to change the name of the user with
read-only privileges.
The default read-only user is general.
b. In the SNMPv3 Read-Only Password field, type the new password for the read-only user to set a new SNMPv3
authentication password.
The default password is password. Dell Technologies recommends that you change the password to improve security.
The password must contain at least eight characters and no spaces.
c. Type the new password in the Confirm password field to confirm the new password.
9. In the SNMP Reporting area, enter a cluster description in the Cluster Description field.
10. In the System Contact Email field, enter the contact email address.
11. Click Save Changes.

View SNMP settings

You can review SNMP monitoring settings.
● Click Cluster Management > General Settings > SNMP Monitoring.

60 General cluster administration

Events and alerts
OneFS continuously monitors the health and performance of your cluster and generates events when situations occur that
might require your attention.
Events can be related to file system integrity, network connections, jobs, hardware, and other vital operations and components
of your cluster. After events are captured, they are analyzed by OneFS. Events with similar root causes are organized into event
groups.
An event group is a single point of management for numerous events related to a particular situation. You can determine which
event groups you want to monitor, ignore, or resolve.
An alert is the message that reports on a change that has occurred in an event group. For some events, you can set the
thresholds at which to raise alerts.
You can control how alerts related to an event group are distributed. Alerts are distributed through channels. You can create and
configure a channel to send alerts to a specific audience, control the content the channel distributes, and limit frequency of the
alerts.

Events overview
Events are individual occurrences or conditions related to the data workflow, maintenance operations, and hardware
components of your cluster.
Throughout OneFS there are processes that are constantly monitoring and collecting information on cluster operations.
When the status of a component or operation changes, the change is captured as an event and placed into a priority queue at
the kernel level.
Every event has two ID numbers that help to establish the context of the event:
● The event type ID identifies the type of event that has occurred.
● The event instance ID is a unique number that is specific to a particular occurrence of an event type. When an event is
submitted to the kernel queue, an event instance ID is assigned. You can reference the instance ID to determine the exact
time that an event occurred.
You can view individual events. However, you manage events and alerts at the event group level.

Alerts overview
An alert is a message that describes a change that has occurred in an event group.
At any point in time, you can view event groups to track situations occurring on your cluster. You can also create alert rules to
notify you when there is a change in an event group. For example, you can generate an alert when a new event is added to an
event group, when an event group is resolved, or when the severity of an event group changes.
You can adjust the thresholds at which certain events raise alerts. For example, by default, OneFS generates an alert when a
disk pool is 95% full. You can adjust that threshold to a lower percentage.
You can configure your cluster to generate alerts only for specific event groups, conditions, severity, or during limited time
periods.
Alerts are delivered through channels. You can configure a channel to determine who receives the alert and when.

Alert channel overview

Alert channels are pathways by which event groups send alerts.
When an alert is generated, the channel that is associated with the alert determines how the alert is distributed and who
receives the alert.
You can configure an alert channel to deliver alerts with one of the following mechanisms: SMTP, SNMP, or Dell Technologies
connectivity services. You can also specify the required routing and labeling information for the delivery mechanism.

General cluster administration 61

Event groups overview
Event groups are collections of individual events that are related symptoms of a single situation on your cluster. Event groups
provide a single point of management for multiple event instances that are generated in response to a situation on your cluster.
For example, if a chassis fan fails in a node, OneFS might capture multiple events related both to the failed fan itself, and to
exceeded temperature thresholds within the node. All events related to the fan will be represented in a single event group.
Because there is a single point of contact, you do not need to manage numerous individual events. You can handle the situation
as a single, coherent issue.
All management of events is performed at the event group level. You can mark an event group as resolved or ignored. You can
also configure how and when alerts are distributed for an event group.

Viewing and modifying event groups

You can view event and modify the status of event groups.

View an event group

You can view the details of an event group.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts.
The Event group history tab summarizes the list of all the event groups, and you can customize the list as needed.
● You can filter the data by date range, event group status, and event group severity.
● You can search for relevant event groups by entering the search string in the search box.
2. In the Actions column of the event group you want to view, click Actions, and View event details.
You can view details of each event group in a separate window.

Change the status of an event group

You can ignore or resolve an event group.
After you resolve an event group, you cannot reverse that action. Any new events that would have been added to the resolved
event group will be added to a new event group.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts.
The Event group history tab summarizes the list of all the event groups, and you can customize the list as needed.
● You can filter the data by date range, event group status, and event group severity.
● You can search for relevant event groups by entering the search string in the search box.
2. In the Actions column of the event group you want to change, click Actions.
3. In the menu that appears, click Resolve event to resolve the event group or Ignore event to ignore the event group.
NOTE: You can perform an action on multiple event groups by selecting the check box next to the Event group
description of the events that you want to change, then selecting an action from the Select a bulk action list.

4. Click Mark Resolved or Ignore to confirm the action.

View an event
You can view the details of a specific event.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts.
The Event group history tab summarizes the list of all the event groups, and you can customize the list as needed.
● You can filter the data by date range, event group status, and event group severity.
● You can search for relevant event groups by entering the search string in the search box.
2. In the Actions column of the event group that contains the event you want to view, click View event details.
3. In the new window, click +See event instance details to expand the list of events.
4. Click View details next to the event whose details you want to view.

62 General cluster administration

Managing alert rules
You can view, create, modify, or delete alert rules to determine the information you deliver about event groups.

View alerts by event type id

You can view a list of alerts with their event type IDs with description, category, and associated alert rules and alert channels.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, on the Event type ID tab, you can view the details of all alerts.

Modify alerts by event type id

You can suppress or un-suppress one or more event type ID depending on its current state.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the Actions column of the event type ID you want to modify, click Suppress or Un-suppress.
You can perform an action on multiple event type IDs by selecting the check box next to the event type ID of the alerts you
want to change, then selecting an action from the Select a bulk action list.

View alerting rules

You can view a list of all the alerting rules.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alerting rule tab.
You can view the list of alerting rules.

Create an alerting rule

You can create an alerting rule.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alerting rule tab.
3. Click Create alert rule.
The Create alert rule window appears.
4. Enter the following details:
● Rule name: Enter a name for the new alerting rule.
● Rule condition: Select a condition (New, New Events, Ongoing, Severity Increase, Severity decrease, Resolved) from the
drop-down list.
● Send an alert only if the event lasts longer than: Enter the numerical value in the text box and select the unit of time
from the drop-down list.
● Applies to: Select the check box next to the relevant alert category.
● Add event group ID: Click Add event group ID to add an event group.
● Select alert channel for this rule: Select the check box next to the relevant channel name.
5. Click Create rule.

Modify an alerting rule

You can modify an existing alerting rule.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alerting rule tab.
3. In the Actions column of the alerting rule you want to modify, click Edit rule.
The Edit alert rule window appears.
4. Modify the following details:
● Rule name: You cannot modify the name for an existing alerting rule.

General cluster administration 63

 ● Rule condition: Select a condition (New, New Events, Ongoing, Severity Increase, Severity decrease, Resolved) from the
drop-down list.
● Send an alert only if the event lasts longer than: Modify the numerical value in the text box and select the unit of time
from the drop-down list.
● Applies to: Select the check box next to the relevant alert category.
● Add event group ID: Click Add event group ID to add a new event group.
● Select alert channel for this rule: Select the check box next to the relevant channel name.
5. Click Save Changes.

Delete an alerting rule

You can delete an existing alerting rule.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alerting rule tab.
3. In the Actions column of the alerting rule, click Edit rule.
The Edit alert rule window appears.
4. Click Delete at the bottom of the window.
The Confirm delete alert rule dialog box appears with the following message:

This action can not be undone. Are you sure you want to delete this alert rule?

5. Click Confirm.

Managing channels
You can view, create, modify, or delete channels to determine how you deliver information about event groups.

View alert channels

You can view the list of all the alert channels.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alert channel tab.
3. View the list of alert channels.

Create a channel
You can create and configure new channels to send out alert information.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alert channel tab.
3. In the Alert Channel area, click Create channel.
4. Select the Enable channel check box to enable or disable the channel.
5. In the Channel name field, type the channel name.
6. Select the delivery mechanism for the channel from the Channel type list.
NOTE: Depending on the delivery mechanism you select, different settings appear.

7. If you are creating an SMTP channel, you can configure the following settings:
a. In the Send to field, enter an email address that you want to receive alerts on this channel.
To add another email address to the channel, click Add another email address.
b. To manually configure the SMTP server settings, select the Manually configured SMTP server settings radio button
and configure the following fields.
c. In the Send from field, enter the email address that you want to appear in the from field of the alert email messages.
d. In the Subject field, enter the text that you want to appear on the subject line of the alert email messages.
e. In the SMTP host or relay address field, enter your SMTP host or relay address.

64 General cluster administration

 f. In the SMTP relay port field, enter the number of your SMTP relay port.
g. Select the Use SMTP authentication check box to specify a username and password for your SMTP server.
h. Specify your connection security between NONE or STARTTLS.
i. From the Notification batch mode list, select whether alerts will be batched together, by severity, or by category.
j. From the Notification email template list, select whether email messages will be created from a default or custom
email template.
If you specify a custom template, enter the location of the template on your cluster in the Custom Template Location
field.
k. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another Node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
l. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
8. If you are creating an SNMPv3 channel, you can configure the following settings:
a. In the Community field, enter your SNMP community string.
b. In the Host field, enter your SNMP hostname or address.
c. In the SNMP security name field, enter your SNMP security name.
d. In the SNMP security level field, select an option from the dropdown menu.
e. In the SNMP engine ID field, enter your SNMP engine ID.
f. If you are using an SNMP trap, check the box for Use SNMP trap.
g. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
h. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
9. If you are creating an SNMPv2 channel, you can configure the following settings:
a. In the Community field, enter your SNMP community string.
b. In the Host field, enter your SNMP hostname or address.
c. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
d. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
10. Click Create channel.

Modify a channel
You can modify a channel that you have created.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alert channel tab.
3. In the Actions column of the channel you want to modify, click Edit channel.
The Edit alert channel window appears.
4. Select the Enable channel check box to enable or disable the channel.
5. Select the delivery mechanism for the channel from the Channel type list.
NOTE: Depending on the delivery mechanism you select, different settings appear.

6. If you are modifying an SMTP channel, you can change the following settings:
a. In the Send to field, enter an email address that you want to receive alerts on this channel.

General cluster administration 65

 To add another email address to the channel, click Add another email address.
b. To use global SMTP server settings, select the Use global SMTP server settings radio button and configure the
following fields:
c. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
d. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
e. To manually configure the SMTP server settings, select the Manually configured SMTP server settings radio button
and configure the following fields.
f. In the Send from field, enter the email address that you want to appear in the sent field of the alert email messages.
g. In the Subject field, enter the text that you want to appear on the subject line of the alert email messages.
h. In the SMTP host or relay address field, enter your SMTP host or relay address.
i. In the SMTP relay port field, enter the number of your SMTP relay port.
j. Select the Use SMTP authentication check box to specify a username and password for your SMTP server.
k. Specify your connection security between NONE or STARTTLS.
l. From the Notification batch mode list, select whether alerts will be batched together, by severity, or by category.
m. From the Notification email template list, select whether email messages will be created from a standard or custom
email template.
If you specify a custom template, enter the location of the template on your cluster in the Custom template location
field.
n. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
o. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
7. If you are modifying a CONNECTEMC channel, you can change the following settings:
a. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
b. In the Excluded nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
8. If you are modifying an SNMP channel, you can change the following settings:
a. In the Community field, enter your SNMP community string.
b. In the Host field, enter your SNMP hostname or address.
c. In the Allowed nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is allowed to send alerts through this
channel.
To add another allowed node to the channel, click Add another node. If you do not specify any nodes, all nodes in the
cluster are considered as allowed nodes.
d. In the Excluded Nodes field, type the node number of a node in the cluster that is not allowed to send alerts through
this channel.
To add another excluded node to the channel, click Exclude another node.
9. Click Save Changes.

Delete a channel
You can delete channels that you have created.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alert channel tab.

66 General cluster administration

3. In the Alert Channel area, locate the channel you want to delete.
4. In the Actions column of the channel you want to delete, click Edit channel.
The Edit alert channel window appears
5. Click Delete to confirm the action.

Managing event thresholds

You can list, modify, reset, and view alert thresholds for events that use percentage-based statistics to generate alerts.

View events with configurable thresholds and adjust the threshold values
You can view the events with configurable alert thresholds and adjust the thresholds.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Thresholds.
2. In the Actions column of the event that you want to adjust, click Edit thresholds.
3. In the Threshold value column for each threshold you want to adjust, enter an integer in the range 0-100 for each threshold.
4. Click Apply changes.

Maintenance and testing

You can modify event settings to specify retention, storage limits for event data, and send test events.

Event data retention and storage limits

You can modify settings to determine how event data is handled on your cluster.
By default, data that is related to resolved event groups is retained indefinitely. You can set a retention limit to make the system
automatically delete resolved event group data after a certain number of days.
You can also limit the total amount of cluster storage that event data can occupy on your cluster. By default, the limit is 1
megabyte of storage for every 1 terabyte of total storage on the cluster. You can adjust this limit to be between 1 and 100
megabytes of storage. For smaller clusters, the minimum amount of storage that will be set aside is 1 gigabyte.
When your cluster reaches the storage limit, the system begins deleting the oldest event group data to accommodate new data.

View event storage settings

You can view your storage settings.
Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Settings.

Modify event storage settings

You can modify your storage settings.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Settings.
2. In the Limit for event group and maintenance window history field, enter the number of days you want resolved event
groups and maintenance window history to be stored before they are deleted.
3. In the Event log storage limit field, enter the limit for the amount of storage you want to set aside for event data.
The value in this field represents how many megabytes of data can be stored per terabyte of total cluster storage.
4. Click Submit.

Test events and alerts

Test events called heartbeat events are automatically generated. You can also manually generate test alerts.
In order to confirm that the system is operating correctly, test events are automatically sent every day, one event from each
node in your cluster. These are referred to as heartbeat events and are reported to an event group named Heartbeat Event.

General cluster administration 67

To test the configuration of channels, you can manually send a test alert through the system.

Send a test alert

You can manually generate a test alert.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Alert Management.
2. In the CELOG alerting area, click the Alert channel tab.
3. In the Alert Channel area, click Create channel.
4. Locate the Send test alert area.
5. In the Test message field, enter the message that you want to send.
6. Click Send.

Maintenance mode
Maintenance mode suppresses alerts during maintenance windows.

Maintenance mode
When enabled, Maintenance Mode detects certain maintenance tasks and automatically starts a maintenance window that
suppresses CELOG alerts while the mode is active.
Maintenance Mode has been updated, starting in OneFS [Link], to allow your cluster to enter maintenance mode automatically
when certain maintenance tasks are detected. Tasks such as simultaneous upgrades, patch installation, rolling reboots, and
hardware replacement.
This feature can be disabled which allows administrators to manually start and end maintenance windows. Manual maintenance
windows are limited to 199 hours to avoid indefinite maintenance windows.
Using the web interface, you can manage maintenance mode status and view the maintenance window history.

Enable or disable maintenance mode

You can enable or disable maintenance mode to automatically detect maintenance tasks.
1. To enable or disable automatic maintenance mode, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance Mode
tab.
2. Click the button to enable or disable Maintenance Mode.

View maintenance mode history

You can enable or disable maintenance mode to automatically detect maintenance tasks.
1. To view the maintenance window history, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance Mode tab.
2. Click the Maintenance History tab to view the maintenance window history.

Manage automatic maintenance mode

You can enable or disable automatic maintenance mode.
1. To enable or disable automatic maintenance windows, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance
Mode tab.
2. Click the Settings tab and check or clear the box for Automatically detect maintenance window.

68 General cluster administration

Healthcheck Evaluations
You can perform healthcheck evaluations for specific software and hardware components of the cluster and the environment of
the cluster.
This section contains information about how to perform healthcheck evaluations from the OneFS interface.

Terminology
Items An item is an aspect of the cluster or its environment that can be evaluated. Depending on the nature
of the item, when the item is evaluated, either each node in the cluster is checked or the cluster as
a whole is checked. For example, an item that evaluates the number of DIMM errors that have been
logged checks the logs on each node in the cluster. An item that evaluates the amount of free space
remaining on the cluster evaluates the cluster as a whole.
Checklists A checklist defines a list of one or more items to be evaluated.
Parameters Parameters are elements of items to which you can assign specific values. For example, the item
auth_ad_clock_skew contains a parameter that is named ad_provider. You can assign a value
such as win_ad to the ad_provider parameter using the isi healthcheck parameters
set command.
Evaluations Items and checklists can be evaluated. When an item or checklist is evaluated, the results are saved in
the /ifs/.ifsvar/modules/health-check/results/evaluations directory.
Freshness Each item has a default Freshness value. The Freshness value defines whether a new value is
retrieved for an item being evaluated, or a cached value from a previous evaluation is retrieved. For
example, if the Freshness value of an item is 1D (one day), and you evaluate an item less than one
day after a previous evaluation was run, the value from the previous evaluation is returned rather than
a new value.
Schedules A schedule determines the period or time frame that is specified for performing health evaluation of
clusters.

List, run, and view details of all checklists

You can list, run, and view checklists. List all the available checklists and view the details about each checklist including a
description of the checklist and a list of the items in the checklist .

List all checklists

To list all the available checklists.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > HealthChecks.
2. Expand any available Checklist to view the associated items.
All the available healthcheck lists are displayed.

View details about the checklist

To view details about the checklist.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > HealthChecks.
2. Expand any available Checklist to view the associated items.
All the available healthcheck lists are displayed.
3. To view details about any checklist, click View Details which is available under Actions tab.

General cluster administration 69

Run a checklist
To run a particular checklist.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > HealthChecks.
2. Expand any available Checklist to view the associated items.
All the available healthcheck lists are displayed.
3. To run any checklist, click Run which is available under Actions > More tab.

List all items and view details about items

You can list all the HealthCheck items and view their details.
List all the available items and view details about each item including whether the item checks each node or the cluster as a
whole and the items freshness duration.

List all items

You can view a list of all the HealthCheck items.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > HealthChecks.
2. Expand any available Checklist to view the associated items.
All the available healthcheck lists are displayed.

View details about the item

You can view the item details.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > HealthChecks.
2. Expand any available Checklist to view the associated items.
All the available healthcheck lists are displayed.
3. To view details about any item, click View Details which is available under Actions tab.

Listing evaluations and reviewing results

You can evaluate checklists and items, list the evaluations that have been run, and review the results of an evaluation.

List evaluations that have been run

You can view the list of evaluations that were run.
To list all the evaluations that have been run.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck.
2. Select Evaluations.
All the available evaluations that were run are displayed.

View results of an evaluation

You can view evaluation results.
To view the evaluation result.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.
2. Select Evaluations.
All the available evaluations that were run are displayed.
3. To view details about any evaluation, click View Details which is available under Actions column.

70 General cluster administration

Gather logs for failed evaluations
You can gather logs for the failed evaluations.
To gather logs for the failed evaluations.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.
2. Select Evaluations.
All the available evaluations that were run are displayed.
3. To gather logs for any failed evaluation, click More > Gather log which is available under Actions tab.

Scheduling evaluations
A default schedule is created when the cluster is upgraded to run the basic checklist every day.

View list of schedules

You can view a list of schedules from the OneFS interface.
To view the list of available schedules.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.
2. Select Scheduler.
All the available schedules are displayed.

Create schedule
You can create a schedule from the OneFS interface.
To create a schedule.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.
2. Select Scheduler.
3. Click Create new schedule.
The Create a Schedule dialog box appears.
4. In the Schedule Name field, type a name for the healthcheck schedule.
5. From the Scheduled drop-down, select how often you want to run the healthcheck.

Table 15. HealthCheck scheduling options

Scheduling option Description
Run a healthcheck every day. Select Daily, and specify how often you want to run the
healthcheck.
Run a healthcheck on specific days of the week. Select Weekly, and specify how often you want to run the
healthcheck.
Run a healthcheck on specific days of the month. Select Monthly, and specify how often you want to run the
healthcheck.
Run a healthcheck on specific days of the year. Select Yearly, and specify how often you want to run the
healthcheck.
6. Optional: To run multiple schedules per specified day, select Run multiple schedules per specified day.
7. Click Save.

Modify healthcheck schedule

You can modify an existing schedule from the OneFS interface.
To modify a healthcheck schedule.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.

General cluster administration 71

2. Select Scheduler.
All the available schedules are displayed.
3. Select a healthcheck schedule, click View/Edit which is available under Actions.

Delete a healthcheck schedule

You can delete a schedule from the OneFS interface.
To delete a healthcheck.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks > HealthChecks.
2. Select Scheduler.
All the available schedules are displayed.
3. Select a healthcheck schedule, click Delete which is available under Actions.

Auto Remediation through HealthCheck

As a PowerScale administrator you can perform auto remediation through HealthCheck.
A PowerScale user can now take advantage of auto remediation through the HealthCheck framework to automatically resolve
a set of known issues for which remediation is available. This feature allows users with the necessary privileges to apply fixes
without manual troubleshooting. When an issue is detected by HealthCheck, the system responds based on the repair behavior
setting already configured—either Auto or Manual.
In the Auto mode, the system applies the recommended fixes automatically.
In the Manual mode, the user is notified of the issue on the PowerScale WebUI and provided with detailed information
about the available repair, allowing them to review and apply the fixes that [Link] capability simplifies the remediation
process, eliminating the need to analyze issues manually or contact support for resolution. It enhances the existing HealthCheck
framework by enabling the auto remediation functionality, helping to reduce downtime and improve overall system reliability.
As a PowerScale administrator you can:
● Enable or disable the repair feature.
● Specify their behavior and view which HealthChecks have auto-repair capabilities.
● View HealthChecks details such as repair action, associated risk, and repair behavior.
● View the Failed HealthChecks and their associated auto-repair.
● Manually trigger the repair action when the repair behavior is set to Manual (that is with User consent).
● View the status of auto-repair actions.
The auto repair feature is disabled by default when the cluster is upgraded to a new version, when the cluster is in compliance
mode, when the cluster is in Root Lockdown Mode, when the cluster does not have a quorum, when the cluster is in readonly
mode.

Enable auto remediation

You can enable auto remediation through HealthCheck.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck.
2. Click Enable Repair link.
The HealthChecks > Settings page is displayed.
3. Check the Enable Repair checkbox.
4. Select the appropriate repair behavior as Auto Repair or Manual Repair.
5. Click Save.

Disable auto remediation

You can disable auto remediation through HealthCheck.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthCheck > Settings.
2. Click Disable Repair checkbox.
3. Click Save.

72 General cluster administration

View evaluation of auto remediation
You can evaluate and repair failed checks manually.
To view the evaluation result and manually initiate the repair action.
1. Click Cluster Management > HealthChecks.
2. Select Evaluations.
All the available evaluations that were run are displayed.
3. To view details about failed evaluation, click View Details which is available under Actions column.
It displays the HealthCheck Evaluation page.
4. In HealthCheck Evaluation page, select Repair Items > View Details.
It displays the HealthCheck Evaluation Details page.
5. In HealthCheck Evaluation Details page, click Repair to manual start the repair action.
If Repair Status is Action Needed then only the Repair button is enabled.

Cluster maintenance
Maintaining your cluster and components allow it to operate at peak performance.
Dell PowerScale Technical Support can assist you with replacing node components or upgrading components to increase
performance.

Maintenance mode
Maintenance mode suppresses alerts during maintenance windows.

Maintenance mode
When enabled, Maintenance Mode detects certain maintenance tasks and automatically starts a maintenance window that
suppresses CELOG alerts while the mode is active.
Maintenance Mode has been updated, starting in OneFS [Link], to allow your cluster to enter maintenance mode automatically
when certain maintenance tasks are detected. Tasks such as simultaneous upgrades, patch installation, rolling reboots, and
hardware replacement.
This feature can be disabled which allows administrators to manually start and end maintenance windows. Manual maintenance
windows are limited to 199 hours to avoid indefinite maintenance windows.
Using the web interface, you can manage maintenance mode status and view the maintenance window history.

Enable or disable maintenance mode

You can enable or disable maintenance mode to automatically detect maintenance tasks.
1. To enable or disable automatic maintenance mode, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance Mode
tab.
2. Click the button to enable or disable Maintenance Mode.

View maintenance mode history

You can enable or disable maintenance mode to automatically detect maintenance tasks.
1. To view the maintenance window history, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance Mode tab.
2. Click the Maintenance History tab to view the maintenance window history.

General cluster administration 73

Manage automatic maintenance mode
You can enable or disable automatic maintenance mode.
1. To enable or disable automatic maintenance windows, click Cluster Management > Events and alerts > Maintenance
Mode tab.
2. Click the Settings tab and check or clear the box for Automatically detect maintenance window.

Replacing node components

If a node component fails, Dell Technologies Support will work with you to quickly replace the component and return the node to
a healthy status.
Trained service personnel can replace the following field replaceable units (FRUs):
● battery
● boot flash drive
● SATA/SAS Drive
● memory (DIMM)
● fan
● front panel
● intrusion switch
● network interface card (NIC)
● InfiniBand card
● NVRAM card
● SAS controller
● power supply
If you configure your cluster to send alerts to PowerScale, Dell Technologies Support will contact you if a component needs to
be replaced. If you do not configure your cluster to send alerts to PowerScale, you must initiate a service request.

Upgrading node components

You can upgrade node components to gain additional capacity or performance.
Trained service personnel can upgrade the following components in the field:
● drive
● memory (DIMM)
● network interface card (NIC)
If you want to upgrade components in your nodes, contact Dell Technologies Support.

Automatic Replacement Recognition (ARR) for drives

When a drive is replaced in a node, OneFS automatically formats and adds the drive to the cluster.
If you are replacing a drive in a node, either to upgrade the drive or to replace a failed drive, you do not need to take additional
actions to add the drive to the cluster. OneFS will automatically format the drive and add it.
ARR will also automatically update the firmware on the new drive to match the current drive support package installed on the
cluster. Drive firmware will not be updated for the entire cluster, only for the new drive.
If you prefer to format and add drives manually, you can disable ARR.

View Automatic Replacement Recognition (ARR) status

You can confirm whether ARR is enabled on your cluster.
Click Cluster Management > Automatic Replacement Recognition.
In the ARR settings per node area, all nodes are listed by Logical Node Number (LNN) with the current ARR status for each
node.

74 General cluster administration

Enable or Disable Automatic Replacement Recognition (ARR)
You can enable or disable ARR for your entire cluster, or just for specific nodes.
1. To enable or disable ARR for your entire cluster, click Cluster Management > Automatic Replacement Recognition.
2. In the Settings area, click Disable ARR or Enable ARR.
3. To disable ARR for a specific node, you must perform the following steps through the command-line interface (CLI).
a. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
b. Run the following command:

isi devices config modify --automatic-replacement-recognition no --node-lnn <node-

lnn>

If you don't specify a node LNN, the command will be applied to the entire cluster.
The following example command disables ARR for the node with the LNN of 2:

isi devices config modify --automatic-replacement-recognition no --node-lnn 2

4. To enable ARR for a specific node, you must perform the following steps through the command-line interface (CLI).
a. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
b. Run the following command:

isi devices config modify --automatic-replacement-recognition yes --node-lnn <node-

lnn>

If you don't specify a node LNN, the command will be applied to the entire cluster.
The following example command enables ARR for the node with the LNN of 2:

isi devices config modify --automatic-replacement-recognition yes --node-lnn 2

Managing drive firmware

If the firmware of any drive in a cluster becomes obsolete, the cluster performance or hardware reliability might be affected. To
ensure overall data integrity, update the drive firmware to the latest revision by installing the drive support package.
Determine whether the drive firmware on your cluster is the latest revision by viewing the status of the drive firmware.

NOTE: It is recommended that you contact PowerScale Technical Support before updating the drive firmware.

Drive firmware update overview

You can update the drive firmware in your nodes using drive support packages.

Drive Support Package

Download and install the drive support package from the Dell OneFS drivers site.
A drive support package provides the following:
● Updates the following drive configuration information for all drives in the cluster:
○ List of supported drives
○ Drive firmware metadata
○ SSD wear monitoring data
○ SAS and SATA settings and attributes
● Automatically updates the drive configuration information for any new or replacement drives before they are formatted and
used in the cluster.
NOTE: For clusters running OneFS 9.0.x and earlier, contact you support representative for assistance with updating the
drive support package.

General cluster administration 75

Install a drive support package
The following instructions are for performing a non-disruptive firmware update (NDFU) with a drive support package (DSP).

1. Go to the Dell EMC Support page that lists all the available versions of the drive support package.
2. Click the latest version of the drive support package and download the file.
NOTE: If you are unable to download the package, contact Dell EMC Support for assistance.

3. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
4. Copy the downloaded file to the /ifs/data/Isilon_Support directory through SCP, FTP, SMB, NFS, or any other
supported data-access protocols.
5. Install the package by running the following command:
isi_dsp_install /ifs/data/Isilon_Support/Drive_Support_<version>.isi
NOTE:
● You must run the isi_dsp_install command to install the drive support package. Do not use the isi upgrade
patches command.
● Running isi_dsp_install installs the drive support package on the entire cluster.
● The installation process takes care of installing all the necessary files from the drive support package followed by the
uninstallation of the package. You do not need to delete the package after its installation or before installing a later
version.

View drive firmware status

You can view the status of the drive firmware on the cluster to determine whether you need to update the firmware.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Perform the following task:
● To view the drive firmware status of drives on a specific node, run the following command:

OneFS 9.0 or later isi devices drive firmware list --node-lnn <node-number>
If a drive firmware update is not required, the Desired FW column is empty.

Update the drive firmware manually

You can update the drive firmware manually; updating the drive firmware ensures overall data integrity.
This procedure explains how to manually update the drive firmware for all drives in a single node.

NOTE: Do not restart or power off nodes when the drive firmware is being updated in a cluster or issues might occur.

1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. To update the drive firmware for all drives in a specific node, run the following command:
isi devices drive firmware update start all --node-lnn <node-number>
Updating the drive firmware of a single drive takes approximately 15 seconds, depending on the drive model.
CAUTION: Wait for all the drives in a node to finish updating before you initiate a firmware update on the
next node.

76 General cluster administration

Verify a drive firmware update
After you update the drive firmware in a node, confirm that the firmware is updated properly and that the affected drives are
operating correctly.
1. Ensure that no drive firmware updates are currently in progress by running the following command:

isi devices drive firmware update list

If a drive is currently being updated, [FW_UPDATE] appears in the status column.

2. Verify that all drives have been updated by running the following command:

isi devices drive firmware list --node-lnn all

If all drives have been updated, the Desired FW column is empty.

3. Verify that all affected drives are operating in a healthy state by running the following command:

isi devices drive list --node-lnn all

If a drive is operating in a healthy state, [HEALTHY] appears in the status column.

Drive firmware status information

You can view information about the status of the drive firmware through the OneFS command-line interface.
The following example shows the output of the isi devices drive firmware list command:

your-cluster-1# isi devices drive firmware list

Lnn Location Firmware Desired Model
------------------------------------------------------
2 Bay 1 A204 - HGST HUSMM1680ASS200
2 Bay 2 A204 - HGST HUSMM1680ASS200
2 Bay 3 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 4 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 5 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 6 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 7 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 8 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 9 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 10 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 11 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
2 Bay 12 MFAOABW0 MFAOAC50 HGST HUS724040ALA640
------------------------------------------------------
Total: 12

Where:

LNN Displays the LNN for the node that contains the drive.
Location Displays the bay number where the drive is installed.
Firmware Displays the version number of the firmware currently running on the drive.
Desired If the drive firmware should be upgraded, displays the version number of the drive firmware that the
firmware should be updated to.
Model Displays the model number of the drive.

NOTE: The isi devices drive firmware list command displays firmware information for the drives in the local
node only. You can display drive firmware information for the entire cluster, not just the local cluster, by running the
following command:
isi devices drive firmware list --node-lnn all

General cluster administration 77

Automatic update of drive firmware
Install the latest drive support package on a node to automatically update the firmware for a new or replacement drive.
The information within the drive support package determines whether the firmware of a drive must be updated before the drive
is formatted and used. If an update is available, the drive is automatically updated with the latest firmware.
NOTE: New and replacement drives added to a cluster are formatted regardless of the status of their firmware revision.
Refer to the Isilon Drive Support Package Release Notes for instructions for viewing current firmware versions and how to
manually perform drive firmware updates.

Managing cluster nodes

You can add and remove nodes from a cluster. You can also shut down or restart the entire cluster.

Add a node to a cluster

You can add a new node to an existing PowerScale cluster.
Before you add a node to a cluster, verify that an internal IP address is available. Add IP addresses as necessary before you add
a new node.
If a new node is running a different version of OneFS than the cluster, the system changes the node version of OneFS to match
the cluster.
NOTE: For specific information about version compatibility between OneFS and PowerScale hardware, refer to the
PowerScale Supportability and Compatibility Guide.
1. Click Cluster Management > Hardware Configuration > Add Nodes.
2. In the Available Nodes table, click Add for the node that you want to add to the cluster.

Remove a node from the cluster

You can remove a node from an OneFS cluster by smartfailing it. The system smartfails the node to ensure that data on the
node is transferred to other nodes in the cluster.
Removing a storage node from a cluster deletes the data from that node and transfers the data to existing nodes. Before the
system deletes the data, the FlexProtect job safely redistributes data across the nodes remaining in the cluster.
1. Navigate to the Cluster Management > Hardware Configuration > Nodes tab.
2. In the Manage Nodes area, select the node that you want to remove and then click More > Smartfail node. When you
remove a storage node, the Cluster Status area displays the smartfail progress. If you remove a non-storage accelerator
node, it is immediately removed from the cluster.
CAUTION: OneFS protects data that is stored on failing nodes or drives through a process called
smartfailing. During the smartfail process, OneFS places a device into quarantine. Data stored on
quarantined devices is read-only. While a device is quarantined, OneFS reprotects the data on the device
by distributing the data to other devices. After all data migration is complete, OneFS logically removes the
device from the cluster, the cluster logically changes its width to the new configuration, and the node or
drive can be physically replaced. OneFS smartfails devices only as a last resort. Although you can manually
smartfail nodes or drives, it is recommended that you first consult Dell Technologies Support. Occasionally
a device might fail before OneFS detects a problem. If a drive fails without being smartfailed, OneFS
automatically starts rebuilding the data to available free space on the cluster. However, because a node
might recover from a failure, if a node fails, OneFS does not start rebuilding data unless the node is logically
removed from the cluster.

78 General cluster administration

Modify the LNN of a node
You can modify the logical node number (LNN) of a node. This procedure is available only through the command-line interface
(CLI).
The nodes within your cluster can be renamed to any name or integer between 1 and 252. By changing the name of your node,
you are resetting the LNN.
NOTE: Although you can specify any integer as an LNN, it is recommended that you do not specify an integer greater than
252. Specifying LNNs above 252 can result in significant performance degradation.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Open the isi config command prompt by running the following command:

isi config

3. Run the lnnset command.

The following command switches the LNN of a node from 12 to 73:

lnnset 12 73

4. Enter commit .
5. Restart the node.
● To restart the node, run the reboot command.
The following command restarts a single node by specifying the LNN (logical node number):

reboot 7

Your SSH session may have to be reconnected before the new node name is automatically changed.

Shut down or restart a node

You can shut down or restart individual nodes or all the nodes in an PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Hardware Configuration > Nodes.
2. In the Nodes area, select one or more nodes by clicking the corresponding check boxes and specify an action:

Shut down Shuts down the node.

Reboot Stops then restarts the node.

Alternatively, select a node, and from the Actions column, perform one of the following options:
● Click More > Shut down node to shut down the node.
● Click More > Reboot node to stop and restart the node.

Upgrading PowerScale OneFS

Upgrading OneFS can be done using either the web interface or the command-line interface and includes a series of tasks that
Administrators must perform before, during, and after the upgrade. There are two options available for upgrading your OneFS
cluster: parallel upgrades or simultaneous upgrades.
In PowerScale OneFS [Link] and later versions, if you have Dell Technologies connectivity services enabled, the PowerScale
OneFS cluster can subscribe to upgrade notifications. Available upgrade package names and information are managed by Dell
Technologies according to cluster telemetry data and are automatically displayed in the WebUI. You can configure OneFS
to automatically download the available upgrade packages and install them with one click from the WebUI or command-line
interface. More information is in the PowerScale OneFS Upgrade Planning and Process Guide.
NOTE: In PowerScale OneFS [Link] and later versions, Dell Technologies recommends parallel nondisruptive upgrades.
Rolling upgrades are deprecated in PowerScale OneFS [Link] and later.

General cluster administration 79

For more information about how to plan, prepare, and perform an upgrade on your OneFS cluster, see the PowerScale OneFS
Upgrade Planning and Process Guide.

Patching OneFS
Patches are made available for supported versions of OneFS. Patching OneFS is performed by downloading the latest roll-up
patch (RUP) and installing it on your cluster.
There are three options available for patching a OneFS cluster: parallel patch, rolling patch, or simultaneous patch.
For more information about patching your OneFS cluster, see the PowerScale OneFS Current Patches article.

Dell Technologies connectivity services

Dell Technologies connectivity services are the remote connectivity system for transmitting events, logs, and telemetry from a
PowerScale OneFS cluster to Dell Technologies Services.
NOTE: Dell Technologies connectivity services replaces Secure Remote Services (SRS). Dell Technologies connectivity
services is recommended for all clusters that can send telemetry data off-cluster and is a replacement for the legacy
connectivity system - Secure Remote Services (SRS). SRS has reached end-of-service-life. It is recommended that new
PowerScale OneFS clusters use Dell Technologies connectivity services, and that existing OneFS clusters migrate from SRS
to Dell Technologies connectivity services immediately to avoid service disruption.
Dell Technologies connectivity services can connect to Dell Technologies Services directly or through a supported secure
connect gateway and is used for the following workflows:

Events CELOG sends alerts through the Dell Technologies connectivity services channel to Dell Technologies
Services.
Diagnostics See the Gather diagnostic log files Dell Technologies connectivity services section in this guide for
more details.
License activation See the Obtaining an Access Key and PIN Dell Technologies connectivity services section in this guide
for more details.
CloudIQ Telemetry data is sent using Dell Technologies connectivity services.
HealthCheck HealthCheck definitions are updated using Dell Technologies connectivity services.
Remote Support Remote Support uses Dell Technologies connectivity services and the Connectivity Hub to assist
customers with their clusters.

For more information, see the Secure Connect Gateway site on Dell Technologies Services.

Dell Technologies connectivity services prerequisites

To enable Dell Technologies connectivity services, you must meet the following prerequisites:

● OneFS cluster must be running OneFS [Link] (or later) and in a committed status.
● The reporting OneFS cluster has a dedicated IPv4 or IPv6 network.
● If upgrading, have your cluster access key and PIN ready.
● On a new cluster, Dell Technologies connectivity services automatically pulls the hardware key.
● User must belong to a role with ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT read and write access.
● If using gateway connectivity with Dell Technologies connectivity services you must use the latest version of secure connect
gateway on-premises.
● If using direct connectivity network port 443 and 8443 must be routed to Dell Technologies connectivity services network
endpoints.
● Enabling Dell Technologies connectivity services automatically disables Secure Remote Services, while also allowing
continued connectivity.

80 General cluster administration

Obtaining an Access Key and PIN
When upgrading your cluster, to enable Dell Technologies connectivity services, you must first obtain an Access Key and PIN
from Dell Technologies Services.
To generate your Access Key and PIN:
1. Go to the Dell Support site.
2. Sign in and paste your OneFS LicenseID into the top Dell Technologies search bar.
3. Click Generate Access Key and follow the instructions in the wizard to create a four-digit PIN. You will receive the Access
Key by email.
4. To provision the Dell Technologies connectivity services OneFS Access Code, see theDell Technologies connectivity services
section in this guide entitled Connect to Dell support with Secure Connect Gateway.
NOTE: On newly installed clusters, a hardware key is automatically used instead of an Access Key and PIN.

Enabling Dell Technologies connectivity services overview

To enable Dell Technologies connectivity services, you must perform the following steps:
1. Choose one or more static IPv4-family or IPv6-family subnets or pools for outbound communication.

NOTE: You cannot mix IPv4-family and IPv6-family subnets and pools. Choosing subnets and pools enforces a fully
qualified domain name (FQDN) hostname or IPv4 or IPv6 address validation for the gateway host and backup gateway
host.

2. Choose means of connectivity through direct connect to Dell Technologies Services or through secure connect gateway by
specifying host address and optional port to the primary and backup secure connect gateway.
3. Obtain an access key and pin from the Dell Technologies Services access key site.
4. Connect and provision Dell Technologies connectivity services.
NOTE: Secure Remote Services (SRS) users, enabling Dell Technologies connectivity services on your OneFS cluster
permanently disables SRS. SRS has reached end-of-service-life. It is recommended that new OneFS clusters use Dell
Technologies connectivity services. It is recommended that existing OneFS clusters migrate from SRS to Dell Technologies
connectivity services immediately to avoid service disruption.

Enabling Dell Technologies connectivity services - connect directly to Dell

support
Enable Dell Technologies connectivity services to connect directly to Dell support by performing the following steps:
1. On the Cluster Management > General settings screen, click the Connectivity Services tab.
2. Click the Connect now button to connect to Dell Technologies connectivity services.
3. To accept the Telemetry Notice, check the box and click the Accept button.
4. Enter the Primary Support Contact and Secondary Support Contact information and click the Next button.
5. Select one or more IPv4-family or IPv6 network pools or subnets to use when connecting.
6. Click the Connect now button.
7. Enter the Access key and PIN.
NOTE: On newly installed clusters, a hardware key is automatically used instead of an Access Key and PIN.

8. Click the Remote support tab to enable remote support services, configure telemetry and CloudIQ, and create support
cases automatically.
9. Click Finish Setup.

Disabling Dell Technologies connectivity services remote support

Disable Dell Technologies connectivity services remote support by performing the following steps:
1. Log into the OneFS WebUI.

General cluster administration 81

2. On the Cluster Management > General settings screen, click the Connectivity Services tab.
3. Click the Disable Dell Technologies connectivity services button.
4. The following message displays: Disabling Dell Technologies connectivity services will stop all
secure remote monitoring such as automated issue detection and case creation. Are you
sure?
5. Click Yes.

Connect to Dell support with Secure Connect Gateway

Connect to Dell support with Secure Connect Gateway by performing the following steps:
1. On the Cluster Management > General settings screen, click the Connectivity Services tab.
2. Click the Connect Dell Technologies connectivity services button.
3. To accept the Telemetry Notice, check the box and click the Accept button.
4. Enter the Primary Support Contact information and click the Next button.
5. Select one or more IPv4-family network subnets and pools to use when connecting.
6. Select Connect via Secure Connect Gateway.
7. Enter the gateway host and backup gateway host. Optionally provide the gateway port and backup gateway port.
8. Enter the Access key and PIN.
NOTE: On newly installed clusters, a hardware key is automatically used instead of an Access Key and PIN.

9. Select if you want to enable Remote support, CloudIQ telemetry data, and Automatic case creation.
10. Click the Finish Setup button.

Viewing Dell Technologies connectivity services settings overview

You can view Dell Technologies connectivity services status, pools and subnets that are used, and connection type once the
service is enabled.

Viewing Dell Technologies connectivity services settings

To view the Dell Technologies connectivity services status and options, in the Cluster Management > General Settings
window, click the Connectivity Services tab.

Configuring Dell Technologies connectivity services overview

Dell Technologies connectivity services allow you to configure the following:

● Contact information
● Connectivity options
● Remote support options
● Telemetry options

Configuring Dell Technologies connectivity services contact information

1. In the Cluster Management > General Settings window, click the Connectivity Services tab.
2. Click the Support Contact tab.
3. Enter the following Primary contact information:
● First name
● Last name
● Email
● Phone
● Preferred language

82 General cluster administration

4. (Optional) To add information for a secondary contact, click the Add secondary contact link.

Configuring Dell Technologies connectivity services connectivity

1. In the Cluster Management > General Settings window, click the Connectivity Services tab.
2. Click the Connection Type tab.
3. Enter the following connection information:
● Network Pools
● Connection type
● Gateway host
● Gateway port
● Backup gateway host
● Backup gateway port

Configuring Remote Support

1. In the Cluster Management > General Settings window, click the Connectivity Services tab.
2. To enable remote support for use with Dell Technologies connectivity services, click the Enable Remote support toggle.
3. To enable automatic support case creation, click the Enable Dell Technologies connectivity services toggle.

Configuring Telemetry
1. To view the telemetry options in the Cluster Management > General Settings window, click the Connectivity Services
tab.
2. To enable telemetry data to be sent to CloudIQ, in the Cluster Management > General Settings window, click the Enable
CloudIQ telemetry data button.

Secure Remote Services (SRS) Summary

IMPORTANT: Secure Remote Services (SRS) has reached End of Service Life (EOSL). SRS can no longer be enabled on
OneFS [Link] and later versions. It is recommended that new OneFS clusters use Dell Technologies connectivity services.
NOTE: Clusters upgrading from versions prior to OneFS [Link] with SRS enabled will be automatically migrated to
Dell Technologies connectivity services on the upgrade commit, and SRS will no longer be accessible. See the following
knowledge base article for more information about Dell Technologies connectivity services.

General cluster administration 83

 6
Access zones
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Data Security overview
• Base directory guidelines
• Access zones best practices
• Access zones on a SyncIQ secondary cluster
• Access zone limits
• Quality of service
• Zone-based Role-based Access Control (zRBAC)
• Zone-specific authentication providers
• Managing access zones

Data Security overview

The default view of a PowerScale cluster is that of one physical machine. But you can partition a cluster into multiple virtual
containers called access zones. Access zones allow you to isolate data and control who can access data in each zone.
Access zones support configuration settings for authentication and identity management services on a cluster. Access zones
enable you to configure authentication providers and provision protocol directories such as SMB shares and NFS exports on a
zone-by-zone basis. Creating an access zone automatically creates a local provider, which allows you to configure each access
zone with a list of local users and groups. You can also authenticate through a different authentication provider in each access
zone.
To control data access, you associate the access zone with a groupnet. A groupnet is a top-level networking container that
manages DNS client connection settings and contains subnets and IP address pools. When you create an access zone, you
must specify a groupnet. If a groupnet is not specified, the access zone references the default groupnet. Multiple access zones
can reference a single groupnet. You can direct incoming connections to the access zone through a specific IP address pool in
the groupnet. Associating an access zone with an IP address pool restricts authentication to the associated access zone and
reduces the number of available and accessible SMB shares and NFS exports.
An advantage to multiple access zones is the ability to configure audit protocol access for individual access zones. You can
modify the default list of successful and failed protocol audit events and then generate reports through a third-party tool for an
individual access zone.
A cluster includes an access zone that is named System where you manage all aspects of a cluster and other access zones. By
default, all cluster IP addresses connect to the System zone. Role-based access, which primarily allows configuration actions,
is available through only the System zone. All administrators, including those given privileges by a role, must connect to the
System zone to configure a cluster. The System zone is automatically configured to reference the default groupnet on the
cluster, which is groupnet0.
Configuration management of a non-System access zone is not permitted through SSH, the OneFS API, or the web
administration interface.

Base directory guidelines

A base directory defines the file system tree that is exposed by an access zone. The access zone cannot grant access to any
files outside of the base directory. Assign a base directory to each access zone.
Base directories restrict path options for several features such as SMB shares, NFS exports, the HDFS root directory, and the
local provider home directory template.
Data isolation is required within an access zone. It is recommended that you create a unique base directory path that is not
identical to or does not overlap another base directory, except for the System access zone. For example, do not specify /ifs/

84 Access zones
data/hr as the base directory for both the zone2 and zone3 access zones. Or if /ifs/data/hr is assigned to zone2, do not
assign /ifs/data/hr/personnel to zone3.
OneFS supports overlapping data between access zones for cases where your workflows require shared data. However, the
added complexity to the access zone configuration might lead to future issues with client access. For the best results from
overlapping data between access zones, it is recommended that the access zones also share the same authentication providers.
Shared providers ensures that users will have consistent identity information when accessing the same data through different
access zones.
If you cannot configure the same authentication providers for access zones with shared data, ensure the following:
● Select Active Directory as the authentication provider in each access zone. This causes files to store globally unique SIDs as
the on-disk identity, eliminating the chance of users from different zones gaining access to each other's data.
● Avoid selecting local, LDAP, and NIS as the authentication providers in the access zones. These authentication providers use
UIDs and GIDs, which are not guaranteed to be globally unique. This results in a high probability that users from different
zones will be able to access each other's data.
● Set the on-disk identity to native, or preferably, to SID. When user mappings exist between Active Directory and UNIX users
or if the Services for Unix option is enabled for the Active Directory provider, OneFS stores SIDs as the on-disk
identity instead of UIDs.

Access zones best practices

You can avoid configuration problems on the PowerScale cluster when creating access zones by following best practices
guidelines.

Table 16. Best Practice Guidelines

Best practice Details
Create unique base directories. To achieve data isolation, the base directory path of each
access zone should be unique and should not overlap or be
nested inside the base directory of another access zone.
Overlapping is allowed, but should only be used if your
workflows require shared data.
Separate the function of the System zone from other access Reserve the System zone for configuration access, and create
zones. additional zones for data access. Move current data out of the
System zone and into a new access zone.
Create access zones to isolate data access for different Do not create access zones if a workflow requires data
clients or users. sharing between different classes of clients or users.
Assign only one authentication provider of each type to each An access zone is limited to a single Active Directory
access zone. provider; however, OneFS allows multiple LDAP, NIS, and
file authentication providers in each access zone. It is
recommended that you assign only one type of each provider
per access zone in order to simplify administration. is unlikely
but possible if overlapping UIDs/GIDs are present
Avoid overlapping UID or GID ranges for authentication The potential for zone access conflicts in the same access
providers in the same access zone. zone.

Access zones on a SyncIQ secondary cluster

You can create access zones on a SyncIQ secondary cluster that is used for backup and disaster recovery, with some limitations.
If you have an active SyncIQ license, you can maintain a secondary PowerScale cluster for backup and failover purposes in case
your primary server should go offline. When you run a replication job on the primary server, file data is replicated to the backup
server. That includes directory paths and other metadata that is associated with those files.
However, system configuration settings, such as access zones, are not replicated to the secondary server. In a failover scenario,
the configuration settings of the primary and secondary clusters should be similar, if not identical.

Access zones 85
Usually, including with access zones, it is recommended that you configure system settings before you run a SyncIQ replication
job. The reason is that a replication job places target directories in read-only mode. If you attempt to create an access zone
where the base directory is already in read-only mode, OneFS generates an error message.

Access zone limits

You can follow access zone limits guidelines to help size the workloads on the OneFS system.
If you configure multiple access zones on a PowerScale cluster, limits guidelines are recommended for best system performance.
The limits that are described in the PowerScale OneFS Technical Specifications Guide are recommended for heavy enterprise
workflows on a cluster, treating each access zone as a separate physical server. The Technical Specifications Guide and related
PowerScale documentation are available on Dell Online Support.

Quality of service
You can set upper bounds on quality of service by assigning specific physical resources to each access zone.
Quality of service addresses physical hardware performance characteristics that can be measured, improved, and sometimes
guaranteed. Characteristics that are measured for quality of service include but are not limited to throughput rates, CPU usage,
and disk capacity. When you share physical hardware in a PowerScale cluster across multiple virtual instances, competition
exists for the following services:
● CPU
● Memory
● Network bandwidth
● Disk I/O
● Disk capacity
Access zones do not provide logical quality of service guarantees to these resources, but you can partition these resources
between access zones on a single cluster. The following table describes a few ways to partition resources to improve the quality
of service:

Table 17. Resources for Access Zones

Use Notes
NICs You can assign specific NICs on specific nodes to an
IP address pool that is associated with an access zone.
By assigning these NICs, you can determine the nodes
and interfaces that are associated with an access zone.
This enables the separation of CPU, memory, and network
bandwidth.
SmartPools SmartPools are separated into multiple tiers of high, medium,
and low performance. The data written to a SmartPool is
written only to the disks in the nodes of that pool.
Associating an IP address pool with only the nodes of a single
SmartPool enables partitioning of disk I/O resources.

SmartQuotas Through SmartQuotas, you can limit disk capacity by a user

or a group or in a directory. By applying a quota to an access
zone base directory, you can limit the disk capacity that is
used in that access zone.

Zone-based Role-based Access Control (zRBAC)

You can assign roles and a subset of privileges to users on a per-access-zone basis.
Role-based Access Control (RBAC) supports granting users with privileges and the ability to perform certain tasks. Tasks can
be performed through the Platform API, such as creating or modifying or viewing NFS exports, SMB shares, authentication
providers, and various cluster settings.

86 Access zones
Users may want to perform these tasks inside a single access zone, enabling a local administrator to create SMB shares for
a specific access zone, for example, but disallowing that administrator from modifying configurations that would affect other
access zones.
Previous to zRBAC, only users in the System Access Zone were given privileges. These users could view and modify
configurations in all other access zones. Thus, a user with a specific privilege was a global administrator for configuration
that was accessible through that privilege.
zRBAC enables you to assign roles and a subset of privileges that must be assigned on a per-access-zone basis. Administrative
tasks that the zone-aware privileges covers can be delegated to an administrator of a specific access zone. As a result, you get
the ability to create a local administrator who is responsible for a single access zone. A user in the System Access Zone can
affect all other access zones, and remains a global administrator.
Use the isi auth privileges command to list the available privileges for an access zone:

isi auth privileges --zone <zone name>

Where <zone name> is the zone whose privileges you want to list. For example, the following command lists the available
privileges for a zone named zone3:

isi auth privileges --zone zone3

Integrated roles in non-System zones

The following table lists and describes the integrated roles and their privileges that are provided in non-System access zones.

Table 18. Integrated Roles

Role Description Privileges
BasicUserRole Provides limited permissions ● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI
appropriate for APEX File ● ISI_PRIV_AUTH
Storage Servicesusers. ● ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS
● ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_ACLS
● ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_GLOBAL
● ISI_PRIV_AUTH_ZONES
● ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER
● ISI_PRIV_HDFS
● ISI_PRIV_HDFS_RACKS
● ISI_PRIV_HDFS_SETTINGS
● ISI_PRIV_NFS
● ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS
● ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_GLOBAL
● ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_ZONE
● ISI_PRIV_S3
● ISI_PRIV_S3_MYKEYS
● ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS
● ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS_GLOBAL
● ISI_PRIV_SMB
● ISI_PRIV_SMB_SESSIONS
● ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS
● ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_GLOBAL
● ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_SHARE
● ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS
ZoneAdmin Allows administration of ● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI
configuration aspects that are ● ISI_PRIV_AUDIT
related to the current access ● ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER
zone.
● ISI_PRIV_HDFS
● ISI_PRIV_NFS
● ISI_PRIV_PAPI_CONFIG

Access zones 87
Table 18. Integrated Roles (continued)
Role Description Privileges
● ISI_PRIV_S3
● ISI_PRIV_SMB
● ISI_PRIV_VCENTER
● ISI_PRIV_NS_TRAVERSE
● ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS
ZoneSecurityAd Allows administration of ● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI
min security configuration aspects ● ISI_PRIV_AUTH
that are related to the current ● ISI_PRIV_ROLE
access zone.

NOTE: These roles do not have any default users who are automatically assigned to them.

Zone-specific authentication providers

Some information about how authentication providers work with zRBAC.
Authentication providers are global objects in a OneFS cluster. However, as part of the zRBAC feature, an authentication
provider is implicitly associated with the access zone from which it was created, and has certain behaviors that are based on
that association.
● All access zones can view and use an authentication provider that is created from the System zone. However, only a request
from the System access zone can modify or delete it.
● An authentication provider that is created from (or on behalf of) a non-System access zone can only be viewed or modified
or deleted by that access zone and the System zone.
● A local authentication provider is implicitly created whenever an access zone is created, and is associated with that access
zone.
● A local authentication provider for a non-System access zone may no longer be used by another access zone. If you would
like to share a local authentication provider among access zones, then it must be the System zone's local provider.
● The name of an authentication provider is still global. Therefore, authentication providers must have unique names. Thus, you
cannot create two LDAP providers named ldap5 in different access zones, for example.
● The Kerberos provider can only be created from the System access zone.
● Creating two distinct Active Directory (AD) providers to the same AD may require the use of the AD multi-instancing
feature. To assign a unique name to the AD provider, use --instance.

Managing access zones

You can create access zones on a PowerScale cluster, view and modify access zone settings, and delete access zones.

Create an access zone

You can create an access zone and define a base directory and authentication providers.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. Click Create an access zone.
3. In the Zone Name field, type a name for the access zone.
4. In the Zone Base Directory field, type or browse to the base directory path for the access zone.
5. If the directory you set does not exist in the system, select the Create zone base directory if it does not exist checkbox.
6. From the Groupnet list, select a groupnet to associate with the access zone. The access zone can only be associated with
IP address pools and authentication providers that share the selected groupnet.
7. Optional: Click a provider name in the Available authentication providers list and click Add to move the provider to the
Selected authentication providers list.
8. Click Create Zone.

88 Access zones
9. If the directory you set overlaps with the base directory of another access zone, click Create at the system prompt to
confirm that you want to allow access to users in both access zones.
Before users can connect to an access zone, you must associate it with an IP address pool.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Related tasks
Associate an IP address pool with an access zone

Assign an overlapping base directory

You can create overlapping base directories between access zones for cases where your workflows require shared data.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. Click View/Edit next to the access zone that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Access Zone Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays theEdit Access Zone Details window.
4. In the Zone Base Directory field, type or browse to the base directory path for the access zone.
5. Click Save Changes.
The system prompts you to confirm that the directory you set overlaps with the base directory of another access zone.
6. Click Update at the system prompt to confirm that you want to allow data access to users in both access zones.
7. Click Close.
Before users can connect to an access zone, you must associate it with an IP address pool.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Manage authentication providers

You can add and manage authentication providers.
1. Click Access > Authentication providers.
2. Click the tab for the Authentication provider type you would like to manage.
3. Optional: To create a provider, click Add a Provider to open the Add a Provider window and enter the necessary
information.
a. Click Add Provider to create the provider with the information you provided.
4. To edit a provider, click View/Edit next to the provider you want to edit.
a. Once you have made your edits, click Edit provider to save your changes.

Manage authentication providers in an access zone

You can add and remove authentication providers to an access zone and manage the order in which the providers are checked
during the authentication process.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. Click View/Edit next to the access zone that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Access Zone Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Access Zone Details window.

Access zones 89
4. Optional: To add a provider to the access zone, click a provider name in the Available authentication providers list and
click Add.
a. To change the order of the providers, in the Selected authentication providers list, click the up or down arrows.
5. To remove the provider from the access zone, click a provider name in the Selected authentication providers list and
click Remove.
6. To save your updates, click Save changes.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Associate an IP address pool with an access zone

You can associate an IP address pool with an access zone to ensure that clients can connect to the access zone only through
the range of IP addresses assigned to the pool.
The IP address pool must belong to the same groupnet referenced by the access zone.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the Access Zone list, select the access zone you want to associate with the pool.
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Modify an access zone

You can modify the properties of any access zone with some exceptions: you cannot change the name of the built-in System
zone, and you cannot modify the selected groupnet.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. Click View/Edit next to the access zone that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Access Zone Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays theEdit Access Zone Details window.
4. Modify the settings you want, click Save Changes, and then click Close.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Delete an access zone

You can delete any access zone except the built-in System zone. When you delete an access zone, all associated authentication
providers remain available to other zones, but IP addresses are not reassigned to other zones. SMB shares, NFS exports, and
HDFS data paths are deleted when you delete an access zone; however, the directories and data still exist, and you can map
new shares, exports, or paths in another access zone.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. From the table of access zones, click Delete next to the access zone that you want to delete.
3. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.

90 Access zones
Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

View a list of access zones

You can view a list of all access zones on the cluster.
1. Click Access > Access Zones.
2. Click View/Edit next to the access zone that you want to view.
The system displays the View Access Zone Details window.
3. Click Close.

Related concepts
Data Security overview
Managing access zones

Modify a role in an access zone

You can modify zone-level roles.
You can only add existing users to a role: the modify role process does not create users for you.
The role workflow navigation bar appears across the top of each role task window. The navigation bar indicates each step in the
update process:

Basic settings > Members > Privileges > Summary

OneFS highlights each step as you go. To return to a previous step, click that step in the navigation bar.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. In the Roles area, select a role and click View / Edit.
The Edit role details window appears. The workflow navigation bar Basic settings step is highlighted.
3. Confirm the role name and description and then click Next.
The Members window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
4. To verify or add role members, click Add Member.
The Search member dialog box appears.
5. Select one of following options:
● Users
● Groups
● Well-known SIDs
6. If you selected User or Group, locate the user or group through one of the following methods:
● Type the Username or Group Name you want to search for in the text field.
● Select the authentication provider you want to search for from the Providers list. Only providers that are currently
configured and enabled on the cluster are listed.
7. Click Search.
A list of users or groups appears in the Search member window.
8. To add a user or group, select a user name, group name, or a well-known SID from the search results to add as members to
the role.
9. Click Select user.
10. From the Current access zone list, select the appropriate zone-level role that you want to modify.
The roles that are associated with that access zone is displayed.
11. Modify the members as needed and then click Next.
The Privileges window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
12. Modify the privileges as needed by clicking the appropriate permissions in the Permission column.
Permissions are - (no permission), R (read), X (run), and W (write).
a. To assign subprivileges, click the down arrow of the parent privilege to view and assign subprivileges.

Access zones 91
 b. When you finish, click Next.
The Summary window appears.
13. Review the modified role, and then click Submit.
14. Click Close.

92 Access zones
 7
Authentication
Topics:
• Authentication overview
• Authentication provider features
• Security Identifier (SID) history overview
• Supported authentication providers
• Active Directory
• LDAP
• NIS
• Kerberos authentication
• File provider
• Local provider
• Multifactor authentication (MFA)
• Root Lockdown Mode
• CAC/PIV authentication
• Single sign-on overview
• Multi-instance active directory
• LDAP public keys
• Managing Active Directory providers
• Managing LDAP providers
• Managing NIS providers
• Managing MIT Kerberos authentication
• Managing file providers
• Managing local users and groups
• Managing CAC/PIV
• Managing SSO

Authentication overview
You can manage authentication settings for your cluster, including authentication providers, Active Directory domains, LDAP,
NIS, and Kerberos authentication, file and local providers, multi-factor authentication, and more.

Authentication provider features

You can configure authentication providers for your environment.
Authentication providers support the features that are described in the following table.

Table 19. Supported Features

Feature Description
Authentication All authentication providers support cleartext authentication.
You can configure some providers to support NTLM or
Kerberos authentication also.
Users and groups OneFS allows you to manage users and groups directly on the
cluster.
Netgroups Specific to NFS, netgroups restrict access to NFS exports.

Authentication 93
Table 19. Supported Features (continued)
Feature Description
UNIX-centric user and group properties Login shell, home directory, UID, and GID. Missing information
is supplemented by configuration templates or additional
authentication providers.
Windows-centric user and group properties NetBIOS domain and SID. Missing information is supplemented
by configuration templates.

Related concepts
Authentication overview

Security Identifier (SID) history overview

SID history preserves the membership and access rights of users and groups during an Active Directory domain migration.
Security identifier (SID) history preserves the membership and access rights of users and groups during an Active Directory
domain migration. When an object is moved to a new domain, the new domain generates a new SID with a unique prefix and
records the previous SID information in an LDAP field. This process ensures that users and groups retain the same access rights
and privileges in the new domain that they had in the previous domain.
Note the following when working with historical SIDS.
● Use historical SIDs only to maintain historical file access and authentication privileges.
● Do not use historical SIDs to add new users, groups, or roles.
● Always use the current object SID as defined by the domain to modify a user or to add a user to any role or group.

Supported authentication providers

You can configure local and remote authentication providers to authenticate or deny user access to a cluster.
The following table compares the features that are available with each of the authentication providers that OneFS supports.
In the following table, an x indicates that a feature is fully supported by a provider; an asterisk (*) indicates that additional
configuration or support from another provider is required.

Table 20. Authentication Provider Specifications

Authentication NTLM Kerberos User/group Netgroup UNIX Windows
provider management s propertie propertie
s (RFC s
2307)
Active Directory x x * x
LDAP * x x x *
NIS x x
Local x x x x
File x x x
MIT Kerberos x * * *

Related concepts
Authentication overview

94 Authentication
Active Directory
Active Directory is a Microsoft implementation of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), Kerberos, and DNS
technologies that can store information about network resources. Active Directory can serve many functions, but the primary
reason for joining the cluster to an Active Directory domain is to perform user and group authentication.
You can join the cluster to an Active Directory (AD) domain by specifying the fully qualified domain name, which can be
resolved to an IPv4 or an IPv6 address, and a user name with join permission. When the cluster joins an AD domain, a single
AD machine account is created. The machine account establishes a trust relationship with the domain and enables the cluster
to authenticate and authorize users in the Active Directory forest. By default, the machine account is named the same as the
cluster. If the cluster name is more than 15 characters long, the name is hashed and displayed after joining the domain.
OneFS supports NTLM and Microsoft Kerberos for authentication of Active Directory domain users. NTLM client credentials
are obtained from the login process and then presented in an encrypted challenge/response format to authenticate. Microsoft
Kerberos client credentials are obtained from a key distribution center (KDC) and then presented when establishing server
connections. For greater security and performance, we recommend that you implement Kerberos, according to Microsoft
guidelines, as the primary authentication protocol for Active Directory.
Each Active Directory provider must be associated with a groupnet. The groupnet is a top-level networking container that
manages hostname resolution against DNS nameservers and contains subnets and IP address pools. The groupnet specifies
which networking properties the Active Directory provider will use when communicating with external servers. The groupnet
associated with the Active Directory provider cannot be changed. Instead you must delete the Active Directory provider and
create it again with the new groupnet association.
You can add an Active Directory provider to an access zone as an authentication method for clients connecting through
the access zone. OneFS supports multiple instances of Active Directory on a PowerScale cluster; however, you can assign
only one Active Directory provider per access zone. The access zone and the Active Directory provider must reference the
same groupnet. Configure multiple Active Directory instances only to grant access to multiple sets of mutually-untrusted
domains. Otherwise, configure a single Active Directory instance if all domains have a trust relationship. You can discontinue
authentication through an Active Directory provider by removing the provider from associated access zones.

Related concepts
Authentication overview
Managing Active Directory providers

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol that enables you to define, query, and modify
directory services and resources.
OneFS can authenticate users and groups against an LDAP repository in order to grant them access to the cluster. OneFS
supports Kerberos authentication for an LDAP provider.
The LDAP service supports the following features:
● Users, groups, and netgroups.
● Configurable LDAP schemas. For example, the ldapsam schema allows NTLM authentication over the SMB protocol for users
with Windows-like attributes.
● Simple bind authentication, with and without TLS.
● Redundancy and load balancing across servers with identical directory data.
● Multiple LDAP provider instances for accessing servers with different user data.
● Encrypted passwords.
● IPv4 and IPv6 server URIs.
Each LDAP provider must be associated with a groupnet. The groupnet is a top-level networking container that manages
hostname resolution against DNS nameservers and contains subnets and IP address pools. The groupnet specifies which
networking properties the LDAP provider will use when communicating with external servers. The groupnet associated with
the LDAP provider cannot be changed. Instead you must delete the LDAP provider and create it again with the new groupnet
association.
You can add an LDAP provider to an access zone as an authentication method for clients connecting through the access
zone. An access zone may include at most one LDAP provider. The access zone and the LDAP provider must reference the
same groupnet. You can discontinue authentication through an LDAP provider by removing the provider from associated access
zones.

Authentication 95
Related concepts
Authentication overview
Managing LDAP providers

NIS
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides authentication and identity uniformity across local area networks. OneFS
includes an NIS authentication provider that enables you to integrate the cluster with your NIS infrastructure.
NIS, designed by Sun Microsystems, can authenticate users and groups when they access the cluster. The NIS provider exposes
the passwd, group, and netgroup maps from an NIS server. Hostname lookups are also supported. You can specify multiple
servers for redundancy and load balancing.
Each NIS provider must be associated with a groupnet. The groupnet is a top-level networking container that manages
hostname resolution against DNS nameservers and contains subnets and IP address pools. The groupnet specifies which
networking properties the NIS provider will use when communicating with external servers. The groupnet associated with
the NIS provider cannot be changed. Instead you must delete the NIS provider and create it again with the new groupnet
association.
You can add an NIS provider to an access zone as an authentication method for clients connecting through the access zone. An
access zone may include at most one NIS provider. The access zone and the NIS provider must reference the same groupnet.
You can discontinue authentication through an NIS provider by removing the provider from associated access zones.

NOTE: NIS is different from NIS+, which OneFS does not support.

Related concepts
Authentication overview
Managing NIS providers

Kerberos authentication
Kerberos is a network authentication provider that negotiates encryption tickets for securing a connection. OneFS supports
Microsoft Kerberos and MIT Kerberos authentication providers on a cluster. If you configure an Active Directory provider,
support for Microsoft Kerberos authentication is provided automatically. MIT Kerberos works independently of Active Directory.
For MIT Kerberos authentication, you define an administrative domain, also called a realm. Within this realm, an authentication
server has the authority to authenticate a user, host, or service; the server can resolve to either IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. You
can optionally define a Kerberos domain to allow additional domain extensions to be associated with a realm.
The authentication server in a Kerberos environment is called the Key Distribution Center (KDC) and distributes encrypted
tickets. When a user authenticates with an MIT Kerberos provider within a realm, a cryptographic ticket-granting ticket (TGT) is
created. The TGT enables user access to a service principal name (SPN).
Each MIT Kerberos provider is associated with a groupnet. The groupnet is a top-level networking container that manages
hostname resolution against DNS nameservers. It contains subnets and IP address pools. The groupnet specifies which
networking properties the Kerberos provider uses when it communicates with external servers. The groupnet associated with
the Kerberos provider cannot be changed. Instead, delete the Kerberos provider and create it again with the new groupnet
association.
You can add an MIT Kerberos provider to an access zone as an authentication method for clients connecting through the
access zone. An access zone may include at most one MIT Kerberos provider. The access zone and the Kerberos provider must
reference the same groupnet. You can discontinue authentication through an MIT Kerberos provider by removing the provider
from associated access zones.
NOTE: Do not use the NULL account with Kerberos authentication. Using the NULL account for Kerberos authentication
can cause issues.

96 Authentication
Session ticket lifetimes
The duration of connections that are authenticated using Kerberos is based on the Kerberos ticket lifetime settings. These
settings are controlled on the Kerberos Distribution Center (KDC). For information about configuring maximum lifetimes, see the
appropriate provider documentation as shown in the following table.
SMB only checks ticket validity during initial authentication. As a result, SMB connections may remain valid and in use after
Kerberos tickets expire. For information about immediately closing active SMB sessions, contact Dell Technologies Support.

Table 21. Provider Types

Provider type Documentation for configuring maximum lifetimes
Microsoft Kerberos with Active See the following Microsoft documentation:
Directory Domain Services ● Maximum lifetime for service ticket
● Maximum lifetime for user ticket
MIT Kerberos See the MIT Kerberos documentation for configuring the [Link] file. The
max_life setting in [Link] controls the lifetime duration.

Related concepts
Authentication overview

Keytabs and SPNs overview

A Key Distribution Center (KDC) is an authentication server that stores accounts and keytabs for users connecting to a network
service within a cluster. A keytab is a key table that stores keys to validate and encrypt Kerberos tickets.
One of the fields in a keytab entry is a service principal name (SPN). An SPN identifies a unique service instance within a
cluster. Each SPN is associated with a specific key in the KDC. Users can use the SPN and its associated keys to obtain
Kerberos tickets that enable access to various services on the cluster. A member of the SecurityAdmin role can create new keys
for the SPNs and modify them later as necessary. An SPN for a service typically appears as <service>/<fqdn>@<realm>.
NOTE: SPNs must match the SmartConnect zone name and the FQDN hostname of the cluster. If the SmartConnect zone
settings are changed, you must update the SPNs on the cluster to match the changes.

MIT Kerberos protocol support

MIT Kerberos supports certain standard network communication protocols such as HTTP, HDFS, and NFS. MIT Kerberos does
not support SMB, SSH, and FTP protocols.
For the NFS protocol support, MIT Kerberos must be enabled for an export and also a Kerberos provider must be included within
the access zone.

File provider
A file provider enables you to supply an authoritative third-party source of user and group information to a PowerScale
cluster. A third-party source is useful in UNIX and Linux environments that synchronize /etc/passwd, /etc/group, and
etc/netgroup files across multiple servers.
Standard BSD /etc/[Link] and /etc/group database files serve as the file provider backing store on a cluster. You
generate the [Link] file by running the pwd_mkdb command in the OneFS command-line interface (CLI). You can script
updates to the database files.
On a PowerScale cluster, a file provider hashes passwords with libcrypt. For the best security, it is recommended that
you use the Modular Crypt Format in the source /etc/passwd file to determine the hashing algorithm. OneFS supports the
following algorithms for the Modular Crypt Format:
● MD5
● NT-Hash
● SHA-256

Authentication 97
● SHA-512
For information about other available password formats, run the man 3 crypt command in the CLI to view the crypt man
pages.
NOTE: The built-in System file provider includes services to list, manage, and authenticate against system accounts such as
root, admin, and nobody. It is recommended that you do not modify the System file provider.

Related concepts
Authentication overview

Local provider
The local provider provides authentication and lookup facilities for user accounts added by an administrator.
Local authentication is useful when Active Directory, LDAP, or NIS directory services are not configured or when a specific user
or application needs access to the cluster. Local groups can include built-in groups and Active Directory groups as members.
In addition to configuring network-based authentication sources, you can manage local users and groups by configuring a local
password policy for each node in the cluster. OneFS settings specify password complexity, password age and re-use, and
password-attempt lockout policies.

Related concepts
Authentication overview

Multifactor authentication (MFA)

Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is a method of computer access control in which you are only granted access after
successfully presenting several separate pieces of evidence to an authentication mechanism. Typically, authentication uses
at least two of the following categories: Knowledge (something you know); possession (something you have), and inherence
(something you are).
MFA is a great way to increase the security of a cluster. Increasing the security of privileged account access (For example,
administrators) to a cluster is the best way to prevent unauthorized access.
MFA enables the LSASS daemon to require and accept multiple forms of credentials other than a username or password
combination for some forms of authentication. There exist many ways to implement MFA with the most common being public or
private key authentication.
The MFA feature adds PAPI support for SSH configuration using public keys that are stored in LDAP and Multi-Factor
Authentication support for SSH through the Duo security platform. Duo MFA supports the Duo App, SMS, and Voice.
The use of Duo requires an account with the Duo service. Duo provides a host, ikey, and skey to use for configuration (skey
should be treated as a secure credential).
Duo MFA is on top of existing password and/or public key requirements. If the SSH configuration type is set to any or custom,
Duo cannot be configured. Only specific users or groups may be enabled to bypass MFA if specified on the Duo server. Duo
enables the creation of one time or date/time limited bypass keys for a specific user. Also, the bypass keys can be permanent.

Root Lockdown Mode

Root Lockdown Mode (RLM) reduces the risks that are associated with using the root account.
This feature ensures that protections that are enabled by other features cannot be overridden by the root account, by disabling
and preventing access to the root account.
Both Hardening and SmartLock licenses are required to apply RLM. RLM adds the root-lockdown hardening profile which can be
applied or disabled. The STIG and root-lockdown hardening profiles cannot be applied to one cluster simultaneously.

NOTE: RLM cannot be enabled if the cluster has previously been configured to be in Compliance Mode.

98 Authentication
Enable Root Lockdown Mode
Enable Root Lockdown Mode (RLM) on the cluster.
The enable RLM procedure should be performed during a maintenance window where users expect cluster downtime.
Both the SmartLock license and Hardening license must be configured to enable RLM. Also, consider having more granular
control over which administrative accounts can control RLM, or if you prefer to add users to a combination of existing default
roles, like SystemAdmin and SecurityAdmin, which would grant a user all necessary privileges to administer RLM. To create one
or more administrative accounts to manage RLM, use the isi auth roles create command.
1. Before enabling Root Lockdown Mode (RLM), ensure that the root account password is saved somewhere secure. If you are
not sure what the root account password is, it can be changed by running the following command as root, where <user> is
the root account, and <password> is the password of the root account:

isi auth users create <user> --enabled true --set-password <password>

2. Configure the account of last resort, compadmin. First reset the compadmin password by running the following command:

isi auth users reset-password compadmin

And then change the compadmin password, by running the following command:

isi auth users change-password compadmin

When prompted, enter the compadmin password.

3. Set a shell for the compadmin account by running the following command. Valid shells are: /bin/zsh and /usr/
local/bin/zsh.

isi auth users modify compadmin <shell>

4. Add privileged users and privileges to newly created administrative accounts by running the following command, where
<admin> is the name of the account that is created in the previous step, <user> is the user to add to that account, and
<privilege> is the specific privilege to grant the user. Append the command with --add-priv <privilege> for each
additional privilege to add.

isi auth roles modify <admin> --add-user <user> --add-priv <privilege>

5. Use the Hardening Engine report for the root lockdown profile to view the state of RLM. Verify that the
hardening rules are Applied, except for the sysctrl rules. Hardening rules are: require_disabled_STIG_profile,
require_rlm_aclr_users, require_rlm_cluter_state.

isi hardening report view root-lockdown

6. Apply the root-lockdown profile by running the following command:

isi hardening apply root-lockdown

7. Run the root-lockdown hardening report again to ensure all hardening rules except for the sysctls rules are Applied.

isi hardening report view root-lockdown

8. Reboot the entire cluster to apply the sysctl rules.

9. When the cluster has rebooted, create a hardening report by running:

isi hardening report create

View the hardening report and be sure all rules in the root-lockdown hardening profile are Applied. RLM is fully enabled.

Authentication 99
Disable Root Lockdown Mode
Disable Root Lockdown Mode (RLM) on the cluster.
1. Run the following command to start the disable process:

isi hardening disable root-lockdown

2. Use the Hardening Engine report for the root lockdown profile to view the state of RLM. All rules should be applied except
for the require_password_single_user_mode, set_rlm_cluster_wide, and disable_kdb rules that are Not
Applied.

isi hardening report view root-lockdown

3. Reboot the entire cluster to disable the sysctl rules. Once the cluster has fully booted, generate a new hardening report to
verify that the sysctl rules are Not Applied on all nodes.
4. Run the disable command again, now that the sysctls are disabled, to reenable the root account:

isi hardening disable root-lockdown

5. Rerun the hardening report from step 2 to verify that the hardening rules are all Not Applied. Once the Hardening rules
are Not Applied, RLM is fully disabled and the root account password is the same as it was before enabling RLM. All rules
except for the precheck rules should be Not Applied.

CAC/PIV authentication
OneFS supports authentication to the cluster over SSH using a Common Access Card or Personal Identity Verification (CAC/
PIV) card.
When a user logs in, the cluster verifies that the user possesses a key that is signed by the Certificate Authority (CA). The user
must have a x509 compatible SSH client such as SecureCRT or pkix-ssh. Each OneFS node ships with pkix-ssh as the default
SSH client.
OneFS also accepts passwords for authentication, to only allow certificates, you must also disallow non-publickey authentication
methods using isi ssh settings modify --auth-settings-template=publickey.
This feature cannot be uninstalled. If an uncommitted upgrade is rolled back, no files or configurations are left on the cluster.
To configure CAC/PIV, use the ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS privilege.

Single sign-on overview

OneFS supports single sign-on (SSO) authentication to the WebUi using a third-party system as the SSO Identity Provider.
SSO enables a user to access multiple independent systems after authenticating to an Identity Provider.
NOTE: Configuring OneFS to participate in SSO is not the same as configuring OneFS to use an external authentication
provider domain to authenticate users. For that solution, see the section "Supported authentication providers".
Two components are involved in the SSO solution.
● The Service Provider (SP) provides services to users. Users must authenticate to gain access. If SSO is configured, the
Service Provider sends requests for authentication to an external system rather than prompting the user for credentials.
● The Identity Provider (IdP) is the external system that performs authentication on behalf of other systems.

NOTE: The IdP is external to OneFS and is not provided by Dell.

In the OneFS SSO solution:

● OneFS is the SP that forwards authentication requests to a third-party IdP.
● In OneFS, the verified IdP is Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS). Other IdPs may work.

100 Authentication
The SSO configuration procedures describe how to configure OneFS and ADFS to work together to provide SSO authentication.
Each system needs information about the other one. The procedures assume that you are using ADFS as the IdP and that you
already have it configured and running.

SSO user experience by access zone

OneFS SSO is configured and enabled separately for each access zone.
SSO is configured separately for each access zone. Each access zone can have SSO enabled or disabled separately. For each
access zone that has SSO enabled, you must configure an IdP You can use the same or different IdP for each zone. Each zone
can have only one IdP.
When SSO is enabled on a zone, the Log in with SSO link appears on the OneFS WebUI login screen. When a user clicks that
link, OneFS sends a SAML request to the SSO IdP. One of the following occurs:
● If the user has already logged into the SSO IdP, the IdP returns an authentication token to OneFS. The user gains access to
the OneFS home screen.
● If the user has not logged into the SSO IdP, the user is redirected to the IdP login screen and logs in. If the login is
successful, the IdP returns an authentication token to OneFS. The user gains access to the OneFS home screen.
If the signing certificate required for communicating with the IdP expires, OneFS disables SSO. An authorized administrator can
regenerate an expired certificate on the WebUI, using Access > Authentication providers > SSO > <access-zone> .

SSO with MFA

To combine single sign-on with multifactor authentication (MFA), you must configure the MFA feature in the IdP, rather than in
OneFS.

Multi-instance active directory

If you are a zone-local administrator, you can create your own AD instance, even if the AD instance for the same domain is
already created globally or in another access zone.
Previously, only one connection to Active Directory was enabled, and the name of the Active Directory provider had to be the
same as the name of the domain to which it was connecting. With the introduction of zone-local authentication providers,
zone-local administrators can create their own Active Directory provider, and be able to modify its parameters. To perform this
action, you must do two things:
● Create a new provider instance name for this provider
● Create a new machine account for this provider connection
An AD provider may have a name different than its domain name, using -instance. Then commands can use the instance name to
find the particular AD provider. Each access zone can have only one AD provider.

LDAP public keys

You can now use public SSH keys from LDAP rather than that of user's home directory on the OneFS cluster.
The LDAP create and modify commands support the --ssh-public-key-attribute option.
You can view your public key by adding --show-ssh-key.
Multiple keys may be specified in the LDAP configuration. The key that corresponds to the private key that is presented in the
ssh session is used.
Nonetheless, you need a home directory on the cluster or you could get an error when you log in.

Managing Active Directory providers

You can view, configure, modify, and delete Active Directory providers. OneFS includes a Kerberos configuration file for Active
Directory in addition to the global Kerberos configuration file, both of which you can configure through the command-line

Authentication 101
interface. You can discontinue authentication through an Active Directory provider by removing it from all access zones that are
using it.

Configure an Active Directory provider

You can configure one or more Active Directory providers, each of which must be joined to a separate Active Directory domain.
By default, when you configure an Active Directory provider, it is automatically added to the System access zone.
NOTE: Consider the following information when you configure an Active Directory provider:
● When you join Active Directory from OneFS, cluster time is updated from the Active Directory server, as long as an NTP
server has not been configured for the cluster.
● If you migrate users to a new or different Active Directory domain, you must re-set the ACL domain information after
you configure the new provider. You can use third-party tools such as Microsoft SubInACL.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Active Directory.
2. Click Join a domain.
3. In the Domain Name field, specify the fully qualified Active Directory domain name, which can be resolved to an IPv4 or an
IPv6 address.
The domain name will also be used as the provider name.
4. In the User field, type the username of an account that is authorized to join the Active Directory domain.
5. In the Password field, type the password of the user account.
6. Optional: In the Organizational Unit field, type the name of the organizational unit (OU) to connect to on the Active
Directory server. Specify the OU in the format OuName or OuName1/SubName2.
7. Optional: In the Machine Account field, type the name of the machine account.
NOTE: If you specified an OU to connect to, the domain join will fail if the machine account does not reside in the OU.

8. From the Groupnet list, select the groupnet the authentication provider will reference.
9. Optional: To enable Active Directory authentication for NFS, select Enable Secure NFS.
NOTE: If you specified an OU to connect to, the domain join will fail if the machine account does not reside in the OU.

If you enable this setting, OneFS registers NFS service principal names (SPNs) during the domain join.

10. Optional: In the Advanced Active Directory Settings area, configure the advanced settings that you want to use. It is
recommended that you not change any advanced settings without understanding their consequences.
11. Click Join.

Related concepts
Managing Active Directory providers

Related references
Active Directory provider settings

Modify an Active Directory provider

You can modify the advanced settings for an Active Directory provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Active Directory.
2. In the Active Directory Providers table, click View details for the provider whose settings you want to modify.
3. Click Advanced Active Directory Settings.
4. For each setting that you want to modify, click Edit, make the change, and then click Save.
5. Optional: Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing Active Directory providers

102 Authentication
Delete an Active Directory provider
When you delete an Active Directory provider, you disconnect the cluster from the Active Directory domain that is associated
with the provider, disrupting service for users who are accessing it. After you leave an Active Directory domain, users can no
longer access the domain from the cluster.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Active Directory.
2. In the Active Directory Providers table, click Leave for the domain you want to leave.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Leave.

Related concepts
Managing Active Directory providers

Active Directory provider settings

You can view or modify the advanced settings for an Active Directory provider.

Table 22. Setting Specifications

Setting Description
Services For UNIX Specifies whether to support RFC 2307 attributes for
domain controllers. RFC 2307 is required for Windows UNIX
Integration and Services For UNIX technologies.
Map to primary domain Enables the lookup of unqualified user names in the primary
domain. If this setting is not enabled, the primary domain must
be specified for each authentication operation.
Ignore trusted domains Ignores all trusted domains.
Trusted Domains Specifies trusted domains to include if the Ignore Trusted
Domains setting is enabled.
Domains to Ignore Specifies trusted domains to ignore even if the Ignore
Trusted Domains setting is disabled.
Send notification when the domain is unreachable Sends an alert as specified in the global notification rules.
Use enhanced privacy and encryption Encrypts communication to and from the domain controller.
Home Directory Naming Specifies the path to use as a template for naming home
directories. The path must begin with /ifs and can contain
variables, such as %U, that are expanded to generate the
home directory path for the user.
Create home directories on first login Creates a home directory the first time that a user logs in if a
home directory does not exist for the user.
UNIX Shell Specifies the path to the login shell to use if the Active
Directory server does not provide login-shell information. This
setting applies only to users who access the file system
through SSH.
Query all other providers for UID If no UID is available in the Active Directory, looks up Active
Directory users in all other providers for allocating a UID.
Match users with lowercase If no UID is available in the Active Directory, normalizes Active
Directory user names to lowercase before lookup.
Auto-assign UIDs If no UID is available in the Active Directory, enables UID
allocation for unmapped Active Directory users.
Query all other providers for GID If no GID is available in the Active Directory, looks up Active
Directory groups in all other providers before allocating a GID.

Authentication 103
Table 22. Setting Specifications (continued)
Setting Description
Match groups with lowercase If no GID is available in the Active Directory, this normalizes
Active Directory group names to lowercase before lookup.
Auto-assign GIDs If no GID is available in the Active Directory, enables GID
allocation for unmapped Active Directory groups.
Make UID/GID assignments for users and groups in these Restricts user and group lookups to the specified domains.
specific domains

Managing LDAP providers

You can view, configure, modify, and delete LDAP providers. You can discontinue authentication through an LDAP provider by
removing it from all access zones that are using it.

Configure an LDAP provider

By default, when you configure an LDAP provider, it is automatically added to the System access zone.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > LDAP.
2. Click Add an LDAP Provider.
3. In the LDAP provider name field, type a name for the provider.
4. In the Server URIs field, type one or more valid LDAP server URIs, one per line, in the format ldaps://<server>:<port>
(secure LDAP) or ldap://<server>:<port> (non-secure LDAP). An LDAP server URI can be specified as an IPv4 address, IPv6
address, or hostname.
NOTE:
● If you do not specify a port, the default port is used. The default port for non-secure LDAP (ldap://) is 389; for
secure LDAP (ldaps://), it is 636. If you specify non-secure LDAP, the bind password is transmitted to the server in
cleartext.
● If you specify an IPv6 address, the address must be enclosed in square brackets. For example, ldap://
[2001:DB8:170:7cff::c001] is the correct IPv6 format for this field.

5. Select the Connect to a random server on each request checkbox to connect to an LDAP server at random. If
unselected, OneFS connects to an LDAP server in the order listed in the Server URIs field.
6. In the Base distinguished name (DN) field, type the distinguished name (DN) of the entry at which to start LDAP
searches.
Base DNs can include cn (Common Name), l (Locality), dc (Domain Component), ou (Organizational Unit), or other
components. For example, dc=emc,dc=com is a base DN for [Link].
7. From the Groupnet list, select the groupnet that the authentication provider will reference.
8. In the Bind DN field, type the distinguished name of the entry at which to bind to the LDAP server.
9. In the Bind DN password field, specify the password to use when binding to the LDAP server.
Use of this password does not require a secure connection; if the connection is not using Transport Layer Security (TLS),
the password is sent in cleartext.
10. Optional: Update the settings in the following sections of the Add an LDAP provider form to meet the needs of your
environment:

Option Description
Default Query Settings Modify the default settings for user, group, and netgroup queries.
User Query Settings Modify the settings for user queries and home directory provisioning.
Group Query Settings Modify the settings for group queries.
Netgroup Query Settings Modify the settings for netgroup queries.

104 Authentication
 Option Description
Advanced LDAP Settings Modify the default LDAP attributes that contain user information or to modify LDAP security
settings.
11. Click Add LDAP Provider.

Related concepts
Managing LDAP providers

Related references
LDAP query settings
LDAP advanced settings

Modify an LDAP provider

You can modify any setting for an LDAP provider except its name. You must specify at least one server for the provider to be
enabled.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > LDAP.
2. In the LDAP Providers table, click View details for the provider whose settings you want to modify.
3. For each setting that you want to modify, click Edit, make the change, and then click Save.
4. Optional: Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing LDAP providers

Delete an LDAP provider

When you delete an LDAP provider, it is removed from all the access zones. As an alternative, you can stop using an LDAP
provider by removing it from each access zone that contains it so that the provider remains available for future use.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > LDAP.
2. In the LDAP Providers table, click Delete for the provider you want to delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing LDAP providers

LDAP query settings

You can configure the entry point and depth at which to search for LDAP users, groups, and netgroups. You also can configure
the settings for user home directory provisioning.

NOTE: OneFS is RFC 2307-compliant.

Base distinguished Specifies the base distinguished name (base DN) of the entry at which to start LDAP searches for
name user, group, or netgroup objects. Base DNs can include cn (Common Name), l (Locality), dc (Domain
Component), ou (Organizational Unit), or other components. For example, dc=emc,dc=com is a base
DN for [Link].
Search scope Specifies the depth from the base DN at which to perform LDAP searches. The following values are
valid:

Default Applies the search scope that is defined in the default query settings. This
option is not available for the default query search scope.
Base Searches only the entry at the base DN.

Authentication 105
 One-level Searches all entries exactly one level below the base DN.
Subtree Searches the base DN and all entries below it.
Children Searches all entries below the base DN, excluding the base DN itself.

Search timeout Specifies the number of seconds after which to stop retrying and fail a search. The default value is
100. This setting is available only in the default query settings.
Query filter Specifies the LDAP filter for user, group, or netgroup objects. This setting is not available in the
default query settings.
Authenticate users Specifies whether to allow the provider to respond to authentication requests. This setting is available
from this LDAP only in the user query settings.
provider
Home directory Specifies the path to use as a template for naming home directories. The path must begin with /ifs
naming template and can contain variables, such as %U, that are expanded to generate the home directory path for the
user. This setting is available only in the user query settings.
Automatically create Specifies whether to create a home directory the first time a user logs in, if a home directory does not
user home exist for the user. This setting is available only in the user query settings.
directories on first
login
UNIX shell Specifies the path to the user's login shell, for users who access the file system through SSH. This
setting is available only in the user query settings.

LDAP advanced settings

You can configure LDAP security settings and specify the LDAP attributes that contain user information.

NOTE: OneFS is RFC 2307-compliant.

Name attribute Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains UIDs, which are used as login names. The default value is
uid.
Common name Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains common names (CNs). The default value is cn.
attribute
Email attribute Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains email addresses. The default value is mail.
GECOS field Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains GECOS fields. The default value is gecos.
attribute
UID attribute Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains UID numbers. The default value is uidNumber.
GID attribute Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains GIDs. The default value is gidNumber.
Home directory Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains home directories. The default value is homeDirectory.
attribute
UNIX shell attribute Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains UNIX login shells. The default value is loginShell.
Member of attribute Sets the attribute to be used when searching LDAP for reverse memberships. This LDAP value should
be an attribute of the user type posixAccount that describes the groups in which the POSIX user is a
member. This setting has no default value.
Netgroup members Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains netgroup members. The default value is
attribute memberNisNetgroup.
Netgroup triple Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains netgroup triples. The default value is
attribute nisNetgroupTriple.
Group members Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains group members. The default value is memberUid.
attribute
Unique group Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains unique group members. This attribute is used to determine
members attribute which groups a user belongs to if the LDAP server is queried by the user’s DN instead of the user’s
name. This setting has no default value.

106 Authentication
Alternate security Specifies the name to be used when searching for alternate security identities. This name is used
identities attribute when OneFS tries to resolve a Kerberos principal to a user. This setting has no default value.
UNIX password Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains UNIX passwords. This setting has no default value.
attribute
Windows password Specifies the LDAP attribute that contains Windows passwords. A commonly used value is
attribute ntpasswdhash.
Certificate authority Specifies the full path to the root certificates file.
file
Require secure Specifies whether to require a Transport Layer Security (TLS) connection.
connection for
passwords
Ignore TLS errors Continues over a secure connection even if identity checks fail.

Managing NIS providers

You can view, configure, and modify NIS providers or delete providers that are no longer needed. You can discontinue
authentication through an NIS provider by removing it from all access zones that are using it.

Configure an NIS provider

By default, when you configure an NIS provider it is automatically added to the System access zone.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > NIS.
2. Click Add a NIS provider.
3. In the NIS Provider Name field, type a name for the provider.
4. In the Servers field, type one or more valid IPv4 addresses, host names, or fully qualified domain names (FQDNs), separated
by commas.
NOTE: If the Load balance servers option is not selected, servers are accessed in the order in which they are listed.

5. In the NIS Domain field, type the domain name.

6. Optional: Configure the Load balance servers setting:
● To connect to an NIS server at random, select the check box.
● To connect according to the order in which the NIS servers are listed in the Servers field, clear the check box.
7. From the Groupnet list, select the groupnet the authentication provider will reference.
8. Optional: Specify the Default Query Settings.
a. In the Search Timeout field, specifies the number of seconds after which to stop retrying and fail a search. The default
value is 20.
b. In the Retry Frequency field, specify the timeout period in seconds after which a request will be retried. The default
value is 5.
9. Optional: Specify the User Query Settings.
a. Select the Authenticate users from this provider check box to allow the provider to respond to authentication
requests.
b. Type a path in the Home Directory Naming field to use as a template for naming home directories. The path must begin
with /ifs and can contain expansion variables, such as %U, which expand to generate the home directory path for the
user. For more information, see the Home directories section.
c. Select the Create home directories on first login check box to specify whether to create a home directory the first
time a user logs in, if a home directory does not already exist for the user.
d. Select a path from the UNIX Shell list to specify the path to the user's login shell for users who access the file system
through SSH.
10. Optional: Click Host Name Query Settings and then configure the Resolve hosts from this provider setting:
● To enable host resolution, select the check box.
● To disable host resolution, clear the check box.
11. Click Add NIS provider.

Authentication 107
Related concepts
Managing NIS providers

Modify an NIS provider

You can modify any setting for an NIS provider except its name. You must specify at least one server for the provider to be
enabled.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > NIS.
2. In the NIS Providers table, click View details for the provider whose settings you want to modify.
3. For each setting that you want to modify, click Edit, make the change, and then click Save.
4. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing NIS providers

Delete an NIS provider

When you delete an NIS provider, it is removed from all access zones. As an alternative, you can stop using an NIS provider by
removing it from each access zone that contains it so that the provider remains available for future use.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > NIS.
2. In the NIS Providers table, click Delete for the provider that you want to delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing NIS providers

Managing MIT Kerberos authentication

You can configure an MIT Kerberos provider for authentication without Active Directory. Configuring an MIT Kerberos provider
involves creating an MIT Kerberos realm, creating a provider, and joining a predefined realm. Optionally, you can configure an
MIT Kerberos domain for the provider. You can also update the encryption keys if there are any configuration changes to the
Kerberos provider. You can include the provider in one or more access zones.

Managing MIT Kerberos realms

An MIT Kerberos realm is an administrative domain that defines the boundaries within which an authentication server has the
authority to authenticate a user or service. You can create, view, edit, or delete a realm. As a best practice, specify a realm
name using uppercase characters.

Create an MIT Kerberos realm

An MIT Kerberos realm is an administrative domain that defines the boundaries within which an authentication server has
the authority to authenticate a user or service. You can create a realm by defining a Key Distribution Center (KDC) and an
administrative server.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. Click Create a Kerberos Realm.
3. In the Realm Name field, type a domain name in uppercase characters. For example, [Link].
4. Select the Set as the default realm check box to set the realm as the default.
5. In the Key Distribution Centers (KDCs) field add one or more KDCs by specifying the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the
hostname of each server.
6. Optional: In the Admin Server field, specify the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or hostname of the administration server to
fulfill the role of primary KDC. If you omit this step, the first KDC that you added is used as the default administrative server.

108 Authentication
7. Optional: In the Default Domain field, specify the domain name to use for translating the service principal names.
8. Click Create Realm.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos realms

Modify an MIT Kerberos realm

You can modify an MIT Kerberos realm by modifying the Key Distribution Center (KDC) and the administrative server settings
for that realm.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Realms table, select a realm and click View / Edit.
3. In the View a Kerberos Realm page, click Edit Realm.
4. Select or clear the Set as the default realm check box to modify the default realm setting.
5. In the Key Distribution Centers (KDCs) field, specify the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the hostname of each additional
KDC server.
6. In the Admin Server field, specify the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or hostname of the administration server to fulfill the role
of primary KDC.
7. In the Default Domain field, specify an alternate domain name for translating the service principal names (SPNs).
8. Click Save Changes to return to the View a Kerberos Realm page.
9. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos realms

View an MIT Kerberos realm

You can view details related to the name, Key Distribution Centers (KDCs), and administrative server associated with an MIT
Kerberos realm.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Realms table, select a realm and click View / Edit to view the information associated with the realm.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos realms

Delete an MIT Kerberos realm

You can delete one or more MIT Kerberos realms and all the associated MIT Kerberos domains. Kerberos realms are referenced
by Kerberos providers. Hence before you delete a realm for which you have created a provider, you must first delete that
provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Realms table, select one or more realms and then perform one of the following actions:
● To delete a single realm, select the realm and click More > Delete from the Actions column.
● To delete multiple realms, select the realms and then select Delete Selection from the Select a bulk action list.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos realms

Authentication 109
Managing MIT Kerberos providers
You can create view, delete, or modify an MIT Kerberos provider. You can also configure the Kerberos provider settings.

Creating an MIT Kerberos provider

You can create an MIT Kerberos provider by obtaining the credentials for accessing a cluster through the Key Distribution
Center (KDC) of the Kerberos realm. This process is also known as joining a realm. Thus when you create a Kerberos provider
you also join a realm that you have previously created. You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to create an MIT
Kerberos provider.
Using the web interface, you can perform the following tasks through a single workflow or perform each task individually before
creating the provider.
● Defining a realm
● Defining a domain
● Managing a service principal name (SPN)

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos providers

Create an MIT Kerberos realm, domain, and a provider

You can create an MIT Kerberos realm, domain, and a provider through a single workflow instead of configuring each of these
objects individually.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. Click Get Started.
The system displays the Create a Kerberos Realm and Provider window.
3. From the Create Realm section, type a domain name in the Realm Name field.
It is recommended that the domain name is formatted in uppercase characters, such as [Link].
4. Check the Set as the default realm box to set the realm as the default.
5. In the Key Distribution Centers (KDCs) field, add one or more KDCs by specifying the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the
hostname of each server.
6. In the Admin Server field, specify the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or hostname of the administration server, which will be
fulfill the role of master KDC. If you omit this step, the first KDC that you added previously is used as the default admin
server.
7. In the Default Domain field, specify the domain name to use for translating the service principal names (SPNs).
8. Optional: From the Create Domain(s) section, specify one or more domain names to associate with the realm in the
Domain(s) field.
9. From the Authenticate to Realm section, type the name and password of a user that has permission to create SPNs in the
Kerberos realm in the User and Password fields.
10. From the Create Provider section, select the groupnet the authentication provider will reference from the Groupnet list.
11. From the Service Principal Name (SPN) Management area, select one of the following options to be used for managing
SPNs:
● Use recommended SPNs
● Manually associate SPNs
If you select this option, type at least one SPN in the format service/principal@realm to manually associate it
with the realm.

12. Click Create Provider and Join Realm.

Related concepts
Creating an MIT Kerberos provider

110 Authentication
Create an MIT Kerberos provider and join a realm
You join a realm automatically as you create an MIT Kerberos provider. A realm defines a domain within which the authentication
for a specific user or service takes place.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to view and access the Create a Kerberos Provider button and perform the
tasks described in this procedure.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. Click Create a Kerberos Provider.
3. In the User field, type a user name who has the permission to create service principal names (SPNs) in the Kerberos realm.
4. In the Password field, type the password for the user.
5. From the Realm list, select the realm that you want to join. The realm must already be configured on the system.
6. From the Groupnet list, select the groupnet the authentication provider will reference.
7. From the Service Principal Name (SPN) Management area, select one of the following options to be used for managing
SPNs:
● Use recommended SPNs
● Manually associate SPNs
If you select this option, type at least one SPN in the format service/principal@realm to manually associate it
with the realm.

8. Click Create Provider and Join Realm.

Related concepts
Creating an MIT Kerberos provider

Modify an MIT Kerberos provider

You can modify the realm authentication information and the service principal name (SPN) information for an MIT Kerberos
provider.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to view and access the View / Edit button to modify an MIT Kerberos
provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Provider table, select a domain and click View / Edit.
3. In the View a Kerberos Provider page, click Edit Provider.
4. In the Realm Authentication Information section, specify the credentials for a user with permissions to create SPNs in
the given Kerberos realm.
5. In the Provider Information section, select one of the following options for managing the SPNs:
● Use the recommended SPNs.
● Type an SPN in the format service/principal@realm to manually associate the SPN with the selected realm. You
can add more than one SPN for association, if necessary.
6. Click Save Changes to return to the View a Kerberos Provider page.
7. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos providers

View an MIT Kerberos provider

You can view information related to MIT Kerberos realms and service principal names (SPNs) associated with an MIT Kerberos
provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Providers table, select a provider and click View / Edit to view the provider information including the
realm, recommended SPNs, and any other SPNs that are discovered.

Authentication 111
Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos providers

Delete an MIT Kerberos provider

You can delete an MIT Kerberos provider and remove it from all the referenced access zones. When you delete a provider, you
also leave an MIT Kerberos realm.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to perform the tasks described in this procedure.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Providers table, select one or more providers and then perform one of the following actions:
● To delete a single provider, select the provider and click More > Delete from the Actions column.
● To delete multiple providers, select the providers and then select Delete Selection from the Select a bulk action list.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos providers

Configure Kerberos provider settings

You can configure the settings of a Kerberos provider to allow the DNS records to locate the Key Distribution Center (KDC),
Kerberos realms, and the authentication servers associated with a Kerberos realm. These settings are global to all the users of
Kerberos across all the nodes, services, and access zones. Some settings are applicable only to the client-side Kerberos that is
relevant when joining a realm or when communicating with an Active Directory KDC. Typically, you do not need to change the
settings after the initial configuration.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Settings.
2. In the Default Realm field, specify the realm to use for the service principal name (SPN). The default realm is the first realm
that you create.
3. Select a check box to always send pre-authentication. This is a client-side Kerberos configuration setting.
Selecting this check box enables the Kerberos ticket requests to include ENC_TIMESTAMP as the pre-authentication data
even if the authentication server did not request it. This is useful when working with Active Directory servers.
4. Select a check box to specify whether to use the DNS server records to locate the KDCs and other servers for a realm, if
that information is not listed for the realm.
5. Select a check box to specify whether to use the DNS text records to determine the Kerberos realm of a host.
6. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos providers

Managing MIT Kerberos domains

You can optionally define MIT Kerberos domains to allow additional domain extensions to be associated with an MIT Kerberos
realm. You can always specify a default domain for a realm.
You can create, modify, delete, and view an MIT Kerberos domain. A Kerberos domain name is a DNS suffix that you specify
typically using lowercase characters.

Create an MIT Kerberos domain

You optionally create an MIT Kerberos domain to allow additional domain extensions to be associated with an MIT Kerberos
realm apart from the default domains.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to perform the tasks described in this procedure.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. Click Create a Kerberos Domain.

112 Authentication
3. In the Domain field, specify a domain name which is typically a DNS suffix in lowercase characters.
4. From the Realm list, select a realm that you have configured previously.
5. Click Create Domain.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos domains

Modify an MIT Kerberos domain

You can modify an MIT Kerberos domain by modifying the realm settings.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to perform the tasks described in this procedure.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Domains table, select a domain and click View / Edit.
3. In the View a Kerberos Domain page, click Edit Domain.
4. From the Realm list, select an alternate realm.
5. Click Save Changes to return to the View a Kerberos Domain page.
6. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos domains

View an MIT Kerberos domain

You can view the properties of an MIT Kerberos domain mapping.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Domains table, select a domain and click View / Edit to view the properties of the domain mapping.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos domains

Delete an MIT Kerberos domain

You can delete one or more MIT Kerberos domain mappings.
You must be a member of the SecurityAdmin role to perform the tasks described in this procedure.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > Kerberos Provider.
2. In the Kerberos Domains table, select one or more domain mappings and then perform one of the following actions:
● To delete a single domain mapping, select the mapping and click More > Delete from the Actions column.
● To delete multiple domain mappings, select the mappings and then select Delete Selection from the Select a bulk
action list.

Related concepts
Managing MIT Kerberos domains

Managing file providers

You can configure one or more file providers, each with its own combination of replacement files, for each access zone.
Password database files, which are also called user database files, must be in binary format.
Each file provider pulls directly from up to three replacement database files: a group file that has the same format as /etc/
group; a netgroups file; and a binary password file, [Link], which provides fast access to the data in a file that has

Authentication 113
the /etc/[Link] format. You must copy the replacement files to the cluster and reference them by their directory
path.
NOTE: If the replacement files are located outside the /ifs directory tree, you must distribute them manually to every
node in the cluster. Changes that are made to the system provider's files are automatically distributed across the cluster.

Configure a file provider

You can configure one or more file providers, each with its own combination of replacement files, for each access zone. You can
specify replacement files for any combination of users, groups, and netgroups.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > File Provider.
2. Click Add a file provider.
3. In the File provider name field, type a name for the file provider.
4. To specify a user replacement file, in the Path to users file field, type or browse to the location of the [Link] file.
5. To specify a netgroup replacement file, in the Path to netgroups file field, type or browse to the location of the
netgroup file.
6. To specify a group replacement file, in the Path to groups file field, type or browse to the location of the group file.
7. Optional: Configure the following settings:

Option Description
Authenticate users from Specifies whether to allow the provider to respond to authentication requests.
this provider
Create home directories Specifies whether to create a home directory the first time a user logs in, if a home directory
on first login does not exist for the user.
Path to home directory Specifies the path to use as a template for naming home directories. The path must begin
with /ifs and can contain expansion variables such as %U, which expand to generate the
home directory path for the user. For more information, see the Home directories section of the
OneFS Web Administration Guide or the OneFS CLI Administration Guide.
UNIX Shell Specifies the path to the user's login shell, for users who access the file system through SSH.
8. Click Add File Provider.

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Related references
Password file format
Group file format
Netgroup file format

Generate a password file

Password database files, which are also called user database files, must be in binary format.
This procedure must be performed through the command-line interface (CLI). For command-usage guidelines, run the man
pwd_mkdb command.
1. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. Run the pwd_mkdb <file> command, where <file> is the location of the source password file.
NOTE: By default, the binary password file, [Link], is created in the /etc directory. You can override the location to
store the [Link] file by specifying the -d option with a different target directory.

114 Authentication
 The following command generates an [Link] file in the /etc directory from a password file that is located at /ifs/
[Link]:

pwd_mkdb /ifs/[Link]

The following command generates an [Link] file in the /ifs directory from a password file that is located at /ifs/
[Link]:

pwd_mkdb -d /ifs /ifs/[Link]

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Related references
Password file format

Password file format

The file provider uses a binary password database file, [Link]. You can generate a binary password file from a
[Link]-formatted file by running the pwd_mkdb command.
The [Link] file contains ten colon-separated fields, as shown in the following example:

admin:*:10:10::0:0:Web UI Administrator:/ifs/home/admin:/bin/zsh

The fields are defined below in the order in which they appear in the file.
NOTE: UNIX systems often define the passwd format as a subset of these fields, omitting the Class, Change, and Expiry
fields. To convert a file from passwd to [Link] format, add :0:0: between the GID field and the Gecos field.

Username The user name. This field is case-sensitive. OneFS does not limit the length; many applications
truncate the name to 16 characters, however.
Password The user’s encrypted password. If authentication is not required for the user, you can substitute an
asterisk (*) for a password. The asterisk character is guaranteed to not match any password.
UID The UNIX user identifier. This value must be a number in the range 0-4294967294 that is not
reserved or already assigned to a user. Compatibility issues occur if this value conflicts with an
existing account's UID.
GID The group identifier of the user’s primary group. All users are a member of at least one group, which is
used for access checks and can also be used when creating files.
Class This field is not supported by OneFS and should be left empty.
Change OneFS does not support changing the passwords of users in the file provider. This field is ignored.
Expiry OneFS does not support the expiration of user accounts in the file provider. This field is ignored.
Gecos This field can store a variety of information but is usually used to store the user’s full name.
Home The absolute path to the user’s home directory.
Shell The absolute path to the user’s shell. If this field is set to /sbin/nologin, the user is denied
command-line access.

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Authentication 115
Group file format
The file provider uses a group file in the format of the /etc/group file that exists on most UNIX systems.
The group file consists of one or more lines containing four colon-separated fields, as shown in the following example:

admin:*:10:root,admin

The fields are defined below in the order in which they appear in the file.

Group name The name of the group. This field is case-sensitive. Although OneFS does not limit the length of the
group name, many applications truncate the name to 16 characters.
Password This field is not supported by OneFS and should contain an asterisk (*).
GID The UNIX group identifier. Valid values are any number in the range 0-4294967294 that is not
reserved or already assigned to a group. Compatibility issues occur if this value conflicts with an
existing group's GID.
Group members A comma-delimited list of user names.

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Netgroup file format

A netgroup file consists of one or more netgroups, each of which can contain members. Hosts, users, or domains, which are
members of a netgroup, are specified in a member triple. A netgroup can also contain another netgroup.
Each entry in a netgroup file consists of the netgroup name, followed by a space-delimited set of member triples and nested
netgroup names. If you specify a nested netgroup, it must be defined on a separate line in the file.
A member triple takes the following form:

(<host>, <user>, <domain>)

Where <host> is a placeholder for a machine name, <user> is a placeholder for a user name, and <domain> is a placeholder for a
domain name. Any combination is valid except an empty triple: (,,).
The following sample file contains two netgroups. The rootgrp netgroup contains four hosts: two hosts are defined in member
triples and two hosts are contained in the nested othergrp netgroup, which is defined on the second line.

rootgrp (myserver, root, [Link]) (otherserver, root, [Link]) othergrp

othergrp (other-win,, [Link]) (other-linux,, [Link])

NOTE: A new line signifies a new netgroup. You can continue a long netgroup entry to the next line by typing a backslash
character (\) in the right-most position of the first line.

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Modify a file provider

You can modify any setting for a file provider, with the exception that you cannot rename the System file provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > File Provider.
2. In the File Providers table, click View details for the provider whose settings you want to modify.
3. For each setting that you want to modify, click Edit, make the change, and then click Save.
4. Click Close.

116 Authentication
Related concepts
Managing file providers

Delete a file provider

To stop using a file provider, you can clear all of its replacement file settings or you can permanently delete the provider.
1. Click Access > Authentication Providers > File Provider.
2. In the File Providers table, select the provider name.
3. Select Delete from the Select an action list.
4. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing file providers

Managing local users and groups

When you create an access zone, each zone includes a local provider that allows you to create and manage local users and
groups. Although you can view the users and groups of any authentication provider, you can create, modify, and delete users
and groups in the local provider only.

View a list of users or groups by provider

You can view the users and groups of any authentication provider.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles.
2. Click one of the following tabs, depending on what you want to view:

Option Description
Users Select this tab to view all users by provider.
Groups Select this tab to view all groups by provider.
3. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
4. Select the local provider in the Providers list.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Create a local user

Each access zone includes a local provider that allows you to create and manage local users and groups. When creating a local
user account, you can configure its name, password, home directory, UNIX user identifier (UID), UNIX login shell, and group
memberships.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Users.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. From the Providers list, select the local provider for the zone.
4. Click Create User.
5. In the User Name field, type a username for the account.
6. In the Password field, type a password for the account.
7. Optional: Configure the following additional settings as needed.

Authentication 117
 Option Description
UID If this setting is left blank, the system automatically allocates a UID for the account. This is the
recommended setting. You cannot assign a UID that is in use by another local user account.
Full Name Type a full name for the user.
Email Address Type an email address for the account.
Primary Group To specify the owner group using the Select a Primary Group dialog box, click Select group.
a. To locate a group under the selected local provider, type a group name or click Search.
b. Select a group to return to the Manage Users window.
Additional To specify any additional groups to make this user a member of, click Add group.
Groups
Home Directory Type the path to the user's home directory. If you do not specify a path, a directory is automatically
created at /ifs/home/<username>.

UNIX Shell This setting applies only to users who access the file system through SSH. From the list, select a shell.
By default, the /bin/zsh shell is selected.

Account Click the calendar icon to select the expiration date or type the expiration date in the field, and then
Expiration Date type the date in the format <mm>/<dd>/<yyyy>.
Enable the Select this check box to allow the user to authenticate against the local database for SSH, FTP, HTTP,
account and Windows file sharing through SMB. This setting is not used for UNIX file sharing through NFS.
8. Click Create.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Related references
Naming rules for local users and groups

Create a local group

In the local provider of an access zone, you can create groups and assign members to them.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Groups.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. From the Providers list, select the local provider for the zone.
4. Click Create Group.
5. In the Group Name field, type a name for the group.
6. Optional: To override automatic allocation of the UNIX group identifier (GID), in the GID field, type a numeric value.
NOTE: You cannot assign a GID that is in use by another group. It is recommended that you leave this field blank to
allow the system to automatically generate the GID.

7. Optional: For each member that you want to add to the group, click Add Members and perform the following tasks in the
Select a User dialog box:
a. Search for either Users, Groups, or Well-known SIDs.
b. If you selected Users or Groups, specify values for the following fields:
User Name
Type all or part of a user name, or leave the field blank to return all users. Wildcard characters are
accepted.
Group Name
Type all or part of a group name, or leave the field blank to return all users. Wildcard characters are
accepted.
Provider

118 Authentication
 Select an authentication provider.
c. Click Search.
d. In the Search Results table, select a user and then click Select.
The dialog box closes.
8. Click Create Group.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Related references
Naming rules for local users and groups

Naming rules for local users and groups

Local user and group names must follow naming rules in order to ensure proper authentication and access to the cluster.
You must adhere to the following naming rules when creating and modifying local users and groups:
● The maximum name length is 104 characters. It is recommended that names do not exceed 64 characters.
● Names cannot contain the following invalid characters:
"/\[]:;|=,+*?<>
● Names can contain any special character that is not in the list of invalid characters. It is recommend that names do not
contain spaces.
● Names are not case sensitive.

Modify a local user

You can modify any setting for a local user account except the user name.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Users.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. From the Users list, select the local provider for the access zone.
4. In the list of users, locate the user that you want to update, and then click View/Edit.
The View User Details dialog box appears.
5. Click Edit User.
The Edit User dialog box appears.
6. Update the settings that you want to configure.
7. Click Save Changes.
8. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Modify a local group

You can add or remove members from a local group.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Groups.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. In the list of groups, locate the group that you want to update, and then click View/Edit.
The View Group Details dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Group.
The Edit Groupr dialog box appears.
5. In the Members area, click Add Members to add users to the group, or click Delete next to a user name to remove the
user from the group.

Authentication 119
6. Click Save Changes.
7. Click Close.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Delete a local user

A deleted user can no longer access the cluster through the command-line interface, web administration interface, or file access
protocol. When you delete a local user account, the corresponding home directory remains in place.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Users.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. From the Providers list, select the local provider for the access zone.
4. In the list of users, locate the user that you want to delete, and then click More > Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box appears.
5. Click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Delete a local group

You can delete a local group even if members are assigned to it; deleting a group does not affect the members of that group.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Groups.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone.
3. From the Providers list, select the local provider for the access zone.
4. In the list of groups, locate the group that you want to delete, and then click More > Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box appears.
5. Click Delete.

Related concepts
Managing local users and groups

Configure a login delay

You can configure a login delay after a login failure.
1. Click Access > Settings.
2. Enter a value (in seconds) the Delay time after login failure field.
3. Click Save changes.

Set a concurrent session limit

You can limit the number of active administrative sessions on any node.
1. Click Access > Settings.
2. Enter a value in the Concurrent sessions limit field. This value defines the maximum number of administrative sessions
that can be active at any time, on a node.
3. Click Save.

120 Authentication
Set a new user account to disable when inactive
You can set a new user account to disable automatically when inactive.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles.
2. On the Users tab, select a provider from the Providers drop-down.
NOTE: This feature is limited to the LOCAL:System provider.
3. Click Create user.
4. Enter the user details and check the box for Disable when inactive.
5. Click Create user to complete the action.

Set an existing user account to disable when inactive

You can set an existing user account to disable automatically when inactive.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles.
2. On the Users tab, select a provider from the Providers drop-down.
NOTE: This feature is limited to the LOCAL:System provider.
3. In the Actions column of the user, click View/Edit.
4. Check the box for Disable when inactive.
5. Click Save to complete the action.

Configure minimum password requirements

You can set minimum password requirements for user accounts.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Password Policy.
2. In the Password policy section, check the boxes to enable the criteria required for your password policy.
3. Click Save.

Configure the password hash type

You can configure the hash type for user passwords.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Password Policy.
2. In the General settings section, set the hash type by choosing from the drop-down.
3. Click Save.

Set password expiration

You can set a user account to expire.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Password Policy.
2. In the Password expiration section, set the expiry criteria for your password policy.
3. Click Save.

Set minimum new password changes

You can require minimum requirements for new user passwords.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Password Policy.
2. In the Minimum required change for new password section, set the criteria for your password policy.
3. Click Save.

Authentication 121
Set lock users criteria
You can configure a user account to lock after a specific number of unsuccessful login attempts.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Password Policy.
2. In the Lock users section, set the criteria for your password policy.
3. Click Save.

Reset a user password

You can reset the password for an existing user account.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles > Users.
2. In the Actions column for the user, click Actions > Reset Password.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
4. The Reset Password window opens.
5. To view the new password, click Show password.
6. To copy the new password, click Copy new password.
7. Click Close.

Managing CAC/PIV
CAC/PIV configuration requires the ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS privilege.

Add a certificate for CAC/PIV authentication

Add a certificate for CAC or PIV authentication.
The certificate file must be saved locally on the cluster before performing these steps.
1. Click Access > SSH Certificates.
2. Optional: To ignore OSCP/CRL failures if unreachable or unknown response, check the box for this field.
3. Enter the OSCP or CRL URL, if applicable.
4. Select an option for Validation Resources. If None is selected, neither of these protocols are used for certificate
validation.
5. Enter the Allowed Identity Types, if applicable.
6. Click Save.

Modify the certificate for CAC/PIV authentication

You can modify the certificate for a CAC or PIV authentication.
1. Click Access > SSH Certificates > Settings.
2. Click Add Certificate.
3. Click Browse to go to the certificate file stored on the cluster.
4. Locate the file and click Select.
5. Click Save.

Managing SSO
SSO requires configuration of an Identity Provider (IdP) and the Service Provider (SP). After both of those components are
configured, you can enable SSO.

122 Authentication
Configure the Identity Provider to communicate with OneFS
The verified Identity Provider (IdP) for OneFS SSO is Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS). Other IdPs may work.
This task describes how to set up communication between ADFS and OneFS. You must have an instance of ADFS configured
and running.
All users who intend to log in to OneFS through SSO must have accounts in OneFS and in AD. The following table describes the
requirements for those accounts.

Table 23. Account requirements

System Requirements
OneFS The OneFS user accounts must have appropriate privileges:
● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI -- This privilege is required to access the WebUI.
● component-specific privileges-- Administrators typically require privileges to manage components.
For example, an SMB administrator needs ISI_PRIV_SMB privilege.
ADFS The corresponding ADFS user account must have an associated email address that is configured when
using the OneFS default emailAddress --name-id-format.
NOTE: If you change the --name-id-format to either Kerberos or WindowsDomainQualifiedName,
then you do not need to configure an email address on the ADFS user account.

For configuration, ADFS offers a Windows Web UI and a command-line interface. You can use either, with the Web UI being
simpler to use. The following instructions use the ADFS command-line interface.
1. Configure an SSO administrator and maintainer.
In OneFS, the user account must have at least one of the following privileges:
● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI - required for the admin to use the OneFS WebUI to administer SSO.
● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_SSH - required for the admin to use the OneFS CLI in SSH sessions to administer SSO.
● ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_CONSOLE - required for the admin to use the OneFS CLI on the console to administer SSO.
2. Add OneFS metadata to ADFS.
a. RDP to the ADFS server.
b. Set a variable to a rule that defines who can log in. The following example shows a simple rule that permits all users to log
in. You can define more complex rules that fit the needs of your organization.

$AuthRules = @"
@RuleTemplate="AllowAllAuthzRule" => issue(Type = "[Link]
authorization/claims/permit", Value="true");
"@

c. Set a variable for setting the Active Directory user email address mapping to the SAML NameID.
NOTE: If you are configuring a different --name-id-format from the default email address, then you can skip adding
the email address mapping rules.

$TransformRules = @"
@RuleTemplate = "LdapClaims"
@RuleName = "LDAP mail"
c:[Type == "[Link]
windowsaccountname", Issuer == "AD AUTHORITY"]
=> issue(store = "Active Directory",
types = ("[Link]
emailaddress"),
query = ";mail;{0}", param = [Link]);

@RuleTemplate = "MapClaims"
@RuleName = "NameID"
c:[Type == "[Link]
=> issue(Type = "[Link]
nameidentifier",
Issuer = [Link], OriginalIssuer = [Link], Value = [Link],
ValueType = [Link],
Properties["[Link]
claimproperties/format"] =

Authentication 123
 "urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:1.1:nameid-format:emailAddress");
"@

d. Configure AD to trust the OneFS WebUI certificate.

e. Create the relying party trust.

Add-AdfsRelyingPartyTrust -Name <OneFS-name> \

-MetadataUrl "[Link] \
-IssuanceAuthorizationRules $AuthRules -IssuanceTransformRules $TransformRules

Where:
● <OneFS-name> is the name that you want to represent the cluster in ADFS.
● <onefs-node-ip> is the IP address or DNS name of your OneFS node.

Configure the SSO UPN/Kerberos Principal Name SAML NameID

Use this section to configure the SSO SAML NameID formats for UPN and Kerberos Principal Name. Note that your external
identity provider server (for example, AD FS) must be configured simultaneously with the OneFS configuration to synchronize
the NameID that you have configured in both environments.
You must have an instance of AD FS configured and running.

You may need to perform additional configuration steps on your identity provider server to make this work with OneFS.
1. Configure the UPN / Kerberos Principal Name SAML NameID Format
In OneFS, before copying the PowerScale service provider metadata XML to the AD FS server run:

isi auth sso sp modify --name-id-format=kerberos

2. Log in to the AD FS server and perform the following:

a. From the AD FS management tool, select AD FS > Relying Party Trusts. On the right pane, select . Edit Claim
Issuance Policy.
b. On the Edit Claim Issuance Policy window, select Add Rule.
c. On the Add Transform Claim Rule Wizard window, use the Transform an Incoming Claim for the claim rule
template, and click Next.
d. On the Configure Claim Rule window, specify a Claim rule name to identify the new rule.
e. On the Incoming claim type box, select UPN.
f. On the Outgoing claim type box, select Name ID.
g. On the Outgoing name ID format box, select Kerberos Principal Name.
h. Click Finish.
i. On the Edit Claim Issuance Policy window, select Apply and then click OK.

Configure the SSO Windows Qualified Domain Name SAML NameID

Use this section to configure the SSO SAML NameID formats for using a Windows Qualified Domain Name. Note that your
external identity provider server (for example, AD FS) must be configured simultaneously with the OneFS configuration to
synchronize the NameID that you have configured in both environments.
You must have an instance of AD FS configured and running.

You may must perform additional configuration steps on your identity provider server to make this work with OneFS.
1. Configure the Windows Qualified Domain Name (for example, DOMAIN\USER) SAML NameID format
In OneFS, before copying the PowerScale service provider metadata XML to the AD FS server run:

isi auth sso sp modify --name-id-format=WindowsDomainQualifiedName

2. Log in to the AD FS server and perform the following:

124 Authentication
 a. From the AD FS management tool, select AD FS > Relying Party Trusts. On the right pane, select . Edit Claim
Issuance Policy.
b. On the Edit Claim Issuance Policy window, select Add Rule.
c. On the Add Transform Claim Rule Wizard window, use the Transform an Incoming Claim for the claim rule
template, and click Next.
d. On the Configure Claim Rule window, specify a Claim rule name to identify the new rule.
e. On the Incoming claim type box, select Windows account name.
f. On the Outgoing claim type box, select Name ID.
g. On the Outgoing name ID format box, select Windows Qualified Domain Name.
h. Click Finish.
i. On the Edit Claim Issuance Policy window, select Apply and then click OK.

Configure SSO in OneFS

A OneFS administrator can configure SSO per access zone on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the OneFS WebUI.
2. Go to Access > Authentication providers > SSO.
3. Choose an access zone, and click Add IdP. For example, choose the system zone.
NOTE: Each access zone must have an IdP configured for it. It can be the same IdP for all the zones, but each zone
must be configured separately.

4. On the Add Identity Provider screen:

a. Provide a unique name for the IdP. For example: myIDP.
b. Click Next.
c. Upload the XML metadata file that you downloaded from the ADFS system. Alternatively, click Manual and complete the
detailed form. If you choose the manual method, you must have the IdP certificate to upload.
If you choose the Manual method, the following information is required.

Table 24. Field Specifications

Field Description
Entity ID Unique identifier of the IdP as configured on the IdP. For example:

[Link]

Login URL Log in endpoint for the IdP. For example:

[Link]

Logout URL Log out endpoint for the IdP. For example:

[Link]

Binding Select POST or Redirect binding.

Signing Certificate Provide the PEM encoded certificate obtained from the IdP. This certificate is required to
verify messages from the IdP.

d. Repeat this step for each access zone for which you want to configure SSO.
e. Click Next.
5. On the Service Provider screen:
a. Notice that the Current access zone is carried over from the first screen.
b. Select Metadata download or Manual copy, depending on how you want to provide OneFS details about this SP to the
IdP.
c. Provide the hostname or IP address for the SP for the current access zone. For example: [Link].
d. Click Generate.
The system generates information about OneFS and this access zone for you to use in configuring the IdP.

Authentication 125
 e. Obtain the generated information that you can use on the IdP system to prepare it to accept requests from this SP and
access zone.
● If you selected Metadata download above, download the file now. The signing certificate is in the XML file.
● If you selected Manual copy above, use the Copy links in the lower half of the form to copy the information.
Download the Signing Certificate.
f. Click Next.
6. On the Summary screen, review the information.

Enable and test SSO

You can enable SSO in a zone after the IdP and SP are configured.
1. Log in to the OneFS Web UI with ISI_AUTH_PRIV privilege.
2. Go to Access > Authentication providers > SSO.
3. Choose an access zone and click the Enable SSO toggle.
4. Test SSO.
a. In a web browser, go to the OneFS login screen.
You are redirected to the ADFS login screen.
b. Log in to ADFS.
You are given access to OneFS.

126 Authentication
 8
Administrative roles and privileges
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Role-based access
• Roles
• Privileges
• Managing roles

Role-based access
You can assign role-based access to delegate administrative tasks to selected users.
Role-based access control (RBAC) allows the right to perform particular administrative actions to be granted to any user who
can authenticate to a cluster. Security Administrators create roles, assign privileges to the roles, and then assign members. All
administrators, including those given privileges by a role, connect to the System zone to configure the cluster. When these
members log in to the cluster through a configuration interface, they have these privileges. All administrators can configure
settings for access zones, and they always have control over all access zones on the cluster.
Roles also give you the ability to assign privileges (including granular or subprivileges) to member users and groups. By default,
only the root user and the admin user can log in to the web administration interface through HTTP or the command-line
interface through SSH. Using roles, the root and admin users can assign others to integrated or custom roles that have login and
administrative privileges to perform specific administrative tasks.
NOTE: As a best practice, assign users to roles that contain the minimum set of necessary privileges. For most purposes,
the default permission policy settings, system access zone, and integrated roles are sufficient. You can create role-based
access management policies as necessary for your particular environment.

Roles
You can permit and limit access to administrative areas of your cluster on a per-user basis through roles. OneFS includes several
integrated administrator roles with predefined sets of privileges that cannot be modified. You can also create custom roles and
assign privileges to those roles.
The following list describes what you can and cannot do through roles:
● You can assign privileges and subprivileges to a role.
● You can assign privileges and subprivileges to a role as execute/read/no permission, even if the privilege or subprivilege is
write by default.
● You can create custom roles and assign privileges and subprivileges to those roles.
● Using the WebUI, you can copy an existing role.
● If the users can authenticate to the cluster, you can add any user or group of users, including well-known groups, to a role.
● You can add a user or group to more than one role.
● You cannot assign privileges and subprivileges directly to users or groups.
When a user belongs to multiple roles, that user's overall privilege consists of the total of all the sets of privileges set for
all the roles to which the user belongs. If a particular privilege is configured in multiple roles, the user is granted the highest
permission. A top-level or parent privilege that was explicitly assigned to a role has precedence over a privilege or subprivilege
that is inherited by the role.
OneFS determines privilege as follows:
1. OneFS obtains the union of all sets of privileges for all the roles that the user belongs to.
2. OneFS recalculates the inherited privileges and subprivileges for every explicitly granted parent privilege.
If you explicitly grant a new privilege to a role, OneFS recalculates the inherited privileges based on the new privilege.

Administrative roles and privileges 127

 NOTE: When OneFS is first installed, only users with root- or admin-level access can log in and assign users to roles.

What you can do with privileges through roles applies equally to subprivileges.

Custom roles
Custom roles supplement integrated roles.
You can create custom roles and assign privileges that are mapped to administrative areas in your cluster environment. For
example, you can create separate administrator roles for security, auditing, storage provisioning, and backup.
You can designate certain privileges as no permission, read, execute, or write when adding the privilege to a role. You can modify
this option at any time to add or remove privileges as user responsibilities grow and change.

OneFS roles
OneFS includes integrated roles that are configured with the most likely privileges and subprivileges that are required to perform
common administrative functions. You can assign users and groups to OneFS integrated roles, but you cannot modify their
privileges.
OneFS provides the following integrated administrative roles:
● SecurityAdmin
● SystemAdmin
● AuditAdmin
● BackupAdmin
● VMwareAdmin
OneFS also provides an integrated role that is configured with appropriate privileges for APEX File Storage Services users:
BasicUserRole.

SecurityAdmin integrated role

The SecurityAdmin integrated role enables security configuration on the cluster, including authentication providers, local users
and groups, and role membership.

Table 25. SecurityAdmin Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_CONSOLE Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_SSH Read
ISI_PRIV_AUTH Write
ISI_PRIV_ROLE Write

SystemAdmin integrated role

The SystemAdmin integrated role enables administration of all cluster configuration that is not handled by the SecurityAdmin
role.

Table 26. SystemAdmin Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_CONSOLE Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_SSH Read

128 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 26. SystemAdmin Privileges (continued)
Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_SYS_SHUTDOWN Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_SUPPORT Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_TIME Write
ISI_PRIV_SYS_UPGRADE Write
ISI_PRIV_ANTIVIRUS Write
ISI_PRIV_AUDIT Write
ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE Write
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS Write
ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER Write
ISI_PRIV_CONFIGURATION Write
ISI_PRIV_DEVICES Write
ISI_PRIV_EVENT Write
ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER Write
ISI_PRIV_FTP Write
ISI_PRIV_GET_SET Read
ISI_PRIV_HARDENING Write
ISI_PRIV_HDFS Write
ISI_PRIV_HTTP Write
ISI_PRIV_IPMI Write
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE Write
ISI_PRIV_KEY_MANAGER Write
ISI_PRIV_LICENSE Write
ISI_PRIV_MONITORING Read
ISI_PRIV_NDMP Write
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK Write
ISI_PRIV_NFS Write
ISI_PRIV_NTP Write
ISI_PRIV_PAPI_CONFIG Write
ISI_PRIV_PERFORMANCE Write
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA Write
ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT Write
ISI_PRIV_S3 Write
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS Write
ISI_PRIV_SMB Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT Write
ISI_PRIV_SNMP Write
ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS Write

Administrative roles and privileges 129

Table 26. SystemAdmin Privileges (continued)
Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ Write
ISI_PRIV_VCENTER Write
ISI_PRIV_WORM Write
ISI_PRIV_ESRS_DOWNLOAD Write
ISI_PRIV_NS_TRAVERSE Read
ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS Read

AuditAdmin integrated role

The AuditAdmin integrated role enables you to view all system configuration settings.
Because the AuditAdmin integrated role is designed only for viewing system configuration settings, privileges are granted as
Read.

Table 27. AuditAdmin Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_CONSOLE Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_SSH Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_TIME Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_UPGRADE Read
ISI_PRIV_ANTIVIRUS Read
ISI_PRIV_AUDIT Read
ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE Read
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS Read
ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER Read
ISI_PRIV_CONFIGURATION Read
ISI_PRIV_DEVICES Read
ISI_PRIV_EVENT Read
ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER Read
ISI_PRIV_FTP Read
ISI_PRIV_GET_SET Read
ISI_PRIV_HARDENING Read
ISI_PRIV_HDFS Read
ISI_PRIV_HTTP Read
ISI_PRIV_IPMI Read
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE Read
ISI_PRIV_KEY_MANAGER Read
ISI_PRIV_LICENSE Read
ISI_PRIV_MONITORING Read

130 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 27. AuditAdmin Privileges (continued)
Privileges Permission
SI_PRIV_NDMP Read
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK Read
ISI_PRIV_NFS Read
ISI_PRIV_NTP Read
ISI_PRIV_PAPI_CONFIG Read
ISI_PRIV_PERFORMANCE Read
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA Read
ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT Read
ISI_PRIV_S3 Read
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS Read
ISI_PRIV_SMB Read
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT Read
ISI_PRIV_SNMP Read
ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ Read
ISI_PRIV_VCENTER Read
ISI_PRIV_WORM Read

BackupAdmin integrated role

The BackupAdmin integrated role enables backup and restore of files from /ifs.

Table 28. BackupAdmin Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_IFS_BACKUP Read
ISI_PRIV_IFS_RESTORE Read

VMwareAdmin integrated role

The VMwareAdmin integrated role enables remote administration of storage that VMware vCenter needs.

Table 29. VMwareAdmin Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Read
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK Write
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ Write
ISI_PRIV_VCENTER Write
ISI_PRIV_NS_TRAVERSE Read

Administrative roles and privileges 131

Table 29. VMwareAdmin Privileges (continued)
Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS Read

Multi-Party Authorization privileges and roles

The Multi-Party Authorization (MPA) roles allow users to perform certain tasks pertaining to MPA.

MPA roles
The following roles were updated to add additional privileges that are related to MPA.

Table 30. Multi-Party Authorization privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_MPA_APPROVAL Controls how designated parties can Write
approve or reject privilege access
requests.
ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Submit and track privilege access Write or Read
requests requiring multi party
authorization.
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Enables cluster-wide Multi-Party Write
Authorization controls.
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Manages settings for Multi-Party Read
Authorization processes.

System Zone Roles

Table 31. System zone roles
System zone roles Privilege Permission
ApprovalAdmin ISI_PRIV_MPA_APPROVAL Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Read
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read
BasicUserRole ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read
SecurityAdmin ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read
SystemAdmin ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Read
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read

132 Administrative roles and privileges

Non-System Zone Roles
Table 32. Non-System Zone Roles
Non-System zone roles Privilege Permission
BasicUserRole ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read
ZoneAdmin ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read
ZoneSecurityAdmin ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST Write
ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_ZONE Read

BasicUserRole integrated role

The BasicUserRole integrated role provides limited permissions appropriate for APEX File Storage Services users.

Table 33. BasicUserRole Privileges

Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Read
ISI_PRIV_AUTH Read
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS No permission
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_ACLS No permission
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_GLOBAL No permission
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_ZONES No permission
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS No permission
ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER Write
ISI_PRIV_HDFS Write
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_RACKS No permission
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_SETTINGS Write
ISI_PRIV_NFS Write
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS Read
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_GLOBAL No permission
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_ZONE No permission
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA Write
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT Write
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_EFFICIENCYRATIO No permission
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_REDUCTIONRATIO No permission
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_THRESHOLDSON Read
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_USAGE_FSPHYSICAL No permission
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_REPORTS Read
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS Write
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SUMMARY Read

Administrative roles and privileges 133

Table 33. BasicUserRole Privileges (continued)
Privileges Permission
ISI_PRIV_S3 Write
ISI_PRIV_S3_MYKEYS No permission
ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS Write
ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS_GLOBAL No permission
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS Write
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STATUS Read
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPOOL No permission
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPOOL_POOLDETAILS No permission
ISI_PRIV_SMB Write
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SESSIONS Read
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS No permission
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_GLOBAL No permission
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_SHARE No permission
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_PENDING Read
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_RESTORE No permission
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SETTING No permission
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SNAPSHOTMANAGEMENT Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SUMMARY Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_CERTIFICATES_SERVER No permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_CERTIFICATES_TARGET Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_POLICIES Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_POLICY_SOURCENETWORK Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_REPORTS Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_POLICY_SETTINGS No permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS Read
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS_CLUSTER_ No permission
CERTIFICATE_ID

ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS_ No permission
PREFERRED_RPO_ALERT

ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS_RPO_ No permission
ALERTS

ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_REPORT_SETTINGS No permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_SERVICE No permission
ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS Read

134 Administrative roles and privileges

Privileges
Privileges permit users to complete tasks on a cluster.
Privileges are associated with an area of cluster administration such as Job Engine, SMB, Quotas, or statistics. Privileges enable
you to control the actions that a user or role can perform within a particular area of cluster administration.
In OneFS [Link] and later, privileges are granular: each area of cluster administration is associated with a top-level privilege,
the feature, or parent privilege. Each parent privilege can have one or more subprivileges, which can also have subprivileges.
Granular privileges enable you to control the specific actions that a user can perform within a cluster administration area in a
detailed way.
Privilege levels are as follows:
● Feature: The top-level privilege associated with an area of cluster administration, such as quotas (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA).
● Entity (subfeature): A subprivilege associated with a specific function of an area of cluster administration. For example,
quota reports (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_REPORTS), quota settings (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS), or quota management
(ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT). Entity-level privileges can have subprivileges.
● Attribute (properties of a feature or subfeature): The properties associated with an area of cluster administration. For
example, quotas' physical usage of the file system (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_USAGE_FSPHYSICAL), the
quota threshold size on which to enforce limits (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_THRESHOLDON), the ratio of
logical space to physical space used for quotas (ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEMENT_EFFICIENCYRATIO). Attribute-
level privileges can also have subprivileges.
For example, the feature-level (parent) privilege ISI_PRIV_QUOTA enables monitoring and enforcing storage limits. Grant
entity-level privileges (subprivileges) to control the specific quota management-related actions that a user or role can
perform. Grant attribute-level privileges to control access to specific properties of quota management-related actions, including
management, tracking, and limiting storage of an entity or directory, or configuring the ratio of logical space to physical space.
Grant the feature-level privilege first. Granting the feature-level privilege to a user or role grants all privileges, subprivileges,
and permissions associated with that privilege. Granting subprivileges is optional. Grant subprivileges to restrict or fine-tune the
access and activities that are allowed to users or roles. If a subprivilege also has subprivileges, grant the parent subprivilege
before you grant the lower-level subprivileges. Subprivileges cannot be higher than their parent privilege or subprivilege.
Privileges have the following forms:

Write (w) Grants write, execute, and read access privileges to a role or user. This privilege allows a role or user
to view, create, modify, and delete a configuration subsystem such as statistics, snapshots, or quotas.
For example, the ISI_PRIV_QUOTA privilege with write permission allows an administrator to create,
schedule, and run quota reports and to configure quota notification rules. Write permission allows
performing the API operations GET, PUT, POST, and DELETE.
Execute (x) Grants execute and read access privileges to a role or user. This privilege allows a role or user
to initiate API operations such as PUT, POST, or Delete for specific URIs on a configuration
subsystem without granting write privileges to that role or user. The specific URIs on which execute
privileges can be granted do not perform write operations. The specific URIs are /sync/policies/
<POLICY>, /sync/jobs, /sync/jobs/<JOB>, /sync/policies/<POLICY>/reset, and /
sync/rules/<RULE>.
Read (r) Grants the read access privilege to a role or user. This privilege allows a role or user to view a
configuration subsystem. The role or user cannot modify configuration settings. Read permission
allows performing the API operation GET.
No permission (-) The privilege is not granted to the role or user. The role or user has no access to the privilege.

Privileges are granted to the user on login to a cluster through the OneFS API, the web administration interface, SSH, or a
console session. A token is generated for the user that includes a list of all privileges that are granted to that user. Each URI,
web-administration interface page, and command require a specific privilege to view or modify the information available through
any of these interfaces.
Sometimes, privileges cannot be granted or there are privilege limitations.
● Privileges are not granted to users that do not connect to the System Zone during login or to users that connect through
the deprecated Telnet service, even if they are members of a role.
● Privileges do not provide administrative access to configuration paths outside of the OneFS API. For example, the
ISI_PRIV_SMB privilege does not grant a user the right to configure SMB shares using the Microsoft Management Console
(MMC).
● Privileges do not provide administrative access to all log files. Most log files require root access.
● Privileges can be denied to users and roles using No permission.

Administrative roles and privileges 135

The privilege ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH and its subprivileges ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_GROUPS and
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_USERS provide limited administrative privileges for groups and users. Administrators with
the ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH privilege can modify only those groups and users with the same or less privilege as
the administrator. Administrators with the ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_GROUPS or ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_USERS
privileges can modify only those groups or users with the same privilege as the administrator. For example, you can grant the
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH privilege to a help desk administrator to perform basic user management operations without
having the full abilities of the ISI_PRIV_AUTH privilege.

Restricted role
The ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_ROLE privilege is a more restricted version of the existing ISI_PRIV_ROLE privilege.
The ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_ROLE role imposes stricter constraints on user actions that are related to role management. This
role ensures that the users cannot elevate their privileges or permissions when creating, updating, or deleting roles. This
privilege aligns actions with the privileges granted by the current token of the user.

Key behavior and restrictions

Role management (create, update, delete):
1. Users with the ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_ROLE privilege can only create, update, or delete roles that have the same or lesser
privileges than their own token allows.
2. Privilege elevation is not allowed: Any attempt to explicitly elevate privileges or permissions (through WebUI, REST API, or
the command line) returns a 403 Forbidden error.
3. Automatic adjustment: When no explicit privilege elevation is attempted, permissions are automatically adjusted for the
granular privileges tree to the maximum allowed by the user token.
4. Privilege precedence: If the user has both the ISI_PRIV_ROLE and ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_ROLE privileges, the behavior of
ISI_PRIV_ROLE takes precedence, allowing actions as per the standard ISI_PRIV_ROLE behavior.

Supported OneFS privileges

Use OneFS privileges to grant specific types of actions or access to the user. For example, login, security, and configuration
privileges.
OneFS supports the following types of privileges:
● Login privileges
● System privileges
● Security privileges
● Configuration privileges
● File access privileges
● Namespace privileges
The permissions listed for each privilege in the following tables are the highest permissions allowed for each type of privilege.

Login privileges
The login privileges that are listed in the following table either allow the user to perform specific actions or grants access to an
area of administration on the cluster. The permission that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 34. Login Privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_CONSOLE Log in from the console. Read
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_PAPI Log in to the Platform API and the web Read
administration interface.
ISI_PRIV_LOGIN_SSH Log in through SSH. Read

136 Administrative roles and privileges

System privileges
The system privileges that are listed in the following table either allow the user to perform specific actions or grant access to
an area of administration on the cluster. Permission types are No permission (-), Read (r), Execute (x), and Write (w). The
permission that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 35. System Privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SYS_SHUTDOWN Shut down the system. Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_SUPPORT Run cluster diagnostic tools. Read
ISI_PRIV_SYS_TIME Change the system time. Write
ISI_PRIV_SYS_UPGRADE Upgrades the OneFS system. Write

Security privileges
The following table describes the privileges and subprivileges that allow users to assign privileges to others. Subprivileges inherit
their permission type from their parent privilege. Permission types are No permission (-), Read (r), Execute (x), and Write (w).
The permission that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 36. Security privileges

Privilege or Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_AUTH Configure external authentication Write
providers, including root-level accounts.
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_GROUPS User groups from authentication Write
provider.
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS Configure authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_ADS Configure ADS authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_FILE Configure file authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_KRB5 Configure Kerberos authentication Write
providers.
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_LDAP Configure LDAP authentication Write
providers.
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_LOCAL Configure local authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_NIS Configure NIS authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_PROVIDERS_SSO Configure SSO authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_RULES User-mapping rules. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_ACLS Configure ACL policy settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure global authentication settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_SETTINGS_KRB5 Configure Kerberos settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_USERS Users from authentication providers. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUTH_ZONES Configure access zones. Write
ISI_PRIV_HARDENING Used for the Configurable Hardening Write
Engine.
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH Find and list users, set user passwords, Write
unlock user accounts, and add or remove
users and groups. Administrators with
this privilege can modify only users and

Administrative roles and privileges 137

Table 36. Security privileges (continued)
Privilege or Subprivilege Description Permission
groups that have the same or less
privilege.
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_GROUP Configure groups with the same or less Write
S privilege.
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH_USERS Configure users with the same or less Write
privilege.
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_ROLE Configure roles with the same or lesser Write
privileges.
ISI_PRIV_ROLE Create roles and assign privileges, Write
including root-level accounts.
ISI_PRIV_IFS_BYPASS_RETENTION Allow users to reduce lock retention of Read
objects in Object Lock-enabled buckets
and reduce bucket retention in Bucket
Lock-enabled buckets.

Configuration privileges
The configuration privileges that are listed in the following tables either allow the user to perform specific actions or grant no
permission, read, execute, or write access to an area of administration on the cluster.
When working with privileges:
● Grant the parent or top-level privilege before granting subprivileges. Subprivileges initially inherit their properties and
permission type from their parent or top-level privileges.
● You can explicitly add subprivileges with less permission than the parent privilege.
● You can change the permission type as appropriate for your requirements.
Permission types are:
● No permission (-)
● Read (r)
● Execute (x)
● Write (w)
The following table lists and describes the feature-level (parent) privileges. Feature-level privileges have a parent ID of
ISI_PRIV_ZERO and are marked with *. Tables listing the subprivileges for each top-level privilege follow. The permission
that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 37. Configuration Privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_ANTIVIRUS Configure anti-virus scanning. Write
ISI_PRIV_AUDIT Configure audit capabilities. Write
ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE Configure cluster TLS certificates. Write
* ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS Configure CloudPools. Write
ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER Configure cluster identity and general Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER_MODE Set the cluster mode. Write
ISI_PRIV_CONFIGURATION Configure import or export settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_DEVICES Create roles and assign privileges. Write
ISI_PRIV_EVENT View and modify system events. Write
* ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER Configure file filtering settings. Write

138 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 37. Configuration Privileges (continued)
Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_FTP Configure an FTP server. Write
ISI_PRIV_GET_SET View and set per-file OneFS metadata. Write
ISI_PRIV_HARDENING Harden cluster security profile. Write
* ISI_PRIV_HDFS Configure an HDFS server. Write
ISI_PRIV_HTTP Configure an HTTP server. Write
ISI_PRIV_IPMI Configure remote IPMI management Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE Schedule cluster-wide jobs. Write
ISI_PRIV_KEY_MANAGER Configure key management settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_LICENSE Activate OneFS software licenses. Write
ISI_PRIV_MONITORING Register applications monitoring the Write
cluster.
ISI_PRIV_NDMP Configure the NDMP server. Write
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK Configure network interfaces. Write
*ISI_PRIV_NFS Configure the NFS server. Write
ISI_PRIV_NTP Configure NTP. Write
ISI_PRIV_PAPI_CONFIG Configure the platform API and WebUI. Write
ISI_PRIV_PERFORMANCE Configure performance resource Write
accounting.
* ISI_PRIV_QUOTA Monitor and enforce administrator- Write
defined storage limits.
ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT Configure remote support. Write
* ISI_PRIV_S3 Configure the S3 server. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS Configure storage pools. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SMB Configure the SMB server. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT Schedule, take, and view snapshots. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNMP Configure an SNMP server. Write
ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS View file system performance statistics. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ Configure SyncIQ. Write
ISI_PRIV_VCENTER Configure VMware for vCenter. Write
ISI_PRIV_WORM Configure SmartLock directories. Write

Subprivilege tables
The following tables list and describe the subprivileges for feature-level (ISI_PRIV_ZERO) privileges. Subprivileges inherit their
privileges from their parent privilege. Some of these subprivileges also have subprivileges and are marked with *. The permission
that is listed for each subprivilege is the highest permission allowed. Subprivilege permissions cannot be higher than their parent
privilege permissions.

Administrative roles and privileges 139

Table 38. Certificate subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE_SETTINGS Configure cluster TLS certificates Write
settings.

Table 39. CloudPools subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS_ACCOUNTS Configure cloud storage account information and Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS_CERTIFICATES Configure cloud storage account certificates. Write
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS_POOLS Configure CloudPools based on cloud accounts. Write
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS_PROXIES Configure proxies for cloud storage access. Write
ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS_SETTINGS Configure cloud storage settings. Write

Table 40. File filter subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER_SETTINGS Configure the file filtering service and filter settings. Write

Table 41. HDFS subprivileges ISI_PRIV_HDFS

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_PROXYUSERS Configure the HDFS proxy users and Write
members.
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_RACKS Configure the HDFS virtual rack Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_RANGERPLUGIN_SET Configure the Ranger plug-in settings. Write
TINGS
* ISI_PRIV_HDFS_SETTINGS Configure the HDFS Service, protocol, Write
and Ambari server settings.
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_FSIMAGE_JOB_SETTI Configure the HDFS FSImage job Write
NGS settings.
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_FSIMAGE_SETTINGS Configure the HDFS FSImage service Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_HDFS_INOTIFY_SETTINGS Configure the HDFS Inotify service Write
settings.

Table 42. Job Engine subprivileges: ISI_JOB_ENGINE

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE_DEDUPE Configure Dedupe settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE_POLICIES Configure Job Engine policies. Write
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE_SETTINGS Configure Job Engine settings. Write

Table 43. Network subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_NETWORK

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET Configure groupnet. Write
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_DES Configure the groupnet description. Write
CRIPTION

140 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 43. Network subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_NETWORK (continued)
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_NA Configure the groupnet name. Write
ME
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the network subnet. Write
NET
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the network pool. Write
NET_POOL
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure a SmartConnect zone name Write
NET_POOL_SC_DNS_ZONE for the pool.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure SmartConnect zone aliases to Write
NET_POOL_SC_DNS_ZONE_ALIASES the pool.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the Access Zone of the Write
NET_POOL_ACCESS_ZONE Network Pool.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the aggregation mode. Write
NET_POOL_AGGREGATION_MODE
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Specifies IP allocation method. Write
NET_POOL_ALLOC_METHOD
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the pool description. Write
NET_POOL_DESCRIPTION
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure interface members in the pool. Write
NET_POOL_IFACES
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Indicates if the network pool should Write
NET_POOL_IPV6_PERFORM_DAD perform IPv6 Duplicate Address
Detection.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure the name of the pool. Write
NET_POOL_NAME
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Indicates that the pool contains only Write
NET_POOL_NFS_RROCE_ONLY RDMA RRoCE capable interfaces.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure IP address ranges in this pool. Write
NET_POOL_RANGES
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure a rebalance policy. Write
NET_POOL_REBALANCE_POLICY
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure a SmartConnect client Write
NET_POOL_SC_CONNECT_POLICY connection balancing policy.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure a SmartConnect IP failover Write
NET_POOL_SC_FAILOVER_POLICY policy.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure a SmartConnect service Write
NET_POOL_SC_SUBNET subnet for this pool.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure Time To Live value for Write
NET_POOL_SC_TTL SmartConnect DNS.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_GROUPNET_SUB Configure static routes in the network Write
NET_POOL_STATIC_ROUTES pool.
ISI_PRIV_NETWORK_INTERNAL Configure the internal network. Write

Table 44. NFS subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_NFS

Subprivilege Description Permission
SI_PRIV_NFS_ALIASES Configure aliases for export directory Write
names.

Administrative roles and privileges 141

Table 44. NFS subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_NFS (continued)
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_NFS_EXPORTS Configure NFS exports and permissions. Write
* ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS Configure NFS exports and related Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_EXPORT Configure NFS export and user mapping Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure NFS global and service Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_NFS_SETTINGS_ZONE Configure NFS zone-related settings. Write

Table 45. Quota subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_QUOTA

Subprivilege Description Permission
*ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEM Configure quotas to manage, track, and Write
ENT limit storage of an entity or directory.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEME Configure the ratio of logical space to Write
NT_EFFICIENCYRATIO physical space used.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEME Configure the ratio of logical space to Write
NT_REDUCTIONRATIO physical space post data reduction.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEME Set the threshold size type on which to Write
NT_THRESHOLDSON enforce quota limits.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_QUOTAMANAGEME Configure the file system physical usage Write
NT_USAGE_FSPHYSICAL size.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_REPORTS Enable managing, running, and viewing Write
quota reports.
*ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS Manage quota reporting and notification Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS_MAPPIN Configure quota email mapping settings. Write
GS
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS_NOTIFIC Configure quota notification rules and Write
ATIONS schedule settings.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS_REPORT Configure scheduled and manual Write
S reporting settings.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS_REPORT Quota live reports directory settings. Write
S_LIVE_DIR
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SETTINGS_REPORT Quota scheduled reports directory Write
S_SCHEDULED_DIR settings.
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA_SUMMARY Configure quota-based counts and Write
statistics.

Table 46. S3 service subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_S3

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_S3_BUCKETS Configure S3 buckets and ACL. Write
ISI_PRIV_S3_MYKEYS Configure S3 key management. Write
* ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS Configure S3 global and zone settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure S3 global and service settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_S3_SETTINGS_ZONE Configure S3 zone-related settings. Write

142 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 47. SmartPools subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_FILEPOOL_D Configure the default filepool policy. Write
EFAULT_POLICY
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_FILEPOOL_P Define filepools based on files and Write
OLICIES actions.
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_FILEPOOL_TE Define preconfigured templates for Write
MPLATES typical work flows.
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STATUS View and manage the status of storage Write
pools.
*ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEP Configure and view storage pools. Write
OOL
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Pool of storage from a group of nodes. Write
OL_NODEPOOLS
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Cluster node type. Write
OL_NODETYPES
*ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEP Storage pools details and usage. Write
OOL_POOLDETAILS
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Usage details of storage pool. Write
OL_POOLDETAILS_USAGE
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Storage and action settings for Write
OL_SETTINGS SmartPools.
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Storage tiering. Write
OL_TIERS
ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS_STORAGEPO Unprovisioned drives and LNNs. Write
OL_UNPROVISIONED

Table 48. SMB service subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SMB

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SESSIONS Active SMB sessions. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS View and manage SMB service settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure SMB global and service Write
settings.
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SETTINGS_SHARE Configure SMB filter and share settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_SMB_SHARES Manage SMB shares and permissions. Write

Table 49. Snapshot management subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_ALIAS Configure snapshot aliases. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_PENDING Upcoming snapshot based on schedules. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_RESTORE Restoring the directory to a particular Write
snapshot.
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SCHEDULES Scheduling for periodic snapshots. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SETTING Service and access settings. Write
* Manual snapshots and locks. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SNAPSHOTMAN
AGEMENT

Administrative roles and privileges 143

Table 49. Snapshot management subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT (continued)
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_LOCKS Locking of snapshots from deletion. Write
ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT_SUMMARY Snapshot summary and usage details. Write

Table 50. SyncIQ data replication subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ

Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_CERTIFICATES_SER Manage server certificates for secure Write
VER replication.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_CERTIFICATES_TAR Manage target cluster certificates. Write
GET
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_JOBS Manage ongoing data replication jobs. Write
* ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_POLICIES Configure policies and scheduling for Write
data replication between clusters.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_POLICY_SOURCENE Configure the network of the replication Write
TWORK source cluster.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_REPORTS Manage SyncIQ policy and job reports. Write
SI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_RULES Configure SyncIQ performance rule limits Write
and schedules.
* ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS Configure SyncIQ service, policy, and Write
report settings.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_SERVICE Configure the SyncIQ service settings. Write
* SyncIQ report settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_REPORT
_SETTINGS
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_REPORT Configure the SyncIQ report maximum Write
_SETTINGS_REPORT_MAX_AGE age settings.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_REPORT Configure the SyncIQ maximum report Write
_SETTINGS_REPORT_MAX_COUNT count settings.
* Configure the SyncIQ global settings. Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL
_SETTINGS
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure the SyncIQ cluster certificate Write
_SETTINGS_CLUSTER_CERTIFICATE_I for global settings.
D
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure the global SyncIQ encryption Write
_SETTINGS_ENCRYPTION_REQUIRED settings.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure the global SyncIQ preferred Write
_SETTINGS_PREFERRED_RPO_ALERT RPO alert settings.
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_GLOBAL Configure the global SyncIQ RPO alert Write
_SETTINGS_RPO_ALERTS settings.
* Configure the default SyncIQ policy Write
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_DEFAUL settings.
T_POLICY_SETTINGS
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_SETTINGS_DEFAUL Configure the default SyncIQ policy for Write
T_POLICY_SETTINGS_RESTRICT_TAR restricted targets network settings.
GET_NETWORK
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_TARGET_POLICIES Manage the SyncIQ target policies for Write
the cluster.

144 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 50. SyncIQ data replication subprivileges: ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ (continued)
Subprivilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ_TARGET_REPORTS Manage the SyncIQ target reports and Write
details.

File access privileges

The file access privileges that are listed in the following table either allow the user to perform specific actions or grants access
permissions, as appropriate, to an area of administration on the cluster. Permission types are No permission (-), Read (r),
Execute (x), and Write (w). The permission that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 51. File Access Privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_IFS_BACKUP Back up files from /ifs. Bypass file permission checks and Read
grant all read permissions.
NOTE: This privilege circumvents traditional file access
checks, such as mode bits or NTFS ACLs.

ISI_PRIV_IFS_RESTORE Restore files from /ifs. Bypass file permission checks and Read
grant all read permissions.
NOTE: This privilege circumvents traditional file access
checks, such as mode bits or NTFS ACLs.

ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE Perform a privileged delete operation on WORM committed Write

files.
NOTE: If you are not logged in through the
root user account, you must also have the
ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS privilege.

ISI_PRIV_ESRS_DOWNLOAD Schedule file downloads through Secure Remote Services. Write

Namespace privileges
The namespace privileges that are listed in the following table allow the user to perform specific actions or grant access
permissions, as appropriate, to an area of administration on the cluster. Permission types are No permission (-), Read (r),
Execute (x), and Write (w). The permission that is listed for each privilege is the highest permission allowed.

Table 52. Namespace Privileges

Privilege Description Permission
ISI_PRIV_NS_TRAVERSE Traverse and view directory metadata. Read
ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS Access the /ifs directory through the OneFS API. Read

Data backup and restore privileges

You can assign privileges to a user that are explicitly for cluster data backup and restore actions.
Two privileges allow a user to backup and restore cluster data over supported client-side protocols: ISI_PRIV_IFS_BACKUP and
ISI_PRIV_IFS_RESTORE.
CAUTION: These privileges circumvent traditional file access checks, such as mode bits or NTFS ACLs.

Most cluster privileges allow changes to cluster configuration in some manner. The backup and restore privileges allow access to
cluster data from the System zone, the traversing of all directories, and reading of all file data and metadata regardless of file
permissions.
Users assigned these privileges use the protocol as a backup protocol to another machine without generating access-denied
errors and without connecting as the root user. These two privileges are supported over the following client-side protocols:

Administrative roles and privileges 145

● SMB
● NFS
● OneFS API
● FTP
● SSH
Over SMB, the ISI_PRIV_IFS_BACKUP and ISI_PRIV_IFS_RESTORE privileges emulate the Windows privileges
SE_BACKUP_NAME and SE_RESTORE_NAME. The emulation means that normal file-open procedures are protected by
file system permissions. To enable the backup and restore privileges over the SMB protocol, you must open files with the
FILE_OPEN_FOR_BACKUP_INTENT option, which occurs automatically through Windows backup software such as Robocopy.
Application of the option is not automatic when files are opened through general file browsing software such as Windows File
Explorer.
Both ISI_PRIV_IFS_BACKUP and ISI_PRIV_IFS_RESTORE privileges primarily support Windows backup tools such as
Robocopy. A user must be a member of the BackupAdmin built-in role to access all Robocopy features, which includes copying
file DACL and SACL metadata.

Command-line interface privileges

You can perform most tasks granted by a privilege through the command-line interface (CLI). Some OneFS commands require
root access.
Each CLI command is associated with a privilege. Some commands require root access. See the OneFS Web Administration
Guide or the OneFS CLI Administration Guide for which privilege is associated with each command.

Command-to-privilege mapping
Each CLI command is associated with a privilege. Some commands require root access.

Table 53. Command-to-privilege Mapping

isi command Privilege
isi antivirus ISI_PRIV_ANTIVIRUS
isi audit ISI_PRIV_AUDIT
isi auth, excluding isi auth roles ISI_PRIV_AUTH
isi auth roles ISI_PRIV_ROLE
isi batterystatus ISI_PRIV_DEVICES
isi certificate ISI_PRIV_CERTIFICATE
isi cloud ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS
isi cluster ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER
isi config root
isi connectivity ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT
isi dedupe, excluding isi dedupe stats ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE
isi dedupe stats ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS
isi devices ISI_PRIV_DEVICES
isi diagnostics ISI_PRIV_SYS_SUPPORT
isi email ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER
isi esrs ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT
isi event ISI_PRIV_EVENT
isi fc ISI_PRIV_NDMP
isi file-filter ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER

146 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 53. Command-to-privilege Mapping (continued)
isi command Privilege
isi filepool ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS
isi ftp ISI_PRIV_FTP
isi get root
isi hardening ISI_PRIV_HARDENING
isi hdfs ISI_PRIV_HDFS
isi http ISI_PRIV_HTTP
isi ipmi ISI_PRIV_IPMI
isi job ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE
isi license ISI_PRIV_LICENSE
isi ndmp ISI_PRIV_NDMP
isi network ISI_PRIV_NETWORK
isi nfs ISI_PRIV_NFS
isi ntp ISI_PRIV_NTP
isi performance ISI_PRIV_PERFORMANCE
isi quota ISI_PRIV_QUOTA
isi readonly ISI_PRIV_DEVICES
isi s3 ISI_PRIV_S3
isi servicelight ISI_PRIV_DEVICES
isi services root
isi set root
isi smb ISI_PRIV_SMB
isi snapshot ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT
isi snmp ISI_PRIV_SNMP
isi ssh settings modify ISI_PRIV_AUTH
isi statistics ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS
isi status ISI_PRIV_EVENT

ISI_PRIV_DEVICES

ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE

ISI_PRIV_NETWORK

ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS

ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS

isi storagepool ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS

isi sync ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ
isi tape ISI_PRIV_NDMP
isi time ISI_PRIV_SYS_TIME
isi upgrade ISI_PRIV_SYS_UPGRADE
isi version ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER

Administrative roles and privileges 147

Table 53. Command-to-privilege Mapping (continued)
isi command Privilege
isi worm excluding isi worm files delete ISI_PRIV_WORM
isi worm files delete ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE
isi zone ISI_PRIV_AUTH

Privilege-to-command mapping
Each privilege is associated with one or more commands. Some commands require root access.

Table 54. Privilege-to-command Mapping

Privilege isi commands
ISI_PRIV_ANTIVIRUS isi antivirus
ISI_PRIV_AUDIT isi audit
ISI_PRIV_AUTH isi auth - excluding isi auth role

isi zone

ISI_PRIV_CLOUDPOOLS isi cloud

ISI_PRIV_CLUSTER isi email

isi version

ISI_PRIV_DEVICES isi batterystatus

isi devices

isi readonly

isi servicelight

isi status

ISI_PRIV_EVENT isi event

isi status

ISI_PRIV_FILE_FILTER isi file-filter

ISI_PRIV_FTP isi ftp
ISI_PRIV_HARDENING isi hardening
ISI_PRIV_HDFS isi hdfs
ISI_PRIV_HTTP isi http
ISI_PRIV_JOB_ENGINE isi job

isi dedupe

isi status

ISI_PRIV_LICENSE isi license

ISI_PRIV_NDMP isi fc

isi tape

isi ndmp

ISI_PRIV_NETWORK isi network

148 Administrative roles and privileges

Table 54. Privilege-to-command Mapping (continued)
Privilege isi commands

isi status

ISI_PRIV_NFS isi nfs

ISI_PRIV_NTP isi ntp
ISI_PRIV_QUOTA isi quota
ISI_PRIV_RESTRICTED_AUTH isi auth

isi auth users

isi auth groups

isi auth status

isi auth mapping token

ISI_PRIV_REMOTE_SUPPORT isi esrs

isi connectivity

ISI_PRIV_ROLE isi auth role

ISI_PRIV_SMARTPOOLS isi filepool

isi storagepool

isi status

ISI_PRIV_SMB isi smb

ISI_PRIV_SNAPSHOT isi snapshot
ISI_PRIV_SNMP isi snmp
ISI_PRIV_STATISTICS isi status

isi statistics

isi dedupe stats

ISI_PRIV_SYNCIQ isi sync

ISI_PRIV_SYS_TIME isi time
ISI_PRIV_SYS_UPGRADE isi upgrade
ISI_PRIV_WORM isi worm excluding isi worm files delete
ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE isi worm files delete
root ● isi config
● isi get
● isi services
● isi set

Managing roles
You can view, add, or remove members of any role. Except for integrated roles, whose privileges you cannot modify, you can
add or remove OneFS privileges on a role-by-role basis. You can copy and delete roles.
The role workflow navigation bar appears across the top of each role task window. The navigation bar indicates each step in the
creation or update process:

Basic settings > Members > Privileges > Summary

Administrative roles and privileges 149

OneFS highlights each step as you go. To return to a previous step, click that step in the navigation bar.
NOTE: Roles take both users and groups as members. If a group is added to a role, all users who are members of that group
are assigned the privileges that are associated with the role. Similarly, members of multiple roles are assigned the combined
privileges of each role.

Create a custom role

You can create a custom role and add privileges, subprivileges, and members to that role. Return to a previous step by clicking
that step on the workflow navigation bar.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. Click Create a Role.
The Basic settings window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
3. In the Role Name field, type a name for the role.
The role name must follow POSIX naming conventions. For example, the role name should not contain spaces or hyphens.
4. In the Description field, type a description, and then click Next.
The Members window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
5. Click Add Member to add a member to the role, and then click Next.
See Add a member to a role for instructions.
The Privileges window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
6. In the Permission column, click one or more permissions to assign access rights and privileges.
Permissions are - (no permission), R (read), X (run), and W (write).
a. To assign subprivileges, click the down arrow of the parent privilege to view and assign subprivileges.
7. Click Next.
The Summary window appears and its workflow step is highlighted. Review the settings, and then click Submit to create
the custom role or Cancel to cancel role creation.

Modify a role
You can modify the description and the user or group membership of any role, including integrated roles. You can modify the
name and privileges only of custom roles. Return to a previous step by clicking that step on the workflow navigation bar.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. In the Roles area, select a role and click View / Edit.
The Edit role details window appears. The workflow navigation bar Basic settings step is highlighted.
3. Modify the role name and description as needed, and then click Next.
The Members window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
4. Modify the members as needed and then click Next.
See Add a member to a role for instructions.
The Privileges window appears and its workflow step is highlighted.
5. Modify the privileges as needed by clicking the appropriate permissions in the Permission column.
Permissions are - (no permission), R (read), X (run), and W (write).
a. To assign subprivileges, click the down arrow of the parent privilege to view and assign subprivileges.
b. When you finish, click Next.
The Summary window appears.
6. Review the modified role, and then click Submit.

Copy a role
You can copy an existing role and add or remove privileges and members for that role as needed.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. In the Roles area, select a role and click More > Copy.
3. Modify the role name, description, members, and privileges as needed.

150 Administrative roles and privileges

4. Click Submit.

Add a privilege to a custom role

You can add or remove privileges to a custom role as needed. You can designate certain privileges as no permission, read-only,
read-run, or read/write. You cannot modify the privileges that are assigned to an integrated role.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. Click View/Edit for the role to modify.
3. Click the Privileges button on the workflow navigation bar.
The Privileges window appears.
4. In the Permission column, click one or more permissions to assign access rights and privileges.
Permissions are - (no permission), R (read), X (run), and W (write).
a. To assign subprivileges, click the down arrow of the parent privilege to view and assign subprivileges.
5. Click Next.
The Summary window appears. Review the settings, and then click Submit to update the permissions for this role or
Cancel.

Add a member to a role

You can add one or more members to a role when creating, copying, or modifying the role. A user or a group can be a member of
more than one role. The privileges associated with a role are granted to all members of that role.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. Click View/Edit for the role to modify.
3. Click the Members button on the workflow navigation bar.
The Members window appears.
4. Click Add Member.
The Search member dialog box appears.
5. Select one of following options:
● Users
● Groups
● Well-known SIDs
6. If you selected User or Group, locate the user or group through one of the following methods:
● Type the Username or Group Name you want to search for in the text field.
● Select the authentication provider you want to search for from the Providers list. Only providers that are currently
configured and enabled on the cluster are listed.
7. Click Search.
8. Select a user name, group name, or a well-known SID from the search results to add as members to the role.
9. Click Select user.

Delete a custom role

Deleting a custom role does not affect the privileges or users that are assigned to it. You cannot delete integrated roles.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. In the Roles area, select one or more roles, and then perform one of the following actions:
● To delete a single role, click More > Delete from the Actions column against the selected role.
● To delete multiple roles, select Delete from the Select a bulk action list.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

View a role
You can view information about integrated and custom roles.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.

Administrative roles and privileges 151

2. In the Roles area, select a role and click View / Edit.
The Edit role details window appears.
3. Use the roles workflow navigation bar to view the basic settings, members, and privileges for the role.
4. Click Cancel to return to the Membership & Roles page.

View privileges
You can view user privileges.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Roles.
2. Click View/Edit for the role for which to view privileges.
3. Click the Privileges button on the workflow navigation bar.
The Privileges window appears.
4. Scroll to view the privileges in the Permission column.
Permissions are - (no permission), R (read), X (run), and W (write).
5. Click Cancel to return to the Membership and Roles page.

152 Administrative roles and privileges

 9
Identity management
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Identity management overview
• Identity types
• Access tokens
• Access token generation
• Managing ID mappings
• Managing user identities

Identity management overview

In environments with several different types of directory services, OneFS maps the users and groups from the separate services
to provide a single unified identity on a cluster and uniform access control to files and directories, regardless of the incoming
protocol. This process is called identity mapping.
PowerScale clusters are frequently deployed in multiprotocol environments with multiple types of directory services, such as
Active Directory and LDAP. When a user with accounts in multiple directory services logs in to a cluster, OneFS combines the
user’s identities and privileges from all the directory services into a native access token.
You can configure OneFS settings to include a list of rules for access token manipulation to control user identity and privileges.
For example, you can set a user mapping rule to merge an Active Directory identity and an LDAP identity into a single token that
works for access to files stored over both SMB and NFS. The token can include groups from Active Directory and LDAP. The
mapping rules that you create can solve identity problems by manipulating access tokens in many ways, including the following
examples:
● Authenticate a user with Active Directory but give the user a UNIX identity.
● Select a primary group from competing choices in Active Directory or LDAP.
● Disallow login of users that do not exist in both Active Directory and LDAP.
For more information about identity management, see the white paper OneFS User Mapping - Mapping Identities across
Authentication Providers.

Identity types
OneFS supports three primary identity types, each of which you can store directly on the file system. Identity types are user
identifier and group identifier for UNIX, and security identifier for Windows.
When you log on to a cluster, the user mapper expands your identity to include your other identities from all the directory
services, including Active Directory, LDAP, and NIS. After OneFS maps your identities across the directory services, it generates
an access token that includes the identity information associated with your accounts. A token includes the following identifiers:
● A UNIX user identifier (UID) and a group identifier (GID). A UID or GID is a 32-bit number with a maximum value of
4,294,967,295.
● A security identifier (SID) for a Windows user account. A SID is a series of authorities and sub-authorities ending with
a 32-bit relative identifier (RID). Most SIDs have the form S-1-5-21-<A>-<B>-<C>-<RID>, where <A>, <B>, and <C> are
specific to a domain or computer and <RID> denotes the object in the domain.
● A primary group SID for a Windows group account.
● A list of supplemental identities, including all groups in which the user is a member.
The token also contains privileges that stem from administrative role-based access control.
On a PowerScale cluster, a file contains permissions, which appear as an access control list (ACL). The ACL controls access to
directories, files, and other securable system objects.

Identity management 153

When a user tries to access a file, OneFS compares the identities in the user’s access token with the file’s ACL. OneFS grants
access when the file’s ACL includes an access control entry (ACE) that allows the identity in the token to access the file and
that does not include an ACE that denies the identity access. OneFS compares the access token of a user with the ACL of a file.
NOTE: For more information about access control lists, including a description of the permissions and how they correspond
to POSIX mode bits, see OneFS: Authentication, Identity Management, and Authorization: Multi-protocol data access and
the Unified Permission Model.
When a name is provided as an identifier, it is converted into the corresponding user or group object and the correct identity
type. You can enter or display a name in various ways:
● UNIX assumes unique case-sensitive namespaces for users and groups. For example, Name and name represent different
objects.
● Windows provides a single, case-insensitive namespace for all objects and also specifies a prefix to target an Active
Directory domain; for example, domain\name.
● Kerberos and NFSv4 define principals, which require names to be formatted the same way as email addresses; for example,
name@[Link].
Multiple names can reference the same object. For example, given the name support and the domain [Link], support,
EXAMPLE\support and support@[Link] are all names for a single object in Active Directory.

Access tokens
An access token is created when the user first makes a request for access.
Access tokens represent who a user is when performing actions on the cluster and supply the primary owner and group
identities during file creation. Access tokens are also compared against the ACL or mode bits during authorization checks.
During user authorization, OneFS compares the access token, which is generated during the initial connection, with the
authorization data on the file. All user and identity mapping occurs during token generation; no mapping takes place during
permissions evaluation.
An access token includes all UIDs, GIDs, and SIDs for an identity, in addition to all OneFS privileges. OneFS reads the information
in the token to determine whether a user has access to a resource. It is important that the token contains the correct list of
UIDs, GIDs, and SIDs. An access token is created from one of the following sources:

Table 55. Access Token Sources

Source Authentication
Username ● SMB impersonates user
● Kerberized NFSv3
● Kerberized NFSv4
● NFS export user mapping
● HTTP
● FTP
● HDFS
Privilege Attribute Certificate (PAC) ● SMB NTLM
● Active Directory Kerberos
User identifier (UID) ● NFS AUTH_SYS mapping

Access token generation

For most protocols, the access token is generated from the username or from the authorization data that is retrieved during
authentication.
The following steps present a simplified overview of the complex process through which an access token is generated:

Step 1: User identity Using the initial identity, the user is looked up in all configured authentication providers in the access
lookup zone, in the order in which they are listed. The user identity and group list are retrieved from the
authenticating provider. Next, additional group memberships that are associated with the user and

154 Identity management

 group list are looked up for all other authentication providers. All of these SIDs, UIDs, or GIDs are
added to the initial token.
NOTE: An exception to this behavior occurs if the AD provider is configured to call other
providers, such as LDAP or NIS.

Step 2: ID mapping The user's identifiers are associated across directory services. All SIDs are converted to their
equivalent UID/GID and vice versa. These ID mappings are also added to the access token.
Step 3: User Access tokens from other directory services are combined. If the username matches any user mapping
mapping rules, the rules are processed in order and the token is updated accordingly.
Step 4: On-disk The default on-disk identity is calculated from the final token and the global setting. These identities
identity calculation are used for newly created files.

ID mapping
The Identity (ID) mapping service maintains relationship information between mapped Windows and UNIX identifiers to provide
consistent access control across file sharing protocols within an access zone.
NOTE: ID mapping and user mapping are different services, despite the similarity in names.

During authentication, the authentication daemon requests identity mappings from the ID mapping service in order to create
access tokens. Upon request, the ID mapping service returns Windows identifiers mapped to UNIX identifiers or UNIX identifiers
mapped to Windows identifiers. When a user authenticates to a cluster over NFS with a UID or GID, the ID mapping service
returns the mapped Windows SID, allowing access to files that another user stored over SMB. When a user authenticates to the
cluster over SMB with a SID, the ID mapping service returns the mapped UNIX UID and GID, allowing access to files that a UNIX
client stored over NFS.
Mappings between UIDs or GIDs and SIDs are stored according to access zone in a cluster-distributed database called the ID
map. Each mapping in the ID map is stored as a one-way relationship from the source to the target identity type. Two-way
mappings are stored as complementary one-way mappings.

Mapping Windows IDs to UNIX IDs

When a Windows user authenticates with an SID, the authentication daemon searches the external Active Directory provider
to look up the user or group associated with the SID. If the user or group has only an SID in the Active Directory, the
authentication daemon requests a mapping from the ID mapping service.
NOTE: User and group lookups may be disabled or limited, depending on the Active Directory settings. You enable user and
group lookup settings through the isi auth ads modify command.

If the ID mapping service does not locate and return a mapped UID or GID in the ID map, the authentication daemon searches
other external authentication providers configured in the same access zone for a user that matches the same name as the
Active Directory user.
If a matching user name is found in another external provider, the authentication daemon adds the matching user's UID or GID
to the access token for the Active Directory user, and the ID mapping service creates a mapping between the UID or GID and
the Active Directory user's SID in the ID map. This is referred to as an external mapping.
NOTE: When an external mapping is stored in the ID map, the UID is specified as the on-disk identity for that user. When
the ID mapping service stores a generated mapping, the SID is specified as the on-disk identity.
If a matching user name is not found in another external provider, the authentication daemon assigns a UID or GID from the ID
mapping range to the Active Directory user's SID, and the ID mapping service stores the mapping in the ID map. This is referred
to as a generated mapping. The ID mapping range is a pool of UIDs and GIDs allocated in the mapping settings.
After a mapping has been created for a user, the authentication daemon retrieves the UID or GID stored in the ID map upon
subsequent lookups for the user.

Mapping UNIX IDs to Windows IDs

The ID mapping service creates temporary UID-to-SID and GID-to-SID mappings only if a mapping does not already exist. The
UNIX SIDs that result from these mappings are never stored on disk.
UIDs and GIDs have a set of predefined mappings to and from SIDs.

Identity management 155

If a UID-to-SID or GID-to-SID mapping is requested during authentication, the ID mapping service generates a temporary UNIX
SID in the format S-1-22-1-<UID> or S-1-22-2-<GID> by applying the following rules:
● For UIDs, the ID mapping service generates a UNIX SID with a domain of S-1-22-1 and a resource ID (RID) matching the UID.
For example, the UNIX SID for UID 600 is S-1-22-1-600.
● For GIDs, the ID mapping service generates a UNIX SID with a domain of S-1-22-2 and an RID matching the GID. For
example, the UNIX SID for GID 800 is S-1-22-2-800.

ID mapping ranges
In access zones with multiple external authentication providers, such as Active Directory and LDAP, it is important that the
UIDs and GIDs from different providers that are configured in the same access zone do not overlap. Overlapping UIDs and GIDs
between providers within an access zone might result in some users gaining access to other users' directories and files.
The range of UIDs and GIDs that can be allocated for generated mappings is configurable in each access zone through the isi
auth settings mappings modify command. The default range for both UIDs and GIDs is 1000000–2000000 in each
access zone.
Do not include commonly used UIDs and GIDs in your ID ranges. For example, UIDs and GIDs below 1000 are reserved for system
accounts and should not be assigned to users or groups.

User mapping
User mapping provides a way to control permissions by specifying a user's security identifiers, user identifiers, and group
identifiers. OneFS uses the identifiers to check file or group ownership.
With the user-mapping feature, you can apply rules to modify which user identity OneFS uses, add supplemental user identities,
and modify a user's group membership. The user-mapping service combines a user’s identities from different directory services
into a single access token and then modifies it according to the rules that you create.
NOTE: You can configure mapping rules on a per-zone basis. Mapping rules must be configured separately in each access
zone that uses them. OneFS maps users only during login or protocol access.

Default user mappings

Default user mappings determine access if explicit user-mapping rules are not created.
If you do not configure rules, a user who authenticates with one directory service receives the identity information in other
directory services when the account names are the same. For example, a user who authenticates with an Active Directory
domain as Desktop\jane automatically receives identities in the final access token for the corresponding UNIX user account for
jane from LDAP or NIS.
In the most common scenario, OneFS is connected to two directory services, Active Directory and LDAP. In such a case, the
default mapping provides a user with the following identity attributes:
● A UID from LDAP
● The user SID from Active Directory
● An SID from the default group in Active Directory
The user's groups come from Active Directory and LDAP, with the LDAP groups and the autogenerated group GID added to
the list. To pull groups from LDAP, the mapping service queries the memberUid attribute. The user’s home directory, gecos, and
shell come from Active Directory.

Elements of user-mapping rules

You combine operators with user names to create a user-mapping rule.
The following elements affect how the user mapper applies a rule:
● The operator, which determines the operation that a rule performs
● Fields for usernames
● Options
● A parameter
● Wildcards

156 Identity management

User-mapping best practices
Follow best practices to simplify user mapping.

Use Active Directory Use Microsoft Active Directory with Windows Services for UNIX and RFC 2307 attributes to manage
with RFC 2307 and Linux, UNIX, and Windows systems. Integrating UNIX and Linux systems with Active Directory
Windows Services centralizes identity management and eases interoperability, reducing the need for user-mapping rules.
for UNIX Make sure your domain controllers are running Windows Server 2003 or later.
Employ a consistent The simplest configurations name users consistently, so that each UNIX user corresponds to a similarly
username strategy named Windows user. Such a convention allows rules with wildcard characters to match names and
map them without explicitly specifying each pair of accounts.
Do not use In networks with multiple identity sources, such as LDAP and Active Directory with RFC 2307
overlapping ID attributes, you should ensure that UID and GID ranges do not overlap. It is also important that the
ranges range from which OneFS automatically allocates UIDs and GIDs does not overlap with any other ID
range. OneFS automatically allocates UIDs and GIDs from the range 1,000,000-2,000,000. If UIDs and
GIDs overlap multiple directory services, some users might gain access to other users’ directories and
files.
Avoid common UIDs Do not include commonly used UIDs and GIDs in your ID ranges. For example, UIDs and GIDs below
and GIDs 1000 are reserved for system accounts; do not assign them to users or groups.
Do not use UPNs in You cannot use a user principal name (UPN) in a user mapping rule. A UPN is an Active Directory
mapping rules domain and username that are combined into an Internet-style name with an @ symbol, such as an
email address: jane@example. If you include a UPN in a rule, the mapping service ignores it and may
return an error. Instead, specify names in the format DOMAIN\[Link].
Group rules by type The system processes every mapping rule by default, which can present problems when you apply a
and order them deny-all rule—for example, to deny access to all unknown users. In addition, replacement rules might
interact with rules that contain wildcard characters. To minimize complexity, it is recommended that
you group rules by type and organize them in the following order:
1. Replacement rules: Specify all rules that replace an identity first to ensure that OneFS replaces all
instances of the identity.
2. Join, add, and insert rules: After the names are set by any replacement operations, specify join,
add, and insert rules to add extra identifiers.
3. Allow and deny rules: Specify rules that allow or deny access last.

NOTE: Stop all processing before applying a default deny rule. To do so, create a rule that
matches allowed users but does nothing, such as an add operator with no field options, and
has the break option. After enumerating the allowed users, you can place a catchall deny at
the end to replace anybody unmatched with an empty user.

To prevent explicit rules from being skipped, in each group of rules, order explicit rules before rules
that contain wildcard characters.
Add the LDAP or NIS When a PowerScale cluster is connected to Active Directory and LDAP, add the LDAP primary
primary group to the group to the list of supplemental groups. This enables OneFS to honor group permissions on files
supplemental groups created over NFS or migrated from other UNIX storage systems. The same practice is advised when a
PowerScale cluster is connected to Active Directory as well as and NIS.

On-disk identity
After the user mapper resolves a user's identity, OneFS determines an authoritative identifier for it, which is the preferred
on-disk identity.
OnesFS stores either UNIX or Windows identities in file metadata on disk. On-disk identity types are UNIX, SID, and native.
Identities are set when a file is created or a access control data for a file is modified. Almost all protocols require some level of
mapping to operate correctly, so choosing the preferred identity to store on disk is important. You can configure OneFS to store
either the UNIX or the Windows identity, or you can allow OneFS to determine the optimal identity to store.
On-disk identity types are UNIX, SID, and native. Although you can change the type of on-disk identity, the native identity is
best for a network with UNIX and Windows systems. In native on-disk identity mode, setting the UID as the on-disk identity
improves NFS performance.

Identity management 157

 NOTE: The SID on-disk identity is for a homogeneous network of Windows systems that are managed only with Active
Directory. When you upgrade, the on-disk identity setting is preserved. On new installations, the on-disk identity is set to
native.
The native on-disk identity type allows the OneFS authentication daemon to select the correct identity to store on disk by
checking for the identity mapping types in the following order:

Table 56. Ordered Identity Mapping Types

Order Mapping type Description
1 Algorithmic mapping An SID that matches S-1-22-1-UID or S-1-22-2-GID in the internal ID
mapping database is converted back to the corresponding UNIX identity,
and the UID and GID are set as the on-disk identity.
2 External mapping A user with an explicit UID and GID defined in a directory service (such as
Active Directory with RFC 2307 attributes, LDAP, NIS, or the OneFS file
provider or local provider) has the UNIX identity set as the on-disk identity.
3 Persistent mapping Mappings are stored persistently in the identity mapper database. An
identity with a persistent mapping in the identity mapper database uses
the destination of that mapping as the on-disk identity, which occurs
primarily with manual ID mappings. For example, if there is an ID mapping
of GID:10000 to S-1-5-32-545, a request for the on-disk storage of
GID:10000 returns S-1-5-32-545.
4 No mapping If a user lacks a UID or GID even after querying the other directory services
and identity databases, its SID is set as the on-disk identity. In addition, to
ensure that a user can access files over NFS, OneFS allocates a UID and
GID from a preset range of 1,000,000–2,000,000. In native on-disk identity
mode, a UID or GID that OneFS generates is never set as the on-disk
identity.

NOTE: If you change the on-disk identity type, you should run the PermissionRepair job with the Convert repair type
selected to make sure that the disk representation of all files is consistent with the changed setting. For more information,
see the Run the PermissionRepair job section.

Managing ID mappings
You can create, modify, and delete identity mappings and configure ID mapping settings.

Create an identity mapping

You can create a manual identity mapping between source and target identities or automatically generate a mapping for a source
identity.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth mapping create command.
The following command specifies IDs of source and target identities in the zone3 access zone to create a two-way mapping
between the identities:

isi auth mapping create --2way --source-sid=S-1-5-21-12345 \

--target-uid=5211 --zone=zone3

Modify an identity mapping

You can modify the configuration of an identity mapping.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.

158 Identity management

2. Run the isi auth mapping modify command.
The following command modifies the mapping of the user with UID 4236 in the zone3 access zone to include a reverse,
2-way mapping between the source and target identities:

isi auth mapping modify --source-uid=4236 \

--target-sid=S-1-5-21-12345 --zone=zone3 --2way

Delete an identity mapping

You can delete one or more identity mappings.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth mapping delete command.
The following command deletes all identity mappings in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth mapping delete --all --zone=zone3

The following command deletes all identity mappings in the zone3 access zone that were both created automatically and
include a UID or GID from an external authentication source:

isi auth mapping delete --all --only-external --zone=zone3

The following command deletes the identity mapping of the user with UID 4236 in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth mapping delete --source-uid=4236 --zone=zone3

View an identity mapping

You can display mapping information for a specific identity.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth mapping view command.
The following command displays mappings for the user with UID 4236 in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth mapping view --uid=4236 --zone=zone3

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: user_36
On-disk: UID: 4236
Unix uid: 4236
Unix gid: -100000
SMB: S-1-22-1-4236

Flush the identity mapping cache

You can flush the ID map cache to remove in-memory copies of all or specific identity mappings.
Modifications to ID mappings may cause the cache to become out of sync and users might experience slowness or stalls when
authenticating. You can flush the cache to synchronize the mappings.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth mapping flush command.
The following command flushes all identity mappings on the cluster:

isi auth mapping flush --all

Identity management 159

 The following command flushes the mapping of the user with UID 4236 in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth mapping flush --source-uid-4236 --zone=zone3

View a user token

You can view the contents of an access token generated for a user during authentication.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth mapping token command.
The following command displays the access token of a user with UID 4236 in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth mapping token --uid=4236 --zone=zone3

The system displays output similar to the following example:

User
Name: user_36
UID: 4236
SID: S-1-22-1-4236
On Disk: 4236
ZID: 3
Zone: zone3
Privileges: -
Primary Group
Name: user_36
GID: 4236
SID: S-1-22-2-4236
On Disk: 4236

Configure identity mapping settings

You can enable or disable automatic allocation of UIDs and GIDS and customize the range of ID values in each access zone. The
default range is 1000000–2000000.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth settings mapping modify command.
The following command enables automatic allocation of both UIDs and GIDs in the zone3 access zone and sets their
allocation ranges to 25000–50000:

isi auth settings mapping modify --gid-range-enabled=yes \

--gid-range-min=25000 --gid-range-max=50000 --uid-range-enabled=yes \
--uid-range-min=25000 --uid-range-max=50000 --zone=zone3

View identity mapping settings

You can view the current configuration of identity mapping settings in each zone.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi auth settings mapping view command.
The following command displays the current settings in the zone3 access zone:

isi auth settings mapping view --zone=zone3

The system displays output similar to the following example:

160 Identity management

 GID Range Enabled: Yes
GID Range Min: 25000
GID Range Max: 50000
UID Range Enabled: Yes
UID Range Min: 25000
UID Range Max: 50000

Managing user identities

You can manage user identities by creating user-mapping rules.
When you create user-mapping rules, it is important to remember the following information:
● You can only create user-mapping rules if you are connected to the cluster through the System zone; however, you can
apply user-mapping rules to specific access zones. If you create a user-mapping rule for a specific access zone, the rule
applies only in the context of its zone.
● When you change user-mapping on one node, OneFS propagates the change to the other nodes.
● After you make a user-mapping change, the OneFS authentication service reloads the configuration.

View user identity

You can view the identities and group membership that a specified user has within the Active Directory and LDAP directory
services, including the user's security identifier (SID) history.
This procedure must be performed through the command-line interface (CLI).
NOTE: The OneFS user access token contains a combination of identities from Active Directory and LDAP if both directory
services are configured. You can run the following commands to discover the identities that are within each specific
directory service.
1. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. View a user identity from Active Directory only by running the isi auth users view command.
The following command displays the identity of a user named stand in the Active Directory domain named YORK:

isi auth users view --user=YORK\\stand --show-groups

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: YORK\stand
DN: CN=stand,CN=Users,DC=york,DC=hull,DC=example,DC=com
DNS Domain: [Link]
Domain: YORK
Provider: lsa-activedirectory-provider:[Link]
Sam Account Name: stand
UID: 4326
SID: S-1-5-21-1195855716-1269722693-1240286574-591111
Primary Group
ID : GID:1000000
Name : YORK\york_sh_udg
Additional Groups: YORK\sd-york space group
YORK\york_sh_udg
YORK\sd-york-group
YORK\sd-group
YORK\domain users

3. View a user identity from LDAP only by running the isi auth users view command.
The following command displays the identity of an LDAP user named stand:

isi auth user view --user=stand --show-groups

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: stand
DN: uid=stand,ou=People,dc=colorado4,dc=hull,dc=example,dc=com

Identity management 161

 DNS Domain: -
Domain: LDAP_USERS
Provider: lsa-ldap-provider:Unix LDAP
Sam Account Name: stand
UID: 4326
SID: S-1-22-1-4326
Primary Group
ID : GID:7222
Name : stand
Additional Groups: stand
sd-group
sd-group2

Create a user-mapping rule

You can create a user-mapping rule to manage user identities.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > User Mapping.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone that contains the rules you want to manage, and then click Edit
User Mapping Rules.
The Edit User Mapping Rules dialog box appears.
3. Click Create a User Mapping Rule.
The Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box appears.
4. From the Operation list, select an operation.
Depending on your selection, the Create a User Mapping Rule displays additional fields.
5. Fill in the fields as needed.
6. Click Add Rule to save the rule and return to the Edit User Mapping Rules dialog box.
7. In the User Mapping Rules area, click the title bar of a rule and drag it to a new position to change the position of a rule in
the list.
Rules are applied in the order they are listed. To ensure that each rule gets processed, list replacement rules first and list
allow or deny rules at the end.
8. If the access token is not associated with a default UNIX user or if the default UNIX user does not have a primary UID or
GID, select one of the following options for authentication:
● Generate a primary UID or GID from the reserved range of UIDs and GIDs
● Deny access to the user
● Assign another user as the default UNIX user

NOTE: It is recommended that you assign a user from the well-known account that has a read-only access.

9. Click Save Changes.

Related references
Mapping rule options
Mapping rule operators

Related tasks
Merge Windows and UNIX tokens
Retrieve the primary group from LDAP
Test a user-mapping rule

Test a user-mapping rule

After creating a user-mapping rule, you can test it to ensure that the results for a user token are as expected.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > User Mapping.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select an access zone that contains the rules that you want to test.
3. In the Test User Mapping area, in the User, Group, or Well-known SID field, type a user or group name or the value for a
SID, or click Browse to make a selection.

162 Identity management

4. Click Test Mapping.
The token results appear in the Results section as shown:

User
Name:krb_user_002
UID:1002
SID:S-1-22-1-1001
On disk:1001
ZID:1
Zone:System

Privileges:-

Primary Group
Name:krb_user_001
GID:1000
SID:S-1-22-2-1001
On disk:1000

Supplemental Identities
Name:Authenticated Users
GID: -
SID:S-1-5-11

Related tasks
Create a user-mapping rule

Merge Windows and UNIX tokens

You can use either the join or append operator to merge tokens from different directory services into a single OneFS user token.
When Windows and Unix user names do not match across directory services, you can write user-mapping rules that use either
the join or the append operator to merge two user names into a single token. For example, if a user's Windows username is
win_bob and the users Unix username is UNIX_bob, you can join or append the user tokens of the two different users.
When you append an account to another account, the append operator adds information from one identity to another: OneFS
appends the fields that the options specify from the source identity to the target identity. OneFS appends the identifiers to the
additional group list.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > User Mapping.
2. Select the Current Access Zone that contains the rules you want to manage, and then click Edit User Mapping Rules.
The Edit User Mapping Rules dialog box appears.
3. Click Create a User Mapping Rule.
The Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box appears.
4. From the Operation list, select an option:

Option Description
Join two users together Inserts the new identity into the token.
Append field from a user Modifies the access token by adding fields to it.

Depending on your selection, the Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box refreshes to display additional fields.
5. Populate the fields as needed.
6. Click Add Rule.
NOTE: Rules are called in the order they are listed. To ensure that each rule gets processed, list replacements first and
allow/deny rules last. You can change the order in which a rule is listed by clicking its title bar and dragging it to a new
position.

7. Click Save Changes.

Related tasks
Test a user-mapping rule

Identity management 163

Retrieve the primary group from LDAP
You can create a user-mapping rule to insert primary group information from LDAP into a user's access token.
By default, the user-mapping service combines information from AD and LDAP but gives precedence to the information from
AD. You can create a mapping rule to control how OneFS combines the information, giving precedence to a primary group from
LDAP rather than from Active Directory for a user.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > User Mapping.
2. Select the Current Access Zone that contains the rules you want to manage, and then click Edit User Mapping Rules.
The Edit User Mapping Rules dialog box appears.
3. Click Create a User Mapping Rule.
The Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box appears.
4. From the Operation list, select Insert fields from a user.
The Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box refreshes to display additional fields.
5. To populate the Insert Fields into this User field, perform the following steps:
a. Click Browse.
The Select a User dialog box appears.
b. Select a user and an Active Directory authentication provider.
c. Click Search to view the search results.
d. Select a username and click Select to return to the Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box.
The primary group of the second user is inserted as the primary group of the first user.
6. Select the Insert primary group SID and GID check box.
7. To populate the Insert Fields from this User field, perform the following steps:
a. Click Browse.
The Select a User dialog box appears.
b. Select a user and an LDAP authentication provider.
c. Click Search to view the search results.
d. Select a username and click Select to return to the Create a User Mapping Rule dialog box.
8. Click Add Rule.
NOTE: Rules are called in the order they are listed. To ensure that each rule gets processed, list the replacements first
and the allow or deny rules at the end. You can change the order in which a rule is listed by clicking its title bar and
dragging it to a new position.

9. Click Save Changes.

Related tasks
Test a user-mapping rule

Mapping rule options

Mapping rules can contain options that target the fields of an access token.
A field represents an aspect of a cross-domain access token, such as the primary UID and primary user SID from a user that you
select. You can see some of the fields in the OneFS web administration interface. User in the web administration interface is the
same as username. You can also see fields in an access token by running the command isi auth mapping token.
When you create a rule, you can add an option to manipulate how OneFS combines aspects of two identities into a single token.
For example, an option can force OneFS to append the supplement groups to a token.
A token includes the following fields that you can manipulate with user mapping rules:
● username
● unix_name
● primary_uid
● primary_user_sid
● primary_gid
● primary_group_sid
● additional_ids (includes supplemental groups)

164 Identity management

Options control how a rule combines identity information in a token. The break option is the exception: It stops OneFS from
processing additional rules.
Although several options can apply to a rule, not all options apply to all operators. The following table describes the effect of
each option and the operators that they work with.

Table 57. Mapping Rule Options

Option Operator Description
user insert, append Copies the primary UID and primary user SID, if they exist, to
the token.
groups insert, append Copies the primary GID and primary group SID, if they exist, to
the token.
groups insert, append Copies all the additional identifiers to the token. The additional
identifiers exclude the primary UID, the primary GID, the
primary user SID, and the primary group SID.
default_user all operators except remove If the mapping service fails to find the second user in a rule,
groups the service tries to find the username of the default user.
The name of the default user cannot include wildcards. When
you set the option for the default user in a rule with the
command-line interface, you must set it with an underscore:
default_user.
break all operators Stops the mapping service from applying rules that follow
the insertion point of the break option. The mapping service
generates the final token at the point of the break.

Related tasks
Create a user-mapping rule

Mapping rule operators

The operator determines what a mapping rule does.
You can create user-mapping rules through either the web-administration interface, where the operators are spelled out in a list,
or from the command-line interface.
When you create a mapping rule with the OneFS command-line interface (CLI), you must specify an operator with a symbol. The
operator affects the direction in which the mapping service processes a rule. For more information about creating a mapping
rule, see the white paper Managing identities with the PowerScale OneFS user mapping service. The following table describes
the operators that you can use in a mapping rule.
A mapping rule can contain only one operator.

Table 58. Mapping Rule Operators

Operator Web interface CLI Direction Description
append Append fields from a ++ Left-to-right Modifies an access token by adding
user fields to it. The mapping service appends
the fields that are specified in the list of
options (user, group, groups) to the first
identity in the rule. The fields are copied
from the second identity in the rule. All
appended identifiers become members
of the additional groups list. An append
rule without an option performs only a
lookup operation; you must include an
option to alter a token.
insert Insert fields from a user += Left-to-right Modifies an existing access token by
adding fields to it. Fields specified in
the options list (user, group, groups)

Identity management 165

Table 58. Mapping Rule Operators (continued)
Operator Web interface CLI Direction Description
are copied from the new identity and
inserted into the identity in the token.
When the rule inserts a primary user
or primary group, it becomes the
new primary user and primary group
in the token. The previous primary
user and primary group move to
the additional identifiers list. Modifying
the primary user leaves the token’s
username unchanged. When inserting
the additional groups from an identity,
the service adds the new groups to the
existing groups.
replace Replace one user with a => Left-to-right Removes the token and replaces it with
different user the new token that is identified by
the second username. If the second
username is empty, the mapping service
removes the first username in the token,
leaving no username. If a token contains
no username, OneFS denies access with
a no such user error.

remove Remove supplemental -- Unary Modifies a token by removing the

groups groups from a user supplemental groups.
join Join two users together &= Bi-directional Inserts the new identity into the token.
If the new identity is the second user,
the mapping service inserts it after
the existing identity; otherwise, the
service inserts it before the existing
identity. The location of the insertion
point is relevant when the existing
identity is already the first in the list
because OneFS uses the first identity
to determine the ownership of new file
system objects.

Related tasks
Create a user-mapping rule

166 Identity management

 10
Home directories
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Home directories overview
• Home directory permissions
• Authenticating SMB users
• Home directory creation through SMB
• Home directory creation through SSH and FTP
• Home directory creation in a mixed environment
• Interactions between ACLs and mode bits
• Default home directory settings in authentication providers
• Supported expansion variables
• Domain variables in home directory provisioning

Home directories overview

When you create a local user, OneFS automatically creates a home directory for the user. OneFS also supports dynamic home
directory provisioning for users who access the cluster by connecting to an SMB share or by logging in through FTP or SSH.
Regardless of the method by which a home directory was created, you can configure access to the home directory through a
combination of SMB, SSH, and FTP.

Home directory permissions

You can set up a user's home directory with a Windows ACL or with POSIX mode bits, which are then converted into a synthetic
ACL. The method by which a home directory is created determines the initial permissions that are set on the home directory.
When you create a local user, the user's home directory is created with mode bits by default.
For users who authenticate against external sources, you can specify settings to create home directories dynamically at login
time. If a home directory is created during a login through SSH or FTP, it is set up with mode bits; if a home directory is created
during an SMB connection, it receives either mode bits or an ACL. For example, if an LDAP user first logs in through SSH or
FTP, the user's home directory is created with mode bits. If the same user first connects through an SMB share, the home
directory is created with the permissions indicated by the configured SMB settings. If the --inheritable-path-acl option
is enabled, an ACL is generated; otherwise, mode bits are used.

Authenticating SMB users

You can authenticate SMB users from authentication providers that can handle NT hashes.
SMB sends an NT password hash to authenticate SMB users, so only users from authentication providers that can handle NT
hashes can log in over SMB. The following OneFS-supported authentication providers can handle NT hashes:
● Active Directory
● Local
● LDAPSAM (LDAP with Samba extensions enabled)

Home directories 167

Home directory creation through SMB
You can create SMB shares by including expansion variables in the share path. Expansion variables give users to access their
home directories by connecting to the share. You can also enable dynamic provisioning of home directories that do not exist at
SMB connection time.
NOTE: Share permissions are checked when files are accessed, before the underlying file system permissions are checked.
Either of these permissions can prevent access to the file or directory.

Create home directories with expansion variables

You can configure settings with expansion variables to create SMB share home directories.
When users access the cluster over SMB, home directory access is through SMB shares. You can configure settings with a path
that uses a variable expansion syntax, allowing a user to connect to their home directory share.
NOTE: Home directory share paths must be in the root path of the access zone in which the home directory SMB share is
created.
In the following commands, the --allow-variable-expansion option is enabled to indicate that %U should be expanded
to the user name, which is user411 in this example. The --auto-create-directory option is enabled to create the directory
if it does not exist:

isi smb shares create HOMEDIR --path=/ifs/home/%U \

--allow-variable-expansion=yes --auto-create-directory=yes
isi smb shares permission modify HOMEDIR --wellknown Everyone \
--permission-type allow --permission full
isi smb shares view HOMEDIR

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Share Name: HOMEDIR

Path: /ifs/home/%U
Description:
Client-side Caching Policy: manual
Automatically expand user names or domain names: True
Automatically create home directories for users: True
Browsable: True
Permissions:
Account Account Type Run as Root Permission Type Permission
------------------------------------------------------------
Everyone wellknown False allow full
------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1
...

When user411 connects to the share with the net use command, the user's home directory is created at /ifs/home/
user411. On user411's Windows client, the net use m: command connects /ifs/home/user411 through the HOMEDIR
share:

net use m: \\[Link]\HOMEDIR /u:user411

1. Run the following commands on the cluster with the --allow-variable-expansion option enabled. The %U expansion
variable expands to the user name, and the --auto-create-directory option is enabled to create the directory if it
does not exist:

isi smb shares create HOMEDIR --path=/ifs/home/%U \

--allow-variable-expansion=yes --auto-create-directory=yes
isi smb shares permission modify HOMEDIR --wellknown Everyone \
--permission-type allow --permission full

2. Run the following command to view the home directory settings:

isi smb shares view HOMEDIR

168 Home directories

 The system displays output similar to the following example:

Share Name: HOMEDIR

Path: /ifs/home/%U
Description:
Client-side Caching Policy: manual
Automatically expand user names or domain names: True
Automatically create home directories for users: True
Browsable: True
Permissions:
Account Account Type Run as Root Permission Type Permission
------------------------------------------------------------
Everyone wellknown False allow full
------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1
...

If user411 connects to the share with the net use command, user411's home directory is created at /ifs/home/
user411. On user411's Windows client, the net use m: command connects /ifs/home/user411 through the
HOMEDIR share, mapping the connection similar to the following example:

net use m: \\[Link]\HOMEDIR /u:user411

Create home directories with the --inheritable-path-acl option

You can enable the --inheritable-path-acl option on a share to specify that it is to be inherited on the share path if the
parent directory has an inheritable ACL.
To perform most configuration tasks, you must log on as a member of the SecurityAdmin role.
By default, an SMB share's directory path is created with a synthetic ACL based on mode bits. You can enable the --
inheritable-path-acl option to use the inheritable ACL on all directories that are created, either at share creation time or
for those dynamically provisioned when connecting to that share.
1. Run commands similar to the following examples to enable the --inheritable-path-acl option on the cluster to
dynamically provision a user home directory at first connection to a share on the cluster:

isi smb shares create HOMEDIR_ACL --path=/ifs/home/%U \

--allow-variable-expansion=yes --auto-create-directory=yes \
--inheritable-path-acl=yes

isi smb shares permission modify HOMEDIR_ACL \

--wellknown Everyone \
--permission-type allow --permission full

2. Run a net use command, similar to the following example, on a Windows client to map the home directory for user411:

net use q: \\[Link]\HOMEDIR_ACL /u:user411

3. Run a command similar to the following example on the cluster to view the inherited ACL permissions for the user411 share:

cd /ifs/home/user411
ls -lde .

The system displays output similar to the following example:

drwx------ + 2 user411 PowerScale Users 0 Oct 19 16:23 ./

OWNER: user:user411
GROUP: group:PowerScale Users
CONTROL:dacl_auto_inherited,dacl_protected
0: user:user411 allow dir_gen_all,object_inherit,container_inherit

Home directories 169

Create special home directories with the SMB share %U variable
The special SMB share name %U enables you to create a home-directory SMB share that appears the same as a user's user
name.
You typically set up a %U SMB share with a share path that includes the %U expansion variable. If a user attempts to connect
to a share matching the login name and it does not exist, the user connects to the %U share instead and is directed to the
expanded path for the %U share.
NOTE: If another SMB share exists that matches the user's name, the user connects to the explicitly named share rather
than to the %U share.
Run the following command to create a share that matches the authenticated user login name when the user connects to the
share:

isi smb share create %U /ifs/home/%U \

--allow-variable-expansion=yes --auto-create-directory=yes \
--zone=System

After running this command, user Zachary will see a share named 'zachary' rather than '%U', and when Zachary tries to connect
to the share named 'zachary', he will be directed to /ifs/home/zachary. On a Windows client, if Zachary runs the following
commands, he sees the contents of his /ifs/home/zachary directory:

net use m: \\[Link]\zachary /u:zachary

cd m:
dir

Similarly, if user Claudia runs the following commands on a Windows client, she sees the directory contents of /ifs/home/
claudia:

net use m: \\[Link]\claudia /u:claudia

cd m:
dir

Zachary and Claudia cannot access one another's home directory because only the share 'zachary' exists for Zachary and only
the share 'claudia' exists for Claudia.

Home directory creation through SSH and FTP

You can configure home directory support for users who access the cluster through SSH or FTP by modifying authentication
provider settings.

Set the SSH or FTP login shell

You can use the --login-shell option to set the default login shell for the user.
By default, the --login-shell option, if specified, overrides any login-shell information provided by the authentication
provider, except with Active Directory. If the --login-shell option is specified with Active Directory, it simply represents
the default login shell if the Active Directory server does not provide login-shell information.

NOTE: The following examples refer to setting the login shell to /bin/bash. You can also set the shell to /bin/rbash.

1. Run the following command to set the login shell for all local users to /bin/bash:

isi auth local modify System --login-shell /bin/bash

2. Run the following command to set the default login shell for all Active Directory users in your domain to /bin/bash:

isi auth ads modify [Link] --login-shell /bin/bash

170 Home directories

Set SSH/FTP home directory permissions
You can specify home directory permissions for a home directory that is accessed through SSH or FTP by setting a umask value.
To perform most configuration tasks, you must log on as a member of the SecurityAdmin role.
When a user's home directory is created at login through SSH or FTP, it is created using POSIX mode bits. The permissions
setting on a user's home directory is set to 0755, then masked according to the umask setting of the user's access zone
to further limit permissions. You can modify the umask setting for a zone with the --home-directory-umask option,
specifying an octal number as the umask value.
1. Run the following command to view umask setting:

isi zone zones view System

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: System
Path: /ifs
Groupnet: groupnet0
Map Untrusted: -
Auth Providers: lsa-local-provider:System, lsa-file-provider:System

NetBIOS Name: -
User Mapping Rules: -
Home Directory Umask: 0077
Skeleton Directory: /usr/share/skel
Cache Entry Expiry: 4H
Negative Cache Entry Expiry: 1m
Zone ID: 1

In the command result, you can see the default setting for Home Directory Umask for the created home directory is
0700, which is equivalent to (0755 & ~(077)). You can modify the Home Directory Umask setting for a zone with the
--home-directory-umask option, specifying an octal number as the umask value. This value indicates the permissions
that are to be disabled, so larger mask values indicate fewer permissions. For example, a umask value of 000 or 022 yields
created home directory permissions of 0755, whereas a umask value of 077 yields created home directory permissions of
0700.
2. Run a command similar to the following example to allow a group/others write/execute permission in a home directory:

isi zone zones modify System --home-directory-umask=022

In this example, user home directories will be created with mode bits 0755 masked by the umask field, set to the value of
022. Therefore, user home directories will be created with mode bits 0755, which is equivalent to (0755 & ~(022)).

Set SSH/FTP home directory creation options

You can configure home directory support for a user who accesses the cluster through SSH or FTP by specifying authentication
provider options.
1. Run the following command to view settings for an Active Directory authentication provider on the cluster:

isi auth ads list

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name Authentication Status DC Name Site

---------------------------------------------------------
[Link] Yes online - SEA
---------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Home directories 171

2. Run the isi auth ads modify command with the --home-directory-template and --create-home-
directory options.

isi auth ads modify [Link] \

--home-directory-template=/ifs/home/ADS/%D/%U \
--create-home-directory=yes

3. Run the isi auth ads view command with the --verbose option.
The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: [Link]
NetBIOS Domain: YOUR
...
Create Home Directory: Yes
Home Directory Template: /ifs/home/ADS/%D/%U
Login Shell: /bin/sh

4. Run the id command.

The system displays output similar to the following example:

uid=1000008(<your-domain>\user_100) gid=1000000(<your-domain>\domain users)

groups=1000000(<your-domain>\domain users),1000024(<your-domain>\c1t),1545(Users)

5. Optional: To verify this information from an external UNIX node, run the ssh command from an external UNIX node.
For example, the following command would create /ifs/home/ADS/<your-domain>/user_100 if it did not previously
exist:

ssh <your-domain>\\user_100@[Link]

Provision home directories with dot files

You can provision home directories with dot files.
To perform most configuration tasks, you must log on as a member of the SecurityAdmin role.
The skeleton directory, which is located at /usr/share/skel by default, contains a set of files that are copied to the user's
home directory when a local user is created or when a user home directory is dynamically created during login. Files in the
skeleton directory that begin with dot. are renamed to remove the dot prefix when they are copied to the user's home
directory. For example, [Link] is copied to the user's home directory as .cshrc. This format enables dot files in the
skeleton directory to be viewable through the command-line interface without requiring the ls -a command.
For SMB shares that might use home directories that were provisioned with dot files, you can set an option to prevent users
who connect to the share through SMB from viewing the dot files.
1. Run the following command to display the default skeleton directory in the System access zone:

isi zone zones view System

The system displays output similar to the following example:

Name: System
...
Skeleton Directory: /usr/share/skel

2. Run the isi zone zones modify command to modify the default skeleton directory.
The following command modifies the default skeleton directory, /usr/share/skel, in an access zone, where System is
the value for the <zone> option and /usr/share/skel2 is the value for the <path> option:

isi zone zones modify System --skeleton-directory=/usr/share/skel2

172 Home directories

Home directory creation in a mixed environment
If a user logs in through both SMB and SSH, it is recommended that you configure home directory settings so the path template
is the same for the SMB share and each authentication provider against which the user is authenticating through SSH.

Interactions between ACLs and mode bits

Home directory setup is determined by several factors, including how users authenticate and the options that specify home
directory creation.
A user's home directory may be set up with either ACLs or POSIX mode bits, which are converted into a synthetic ACL. The
directory of a local user is created when the local user is created, and the directory is set up with POSIX mode bits by default.
Directories can be dynamically provisioned at log in for users who authenticate against external sources, and in some cases for
users who authenticate against the File provider. In this situation, the user home directory is created according to how the user
first logs in.
For example, if an LDAP user first logs in through SSH or FTP and the user home directory is created, it is created with POSIX
mode bits. If that same user first connects through an SMB home directory share, the home directory is created as specified by
the SMB option settings. If the --inherited-path-acl option is enabled, ACLs are generated. Otherwise, POSIX mode bits
are used.

Default home directory settings in authentication

providers
The default settings that affect how home directories are set up differ, based on the authentication provider that the user
authenticates against.

Table 59. Authentication Providers

Authentication provider Home directory Home directory creation UNIX login shell
Local ● --home-directory- Enabled /bin/sh
template=/ifs/
home/%U
● --create-home-
directory=yes
● --login-
shell=/bin/sh

File ● --home-directory- Disabled None

template=""
● --create-home-
directory=no

Active Directory ● --home-directory- Disabled /bin/sh

template=/ifs/
home/%D/%U
● --create-home-
directory=no
● --login-
shell=/bin/sh
NOTE: If available,
provider information
overrides this value.

LDAP ● --home-directory- Disabled None

template=""

Home directories 173

Table 59. Authentication Providers (continued)
Authentication provider Home directory Home directory creation UNIX login shell
● --create-home-
directory=no

NIS ● --home-directory- Disabled None

template=""
● --create-home-
directory=no

Related references
Supported expansion variables

Supported expansion variables

You can include expansion variables in an SMB share path or in an authentication provider's home directory template.
OneFS supports the following expansion variables. You can improve performance and reduce the number of shares to be
managed when you configure shares with expansion variables. For example, you can include the %U variable for a share rather
than create a share for each user. When a %U is included in the name so that each user path is different, security is still ensured
because each user can view and access only his or her home directory.
NOTE: When you create an SMB share through the web administration interface, you must select the Allow Variable
Expansion check box or the string is interpreted literally by the system.

Table 60. Expansion Variables

Variable Value Description
%U User name (for example, Expands to the user name to allow different users to use
user_001) different home directories. This variable is typically included at
the end of the path. For example, for a user who is named
user1, the path /ifs/home/%U is mapped to /ifs/home/
user1.

%D NetBIOS domain name Expands to the user domain name, based on the
(for example, YORK for authentication provider:
[Link]) ● For Active Directory users, %D expands to the Active
Directory NetBIOS name.
● For local users, %D expands to the cluster name in
uppercase characters. For example, for a cluster that is
named cluster1, %D expands to CLUSTER1.
● For users in the System file provider, %D expands to
UNIX_USERS.
● For users in other file providers, %D expands to
FILE_USERS.
● For LDAP users, %D expands to LDAP_USERS.
● For NIS users, %D expands to NIS_USERS.
%Z Zone name (for example, Expands to the access zone name. If multiple zones are
ZoneABC) activated, this variable is useful for differentiating users in
separate zones. For example, for a user who is named user1
in the System zone, the path /ifs/home/%Z/%U is mapped
to /ifs/home/System/user1.

%L Host name (cluster host name Expands to the host name of the cluster, normalized to
in lowercase) lowercase. Limited use.
%0 First character of the user Expands to the first character of the user name.
name

174 Home directories

Table 60. Expansion Variables (continued)
Variable Value Description
%1 Second character of the user Expands to the second character of the user name.
name
%2 Third character of the user Expands to the third character of the user name.
name

NOTE: If the user name includes fewer than three characters, the %0, %1, and %2 variables wrap around. For example, for
a user who is named ab, the variables maps to a, b, and a, respectively. For a user named a, all three variables map to a.

Domain variables in home directory provisioning

You can use domain variables to specify authentication providers when provisioning home directories.
The domain variable (%D) is typically used for Active Directory users, but it has a value set that can be used for other
authentication providers. %D expands as described in the following table for the various authentication providers.

Table 61. Domain Variable Authentication

Authenticated user %D expansion
Active Directory user Active Directory NetBIOS name—for example, YORK for provider [Link].
Local user The cluster name in all-uppercase characters—for example, if the cluster is named MyCluster,
%D expands to MYCLUSTER.
File user ● UNIX_USERS (for System file provider)
● FILE_USERS (for all other file providers)
LDAP user LDAP_USERS (for all LDAP authentication providers)
NIS user NIS_USERS (for all NIS authentication providers)

Related references
Supported expansion variables

Home directories 175

 11
Data access control
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Data access control overview
• ACLs
• UNIX permissions
• Mixed-permission environments
• Managing access permissions

Data access control overview

OneFS supports two types of permissions data on files and directories that control who has access: Windows-style access
control lists (ACLs) and POSIX mode bits (UNIX permissions). You can configure global policy settings that enable you to
customize default ACL and UNIX permissions to best support your environment.
The OneFS file system installs with UNIX permissions as the default. You can give a file or directory an ACL by using Windows
Explorer or OneFS administrative tools. Typically, files created over SMB or in a directory that has an ACL, receive an ACL. If a
file receives an ACL, OneFS stops enforcing the file's mode bits; the mode bits are provided for only protocol compatibility, not
for access control.
OneFS supports multiprotocol data access over Network File System (NFS) and Server Message Block (SMB) with a unified
security model. A user is granted or denied the same access to a file when using SMB for Windows file sharing as when using
NFS for UNIX file sharing.
NFS enables Linux and UNIX clients to remotely mount any subdirectory, including subdirectories created by Windows or SMB
users. Linux and UNIX clients also can mount ACL-protected subdirectories created by a OneFS administrator. SMB provides
Windows users access to files, directories and other file system resources stored by UNIX and Linux systems. In addition to
Windows users, ACLs can affect local, NIS, and LDAP users.
By default, OneFS maintains the same file permissions regardless of the client’s operating system, the user’s identity
management system, or the file sharing protocol. When OneFS must transform a file’s permissions from ACLs to mode bits
or vice versa, it merges the permissions into an optimal representation that uniquely balances user expectations and file security.

ACLs
In Windows environments, file and directory permissions, referred to as access rights, are defined in access control lists (ACLs).
Although ACLs are more complex than mode bits, ACLs can express much more granular sets of access rules. OneFS checks the
ACL processing rules commonly associated with Windows ACLs.
A Windows ACL contains zero or more access control entries (ACEs), each of which represents the security identifier (SID) of
a user or a group as a trustee. In OneFS, an ACL can contain ACEs with a UID, GID, or SID as the trustee. Each ACE contains
a set of rights that allow or deny access to a file or folder. An ACE can optionally contain an inheritance flag to specify whether
the ACE should be inherited by child folders and files.
NOTE: Instead of the standard three permissions available for mode bits, ACLs have 32 bits of fine-grained access rights.
Of these, the upper 16 bits are general and apply to all object types. The lower 16 bits vary between files and directories but
are defined in a way that allows most applications to apply the same bits for files and directories.
Rights grant or deny access for a given trustee. You can block user access explicitly through a deny ACE or implicitly by
ensuring that a user does not directly, or indirectly through a group, appear in an ACE that grants the right.

176 Data access control

UNIX permissions
In a UNIX environment, file and directory access is controlled by POSIX mode bits, which grant read, write, or execute
permissions to the owning user, the owning group, and everyone else.
OneFS supports the standard UNIX tools for viewing and changing permissions, ls, chmod, and chown. For more information,
run the man ls, man chmod, and man chown commands.
All files contain 16 permission bits, which provide information about the file or directory type and the permissions. The lower 9
bits are grouped as three 3-bit sets, called triples, which contain the read, write, and execute (rwx) permissions for each class
of users—owner, group, and other. You can set permissions flags to grant permissions to each of these classes.
Unless the user is root, OneFS checks the class to determine whether to grant or deny access to the file. The classes are not
cumulative: The first class matched is applied. It is therefore common to grant permissions in decreasing order.

Mixed-permission environments
When a file operation requests an object’s authorization data, for example, with the ls -l command over NFS or with the
Security tab of the Properties dialog box in Windows Explorer over SMB, OneFS attempts to provide that data in the
requested format. In an environment that mixes UNIX and Windows systems, some translation may be required when performing
create file, set security, get security, or access operations.

NFS access of Windows-created files

If a file contains an owning user or group that is a SID, the system attempts to map it to a corresponding UID or GID before
returning it to the caller.
In UNIX, authorization data is retrieved by calling stat(2) on a file and examining the owner, group, and mode bits. Over
NFSv3, the GETATTR command functions similarly. The system approximates the mode bits and sets them on the file whenever
its ACL changes. Mode bit approximations need to be retrieved only to service these calls.
NOTE:

SID-to-UID and SID-to-GID mappings are cached in both the OneFS ID mapper and the stat cache. If a mapping has
recently changed, the file might report inaccurate information until the file is updated or the cache is flushed.

SMB access of UNIX-created files

No UID-to-SID or GID-to-SID mappings are performed when creating an ACL for a file; all UIDs and GIDs are converted to SIDs
or principals when the ACL is returned.
OneFS initiates a two-step process for returning a security descriptor, which contains SIDs for the owner and primary group of
an object:
1. The current security descriptor is retrieved from the file. If the file does not have a discretionary access control list (DACL),
a synthetic ACL is constructed from the file’s lower 9 mode bits, which are separated into three sets of permission triples—
one each for owner, group, and everyone. For details about mode bits, see the UNIX permissions topic.
2. Two access control entries (ACEs) are created for each triple: the allow ACE contains the corresponding rights that are
granted according to the permissions; the deny ACE contains the corresponding rights that are denied. In both cases, the
trustee of the ACE corresponds to the file owner, group, or everyone. After all of the ACEs are generated, any that are not
needed are removed before the synthetic ACL is returned.

Data access control 177

Managing access permissions
The internal representation of identities and permissions can contain information from UNIX sources, Windows sources, or
both. Because access protocols can process the information from only one of these sources, the system may need to make
approximations to present the information in a format the protocol can process.

View expected user permissions

You can view the expected permissions for user access to a file or directory.
This procedure must be performed through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. View expected user permissions by running the isi auth access command.
The following command displays permissions in /ifs/ for the user that you specify in place of <username>:

isi auth access <username> /ifs/

The system displays output similar to the following example:

User
Name : <username>
UID : 2018
SID : SID:S-1-5-21-2141457107-1514332578-1691322784-1018
File
Owner : user:root
Group : group:wheel
Mode : drwxrwxrwx
Relevant Mode : d---rwx---
Permissions
Expected : user:<username> \
allow dir_gen_read,dir_gen_write,dir_gen_execute,delete_child

3. View mode-bits permissions for a user by running the isi auth access command.
The following command displays verbose-mode file permissions information in /ifs/ for the user that you specify in place
of <username>:

isi auth access <username> /ifs/ -v

The system displays output similar to the following example:

User Name : <username> UID \

: 2018 SID : SID:S-1-5-21-2141457107-1514332578-1691322784-1018
File Owner : user:root Group : group:wheel Mode : drwxrwxrwx
Relevant Mode : d---rwx--- Permissions Expected : user:<username>
allow dir_gen_read,dir_gen_write,dir_gen_execute,delete_child

4. View expected ACL user permissions on a file for a user by running the isi auth access command.
The following command displays verbose-mode ACL file permissions for the file file_with_acl.tx in /ifs/data/ for
the user that you specify in place of <username>:

isi auth access <username> /ifs/data/file_with_acl.tx -v

The system displays output similar to the following example:

User Name : <username> \

UID : 2097 SID : SID:S-1-7-21-2141457107-1614332578-1691322789-1018
File Owner : user:<username> Group : group:wheel
Permissions Expected : user:<username>
allow file_gen_read,file_gen_write,std_write_dac
Relevant Acl: group:<group-name> Users allow file_gen_read
user:<username> allow std_write_dac,file_write,

178 Data access control

 append,file_write_ext_attr,file_write_attr
group:wheel allow file_gen_read,file_gen_write

Configure access management settings

Default access settings include whether to send NTLMv2 responses for SMB connections, the identity type to store on disk,
the Windows workgroup name for running in local mode, and character substitution for spaces encountered in user and group
names.
1. Click Access > Settings.
2. Configure the following settings as needed.

Option Description
Send NTLMv2 Specifies whether to send only NTLMv2 responses to SMB clients with NTLM-compatible credentials.
On-Disk Identity Controls the preferred identity to store on disk. If OneFS is unable to convert an identity to the
preferred format, it is stored as is. This setting does not affect identities that are currently stored on
disk. Select one of the following settings:

native Allow OneFS to determine the identity to store on disk. This is the
recommended setting.
unix Always store incoming UNIX identifiers (UIDs and GIDs) on disk.
sid Store incoming Windows security identifiers (SIDs) on disk, unless the SID
was generated from a UNIX identifier; in that case, convert it back to the
UNIX identifier and store it on disk.

Workgroup Specifies the NetBIOS workgroup. The default value is WORKGROUP.

Space For clients that have difficulty parsing spaces in user and group names, specifies a substitute character.
Replacement
3. Click Save.
If you changed the on-disk identity selection, it is recommended that you run the PermissionRepair job with the Convert repair
type to prevent potential permissions errors. For more information, see the Run the PermissionRepair job section.

Modify ACL policy settings

You can modify ACL policy settings but the default ACL policy settings are sufficient for most cluster deployments.
CAUTION: Because ACL policies change the behavior of permissions throughout the system, they should be
modified only as necessary by experienced administrators with advanced knowledge of Windows ACLs. This is
especially true for the advanced settings, which are applied regardless of the cluster's environment.
For UNIX, Windows, or balanced environments, the optimal permission policy settings are selected and cannot be modified.
However, you can choose to manually configure the cluster's default permission settings if necessary to support your particular
environment.
1. Click Access > ACL Policy Settings.
2. In the Environment area, select the option that best describes your environment, or select Custom environment to
configure individual permission policies.
3. If you selected the Custom environment option, settings in the General ACL Settings area as needed.
4. In the Advanced ACL Settings area, configure the settings as needed.

Related references
ACL policy settings

Data access control 179

ACL policy settings
You can configure an access control list (ACL) policy by choosing from the available settings options.

Environment
Depending on the environment you select, the system will automatically select the General ACL Settings and Advanced ACL
Settings options that are optimal for that environment. You also have the option to manually configure general and advanced
settings.

Balanced Enables PowerScale cluster permissions to operate in a mixed UNIX and Windows environment. This
setting is recommended for most PowerScale cluster deployments.
UNIX only Enables PowerScale cluster permissions to operate with UNIX semantics, as opposed to Windows
semantics. Enabling this option prevents ACL creation on the system.
Windows only Enables PowerScale cluster permissions to operate with Windows semantics, as opposed to UNIX
semantics. Enabling this option causes the system to return an error on UNIX chmod requests.
Custom environment Allows you to configure General ACL Settings and Advanced ACL Settings options.

General ACL Settings

ACL Creation Specifies whether to allow or deny creation of ACLs over SMB. Select one of the following options:
Through SMB
Do not allow ACLs to Prevents ACL creation on the cluster.
be created through
SMB
Allow ACLs to be Allows ACL creation on the cluster.
created through
SMB

NOTE: Inheritable ACLs on the system take precedence over this setting. If inheritable ACLs
are set on a folder, any new files and folders that are created in that folder inherit the folder's
ACL. Disabling this setting does not remove ACLs currently set on files. If you want to clear
an existing ACL, run the chmod -b <mode> <file> command to remove the ACL and set the
correct permissions.

Use the chmod Specifies how permissions are handled when a chmod operation is initiated on a file with an ACL,
Command On Files either locally or over NFS. This setting controls any elements that affect UNIX permissions, including
With Existing ACLs File System Explorer. Enabling this policy setting does not change how chmod operations affect files
that do not have ACLs. Select one of the following options:

Remove the existing For chmod operations, removes any existing ACL and instead sets the
ACL and set UNIX chmod permissions. Select this option only if you do not need permissions to
permissions instead be set from Windows.

Remove the existing Stores the UNIX permissions in a new Windows ACL. Select this option only
ACL and create if you want to remove Windows permissions but do not want files to have
an ACL equivalent synthetic ACLs.
to the UNIX
permissions
Remove the existing Stores the UNIX permissions in a new Windows ACL only for users and
ACL and create groups that are referenced by the old ACL. Select this option only if
an ACL equivalent you want to remove Windows permissions but do not want files to have
to the UNIX synthetic ACLs.
permissions, for
all users/groups
referenced in old
ACL

180 Data access control

 Merge the new Merges permissions that are applied by chmod with existing ACLs. An ACE
permissions with the for each identity (owner, group, and everyone) is either modified or created,
existing ACL but all other ACEs are unmodified. Inheritable ACEs are also left unmodified
to enable Windows users to continue to inherit appropriate permissions.
However, UNIX users can set specific permissions for each of those three
standard identities.
Deny permission to Prevents users from making NFS and local chmod operations. Enable this
modify the ACL setting if you do not want to allow permission sets over NFS.
Ignore operation if Prevents an NFS client from changing the ACL. Select this option if you
file has an existing defined an inheritable ACL on a directory and want to use that ACL for
ACL permissions.

CAUTION: If you try to run the chmod command on the same permissions that are
currently set on a file with an ACL, you may cause the operation to silently fail. The
operation appears to be successful, but if you were to examine the permissions on the
cluster, you would notice that the chmod command had no effect. As an alternative,
you can run the chmod command away from the current permissions and then perform
a second chmod command to revert to the original permissions. For example, if the file
shows 755 UNIX permissions and you want to confirm this number, you could run chmod
700 file; chmod 755 file.

ACLs Created On On Windows systems, the ACEs for directories can define detailed inheritance rules. On a UNIX
Directories By the system, the mode bits are not inherited. Making ACLs that are created on directories by the chmod
chmod Command command inheritable is more secure for tightly controlled environments but may deny access to some
Windows users who would otherwise expect access. Select one of the following options:
● Make ACLs inheritable
● Do not make ACLs inheritable
Use the chown/ Changes the user or group that has ownership of a file or folder. Select one of the following options:
chgrp On Files With
Existing ACLs Modify only the Enables the chown or chgrp operation to perform as it does in UNIX.
owner and/or group Enabling this setting modifies any ACEs in the ACL associated with the old
and new owner or group.
Modify the owner Enables the NFS chown or chgrp operation to function as it does in
and/or group and Windows. When a file owner is changed over Windows, no permissions in
ACL permissions the ACL are changed.
Ignore operation if Prevents an NFS client from changing the owner or group.
file has an existing
ACL

NOTE: Over NFS, the chown or chgrp operation changes the permissions and user or group
that has ownership. For example, a file that is owned by user Joe with rwx------ (700)
permissions indicates rwx permissions for the owner, but no permissions for anyone else. If you
run the chown command to change ownership of the file to user Bob, the owner permissions are
still rwx but they now represent the permissions for Bob, rather than for Joe, who lost all of his
permissions. This setting does not affect UNIX chown or chgrp operations that are performed
on files with UNIX permissions, and it does not affect Windows chown or chgrp operations,
which do not change any permissions.

Access checks In UNIX environments, only the file owner or superuser has the right to run a chmod or chown
(chmod, chown) operation on a file. In Windows environments, you can implement this policy setting to give users the
right to perform chmod operations that change permissions, or the right to perform chown operations
that take ownership, but do not give away ownership. Select one of the following options:

Allow only the file Enables chmod and chown access checks to operate with UNIX-like
owner to change behavior.
the mode or owner

Data access control 181

 of the file (UNIX
model)
Allow the file Enables chmod and chown access checks to operate with Windows-like
owner and users behavior.
with WRITE_DAC
and WRITE_OWNER
permissions to
change the mode or
owner of the file
(Windows model)

Advanced ACL Settings

Treatment of 'rwx' In UNIX environments, rwx permissions indicate that a user or group has read, write, and execute
permissions permissions and that a user or group has the maximum level of permissions.
When you assign UNIX permissions to a file, no ACLs are stored for that file. Because a Windows
system processes only ACLs, the PowerScale cluster must translate the UNIX permissions into an
ACL when you view a file's permissions on a Windows system. This type of ACL is called a synthetic
ACL. Synthetic ACLs are not stored anywhere; instead, they are dynamically generated and discarded
as needed. If a file has UNIX permissions, you may notice synthetic ACLs when you run the ls file
command to view a file’s ACLs.
When you generate a synthetic ACL, the PowerScale cluster maps UNIX permissions to Windows
rights. Windows supports a more granular permissions model than UNIX does, and it specifies rights
that cannot easily be mapped from UNIX permissions. If the PowerScale cluster maps rwx permissions
to Windows rights, you must enable one of the following options:

Retain 'rwx' Generates an ACE that provides only read, write, and execute permissions.
permissions
Treat 'rwx' Generates an ACE that provides the maximum Windows permissions for a
permissions as Full user or a group by adding the change permissions right, the take ownership
Control right, and the delete right.

Group Owner Operating systems tend to work with group ownership and permissions in two different PowerScale
Inheritance group owner from the file creator's primary group. If you enable a setting that causes the group owner
to be inherited from the creator's primary group, you can override it on a per-folder basis by running
the chmod command to set the set-gid bit. This inheritance applies only when the file is created. For
more information, see the manual page for the chmod command.
Select one of the following options:

When an ACL exists, Specifies that if an ACL exists on a file, the group owner is inherited from
use Linux and the file creator's primary group. If there is no ACL, the group owner is
Windows semantics, inherited from the parent folder.
otherwise use BSD
semantics
BSD semantics - Specifies that the group owner be inherited from the file's parent folder.
Inherit group owner
from the parent
folder
Linux and Windows Specifies that the group owner be inherited from the file creator's primary
semantics - Inherit group.
group owner from
the creator's
primary group

chmod (007) On Specifies whether to remove ACLs when running the chmod (007) command. Select one of the
Files With Existing following options.
ACLs

182 Data access control

 chmod(007) does Sets 007 UNIX permissions without removing an existing ACL.
not remove existing
ACL
chmod(007) Removes ACLs from files over UNIX file sharing (NFS) and locally on the
removes existing cluster through the chmod (007) command. If you enable this setting,
ACL and sets 007 be sure to run the chmod command on the file immediately after using
UNIX permissions chmod (007) to clear an ACL. In most cases, you do not want to leave
007 permissions on the file.

Approximate Owner Windows ACLs are more complex than UNIX permissions. When a UNIX client requests UNIX
Mode Bits When permissions for a file with an ACL over NFS, the client receives an approximation of the file's actual
ACL Exists permissions. Running the ls -l command from a UNIX client returns a more open set of permissions
than the user expects. This permissiveness compensates for applications that incorrectly inspect the
UNIX permissions themselves when determining whether to try a file-system operation. The purpose
of this policy setting is to ensure that these applications go with the operation to allow the file system
to correctly determine user access through the ACL. Select one of the following options:

Approximate owner Causes the owner permissions appear more permissive than the actual
mode bits using all permissions on the file.
possible group ACEs
in ACL
Approximate owner Causes the owner permissions appear more accurate, in that you see only
mode bits using only the permissions for a particular owner and not the more permissive set. This
the ACE with the may cause access-denied problems for UNIX clients, however.
owner ID

Approximate Group Select one of the following options for group permissions:
Mode Bits When
ACL Exists Approximate group Makes the group permissions appear more permissive than the actual
mode bits using all permissions on the file.
possible group ACEs
in ACL
Approximate group Makes the group permissions appear more accurate, in that you see only the
mode bits using only permissions for a particular group and not the more permissive set. This may
the ACE with the cause access-denied problems for UNIX clients, however.
group ID

Synthetic "deny" The Windows ACL user interface cannot display an ACL if any deny ACEs are out of canonical ACL
ACEs order. To correctly represent UNIX permissions, deny ACEs may be required to be out of canonical
ACL order. Select one of the following options:

Do not modify Prevents modifications to synthetic ACL generation and allows “deny” ACEs
synthetic ACLs to be generated when necessary.
and mode bit CAUTION: This option can lead to permissions being reordered,
approximations permanently denying access if a Windows user or an application
performs an ACL get, an ACL modification, and an ACL set to and
from Windows.

Remove “deny” Does not include deny ACEs when generating synthetic ACLs.
ACEs from ACLs.
This setting can
cause ACLs to
be more permissive
than the equivalent
mode bits

Access check You can control who can change utimes, which are the access and modification times of a file. Select
(utimes) one of the following options:

Allow only owners Allows only owners to change utimes, which complies with the POSIX
to change utimes to standard.

Data access control 183

 client-specific times
(POSIX compliant)
Allow owners and Allows owners as well as users with write access to modify utimes, which is
users with ‘write’ less restrictive.
access to change
utimes to client-
specific times

Read-only DOS
Deny permission Duplicates DOS-attribute permissions behavior over only the SMB protocol,
attribute
to modify files so that files use the read-only attribute over SMB.
with DOS read-
only attribute over
Windows Files
Sharing (SMB)
Deny permission Duplicates DOS-attribute permissions behavior over both NFS and SMB
to modify files protocols. For example, if permissions are read-only on a file over SMB,
with DOS read-only permissions are read-only over NFS.
attribute through
NFS and SMB

Displayed mode bits

Use ACL to Displays the approximation of the NFS mode bits that are based on ACL
approximate mode permissions.
bits
Always display 777 if Displays 777 file permissions. If the approximated NFS permissions are less
ACL exists permissive than those in the ACL, you may want to use this setting so
the NFS client does not stop at the access check before performing its
operation. Use this setting when a third-party application may be blocked if
the ACL does not provide the proper access.

Related tasks
Modify ACL policy settings

Run the PermissionRepair job

You can update file and directory permissions or ownership by running the PermissionRepair job. To prevent permissions issues
that can occur after changing the on-disk identity, run this job with the Convert repair type to ensure that the changes are fully
propagated throughout the cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. Optional: From the Job Types table, click View/Edit in the PermissionRepair row.
The View Job Type Details window appears.
3. Click Edit Job Type.
The Edit Job Type Details window appears.
4. Select Enable this job type.
5. From the Default Priority list, select a priority number that specifies the job's priority among all running jobs. Job priority is
denoted as 1-10, with 1 being the highest and 10 being the lowest.
6. Optional: From the Default Impact Policy list, select an impact policy for the job to follow.
7. From the Schedule area, specify how the job should be started.

Option Description
Manual The job must be started manually.
Scheduled The job is regularly scheduled. Select the schedule option from the drop-down list and specify the schedule
details.
8. Click Save Changes, and then click Close.
9. Optional: From the Job Types table, click Start Job.

184 Data access control

 The Start a Job window opens.
10. Select or clear the Allow Duplicate Jobs checkbox.
11. Optional: From the Impact policy list, select an impact policy for the job to follow.
12. In the Paths field, type or browse to the directory in /ifs whose permissions you want to repair.
13. Optional: Click Add another directory path and in the added Paths field, type or browse for an additional directory
in /ifs whose permissions you want to repair.
You can repeat this step to add directory paths as needed.
14. From the Repair Type list, select one of the following methods for updating permissions:

Option Description
Clone Applies the permissions settings for the directory that is specified by the Template File or Directory setting to
the directory you set in the Paths fields.
Inherit Recursively applies the ACL of the directory that is specified by the Template File or Directory setting to each
file and subdirectory in the specified Paths fields, according to standard inheritance rules.
Convert For each file and directory in the specified Paths fields, converts the owner, group, and access control list (ACL)
to the target on-disk identity based on the Mapping Type setting.

The remaining settings options differ depending on the selected repair type.
15. In the Template File or Directory field, type or browse to the directory in /ifs that you want to copy permissions from.
This setting applies only to the Clone and Inherit repair types.
16. Optional: From the Mapping Type list, select the preferred on-disk identity type to apply. This setting applies only to the
Convert repair type.

Option Description
Global Applies the system's default identity.
SID (Windows) Applies the Windows identity.
UNIX Applies the UNIX identity.
Native If a user or group does not have an authoritative UNIX identifier (UID or GID), applies the Windows
identity (SID)
17. Optional: Click Start Job.

Data access control 185

 12
File sharing
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• File sharing overview
• SMB security
• NFS security
• FTP
• HTTP and HTTPS security

File sharing overview

Multiprotocol support in OneFS enables accessing files and directories on the PowerScale cluster through SMB for Windows file
sharing, NFS for UNIX file sharing, secure shell (SSH), FTP, and HTTP.
By default, all file sharing protocols are disabled. You enable each protocol that you intend to use and configure the default
share for each protocol. For example, you can configure the /ifs directory as an SMB share and an NFS export.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not save data to the root /ifs file path but in directories below /ifs. The
design of your data storage structure should be planned carefully. A well-designed directory structure optimizes cluster
performance and administration.
You can set Windows- and UNIX-based permissions on OneFS files and directories. With the required permissions and
administrative privileges, you can create, modify, and read data on the cluster through one or more of the supported file
sharing protocols.
● SMB. Allows Microsoft Windows and MacOS X clients to access files that are stored on the cluster.
● NFS. Allows Linux and UNIX clients that adhere to the RFC1813 (NFSv3) and RFC3530 (NFSv4) specifications to access
files that are stored on the cluster.
● HTTP and HTTPS (with optional DAV). Allows clients to access files that are stored on the cluster through a web browser.
● FTP. Allows any client that is equipped with an FTP client program to access files that are stored on the cluster through the
FTP protocol.

Mixed protocol environments

You enable the protocols that you intend to use for file sharing. You can configure your OneFS cluster to use SMB or NFS
exclusively, or both. You can also enable HTTP, FTP, and SSH. You configure default shares and exports for each protocol that
you enable.
Use the isi services protocol enable command to enable each protocol. For example, to enable NFS, use the following
command.

isi services nfs enable

Access rights are consistently enforced across access protocols on all security models. For example, a user is granted or denied
the same rights to a file whether using SMB, NFS, or HDFS. Clusters running OneFS support global policy settings that enable
you to customize the default access control list (ACL) and UNIX permissions settings. OneFS [Link] and later supports HDFS
ACLs.
OneFS is configured with standard UNIX permissions on the file tree. Through Windows Explorer or OneFS administrative tools,
you can give any file or directory an ACL. In addition to Windows domain users and groups, ACLs in OneFS can include local,
NIS, and LDAP users and groups. After a file is given an ACL, the mode bits are no longer enforced and exist only as an estimate
of the effective permissions.

186 File sharing

 NOTE: It is recommended that you configure ACL and UNIX permissions only if you fully understand how they interact with
one another.

Write caching with SmartCache

Write caching accelerates the process of writing data to the cluster. OneFS includes a write-caching feature that is called
SmartCache, which is enabled by default for all files and directories.
If write caching is enabled, OneFS writes data to a write-back cache instead of immediately writing the data to disk. OneFS can
write the data to disk at a time that is more convenient.

NOTE: It is recommended that you keep write caching enabled. You should also enable write caching for all file pool policies.

OneFS interprets writes to the cluster as either synchronous or asynchronous, depending on the client specifications. The
impacts and risks of write caching depend on what protocols clients use to write to the cluster, and whether the writes are
interpreted as synchronous or asynchronous. If you disable write caching, client specifications are ignored and all writes are
performed synchronously.
The following table explains how the client specifications are interpreted, according to the protocol.

Table 62. Protocol Interpretations

Protocol Synchronous Asynchronous
NFS The stable field is set to data_sync or The stable field is set to unstable.
file_sync.

SMB The write-through flag has been The write-through flag has not been
applied. applied.

Write caching for asynchronous writes

Writing to the cluster asynchronously with write caching is the fastest method of writing data to your cluster.
Write caching for asynchronous writes requires fewer cluster resources than write caching for synchronous writes, and
improves overall cluster performance for most workflows. However, there is some risk of data loss with asynchronous writes.
The following table describes the risk of data loss for each protocol when write caching for asynchronous writes is enabled:

Table 63. Protocol Risks

Protocol Risk
NFS If a node fails, no data is lost except in the unlikely event that
a client of that node is unresponsive before it can reconnect
to the cluster. In that situation, asynchronous writes that have
not been committed to disk is lost.
SMB If a node fails, asynchronous writes that have not been
committed to disk is lost.

It is recommended that you do not disable write caching, regardless of the protocol that you are writing with. If you are writing
to the cluster with asynchronous writes, and you decide that the risks of data loss are too great, it is recommended that you
configure your clients to use synchronous writes, rather than disable write caching.

Write caching for synchronous writes

Write caching for synchronous writes costs cluster resources, including a negligible amount of storage space. Although it is
not as fast as write caching with asynchronous writes, unless cluster resources are extremely limited, write caching with
synchronous writes is faster than writing to the cluster without write caching.
Write caching does not affect the integrity of synchronous writes; if a cluster or a node fails, none of the data in the write-back
cache for synchronous writes is lost.

File sharing 187

SMB security
OneFS includes a configurable SMB service to create and manage SMB shares. SMB shares provide Windows clients with
network access to file system resources on the cluster. You can grant permissions to users and groups to perform operations
such as reading, writing, and setting access permissions on SMB shares.
SMB is disabled by default. To enable SMB, use the following command:

isi services smb enable

You can then configure the default SMB share. See the section Managing SMB shares for more information.
OneFS supports both user and anonymous security modes. If the user security mode is enabled, users who connect to a share
from an SMB client must provide a valid username with proper credentials.
SMB shares act as checkpoints, and users must have access to a share in order to access objects in a file system on a share.
If a user has access that is granted to a file system, but not to the share on which it resides, that user cannot access the file
system regardless of privileges. For example, assume a share that is named ABCDocs contains a file that is named [Link]
in a path such as: /ifs/data/ABCDocs/[Link]. If a user attempting to access [Link] does not have share
privileges on ABCDocs, that user cannot access the file even if originally granted write privileges to the file.
The SMB protocol uses security identifiers (SIDs) for authorization data. All identities are converted to SIDs during retrieval and
are converted back to their on-disk representation before they are stored on the cluster.
When a file or directory is created, OneFS checks the access control list (ACL) of its parent directory. If the ACL contains any
inheritable access control entries (ACEs), a new ACL is generated from those ACEs. Otherwise, OneFS creates an ACL from the
combined file and directory create mask and create mode settings.
OneFS supports the following SMB clients:

Table 64. Supported SMB Versions

SMB version Supported operating systems
3.0 - Multichannel only Windows 8 or later
Windows Server 2012 or later

2.1 Windows 7 or later

Windows Server 2008 R2 or later

2.0 Windows Vista or later

Windows Server 2008 or later
Mac OS X 10.9 or later

1.0 Windows 2000 or later

Windows XP or later
Mac OS X 10.5 or later

Related concepts
Managing SMB settings
Managing SMB shares

SMB shares in access zones

You can create and manage SMB shares within access zones.
You can create access zones that partition storage on the cluster into multiple virtual containers. Access zones support all
configuration settings for authentication and identity management services on the cluster. That means that you can configure
authentication providers and provision SMB shares on a zone-by-zone basis. When you create an access zone, a local provider
is created automatically. That allows you to configure each access zone with a list of local users and groups. You can also
authenticate through a different Active Directory provider in each access zone. You can also control data access by directing

188 File sharing

incoming connections to the access zone from a specific IP address in a pool. Associating an access zone with an IP address
pool restricts authentication to the associated access zone and reduces the number of available and accessible SMB shares.
Here are a few ways to simplify SMB management with access zones:
● Migrate multiple SMB servers, such as Windows file servers or NetApp filers, to a single PowerScale cluster, and then
configure a separate access zone for each SMB server.
● Configure each access zone with a unique set of SMB share names that do not conflict with share names in other access
zones, and then join each access zone to a different Active Directory domain.
● Reduce the number of available and accessible shares to manage by associating an IP address pool with an access zone to
restrict authentication to the zone.
● Configure default SMB share settings that apply to all shares in an access zone.
The cluster includes an integrated access zone named System. The System access zone is where you manage all aspects of
the cluster and other access zones. If you do not specify an access zone when managing SMB shares, OneFS defaults to the
System zone.

SMB Multichannel
SMB Multichannel supports establishing a single SMB session over multiple network connections.
SMB Multichannel is a feature of the SMB 3.0 protocol that provides the following capabilities:

Increased OneFS can transmit more data to a client through multiple connections over high speed network
throughput adapters or over multiple network adapters.
Connection failure When an SMB Multichannel session is established over multiple network connections, the session is
tolerance not lost if one of the connections has a network fault, which enables the client to continue to work.
Automatic discovery SMB Multichannel automatically discovers supported hardware configurations on the client that have
multiple available network paths and then negotiates and establishes a session over multiple network
connections. You are not required to install components, roles, role services, or features.

SMB Multichannel requirements

You must meet software and NIC configuration requirements to support SMB Multichannel on a cluster.
OneFS can only support SMB Multichannel when the following software requirements are met:
● Windows Server 2012, 2012 R2 or Windows 8, 8.1 clients
● SMB Multichannel must be enabled on both the cluster and the Windows client computer. It is enabled on the cluster by
default.
SMB Multichannel establishes a single SMB session over multiple network connections only on supported network interface card
(NIC) configurations. SMB Multichannel requires at least one of the following NIC configurations on the client computer:
● Two or more network interface cards.
● One or more network interface cards that support Receive Side Scaling (RSS).
● One or more network interface cards configured with link aggregation. Link aggregation enables you to combine the
bandwidth of multiple NICs on a node into a single logical interface.

Client-side NIC configurations supported by SMB Multichannel

SMB Multichannel automatically discovers supported hardware configurations on the client that have multiple available network
paths.
Each node on the cluster has at least one RSS-capable network interface card (NIC). Your client-side NIC configuration
determines how SMB Multichannel establishes simultaneous network connections per SMB session.

Table 65. NIC Configurations

Client-side NIC Description
Configuration
Single RSS-capable NIC SMB Multichannel establishes a maximum of four network connections to the PowerScale cluster
over the NIC. The connections are more likely to be spread across multiple CPU cores, which

File sharing 189

Table 65. NIC Configurations (continued)
Client-side NIC Description
Configuration
reduces the likelihood of performance bottleneck issues and achieves the maximum speed
capability of the NIC.
Multiple NICs If the NICs are RSS-capable, SMB Multichannel establishes a maximum of four network
connections to the PowerScale cluster over each NIC. If the NICs on the client are not RSS-
capable, SMB Multichannel establishes a single network connection to the PowerScale cluster
over each NIC. Both configurations allow SMB Multichannel to leverage the combined bandwidth
of multiple NICs and provides connection fault tolerance if a connection or a NIC fails.
NOTE: SMB Multichannel cannot establish more than eight simultaneous network
connections per session. In a multiple NIC configuration, this might limit the number
connections that are allowed per NIC. For example, if the configuration contains three RSS-
capable NICs, SMB Multichannel might establish three connections over the first NIC, three
connections over the second NIC and two connections over the third NIC.

Aggregated NICs SMB Multichannel establishes multiple network connections to the PowerScale cluster
over aggregated NICs, which results in balanced connections across CPU cores, effective
consumption of combined bandwidth, and connection fault tolerance.
NOTE: The aggregated NIC configuration inherently provides NIC fault tolerance that is not
dependent upon SMB.

SMB share management through MMC

OneFS supports the Shared Folders snap-in for the Microsoft Management Console (MMC), which allows SMB shares on the
cluster to be managed using the MMC tool.
Typically, you connect to the global System zone through the web administration interface or the command line interface to
manage and configure shares. If you configure access zones, you can connect to a zone through the MMC Shared Folders
snap-in to directly manage all shares in that zone.
You can establish a connection through the MMC Shared Folders snap-in to a PowerScale node and perform the following SMB
share management tasks:
● Create and delete shared folders
● Configure access permission to an SMB share
● View a list of active SMB sessions
● Close open SMB sessions
● View a list of open files
● Close open files
When you connect to a zone through the MMC Shared Folders snap-in, you can view and manage all SMB shares assigned to
that zone; however, you can only view active SMB sessions and open files on the specific node that you are connected to in
that zone. Changes you make to shares through the MMC Shared Folders snap-in are propagated across the cluster.

MMC connection requirements

You can connect to a cluster through the MMC Shared Folders snap-in if you meet access requirements.
The following conditions are required to establish a connection through the MMC Shared Folders snap-in:
● You must run the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) from a Windows workstation that is joined to the domain of an
Active Directory (AD) provider configured on the cluster.
● You must be a member of the local <cluster>\Administrators group.

NOTE: Role-based access control (RBAC) privileges do not apply to the MMC. A role with SMB privileges is not
sufficient to gain access.

● You must log in to a Windows workstation as an Active Directory user that is a member of the local <cluster>\Administrators
group.

190 File sharing

SMBv3 encryption
Certain Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac client/server combinations can support data encryption in SMBv3 environments.
You can configure SMBv3 encryption on a per-share, per-zone, or cluster-wide basis. You can allow encrypted and unencrypted
clients access. Globally and for access zones, you can also require that all client connections are encrypted.
If you set encryption settings on a per-zone basis, those settings will override global server settings.

NOTE: Per-zone and per-share encryption settings can only be configured through the OneFS command line interface.

Enable SMBv3 encryption

You can modify SMBv3 encryption settings on your cluster. By default, SMBv3 encryption is disabled.
To enable SMBv3 encryption, and permit both encrypted and unencrypted clients access to the server:
1. Go to Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > Server Settings.
2. In the Encryption section, under Enable encryption on encryption-capable SMB clients, select Use Custom.
3. Check Enable encryption on encryption-capable SMB clients.
Both encrypted and unencrypted clients are allowed access.

Reject unencrypted SMBv3 client access

You can globally deny access from unencrypted SMBv3 clients.
To reject unencrypted SMBv3 client access:
1. Go to Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > Server Settings.
2. In the Encryption section, under Reject unencrypted acces, click Use Custom.
3. Check Reject unencrypted access.

SMB server-side copy

In order to increase system performance, SMB 2 and later clients can utilize the server-side copy feature in OneFS.
Windows clients making use of server-side copy support may experience performance improvements for file copy operations,
because file data no longer needs to traverse the network. The server-side copy feature reads and writes files only on the
server, avoiding the network round-trip and duplication of file data. This feature only affects file copy or partial copy operations
in which the source and destination file handles are open on the same share, and does not work for cross-share operations.
This feature is enabled by default across OneFS clusters, and can only be disabled system-wide across all zones. Additionally,
server-side copy in OneFS is incompatible with the SMB continuous availability feature. If continuous availability is enabled for a
share and the client opens a persistent file handle, server-side copy is automatically disabled for that file.

NOTE: You can only disable or enable SMB server-side copy for OneFS using the command line interface (CLI).

Enable or disable SMB server-side copy

You can enable or disable the SMB server-side copy feature.
The SMB server-side copy feature is enabled in OneFS by default.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to the cluster.
2. Run the isi smb settings global modify command.
3. Modify the --server-side-copy option as necessary.
This feature is enabled by default.
For example, the following command disables SMB server-side copy:

isi smb settings global modify --server-side-copy=no

File sharing 191

SMB continuous availability
If you are running OneFS in an SMB 3.0 environment, you allow certain Windows clients to open files on a server with
continuous availability enabled.
If a server is using Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012, clients can create persistent file handles that can be reclaimed after an
outage such as a network-related disconnection or a server failure. You can specify how long the persistent handle is retained
after a disconnection or server failure, and also force strict lockouts on users attempting to open a file belonging to another
handle. Furthermore, through the OneFS command-line interface (CLI), you can configure write integrity settings to control the
stability of writes to the share.
If continuous availability is enabled for a share and the client opens a persistent file handle, server-side copy is automatically
disabled for that file.
NOTE: You can only enable continuous availability when creating a share, but you can update timeout, lockout, and write
integrity settings when creating or modifying a share.

Enable SMB continuous availability

You can enable SMB 3.0 continuous availability and configure settings when you create a share.
You can also update continuous availability timeout, lockout, and write integrity settings when you modify a share.
1. Go to Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. Click Create an SMB share.
The Create an SMB Share window opens.
3. Select Enable continuous availability on the share.
4. Optional: Click Show Advanced Settings.
5. Optional: In the Continuous Availability Timeout field, specify the amount of time you want a persistent handle to be
retained after a client is disconnected or a server fails. The default is 2 minutes.
6. Optional: Set Strict Continuous Availability Lockout to Yes to prevent a client from opening a file if another client has an
open but disconnected persistent handle for that file. If set to no, OneFS issues persistent handles, but discards them if any
client other than the original opener tries to access the file. The default is Yes.
7. Click Create Share.
8. To configure write integrity settings:
a. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection for the OneFS command line interface (CLI).
b. Set the --ca-write-integrity parameter to one of the following:

none Continuously available writes are not handled differently than other writes to the cluster. If you
specify none and a node fails, you may experience data loss without notification. This setting is
not recommended.
write-read- Writes to the share are moved to persistent storage before a success message is returned to
coherent the SMB client that sent the data. This is the default setting.
full Writes to the share are moved to persistent storage before a success message is returned
to the SMB client that sent the data, and prevents OneFS from granting SMB clients write-
caching and handle-caching leases.

SMB file filtering

You can use SMB file filtering to allow or deny file writes to a share or access zone.
This feature enables you to deny certain types of files that might cause throughput issues, security problems, storage clutter, or
productivity disruptions. You can restrict writes by allowing writes of certain file types to a share.
● If you choose to deny file writes, you can specify file types by extension that are not allowed to be written. OneFS permits all
other file types to be written to the share.
● If you choose to allow file writes, you can specify file types by extension that are allowed to be written. OneFS denies all
other file types to be written to the share.
You can add or remove file extensions if your restriction policies change.

192 File sharing

Enable SMB file filtering
You can enable or disable SMB file filtering for a share.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > Default Share Settings.
2. Select Enable file filters.
The file extensions settings are displayed.
3. From the File Extensions list, select one of the following:
● Deny writes for list of file extensions. The file types that you specify cannot be written to the share.
● Allow writes for list of file extensions. The file types that you specify are the only file types that are allowed to be
written to the share.
4. Click Add file extensions.
5. Type a file type, such as .wav or .mpg, in the File Extensions field.
6. Optional: To specify more file types, click Add another file extension.
7. Click Add Extensions to save the changes.
8. To remove a file type from the list of extensions, select the check box that corresponds to the extension, then click Delete.

Symbolic links and SMB clients

OneFS enables SMB2 clients to access symbolic links in a seamless manner. Many administrators deploy symbolic links to
virtually reorder file system hierarchies, especially when crucial files or directories are scattered around an environment.
In an SMB share, a symbolic link (also known as a symlink or a soft link) is a type of file that contains a path to a target
file or directory. Symbolic links are transparent to applications running on SMB clients, and they function as typical files and
directories. Support for relative and absolute links is enabled by the SMB client. The specific configuration depends on the client
type and version.
A symbolic link that points to a network file or directory that is not in the path of the active SMB session is referred to as an
absolute (or remote) link. Absolute links always point to the same location on a file system, regardless of the present working
directory, and usually contain the root directory as part of the path. Conversely, a relative link is a symbolic link that points
directly to a user's or application's working directory, so you do not have to specify the full absolute path when creating the link.
OneFS exposes symbolic links through the SMB2 protocol, enabling SMB2 clients to resolve the links instead of relying
on OneFS to resolve the links on behalf of the clients. To transverse a relative or absolute link, the SMB client must be
authenticated to the SMB shares that the link can be followed through. However, if the SMB client does not have permission to
access the share, access to the target is denied and Windows will not prompt the user for credentials.
SMB2 and NFS links are interoperable for relative links only. For maximum compatibility, create these links from a POSIX client.
NOTE: SMB1 clients (such as Windows XP or 2002) may still use relative links, but they are traversed on the server side
and referred to as "shortcut files." Absolute links do not work in these environments.

Enabling symbolic links

Before you can fully use symbolic links in an SMB environment, you must enable them.
For Windows SMB clients to traverse each type of symbolic link, you must enable them on the client. Windows supports the
following link types:
● local to local
● remote to remote
● local to remote
● remote to local
You must run the following Windows command to enable all four link types:

fsutil behavior set SymlinkEvaluation L2L:1 R2R:1 L2R:1 R2L:1

File sharing 193

For POSIX clients using Samba, you must set the following options in the [global] section of your Samba configuration file
([Link]) to enable Samba clients to traverse relative and absolute links:

follow symlinks=yes
wide links=yes

In this case, "wide links" in the [Link] file refers to absolute links. The default setting in this file is no.

Managing symbolic links

After enabling symbolic links, you can create or delete them from the Windows command prompt or a POSIX command line.
Create symbolic links using the Windows mklink command on an SMB2 client or the ln command from a POSIX command-line
interface. For example, an administrator may want to give a user named User1 access to a file named [Link] in the /ifs/
data/ directory without giving specific access to that directory by creating a link named Link1:

mklink \ifs\home\users\User1\Link1 \ifs\data\Share1\[Link]

When you create a symbolic link, it is designated as a file link or directory link. Once the link is set, the designation cannot be
changed. You can format symbolic link paths as either relative or absolute.
To delete symbolic links, use the del command in Windows, or the rm command in a POSIX environment.
Keep in mind that when you delete a symbolic link, the target file or directory still exists. However, when you delete a target file
or directory, a symbolic link continues to exist and still points to the old target, thus becoming a broken link.

Anonymous access to SMB shares

You can configure anonymous access to SMB shares by enabling the local Guest user and allowing impersonation of the guest
user.
For example, if you store files such as browser executables or other data that is public on the internet, anonymous access allows
any user to access the SMB share without authenticating.

Managing SMB settings

You can enable or disable the SMB service, configure global settings for the SMB service, and configure default SMB share
settings that are specific to each access zone.

Related concepts
SMB security

Configure SMB server settings

You can enable or disable the SMB server and configure global settings for SMB shares and snapshot directories.
CAUTION: Modifying the advanced settings can result in operational problems. Be aware of the potential
consequences before committing changes to these settings.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Server Settings.
2. In the Service area, select Enable SMB Service.
3. In the Advanced Settings area, choose the system default or a custom configuration for the following settings:
● Visible at root
● Accessible at root
● Visible in subdirectories
● Accessible in subdirectories
● Encryption settings
4. Click Save Changes.

194 File sharing

Related concepts
SMB security

Related references
File and directory permission settings
Snapshots directory settings
SMB performance settings
SMB security settings

Configure default SMB share settings

You can configure SMB share default settings by access zone.
The default settings are applied to all existing shares in the access zone, and all new shares that are added to the access zone.
1. Click Protocols > Windows sharing (SMB) > Default share settings.
2. From the Current access zones drop-down list, select the access zone that the default settings apply to.
CAUTION: If you modify the default settings, the changes are applied to all existing shares in the access zone
selected. To modify settings for a specific SMB share, edit the share in the SMB shares tab.

3. In the File filter area, select Enable file filters to enable file filtering.
4. In the File extensions drop-down, select to Deny or Allow writes for a list of file extensions.
a. Click Add file extensions to add extensions to the list.
b. Enter the file extension in the empty field. Continue adding file extensions as needed.
c. Click Add extensions.
5. In the Advanced settings area, choose the system default or a custom configuration for the following settings:
● Continuous availability timeout
● Strict continuous availability lockout
● Create permission
● Directory create mask
● Directory create mode
● File create mask
● File create mode
● Change notify
● Oplocks
● Impersonate guest
● Impersonate user
● NTFS ACL
● Access based enumeration
● Host ACL
CAUTION: Implementing Access Based Enumeration (ABE) on file and directory shares introduces extra CPU
load to handle relevant SMB requests. It is crucial to note that applying ABE without careful consideration
can lead to performance degradation of varying severity. Therefore, it is recommended to enable ABE only
when explicitly necessary. Prioritize thoughtful evaluation of the share's tree structure, the assignment of
Access Control Entries (ACEs) on nested files and directories, and consideration of the associated workflow
before implementation.

NOTE: When you enable ABE, expect a refresh time of around 30 seconds for the configuration to synchronize across
all nodes in the cluster. It is important to note that during this process, SMB file sharing services continue to run without
interruption. Once the configuration change is complete, users may notice that, upon refreshing Windows Explorer,
shares, files, or folders for which they lack read access will no longer be visible.

6. Click Save changes.

File sharing 195

Enable or disable SMB Multichannel
SMB Multichannel is required for multiple, concurrent SMB sessions from a Windows client computer to a node in a cluster.
SMB Multichannel is enabled in the cluster by default.
You can enable or disable SMB Multichannel only through the command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi smb settings global modify command.
The following command enables SMB Multichannel on the cluster:

isi smb settings global modify –-support-multichannel=yes

The following command disables SMB Multichannel on the cluster:

isi smb settings global modify –-support-multichannel=no

Snapshots directory settings

You can view and configure the settings that control the snapshots directories in SMB.
CAUTION: These settings affect the behavior of the SMB service. Changes to these settings can affect all
current and future SMB shares.

Table 66. Setting Values

Setting Setting value

Visible at Root Specifies whether to make the .snapshot directory visible at

the root of the share. The default value is Yes.

Accessible at Root Specifies whether to make the .snapshot directory accessible

at the root of the share. The default value is Yes.

Visible in Subdirectories Specifies whether to make the .snapshot directory visible in

subdirectories of the share root. The default value is No.

Accessible in Subdirectories Specifies whether to make the .snapshot directory accessible

in subdirectories of the share root. The default value is Yes.

Related concepts
SMB security

File and directory permission settings

You can view and configure the default source permissions and UNIX create mask/mode bits that are applied when a file or
directory is created in an SMB share.
NOTE: Changes that are made directly to an SMB share override the default settings that are configured from the Default
SMB Share Settings tab.
If the mask and mode bits match the default values, a green check mark next to a setting appears, indicating that the specified
read (R), write (W), or execute (X) permission is enabled at the user, group, or "other" level. The "other" level includes all users
who are not listed as the owner of the share, and are not part of the group level that the file belongs to.

196 File sharing

Table 67. Setting Values
Setting Setting value
Continuous Availability Timeout Specifies the amount of time that you want a persistent
handle to be retained after a client is disconnected or a server
fails. The default is 2 minutes.
Strict Continuous Availability Lockout Prevents a client from opening a file if another client has an
open but disconnected persistent handle for that file. If set to
no, OneFS issues persistent handles, but discards them if any
client other than the original opener tries to open the file. The
default is no.

Create Permission Sets the default source permissions to apply when a file or
directory is created. The default value is Default ACL.

Directory Create Mask Specifies UNIX mode bits that are removed when a directory
is created, restricting permissions. Mask bits are applied
before mode bits are applied.
Directory Create Mode Specifies UNIX mode bits that are added when a directory
is created, enabling permissions. Mode bits are applied after
mask bits are applied.
File Create Mask Specifies UNIX mode bits that are removed when a file is
created, restricting permissions. Mask bits are applied before
mode bits are applied.
File Create Mode Specifies UNIX mode bits that are added when a file is
created, enabling permissions. Mode bits are applied after
mask bits are applied.

Related concepts
SMB security

SMB performance settings

You can view and configure the change notify and oplocks performance settings of an SMB share.
NOTE: Changes that are made directly to an SMB share override the default settings configured from the Default SMB
Share Settings tab.

Table 68. Setting Values

Setting Setting value
Change Notify Configures notification of clients when files or directories
change. This helps prevent clients from seeing stale
content, but requires server resources. The default value is
Norecurse.

Oplocks Indicates whether an opportunistic lock (oplock) request is

allowed. An oplock allows clients to provide performance
improvements by using locally cached information. The default
value is Yes.

Related concepts
SMB security

File sharing 197

SMB security settings
NOTE: Changes that are made directly to an SMB share override the default settings that are configured from the Default
Share Settings tab.
To view and configure the security settings for an individual SMB share, click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB
Shares, select the share, click View/Edit, and then click Edit SMB Share.
To view and configure the default SMB share security settings, click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > Default Share
Settings. The security settings are available in the Advanced Settings section.

Table 69. Setting Values

Setting Setting value
Create Permission Sets the default source permissions to apply when a file or
directory is created. The default value is Default acl.

Directory Create Mask Specifies UNIX mode bits that are removed when a directory
is created, restricting permissions. Mask bits are applied
before mode bits are applied. The default value is that the
user has Read, Write, and Execute permissions.

Directory Create Mode Specifies UNIX mode bits that are added when a directory
is created, enabling permissions. Mode bits are applied after
mask bits are applied. The default value is None.

File Create Mask Specifies UNIX mode bits that are removed when a file is
created, restricting permissions. Mask bits are applied before
mode bits are applied. The default value is that the user has
Read, Write, and Execute permissions.

File Create Mode Specifies UNIX mode bits that are added when a file is
created, enabling permissions. Mode bits are applied after
mask bits are applied. The default value is that the user has
Execute permissions.

Impersonate Guest Determines guest access to a share. The default value is

Never.

Impersonate User Allows all file access to be performed as a specific user. This
must be a fully qualified user name. The default value is No
value.

NTFS ACL Allows ACLs to be stored and edited from SMB clients. The
default value is Yes.

Access Based Enumeration Allows access-based enumeration only on the files and folders
that the requesting user can access. The default value is No.

HOST ACL The ACL that defines host access. The default value is No
value.

Related concepts
SMB security

Managing SMB shares

You can configure the rules and other settings that govern the interaction between your Windows network and individual SMB
shares on the cluster.
OneFS supports %U, %D, %Z, %L, %0, %1, %2, and %3 variable expansion and automatic provisioning of user home directories.
You can configure the users and groups that are associated with an SMB share, and view or modify their share-level
permissions.

198 File sharing

 NOTE: We recommend that you configure advanced SMB share settings only if you have a solid understanding of the SMB
protocol.

Related concepts
SMB security

Create an SMB share

When you create an SMB share, you can override the default permissions, performance, and access settings. You can configure
SMB home directory provisioning by including expansion variables in the share path to automatically create and redirect users to
their own home directories.
Specify a directory path to use as the SMB share, and create the directory before you create an SMB share. Shares are specific
to access zones, and the share path must exist under the zone path. Create access zones before you create SMB shares.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone where you want to create the share.
3. Click Create an SMB Share.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the share.
Share names can contain up to 80 characters, except for the following: " \ / [ ] : | < > + = ; , * ?
Also, if the cluster character encoding is not set to UTF-8, SMB share names are case-sensitive.

5. Optional: In the Description field, type a comment about the share.

A description is optional, but can be helpful if you are managing multiple shares. This field is limited to 255 characters.
6. In the Path field, type the full directory path of the share, beginning with /ifs, or click Browse to locate the directory
path.
NOTE: If you want to use any of the variables in the following table when you specify a directory path, select the Allow
Variable Expansion checkbox or the system interprets the string literally.

Table 70. Variable Expansions

Variable Expansion

%D NetBIOS domain name.

%U Username—for example, user_001.

%Z Zone name—for example, System.

%L Hostname of the cluster, normalized to lowercase.

%0 First character of the username.

%1 Second character of the username.

%2 Third character of the username.

For example, if a user is in a domain that is named DOMAIN and has a username of user_1, the path /ifs/home/%D/%U
expands to /ifs/home/DOMAIN/user_1.
7. Select Create SMB share directory if it does not exist to have OneFS create the share directory for the
path you specified if it did not previously exist.
8. Apply the initial ACL settings for the directory. You can modify these settings later.
● To apply a default ACL to the shared directory, select Apply Windows default ACLs.

NOTE: If the Create SMB share directory if it does not exist setting is selected, OneFS creates an ACL with the
equivalent of UNIX 700 mode bit permissions for any directory that is created automatically.

● To maintain the existing permissions on the shared directory, select Do not change existing permissions.

File sharing 199

9. Optional: Configure home directory provisioning settings.
● To expand path variables such as %U in the share directory path, select Allow Variable Expansion.
● To automatically create home directories when users access the share for the first time, select Auto-Create
Directories. This option is available only if the Allow Variable Expansion option is enabled.
10. Select the Enable continuous availability on the share to allow clients to create persistent handles that can be reclaimed
after an outage such as a network-related disconnection or a server failure. Servers must be using Windows 8 or Windows
2012 R2 (or higher).
11. Click Add User or Group to edit the user and group settings.
The default permissions configuration is read-only access for the well-known Everyone account. Modify settings to allow
users to write to the share.
12. Select Enable file filters in the File Filter Extensions section to enable support for file filtering. Add the file types to be
applied to the file filtering method.
13. Select Enable or Disable in the Encryption section to allow or disallow SMBv3 encrypted clients to connect to the share.
14. Optional: Click Show Advanced Settings to apply advanced SMB share settings if needed.
15. Click Create Share.

Related concepts
SMB security

Modify SMB share permissions, performance, or security

You can modify the permissions, performance, and access settings for individual SMB shares.
You can configure SMB home directory provisioning by using directory path, or expansion, variables to automatically create and
redirect users to their own home directories.
NOTE: Any changes that are made to these settings only affect the settings for this share. If you must change the default
SMB share values, that can be done from the Default SMB Share Settings tab.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone that contains the share you want to modify.
3. From the list of SMB shares, locate the share that you want to modify and then click View/Edit.
The settings for the share display.
4. Click Edit SMB Share.
5. Modify the desired settings.
6. Optional: To modify the settings for file and directory permissions, performance, or security, click Show Advanced
Settings.
7. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
SMB security

Delete an SMB share

You can delete SMB shares that are no longer needed.
Unused SMB shares do not hinder cluster performance. If you delete an SMB share, the share path is deleted but the directory
it referenced still exists. If you create a new share with the same path as the share that was deleted, the directory that the
previous share referenced will be accessible again through the new share.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone that contains the share that you want to delete.
3. From the list of SMB shares, select the share that you want to delete.
NOTE: You can delete multiple shares on the cluster by selecting the check boxes next to the share name, and then
clicking Delete.

4. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete to confirm the deletion.

200 File sharing

Related concepts
SMB security

Limit access to /ifs share for the Everyone account

By default, the /ifs root directory is configured as an SMB share in the System access zone. It is recommended that you
restrict the Everyone account of this share to read-only access.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select System.
3. Select the check box corresponding to the /ifs share and click View/Edit.
The View SMB Share Details dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit SMB Share.
The Edit SMB Share Details dialog box appears.
5. In the Users and Groups area, select the checkbox corresponding to the Everyone account, and click View/Edit.
The Edit Persona dialog box appears.
6. Select Specify Permission Level, and then select the Read check box. Clear the Full Control and
Read-Write check boxes if these options are selected.
7. Click Apply.

Configure anonymous access to a single SMB share

You can configure anonymous access to data stored on a single share through Guest user impersonation.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Users.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select the access zone that contains the share you want to allow anonymous access.
3. From the Providers drop-down list, select Local.
a. Click View/Edit for the Guest account.
The View User Details dialog box appears.
b. Click Edit User.
c. Select Enable the account, and then click Save Changes.
4. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
5. Click View/Edit next to the share you to allow anonymous access.
6. Click Edit SMB Share.
7. Click Show Advanced Settings.
8. Locate the Impersonate Guest setting, and then click Use Custom.
The Impersonate Guest drop-down list appears.
9. Select Always in the Impersonate Guest list.
10. Click Save Changes.

Configure anonymous access to all SMB shares in an access zone

You can configure anonymous access to data stored in an access zone through Guest user impersonation.
1. Click Access > Membership & Roles > Users.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select the access zone that you want to allow anonymous access.
3. From the Providers drop-down list, select Local.
a. Click View/Edit for the Guest account.
The View User Details dialog box appears.
b. Click Edit User.
c. Select Enable the account, and then click Save Changes.
4. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > Default Share Settings.
5. From the Current Access Zone list, select the access zone that you want to allow anonymous access for.
6. Locate the Impersonate Guest setting, and then click Use Custom.
The Impersonate Guest drop-down list appears.

File sharing 201

7. Select Always in the Impersonate Guest list.
8. Click Save Changes.

Add a user or group to an SMB share

For each SMB share, you can add share-level permissions for specific users and groups.
1. Click Protocols > Windows Sharing (SMB) > SMB Shares.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone that contains the share you want to add a user or
group to.
3. From the list of SMB shares, locate the share that you want to modify and then click View/Edit.
4. Click Edit SMB Share.
5. At the Users and Groups section, click Add a User or Group.
The Add Persona dialog box appears.
6. Click Select User.
The Select Persona dialog box appears.
7. You can locate the user or group through one of the following methods:
● Type the Username or Group Name you want to search for in the text field, and then click Search.
● Select the authentication provider that you want to search in the text field, and then click Search. Only providers that
are currently configured and enabled on the cluster are listed.
● Type the Username or Group Name and select an authentication provider and click Search.
8. If you selected Well-known SIDs, click Search.
9. In the search results, click the user, group, or SID that you want to add to the SMB share and then click Select.
10. By default, the access rights of the new account are set to Deny All. To enable a user or group to access the share,
follow these additional steps:
a. Next to the user or group account you added, click Edit.
b. Select Run as Root or select Specify Permission Level and then select one or more of the following permission levels:
Full Control, Read-Write, and Read.
11. Click Add Persona.
12. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
SMB security

Configure multi-protocol home directory access

For users who will access this share through FTP or SSH, you can make sure that their home directory path is the same whether
they connect through SMB or they log in through FTP or SSH. This task may only be performed at the OneFS command-line
interface.
This command directs the SMB share to use the home directory template that is specified in the user's authentication provider.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
1. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. Run the following command, where <share> is the name of the SMB share and --path is the directory path of the home
directory template specified by the user's authentication provider:

isi smb shares modify <share> --path=""

Related concepts
SMB security
Mixed protocol environments

202 File sharing

NFS security
OneFS provides an NFS server so you can share files on your cluster with NFS clients that adhere to the RFC1813 (NFSv3) and
RFC3530 (NFSv4) specifications.
NFS is disabled by default. To enable NFS, use the following command:

isi services nfs enable

In OneFS, the NFS server is fully optimized as a multithreaded service running in user space instead of the kernel. This
architecture load balances the NFS service across all nodes of the cluster, providing the stability and scalability necessary to
manage up to thousands of connections across multiple NFS clients.
NFS mounts run and refresh quickly, and the server constantly monitors fluctuating demands on NFS services and makes
adjustments across all nodes to ensure continuous, reliable performance. Using an integrated process scheduler, OneFS helps
ensure fair allocation of node resources so that no client can seize more than its fair share of NFS services.
The NFS server also supports access zones that are defined in OneFS, so that clients can access only the exports appropriate
to their zone. For example, if NFS exports are specified for Zone 2, only clients that are assigned to Zone 2 can access these
exports.
To simplify client connections, especially for exports with large path names, the NFS server also supports aliases, which are
shortcuts to mount points that clients can specify directly.
For secure NFS file sharing, OneFS supports NIS and LDAP authentication providers.

Related concepts
Managing the NFS service
Managing NFS exports

NFS exports
You can manage individual NFS export rules that define mount-points (paths) available to NFS clients and how the server should
perform with these clients.
In OneFS, you can create, delete, list, view, modify, and reload NFS exports.
NFS export rules are zone-aware. Each export is associated with a zone, can only be mounted by clients on that zone, and can
only expose paths below the zone root. By default, any export command applies to the client's current zone.
Each rule must have at least one path (mount-point), and can include additional paths. You can also specify that all
subdirectories of the given path or paths are mountable. Otherwise, only the specified paths are exported, and child directories
are not mountable.
An export rule can specify a particular set of clients, enabling you to restrict access to certain mount-points or to apply a unique
set of options to these clients. If the rule does not specify any clients, then the rule applies to all clients that connect to the
server. If the rule does specify clients, then that rule is applied only to those clients.

NFS aliases
You can create and manage aliases as shortcuts for directory path names in OneFS. If those path names are defined as NFS
exports, NFS clients can specify the aliases as NFS mount points.
NFS aliases are designed to give functional parity with SMB share names within the context of NFS. Each alias maps a unique
name to a path on the file system. NFS clients can then use the alias name in place of the path when mounting.
Aliases must be formed as top-level Unix path names, having a single forward slash followed by name. For example, you could
create an alias named /q4 that maps to /ifs/data/finance/accounting/winter2015 (a path in OneFS). An NFS
client could mount that directory through either of:

mount cluster_ip:/q4

mount cluster_ip:/ifs/data/finance/accounting/winter2015

File sharing 203

Aliases and exports are completely independent. You can create an alias without associating it with an NFS export. Similarly, an
NFS export does not require an alias.
Each alias must point to a valid path on the file system. While this path is absolute, it must point to a location beneath the zone
root (/ifs on the System zone). If the alias points to a path that does not exist on the file system, any client trying to mount
the alias would be denied in the same way as attempting to mount an invalid full pathname.
NFS aliases are zone-aware. By default, an alias applies to the client's current access zone. To change this, you can specify an
alternative access zone as part of creating or modifying an alias.
Each alias can only be used by clients on that zone, and can only apply to paths below the zone root. Alias names are unique per
zone, but the same name can be used in different zones—for example, /home.
When you create an alias in the web administration interface, the alias list displays the status of the alias. Similarly, using the
--check option of the isi nfs aliases command, you can check the status of an NFS alias (status can be: good, illegal
path, name conflict, not exported, or path not found).

NFS log files

OneFS writes log messages that are associated with NFS events to files in /var/log.
With the log level option, you can now specify the detail at which log messages are output to log files. The following table
describes the log files that are associated with NFS.

Table 71. Log Files

Log file Description
[Link] Primary NFS server functionality (v3, v4, mount)
rpc_lockd.log NFS v3 locking events through the NLM protocol
rpc_statd.log NFS v3 reboot detection through the NSM protocol
isi_netgroup_d.log Netgroup resolution and caching

Managing the NFS service

You can enable or disable the NFS service and specify the NFS versions to support, including NFSv3 and NFSv4. NFS settings
are applied across all nodes in the cluster.
NOTE: NFSv4 can be enabled non-disruptively on a OneFS cluster, and it will run concurrently with NFSv3. Any existing
NFSv3 clients will not be impacted by enabling NFSv4.

Related concepts
NFS security

Configure NFS file sharing

You can enable or disable the NFS service, and set the lock protection level and security type. These settings are applied across
all node in the cluster. You can change the settings for individual NFS exports that you define.
1. Click Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > Global Settings.
2. Enable or disable the following settings:
● NFS Export Service
● NFSv3
● NFSv4
3. Click Reload in the Cached Export Configuration section to reload the cached NFS export settings.
The cached NFS export settings are reloaded to help ensure that changes to DNS or NIS are applied.
4. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
NFS security

204 File sharing

Related references
NFS global settings
NFS export performance settings
NFS export client compatibility settings
NFS export behavior settings

Create a root-squashing rule for the default NFS export

By default, the NFS service implements a root-squashing rule for the default NFS export. This rule prevents root users on NFS
clients from exercising root privileges on the NFS server.
1. Click Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Exports.
2. Select the default export in the NFS Exports list, and click View/Edit.
3. In the Root User Mapping area, verify that the default settings are selected. If so, no changes are necessary and you can
go to step 7.
4. Click Edit Export.
5. Locate the Root User Mapping setting, and then click Use Default to reset to these values:

User: Map root users to user nobody

Primary Group: No primary group
Secondary Groups: No secondary groups

6. Click Save Changes.

7. Click Close.
With these settings, regardless of the users' credentials on the NFS client, they would not be able to gain root privileges on the
NFS server.

NFS global settings

NFS global settings determine how the NFS service operates. You can modify these settings according to the needs of your
organization.
The following table describes NFS global settings and their default values:

Table 72. Global Settings

Setting Description
NFS Export Service Enables or disables the NFS service. This setting is enabled by
default.
NFSv3 Enables or disables support for NFSv3. This setting is enabled
by default. Upgrades maintain previous NFSv3 settings.
NFSv4 Enables or disables support for NFSv4. This setting is enabled
by default in OneFS [Link] and later versions. Upgrades
maintain previous NFSv4 settings.
Cached Export Configuration Enables you to reload cached NFS exports to help ensure that
any domain or network changes take effect immediately.

Related concepts
NFS security

Related tasks
Configure NFS file sharing

File sharing 205

Managing NFS exports
You can create NFS exports, view and modify export settings, and delete exports that are no longer needed.
You configure the default export after enabling NFS.
NOTE: It is recommended that you configure your default export to limit access only to trusted clients, or to restrict access
completely. To help ensure that sensitive data is not compromised, avoid creating other exports in readily accessible or
visible points in the OneFS file hierarchy. Ensure that your exports can be protected by access zones or limited to specific
clients with either root, read-write, or read-only access, as appropriate.

Related concepts
NFS security

Create an NFS export

You can create NFS exports to share files in OneFS with UNIX-based clients.
The NFS service runs in user space and distributes the load across all nodes in the cluster. This enables the service to be
highly scalable and support thousands of exports. As a best practice, however, you should avoid creating a separate export for
each client on your network. It is more efficient to create fewer exports, and to use access zones and user mapping to control
access.
1. Click Protocols > UNIX sharing (NFS) > NFS exports.
2. Click Create export.
3. For the Directory paths setting, type or browse to the directory that you want to export.
You can add multiple directory paths by clicking Add another directory path for each additional path.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a comment that describes the export.
5. Optional: Specify the NFS clients that are allowed to access the export.
You can specify NFS clients in any or all of the client fields, as described in the following table. A client can be identified by
host name, IPv4 or IPv6 address, subnet, or netgroup. IPv4 addresses mapped into the IPv6 address space are translated
and stored as IPv4 addresses to remove any possible ambiguities.
You can specify multiple clients in each field by typing one entry per line.
NOTE: If you do not specify any clients, all clients on the network are allowed access to the export. If you specify
clients in any of the rule fields, such as Always read-only clients, the applicable rule is only applied to those clients.
However, adding an entry to Root clients does not stop other clients from accessing the export.

If you add the same client to more than one list and the client is entered in the same format for each entry, the client is
normalized to a single list in the following order of priority:

● Root clients
● Always read-write clients
● Always read-only clients
● clients

Setting Description
Clients Specifies one or more clients to be allowed access to the export. Access level is controlled through export
permissions.
Always read- Specifies one or more clients to be allowed read/write access to the export regardless of the export's
write clients access-restriction setting. This is equivalent to adding a client to the Clients list with the Restrict access
to read-only setting cleared.
Always read- Specifies one or more clients to be allowed read-only access to the export regardless of the export's
only clients access-restriction setting. This is equivalent to adding a client to the Clients list with the Restrict access
to read-only setting selected.

206 File sharing

 Setting Description
root clients Specifies one or more clients to be mapped as root for the export. This setting enables the following client
to mount the export, present the root identity, and be mapped to root. Adding a client to this list does not
prevent other clients from mounting if clients, read-only clients, and read-write clients are unset.
6. Select the export permissions setting to use:
● Enable read-write acces
● Restrict actions to read-only.
7. Specify user and group mappings.
Select Use custom to limit access by mapping root users or all users to a specific user and group ID. For root squash, map
root users to the username nobody.
8. Locate the Security types setting. Set the security type to use. UNIX is the default setting.
Click Use custom to select one or more of the following security types:
● UNIX (system)
● Kerberos5
● Kerberos5 Integrity
● Kerberos5 Privacy
NOTE: The default security flavor (UNIX) relies upon having a trusted network. If you do not completely trust
everything on your network, then the best practice is to choose a Kerberos option. If the system does not support
Kerberos, it will not be fully protected because NFS without Kerberos trusts everything on the network and sends all
packets in cleartext. If you cannot use Kerberos, you should find another way to protect the Internet connection. At a
minimum, do the following:
● Limit root access to the cluster to trusted host IP addresses.
● Make sure that all new devices that you add to the network are trusted. Methods for ensuring trust include, but are
not limited to, the following:
○ Use an IPsec tunnel. This option is very secure because it authenticates the devices using secure keys.
○ Configure all of the switch ports to go inactive if they are physically disconnected. In addition, make sure that the
switch ports are MAC limited.

9. Specify file name limit. 255 B is the default setting.

Click Use custom to set your preferred file name limit.
10. Click Advanced settings to configure advanced NFS export settings.
Do not change the advanced settings unless it is necessary and you fully understand the consequences of these changes.
11. Click Create export.
The new NFS export is created and shown at the top of the NFS Exports list.

Related concepts
NFS security

Modify an NFS export

You can modify the settings for an existing NFS export.
CAUTION: Changing export settings may cause performance issues. Ensure you understand the potential impact
of any settings changes before saving any changes.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX sharing (NFS) > NFS exports.
2. In the NFS exports list, select the check box corresponding to the export you want to modify, and click View/Edit.
3. Edit the desired export settings.
4. Click Advanced settings to edit advanced export settings.
It is recommended that you do not change the advanced settings unless it is necessary and you fully understand the
consequences of these settings.
5. Click Save.
The settings are modified for the NFS export.

File sharing 207

Related concepts
NFS security

Delete an NFS export

You can delete unneeded NFS exports. Any current NFS client connections to these exports become invalid.
NOTE: You can delete all the exports on a cluster at once. Click the Export ID/Paths check box at the top of the NFS
exports list, and then select Delete from the drop-down list to the right.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX sharing (NFS) > NFS exports.
2. In the NFS exports list, click the check box to the left of the export that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete to confirm the operation.

Related concepts
NFS security

Check NFS exports for errors

You can check for errors in NFS exports, such as conflicting export rules, invalid paths, and unresolvable hostnames and
netgroups. This task may be performed only through the OneFS command-line interface.
1. Establish an SSH connection to any node in the cluster.
2. Run the isi nfs exports check command.
In the following example output, no errors were found:

ID Message
----------
----------
Total: 0

In the following example output, export 1 contains a directory path that does not currently exist:

ID Message
-----------------------------------
1 '/ifs/test' does not exist
-----------------------------------
Total: 1

View and configure default NFS export settings

You can view and configure default NFS export settings. Changes to these settings apply to all new exports and any existing
exports that are using default values.
NOTE: Changes to default export settings affect all current and future NFS exports that use default settings. Incorrectly
changing these settings can negatively affect the availability of the NFS file sharing service. It is recommended that you
not change the default settings, particularly advanced settings, unless you have experience working with NFS. Instead, you
should change settings as needed for individual NFS exports as you create them.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > Export Settings.
Common NFS export settings are listed in the Export settings area: Root user mapping, Non root user mapping, Failed
user mapping, Security types, and File name limits. Modify the default settings that you want to apply to all new NFS
exports, or to existing exports that use any of the default values.
2. In the Advanced settings area, you can edit advanced settings.
It is recommended that you do not change advanced settings unless it is necessary and you fully understand the
consequences of the changes.
3. Click Save.

208 File sharing

Related concepts
NFS security

Basic NFS export settings

The basic NFS export settings are global settings that apply to any new NFS exports that you create.
The basic NFS export settings are described in the following table.

Table 73. Basic Export Settings

Setting Default values
Root user mapping User: Map root users to user nobody
Primary Group: No primary group
Secondary Groups: No secondary groups
NOTE: The default settings result in a root squashing rule
whereby no user on the NFS client, even a root user, can
gain root privileges on the NFS server.

Non-root user mapping User mapping is disabled by default. It is recommended

that you specify this setting on a per-export basis, when
appropriate.
Failed user mapping User mapping is disabled by default. It is recommended
that you specify this setting on a per-export basis, when
appropriate.
Security types Available options include UNIX (system), the default
setting, Kerberos5, Kerberos5 Integrity, and
Kerberos5 Privacy.

File name limits The default file name limit is 255 B. You have an option to
customize the file name limit.

NFS export performance settings

You can specify settings to control the performance of NFS exports.
The following table describes the performance category of settings for NFS exports:

Table 74. Export Performance Settings

Setting Description
Block Size The block size used to calculate block counts for NFSv3
FSSTAT and NFSv4 GETATTR requests. The default value is
8192 bytes.

Commit Asynchronous If set to yes, allows NFSv3 and NFSv4 COMMIT operations to
be asynchronous. The default value is No.

Directory Transfer Size The preferred directory read transfer size that is reported
to NFSv3 and NFSv4 clients. The default value is 131072
bytes.

Read Transfer Max Size The maximum read transfer size reported to NFSv3 and
NFSv4 clients. The default value is 1048576 bytes.

Read Transfer Multiple The recommended read transfer size multiple reported to
NFSv3 and NFSv4 clients. The default value is 512 bytes.

Read Transfer Preferred Size The preferred read transfer size reported to NFSv3 and
NFSv4 clients. The default value is 131072 bytes.

File sharing 209

Table 74. Export Performance Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Setattr Asynchronous If set to Yes, performs set attribute operations
asynchronously. The default value is No.

Write Datasync Action The action to perform for DATASYNC writes. The default
value is DATASYNC.

Write Datasync Reply The reply to send for DATASYNC writes. The default value is
DATASYNC.

Write Filesync Action The action to perform for FILESYNC writes. The default value
is FILESYNC.

Write Filesync Reply The reply to send for FILESYNC writes. The default value is
FILESYNC.

Write Transfer Max Size The maximum write transfer size reported to NFSv3 and
NFSv4 clients. The default value is 1048576 bytes.

Write Transfer Multiple The recommended write transfer size reported to NFSv3 and
NFSv4 clients. The default value is 512 bytes.

Write Transfer Preferred The preferred write transfer size reported to NFSv3 and
NFSv4 clients. The default value is 524288.

Write Unstable Action The action to perform for UNSTABLE writes. The default
value is UNSTABLE.

Write Unstable Reply The reply to send for UNSTABLE writes. The default value is
UNSTABLE.

Related concepts
NFS security

Related tasks
Configure NFS file sharing

NFS export client compatibility settings

The NFS export client compatibility settings affect the customization of NFS exports.
These settings are described in the following table.

Table 75. Export Client Compatibility Setting Values

Setting Setting value
Max File Size Specifies the maximum file size to allow. This setting is
advisory in nature and is returned to the client in a reply to
an NFSv3 FSINFO or NFSv4 GETATTR request. The default
value is 9223372036854776000 bytes.

Readdirplus Enable Enables the use of NFSv3 readdirplus service whereby a client
can send a request and received extended information about
the directory and files in the export. The default is Yes.

Return 32 bit File IDs Specifies return 32-bit file IDs to the client. The default is No.

Related concepts
NFS security

210 File sharing

Related tasks
Configure NFS file sharing

NFS export behavior settings

The NFS export behavior settings control whether NFS clients can perform certain functions on the NFS server, such as setting
the time.
The NFS export behavior settings are described in the following table.

Table 76. Export Behavior Settings

Setting Description
Can Set Time When this setting is enabled, OneFS allows the NFS client to
set various time attributes on the NFS server. The default
value is Yes.

Encoding Overrides the general encoding settings that the cluster has
for the export. The default value is DEFAULT.

Map Lookup UID Looks up incoming user identifiers (UIDs) in the local
authentication database. The default value is No.

Symlinks Informs the NFS client that the file system supports symbolic
link file types. The default value is Yes.

Time Delta Sets the server clock granularity. The default value is 1e-9
seconds (0.000000001 second).

Related concepts
NFS security

Related tasks
Configure NFS file sharing

Managing NFS aliases

You can create NFS aliases to simplify exports that clients connect to. An NFS alias maps an absolute directory path to a simple
directory path.
For example, suppose you created an NFS export to /ifs/data/hq/home/archive/first-quarter/finance. You
could create the alias /finance1 to map to that directory path.
NFS aliases can be created in any access zone, including the System zone.

Create an NFS alias

You can create an NFS alias to map a long directory path to a simple pathname.
Aliases must be formed as a simple Unix-style directory path, for example, /home.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Aliases.
2. Click Create Alias.
3. In the Alias Name field, type a name for the alias.
The alias name must be formed as a simple UNIX-style path with one element, for example, /home.
4. In the Path field, type the full path that the alias is to be associated with, or click Browse to search for the path.
If you have set up access zones in OneFS, the full path must begin with the root of the current access zone.
5. Click Create Alias.
The name, status, and path of the new alias are shown at the top of the NFS Aliases list.

File sharing 211

Modify an NFS alias
You can modify an NFS alias.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Aliases.
2. In the NFS Aliases list, locate the alias that you want to modify, and then click View/Edit.
3. In the View Alias Details dialog box, click Edit Alias.
4. In the Alias Name field, type a name for the alias.
The alias name must be formed as a simple UNIX-style path with one element, for example, /home.
5. In the Path field, type the full path that the alias is to be associated with, or click Browse to search for the path.
If you have set up access zones in OneFS, the full path must begin with the root of the current access zone.
6. Click Save Changes.
The View Alias Details dialog box is displayed, and a message indicates that the change succeeded.
7. Click Close.
The modified alias name, status, and path are shown in the NFS Aliases list.

Delete an NFS alias

You can delete an NFS alias.
If an NFS alias is mapped to an NFS export, deleting the alias can disconnect clients that used the alias to mount the export.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Aliases.
2. Select the check box corresponding to the alias that you intend to delete, and click More.
3. Click Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box appears.
4. Click Delete.
The alias is removed from the NFS Aliases list.

List NFS aliases

You can view a list of NFS aliases that have already been defined for a particular zone. Aliases in the system zone are listed by
default.
● Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Aliases.
The NFS Aliases list appears, displaying all aliases for the current access zone. The names, states, and paths for all aliases
are shown.

View an NFS alias

You can view the settings of an NFS alias.
1. Select Protocols > UNIX Sharing (NFS) > NFS Aliases.
2. Select the check box corresponding to the alias that you want to view, and click View/Edit.
The View Alias Details dialog box displays the settings associated with the alias.
3. When you are done viewing the alias, click Close.

FTP
OneFS includes a secure FTP service that is called Very Secure FTP Daemon (VSFTPD), that you can configure for standard
FTP and FTPS file transfers.
FTP is disabled by default, as users should be using secure FTP (FTPs) or HTTPs for file transfers.

Related tasks
Enable and configure FTP file sharing

212 File sharing

Enable and configure FTP file sharing
You can set the FTP service to allow any node in the cluster to respond to FTP requests through a standard user account.
You can enable the transfer of files between remote FTP servers and enable anonymous FTP service on the root by creating a
local user named "anonymous" or "ftp".
When configuring FTP access, ensure that the specified FTP root is the home directory of the user who logs in. For example,
the FTP root for local user jsmith should be ifs/home/jsmith.
1. Click Protocols > FTP Settings.
2. In the Service area, select Enable FTP service.
3. In the Settings area, select one or more of the following options:

Option Description
Enable anonymous Allow users with "anonymous" or "ftp" as the user name to access files and directories without
access requiring authentication. This setting is disabled by default.
Enable local access Allow local users to access files and directories with their local user name and password, allowing
them to upload files directly through the file system. This setting is enabled by default.
Enable server-to- Allow files to be transferred between two remote FTP servers. This setting is disabled by default.
server transfers
4. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
FTP

HTTP and HTTPS security

OneFS includes a configurable Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) service. Use HTTP to request files that are stored on the
cluster and to interact with the web administration interface.
HTTP and HTTPS are disabled by default. To enable them, use the following commands:

isi http settings modify --service=enabled

isi http settings modify --https=true

NOTE: Set the file and directory permissions to allow HTTP or HTTPS to access them.

OneFS supports both HTTP and its secure variant, HTTPS. Each node in the cluster runs an instance of the Apache HTTP
Server to provide HTTP access. You can configure the HTTP service to run in different modes.
Both HTTP and HTTPS are supported for file transfer, but only HTTPS is supported for API calls. The HTTPS-only requirement
includes the web administration interface. OneFS supports a form of the web-based DAV (WebDAV) protocol that enables users
to modify and manage files on remote web servers. OneFS performs distributed authoring, but does not support versioning and
does not perform security checks. You can enable DAV in the web administration interface.

Related tasks
Enable and configure HTTP

Enable and configure HTTP

You can configure HTTP and DAV to enable users to edit and manage files collaboratively across remote web servers. You can
only perform this task through the OneFS web administration interface.
1. Click Protocols > HTTP Settings.
2. In the Service area, select one of the following settings:

File sharing 213

 Table 77. Service Options
Option Description
Enable HTTP Allows HTTP access for cluster administration and browsing content on the cluster.
Disable HTTP and Allows only administrative access to the web administration interface. This is the default
redirect to the OneFS setting.
Web Administration
interface
Disable HTTP Closes the HTTP port that is used for file access. Users can continue to access the web
administration interface by specifying the port number in the URL. The default port is 8080.

3. In the Protocol Settings area, in the Document root directory field, type a path name or click Browse to browse to an
existing directory in /ifs.
NOTE: The HTTP server runs as the daemon user and group. To correctly enforce access controls, you must grant
the daemon user or group read access to all files under the document root, and allow the HTTP server to traverse the
document root.

4. In the Authentication Settings area from the HTTP Authentication list, select an authentication setting:

Table 78. Authentication Setting Options

Option Description
Off Disables HTTP authentication. This is the default setting.
Basic Authentication Only Enables HTTP basic authentication. User credentials are sent in cleartext.
Integrated Authentication Enables HTTP authentication using Kerberos.
Only
Integrated and Basic Enables both basic and integrated authentication.
Authentication
Basic Authentication with Enables HTTP basic authentication and enables the Apache web server to perform access
Access Controls checks.
Integrated Authentication Enables HTTP integrated authentication using Kerberos, and enables the Apache web server
with Access Controls to perform access checks.
Integrated and Basic Enables HTTP basic authentication and integrated authentication, and enables the Apache
Authentication with Access web server to perform access checks.
Controls

5. To allow multiple users to manage and modify files collaboratively across remote web servers, select Enable WebDAV.
6. Select Enable access logging.
7. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
HTTP and HTTPS security

214 File sharing

 13
File filtering
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• File filtering in an access zone
• Enable and configure file filtering in an access zone
• Modify file filtering settings in an access zone
• View file filtering settings

File filtering in an access zone

In an access zone, you can use file filtering only for SMB protocol to allow or deny file writes based on file type.
If some file types might cause throughput issues, security problems, storage clutter, or productivity disruptions on your cluster,
or if your organization must adhere to specific file policies, you can restrict writes to specified file types or only allow writes to
a specified list of file types. When you enable file filtering in an access zone, OneFS applies file filtering rules only to files in that
access zone.
● If you choose to deny file writes, you can specify file types by extension that are not allowed to be written. OneFS permits all
other file types to be written.
● If you choose to allow file writes, you can specify file types by extension that are allowed to be written. OneFS denies all
other file types to be written.
You can apply additional file filtering at the SMB share level. See "SMB file filtering" in the File sharing chapter of this guide.

Enable and configure file filtering in an access zone

You can enable file filtering per access zone and specify which file types users are denied or allowed write access to within the
access zone.
1. Click Access > File Filter.
2. From the Current Access Zone list, select the access zone that you want to apply file filtering to.
3. Select Enable file filters.
4. From the File Extensions list, select one of the following filtering methods:
● Deny writes for list of file extensions
● Allow writes for list of file extensions
5. Click Add file extensions.
The Add File Extensions dialog box appears.
6. In the File Extensions field, type the file name extension of the file type you want to filter.
The extension must start with a "." such as .txt.
7. Optional: Click Add another file extension to enter multiple extensions.
8. Click Add Extensions.
9. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
File filtering in an access zone

File filtering 215

Modify file filtering settings in an access zone
You can modify file filtering settings by changing the filtering method or editing file extensions.
1. Click Access > File Filter.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone in which you want to modify.
3. To disable file filtering in the access zone, clear the Enable file filters check box.
4. To change the file filtering method, select one of the following filtering methods from the File Extensions list:
● Deny writes for list of file extensions
● Allow writes for list of file extensions
5. To add a file name extension, click Add file extensions, type the file name extension, and then click Add Extensions.
6. To remove a file name extension, click the Remove Filter button next to the extension you would like to delete.
7. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
File filtering in an access zone

View file filtering settings

You can view file filtering settings in an access zone.
1. Click Access > File Filter.
2. From the Current Access Zone drop-down list, select the access zone in which you want to modify.
The settings for the selected access zone are displayed on the File Filter Settings tab.

216 File filtering

 14
Auditing
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Auditing overview
• Syslog
• Syslog forwarding and TLS
• OpenBSM service
• Protocol audit events
• Audit log purging
• Managing audit settings
• Integrating with the Common Event Enabler
• Tracking the delivery of protocol audit events

Auditing overview
You can enable auditing for configuration changes, protocol activity, and high-level system platform events on the cluster.
Auditing can detect many potential sources of data loss, including fraudulent activities, inappropriate entitlements, and
unauthorized access attempts. Customers in financial services, health care, life sciences, media and entertainment, and
governmental agencies must meet stringent regulatory requirements that protect against these sources of data loss.
All audit data is stored and protected in the cluster file system. You can optionally configure forwarding of auditing logs to
remote syslog servers. You can optionally configure encrypted forwarding with TLS. Each audit topic type can be configured
separately regarding remote servers, whether to use TLS forwarding, and whether to use one- or two-way TLS verification.
To configure auditing, you must either be a root user, or you must be assigned to an administrative role that includes auditing
privileges (ISI_PRIV_AUDIT).
OneFS internally manages the audit log files. Some configurable options related to log file management include retention period
and whether to implement automatic purging.
The audit topic types are:
● Configuration change auditing
● Protocol activity auditing
● System auditing

Configuration change auditing

Configuration change auditing tracks and records all configuration events from the OneFS platform API. The process audits the
command-line interface (CLI), web administration interface, and OneFS APIs.
Configuration change logs are populated in the config topic in the audit back-end store under /ifs/.ifsvar/audit/
logs/node<nnn>/config. The logs automatically roll over to a new file after the size reaches 1 GB.
You can enable configuration auditing using the Web UI or the CLI. If you enable configuration auditing, no additional
configuration is required. You can optionally configure syslog forwarding using the CLI.

Protocol auditing
Protocol auditing tracks and stores activity through SMB, NFS, S3, and HDFS protocol connections. You can enable and
configure protocol auditing for one or more access zones in a cluster. If you enable protocol auditing for an access zone,
file-access events through the SMB, NFS, S3, and HDFS protocols are recorded in the protocol audit topic directories. You can

Auditing 217
specify which events to log in each access zone. For example, you can audit the default set of protocol events in the System
access zone but audit only successful attempts to delete files in a different access zone.
The audit events are logged on the individual nodes where the SMB, NFS, S3, or HDFS client initiated the activity. The events
are stored in a binary file under /ifs/.ifsvar/audit/logs/node<nnn>/<protocol>. The logs automatically roll over to
a new file after the size reaches 1 GB. The logs are compressed to reduce space.
The protocol audit logs are consumable by auditing applications that support the Common Event Enabler (CEE).
You can enable protocol auditing using the Web UI or CLI. To configure syslog forwarding, use the CLI.

System auditing
System auditing tracks system platform events and events that are related to account management. Two services manage
system auditing. Both services log events per node. Both services manage their own log rotations and rollovers. The two system
auditing services are syslogd and OpenBSM.
● The syslogd service collects logs that are generated by other applications and stores them in /var/log/audit/
<audit files>. The syslogd service is always enabled and cannot be disabled. It collects audit logs from the following
application logs.

Table 79. Application Logs

Application log Description
isi_pw.log Logs account changes that were made with the isi_pw command.

[Link] Logs account changes that were made with the pw command.

[Link] Logs authentication events.

[Link] Logs access to the HTTP server.

● The OpenBSM service is predefined to log high-level cluster events. This service is disabled by default. If enabled, it collects
the following events and stores them in /var/audit/<audit files>.
○ Module loads and unloads
○ System boot up and reboots
○ User logins and logouts
○ System shutdowns and power off
○ OpenSSH logins
Use the CLI to configure system auditing. You can enable and disable the OpenBSM service. You can configure forwarding of all
system auditing logs from both services to remote syslog servers.

Syslog
The isi_audit_syslog service is the OneFS syslog service that handles forwarding of audit logs to remote servers.
In OneFS 9.5 and later, the isi_audit_syslog service forwards audit logs directly to remote syslog servers when
syslog forwarding is enabled. The transmission from isi_audit_syslog to remote servers is reliable and secure. The
isi_audit_syslog service handles forwarding for all audit logs, including configuration change auditing, protocol activity
auditing, and all system auditing.

Syslog forwarding and TLS

You can configure forwarding of audit logs to remote syslog servers. You can enable TLS for syslog forwarding.
For the protocol activity audit topic, you can also configure forwarding to a Dell Common Event Enabler (CEE) server. For
information about forwarding audit logs to a CEE server, see Integrating with the Common Event Enabler.
To configure forwarding to remote syslog servers, you must use the CLI. Configuration includes:
● Enabling and disabling remote forwarding
● Specifying the remote syslog servers
● Enabling or disabling encryption (TLS) for the forwarding operations

218 Auditing
● Choosing between one- or two-way authentication for TLS communications
These settings are configured separately for each audit topic. For example, you can enable forwarding of configuration change
auditing while not forwarding the other audit topics. You can configure separate remote servers for each of the audit topics,
and you can configure TLS separately for each audit topic. To view the current configuration for all the audit settings, use isi
audit settings global view.
The OneFS audit system persists all audit data to disk. The audit syslog forwarder ensures that all audit events are processed
for forwarding when remote forwarding is enabled. Only TLS ensures delivery to the remote servers.
Both TLS or non-TLS methods distribute the audit event in the same way. The audit syslog forwarder sends all audit events to
all configured remote syslog servers. Use the following table to determine whether to enable TLS.

Table 80. Comparison of Remote Forwarding

Attribute TLS enabled TLS disabled
Delivery TLS UDP
method
Reliability Every event is guaranteed for successful delivery to at least This method is unreliable. The audit
one remote syslog server. syslog forwarder does not implement UDP
retransmission.
If configuration errors or degraded network conditions exist,
audit events may be dropped for a given remote server. If
all syslog servers are down, the entire forwarding process is
blocked until one server recovers.

Authentication One- or two-way certificate verification is performed. No certificate verification is performed.

● One-way verification—This option is the default
verification method when TLS is enabled. The root
certificate for the CA that is embedded in OneFS is used
to verify the syslog server during the TLS handshake. No
additional configuration is required.
● Two-way verification—This option requires that both
server and client certificates are verified. You must import
the client certificate into OneFS for this case. Use the isi
audit certificates syslog commands.

OpenBSM service
The OpenBSM service is disabled by default. Administrators can enable and disable this service using the CLI.

OneFS uses the OpenBSM framework and service. The log files use the OpenBSM event log format. Log rotation is self-
managed. The daemon writes run information in /var/log/messages.
OpenBSM log files are in /var/audit/. You can view the logs with the praudit utility:

praudit-x /var/audit/<audit file>

Protocol audit events

By default, audited access zones track only certain events on the PowerScale cluster, including successful and failed attempts
to access files and directories.
When protocol auditing is enabled, OneFS audit tracks all changes that are made to the files and directories in SMB shares, NFS
exports, HDFS data, and S3 buckets.
The default tracked events are create, close, delete, rename, and set_security.
The names of generated events are loosely based on the Windows I/O request packet (IRP) model in which all operations begin
with a create event to obtain a file handle. A create event is required before all I/O operations, including the following: close,
create, delete, get_security, read, rename, set_security, and write. A close event marks when the client is finished with the file
handle that was produced by a create event.

Auditing 219
 NOTE: For the NFS, S3, and HDFS protocols, the rename and delete events might not be enclosed with the create and
close events.
These internally stored events are translated to events that are forwarded through the CEE to the auditing application. The CEE
export facilities on OneFS perform this mapping. The CEE can be used to connect to any third party application that supports
the CEE.

NOTE: The CEE does not support forwarding HDFS or S3 protocol events to a third-party application.

Different SMB, NFS, S3, and HDFS clients issue different requests, and one particular version of a platform such as Windows
or Mac OS X using SMB might differ from another. Similarly, different versions of an application such as Microsoft Word or
Windows Explorer might make different protocol requests. For example, a client with a Windows Explorer window open might
generate many events if an automatic or manual refresh of that window occurs. Applications issue requests with the logged-in
user's credentials, but you should not assume that all requests are purposeful user actions.

Related tasks
Enable protocol access auditing
Configure protocol event filters

Supported audit tools

You can configure OneFS to send protocol auditing logs to servers that support the Common Event Enabler (CEE).
CEE has been tested and verified to work on several third-party software vendors.
NOTE: We recommend that you install and configure third-party auditing applications before you enable the OneFS auditing
feature. Otherwise, all the events that are logged are forwarded to the auditing application, and a large backlog causes a
delay in receiving the most current events.

Delivering protocol audit events to multiple CEE servers

OneFS supports concurrent delivery of protocol audit events to multiple CEE servers running the CEE service.
You can establish up to 20 HTTP 1.1 connections across a subset of CEE servers. Each node in a PowerScale cluster can select
up to five CEE servers for delivery. The CEE servers are shared in a global configuration and are configured with OneFS by
adding the URI of each server to the OneFS configuration.
After configuring the CEE servers, a node in a PowerScale cluster automatically selects the CEE servers from a sorted list of
CEE URIs. The servers are selected starting from the node's logical node number offset within the sorted list. When a CEE
server is unavailable, the next available server is selected in the sorted order. All the connections are evenly distributed between
the selected servers. When a node is moved because a CEE server was previously unavailable, checks are made every 15
minutes for the availability of the CEE server. The node is moved back as soon as the CEE Server is available.
Follow some of these best practices before configuring the CEE servers:
● We recommend that you provide only one CEE server per node. You can use extra CEE servers beyond the PowerScale
cluster size only when the selected CEE server goes offline.

NOTE: In a global configuration, there should be one CEE server per node.

● Configure the CEE server and enable protocol auditing at the same time. If not, a backlog of events might accumulate
causing stale delivery for a period of time.
You can either receive a global view of the progress of delivery of the protocol audit events or you can receive a logical node
number view of the progress by running the isi audit progress view command.

220 Auditing
Supported event types for protocol auditing
You can view or modify the event types that are audited in an access zone.

Table 81. Supported Event Types

Event name Example protocol activity Audited by default Can be exported Cannot be exported
through CEE through CEE
create ● Create a file or directory X X
● Open a file, directory, or
share
● Mount a share
● Delete a file

NOTE: While the SMB

protocol allows you
to set a file for
deletion with the create
operation, you must
enable the delete event
in order for the auditing
tool to log the event.

close ● Close a directory X X

● Close a modified or
unmodified file
rename Rename a file or directory X X
delete Delete a file or directory X X
set_security Attempt to modify file or X X
directory permissions
read The first read request on an X
open file handle
write The first write request on an X
open file handle
get_security The client reads security X
information for an open file
handle
logon SMB session create request by X
a client
logoff SMB session logoff X
tree_connect SMB first attempt to access a X
share

Audit log purging

OneFS supports audit log purging features on the cluster.
The audit system writes audit logs in the /ifs/.ifsvar/audit/logs directory. After an audit log file reaches 1G, a new file
is created, and the old file is compressed. As time goes on, the audit log file exhausts all space on the file system.
There are two ways to delete audit logs. Both methods are performed using the command-line interface.
In the first method, automatic deletion, the audit logs are deleted automatically after passing a specified retention period.
The retention period works like a window. Any audit log out of the window is deleted. For example, if you configure the retention
period as 90 days, and the current date is 2019-5-30, any log before 2019-3-1 is deleted. From 2019-3-1 to 2019-5-30 is a 90

Auditing 221
day window. The granularity of deleting is by file. Although audit log purging uses day to determine the retention period, purging
removes a file when the last audit event in the file is older than the retention period.
The second purging method is manual deletion. You can specify to delete audit logs before a specified time.
Both automatic and manual deletion apply to configuration change and protocol activity logs.

NOTE: The audit log purging features do not work on the system audit logs.

Managing audit settings

You can enable and disable audit services and manage audit files. You can integrate auditing with the Common Event Enabler.

Enable configuration change auditing

OneFS can audit configuration change events on the PowerScale cluster. All configuration events that are handled by the API
including writes, modifications, and deletions are tracked and recorded in the config audit topic directories. When you enable or
disable configuration change auditing, no additional configuration is required.
Configuration change logs are populated in the config topic in the audit back-end store under /ifs/.ifsvar/audit/logs/
node<nnn>/config.

NOTE: Configuration events are not forwarded to the Common Event Enabler (CEE).

1. Click Cluster Management > Auditing.

2. In the Settings area, select the Enable Configuration Change Auditing check box.
3. Click Save Changes.
You can enable forwarding of configuration changes to syslog by running the isi audit settings global modify
command with the --config-syslog-enabled option. This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.

Related tasks
Forward configuration changes to syslog

Forward configuration changes to syslog

You can enable or disable forwarding of configuration changes on the PowerScale cluster to syslog. The forwarded configuration
changes are saved to the remote syslog servers. Events are no longer saved locally. This procedure is available only through the
command-line interface.
Forwarding is not enabled by default when configuration change auditing is enabled. To enable forwarding of configuration
changes to syslog, you must first enable system configuration auditing on the cluster.
1. Open an SSH connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi audit settings global modify command with the --config-syslog-enabled option to enable
or disable forwarding of configuration changes.
The following command enables forwarding of configuration changes to syslog:

isi audit settings global modify --config-syslog-enabled=yes \

--config-syslog-servers=<ip>:<port>

The following command disables forwarding of configuration changes to syslog:

isi audit settings global modify --config-syslog-enabled=no

Related concepts
Syslog
Syslog forwarding and TLS

222 Auditing
Enable protocol access auditing
You can audit SMB, NFS, and HDFS protocol access on a per-access zone basis and optionally forward the generated events to
the Common Event Enabler (CEE) for export to third-party products.
NOTE: Because each audited event consumes system resources, we recommend that you only configure zones for events
that are needed by your auditing application. In addition, we recommend that you install and configure third-party auditing
applications before you enable the OneFS auditing feature. Otherwise, the large backlog performed by this feature may
cause results to not be updated for a considerable amount of time.
1. Click Cluster Management > Auditing.
2. In the Settings area, select the Enable Protocol Access Auditing checkbox.
3. In the Audited Zones area, click Add Zones.
4. In the Select Access Zones dialog box, select the check box for one or more access zones, and then click Add Zones.
5. Optional: In the Event Forwarding area, specify one or more CEE servers to forward logged events to.
a. In the CEE Server URIs field, type the URI of each CEE server in the CEE server pool.
The OneFS CEE export service uses round-robin load balancing when exporting events to multiple CEE servers. Valid
URIs start with http:// and include the port number and path to the CEE server if necessary—for example, http://
[Link]/cee.
b. In the Storage Cluster Name field, specify the name of the storage cluster to use when forwarding protocol events.
This name value is typically the SmartConnect zone name, but in cases where SmartConnect is not implemented, the
value must match the hostname of the cluster as the third-party application recognizes it. If the field is left blank,
events from each node are filled with the node name (clustername + lnn). This setting is required only if needed by your
third-party audit application.
NOTE: Although this step is optional, be aware that a backlog of events will accumulate regardless of whether CEE
servers have been configured. When configured, CEE forwarding begins with the oldest events in the backlog and
moves toward newest events in a first-in-first-out sequence.

6. Click Save Changes.

The following protocol events are collected for audited access zones by default: create, close, delete, rename, and
set_security. You can modify the set of events that are audited in an access zone by running the isi audit settings
modify command in the command-line interface. Because each audited event consumes system resources, it is recommended
that you only configure zones for events that are needed by your auditing application.
You can modify the types of protocol access events to be audited by running the isi audit settings modify command.
You can also enable forwarding of protocol access events to syslog by running the isi audit settings modify command
with the --syslog-forwarding-enabled option. These procedures are available only through the command-line interface.

Related concepts
Protocol audit events

Related tasks
Forward protocol access events to syslog

Forward protocol access events to syslog

You can enable or disable forwarding of audited protocol access events to syslog in each access zone. Forwarding is not enabled
by default when protocol access auditing is enabled. This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
To enable forwarding of protocol access events in an access zone, you must first enable protocol access auditing in the access
zone.
The --audit-success and --audit-failure options define the event types that are audited, and the --syslog-
audit-events option defines the event types that are forwarded to the remote syslog servers. Only the audited event types
are eligible for forwarding to the remote syslog server.
1. Open an SSH connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi audit settings modify command with the --syslog-forwarding-enabled option to enable or
disable audit syslog.

Auditing 223
 The following command enables forwarding of the audited protocol access events in the zone3 access zone and specifies
that the only event types forwarded are close, create, and delete events:

isi audit settings modify --syslog-forwarding-enabled=yes \

--config-syslog-servers=<ip>:<port> --syslog-audit-events=close,create,delete --
zone=zone3

The following command disables forwarding of audited protocol access events from the zone3 access zone:

isi audit settings modify --syslog-forwarding-enabled=no --zone=zone3

Related concepts
Syslog
Syslog forwarding and TLS

Configure protocol audited zones

Only the protocol audit events within an audited zone are captured and sent to the CEE server. Therefore, you must configure a
protocol audited zone to send audit events.
1. Open a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi audit settings global modify command with the --audited-zones option to configure protocol
audited zones.
The following command configures HomeDirectory and Misc as the protocol audited zones:

isi audit settings global modify --audited-zones=HomeDirectory,Misc

Configure protocol event filters

You can filter the types of protocol access events to be audited in an access zone. You can create filters for successful events
and failed events. The following protocol events are collected for audited access zones by default: create, delete, rename, close,
and set_security. This procedure is available only through the command-line interface.
To create protocol event filters, you should first enable protocol access auditing in the access zone.
1. Open a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi audit settings modify command
The following command creates a filter that audits the failure of create, close, and delete events in the zone3 access zone:

isi audit settings modify --audit-failure=create,close,delete --zone=zone3

The following command creates a filter that audits the success of create, close, and delete events in the zone5 access zone:

isi audit settings modify --audit-success=create,close,delete --zone=zone5

Related references
Supported event types for protocol auditing

Enable system auditing and forwarding

The syslogd collected audit events are always enabled and cannot be disabled. The OpenBSM auditing is disabled by default
and you can enable or disable it. Both types of system auditing are available for syslog forwarding.
1. Open an SSH connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Enable system auditing by OpenBSM.

isi audit settings global modify --system-auditing-enabled=yes

224 Auditing
3. Optionally enable syslog forwarding for system events (both the OpenBSM and syslogd collected events).

isi audit settings global modify --system-syslog-enabled=yes

To stop forwarding of events logged by OpenBSM, use the following command:

isi audit settings global modify --system-syslog-enabled=no

Import certificate for TLS syslog forwarding

Import client-side certificates for two-way authentication for encrypted syslog forwarding.
TLS syslog forwarding uses the embedded OneFS CA root certificates for server-side authentication during the TLS handshake.
For two-way authentication, you must import the client certificates into OneFS. If the customer uses a common CA for issuing
TLS certificates, OneFS may already trust the root certificate for the client certificates. Otherwise, import an accompanying
new root certificate in addition to the client certificate and key files. The following steps show how to import first the root
certificate and then the certificate and key files.
1. Copy the root certificate in a known location in /ifs.
2. Import this root certificate into the OneFS root certificate database using the following command.

isi certificate authority import /ifs/root_cert.pem

3. Verify that the root certificate was successfully imported.

4. For security, delete the root certificate from /ifs after it is successfully imported.
5. Copy the certificate and the certificate key files into the OneFS file system. The files can be in PEM, DER, or PCKS#12
format.
6. Import the certificates and key file into the OneFS certificate store.

isi audit certificates syslog import /ifs/certs/[Link] /ifs/certs/certkey/

[Link] \
--name config-change-audits

The system assigns an id to the certificate. It stores the certificate and the key file in the OneFS certificate store.
7. View the certificate information.

isi audit certificates syslog view config-change-audits

The system assigned ID, status, and expiration date are displayed.

8. For security reasons, delete the key file from the OneFS file system. You may also delete the certificate file.

Set the audit hostname

You can optionally set the audit hostname for some of the third-party auditing applications that require a unified hostname. If
you do not set a hostname for these applications, each node in a PowerScale cluster sends its hostname as the server name to
the CEE server. Otherwise, the configured audit hostname is used as the global server name.
1. Open a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi audit settings global modify command with the --hostname option to set the audit hostname.
The following command sets mycluster as the audit hostname:

isi audit settings global modify --hostname=mycluster

Auditing 225
View audit settings
You can view current audit settings.
1. Open a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. View all audit settings.

isi audit settings global view

The screen shows the current settings for configuration auditing, protocol auditing, and system auditing. It includes the
settings for forwarding audit logs to remote syslog servers.

isi audit settings global view

Protocol Auditing Enabled: Yes
Audited Zones: System, zoneA
CEE Server URIs: [Link]
Hostname: mycluster
Config Auditing Enabled: Yes
Config Syslog Enabled: Yes
Config Syslog Servers: -
Config Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Config Syslog Certificate ID:
Protocol Syslog Servers: -
Protocol Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Protocol Syslog Certificate ID:
System Syslog Enabled: No
System Syslog Servers: -
System Syslog TLS Enabled: No
System Syslog Certificate ID:
Auto Purging Enabled: No
Retention Period: 180
System Auditing Enabled: No

Automatic deletion
The audit logs are deleted on its own from the command-line interface.
The automatic deletion runs periodically (once every hour) . It iterates over the audit directories and compares the date of the
file to the current date to determine if it should be deleted. If the file passes the retention period, it gets deleted. The default
retention period value is 180 days. The automatic deletion function is disabled by default. If you enable automatic purging,
deletion is triggered immediately. When automatic purging is enabled and you modify the retention period, deletion occurs
immediately. You can check the current audit settings using the isi audit settings global view command.

Enable automatic purging

You can enable automatic purging of audit log files.
1. Optional: To enable automatic purging, run the following command:

isi audit settings global modify --auto-purging-enabled=yes

The following message appears:

You are enabling the automatic log purging.

Automatic log purging will run in background to delete audit log files.
Please check the retention period before enabling automatic log purging.
Are you sure you want to do this?? (yes/[no])

2. Enter "yes."
The automatic purging feature is enabled.
3. You can check if the automatic purging feature is enabled using the isi audit settings global view command.

isi audit settings global view

Protocol Auditing Enabled: No

226 Auditing
 Audited Zones: -
CEE Server URIs: -
Hostname:
Config Auditing Enabled: No
Config Syslog Enabled: No
Config Syslog Servers: -
Config Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Config Syslog Certificate ID:
Protocol Syslog Servers: -
Protocol Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Protocol Syslog Certificate ID:
System Syslog Enabled: No
System Syslog Servers: -
System Syslog TLS Enabled: No
System Syslog Certificate ID:
Auto Purging Enabled: No
Retention Period: 180
System Auditing Enabled: No

Disable automatic purging

You can disable automatic purging of audit log files.
1. Optional: To disable automatic purging, run the following command:

isi audit settings global modify --auto-purging-enabled=no

The automatic purging feature is disabled.

2. You can check if the automatic purging feature is disabled using the isi audit settings global view command.

Protocol Auditing Enabled: No

Audited Zones: -
CEE Server URIs: -
Hostname:
Config Auditing Enabled: No
Config Syslog Enabled: No
Config Syslog Servers: -
Config Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Config Syslog Certificate ID:
Protocol Syslog Servers: -
Protocol Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Protocol Syslog Certificate ID:
System Syslog Enabled: No
System Syslog Servers: -
System Syslog TLS Enabled: No
System Syslog Certificate ID:
Auto Purging Enabled: No
Retention Period: 180
System Auditing Enabled: No

Modify retention period

At any time, you can modify the retention period value.
1. Optional: To modify the retention period value, run the following command:

isi audit settings global modify --retention-period=50

The retention period is now changed to 50 days.

NOTE: The default retention value is 180 days.

Auditing 227
2. You can check if the retention period has changed from 180 to 50 days using the isi audit settings global view
command.

isi audit settings global view

Protocol Auditing Enabled: No
Audited Zones: -
CEE Server URIs: -
Hostname:
Config Auditing Enabled: No
Config Syslog Enabled: No
Config Syslog Servers: -
Config Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Config Syslog Certificate ID:
Protocol Syslog Servers: -
Protocol Syslog TLS Enabled: No
Protocol Syslog Certificate ID:
System Syslog Enabled: No
System Syslog Servers: -
System Syslog TLS Enabled: No
System Syslog Certificate ID:
Auto Purging Enabled: No
Retention Period: 180
System Auditing Enabled: No

Manual deletion
You can delete audit logs manually from the command-line interface.
By using this method, you can delete audit logs before a certain day forcibly. There is no way to delete audit logs for a time
span. The deletion deletes the audit logs of all the nodes present on the cluster. The deletion runs in background, and you can
only run one instance of manual deletion at one time. If a manual deletion task is running, any other deletion request will be
rejected.

Delete audit logs manually

You can delete the audit logs manually for a specified time period.
1. Optional: To delete audit logs manually, run the isi audit logs delete --before=<date> command:

isi audit logs delete --before=2019-11-1

The following message appears:

You are going to delete the audit logs before 2019-11-01.

Are you sure you want to do this?? (yes/[no]):

2. Enter "yes."
The deletion request is triggered, and the following message appears:

The purging request has been triggered.

`isi audit logs check` can be used to monitor the process.

Check status of manual deletion

You can check the status of the manual deletion.
Optional: To check if the audit logs for the specified time period is deleted, run the isi audit logs check command.
The deletion is successful, and the following message appears:

Purging Status:
Using Before Value: 2019-11-01
Currently Manual Purging Status: COMPLETED

228 Auditing
 NOTE: If there are some audit logs that cannot be deleted, the output displays the reason.

Integrating with the Common Event Enabler

OneFS integration with the Common Event Enabler (CEE) enables third-party auditing applications to collect and analyze
protocol auditing logs.
OneFS supports the Common Event Publishing Agent (CEPA) component of CEE for Windows. For integration with OneFS, you
must install and configure CEE for Windows on a supported Windows client.
NOTE: We recommend that you install and configure third-party auditing applications before you enable the OneFS auditing
feature. Otherwise, the large backlog performed by this feature may cause results to not be up-to-date for a considerable
time.

Related references
Supported audit tools

Install CEE for Windows

To integrate CEE with OneFS, you must first install CEE on a computer that is running the Windows operating system.
Be prepared to extract files from the .iso file, as described in the following steps. If you are not familiar with the process,
consider choosing one of the following methods:
1. Install WinRAR or another suitable archival program that can open .iso files as an archive, and copy the files.
2. Burn the image to a CD-ROM, and then copy the files.
3. Install SlySoft Virtual CloneDrive, which allows you to mount an ISO image as a drive that you can copy files from.

NOTE: You should install a minimum of two servers. We recommend that you install CEE 6.6.0 or later.

1. Download the CEE framework software from Online Support:

a. Go to Online Support.
b. In the search field, type Common Event Enabler for Windows, and then click the Search icon.
c. Click Common Event Enabler <Version> for Windows, where <Version> is 6.2 or later, and then follow the
instructions to open or save the .iso file.
2. From the .iso file, extract the 32-bit or 64-bit EMC_CEE_Pack executable file that you need.
After the extraction completes, the CEE installation wizard opens.
3. Click Next to proceed to the License Agreement page.
4. Select the I accept... option to accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
5. On the Customer Information page, type your user name and organization, select your installation preference, and then
click Next.
6. On the Setup Type page, select Complete, and then click Next.
7. Click Install to begin the installation.
The progress of the installation is displayed. When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed page
appears.
8. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
9. Restart the system.

Related concepts
Integrating with the Common Event Enabler

Configure CEE for Windows

After you install CEE for Windows on a client system, you must configure additional settings through the Windows Registry
Editor ([Link]).
1. Open the Windows Registry Editor.

Auditing 229
2. Configure the following registry keys, if supported by your audit application:

Table 82. Window Registry Editor Settings

Setting Registry location Key Value
CEE HTTP [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\CEE\Configuration] HttpPort 12228
listens port
Enable audit [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\CEE\CEPP\Audit\Co Enabled 1
remote nfiguration]
endpoints
Audit remote [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\CEE\CEPP\Audit\Co EndPoint <EndPoint>
endpoints nfiguration]

NOTE:
● The HttpPort value must match the port in the CEE URIs that you specify during OneFS protocol audit configuration.
● The EndPoint value must be in the format <EndPoint_Name>@<IP_Address>. You can specify multiple endpoints by
separating each value with a semicolon (;).
● The OneFS CEE export service uses round-robin load balancing when exporting events to multiple CEE servers. Valid
URIs start with http:// and include the port number and path to the CEE server if necessary—for example, http://
[Link]/cee.

The following key specifies a single remote endpoint:

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\CEE\CEPP\Audit\Configuration] EndPoint =
AuditApplication@[Link]
The following key specifies multiple remote endpoints:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\CEE\CEPP\Audit\Configuration] EndPoint =
AuditApplication@[Link];AuditApplication@[Link]
3. Close the Windows Registry Editor.

Related concepts
Integrating with the Common Event Enabler

Configure CEE servers to deliver protocol audit events

You can configure CEE servers with OneFS to deliver protocol audit events by adding the URI of each server to the OneFS
configuration.
● Run the isi audit settings global modify command with the --cee-server-uris option to add the URIs of
the CEE servers to the OneFS configuration.
The following command adds the URIs of three CEE servers to the OneFS configuration:

isi audit settings global modify --cee-server-uris=[Link]

vee,[Link]

Tracking the delivery of protocol audit events

The processes of capturing protocol audit events and their delivery to the CEE server do not happen simultaneously. Therefore,
even when no CEE servers are available, protocol audit events are still captured and stored for delivery to the CEE server at a
later time.
You can view the time of the last captured protocol audit event and the event time of the last event that was sent to the CEE
server. You can also move the log position of the CEE forwarder to a desired time.

230 Auditing
View the time stamps of delivery of events to the CEE server and
syslog
You can view the time stamps of delivery of events to the CEE server and syslog on the node on which you are running the isi
audit progress view command.
This setting is available only through the command-line interface.
● Run the isi audit progress view command to view the time stamps of delivery of events to the CEE server and
syslog on the node on which you are running the command.
A sample output of the isi audit progress view is shown:

Protocol Audit Log Time: Tue Mar 29 13:32:38 2016

Protocol Audit Cee Time: Tue Mar 29 13:32:38 2016
Protocol Audit Syslog Time: Fri Mar 25 17:00:28 2016

You can run the isi audit progress view command with the --lnn option to view the time stamps of delivery of
the audit events on a node specified through its logical node number.
The following command displays the progress of delivery of the audit events on a node with logical node number 2:

isi audit progress view --lnn=2

The output appears as shown:

Protocol Audit Log Time: Tue Mar 29 13:32:38 2016

Protocol Audit Cee Time: Tue Mar 29 13:32:38 2016
Protocol Audit Syslog Time: Fri Mar 25 17:00:28 2016

Move the log position of the CEE forwarder

You can manually move the log position of the CEE forwarder if the event time in the audit log indicates a lag in comparison to
the current time. This action globally moves the event time in all of the logs of the CEE forwarder within a PowerScale cluster to
the closest time.
NOTE: The events that are skipped will not be forwarded to the CEE server even though they might still be available on the
cluster.
● Run the isi audit settings global modify command with the --cee-log-time option to move the log position
of the CEE forwarder.
The following command moves the log position of the CEE forwarder manually:

isi audit settings global modify --cee-log-time='protocol@2016-01-27 01:03:02'

View the rate of delivery of protocol audit events to the CEE server
You can view the rate of delivery of protocol audit events to the CEE server.
● Run the isi statistics query command to view the current rate of delivery of the protocol audit events to the CEE
server on a node.
The following command displays the current rate of delivery of the protocol audit events to the CEE server:

isi statistics query current list --keys=[Link]

The output appears as shown:

Node [Link]
---------------------------------
1 3904.600000
---------------------------------
Total: 1

Auditing 231
 15
Snapshots
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Snapshots overview
• Data protection with SnapshotIQ
• Snapshot disk-space usage
• Snapshot schedules
• Snapshot aliases
• File and directory restoration
• Best practices for creating snapshots
• Best practices for creating snapshot schedules
• File clones
• Snapshot locks
• Snapshot reserve
• Writable snapshots
• SnapshotIQ license functionality
• Creating snapshots with SnapshotIQ
• Managing snapshots
• Restoring snapshot data
• Managing snapshot schedules
• Managing snapshot aliases
• Managing with snapshot locks
• Configure SnapshotIQ settings
• Set the snapshot reserve
• Managing changelists

Snapshots overview
A OneFS snapshot is a logical pointer to data that is stored on a cluster at a specific point in time.
A snapshot references a directory on a cluster, including all data stored in the directory and its subdirectories. If the data
referenced by a snapshot is modified, the snapshot stores a physical copy of the data that was modified. Snapshots are created
according to user specifications or by OneFS, which generates them automatically to facilitate system operations. You can also
create writable copies of snapshots, useful for testing data recovery scenarios.
To create and manage snapshots, you must activate a SnapshotIQ license on the cluster. Some applications must generate
snapshots to function but do not require you to activate a SnapshotIQ license. By default, these snapshots are automatically
deleted when OneFS no longer needs them. However, if you activate a SnapshotIQ license, you can retain these snapshots. You
can view snapshots that other modules generate without activating a SnapshotIQ license.
You can identify and locate snapshots by name or ID. Users specify snapshot names, then the snapshot is assigned to the virtual
directory that contains the snapshot. A snapshot ID is a numerical identifier that OneFS automatically assigns to a snapshot.

Data protection with SnapshotIQ

You can create snapshots to protect data with the SnapShotIQ software module. Snapshots protect data against accidental
deletion and modification by enabling you to restore deleted and modified files. SnapShotIQ writable snapshots allow you to
create modifiable copies of an entire dataset, which enables data recovery testing. To use SnapshotIQ, you must activate a
SnapshotIQ license on the cluster.

232 Snapshots
Snapshots are less costly than backing up your data on a separate physical storage device in terms of both time and storage
consumption. The time required to move data to another physical device depends on the amount of data being moved.
Snapshots are created almost instantaneously regardless of the amount of data that the snapshot references. Because
snapshots are available locally, users can often restore their data without requiring assistance from a system administrator.
Snapshots require less space than a remote backup because unaltered data is referenced rather than re-created.
Snapshots do not protect against hardware or file system issues. Snapshots reference data that is stored on a cluster, so if the
data on the cluster becomes unavailable, the snapshots are also unavailable. It is recommended that you back up your data to
separate physical devices in addition to creating snapshots.

Snapshot disk-space usage

The amount of disk space that a snapshot consumes depends on both the amount of data stored by the snapshot and the
amount of data the snapshot references from other snapshots.
Immediately after OneFScreates a snapshot, the snapshot consumes a negligible amount of disk space. The snapshot does not
consume additional disk space unless the data referenced by the snapshot is modified. If the data that a snapshot references
is modified, the snapshot stores read-only copies of the original data. A snapshot consumes only the space that is necessary to
restore the contents of a directory to the state it was in when the snapshot was taken.
To reduce disk-space usage, snapshots that reference the same directory reference each other, with older snapshots
referencing newer snapshots. If a file is deleted, and several snapshots reference the file, a single snapshot stores a copy
of the file, and the other snapshots reference the file from the snapshot that stored the copy. The reported size of a snapshot
reflects only the amount of data stored by the snapshot and does not include the amount of data referenced by the snapshot.
Because snapshots do not consume a set amount of storage space, there is no available-space requirement for creating a
snapshot. The size of a snapshot grows according to how the data referenced by the snapshot is modified. A cluster cannot
contain more than 20,000 snapshots.

Snapshot schedules
You can automatically generate snapshots according to a snapshot schedule.
With snapshot schedules, you can periodically generate snapshots of a directory without having to manually create a snapshot
every time. You can also assign an expiration period that determines when SnapshotIQ deletes each automatically generated
snapshot.

Related concepts
Managing snapshot schedules
Best practices for creating snapshot schedules

Related tasks
Create a snapshot schedule

Snapshot aliases
A snapshot alias is a logical pointer to a snapshot. If you specify an alias for a snapshot schedule, the alias will always point to
the most recent snapshot generated by that schedule. Assigning a snapshot alias allows you to quickly identify and access the
most recent snapshot generated according to a snapshot schedule.
If you allow clients to access snapshots through an alias, you can reassign the alias to redirect clients to other snapshots. In
addition to assigning snapshot aliases to snapshots, you can also assign snapshot aliases to the live version of the file system.
This can be useful if clients are accessing snapshots through a snapshot alias, and you want to redirect the clients to the live
version of the file system.

Snapshots 233
File and directory restoration
You can restore the files and directories that are referenced by a snapshot alias. You can copy the data from the snapshot,
clone a file from the snapshot, or revert the entire snapshot.
Copying a file from a snapshot duplicates the file, which roughly doubles the amount of storage space consumed. Even if you
delete the original file from the nonsnapshot directory, the copy of the file remains in the snapshot.
Cloning a file from a snapshot also duplicates the file. However, a clone does not consume additional space on the cluster unless
the clone or cloned file is modified.
Reverting a snapshot replaces the contents of a directory with the data that is stored in the snapshot. Before a snapshot is
reverted, SnapshotIQ creates a snapshot of the directory that is being replaced, which enables you to undo the snapshot revert
later. Reverting a snapshot can be useful if you want to undo many changes that you made to files and directories. If new files
or directories have been created in a directory since a snapshot of the directory was created, those files and directories are
deleted when the snapshot is reverted.
NOTE: If you move a directory, you cannot revert snapshots of the directory that were taken before the directory was
moved. Deleting and then re-creating a directory has the same effect as a move. You cannot revert snapshots of a directory
that were taken before the directory was deleted and then re-created.

Best practices for creating snapshots

Consider the following snapshot best practices when working with a large number of snapshots.
It is recommended that you do not create more than 1,000 snapshots of a single directory to avoid performance degradation. If
you create a snapshot of a root directory, that snapshot counts towards the total number of snapshots for any subdirectories
of the root directory. For example, if you create 500 snapshots of /ifs/data and 500 snapshots of /ifs/data/media, you
have created 1,000 snapshots of /ifs/data/media. Avoid creating snapshots of directories that are already referenced by
other snapshots.
It is recommended that you do not create more than 1,000 hard links per file in a snapshot to avoid performance degradation.
Always attempt to keep directory paths as shallow as possible. The deeper the depth of directories referenced by snapshots,
the greater the performance degradation.
Creating snapshots of directories higher on a directory tree will increase the amount of time it takes to modify the data
referenced by the snapshot and require more cluster resources to manage the snapshot and the directory. However, creating
snapshots of directories lower on directories trees will require more snapshot schedules, which can be difficult to manage. It is
recommended that you do not create snapshots of /ifs or /ifs/data.
You can create up to 20,000 snapshots on a cluster at a time. If your workflow requires a large number of snapshots on a
consistent basis, you might find that managing snapshots through the OneFS command-line interface is preferable to managing
snapshots through the OneFS web administration Interface. In the CLI, you can apply a wide variety of sorting and filtering
options and redirect lists into text files.
Mark snapshots for deletion when they are no longer needed, and ensure that the SnapshotDelete system job is enabled.
Disabling the SnapshotDelete job prevents unused disk space from being recaptured and can also cause performance
degradation over time.
If the system clock is set to a time zone other than Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), SnapShotIQ modifies snapshot duration
periods to match Daylight Savings Time (DST). Upon entering DST, snapshot durations are increased by an hour to adhere to
DST; when exiting DST, snapshot durations are decreased by an hour to adhere to standard time.

Best practices for creating snapshot schedules

Snapshot schedule configurations are categorized by how they delete snapshots: ordered deletions and unordered deletions.
An ordered deletion is the deletion of the oldest snapshot of a directory. An unordered deletion is the deletion of a snapshot that
is not the oldest snapshot of a directory. Unordered deletions take longer to complete and consume more cluster resources than
ordered deletions. However, unordered deletions can save space by retaining a smaller total number of snapshots.
The benefits of unordered deletions compared with ordered deletions depend on how often the data that is referenced by the
snapshots is modified. If the data is modified frequently, unordered deletions save space. However, if data remains unmodified,
unordered deletions will most likely not save space, and it is recommended that you perform ordered deletions to free cluster
resources.

234 Snapshots
To implement ordered deletions, assign the same duration period for all snapshots of a directory. The snapshots are created by
one or multiple snapshot schedules. Always ensure that no more than 1000 snapshots of a directory are created.
To implement unordered snapshot deletions, create several snapshot schedules for a single directory, and then assign different
snapshot duration periods for each schedule. Ensure that all snapshots are created simultaneously when possible.

NOTE: Snapshot schedules with a frequency of "Every Minute" are not recommended and are to be avoided.

NOTE: It is recommended that you do not schedule multiple Snapshot jobs simultaneously, as it might cause performance
issues on the cluster. For more information, see KB article: 000158788
The following table describes snapshot schedules that follow snapshot best practices:

Table 83. Snapshot Schedule Configurations

Deletion type Snapshot frequency Snapshot time Snapshot expiration Max snapshots retained
Ordered Every hour Beginning at 12:00 AM 1 month 720
deletion (for Ending at 11:59 AM
mostly static
data)
Unordered Every other hour Beginning at 12:00 AM 1 day 27
deletion (for Ending at 11:59 PM
frequently
modified data) Every day At 12:00 AM 1 week
Every week Saturday at 12:00 AM 1 month
Every month The first Saturday of the 3 months
month at 12:00 AM

Related concepts
Snapshot schedules

File clones
SnapshotIQ enables you to create file clones that share blocks with existing files in order to save space on the cluster. A file
clone usually consumes less space and takes less time to create than a file copy. Although you can clone files from snapshots,
clones are primarily used internally by OneFS.
The blocks that are shared between a clone and cloned file are contained in a hidden file called a shadow store. Immediately
after a clone is created, all data originally contained in the cloned file is transferred to a shadow store. Because both files
reference all blocks from the shadow store, the two files consume no more space than the original file; the clone does not take
up any additional space on the cluster. However, if the cloned file or clone is modified, the file and clone will share only blocks
that are common to both of them, and the modified, unshared blocks will occupy additional space on the cluster.
Over time, the shared blocks contained in the shadow store might become useless if neither the file nor clone references the
blocks. The cluster routinely deletes blocks that are no longer needed. You can force the cluster to delete unused blocks at any
time by running the ShadowStoreDelete job.
Clones cannot contain alternate data streams (ADS). If you clone a file that contains alternate data streams, the clone will not
contain the alternate data streams.

Related tasks
Clone a file from a snapshot

Snapshots 235
Shadow-store considerations
Shadow stores are hidden files that are referenced by cloned and deduplicated files. Files that reference shadow stores behave
differently than other files.
● Reading shadow-store references might be slower than reading data directly. Reading noncached shadow-store references
is slower than reading noncached data. Reading cached shadow-store references takes no more time than reading cached
data.
● When files that reference shadow stores are replicated to another PowerScale cluster or backed up to a Network Data
Management Protocol (NDMP) backup device, the shadow stores are not transferred to the target PowerScale cluster or
backup device. The files are transferred as if they contained the data that they reference from shadow stores. On the target
PowerScale cluster or backup device, the files consume the same amount of space as if they had not referenced shadow
stores.
● When OneFS creates a shadow store, OneFS assigns the shadow store to a storage pool of a file that references the
shadow store. If you delete the storage pool that a shadow store resides on, the shadow store is moved to a pool that
contains another file that references the shadow store.
● OneFS does not delete a shadow-store block immediately after the last reference to the block is deleted. Instead, OneFS
waits until the ShadowStoreDelete job is run to delete the unreferenced block. If many unreferenced blocks exist on the
cluster, OneFS might report a negative deduplication savings until the ShadowStoreDelete job is run.
● Shadow stores are protected at least as much as the most protected file that references it. For example, if one file that
references a shadow store resides in a storage pool with +2 protection and another file that references the shadow store
resides in a storage pool with +3 protection, the shadow store is protected at +3.
● Quotas account for files that reference shadow stores as if the files contained the data that is referenced from shadow
stores. From the perspective of a quota, shadow-store references do not exist. However, if a quota includes data protection
overhead, the quota does not account for the data protection overhead of shadow stores.

Snapshot locks
A snapshot lock prevents a snapshot from being deleted. If a snapshot has one or more locks that are applied to it, the snapshot
cannot be deleted: it is a locked snapshot. If the duration period of a locked snapshot expires, OneFS does not delete the
snapshot until all locks on the snapshot have been deleted.
OneFS applies snapshot locks to ensure that snapshots that OneFS applications generate are not deleted prematurely. You
can apply snapshot locks to snapshots that you create either manually or with a snapshot or SyncIQ schedule. However, avoid
creating or removing locks on system-created snapshots.
The maximum number of locks that can be applied to a single snapshot is 16. In general, you should not apply multiple locks to
the same snapshot. If there is a need for multiple locks on the same snapshot, care should be taken to ensure that the maximum
is not exceeded to avoid snapshot creation failure.

Related concepts
Managing with snapshot locks

Related tasks
Create a snapshot lock

Snapshot reserve
The snapshot reserve enables you to set aside a minimum percentage of the cluster storage capacity specifically for snapshots.
If specified, all other OneFS operations are unable to access the percentage of cluster capacity that is reserved for snapshots.
NOTE: The snapshot reserve does not limit the amount of space that snapshots can consume on the cluster. Snapshots
can consume a greater percentage of storage capacity specified by the snapshot reserve. It is recommended that you do
not specify a snapshot reserve.

Related tasks
Set the snapshot reserve

236 Snapshots
Writable snapshots
Writable snapshots enable you to create space-efficient, modifiable copies of a source snapshot. The source snapshot remains
read-only. You can use writable snapshots for tasks such as testing data recovery scenarios and quality assurance. You create
and manage writable snapshots using the OneFS CLI or API.
Using writable snapshots, you can create and manage a modifiable copy of an entire dataset from a source snapshot. The source
snapshot and its writable copy must reside in a directory in the /ifs file system.
You can access writable snapshots with regular file system commands such as ls and find. The writable snapshots feature
creates a directory quota on the root of the writable snapshot that you can use to monitor its space usage.

NOTE: Writable snapshots preserve only the hard links within the domain of the source snapshot.

Writable snapshots populate snapshot metadata on first access. Accessing large directories for the first time with operations
such as discovery (find), unlinking, and renaming can have slow response times. OneFS reads unmodified snapshot data from
the source snapshot, which can also affect response times.
NOTE:

The following restrictions apply to writable snapshots:

● Writable snapshots cannot be cloud-based.
● You cannot use compression, deduplication, inline data compression, file clones, or use small file packing with writable
snapshots.
● You cannot make a snapshot of a writable snapshot.
● Writable snapshots do not support Write Once - Read Many (WORM).
● Do not use SyncIQ snapshots or snapshots named SIQ-* as source snapshots.
● You cannot create writable snapshots in a BAM domain.
● You cannot create hard links to files within the domain of the writable snapshot from outside the writable snapshot
domain.
● You cannot rename files that reside in the writable snapshot domain from outside that writable snapshot domain.

SnapshotIQ license functionality

You can create snapshots only if you activate a SnapshotIQ license on a cluster. However, you can view snapshots and snapshot
locks that are created for internal use by OneFS without activating a SnapshotIQ license.
The following table describes what snapshot functionality is available depending on whether the SnapshotIQ license is active:

Table 84. Snapshot Functionality

Functionality Inactive Active
Create snapshots and snapshot No Yes
schedules
Configure SnapshotIQ settings No Yes
View snapshot schedules Yes Yes
Delete snapshots Yes Yes
Access snapshot data Yes Yes
View snapshots Yes Yes
Create writable snapshots No Yes

If a SnapshotIQ license becomes inactive, you will no longer be able to create new snapshots, all snapshot schedules are
disabled, and you cannot modify snapshots or snapshot settings. However, you will still be able to delete snapshots and access
data that is contained in snapshots.

Snapshots 237
Creating snapshots with SnapshotIQ
To create snapshots, you must configure the SnapshotIQ license on the cluster. You can create snapshots either by creating a
snapshot schedule or by manually generating an individual snapshot.
Manual snapshots are useful if you want to create a snapshot immediately, or at a time that is not specified in a snapshot
schedule. For example, suppose that you are planning changes to your file system, but are unsure of the consequences. You can
capture the current state of the file system in a snapshot before you make the changes.
Before creating snapshots, consider that reverting a snapshot requires that a SnapRevert domain exists for the directory that
is being reverted. If you intend to revert snapshots for a directory, it is recommended that you create SnapRevert domains for
those directories while the directories are empty. Creating a domain for a directory that contains less data takes less time.

Create a SnapRevert domain

Before you can revert a snapshot that contains a directory, you must create a SnapRevert domain for the directory. Create
SnapRevert domains for a directory while the directory is empty.
The root path of the SnapRevert domain must be the same root path of the snapshot. For example, a domain with a
root path of /ifs/data/media cannot be used to revert a snapshot with a root path of /ifs/data/media/archive.
To revert /ifs/data/media/archive, you must create a SnapRevert domain with a root path of /ifs/data/media/
archive.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types area, in the DomainMark row, from the Actions column, select Start Job.
3. In the Domain Root Path field, type the path of a snapshot root directory.
4. From the Type of domain list, select SnapRevert.
5. Ensure that the Delete this domain check box is cleared.
6. Click Start Job.

Create a snapshot schedule

You can create a snapshot schedule to continuously generate snapshots of directories.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshot Schedules.
2. Click Create a Schedule.
The Create a Schedule dialog box appears.
3. Optional: In the Schedule Name field, type a name for the snapshot schedule.
4. Optional: In the Naming pattern for Generated Snapshots field, type a naming pattern. Each snapshot that is generated
according to this schedule is assigned a name that is based on the pattern.
For example, the following naming pattern is valid:

WeeklyBackup_%m-%d-%Y_%H:%M

The example produces names similar to the following:

WeeklyBackup_07-13-2014_14:21

5. In the Path field, specify the directory that you want to include in snapshots that are generated according to this schedule.
6. From the Schedule list, select how often you want to generate snapshots according to the schedule.

Generate snapshots every day, or skip generating snapshots for a Select Daily, and specify how often you want to
specified number of days. generate snapshots.
Generate snapshots on specific days of the week, and optionally Select Weekly, and specify how often you want to
skip generating snapshots for a specified number of weeks. generate snapshots.
Generate snapshots on specific days of the month, and optionally Select Monthly, and specify how often you want to
skip generating snapshots for a specified number of months. generate snapshots.

238 Snapshots
 Generate snapshots on specific days of the year. Select Yearly, and specify how often you want to
generate snapshots.

NOTE: A snapshot schedule cannot span multiple days. For example, you cannot specify to begin generating snapshots
at 5:00 PM Monday and end at 5:00 AM Tuesday. To continuously generate snapshots for a period greater than a
day, you must create two snapshot schedules. For example, to generate snapshots from 5:00 PM Monday to 5:00 AM
Tuesday, create one schedule that generates snapshots from 5:00 PM to 11:59 PM on Monday, and another schedule
that generates snapshots from 12:00 AM to 5:00 AM on Tuesday.

7. Optional: To assign an alternative name to the most recent snapshot that is generated by the schedule, specify a snapshot
alias.
a. Next to Create an Alias, click Yes.
b. To modify the default snapshot alias name, in the Alias Name field, type an alternative name for the snapshot.
8. Optional: To specify a length of time that snapshots that are generated according to the schedule are kept before they are
deleted by OneFS, specify an expiration period.
a. Next to Snapshot Expiration, select Snapshots expire.
b. Next to Snapshots expire, specify how long you want to retain the snapshots that are generated according to the
schedule.
9. Click Create Schedule.

Related concepts
Best practices for creating snapshot schedules

Related references
Snapshot naming patterns

Create a snapshot
You can create a snapshot of a directory.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
2. Click Create a Snapshot.
The Create a Snapshot dialog box appears.
3. Optional: In the Snapshot Name field, type a name for the snapshot.
4. In the Path field, specify the directory that you want the snapshot to contain.
5. Optional: To create an alternative name for the snapshot, select Create a snapshot alias, and then type the alias name.
6. Optional: To assign a time when OneFS will automatically delete the snapshot, specify an expiration period.
a. Select Snapshot Expires on.
b. In the calendar, specify the day that you want the snapshot to be automatically deleted.
7. Click Create Snapshot.

Related references
Snapshot information

Snapshot naming patterns

If you schedule snapshots to be automatically generated, either according to a snapshot schedule or a replication policy, you
must assign a snapshot naming pattern that determines how the snapshots are named. Snapshot naming patterns contain
variables that include information about how and when the snapshot was created.
The following variables can be included in a snapshot naming pattern:

Snapshots 239
Table 85. Variables
Variable Description
%A The day of the week.
%a The abbreviated day of the week. For example, if the snapshot
is generated on a Sunday, %a is replaced with Sun.

%B The name of the month.

%b The abbreviated name of the month. For example, if the
snapshot is generated in September, %b is replaced with Sep.

%C The first two digits of the year. For example, if the snapshot is
created in 2014, %C is replaced with 20.

%c The time and day. This variable is equivalent to specifying %a

%b %e %T %Y.

%d The two-digit day of the month.

%e The day of the month. A single-digit day is preceded by a
blank space.
%F The date. This variable is equivalent to specifying %Y-%m-%d.

%G The year. This variable is equivalent to specifying %Y.

However, if the snapshot is created in a week that has less
than four days in the current year, the year that contains
most of the days of the week is displayed. The first day of
the week is calculated as Monday. For example, if a snapshot
is created on Sunday, January 1, 2017, %G is replaced with
2016, because only one day of that week is in 2017.

%g The abbreviated year. This variable is equivalent to specifying

%y. However, if the snapshot was created in a week that has
less than four days in the current year, the year that contains
most of the days of the week is displayed. The first day of the
week is calculated as Monday. For example, if a snapshot is
created on Sunday, January 1, 2017, %g is replaced with 16,
because only one day of that week is in 2017.
%H The hour. The hour is represented on the 24-hour clock.
Single-digit hours are preceded by a zero. For example, if a
snapshot is created at 1:45 AM, %H is replaced with 01.

%h The abbreviated name of the month. This variable is

equivalent to specifying %b.

%I The hour as represented on the 12-hour clock. Single-digit

hours are preceded by a zero. For example, if a snapshot is
created at 1:45 PM, %I is replaced with 01.

%j The numeric day of the year. For example, if a snapshot is

created on February 1, %j is replaced with 32.

%k The hour as represented on the 24-hour clock. Single-digit

hours are preceded by a blank space.
%l The hour as represented on the 12-hour clock. Single-digit
hours are preceded by a blank space. For example, if a
snapshot is created at 1:45 AM, %I is replaced with 1.

%M The two-digit minute.

%m The two-digit month.
%p AM or PM.

240 Snapshots
Table 85. Variables (continued)
Variable Description
%{PolicyName} The name of the replication policy that the snapshot was
created for. This variable is valid only if you are specifying
a snapshot naming pattern for a replication policy.
%R The time. This variable is equivalent to specifying %H:%M.

%r The time. This variable is equivalent to specifying %I:%M:%S

%p.

%S The two-digit second.

%s The second represented in UNIX or POSIX time.
%{SrcCluster} The name of the source cluster of the replication policy that
the snapshot was created for. This variable is valid only if
you are specifying a snapshot naming pattern for a replication
policy.
%T The time. This variable is equivalent to specifying %H:%M:%S

%U The two-digit numerical week of the year. Numbers range

from 00 to 53. The first day of the week is calculated as
Sunday.
%u The numerical day of the week. Numbers range from 1 to
7. The first day of the week is calculated as Monday. For
example, if a snapshot is created on Sunday, %u is replaced
with 7.

%V The two-digit numerical week of the year that the snapshot

was created in. Numbers range from 01 to 53. The first day
of the week is calculated as Monday. If the week of January
1 is four or more days in length, then that week is counted as
the first week of the year.
%v The day that the snapshot was created. This variable is
equivalent to specifying %e-%b-%Y.

%W The two-digit numerical week of the year that the snapshot

was created in. Numbers range from 00 to 53. The first day
of the week is calculated as Monday.
%w The numerical day of the week that the snapshot was created
on. Numbers range from 0 to 6. The first day of the week
is calculated as Sunday. For example, if the snapshot was
created on Sunday, %w is replaced with 0.

%X The time that the snapshot was created. This variable is

equivalent to specifying %H:%M:%S.

%Y The year that the snapshot was created in.

%y The last two digits of the year that the snapshot was created
in. For example, if the snapshot was created in 2014, %y is
replaced with 14.

%Z The time zone that the snapshot was created in.

%z The offset from coordinated universal time (UTC) of the time
zone that the snapshot was created in. If preceded by a plus
sign, the time zone is east of UTC. If preceded by a minus
sign, the time zone is west of UTC.
%+ The time and date that the snapshot was created. This
variable is equivalent to specifying %a %b %e %X %Z %Y.

Snapshots 241
Table 85. Variables (continued)
Variable Description
%% Escapes a percent sign. For example, 100%% is replaced with
100%.

Managing snapshots
You can delete and view snapshots. You can also modify the name, duration period, and snapshot alias of an existing snapshot.
Unless you specify that you are creating a writable snapshot, the data that is contained in a snapshot is read-only and cannot be
modified.

Reducing snapshot disk-space usage

If multiple snapshots contain the same directories, deleting one of the snapshots might not free the entire amount of space that
the system reports as the size of the snapshot. The size of a snapshot is the maximum amount of data that might be freed if
the snapshot is deleted.
Deleting a snapshot frees only the space that is taken up exclusively by that snapshot. If two snapshots reference the same
stored data, that data is not freed until both snapshots are deleted. Remember that snapshots store data contained in all
subdirectories of the root directory; if snapshot_one contains /ifs/data/, and snapshot_two contains /ifs/data/dir, the
two snapshots most likely share data.
If you delete a directory, and then re-create it, a snapshot containing the directory stores the entire re-created directory, even if
the files in that directory are never modified.
Deleting multiple snapshots that contain the same directories is more likely to free data than deleting multiple snapshots that
contain different directories.
If multiple snapshots contain the same directories, deleting older snapshots is more likely to free disk-space than deleting newer
snapshots.
Snapshots that are assigned expiration dates are automatically marked for deletion by the snapshot daemon. If the daemon is
disabled, snapshots will not be automatically deleted by the system. It is recommended that you do not disable the snapshot
daemon.

Delete snapshots
You can delete a snapshot if you no longer want to access the data that is contained in the snapshot.
OneFS frees disk space that is occupied by deleted snapshots when the SnapshotDelete job is run. Also, if you delete a
snapshot that contains clones or cloned files, data in a shadow store might no longer be referenced by files on the cluster;
OneFS deletes unreferenced data in a shadow store when the ShadowStoreDelete job is run. OneFS routinely runs both the
ShadowStoreDelete and SnapshotDelete jobs. However, you can also manually run the jobs at any time.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
2. In the list of snapshots, select the snapshot or snapshots that you want to delete.
a. From the Select an action list, select Delete.
b. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.
3. Optional: To increase the speed at which deleted snapshot data is freed on the cluster, run the SnapshotDelete job.
a. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
b. In the Job Types area, locate SnapshotDelete, and then click Start Job.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.
c. Click Start Job.
4. Optional: To increase the speed at which deleted data that is shared between deduplicated and cloned files is freed on the
cluster, run the ShadowStoreDelete job.
Run the ShadowStoreDelete job only after you run the SnapshotDelete job.
a. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
b. In the Job Types area, locate ShadowStoreDelete, and then click Start Job.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.

242 Snapshots
 c. Click Start Job.

Related concepts
Snapshot disk-space usage
Reducing snapshot disk-space usage
Best practices for creating snapshots

Modify snapshot attributes

You can modify the name and expiration date of a snapshot.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
2. In the list of snapshots, locate the snapshot that you want to modify, and then click View/Edit.
The View Snapshot Details dialog box appears.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Snapshot Details dialog box appears.
4. Modify the attributes that you want to change.
5. Click Save Changes.

Related references
Snapshot information

Assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot

You can assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
2. In the Snapshot Aliases table, in the row of an alias, click View/Edit.
3. In the Alias Name area, click Edit.
4. In the Alias Name field, type a new alias name.
5. Click Save.

Related references
Snapshot information

View snapshots
You can view a list of snapshots.
Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
The snapshots are listed in the Snapshots table.

Related references
Snapshot information

Snapshot information
You can view information about snapshots, including the total amount of space consumed by all snapshots.
The following information is displayed in the Saved Snapshots area:

Saved Snapshots Indicates the total number of snapshots that exist on the cluster.
Snapshots Pending Indicates the total number of snapshots that were deleted on the cluster since the last snapshot
Deletion delete job was run. The space that is consumed by the deleted snapshots is not freed until the
snapshot delete job is run again.

Snapshots 243
Snapshot Aliases Indicates the total number of snapshot aliases that exist on the cluster.
Capacity Used by Indicates the total amount of space that is consumed by all snapshots.
Snapshots

Related tasks
Create a snapshot
Modify snapshot attributes
Assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot
View snapshots

Restoring snapshot data

You can restore snapshot data through various methods. You can revert a snapshot or access snapshot data through the
snapshots directory.
From the snapshots directory, you can either clone a file or copy a directory or a file. The snapshots directory can be accessed
through Windows Explorer or a UNIX command line. You can disable and enable access to the snapshots directory for any of
these methods through snapshots settings.

Revert a snapshot
You can revert a directory back to the state it was in when a snapshot was taken. Before OneFS reverts a snapshot, OneFS
generates a snapshot of the directory being reverted, so that data that is stored in the directory is not lost. OneFS does not
delete a snapshot after reverting it.
● Create a SnapRevert domain for the directory.
● Create a snapshot of a directory.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types table, locate the SnapRevert job, and then click Start Job.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.
3. Optional: To specify a priority for the job, from the Priority list, select a priority.
Lower values indicate a higher priority. If you do not specify a priority, the job is assigned the default snapshot revert
priority.

4. Optional: To specify the amount of cluster resources the job is allowed to consume, from the Impact Policy list, select an
impact policy.
If you do not specify a policy, the job is assigned the default snapshot revert policy.

5. In the Snapshot ID to revert field, type the name or ID of the snapshot that you want to revert, and then click Start Job.

Related tasks
Create a SnapRevert domain

Restore a file or directory using Windows Explorer

If the Microsoft Shadow Copy Client is installed on your computer, you can use it to restore files and directories that are stored
in snapshots.
This method of restoring files and directories does not preserve the original permissions. Instead, this method assigns the file
or directory the same permissions as the directory you are copying that file or directory into. To preserve permissions while
restoring data from a snapshot, run the cp command with the -a option on a UNIX command line.
NOTE: You can access up to 64 snapshots of a directory through Windows explorer, starting with the most recent
snapshot. To access more than 64 snapshots for a directory, access the cluster through a UNIX command line.
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the directory that you want to restore or the directory that contains the file that you want
to restore.

244 Snapshots
 If the directory has been deleted, you must recreate the directory.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click Properties.
3. In the Properties window, click the Previous Versions tab.
4. Select the version of the folder that you want to restore or the version of the folder that contains the version of the file that
you want to restore.
5. Restore the version of the file or directory.
● To restore all files in the selected directory, click Restore.
● To copy the selected directory to another location, click Copy, and then specify a location to copy the directory to.
● To restore a specific file, click Open, and then copy the file into the original directory, replacing the existing copy with
the snapshot version.

Restore a file or directory through a UNIX command line

You can restore a file or directory from a snapshot through a UNIX command line.
1. Open a connection to the cluster through a UNIX command line.
2. Optional: To view the contents of the snapshot you want to restore a file or directory from, run the ls command for a
directory contained in the snapshots root directory.
For example, the following command displays the contents of the /archive directory contained in Snapshot2014Jun04:

ls /ifs/.snapshot/Snapshot2014Jun04/archive

3. Copy the file or directory by using the cp command.

For example, the following command creates a copy of the file1 file:

cp -a /ifs/.snapshot/Snapshot2014Jun04/archive/file1 \
/ifs/archive/file1_copy

Clone a file from a snapshot

You can clone a file from a snapshot.

1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. To view the contents of the snapshot you want to restore a file or directory from, run the ls command for a subdirectory of
the snapshots root directory.
For example, the following command displays the contents of the /archive directory contained in Snapshot2014Jun04:

ls /ifs/.snapshot/Snapshot2014Jun04/archive

3. Clone a file from the snapshot by running the cp command with the -c option.
For example, the following command clones [Link] from Snapshot2014Jun04:

cp -c /ifs/.snapshot/Snapshot2014Jun04/archive/[Link] \
/ifs/archive/test_clone.text

Related concepts
File clones

Snapshots 245
Managing snapshot schedules
You can modify, delete, and view snapshot schedules.

Modify a snapshot schedule

Any changes to a snapshot schedule are applied only to snapshots that are generated after the changes are made. Schedule
changes do not affect existing snapshots.
If you modify the snapshot alias of a snapshot schedule, the alias is assigned to the next snapshot that is generated based on
the schedule. However, the old alias is not removed from the last snapshot that it was assigned to. Unless you manually remove
the old alias, the alias remains attached to the last snapshot that it was assigned to.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshot Schedules.
2. In the Schedules table, locate the snapshot schedule that you want to modify, and then click View/Edit.
The View Snapshot Schedule Details dialog box appears.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Snapshot Schedule Details dialog box appears.
4. Modify the snapshot schedule attributes that you want to change.
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Snapshot schedules
Best practices for creating snapshot schedules

Delete a snapshot schedule

You can delete a snapshot schedule. Deleting a snapshot schedule does not delete snapshots that were generated according to
the schedule.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshot Schedules.
2. In the Schedules table, locate the snapshot schedule that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box appears.
3. Click Delete.

Related concepts
Snapshot schedules

View snapshot schedules

You can view snapshot schedules.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshot Schedules.
2. In the Schedules table, locate the snapshot schedule that you want to view, and then click View/Edit.

Related concepts
Snapshot schedules

246 Snapshots
Managing snapshot aliases
You can configure snapshot schedules to assign a snapshot alias to the most recent snapshot created by a snapshot schedule.
You can also manually assign snapshot aliases to specific snapshots or the live version of the file system.

Configure a snapshot alias for a snapshot schedule

You can configure a snapshot schedule to assign a snapshot alias to the most recent snapshot that is created by the schedule.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshot Schedules
2. In the Schedules table, locate the snapshot schedule that you want to configure, and click View/Edit.
The View Snapshot Schedule Details dialog box appears.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Snapshot Schedule Details dialog box appears.
4. Select Create a snapshot alias.
5. In the Snapshot Alias field, type the name of the snapshot alias.
6. Click Save Changes.

Assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot

You can assign a snapshot alias to a snapshot.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
2. In the Snapshot Aliases table, in the row of an alias, click View/Edit.
3. In the Alias Name area, click Edit.
4. In the Alias Name field, type a new alias name.
5. Click Save.

Related references
Snapshot information

Reassign a snapshot alias to the live file system

You can reassign a snapshot alias to redirect clients from a snapshot to the live file system.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi snapshot aliases modify command.
The following command reassigns the latestWeekly alias to the live file system:

isi snapshot aliases modify latestWeekly --target LIVE

View snapshot aliases

You can view a list of all snapshot aliases.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. View a list of all snapshot aliases by running the following command:

isi snapshot aliases list

If a snapshot alias references the live version of the file system, the Target ID is -1.

3. Optional: View information about a specific snapshot by running the isi snapshot aliases view command.

Snapshots 247
 The following command displays information about latestWeekly:

isi snapshot aliases view latestWeekly

Snapshot alias information

You can view information about snapshot aliases through the output of the isi snapshot aliases view command.

ID The numerical ID of the snapshot alias.

Name The name of the snapshot alias.
Target ID The numerical ID of the snapshot that is referenced by the alias.
Target Name The name of the snapshot that is referenced by the alias.
Created The date that the snapshot alias was created.

Managing with snapshot locks

You can delete, create, and modify the expiration date of snapshot locks.
CAUTION:

Do not delete or modify a snapshot lock that OneFS creates unless Dell Technologies Support instructs you to
do so.
Deleting a OneFS-created snapshot lock can result in data loss. If you delete a OneFS-created snapshot lock, the corresponding
snapshot might be deleted while it is still in use by OneFS. If OneFS cannot access a snapshot that is necessary for an
operation, the operation can malfunction and data loss can result. Modifying the expiration date of a OneFS-created snapshot
lock can also result in data loss because the corresponding snapshot can be deleted prematurely.

Related concepts
Snapshot locks

Create a snapshot lock

You create snapshot locks to prevent snapshots from being automatically deleted.
You can also prevent a snapshot from being automatically deleted by extending the duration period of the snapshot.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).

CAUTION: Avoid creating snapshot locks on system-created snapshots.

1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. To create a snapshot lock, run the isi snapshot locks create command.
For example, the following command applies a snapshot lock to SnapshotAugust2021, sets the lock to expire in one month,
and adds a description of "Maintenance Lock":

isi snapshot locks create SnapshotAugust2021 --expires 1M \

--comment "Maintenance Lock"

Related concepts
Snapshot locks

Related references
Snapshot lock information

248 Snapshots
Modify a snapshot lock expiration date
You can modify the expiration date of a snapshot lock.

CAUTION: It is recommended that you do not modify the expiration dates of snapshot locks.

This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).

1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi snapshot locks modify command.
The following command sets an expiration date two days from the present date for a snapshot lock with an ID of 1 that is
applied to a snapshot named SnapshotApril2014:

isi snapshot locks modify SnapshotApril2014 1 --expires 2D

Related concepts
Snapshot locks

Related references
Snapshot lock information

Delete a snapshot lock

You can delete a snapshot lock.

CAUTION: It is recommended that you do not delete snapshot locks.

This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).

1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Delete a snapshot lock by running the isi snapshot locks delete command.
The following command deletes a snapshot lock that is applied to SnapshotApril2014 and has a lock ID of 1:

isi snapshot locks delete Snapshot2014Apr16 1

The system prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the snapshot lock.
3. Type yes and then press ENTER.

Related concepts
Snapshot locks

Snapshot lock information

You can view snapshot lock information through the isi snapshot locks view and isi snapshot locks list
commands.

ID Numerical identification number of the snapshot lock.

Comment Description of the snapshot lock. This can be any string specified by a user.
Expires The date that the snapshot lock will be automatically deleted by OneFS.
Count The number of times the snapshot lock is held.
The file clone operation can hold a single snapshot lock multiple times. If multiple file clones are
created simultaneously, the file clone operation holds the same lock multiple times, rather than
creating multiple locks. If you delete a snapshot lock that is held more than once, you will delete
only one of the instances that the lock is held. In order to delete a snapshot lock that is held multiple
times, you must delete the snapshot lock the same number of times as displayed in the count field.

Snapshots 249
Configure SnapshotIQ settings
You can configure SnapshotIQ settings that determine how snapshots can be created and the methods that users can access
snapshot data.
1. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Settings.
2. Modify SnapshotIQ settings, and then click Save.

Related references
SnapshotIQ settings

SnapshotIQ settings
SnapshotIQ settings determine how snapshots behave and can be accessed.
The following SnapshotIQ settings can be configured:

Snapshot Determines whether snapshots can be generated.

Scheduling NOTE: Disabling snapshot generation might cause some OneFS operations to fail. It is
recommended that you do not disable this setting.

Auto-create Determines whether snapshots are automatically generated according to

Snapshots snapshot schedules.
Auto-delete Determines whether snapshots are automatically deleted according to their
Snapshots expiration dates.

NFS Visibility &

Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are accessible through NFS.
Accessibility
Accessible
Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are visible through NFS.
Visible
Sub-directories Determines whether snapshot subdirectories are accessible through NFS.
Accessible

SMB Visibility &

Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are accessible through SMB.
Accessible
Accessible
Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are visible through SMB.
Visible
Sub-directories Determines whether snapshot subdirectories are accessible through SMB.
Accessible

Local Visibility &

Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are accessible through the local
Accessibility
Accessible file system. You can access the local file system through an SSH connection
or the local console.
Root Directory Determines whether snapshot directories are visible through the local file
Visible system. You can access the local file system through an SSH connection or
the local console.
Sub-directories Determines whether snapshot subdirectories are accessible through the
Accessible local file system. You can access the local file system through an SSH
connection or the local console.

Related tasks
Configure SnapshotIQ settings

250 Snapshots
Set the snapshot reserve
You can specify a minimum percentage of cluster-storage capacity that you want to reserve for snapshots.
The snapshot reserve does not limit the amount of space that snapshots are allowed to consume on the cluster. Snapshots can
consume more than the percentage of capacity specified by the snapshot reserve. It is recommended that you do not specify a
snapshot reserve.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Set the snapshot reserve by running the isi snapshot settings modify command with the --reserve option.
For example, the following command sets the snapshot reserve to 20%:

isi snapshot settings modify --reserve 20

Related concepts
Snapshot reserve

Managing changelists
You can create and view changelists that describe the differences between two snapshots. You can create a changelist for any
two snapshots that have a common root directory.
Changelists are most commonly accessed by applications through the OneFS Platform API. For example, a custom application
could regularly compare the two most recent snapshots of a critical directory path to determine whether to back up the
directory, or to trigger other actions.

Create a changelist
You can create a changelist to view the differences between two snapshots.
1. Optional: Record the IDs of the snapshots.
a. Click Data Protection > SnapshotIQ > Snapshots.
b. In the row of each snapshot that you want to create a changelist for, click View Details, and record the ID of the
snapshot.
2. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
3. In the Job Types area, in the ChangelistCreate row, from the Actions column, select Start Job.
4. In the Older Snapshot ID field, type the ID of the older snapshot.
5. In the Newer Snapshot ID field, type the ID of the newer snapshot.
6. Click Start Job.

Delete a changelist
You can delete a changelist
Run the isi_changelist_mod command with the -k option.
The following command deletes changelist 22_24:

isi_changelist_mod -k 22_24

Snapshots 251
View a changelist
You can view a changelist that describes the differences between two snapshots. This procedure is available only through the
command-line interface (CLI).
1. View the IDs of changelists by running the following command:

isi_changelist_mod -l

Changelist IDs include the IDs of both snapshots used to create the changelist. If OneFS is still in the process of creating a
changelist, inprog is appended to the changelist ID.

2. Optional: View all contents of a changelist by running the isi_changelist_mod command with the -a option.
The following command displays the contents of a changelist named 2_6:

isi_changelist_mod -a 2_6

Changelist information
You can view the information contained in changelists.

NOTE: The information contained in changelists is meant to be consumed by applications through the OneFS Platform API.

The following information is displayed for each item in the changelist when you run the isi_changelist_mod command:

st_ino Displays the inode number of the specified item.

st_mode Displays the file type and permissions for the specified item.
st_size Displays the total size of the item in bytes.
st_atime Displays the POSIX timestamp of when the item was last accessed.
st_mtime Displays the POSIX timestamp of when the item was last modified.
st_ctime Displays the POSIX timestamp of when the item was last changed.
cl_flags Displays information about the item and what kinds of changes were made to the item.

01 The item was added or moved under the root directory of the snapshots.
02 The item was removed or moved out of the root directory of the snapshots.
04 The path of the item was changed without being removed from the root
directory of the snapshot.
10 The item either currently contains or at one time contained Alternate Data
Streams (ADS).
20 The item is an ADS.
40 The item has hardlinks.

NOTE: These values are added together in the output. For example, if an ADS was added, the
code would be cl_flags=021.

path The absolute path of the specified file or directory.

252 Snapshots
 16
Deduplication with SmartDedupe
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Deduplication overview
• Deduplication jobs
• Data replication and backup with deduplication
• Snapshots with deduplication
• Deduplication considerations
• Shadow-store considerations
• SmartDedupe license functionality
• Managing deduplication

Deduplication overview
SmartDedupe enables you to save storage space on your cluster by reducing redundant data. Deduplication maximizes the
efficiency of your cluster by decreasing the amount of storage that is required to store multiple files with identical blocks.
The SmartDedupe software module deduplicates data by scanning a PowerScale cluster for identical data blocks. Each block is
8 KB. If SmartDedupe finds duplicate blocks, SmartDedupe moves a single copy of the blocks to a hidden file called a shadow
store. SmartDedupe then deletes the duplicate blocks from the original files and replaces the blocks with pointers to the shadow
store.
Deduplication is applied at the directory level, targeting all files and directories underneath one or more root directories.
SmartDedupe not only deduplicates identical blocks in different files, it also deduplicates identical blocks within a single file.
Before you deduplicate a directory, you can get an estimate of the amount of space you can expect to save. After you begin
deduplicating a directory, you can monitor the amount of space that deduplication is saving in real time.
To enable deduplicating two or more files, the files must have the same disk pool policy ID and protection policy. If either or both
of these attributes differ between two or more identical files, or files with identical 8 K blocks, the files are not deduplicated.
Because it is possible to specify protection policies on a per-file or per-directory basis, deduplication can be further
affected. Consider the example of two files, /ifs/data/projects/alpha/[Link] and /ifs/data/projects/
beta/[Link]. Even if the [Link] files in both directories are identical, they would not be deduplicated if they have
different protection policies.
If you have activated a SmartPools license on your cluster, you can also specify custom file pool policies. These file pool policies
might result in identical files or files with identical 8 K blocks being stored in different node pools. Those files would have
different disk pool policy IDs and would not be deduplicated.
SmartDedupe also does not deduplicate files that are 32 KB or smaller, because doing so would consume more cluster resources
than the storage savings are worth. The default size of a shadow store is 2 GB. Each shadow store can contain up to 256,000
blocks. Each block in a shadow store can be referenced up to 32,000 times.

Deduplication jobs
A deduplication system maintenance job deduplicates data on a cluster. You can monitor and control deduplication jobs as
you would any other maintenance job on the cluster. Although the overall performance impact of deduplication is minimal, the
deduplication job consumes 400 MB of memory per node.
When a deduplication job runs for the first time on a cluster, SmartDedupe samples blocks from each file and creates index
entries for those blocks. If the index entries of two blocks match, SmartDedupe scans the blocks that are next to the matching
pair and then deduplicates all duplicate blocks. After a deduplication job samples a file once, new deduplication jobs will not
sample the file again until the file is modified.

Deduplication with SmartDedupe 253

The first deduplication job that you run can take longer to complete than subsequent deduplication jobs. The first deduplication
job must scan all files under the specified directories to generate the initial index. If subsequent deduplication jobs take a long
time to complete, the most likely cause is that a large amount of data is being deduplicated. However, it can also indicate that
users are storing large amounts of new data on the cluster. If a deduplication job is interrupted during the deduplication process,
the job automatically restarts the scanning process from where the job was interrupted.
NOTE: Run deduplication jobs when users are not modifying data on the cluster. If users continually modify files on the
cluster, the storage savings are minimal because the deduplicated blocks are constantly removed from the shadow store.
How frequently you should run a deduplication job on your PowerScale cluster varies, depending on the size of your dataset, the
rate of changes, and opportunity. For most clusters, it is recommended that you start a deduplication job every 7 to 10 days.
You can start a deduplication job manually or schedule a recurring job at specified intervals. By default, the deduplication job is
configured to run at a low priority. However, you can specify job controls, such as priority and impact, on deduplication jobs that
run manually or by schedule.
The permissions required to modify deduplication settings are not the same as the permissions required to run a deduplication
job. Although a user must have the maintenance job permission to run a deduplication job, the user must have the deduplication
permission to modify deduplication settings. By default, the root user and SystemAdmin user have the necessary permissions for
all deduplication operations.

Related tasks
Assess deduplication space savings
Specify deduplication settings

Data replication and backup with deduplication

When deduplicated files are replicated to another PowerScale cluster or backed up to a tape device, the deduplicated files no
longer share blocks on the target PowerScale cluster or backup device. However, although you can deduplicate data on a target
PowerScale cluster, you cannot deduplicate data on an NDMP backup device.
Shadows stores are not transferred to target clusters or backup devices. Because of this, deduplicated files do not consume
less space than non-deduplicated files when they are replicated or backed up. To avoid running out of space, you must
ensure that target clusters and tape devices have enough free space to store deduplicated data as if the data had not
been deduplicated. To reduce the amount of storage space consumed on a target PowerScale cluster, you can configure
deduplication for the target directories of your replication policies. Although this will deduplicate data on the target directory,
it will not allow SyncIQ to transfer shadow stores. Deduplication is still performed by deduplication jobs running on the target
cluster.
The amount of cluster resources required to backup and replicate deduplicated data is the same as for non-deduplicated data.
You can deduplicate data while the data is being replicated or backed up.

Snapshots with deduplication

You cannot deduplicate the data stored in a snapshot. However, you can create snapshots of deduplicated data.
If you create a snapshot for a deduplicated directory, and then modify the contents of that directory, the references to shadow
stores will be transferred to the snapshot over time. Therefore, if you enable deduplication before you create snapshots, you
will save more space on your cluster. If you implement deduplication on a cluster that already has a significant amount of
data stored in snapshots, it will take time before the snapshot data is affected by deduplication. Newly created snapshots can
contain deduplicated data, but snapshots created before deduplication was implemented cannot.
If you plan on reverting a snapshot, it is best to revert the snapshot before running a deduplication job. Restoring a snapshot
can overwrite many of the files on the cluster. Any deduplicated files are reverted back to normal files if they are overwritten
by a snapshot revert. However, after the snapshot revert is complete, you can deduplicate the directory and the space savings
persist on the cluster.

254 Deduplication with SmartDedupe

Deduplication considerations
Deduplication can significantly increase the efficiency at which you store data. However, the effect of deduplication varies
depending on the cluster.
You can reduce redundancy on a cluster by running SmartDedupe. Deduplication creates links that can impact the speed at
which you can read from and write to files. In particular, sequentially reading chunks smaller than 512 KB of a deduplicated
file can be significantly slower than reading the same small, sequential chunks of a non-deduplicated file. This performance
degradation applies only if you are reading non-cached data. For cached data, the performance for deduplicated files is
potentially better than non-deduplicated files. If you stream chunks larger than 512 KB, deduplication does not significantly
impact the read performance of the file. If you intend on streaming 8 KB or less of each file at a time, and you do not plan on
concurrently streaming the files, it is recommended that you do not deduplicate the files.
Deduplication is most effective when applied to static or archived files and directories. The less that files are modified, the less
negative effects deduplication has on the cluster. For example, virtual machines often contain several copies of identical files
that are rarely modified. Deduplicating a large number of virtual machines can greatly reduce the amount of consumed storage
space.
WARNING: Use caution when setting the Dedupe default impact policy value to HIGH. Setting the default
impact policy to HIGH can have a significant impact on system performance. If you set the value to HIGH when
scheduling a Dedupe job, ensure that you set it back to the default impact policy value of LOW after completing
the job.

Shadow-store considerations
Shadow stores are hidden files that are referenced by cloned and deduplicated files. Files that reference shadow stores behave
differently than other files.
● Reading shadow-store references might be slower than reading data directly. Reading noncached shadow-store references
is slower than reading noncached data. Reading cached shadow-store references takes no more time than reading cached
data.
● When files that reference shadow stores are replicated to another PowerScale cluster or backed up to a Network Data
Management Protocol (NDMP) backup device, the shadow stores are not transferred to the target PowerScale cluster or
backup device. The files are transferred as if they contained the data that they reference from shadow stores. On the target
PowerScale cluster or backup device, the files consume the same amount of space as if they had not referenced shadow
stores.
● When OneFS creates a shadow store, OneFS assigns the shadow store to a storage pool of a file that references the
shadow store. If you delete the storage pool that a shadow store resides on, the shadow store is moved to a pool that
contains another file that references the shadow store.
● OneFS does not delete a shadow-store block immediately after the last reference to the block is deleted. Instead, OneFS
waits until the ShadowStoreDelete job is run to delete the unreferenced block. If many unreferenced blocks exist on the
cluster, OneFS might report a negative deduplication savings until the ShadowStoreDelete job is run.
● Shadow stores are protected at least as much as the most protected file that references it. For example, if one file that
references a shadow store resides in a storage pool with +2 protection and another file that references the shadow store
resides in a storage pool with +3 protection, the shadow store is protected at +3.
● Quotas account for files that reference shadow stores as if the files contained the data that is referenced from shadow
stores. From the perspective of a quota, shadow-store references do not exist. However, if a quota includes data protection
overhead, the quota does not account for the data protection overhead of shadow stores.

SmartDedupe license functionality

You can deduplicate data only if you activate a SmartDedupe license on a cluster. However, you can assess deduplication
savings without activating a SmartDedupe license.
If you activate a SmartDedupe license, and then deduplicate data, the space savings are not lost if the license becomes inactive.
You can also still view deduplication savings while the license is inactive. However, you will not be able to deduplicate additional
data until you re-activate the SmartDedupe license.

Deduplication with SmartDedupe 255

Managing deduplication
You can manage deduplication on a cluster by first assessing how much space you can save by deduplicating individual
directories. After you determine which directories are worth deduplicating, you can configure SmartDedupe to deduplicate those
directories specifically. You can then monitor the actual amount of disk space you are saving.

Assess deduplication space savings

You can assess the amount of disk space you will save by deduplicating a directory.
1. Click File System > Deduplication > Settings.
2. In the Assess Deduplication area, click Browse and select a directory that you want to deduplicate.
If you assess multiple directories, disk savings are not differentiated by directory in the deduplication report.

3. Click Save to save the deduplication settings.

4. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
5. In the Job Types table, locate the DedupeAssessment job, and then click Start Job.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.
6. Click Start Job.
7. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
Active jobs appear in the Active Jobs list.
8. Wait for the assessment job to complete.
When the DedupeAssessment job is complete, the job is removed from the Active Jobs list.
9. Click File System > Deduplication > Summary.
In the Deduplication Assessment Reports area, in the row of the most recent assessment job, click View Report.
10. View the amount of disk space that will be saved if you deduplicate the directory.
The number of blocks that will be deduplicated is displayed in the Deduped blocks field.

Related concepts
Deduplication jobs

Specify deduplication settings

You can specify which directories you want to deduplicate.
1. Click File System > Deduplication > Settings.
2. In the Deduplication Settings area, click Browse and select a directory that you want to deduplicate.
3. Optional: Specify additional directories.
a. Click Add another directory path.
b. Click Browse and select a directory that you want to deduplicate.
4. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Deduplication jobs

Start or schedule a deduplication job

You can manually start a deduplication job or specify a repeating schedule for the job to run automatically.
It is recommended that you run the Dedupe job once every 10 days. The first deduplication that you run on the cluster might
take significantly longer to complete than subsequent deduplication jobs.
WARNING: Use caution when setting the Dedupe default impact policy value to HIGH. Setting the default
impact policy to HIGH can have a significant impact on system performance. If you set the value to HIGH when

256 Deduplication with SmartDedupe

 scheduling a Dedupe job, ensure that you set it back to the default impact policy value of LOW after completing
the job.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types list, locate the Dedupe job, and then click View/Edit.
The View Job Type Details dialog box appears.
3. Click Edit Job Type.
The Edit Job Type Details dialog box appears
4. Specify the job controls as follows:

Option Description
Enable this job Select to enable the job type.
type
Default Priority Set the job priority as compared to other system maintenance jobs that run at the same time. Job priority
is denoted as 1-10, with 1 being the highest and 10 being the lowest. The default value is 4.
Default Impact Select the amount of system resources that the job uses compared to other system maintenance jobs
Policy that run at the same time. Select a policy value of HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, or OFF-HOURS. The default is
LOW.

Schedule Specify whether the job must be manually started or runs on a regularly scheduled basis. When you
click Scheduled, you can specify a daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly schedule. For most clusters, it is
recommended that you run the Dedupe job once every 10 days.
5. Click Save Changes, and then click Close.
The new job controls are saved and the dialog box closes.
6. Click Start Job.
The Dedupe job runs with the new job controls.

View deduplication space savings

You can view the amount of disk space that you are currently saving with deduplication.
1. Click File System > Deduplication > Summary.
2. In the Deduplication Savings area, view the amount of disk space saved.

Related references
Deduplication information

View a deduplication report

After a deduplication job completes, you can view information about the job in a deduplication report.
1. Click File System > Deduplication > Summary.
2. In the Deduplication Reports or Deduplication Assessment Reports section, locate the report that you want to view, and
then click View Report.

Related references
Deduplication job report information

Deduplication job report information

You can view the following deduplication specific information in deduplication job reports:

Start time The time the deduplication job started.

End time The time the deduplication job ended.

Deduplication with SmartDedupe 257

Iteration Count The number of times that SmartDedupe interrupted the sampling process. If SmartDedupe is sampling
a large amount of data, SmartDedupe might interrupt sampling in order to start deduplicating the data.
After SmartDedupe finishes deduplicating the sampled data, SmartDedupe will continue sampling the
remaining data.
Scanned blocks The total number of blocks located underneath the specified deduplicated directories.
Sampled blocks The number of blocks that SmartDedupe created index entries for.
Deduped blocks The number of blocks that were deduplicated.
Dedupe percent The percentage of scanned blocks that were deduplicated.
Created dedupe The total number of deduplication requests created. A deduplication request is created for each
requests matching pair of data blocks. For example, if you have 3 data blocks that all match, SmartDedupe
creates 2 requests. One of the requests could pair file1 and file2 together and the other request could
pair file2 and file3 together.
Successful dedupe The number of deduplication requests that completed successfully.
requests
Failed dedupe The number of deduplication requests that failed. If a deduplication request fails, it doesn't mean that
requests the job failed too. A deduplication request can fail for any number of reasons. For example, the file
might have been modified since it was sampled.
Skipped files The number of files that were not scanned by the deduplication job. SmartDedupe skips files for a
number of reasons. For example, SmartDedupe skips files that have already been scanned and haven't
been modified since. SmartDedupe also skips all files that are smaller than 4 KB.
Index entries The number of entries that currently exist in the index.
Index lookup The total number of lookups that have been done by earlier deduplication jobs plus the number of
attempts lookups done by this deduplication job. A lookup is when the deduplication job attempts to match a
block that was indexed with a block that hasn't been indexed.
Index lookup hits The number of blocks that matched index entries.

Related tasks
View a deduplication report

Deduplication information
You can view the amount of disk space saved by deduplication in the Deduplication Savings area:

Space Savings The total amount of physical disk space saved by deduplication, including protection overhead and
metadata. For example, if you have three identical files that are all 5 GB, the estimated physical saving
would be greater than 10 GB, because deduplication saved space that would have been occupied by
file metadata and protection overhead.
Deduplicated data The amount of space on the cluster occupied by directories that were deduplicated.
Other data The amount of space on the cluster occupied by directories that were not deduplicated.

Related tasks
View deduplication space savings

258 Deduplication with SmartDedupe

 17
Data replication with SyncIQ
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• SyncIQ data replication overview
• Replication policies and jobs
• Replication snapshots
• Data failover and failback with SyncIQ
• Recovery times and objectives for SyncIQ
• Replication policy priority
• SyncIQ license functionality
• Replication for nodes with multiple interfaces
• Restrict SyncIQ source nodes
• Creating replication policies
• Managing replication to remote clusters
• Initiating data failover and failback with SyncIQ
• Managing replication policies
• Managing replication to the local cluster
• Managing replication performance rules
• Managing replication reports
• Managing failed replication jobs

SyncIQ data replication overview

OneFS enables you to replicate data from one PowerScale cluster to another through the SyncIQ software module. Activate a
SyncIQ license on both PowerScale clusters before you can replicate data between them.
You can replicate data at the directory level while optionally excluding specific files and subdirectories from being replicated.
SyncIQ creates and references snapshots to replicate a consistent point-in-time image of a source directory. Metadata, such as
access control lists (ACL) and alternate data streams (ADS) are replicated along with data.
SyncIQ enables you to maintain a consistent replica of your data on another PowerScale cluster and to control the frequency of
data replication. For example, you could configure SyncIQ to back up data from your primary cluster to a secondary cluster once
a day at 10 PM. Depending on the size of your dataset, the first replication operation could take considerable time. After that,
however, replication operations would complete more quickly.
SyncIQ also offers automated failover and failback capabilities so that you can continue operations on the secondary
PowerScale cluster when your primary cluster becomes unavailable. It is possible to fully automate the failover of the protected
filesystems, and fully automate the failing over of clients with the assistance of third party automation tools.

Replication policies and jobs

Data replication is coordinated according to replication policies and replication jobs. Replication policies specify what data is
replicated, where the data is replicated to, and how often the data is replicated. Replication jobs are the operations that
replicate data from one PowerScale cluster to another. SyncIQ generates replication jobs according to replication policies.
A replication policy specifies two clusters: the source and the target. The cluster on which the replication policy exists is
the source cluster. The cluster that data is being replicated to is the target cluster. When a replication policy starts, SyncIQ
generates a replication job for the policy. When a replication job runs, files from a directory tree on the source cluster are
replicated to a directory tree on the target cluster; these directory trees are known as source and target directories.
After the first replication job created by a replication policy finishes, the target directory and all files contained in the target
directory are set to a read-only state, and can be modified only by other replication jobs belonging to the same replication policy.

Data replication with SyncIQ 259

 NOTE: To prevent permissions errors, make sure that ACL policy settings are the same across source and target clusters.

You can create two types of replication policies: synchronization policies and copy policies. A synchronization policy maintains an
exact replica of the source directory on the target cluster. If a file or sub-directory is deleted from the source directory, the file
or directory is deleted from the target cluster when the policy is run again.
You can use synchronization policies to fail over and fail back data between source and target clusters. When a source cluster
becomes unavailable, you can fail over data on a target cluster and make the data available to clients. When the source cluster
becomes available again, you can fail back the data to the source cluster.
A copy policy maintains recent versions of the files that are stored on the source cluster. However, files that are deleted on
the source cluster are not deleted from the target cluster. Failback is not supported for copy policies. Copy policies are most
commonly used for archival purposes.
Copy policies enable you to remove files from the source cluster without losing those files on the target cluster. Deleting files on
the source cluster improves performance on the source cluster while maintaining the deleted files on the target cluster. This can
be useful if, for example, your source cluster is being used for production purposes and your target cluster is being used only for
archiving.
After creating a job for a replication policy, SyncIQ must wait until the job completes before it can create another job for the
policy. Any number of replication jobs can exist on a cluster at a given time; however, no more than 50 replication jobs can run
on a source cluster at the same time. If more than 50 replication jobs exist on a cluster, the first 50 jobs run while the others are
queued to run.
There is no limit to the number of replication jobs that a target cluster can support concurrently. However, because more
replication jobs require more cluster resources, replication will slow down as more concurrent jobs are added.
When a replication job runs, OneFS generates workers on the source and target cluster. Workers on the source cluster read and
send data while workers on the target cluster receive and write data.
You can replicate any number of files and directories with a single replication job. You can prevent a large replication job from
overwhelming the system by limiting the amount of cluster resources and network bandwidth that data synchronization is
allowed to consume. Because each node in a cluster is able to send and receive data, the speed at which data is replicated
increases for larger clusters.

Related concepts
Creating replication policies

SmartLock considerations for SyncIQ

There are restrictions for using SyncIQ policies with SmartLock directories. These restrictions apply to both compliance and
enterprise SmartLock directories.
The restrictions are:
● There can be only one SmartLock directory for each SyncIQ policy.
● Do not create SmartLock directories in /ifs or /ifs/data.
● The SmartLock directory and the SyncIQ policy directory must be configured at the same root directory level.
For example, if the SyncIQ policy root directory is /ifs/data/home, you create the SmartLock directory in that same root
directory: /ifs/data/home.

Automated replication policies

You can manually start a replication policy at any time. You can also configure replication policies to start automatically based on
source directory modifications or schedules.
You can configure a replication policy to run according to a schedule so that you can control when replication is performed. You
can also configure policies to replicate the data captured in snapshots of a directory. You can also configure a replication policy
to start when SyncIQ detects a modification to the source directory. Such a policy allows SyncIQ to maintain a more current
version of your data on the target cluster.
Scheduling a policy can be useful under the following conditions:
● You want to replicate data when user activity is minimal.
● You can accurately predict when modifications are made to the data.

260 Data replication with SyncIQ

A scheduled policy can be reconfigured so that it does not run if there are no changes to the source directory between jobs.
However, if changes are made to the parent directory of the source directory or a sibling directory of the source directory, and
then a snapshot of the parent directory is taken, SyncIQ creates a job for the policy even if no changes have been made to the
source directory. If you monitor the cluster through the File System Analytics (FSA) feature of InsightIQ, the FSA job creates
snapshots of /ifs. This process might cause a replication job to start whenever the FSA job is run.
Replicating data that is contained in snapshots of a directory can be useful under the following conditions:
● You want to replicate data according to a schedule, and you are already generating snapshots of the source directory
through a snapshot schedule.
● You want to maintain identical snapshots on both the source and target cluster.
● You want to replicate existing snapshots to the target cluster.
To enable archival snapshots on the target cluster. This setting can only be enabled when the policy is created.

If a policy is configured to replicate snapshots, you can configure SyncIQ to replicate only snapshots that match a specified
naming pattern.
Configuring a policy to start when changes are made to the source directory can be useful under the following conditions:
● You want to retain an up-to-date copy of your data always.
● You are expecting many changes at unpredictable intervals.
For policies that are configured to start whenever changes are made to the source directory, SyncIQ checks the source
directories every ten seconds. SyncIQ checks all files and directories underneath the source directory, regardless of whether
those files or directories are excluded from replication. Consequently, SyncIQ might occasionally run a replication job
unnecessarily. For example, assume that newPolicy replicates /ifs/data/media but excludes /ifs/data/media/temp. If
a modification is made to /ifs/data/media/temp/[Link], SyncIQ runs newPolicy even though /ifs/data/media/
temp/[Link] is not replicated.
If a policy is configured to start whenever changes are made to the source directory and a replication job fails, SyncIQ waits
one minute before attempting to run the policy again. SyncIQ increases this delay exponentially for each failure up to a maximum
of eight hours. You can override the delay by running the policy manually at any time. After a job for the policy completes
successfully, SyncIQ will resume checking the source directory every ten seconds.
If a policy is configured to start whenever changes are made to the source directory, you can configure SyncIQ to wait a
specified period after the source directory is modified before starting a job.
NOTE: To avoid frequent synchronization of minimal sets of changes and overtaxing system resources, you should not
configure continuous replication when the source directory is highly active. It is better to configure continuous replication
with a change-triggered delay of several hours to consolidate groups of changes.

Source and target cluster association

SyncIQ associates a replication policy with a target cluster by marking the target cluster when the job runs for the first time.
Even if you modify the name or IP address of the target cluster, the mark persists on the target cluster. When a replication
policy is run, SyncIQ checks the mark to ensure that data is being replicated to the correct location.
On the target cluster, you can manually break an association between a replication policy and the target directory. Breaking
the association between a source and target cluster causes the mark on the target cluster to be deleted. You might want to
manually break a target association when an association is obsolete. If you break the association of a policy, the policy will fail on
the next job, if it is scheduled with a "target association has been broken" error. Reset the replication policy to run it again.
Breaking a policy association causes either a full replication or differential replication to occur the next time you run the
replication policy. During a full or differential replication, SyncIQ creates an association between the source and target clusters.
Depending on the amount of data being replicated, a full or differential replication can take a long time to complete.
CAUTION: Changes to the configuration of the target cluster outside of SyncIQ can introduce an error condition
that breaks the association between the source and target cluster. For example, changing the DNS record of
the target cluster could cause this problem. If you need to make significant configuration changes to the target
cluster outside of SyncIQ, make sure that your SyncIQ policies can still connect to the target cluster.

Data replication with SyncIQ 261

Configuring SyncIQ source and target clusters with NAT
Source and target clusters can use NAT (network address translation) for SyncIQ failover and failback purposes, but must be
configured appropriately.
In this scenario, source and target clusters are typically at different physical locations, use private, non-routable address space,
and do not have direct connections to the Internet. Each cluster is typically assigned a range of private IP addresses. For
example, a cluster with 12 nodes might be assigned IP addresses [Link] to [Link].
To communicate over the public Internet, source and target clusters must have all incoming and outgoing data packets that are
appropriately translated and redirected by a NAT-enabled firewall or router.
NOTE: In PowerScale OneFS 9.x and later versions, SyncIQ data is encrypted by default. To replicate unencrypted data,
you must disable encryption. See the "Data Encryption with SyncIQ" section in the PowerScale OneFS Web Administration
Guide for more information.
SyncIQ enables you to limit replication jobs to particular nodes within your cluster. For example, if your cluster was made up
of 12 nodes, you could limit replication jobs to only three of those nodes. For NAT support, you must establish a one-for-one
association between the source and target clusters. So, if you are limiting replication jobs to three nodes on your source cluster,
you must associate three nodes on your target cluster.
In this instance, you must configure static NAT, sometimes known as inbound mapping. On both the source and target clusters,
for the private address that is assigned to each node, you would associate a static NAT address. For example:

Table 86. Source and Target Clusters

Source cluster Target Cluster
Node name Private address NAT address Node name Private address NAT address
source-1 [Link] [Link] target-1 [Link] [Link]
source-2 [Link] [Link] target-2 [Link] [Link]
source-3 [Link] [Link] target-3 [Link] [Link]

To configure static NAT, you must edit the /etc/local/hosts file on all six nodes, and associate them with their
counterparts by adding the appropriate NAT address and node name. For example, in the /etc/local/hosts file on the
three nodes of the source cluster, the entries would look like:

[Link] target-1

[Link] target-2

[Link] target-3

Similarly, on the three nodes of the target cluster, edit the /etc/local/hosts file, and insert the NAT address and name of
the associated node on the source cluster. For example, on the three nodes of the target cluster, the entries would look like:

[Link] source-1

[Link] source-2

[Link] source-3

When the NAT server receives packets of SyncIQ data from a node on the source cluster, the NAT server replaces the packet
headers and the node port number and internal IP address with the NAT server's own port number and external IP address.
The NAT server on the source network then sends the packets through the Internet to the target network, where another NAT
server performs a similar process to transmit the data to the target node. The process is reversed when the data fails back.
With this type of configuration, SyncIQ can determine the correct addresses to connect with, so that SyncIQ can send and
receive data. In this scenario, no SmartConnect zone configuration is required.
For information about the ports used by SyncIQ, see the OneFS Security Configuration Guide for your OneFS version.

262 Data replication with SyncIQ

Full and differential replication
If a replication policy encounters an issue that cannot be fixed (for example, if the association was broken on the target cluster),
you might need to reset the replication policy. If you reset a replication policy, SyncIQ performs either a full replication or a
differential replication the next time the policy is run. You can specify the type of replication that SyncIQ performs.
During a full replication, SyncIQ transfers all data from the source cluster regardless of what data exists on the target cluster. A
full replication consumes large amounts of network bandwidth and can take a long time to complete. However, a full replication
is less strenuous on CPU usage than a differential replication.
A differential replication determines if files exist on the target. If the files do exist, the job compares the data in those files
between source and target checking for differences. If a difference is found, the entire file is transferred from the source to the
target. Any new files are fully transferred. Differential replication is a good choice if there are capacity constraints on the target
cluster.

Related tasks
Perform a full or differential replication

Controlling replication job resource consumption

You can create rules that limit the network traffic created by replication jobs, the rate at which files are sent by replication jobs,
the percent of CPU used by replication jobs, and the number of workers created for replication jobs.
If you limit the percentage of total workers that SyncIQ can create, the limit is applied to the total amount of workers that
SyncIQ could create, which is determined by cluster hardware. Workers on the source cluster read and send data while workers
on the target cluster receive and write data.
NOTE: File-operation rules might not work accurately for files that can take more than a second to transfer and for files
that are not predictably similar in size.

Related concepts
Managing replication performance rules

Replication policy priority

When creating a replication policy, you can configure a policy to have priority over other jobs.
If multiple replication jobs are queued to be run because the maximum number of jobs are already running, jobs created by
policies with priority will be run before jobs without priorities. For example, assume that 50 jobs are currently running. A job
without priority is the created and queued to run; next, a job with priority is created and queued to run. The job with priority will
run next, even though the job without priority has been queued for a longer period of time.
SyncIQ will also pause replication jobs without priority to allow jobs with priority to run. For example, assume that 50 jobs
are already running, and one of them does not have priority. If a replication job with priority is created, SyncIQ will pause the
replication job without priority and run the job with priority.

Replication reports
After a replication job completes, SyncIQ generates a replication report that contains detailed information about the job,
including how long the job ran, how much data was transferred, and what errors occurred.
If a replication report is interrupted, SyncIQ might create a subreport about the progress of the job so far. If the job is then
restarted, SyncIQ creates another subreport about the progress of the job until the job either completes or is interrupted again.
SyncIQ creates a subreport each time the job is interrupted until the job completes successfully. If multiple subreports are
created for a job, SyncIQ combines the information from the subreports into a single report.
SyncIQ routinely deletes replication reports. You can specify the maximum number of replication reports that SyncIQ retains and
the length of time that SyncIQ retains replication reports. If the maximum number of replication reports is exceeded on a cluster,
SyncIQ deletes the oldest report each time a new report is created.
You cannot customize the content of a replication report.

Data replication with SyncIQ 263

 NOTE: If you delete a replication policy, SyncIQ automatically deletes any reports that were generated for that policy.

Related concepts
Managing replication reports

Replication snapshots
SyncIQ generates snapshots to facilitate replication, failover, and failback between PowerScale clusters. Snapshots generated
by SyncIQ can also be used for archival purposes on the target cluster.

Source cluster snapshots

SyncIQ generates snapshots on the source cluster to ensure that a consistent point-in-time image is replicated and that
unaltered data is not sent to the target cluster.
Before running a replication job, SyncIQ creates a snapshot of the source directory. SyncIQ then replicates data according to
the snapshot rather than the current state of the cluster, allowing users to modify source directory files while ensuring that an
exact point-in-time image of the source directory is replicated.
For example, if a replication job of /ifs/data/dir/ starts at 1:00 PM and finishes at 1:20 PM, and /ifs/data/dir/file
is modified at 1:10 PM, the modifications are not reflected on the target cluster, even if /ifs/data/dir/file is not
replicated until 1:15 PM.
You can replicate data according to a snapshot generated with the SnapshotIQ software module. If you replicate data according
to a SnapshotIQ snapshot, SyncIQ does not generate another snapshot of the source directory. This method can be useful if you
want to replicate identical copies of data to multiple PowerScale clusters.
SyncIQ generates source snapshots to ensure that replication jobs do not transfer unmodified data. When a job is created for a
replication policy, SyncIQ checks whether it is the first job created for the policy. If it is not the first job created for the policy,
SyncIQ compares the snapshot generated for the earlier job with the snapshot generated for the new job.
SyncIQ replicates only data that has changed since the last time a snapshot was generated for the replication policy. When a
replication job is completed, SyncIQ deletes the previous source-cluster snapshot and retains the most recent snapshot until the
next job is run.

Target cluster snapshots

When a replication job is run, SyncIQ generates a snapshot on the target cluster to facilitate failover operations. When the next
replication job is created for the replication policy, the job creates a new snapshot and deletes the old one.
If a SnapshotIQ license has been activated on the target cluster, you can configure a replication policy to generate additional
snapshots that remain on the target cluster even as subsequent replication jobs run.
SyncIQ generates target snapshots to facilitate failover on the target cluster regardless of whether a SnapshotIQ license has
been configured on the target cluster. Failover snapshots are generated when a replication job completes. SyncIQ retains only
one failover snapshot per replication policy, and deletes the old snapshot after the new snapshot is created.
If a SnapshotIQ license has been activated on the target cluster, you can configure SyncIQ to generate archival snapshots on
the target cluster that are not automatically deleted when subsequent replication jobs run. Archival snapshots contain the same
data as the snapshots that are generated for failover purposes. However, you can configure how long archival snapshots are
retained on the target cluster. You can access archival snapshots the same way that you access other snapshots generated on a
cluster.

Data failover and failback with SyncIQ

SyncIQ enables you to perform automated data failover and failback operations between PowerScale clusters. If your primary
cluster goes offline, you can fail over to a secondary PowerScale cluster, enabling clients to continue accessing their data. If the
primary cluster becomes operational again, you can fail back to the primary cluster.
For the purposes of SyncIQ failover and failback, the cluster originally accessed by clients is referred to as the primary cluster.
The cluster that client data is replicated to is referred to as the secondary cluster.

264 Data replication with SyncIQ

Failover is the process that allows clients to access, view, modify, and delete data on a secondary cluster. Failback is the
process that allows clients to resume their workflow on the primary cluster. During failback, any changes made to data on the
secondary cluster are copied back to the primary cluster by means of a replication job using a mirror policy.
Failover and failback can be useful in disaster recovery scenarios. For example, if a primary cluster is damaged by a natural
disaster, you can migrate clients to a secondary cluster where they can continue normal operations. When the primary cluster is
repaired and back online, you can migrate clients back to operations on the primary cluster.
You can fail over and fail back to facilitate scheduled cluster maintenance, as well. For example, if you are upgrading the primary
cluster, you might want to migrate clients to a secondary cluster until the upgrade is complete and then migrate clients back to
the primary cluster.
NOTE: Data failover and failback is supported both for enterprise and compliance SmartLock directories. Compliance
SmartLock directories adhere to U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) regulation 17a-4(f), which requires
securities brokers and dealers to preserve records in a non-rewritable, non-erasable format. SyncIQ properly maintains
compliance with the 17a-4(f) regulation during failover and failback.

Related concepts
Initiating data failover and failback with SyncIQ

Data failover
Failover is the process of preparing data on a secondary cluster and switching over to the secondary cluster for normal client
operations. After you fail over to a secondary cluster, you can direct clients to access, view, and modify their data on the
secondary cluster.
Before failover is performed, you must create and run a SyncIQ replication policy on the primary cluster. You initiate the failover
process on the secondary cluster. To migrate data from the primary cluster that is spread across multiple replication policies,
you must initiate failover for each replication policy.
If the action of a replication policy is set to copy, any file that was deleted on the primary cluster will still be present on the
secondary cluster. When the client connects to the secondary cluster, all files that were deleted on the primary cluster will be
available.
If you initiate failover for a replication policy while an associated replication job is running, the failover operation completes
but the replication job fails. Because data might be in an inconsistent state, SyncIQ uses the snapshot generated by the last
successful replication job to revert data on the secondary cluster to the last recovery point.
If a disaster occurs on the primary cluster, any modifications to data that were made after the last successful replication job
started are not reflected on the secondary cluster. When a client connects to the secondary cluster, their data appears as it was
when the last successful replication job was started.

Related tasks
Fail over data to a secondary cluster

Data failback
Failback is the process of restoring primary and secondary clusters to the roles that they occupied before a failover operation.
After failback is complete, the primary cluster holds the latest data set and resumes normal operations, including hosting clients
and replicating data to the secondary cluster through SyncIQ replication policies in place.
The first step in the failback process is updating the primary cluster with all of the modifications that were made to the data on
the secondary cluster. The next step is preparing the primary cluster to be accessed by clients. The final step is resuming data
replication from the primary to the secondary cluster. At the end of the failback process, you can redirect users to resume data
access on the primary cluster.
To update the primary cluster with the modifications that were made on the secondary cluster, SyncIQ must create a SyncIQ
domain for the source directory.
You can fail back data with any replication policy that meets all of the following criteria:
● The policy has been failed over.
● The policy is a synchronization policy (not a copy policy).
● The policy does not exclude any files or directories from replication.

Data replication with SyncIQ 265

Related tasks
Fail back data to a primary cluster

SmartLock compliance mode failover and failback

You can replicate SmartLock compliance mode domains to a target cluster. This support includes failover and failback of these
SmartLock domains.
Because SmartLock compliance mode adheres to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) regulation 17a-4(f),
failover and failback of a compliance mode WORM domain requires some planning and setup.
Most importantly, both your primary (source) and secondary (target) clusters must be configured at initial setup as compliance
mode clusters. This process is described in the PowerScale installation guide for your node model (for example, the Generation 6
Installation Guide).

NOTE: A valid SmartLock license is required to configure a node in compliance mode.

In addition, both clusters must have directories that are defined as WORM domains with the compliance type. For example, if
you are storing your WORM files in the SmartLock compliance domain /ifs/financial-records/locked on the primary
cluster, you must have a SmartLock compliance domain on the target cluster to fail over to. Although the source and target
SmartLock compliance domains can have the same pathname, this is not required.

NOTE: You must start the compliance clock on both clusters.

SyncIQ handles conflicts during failover/failback operations on a SmartLock compliance mode domain by unlinking committed
files from the user store and leaving a link of the file in the compliance store. The ComplianceStoreDelete job automatically
tracks and removes expired files from the compliance store if they were put there as a result of SyncIQ conflict resolution. The
job runs automatically once per month or when started manually. For information about how to start the ComplianceStoreDelete
job, see the PowerScale OneFS CLI Administration Guide.

SmartLock replication limitations

Be aware of the limitations of replicating and failing back SmartLock directories with SyncIQ.
If the source directory or target directory of a SyncIQ policy is a SmartLock directory, replication and failback might not be
allowed. For more information, see the following table:

Table 87. Source and Target Directory Types

Source directory type Target directory type Replication Allowed Failback allowed
Non-SmartLock Non-SmartLock Yes Yes
Non-SmartLock SmartLock enterprise Yes Yes, unless files are committed to a
WORM state on the target cluster
Non-SmartLock SmartLock compliance No No
SmartLock enterprise Non-SmartLock Yes; however, retention Yes; however, the files do not have
dates and commit WORM status
status of files are lost.
SmartLock enterprise SmartLock enterprise Yes Yes; any newly committed WORM
files are included
SmartLock enterprise SmartLock compliance No No
SmartLock compliance Non-SmartLock No No
SmartLock compliance SmartLock enterprise No No
SmartLock compliance SmartLock compliance Yes Yes; any newly committed WORM
files are included

If you are replicating a SmartLock directory to another SmartLock directory, you must create the target SmartLock directory
before running the replication policy. Although OneFS creates a target directory automatically if a target directory does not
exist, OneFS does not create a target SmartLock directory automatically. If you attempt to replicate an enterprise directory

266 Data replication with SyncIQ

before the target directory has been created, OneFS creates a non-SmartLock target directory and the replication job succeeds.
If you replicate a compliance directory before the target directory has been created, the replication job fails.
If you replicate SmartLock directories to another PowerScale cluster with SyncIQ, the WORM state of files is replicated.
However, SmartLock directory configuration settings are not transferred to the target directory.
For example, if you replicate a directory that contains a committed file that is set to expire on March 4, the file is still set
to expire on March 4 on the target cluster. However, if the directory on the source cluster is set to prevent files from being
committed for more than a year, the target directory is not automatically set to the same restriction.
In the scenario where a WORM exclusion domain has been created on an enterprise mode or compliance mode directory,
replication of the SmartLock exclusion on the directory occurs only if the SyncIQ policy is rooted at the SmartLock domain that
contains the exclusion. If this condition is not met, only data is replicated, and the SmartLock exclusion is not created on the
target directory.

Recovery times and objectives for SyncIQ

The Recovery Point Objective (RPO) and the Recovery Time Objective (RTO) are measurements of the impacts that a disaster
can have on business operations. You can calculate your RPO and RTO for a disaster recovery with replication policies.
RPO is the maximum amount of time for which data is lost if a cluster suddenly becomes unavailable. For a PowerScale cluster,
the RPO is the amount of time that has passed since the last completed replication job started. The RPO is never greater than
the time it takes for two consecutive replication jobs to run and complete.
If a disaster occurs while a replication job is running, the data on the secondary cluster is reverted to the state it was in when
the last replication job completed. For example, consider an environment in which a replication policy is scheduled to run every
three hours, and replication jobs take two hours to complete. If a disaster occurs an hour after a replication job begins, the RPO
is four hours, because it has been four hours since a completed job began replicating data.
RTO is the maximum amount of time required to make backup data available to clients after a disaster. The RTO is always less
than or approximately equal to the RPO, depending on the rate at which replication jobs are created for a given policy.
If replication jobs run continuously, meaning that another replication job is created for the policy before the previous replication
job completes, the RTO is approximately equal to the RPO. When the secondary cluster is failed over, the data on the cluster is
reset to the state it was in when the last job completed; resetting the data takes an amount of time proportional to the time it
took users to modify the data.
If replication jobs run on an interval, meaning that there is a period of time after a replication job completes before the next
replication job for the policy starts, the relationship between RTO and RPO depends on whether a replication job is running
when the disaster occurs. If a job is in progress when a disaster occurs, the RTO is roughly equal to the RPO. However, if a
job is not running when a disaster occurs, the RTO is negligible because the secondary cluster was not modified since the last
replication job ran, and the failover process is almost instantaneous.

RPO Alerts
You can configure SyncIQ to create OneFS events that alert you to the fact that a specified Recovery Point Objective (RPO)
has been exceeded. You can view these events through the same interface as other OneFS events.
The events have an event ID of 400040020. The event message for these alerts follows the following format:

SW_SIQ_RPO_EXCEEDED: SyncIQ RPO exceeded for policy <replication_policy>

For example, assume you set an RPO of 5 hours; a job starts at 1:00 PM and completes at 3:00 PM; a second job starts at 3:30
PM; if the second job does not complete by 6:00 PM, SyncIQ creates a OneFS event.
You can enable RPO alert for SyncIQ policies including the preferred frequency so that you get alerts when the SyncIQ job fails
to meet the RPO criteria.

Replication policy priority

When creating a replication policy, you can configure a policy to have priority over other jobs.
If multiple replication jobs are queued to be run because the maximum number of jobs are already running, jobs created by
policies with priority will be run before jobs without priorities. For example, assume that 50 jobs are currently running. A job

Data replication with SyncIQ 267

without priority is the created and queued to run; next, a job with priority is created and queued to run. The job with priority will
run next, even though the job without priority has been queued for a longer period of time.
SyncIQ will also pause replication jobs without priority to allow jobs with priority to run. For example, assume that 50 jobs
are already running, and one of them does not have priority. If a replication job with priority is created, SyncIQ will pause the
replication job without priority and run the job with priority.

SyncIQ license functionality

You can replicate data to another PowerScale cluster only if you activate a SyncIQ license on both the local cluster and the
target cluster.
If a SyncIQ license becomes inactive, you cannot create, run, or manage replication policies. Also, all previously created
replication policies are disabled. Replication policies that target the local cluster are also disabled. However, data that was
previously replicated to the local cluster is still available.

Replication for nodes with multiple interfaces

You can force replication and restrict target network settings to use only when specified pools or interfaces are selected.
If you create a policy and specify a particular SmartConnect IP pool, SyncIQ traffic is restricted to the nodes that participate in
that pool. It does not restrict the network ports that the pool uses. This situation can result in SyncIQ traffic using the correct
nodes, but the wrong ports.
You can force the policy to use only the ports in a specified pool for both source and target clusters using the command-line
interface.

Restrict SyncIQ source nodes

You can restrict SyncIQ to use the interfaces in the specified IP address pool using the command-line interface.
SyncIQ uses the front-end network ports of a node to send replication data from the source to the target cluster. By default,
SyncIQ policies use all nodes and interfaces to allow for maximum throughput of a given policy. However, you may want to
exclude certain nodes from a SyncIQ policy. Excluding nodes from a SyncIQ policy is beneficial for larger clusters where data
replication jobs can be assigned to certain nodes.
By selecting a predefined IP address pool, you can restrict replication processing to specific nodes on the source cluster. This
option is useful to ensure that replication jobs are not competing with other applications for specific node resources. Specifying
the IP address pool allows you to define which networks are used for replication data transfer.
By default, SyncIQ uses all interfaces in the nodes that belong to the IP address pool, disregarding any interface membership
settings in the pool.
You must use the force replication and restrict target network options together to tie traffic from the source to the correct
interface.

NOTE: SyncIQ only allows source node restrictions on subnets and pools from the default groupnet.

Creating replication policies

You can create replication policies that determine when data is replicated with SyncIQ.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

268 Data replication with SyncIQ

Excluding directories in replication
You can exclude directories from being replicated by replication policies even if the directories exist under the specified source
directory.
NOTE: Failback is not supported for replication policies that exclude directories.

By default, all files and directories under the source directory of a replication policy are replicated to the target cluster.
However, you can prevent directories under the source directory from being replicated.
If you specify a directory to exclude, files and directories under the excluded directory are not replicated to the target cluster. If
you specify a directory to include, only the files and directories under the included directory are replicated to the target cluster;
any directories that are not contained in an included directory are excluded.
If you both include and exclude directories, any excluded directories must be contained in one of the included directories;
otherwise, the excluded-directory setting has no effect. For example, consider a policy with the following settings:
● The root directory is /ifs/data
● The included directories are /ifs/data/media/music and /ifs/data/media/movies
● The excluded directories are /ifs/data/archive and /ifs/data/media/music/working
In this example, the setting that excludes the /ifs/data/archive directory has no effect because the /ifs/data/
archive directory is not under either of the included directories. The /ifs/data/archive directory is not replicated
regardless of whether the directory is explicitly excluded. However, the setting that excludes the /ifs/data/media/music/
working directory does have an effect, because the directory would be replicated if the setting was not specified.
In addition, if you exclude a directory that contains the source directory, the exclude-directory setting has no effect. For
example, if the root directory of a policy is /ifs/data, explicitly excluding the /ifs directory does not prevent /ifs/data
from being replicated.
Any directories that you explicitly include or exclude must be contained in or under the specified root directory. For example,
consider a policy in which the specified root directory is /ifs/data. In this example, you could include both the /ifs/data/
media and the /ifs/data/users/ directories because they are under /ifs/data.
As of release 9.7, the behavior of synchronization policies has changed. If a directory is excluded from a synchronization policy,
it gets deleted from the target cluster if it exists there. This is a change from previous behavior, where excluded directories
were retained on the target.

Related tasks
Specify source directories and files

Excluding files in replication

If you do not want specific files to be replicated by a replication policy, you can exclude them from the replication process
through file-matching criteria statements. You can configure file-matching criteria statements during the replication-policy
creation process.
NOTE: You cannot fail back replication policies that exclude files.

A file-criteria statement can include one or more elements. Each file-criteria element contains a file attribute, a comparison
operator, and a comparison value. You can combine multiple criteria elements in a criteria statement with Boolean "AND" and
"OR" operators. You can configure any number of file-criteria definitions.
Configuring file-criteria statements can cause the associated jobs to run slowly. It is recommended that you specify file-criteria
statements in a replication policy only if necessary.
Modifying a file-criteria statement will cause a full replication to occur the next time that a replication policy is started.
Depending on the amount of data being replicated, a full replication can take a very long time to complete.
For synchronization policies, if you modify the comparison operators or comparison values of a file attribute, and a file no longer
matches the specified file-matching criteria, the file is deleted from the target the next time the job is run. This rule does not
apply to copy policies.

Related references
File criteria options

Data replication with SyncIQ 269

Related tasks
Specify source directories and files

File criteria options

You can configure a replication policy to exclude files that meet or do not meet specific criteria.
You can specify file criteria that are based on the following file attributes:

Date created Includes or excludes files based on when the file was created. This option is available for copy policies
only.
You can specify a relative date and time, such as "two weeks ago", or a specific date and time, such
as "January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

Date accessed Includes or excludes files based on when the file was last accessed. This option is available for copy
policies only, and only if the global access-time-tracking option of the cluster is enabled.
You can specify a relative date and time, such as "two weeks ago", or a specific date and time, such
as "January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

Date modified Includes or excludes files that are based on when the file was last modified. This option is available for
copy policies only.
You can specify a relative date and time, such as "two weeks ago" or a specific date and time, such as
"January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

File name Includes or excludes files based on the file name. You can specify to include or exclude full or partial
names that contain specific text.
The following wildcard characters are accepted:
NOTE: Alternatively, you can filter file names by using POSIX regular-expression (regex)
text. PowerScale clusters support IEEE Std 1003.2 (POSIX.2) regular expressions. For more
information about POSIX regular expressions, see the BSD man pages.

Table 88. Replication File Matching Wildcards

Wildcard character Description
* Matches any string in place of the asterisk.
For example, m* matches movies and m123.

[ ] Matches any characters that are contained

in the brackets, or a range of characters
separated by a dash.
For example, b[aei]t matches bat, bet, and
bit.
For example, 1[4-7]2 matches 142, 152,
162, and 172.
You can exclude characters within brackets by
following the first bracket with an exclamation
mark.
For example, b[!ie] matches bat but not
bit or bet.
You can match a bracket within a bracket if it is
either the first or last character.
For example, [[c]at matches cat and [at.
You can match a dash within a bracket if it is
either the first or last character.

270 Data replication with SyncIQ

 Table 88. Replication File Matching Wildcards (continued)
Wildcard character Description

For example, car[-s] matches cars and

car-.

? Matches any character in place of the question

mark.
For example, t?p matches tap, tip, and top.

Path Includes or excludes files based on the file path. This option is available for copy policies only.
You can specify to include or exclude full or partial paths that contain specified text. You can also
include the wildcard characters *, ?, and [ ].

Size Includes or excludes files based on their size.

NOTE: File sizes are represented in multiples of 1024, not 1000.

Type Includes or excludes files based on one of the following file-system object types:
● Soft link
● Regular file
● Directory

Related concepts
Excluding files in replication

Related tasks
Specify source directories and files

Configure default replication policy settings

You can configure default settings for replication policies. If you do not modify these settings when creating a replication policy,
the specified default settings are applied.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Settings.
2. In the Default Policy Settings section, if you want policies to connect only to nodes in a specified SmartConnect zone,
select Connect only to the nodes within the target cluster SmartConnect zone.
NOTE: This option will affect only policies that specify the target cluster as a SmartConnect zone.

3. Specify which nodes you want replication policies to connect to when a policy is run.

To connect policies to all nodes on a source Click Run the policy on all nodes in this cluster.
cluster:

To connect policies only to nodes contained in a a. Click Run the policy only on nodes in the specified subnet and
specified subnet and pool: pool.
b. From the Subnet and pool list, select the subnet and pool .

NOTE: SyncIQ does not support dynamically allocated IP address pools. If a replication job connects to a dynamically
allocated IP address, SmartConnect might reassign the address while a replication job is running, which would
disconnect the job and cause it to fail.

4. Click Save Changes.

Data replication with SyncIQ 271

Create a replication policy
You can create a replication policy with SyncIQ that defines how and when data is replicated to another PowerScale cluster.
Configuring a replication policy is a five-step process.
Configure replication policies carefully. If you modify any of the following policy settings after the policy is run, OneFS performs
either a full or differential replication the next time the policy is run:
● Source directory
● Included or excluded directories
● File-criteria statement
● Target cluster name or address
This applies only if you target a different cluster. If you modify the IP or domain name of a target cluster, and then modify
the replication policy on the source cluster to match the new IP or domain name, a full replication is not performed.
● Target directory

NOTE: If you create a replication policy for a SmartLock directory, the SyncIQ and SmartLock compliance domains must be
configured at the same root level. A SmartLock compliance domain cannot be nested inside a SyncIQ domain.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Configure basic policy settings

You must configure basic settings for a replication policy.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. Click Create a SyncIQ policy.
3. In the Settings area, in the Policy name field, type a name for the replication policy.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a description for the replication policy.
5. For the Action setting, specify the type of replication policy.
● To copy all files from the source directory to the target directory, click Copy.

NOTE: Failback is not supported for copy policies.

● To copy all files from the source directory to the target directory and delete any files on the target directory that are not
in the source directory, click Synchronize.
6. For the Run Job setting, specify when replication jobs run.

Run jobs only when manually Click Manually.

initiated by a user.
Run jobs automatically a. Click On a schedule.
according to a schedule. b. Specify a schedule.
If you configure a replication policy to run more than once a day, you cannot configure
the interval to span across two calendar days. For example, you cannot configure a
replication policy to run every hour starting at 7:00 PM and ending at 1:00 AM.
c. To prevent the policy from being run when the contents of the source directory have
not been modified, click Only run if source directory contents are modified.
d. To create OneFS events if a specified RPO is exceeded, click Send RPO alerts
after... and then specify an RPO.
For example, assume you set an RPO of 5 hours; a job starts at 1:00 PM and
completes at 3:00 PM; a second job starts at 3:30 PM; if the second job does not
complete by 6:00 PM, SyncIQ creates a OneFS event.

272 Data replication with SyncIQ

 NOTE: This option is valid only if RPO alerts have been globally enabled through
SyncIQ settings. The events have an event ID of 400040020.

NOTE: It is recommended that you do not schedule multiple SyncIQ jobs at

the same time, as it might cause performance issues on the cluster. For more
information, see KB article: 000158788

Run jobs automatically every a. Click Whenever the source is modified.

time that a change is made to b. To configure SyncIQ to wait a specified amount of time after the source directory is
the source directory. modified before starting a replication job, click Change-Triggered Sync Job Delay
and then specify a delay.
Runs jobs automatically every a. Click Whenever a snapshot of the source directory is taken.
time that a snapshot is taken of b. To only replicate only data contained in snapshots that match a specific naming
the source directory. pattern, type a snapshot naming pattern into the Run job if snapshot name
matches the following pattern box.
c. Select the Sync existing snapshots before policy creation time check box to
sync existing snapshots by preserving names, creation times, and other parameters.

The next step in creating a replication policy is specifying source directories and files.

Related references
Replication policy settings

Specify source directories and files

You must specify the directories and files you want to replicate.
CAUTION: In a SyncIQ replication policy, OneFS enables you to specify a source directory that is a target
directory, or is contained within a target directory, from a different replication policy. Referred to as cascading
replication, this use case is specifically for backup purposes, and should be used carefully. OneFS does not allow
failback in such cases.
1. In the Source Cluster area, in the Source Root Directory field, type the full path of the source directory that you want to
replicate to the target cluster.
You must specify a directory contained in /ifs. You cannot specify the directory /ifs/.snapshot or a subdirectory of it.

2. Optional: Prevent specific subdirectories of the source directory from being replicated.
● To include a directory, in the Included Directories area, click Add a directory path.
● To exclude a directory, in the Excluded Directories area, click Add a directory path.
3. Optional: Prevent specific files from being replicated by specifying file matching criteria.
a. In the File Matching Criteria area, select a filter type.
b. Select an operator.
c. Type a value.
Files that do not meet the specified criteria will not be replicated to the target cluster. For example, if you specify File
Type doesn't match .txt, SyncIQ will not replicate any files with the .txt file extension. If you specify Created
after 08/14/2013, SyncIQ will not replicate any files created before August 14th, 2013.
If you want to specify more than one file matching criterion, you can control how the criteria relate to each other by clicking
either Add an "Or" condition or Add an "And" condition.

4. Specify which nodes you want the replication policy to connect to when the policy is run.

Connect the policy to all nodes in the source Click Run the policy on all nodes in this cluster.
cluster.

Connect the policy only to nodes contained in a a. Click Run the policy only on nodes in the specified subnet and
specified subnet and pool. pool.

Data replication with SyncIQ 273

 b. From the Subnet and pool list, select the subnet and pool.

NOTE: SyncIQ does not support dynamically allocated IP address pools. If a replication job connects to a dynamically
allocated IP address, SmartConnect might reassign the address while a replication job is running, which would
disconnect the job and cause it to fail.

The next step in the process of creating a replication policy is specifying the target directory.

Related concepts
Excluding directories in replication
Excluding files in replication

Related references
File criteria options
Replication policy settings

Specify the policy target directory

You must specify a target cluster and directory to replicate data to.
1. In the Target Cluster area, in the Target Host field, type one of the following:
● The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of any node in the target cluster.
● The hostname of any node in the target cluster.
● The name of a SmartConnect zone in the target cluster.
● The IPv4 or IPv6 address of any node in the target cluster.
● localhost
This option replicates data to another directory on the local cluster.

NOTE: SyncIQ does not support dynamically allocated IP address pools. If a replication job connects to a dynamically
allocated IP address, SmartConnect might reassign the address while a replication job is running, which would
disconnect the job and cause it to fail.

2. In the Target Directory field, type the absolute path of the directory on the target cluster that you want to replicate data
to.
CAUTION:

If you specify an existing directory on the target cluster, ensure that the directory is not the target of
another replication policy. If this is a synchronization policy, ensure that the directory is empty. All files are
deleted from the target of a synchronization policy the first time that the policy is run.
If the specified target directory does not exist on the target cluster, the directory is created the first time that the job is run.
SyncIQ does not allow setting /ifs as the target path of a policy:

isi sync policies create test sync /ifs/ [Link] /ifs -f

Error in field(s): target_path Path
'/ifs/' cannot be the target

The failback is not supported if you are using /ifs as a source path. A policy that is rooted at /ifs will not sync /ifs/.ifsvar.
This exclusion policy does not support failback for policies with /ifs as their root path.
If this is a copy policy, and files in the target directories share the same name as files in the source directory, the target
directory files are overwritten when the job is run.

3. If you want replication jobs to connect only to the nodes in the SmartConnect zone that is specified by the target cluster,
click Connect only to the nodes within the target cluster SmartConnect Zone.
The next step of creating a replication policy is to specify policy target snapshot settings.

274 Data replication with SyncIQ

Related references
Replication policy settings

Configure policy target snapshot settings

You can optionally specify how archival snapshots are generated on the target cluster. You can access archival snapshots the
same way that you access SnapshotIQ snapshots.
SyncIQ always retains one snapshot on the target cluster to facilitate failover, regardless of these settings.
1. To create archival snapshots on the target cluster, in the Target Snapshots area, select Enable capture of snapshots on
the target cluster.
2. Optional: To modify the default alias of the last snapshot that is created according to the replication policy, in the Snapshot
Alias Name field, type a new alias.
You can specify the alias name as a snapshot naming pattern. For example, the following naming pattern is valid:

%{PolicyName}-on-%{SrcCluster}-latest

The previous example produces names similar to the following:

newPolicy-on-Cluster1-latest

3. Optional: To modify the snapshot naming pattern for snapshots that are created according to the replication policy, in
the Snapshot Naming Pattern field, type a naming pattern. Each snapshot that is generated for this replication policy is
assigned a name that is based on this pattern.
For example, the following naming pattern is valid:

%{SnapName}-%{SnapCreateTime}

The example produces names similar to the following:

newPolicy-10:30

4. Select one of the following options for how snapshots should expire:
● Click Snapshots do not expire.
● Click Snapshots expire after... and specify an expiration period.
● Click Existing Snapshots Expires to expire the snapshots after a time interval.

NOTE: The target snapshot expire duration is the duration obtained by subtracting the current time from the source
snapshot expiration.

The next step in the process of creating a replication policy is configuring advanced policy settings.

Related references
Replication policy settings

Configure advanced policy settings

You can optionally configure advanced settings for a replication policy.
1. Optional: In the Priority field, specify whether the policy has priority.
Selecting Normal will cause jobs created by the policy not to have priority. Selecting High will give priority to jobs created
by the replication policy.
2. Optional: From the Log Level list, select the level of logging you want SyncIQ to perform for replication jobs.
The following log levels are valid, listed from least to most verbose:
● Fatal
● Error
● Notice
● Info

Data replication with SyncIQ 275

 ● Copy
● Debug
● Trace
Replication logs are typically used for debugging purposes. If necessary, you can log in to a node through the command-line
interface and view the contents of the /var/log/isi_migrate.log file on the node.

NOTE: The recommended log level is Notice.

3. Optional: If you want SyncIQ to perform a checksum on each file data packet that is affected by the replication policy, select
the Validate File Integrity check box.
If you enable this option, and the checksum values for a file data packet do not match, SyncIQ retransmits the affected
packet.

4. Optional: To increase the speed of failback for the policy, click Prepare policy for accelerated failback performance.
Selecting this option causes SyncIQ to perform failback configuration tasks the next time that a job is run, rather than
waiting to perform those tasks during the failback process. This will reduce the amount of time needed to perform failback
operations when failback is initiated.
5. Optional: To modify the length of time SyncIQ retains replication reports for the policy, in the Keep Reports For area,
specify a length of time.
After the specified expiration period has passed for a report, SyncIQ automatically deletes the report.
Some units of time are displayed differently when you view a report than how they were originally entered. Entering a
number of days that is equal to a corresponding value in weeks, months, or years results in the larger unit of time being
displayed. For example, if you enter a value of 7 days, 1 week appears for that report after it is created. This change occurs
because SyncIQ internally records report retention times in seconds and then converts them into days, weeks, months, or
years.

6. Optional: Specify whether to record information about files that are deleted by replication jobs by selecting one of the
following options:
● Click Record when a synchronization deletes files or directories.
● Click Do not record when a synchronization deletes files or directories.

This option is applicable for synchronization policies only.

7. Specify how the policy replicates CloudPools SmartLink files.

If set to Deny, SyncIQ replicates all CloudPools SmartLink files to the target cluster as SmartLink files; if the target cluster
does not support CloudPools, the job will fail. If set to Force, SyncIQ replicates all SmartLink files to the target cluster as
regular files. If set to Allow, SyncIQ will attempt to replicate SmartLink files to the target cluster as SmartLink files; if the
target cluster does not support CloudPools, SyncIQ will replicate the SmartLink files as regular files.
The next step in the process of creating a replication policy is saving the replication policy settings.

Related references
Replication policy settings

Save replication policy settings

SyncIQ does not create replication jobs for a replication policy until you save the policy.
Review the current settings of the replication policy. If necessary, modify the policy settings.
In the Create SyncIQ Policy dialog box, after all policy settings are as intended, click Create Policy.

Assess a replication policy

Before running a replication policy for the first time, you can view statistics on the files that would be affected by the replication
without transferring any files. This can be useful if you want to preview the size of the data set that will be transferred if you
run the policy.

NOTE: You can assess only replication policies that have never been run before.

276 Data replication with SyncIQ

1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the row of a replication policy, from the Actions column, select Assess Sync.
3. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Summary.
4. After the job completes, in the SyncIQ Recent Reports table, in the row of the replication job, click View Details.
The report displays the total amount of data that would have been transferred in the Total Data field.

Set RPO alerts for SyncIQ policy

You can enable RPO alerts for a SyncIQ policy, set the alert frequency setting for the policy to receive job failure alerts, and
apply the same setting across all policies.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears.
3. Under the Global settings area, select Enable RPO alert checkbox.
4. Under Default RPO Alert Preferences, click Send RPO alerts after...
You can click Do not send RPO alerts if you do not want to send RPO alerts.
5. Enter the value in the RPO alert interval box and select the appropriate time unit from the drop-down list.
The RPO alert preferences are now set for the new policy.

Managing replication to remote clusters

You can manually run, view, assess, pause, resume, cancel, resolve, and reset replication jobs that target other clusters.
After a policy job starts, you can pause the job to suspend replication activities. Afterwards, you can resume the job, continuing
replication from the point where the job was interrupted. You can also cancel a running or paused replication job if you want to
free the cluster resources allocated for the job. A paused job reserves cluster resources whether or not the resources are in use.
A cancelled job releases its cluster resources and allows another replication job to consume those resources. No more than five
running and paused replication jobs can exist on a cluster at a time. However, an unlimited number of canceled replication jobs
can exist on a cluster. If a replication job remains paused for more than a week, SyncIQ automatically cancels the job.

Start a replication job

You can manually start a replication job for a replication policy at any time.
If you want to replicate data according to an existing snapshot, at the OneFS command prompt, run the isi sync jobs
start command with the --source-snapshot option. You cannot replicate data according to snapshots generated by
SyncIQ.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the Actions column for a job, select Start Job.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Pause a replication job

You can pause a running replication job and then resume the job later. Pausing a replication job temporarily stops data from
being replicated, but does not free the cluster resources replicating the data.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, in the Actions column for a job, click Pause Running Job.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Data replication with SyncIQ 277

Resume a replication job
You can resume a paused replication job.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Summary.
2. In the Currently Running table, in the Actions column for a job, click Resume Running Job.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Cancel a replication job

You can cancel a running or paused replication job. Cancelling a replication job stops data from being replicated and frees the
cluster resources that were replicating data. You cannot resume a cancelled replication job. To restart replication, you must start
the replication policy again.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, in the Actions column for a job, click Cancel Running Job.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

View active replication jobs

You can view information about replication jobs that are currently running or paused.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the Active Jobs table, review information about active replication jobs.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Related references
Replication job information

Replication job information

You can view information about replication jobs through the Active Jobs table.

Status The status of the job. The following job statuses are possible:

Running The job is currently running without error.

Paused The job has been temporarily paused.

Policy Name The name of the associated replication policy.

Started The time the job started.
Elapsed How much time has elapsed since the job started.
Transferred The number of files that have been transferred, and the total size of all transferred files.
Source Directory The path of the source directory on the source cluster.
Target Host The target directory on the target cluster.
Actions Displays any job-related actions that you can perform.

278 Data replication with SyncIQ

Initiating data failover and failback with SyncIQ
You can fail over from one PowerScale cluster to another if, for example, your primary cluster becomes unavailable. You can fail
back when the primary cluster becomes available again. You can revert failover if you decide that the failover was unnecessary
or if you failed over for testing purposes.
NOTE: Data failover and failback are supported for both compliance SmartLock directories and enterprise SmartLock
directories. Compliance SmartLock directories can be created only on clusters that have been set up as compliance mode
clusters during initial configuration. You cannot rename folders after creation in compliance mode.

Related concepts
Data failover and failback with SyncIQ

Fail over data to a secondary cluster

You can fail over to a secondary PowerScale cluster if your primary cluster becomes unavailable.
You must have created and successfully run a replication policy on the primary cluster. This action replicates data to the
secondary cluster.
NOTE: Data failover is supported both for SmartLock enterprise and compliance directories. A SmartLock compliance
directory requires its own separate replication policy.
Complete the following procedure for each replication policy that you want to fail over.
1. If your primary cluster is still online, complete the following steps:
a. Stop all writes to the replication policy's path, including both local and client activity.
This action ensures that new data is not written to the policy path as you prepare for failover to the secondary cluster.
b. Modify the replication policy so that it is set to run only manually.
This action prevents the policy on the primary cluster from automatically running a replication job. If the policy on the
primary cluster runs a replication job while writes are allowed to the target directory, the job fails and the replication
policy is deactivated. If this happens, modify the policy so that it is set to run only manually, resolve the policy, and
complete the failback process. After you complete the failback process, you can modify the policy to run according to a
schedule again.
2. On the secondary cluster, click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
3. In the SyncIQ Local Targets table, select More > Allow Writes for a replication policy.
4. Re-enable client access, and direct users to begin accessing their data from the secondary cluster.

Related concepts
Data failover

Revert a failover operation

Reverting a failover operation on a secondary cluster enables you to replicate data from the primary cluster to the secondary
cluster again. Failover reversion is useful if the primary cluster becomes available before data is modified on the secondary
cluster or if you failed over to a secondary cluster for testing purposes.
Fail over by executing a replication policy.
Reverting a failover operation does not migrate modified data back to the primary cluster. To migrate data that clients have
modified on the secondary cluster, you must fail back to the primary cluster.
Complete the following procedure for each replication policy that you want to fail over:
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
2. In the SyncIQ Local Targets table, in the row for a replication policy, from the Actions column, select Disallow Writes.

Data replication with SyncIQ 279

Fail back data to a primary cluster
After you fail over to a secondary cluster, you can fail back to the primary cluster.
CAUTION: Before you begin, we recommend that you run SyncIQ's resync-prep job as soon as possible before
the fail back. The resync-prep job sets the dataset on the primary cluster to read-only, which will prevent any
possible writes from occurring. Only run the resync-prep job if the allow-writes are not going to be reverted.
Note that if writes have occurred on the primary cluster, then resync-prep will revert those changes. Creating
a temporary snapshot is a safeguard to reduce risk of data loss if a failover-failback is performed incorrectly.
You must take a snapshot on the SyncIQ source path prior to resync-prep if that data needs to be preserved.
This is to prevent situations in which both clusters are in a writable state during fail over, when clients could
potentially be writing to both clusters.
Before you can fail back to the primary cluster, you must already have failed over to the secondary cluster. Also, you must
ensure that your primary cluster is back online.
NOTE: Data failback is supported for SmartLock compliance and enterprise directories. If clients committed new SmartLock
files while the secondary cluster was in operation, these SmartLock files are replicated to the primary cluster during failback.
1. On the primary cluster, click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies list, for a replication policy, click More > Resync-prep.
This action causes SyncIQ to create a mirror policy for the replication policy on the primary cluster and secondary cluster.
The mirror policy is placed under Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets on the primary cluster. On the secondary
cluster, the mirror policy is placed under Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
SyncIQ names mirror policies according to the following pattern:

<replication-policy-name>_mirror

3. Before beginning the failback process, prevent clients from accessing the secondary cluster.
This action ensures that SyncIQ fails back the latest data set, including all changes that users made to data on the
secondary cluster while the primary cluster was out of service. We recommend that you wait until client activity is low before
preventing access to the secondary cluster.
4. On the secondary cluster, click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
5. In the SyncIQ Policies list, for the mirror policy, click More > Start Job.
Alternatively, you can edit the mirror policy on the secondary cluster, and specify a schedule for the policy to run.
6. On the primary cluster, click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
7. On the primary cluster, in the SyncIQ Local Targets list, for the mirror policy, select More > Allow Writes.
8. On the secondary cluster, click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
9. On the secondary cluster, in the SyncIQ Policies list, click More > Resync-prep for the mirror policy.
This puts the secondary cluster back into read-only mode and ensures that the data sets are consistent on both the primary
and secondary clusters.
Redirect clients to begin accessing their data on the primary cluster. Although not required, it is safe to remove a mirror policy
after failback has completed successfully.

Related concepts
Data failback

Run the ComplianceStoreDelete job in a Smartlock compliance

mode domain
SyncIQ handles conflicts during failover/failback operations on a SmartLock compliance mode domain by unlinking committed
files from the user store and leaving a link of the file in the compliance store. The ComplianceStoreDelete job automatically
tracks and removes expired files from the compliance store if they were put there as a result of SyncIQ conflict resolution.
For example, you perform a SyncIQ failover or failback on a SmartLock compliance mode domain. The operation results in
a committed file being reverted to an uncommitted state. For conflict resolution, a copy of the committed file is stored in
the compliance store. The committed file in the compliance store eventually expires. The ComplianceStoreDelete job runs

280 Data replication with SyncIQ

automatically once a month and deletes the expired file. Expired files that are in use (referenced from outside of compliance
store) will not be deleted.
The ComplianceStoreDelete job runs automatically once per month or when started manually. You can run the job manually from
the Web UI on the Job Operations page.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types table, click Start Job in the ComplianceStoreDelete row.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.
3. Click Start Job.

Managing replication policies

You can modify, view, enable, and disable replication policies.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Modify a replication policy

You can modify the settings of a replication policy.
If you modify any of the following policy settings after a policy runs, OneFS performs either a full or differential replication the
next time the policy runs:
● Source directory
● Included or excluded directories
● File-criteria statement
● Target cluster
This applies only if you target a different cluster. If you modify the IP or domain name of a target cluster, and then modify
the replication policy on the source cluster to match the new IP or domain name, a full replication is not performed.
● Target directory
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the row for a policy, click View/Edit.
3. In the View SyncIQ Policy Details dialog box, click Edit Policy.
4. Modify the settings of the replication policy, and then click Save Changes. See the Configure basic policy settings section
for the editable fields.
The Sync existing snapshots before policy creation time check box is disabled while modifying the same policy.

Related references
Replication policy settings

Delete a replication policy

You can delete a replication policy. After a policy is deleted, SyncIQ no longer creates replication jobs for the policy. Deleting a
replication policy breaks the target association on the target cluster, and allows writes to the target directory.
If you want to temporarily suspend a replication policy from creating replication jobs, you can disable the policy, and then enable
the policy again later.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the row for a policy, select Delete Policy.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.
NOTE: The operation will not succeed until SyncIQ can communicate with the target cluster; until then, the policy will
not be removed from the SyncIQ Policies table. After the connection between the source cluster and target cluster
is reestablished, SyncIQ will delete the policy the next time that the job is scheduled to run; if the policy is configured

Data replication with SyncIQ 281

 to run only manually, you must manually run the policy again. If SyncIQ is permanently unable to communicate with the
target cluster, run the isi sync policies delete command with the --local-only option. This will delete the
policy from the local cluster only and not break the target association on the target cluster. For more information, see
the OneFS CLI Administration Guide.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Enable or disable a replication policy

You can temporarily suspend a replication policy from creating replication jobs, and then enable it again later.
NOTE:

If you disable a replication policy while an associated replication job is running, the running job is not interrupted. However,
the policy will not create another job until the policy is enabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the row for a replication policy, select either Enable Policy or Disable Policy.
If neither Enable Policy nor Disable Policy appears, verify that a replication job is not running for the policy. If an
associated replication job is not running, ensure that the SyncIQ license is active on the cluster.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

View replication policies

You can view information about replication policies.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, review information about replication policies.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Related references
Replication policy settings

Replication policy information

You can view information about replication policies through the SyncIQ Policies table.

Policy Name The name of the policy.

State Whether the policy is enabled or disabled.
Last Known Good When the last successful job ran.
Schedule When the next job is scheduled to run. A value of Manual indicates that the job can be run only
manually. A value of When source is modified indicates that the job will be run whenever changes
are made to the source directory.
Source Directory The path of the source directory on the source cluster.
Target Host : The IP address or fully qualified domain name of the target cluster and the full path of the target
Directory directory.
Actions Any policy-related actions that you can perform.

282 Data replication with SyncIQ

Related tasks
View replication policies targeting the local cluster

Replication policy settings

You configure replication policies to run according to replication policy settings.

Policy name The name of the policy.

Description Describes the policy. For example, the description might explain the purpose or function of the policy.
Enabled Determines whether the policy is enabled.
Action Determines the how the policy replicates data. All policies copy files from the source directory to the
target directory and update files in the target directory to match files on the source directory. The
action determines how deleting a file on the source directory affects the target. The following values
are valid:

Copy If a file is deleted in the source directory, the file is not deleted in the target
directory.
Synchronize Deletes files in the target directory if they are no longer present on
the source. This ensures that an exact replica of the source directory is
maintained on the target cluster.

Run job Determines whether jobs are run automatically according to a schedule or only when manually
specified by a user.
Last Successful Run Displays the last time that a replication job for the policy completed successfully.
Last Started Displays the last time that the policy was run.
Source Root The full path of the source directory. Data is replicated from the source directory to the target
Directory directory.
Included Directories Determines which directories are included in replication. If one or more directories are specified by this
setting, any directories that are not specified are not replicated.
Excluded Directories Determines which directories are excluded from replication. Any directories specified by this setting
are not replicated.
File Matching Determines which files are excluded from replication. Any files that do not meet the specified criteria
Criteria are not replicated.
Restrict Source Determines whether the policy can run on all nodes on the source cluster or run only on specific
Nodes nodes.
Target Host The IP address or fully qualified domain name of the target cluster.
Target Directory The full path of the target directory. Data is replicated to the target directory from the source
directory.
Restrict Target Determines whether the policy can connect to all nodes on the target cluster or can connect only to
Nodes specific nodes.
Capture Snapshots Determines whether archival snapshots are generated on the target cluster.
Snapshot Alias Specifies a snapshot alias for the latest archival snapshot taken on the target cluster.
Name
Snapshot Naming Specifies how archival snapshots are named on the target cluster.
Pattern
Snapshot Expiration Specifies how long archival snapshots are retained on the target cluster before they are automatically
deleted by the system.
Workers Threads Specifies the number of workers per node that are generated by OneFS to perform each replication
Per Node job for the policy.
Log Level Specifies the amount of information that is recorded for replication jobs.

Data replication with SyncIQ 283

 More verbose options include all information from less verbose options. The following list describes
the log levels from least to most verbose:
● Fatal
● Error
● Notice
● Info
● Copy
● Debug
● Trace
Replication logs are typically used for debugging purposes. If necessary, you can log in to a node
through the command-line interface and view the contents of the /var/log/isi_migrate.log
file on the node.

NOTE: Notice is the recommended log level.

Validate File Determines whether OneFS performs a checksum on each file data packet that is affected by a
Integrity replication job. If a checksum value does not match, OneFS retransmits the affected file data packet.
Keep Reports For Specifies how long replication reports are kept before they are automatically deleted by OneFS.
Log Deletions on Determines whether OneFS records when a synchronization job deletes files or directories on the
Synchronization target cluster.

The following replication policy fields are available only through the OneFS command-line interface.

Source Subnet Specifies whether replication jobs connect to any nodes in the cluster or if jobs can connect only to
nodes in a specified subnet.
Source Pool Specifies whether replication jobs connect to any nodes in the cluster or if jobs can connect only to
nodes in a specified pool.
Password Set Specifies a password to access the target cluster.
Report Max Count Specifies the maximum number of replication reports that are retained for this policy.
Target Compare Determines whether full or differential replications are performed for this policy. Full or differential
Initial Sync replications are performed the first time a policy is run and after a policy is reset.
Source Snapshot Determines whether snapshots generated for the replication policy on the source cluster are deleted
Archive when the next replication policy is run. Enabling archival source snapshots does not require you to
activate the SnapshotIQ license on the cluster.
Source Snapshot If snapshots generated for the replication policy on the source cluster are retained, renames
Pattern snapshots according to the specified rename pattern.
Source Snapshot If snapshots generated for the replication policy on the source cluster are retained, specifies an
Expiration expiration period for the snapshots.
Restrict Target Determines whether replication jobs connect only to nodes in a given SmartConnect zone. This setting
Network applies only if the Target Host is specified as a SmartConnect zone.
Target Detect Determines whether SyncIQ checks the target directory for modifications before replicating files. By
Modifications default, SyncIQ always checks for modifications.
NOTE: Disabling this option could result in data loss. It is recommended that you consult
PowerScale Technical Support before disabling this option.

Resolve Determines whether you can manually resolve the policy if a replication job encounters an error.

Managing replication to the local cluster

You can interrupt replication jobs that target the local cluster.
You can cancel a currently running job that targets the local cluster, or you can break the association between a policy and its
specified target. Breaking a source and target cluster association causes SyncIQ to perform a full replication the next time the
policy is run.

284 Data replication with SyncIQ

Cancel replication to the local cluster
You can cancel a replication job that is targeting the local clusters.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
2. In the SyncIQ Local Targets table, specify whether to cancel a specific replication job or all replication jobs targeting the
local cluster.
● To cancel a specific job, in the row for a replication job, select Cancel Running Job.
● To cancel all jobs targeting the local cluster, select the check box to the left of Policy Name and then select Cancel
Selection from the Select a bulk action list.

Break local target association

You can break the association between a replication policy and the local cluster. Breaking the target association allows writes to
the target directory but also requires you to reset the replication policy before you can run the policy again.
CAUTION:

After a replication policy is reset, SyncIQ performs a full or differential replication the next time the policy is
run. Depending on the amount of data being replicated, a full or differential replication can take a very long time
to complete.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
2. In the SyncIQ Local Targets table, in the row for a replication policy, select Break Association.
3. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

View replication policies targeting the local cluster

You can view information about replication policies that are currently replicating data to the local cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Local Targets.
2. In the SyncIQ Local Targets table, view information about replication policies.

Related references
Replication policy information

Remote replication policy information

You can view information about replication policies that are currently targeting the local cluster.
The following information is displayed in the SyncIQ Local Targets table:

ID The ID of the replication policy.

Policy Name The name of the replication policy.
Source Host The name of the source cluster.
Source Cluster GUID The GUID of the source cluster.
Coordinator IP The IP address of the node on the source cluster that is acting as the job coordinator.
Updated The time when data about the policy or job was last collected from the source cluster.
Target Path The path of the target directory on the target cluster.
Status The current status of the replication job.
Actions Displays any job-related actions that you can perform.

Data replication with SyncIQ 285

Managing replication performance rules
You can manage the impact of replication on cluster performance by creating rules that limit the network traffic that is created
and the rate at which files replication jobs send files.
NOTE: The SyncIQ performance rules apply only to SyncIQ processes.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

Create a network traffic rule

You can create a network traffic rule that limits the amount of network traffic that replication policies are allowed to generate
during a specified time period.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. Click Create a SyncIQ Performance Rule.
3. From the Rule Type list, select Bandwidth.
4. In the Limit field, specify the maximum number of kilobits per second that replication policies are allowed to send.
5. In the Schedule area, specify the time and days of the week that you want to apply the rule.
6. Click Create Performance Rule.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

Create a file operations rule

You can create a file-operations rule that limits the number of files that replication jobs can send per second.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. Click Create a SyncIQ Performance Rule.
3. From the Rule Type list, select Bandwidth.
4. In the Limit field, specify the maximum number of files per second that replication policies are allowed to send.
5. In the Schedule area, specify the time and days of the week that you want to apply the rule.
6. Click Create Performance Rule.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

Modify a performance rule

You can modify a performance rule.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. In the SyncIQ Performance Rules, in the row for the rule you want to modify, click View/Edit.
3. Click Edit Performance Rule.
4. Modify rule settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

286 Data replication with SyncIQ

Delete a performance rule
You can delete a performance rule.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. In the SyncIQ Performance Rules table, in the row for the rule you want to delete, select Delete Rule.
3. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

Enable or disable a performance rule

You can disable a performance rule to temporarily prevent the rule from being enforced. You can also enable a performance rule
after it has been disabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. In the SyncIQ Performance Rules table, in the row for a rule you want to enable or disable, select either Enable Rule or
Disable Rule.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

View performance rules

You can view information about replication performance rules.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Performance Rules.
2. In the SyncIQ Performance Rules table, view information about performance rules.

Related concepts
Controlling replication job resource consumption

Managing replication reports

In addition to viewing replication reports, you can configure how long reports are retained on the cluster. You can also delete any
reports that have passed their expiration period.

Related concepts
Replication reports

Configure default replication report settings

You can configure the default amount of time that SyncIQ retains replication reports for. You can also configure the maximum
number of reports that SyncIQ retains for each replication policy.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Settings.
2. In the Report Settings area, in the Keep Reports For area, specify how long you want to retain replication reports for.
After the specified expiration period has passed for a report, SyncIQ automatically deletes the report.
Some units of time are displayed differently when you view a report than how you originally enter them. Entering a number
of days that is equal to a corresponding value in weeks, months, or years results in the larger unit of time being displayed.
For example, if you enter a value of 7 days, 1 week appears for that report after it is created. This change occurs because
SyncIQ internally records report retention times in seconds and then converts them into days, weeks, months, or years for
display.

Data replication with SyncIQ 287

3. In the Number of Reports to Keep Per Policy field, type the maximum number of reports you want to retain at a time for
a replication policy.
4. Click Submit.

Related concepts
Replication reports

Delete replication reports

Replication reports are routinely deleted by SyncIQ after the expiration date for the reports has passed. SyncIQ also deletes
reports after the number of reports exceeds the specified limit. Excess reports are periodically deleted by SyncIQ; however,
you can manually delete all excess replication reports at any time. This procedure is available only through the command-line
interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster, and log in.
2. Delete excess replication reports by running the following command:

isi sync reports rotate

Related concepts
Replication reports

View replication reports

You can view replication reports and subreports.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Reports.
2. In the SyncIQ Reports table, in the row for a report, click View Details.
If a report is composed of subreports, the report is displayed as a folder. Subreports are displayed as files within report
folders.

Related concepts
Replication reports

Related references
Replication report information

Replication report information

You can view information about replication jobs through the Reports table.

Policy Name The name of the associated policy for the job. You can view or edit settings for the policy by clicking
the policy name.

Status Displays the status of the job. The following job statuses are possible:
Running
The job is currently running without error.
Paused
The job has been temporarily paused.
Finished
The job completed successfully.
Failed
The job failed to complete.

288 Data replication with SyncIQ

Started Indicates when the job started.

Ended Indicates when the job ended.

Duration Indicates how long the job took to complete.
Transferred The total number of files that were transferred during the job run, and the total size of all transferred
files. For assessed policies, Assessment appears.

Source Directory The path of the source directory on the source cluster.

Target Host The IP address or fully qualified domain name of the target cluster.

Action Displays any report-related actions that you can perform.

Related tasks
View replication reports

Managing failed replication jobs

If a replication job fails due to an error, SyncIQ might disable the corresponding replication policy. For example SyncIQ might
disable a replication policy if the IP or hostname of the target cluster is modified. If a replication policy is disabled, the policy
cannot be run.
To resume replication for a disabled policy, you must either fix the error that caused the policy to be disabled, or reset the
replication policy. It is recommended that you attempt to fix the issue rather than reset the policy. If you believe you have fixed
the error, you can return the replication policy to an enabled state by resolving the policy. You can then run the policy again to
test whether the issue was fixed. If you are unable to fix the issue, you can reset the replication policy. However, resetting the
policy causes a full or differential replication to be performed the next time the policy is run.
NOTE: Depending on the amount of data being synchronized or copied, full and differential replications can take a very long
time to complete.

Resolve a replication policy

If SyncIQ disables a replication policy due to a replication error, and you fix the issue that caused the error, you can resolve the
replication policy. Resolving a replication policy enables you to run the policy again. If you cannot resolve the issue that caused
the error, you can reset the replication policy.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the Policies table, in the row for a policy, select Resolve.

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Reset a replication policy

If a replication job encounters an error that you cannot resolve, you can reset the corresponding replication policy. Resetting
a policy causes OneFS to perform a full or differential replication the next time the policy is run. Resetting a replication policy
deletes the latest snapshot generated for the policy on the source cluster.
CAUTION: Depending on the amount of data being replicated, a full or differential replication can take a very
long time to complete. Reset a replication policy only if you cannot fix the issue that caused the replication
error. If you fix the issue that caused the error, resolve the policy instead of resetting the policy.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ > Policies.
2. In the SyncIQ Policies table, in the row for a policy, select Reset Sync State.

Data replication with SyncIQ 289

Related concepts
Replication policies and jobs

Perform a full or differential replication

After you reset a replication policy, you must perform either a full or differential replication. You can do this replication only from
the CLI.
Reset a replication policy.
NOTE: Files smaller than 32 KB are sent directly to the target cluster even if they are the same. Only files 32 KB and larger
are compared to the target to determine if they should be sent.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in through the root or compliance administrator
account.
2. Specify the type of replication you want to perform by running the isi sync policies modify command.
● To perform a full replication, disable the --target-compare-initial-sync option.
For example, the following command disables differential synchronization for newPolicy:

isi sync policies modify newPolicy \

--target-compare-initial-sync false

● To perform a differential replication, enable the --target-compare-initial-sync option.

For example, the following command enables differential synchronization for newPolicy:

isi sync policies modify newPolicy \

--target-compare-initial-sync true

3. Run the policy by running the isi sync jobs start command.
For example, the following command runs newPolicy:

isi sync jobs start newPolicy

Related concepts
Full and differential replication

290 Data replication with SyncIQ

 18
Data Encryption with SyncIQ
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• SyncIQ data encryption overview
• SyncIQ traffic encryption
• Per-policy throttling overview
• SyncIQ encrypted connection
• Manage certificates for target clusters
• Manage certificates for source clusters
• Manage SyncIQ policies with encryption enabled

SyncIQ data encryption overview

OneFS now enables you to encrypt SyncIQ data from one PowerScale cluster to another.
You can use the integrated capabilities of SyncIQ to encrypt the data during transfer between PowerScale clusters and protect
the data in flight during intercluster replications.
SyncIQ policies now support end-to-end encryption for cross-cluster communications.
You can manage certificates with the help of the new SyncIQ store. SyncIQ provides encryption by using X.509 certificates that
are paired with TLS version 1.2 and OpenSSL version 1.0.2o. The certificates are stored and managed in the certificate stores
of the source and target clusters . Encryption between clusters takes place with each cluster storing its own certificate and
the certificate of its peer. The source cluster is required to store the certificate of the target cluster, and conversely. Storing
the certificate of the peer essentially creates an allowed list of approved clusters for data replication. Certification revocation is
supported through an external Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) responder.
PowerScale clusters may now require that all incoming and outgoing SyncIQ policies be encrypted through a simple change in
the SyncIQ Global Settings.

SyncIQ traffic encryption

SyncIQ data that is transmitted between the source and target clusters is encrypted.
SyncIQ provides additional protection from man-in-the-middle attacks and prevents unauthorized source or target relationships.
The standard certificate configuration for SyncIQ policy encryption requires six files:
● [Link] - A single end-entity certificate that identifies the Source cluster
● [Link] - The associated private key file that goes with the Source cluster identity cert
● [Link] - A self-signed root CA file that issued the Source cluster identity cert
● [Link] - A single end-entity certificate that identifies the Target cluster
● [Link] - The associated private key file that goes with the Target cluster identity cert
● [Link] - A self-signed root CA file that issued the Target cluster identity cert (may be the same as 3)
Because SyncIQ encryption requires mutual authentication SSL handshakes, each cluster must specify its own identity
certificate and the CA certificate of the peer.

Per-policy throttling overview

OneFS now enables you to set per-policy throttling rules.
Existing versions of OneFS enables you to configure global bandwidth throttling rules that are applied evenly across running
policies. Now, you can set bandwidth reservations per policy, instead of the global level.

Data Encryption with SyncIQ 291

SyncIQ encrypted connection
SyncIQ encryption is enabled by default to protect the OneFS cluster's data.
Previously, SyncIQ did not enforce encryption over the wire for inter-cluster communication by default. This situation might
have left clusters at risk by exposing themselves to security vulnerabilities. In addition, without using encrypted connections
SyncIQ allowed incoming SyncIQ connections to overwrite any existing data on the target cluster.
Now, SyncIQ encryption is enabled by default for new clusters that do not have any SyncIQ policies. If one or more policies
do exist on the cluster, encryption is disabled by default. The user must enable it manually from the OneFS web administration
interface.

Activate SyncIQ license

You can activate a SyncIQ license on your cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click Activate SyncIQ if SyncIQ is not activated for the cluster.
The Licensing page appears. For more details, see the Licensing section of the OneFS Web Administration Guide.

Enable SyncIQ encryption

You can enable SyncIQ encryption by updating all the existing policies. If encryption is enabled without setting certificates or
updating all the existing policies correctly, the SyncIQ policy fails.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears.
3. Under the Global settings area, select Encrypt SyncIQ connection.
The Please note dialog box appears with the following message:

There are one or more non-encrypted SyncIQ policies on this cluster. After enabling
encryption, each of these policies will need to be manually updated to select a
target cluster certificate.

4. Click Enable.
The encryption is set as true. The existing policies will need to be manually updated to select a target cluster certificate.
After the encryption is enabled, it cannot be disabled.
NOTE: Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Manage certificates for target clusters

You can add, view, modify, and delete a certificate that is associated with the target cluster.

Add target cluster certificate

You can add a certificate to your target cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Certificates tab and then click Add certificate.
The Add certificate dialog box appears.
3. Enter the details:
● Certificate file: Click Browse to choose the certificate path. This field is mandatory.
● Alias name: Enter the name of the target cluster certificate.
● Description: Enter any description that is related to the target cluster certificate.

292 Data Encryption with SyncIQ

4. Click Save Changes.
The certificate is listed in the Target certificate list and appears when you try to add or modify a SyncIQ policy. Also, all
added certificates appear in the Certificates tab.
NOTE: Click Cancel to close the Add certificate dialog box.

View target cluster certificate

You can view the details of a certificate that is associated with your target cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Certificates tab.
You can view all the certificates that are associated with your target cluster.
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.
3. Under the Actions area, click View/Edit next to the certificate you want to view.
The View/Edit certificate details dialog box appears.
4. View the details:
● Id: View the identification detail that is generated automatically.
● Alias name: View the name of the target cluster certificate.
● Description: View any description that is related to the target cluster certificate.
● Status: View status of the target cluster certificate.
● Expires: View the expiry date for the target cluster certificate.
Click Cancel to close the View/Edit certificate details dialog box.

Modify target cluster certificate

You can modify the details of a certificate that is associated with your target cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Certificates tab.
You can view all the certificates that are associated with your target cluster.
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.
3. Under the Actions area, click View/Edit next to the certificate you want to modify.
The View/Edit certificate details dialog box appears.
4. Modify the details:
● Id: You cannot modify the identification detail that is generated automatically.
● Alias name: Modify the name of the target cluster certificate.
● Description: Modify any description that is related to the target cluster certificate.
● Status: You cannot modify the status of the target cluster certificate.
● Expires: You cannot modify the expiry date for the target cluster certificate.
5. Click Save Changes.
The changes are saved.
Click Cancel to close the View/Edit certificate details dialog box without saving the changes.

Delete target cluster certificate

You can delete a certificate that is associated with your target cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Certificates tab.
You can view all the certificates that are associated with your target cluster.
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.

Data Encryption with SyncIQ 293

3. Under the Actions column, click More next to the certificate you want to delete.
The Confirm delete dialog box appears.
4. Click Delete.
The certificate is deleted.
Click Cancel to close the Confirm delete dialog box.

Manage certificates for source clusters

You can add, view, modify, and delete a certificate that is associated with the source cluster.

Add source cluster certificate

You can add a certificate to your source cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears.
A warning message similar to the following appears when no source cluster is configured.

OneFS is unable to detect any source cluster certificates. A source cluster

certificate is required to enable encryption. Please add at least one source cluster
certificate using Server certificates section below.

3. In the Server certificates section, click Add Certificate.

The Add certificate dialog box appears.
4. Enter the details:
● Certificate file: Click Browse to select the certificate path. This field is mandatory.
● Key path: Click Browse to select the key path. This field is mandatory.
● Key password: Enter a password for the key.
● Alias name: Enter the name of the source cluster certificate.
● Description: Enter any description that is related to the target source cluster certificate.
5. Click Save Changes.
The certificate is added in the Server certificates section.
NOTE: Click Cancel to close the Add certificate dialog box.

View source cluster certificate

You can view the details of a certificate that is associated with your source cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears.
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.
3. In the Server certificates section, click View/Edit next to the certificate you want to view.
The View certificate details dialog box appears.
4. View the details:
● Id: View the identification detail that is generated automatically.
● Alias name: View the name of the source cluster certificate.
● Description: View any description that is related to the source cluster certificate.
● Status: View the status of the source cluster certificate.
● Expires: View the expiry date for the source cluster certificate.
Click Cancel to close the View certificate details dialog box.

294 Data Encryption with SyncIQ

Modify source cluster certificate
You can modify the details of a certificate that is associated with your source cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears.
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.
3. In the Server certificates section, click View/Edit next to the certificate you want to modify.
The View certificate details dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit.
The Edit certificate details dialog box appears.
5. Modify the details:
● Id: You cannot modify the identification detail that is generated automatically.
● Alias name: Modify the name of the source cluster certificate.
● Description: Modify any description that is related to the source cluster certificate.
● Status: You cannot modify the status of the source cluster certificate.
● Expires: You cannot modify the expiry date for the source cluster certificate.
6. Click Save Changes.
The changes are saved.
Click Cancel to close the Edit certificate details dialog box without saving the changes.

Delete source cluster certificate

You can delete a certificate that is associated with your source cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Edit SyncIQ settings area appears
From the Filter by status list, select any of the options (All, Valid, Invalid, Expired, Expiring) to filter the list of certificates.
3. Under the Actions column, click More next to the certificate you want to delete.
The Confirm delete dialog box appears.
4. Click Delete.
The certificate is deleted.
Click Cancel to close the Confirm delete dialog box.

Manage SyncIQ policies with encryption enabled

You can create, view, and modify a SyncIQ policy when encryption is enabled.

Create SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled

You can create a SyncIQ policy when encryption is enabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Policies tab.
The SyncIQ policies area appears.
3. Click Create a SyncIQ policy.

Data Encryption with SyncIQ 295

 The Configure target certificate dialog box appears with a message similar to the following when no target cluster
certificate is configured .

OneFS is unable to detect any target cluster certificates. A

target cluster certificate is required to enable policy with encryption
enabled. Please add at least one target cluster certificate.

4. Click Configure certificate.

The Certificates area appears. You can add target certificates.
NOTE: Click Cancel to close the Configure target certificate dialog box.

View SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled

You can view a SyncIQ policy when encryption is enabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Policies tab.
The SyncIQ policies area appears.
3. In the SyncIQ policies section, click View/Edit next to the policy you want to view.
The View SyncIQ policy details dialog box appears.
4. View the details of the policy.
NOTE: Click Close to exit the View SyncIQ policy details dialog box.

Modify SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled

You can modify a SyncIQ policy when encryption is enabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Policies tab.
The SyncIQ policies area appears.
3. In the SyncIQ policies section, click View/Edit next to the policy you want to modify.
The View SyncIQ policy details dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit policy.
The Edit SyncIQ policy details dialog box appears.
5. You can modify the details of the policy. You can select the appropriate certificate from the Target certificate list in the
Target cluster section.
If there is no target cluster certificate added, the Configure target certificate dialog box appears with a message similar
to the following:

OneFS is unable to detect any target cluster certificates. A target cluster

certificate is required to edit policy with encryption enabled. Please add at least
one target cluster certificate.

Click Configure certificate and you will be redirected to the Certificates tab to create a target cluster certificate.

Delete SyncIQ policy with encryption enabled

You can delete a SyncIQ policy when encryption is enabled.
1. Click Data Protection > SyncIQ.
The SyncIQ page appears.
2. Click the Policies tab.
The SyncIQ policies area appears.
3. Under the Actions column, click More next to the policy you want to delete.
The Confirm delete dialog box appears.

296 Data Encryption with SyncIQ

4. Click Delete. The SyncIQ policy is deleted.
Click Cancel to close the Confirm delete dialog box .

Data Encryption with SyncIQ 297

 19
Data Transfer with SmartSync (Datamover)
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• SmartSync (Datamover) overview

SmartSync (Datamover) overview

SmartSync (also called Datamover) enables you to transfer data between PowerScale clusters and S3 object stores (ECS, AWS,
S3, and AWS Glacier IR) using the Datamover transfer engine that is embedded in OneFS. SmartSync ensures that you have a
consistent copy of your data on another PowerScale cluster or cloud platform. SmartSync allows you to control the frequency
of data transfers at scheduled times using policies. Similar to the SyncIQ module, you can transfer data at the directory level,
while optionally excluding specific files and subdirectories from being transferred.
The embedded SmartSync feature provides data replication for file and object deployments on-premises or in the cloud.
SmartSync enables file-to-file transfers between PowerScale clusters using RPC and file-to-object copy transfers to S3 (ECS,
AWS) and Azure cloud systems.
This section provides an overview of the SmartSync transfer engine. You can configure and administer Datamover using OneFS
CLI commands. See the PowerScale OneFS CLI Administration Guide for details.
SmartSync provides the following primary functions:
● Data protection
● Data repurposing (copy)
● Data archive
SmartSync provides a flexible execution model of push or pull data transfers between systems. While SyncIQ allows
administrators to push data from a source to a target cluster, SmartSync also allows for a target cluster to pull data from
a source cluster, resulting in reduced throughput and CPU impacts on the source cluster.
● Faster data transfers than SyncIQ
● Snapshot locking
● Separation between Datamover datasets and user snapshots prevents accidental deletion of snapshots during transfers
● Scalable run-time engine
● Dataset "reconnect" allows systems with identical datasets to reconnect for instant incremental backups during failover
scenarios
● Namespace contention avoidance
● Batch operations for efficient small file transfers
● Bulk operations to address file ID-mapping contention
● Improved bench marking
● Smart scheduling
● CPU and bandwidth throttling
● Centralized management of policies and jobs
● Replication between multiple sets of clusters
● NANO(A)N: Not-All-Nodes-On-(All)-Networks detection. Active accounts are monitored on-the-fly by each node.
○ Nodes with no accessibility to an account do not participate in a transfer
● Improved error handling and graceful crash recovery to ensure checkpointing stability
● Data recovery
○ You can restore from a dataset that you replicated to another cluster. For example, you can copy a dataset from an
archive tier to a production tier as a one-time copy. That copy is read/write on arrival.
○ You can perform a one-time copy at any time to your archive tier or between any two clusters. A one-time copy provides
the option to not make SmartSync datasets, which means you can start using them read/write immediately.
File-to-file high-performance data transfers

298 Data Transfer with SmartSync (Datamover)

● Streamlined baseline and incremental file transfers
● Namespace contention avoidance. Namespace creation is separated from data transfers
● Batch transfers of small files, attributes, and data blocks
● Asynchronous I/O backed by lightweight threads (fibers) allows for maximized parallel transfers
File-to-object content distribution "copy" and "backup" format transfers
NOTE: In PowerScale OneFS [Link] and later, the FILE_ON_OBJECT_BACKUP feature expands the one-time copy to
Cloud capacity by introducing a new full-fidelity backup to Cloud format. This backup format preserves metadata including
encodings, attributes, alternate data streams, hardlinks, and softlinks through backups, incremental backups, restores, and
daisy chain workflows. The targets available for this workflow are ECS, AWS, S3, and AWS Glacier IR. See the PowerScale
OneFS CLI Administration Guide and PowerScale OneFS CLI Command Reference Guide for details.

You can run the isi dm policies create --repeat-copy-base-target-dataset-type

FILE_ON_OBJECT_BACKUP policy to restore any non-HEAD older dataset created by an incremental backup. If the file has
changed, an incremental restore will only upload the changed bits of a file rather than the entire file.
The following table lists current limitations in file-to-object transfers.

Table 89. Limitations

Limitation Description
ADS files Skipped when encountered
Hardlinks Not supported. An object is created for each link (hard links are not preserved)
Symlinks Skipped when encountered
Special files Skipped when encountered
Metadata Only the following POSIX attributes are copied: mode, UID, GID, atime, mtime, ctime
File name encoding Encodings are converted to UTF-8
Large files Errors are returned for files greater than the cloud provider's maximum object size
Sparse files Sparse sections are not preserved; they are written out fully as zeros
CloudPools Not supported
Compression in transit Not supported
Copy back from the cloud Not supported if the data was not created by Data Mover
Incremental transfers Only one-time file-to-object COPY to Cloud or COPY back from Cloud transfers are supported.
File-to-object BACKUP format incremental transfers supported in PowerScale OneFS [Link]
and later versions are full-fidelity transfers and are not subject to the limitations of COPY
format incremental transfers.

Licensing and credential requirements

● SmartSync must be hosted on all PowerScale clusters where transfers are planned.
● For OneFS copy to cloud and copy back from cloud transfers, SmartSync is installed on OneFS but not on the cloud systems.
● SmartSync waits for the administrator to commit the OneFS upgrade to OneFS [Link].
● You must have a current SyncIQ (ISI_LICENSING_SYNCIQ_v_2_0) license activated on PowerScale clusters before you can
run SmartSync between them.
● ○ SmartSync is enabled when a SyncIQ license is activated and the certificates in the following table are configured.
○ If a SyncIQ license expires after configuring policies, the jobs will continue to run. Datamover Rest APIs will serve the
GET and DELETE calls; PUT and POST calls will not be allowed.
● A shared CA is the simplest configuration, however it is not a requirement to communicate with peer SmartSync engines.
Two systems trust each other if they have the CAs that signed each other's identity certificates.
● Users must have the ISI_PRIV_DATAMOVER administrative (AIMA) privilege to configure the SmartSync using the Rest
APIs.
● Inbound TCP port 7722 must be opened in firewalls.

Data Transfer with SmartSync (Datamover) 299

Certificate requirements
The following Certificate Authorities (CA) and trust hierarchies are required.

Table 90. Certificate Requirements

Requirement Description
TLS certificates ● A mutually authenticated TLS handshake is required.
Authorization, authentication, and encryption are provided
by TLS certificates.
● TLS certificates are always required for daemon startup
and all communication between SmartSync engines.
● Encryption can be disabled, but authorization and
authentication cannot be disabled.
Certificate Authorities (CA) ● One or more Certificate Authorities (CA) are required on
each Datamover system.
● Dell recommends that customers use a new, SmartSync-
specific CA for signing SmartSync identity certificates.
● The CA that signs an identity certificate does not need to
be installed on the system that the identity certificate is
installed on. Two systems trust each other if they have the
CAs that signed each other's identity certificates.
Identity certificates ● The certificate that provides authentication of the identity
claimed.
● Exactly one identity certificate must exist on each
SmartSync system.
● Identity certificates are signed by one of the CAs deployed
on the systems that the system is going to communicate
with.
Trust hierarchies ● Two systems trust each other if they have the CAs that
signed each other's identity certificates.
● There is no concept of unidirectional trust—trust is
entirely mutual.

Reference documentation
The OneFS CLI Administration Guide provides details for configuring and administering SmartSync. The SmartSync feature
includes a full set of isi dm CLI commands documented in the PowerScale OneFS CLI Command Reference Guide.
You can find these guides under the Documentation tab on the PowerScale OneFS Support site.

300 Data Transfer with SmartSync (Datamover)

 20
Data layout with FlexProtect
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• FlexProtect overview
• File striping
• Requested data protection
• FlexProtect data recovery
• Requesting data protection
• Requested protection settings
• Requested protection for disk space usage

FlexProtect overview
A PowerScale cluster is designed to continuously serve data, even when one or more components simultaneously fail. OneFS
ensures data availability by striping or mirroring data across the cluster. If a cluster component fails, data that is stored on the
failed component is available on another component. After a component failure, lost data is restored on healthy components by
the FlexProtect proprietary system.
Data protection is specified at the file level, not the block level, enabling the system to recover data quickly. All data, metadata,
and parity information is distributed across all nodes: the cluster does not require a dedicated parity node or drive. No single
node limits the speed of the rebuild process.

File striping
OneFS uses a PowerScale cluster's internal network to distribute data automatically across individual nodes and disks in the
cluster. OneFS protects files as the data is being written. No separate action is necessary to protect data.
Before writing files to storage, OneFS breaks files into smaller logical chunks called stripes. The size of each file chunk is
referred to as the stripe unit size. Each OneFS block is 8 KB, and a stripe unit consists of 16 blocks, for a total of 128 KB per
stripe unit. During a write, OneFS breaks data into stripes and then logically places the data into a stripe unit. As OneFS writes
data across the cluster, OneFS fills the stripe unit and protects the data according to the number of writable nodes and the
specified protection policy.
OneFS can continuously reallocate data and make storage space more usable and efficient. As the cluster size increases, OneFS
stores large files more efficiently.
To protect files that are 128KB or smaller, OneFS does not break these files into smaller logical chunks. Instead, OneFS uses
mirroring with forward error correction (FEC). With mirroring, OneFS makes copies of each small file's data (N), adds an FEC
parity chunk (M), and distributes multiple instances of the entire protection unit (N+M) across the cluster.

Requested data protection

The requested protection of data determines the amount of redundant data created on the cluster to ensure that data is
protected against component failures. OneFS enables you to modify the requested protection in real time while clients are
reading and writing data on the cluster.
OneFS provides several data protection settings. You can modify these protection settings at any time without rebooting
or taking the cluster or file system offline. When planning your storage solution, keep in mind that increasing the requested
protection reduces write performance and requires additional storage space for the increased number of nodes.

Data layout with FlexProtect 301

OneFS uses the Reed Solomon algorithm for N+M protection. In the N+M data protection model, N represents the number
of data-stripe units, and M represents the number of simultaneous node or drive failures—or a combination of node and drive
failures—that the cluster can withstand without incurring data loss. N must be larger than M.
In addition to N+M data protection, OneFS also supports data mirroring from 2x to 8x, allowing from two to eight mirrors of
data. In terms of overall cluster performance and resource consumption, N+M protection is often more efficient than mirrored
protection. However, because read and write performance is reduced for N+M protection, data mirroring might be faster for
data that is updated often and is small in size. Data mirroring requires significant overhead and might not always be the best
data-protection method. For example, if you enable 3x mirroring, the specified content is duplicated three times on the cluster;
depending on the amount of content mirrored, this can consume a significant amount of storage space.

Related concepts
Requesting data protection

Related references
Requested protection settings
Requested protection for disk space usage

FlexProtect data recovery

OneFS uses the FlexProtect proprietary system to detect and repair files and directories that are in a degraded state due to
node or drive failures.
OneFS protects data in the cluster based on the configured protection policy. OneFS rebuilds failed disks, uses free storage
space across the entire cluster to further prevent data loss, monitors data, and migrates data off of at-risk components.
OneFS distributes all data and error-correction information across the cluster and ensures that all data remains intact and
accessible even in the event of simultaneous component failures. Under normal operating conditions, all data on the cluster is
protected against one or more failures of a node or drive. However, if a node or drive fails, the cluster protection status is
considered to be in a degraded state until the data is protected by OneFS again. OneFS reprotects data by rebuilding data in the
free space of the cluster. While the protection status is in a degraded state, data is more vulnerable to data loss.
Because data is rebuilt in the free space of the cluster, the cluster does not require a dedicated hot-spare node or drive in order
to recover from a component failure. Because a certain amount of free space is required to rebuild data, it is recommended that
you reserve adequate free space through the virtual hot spare feature.
As you add more nodes, the cluster gains more CPU, memory, and disks to use during recovery operations. As a cluster grows
larger, data restriping operations become faster.

Smartfail
OneFS protects data stored on failing nodes or drives through a process called smartfailing.
During the smartfail process, OneFS places a device into quarantine. Data stored on quarantined devices is read only. While
a device is quarantined, OneFS reprotects the data on the device by distributing the data to other devices. After all data
migration is complete, OneFS logically removes the device from the cluster, the cluster logically changes its width to the new
configuration, and the node or drive can be physically replaced.
OneFS smartfails devices only as a last resort. Although you can manually smartfail nodes or drives, it is recommended that you
first consult Dell Technologies Support.
Occasionally a device might fail before OneFS detects a problem. If a drive fails without being smartfailed, OneFS automatically
starts rebuilding the data to available free space on the cluster. However, because a node might recover from a failure, if a node
fails, OneFS does not start rebuilding data unless the node is logically removed from the cluster.

Node failures
Because node loss is often a temporary issue, OneFS does not automatically start reprotecting data when a node fails or goes
offline. If a node reboots, the file system does not need to be rebuilt because it remains intact during the temporary failure.
If you configure N+1 data protection on a cluster, and one node fails, all of the data is still accessible from every other node in
the cluster. If the node comes back online, the node rejoins the cluster automatically without requiring a full rebuild.

302 Data layout with FlexProtect

To ensure that data remains protected, if you physically remove a node from the cluster, you must also logically remove the
node from the cluster. After you logically remove a node, the node automatically reformats its own drives, and resets itself
to the factory default settings. The reset occurs only after OneFS has confirmed that all data has been reprotected. You can
logically remove a node using the smartfail process. It is important that you smartfail nodes only when you want to permanently
remove a node from the cluster.
If you remove a failed node before adding a new node, data stored on the failed node must be rebuilt in the free space in the
cluster. After the new node is added, OneFS distributes the data to the new node. It is more efficient to add a replacement node
to the cluster before failing the old node because OneFS can immediately use the replacement node to rebuild the data stored
on the failed node.

Requesting data protection

You can specify the protection of a file or directory by setting its requested protection. This flexibility enables you to protect
distinct sets of data at higher than default levels.
Requested protection of data is calculated by OneFS and set automatically on storage pools within your cluster. The default
setting is referred to as suggested protection, and provides the optimal balance between data protection and storage efficiency.
For example, a suggested protection of N+2:1 means that two drives or one node can fail without causing any data loss.
For best results, we recommend that you accept at least the suggested protection for data on your cluster. You can always
specify a higher protection level than suggested protection on critical files, directories, or node pools.
OneFS allows you to request protection that the cluster is currently incapable of matching. If you request an unmatchable
protection, the cluster will continue trying to match the requested protection until a match is possible. For example, in a
four-node cluster, you might request a mirror protection of 5x. In this example, OneFS would mirror the data at 4x until you
added a fifth node to the cluster, at which point OneFS would reprotect the data at 5x.
If you set requested protection to a level below suggested protection, OneFS warns you of this condition.
NOTE:

For 4U Isilon IQ X-Series and NL-Series nodes, and IQ 12000X/EX 12000 combination platforms, the minimum cluster size
of three nodes requires a minimum protection of N+2:1.

Related concepts
Requested data protection

Requested protection settings

Requested protection settings determine the level of hardware failure that a cluster can recover from without suffering data
loss.

Table 91. Requested Protection Settings

Requested protection setting Minimum number of nodes Definition
required
[+1n] 3 The cluster can recover from one drive or node
failure without sustaining any data loss.
[+2d:1n] 3 The cluster can recover from two simultaneous
drive failures or one node failure without
sustaining any data loss.
[+2n] 4 The cluster can recover from two simultaneous
drive or node failures without sustaining any
data loss.
[+3d:1n] 3 The cluster can recover from three simultaneous
drive failures or one node failure without
sustaining any data loss.
[+3d:1n1d] 3 The cluster can recover from three simultaneous
drive failures or simultaneous failures of one

Data layout with FlexProtect 303

Table 91. Requested Protection Settings (continued)
Requested protection setting Minimum number of nodes Definition
required
node and one drive without sustaining any data
loss.
[+3n] 6 The cluster can recover from three simultaneous
drive or node failures without sustaining any
data loss.
[+4d:1n] 3 The cluster can recover from four simultaneous
drive failures or one node failure without
sustaining any data loss.
[+4d:2n] 4 The cluster can recover from four simultaneous
drive failures or two node failures without
sustaining any data loss.
[+4n] 8 The cluster can recover from four simultaneous
drive or node failures without sustaining any
data loss.
Nx (Data mirroring) N The cluster can recover from N - 1 drive or
node failures without sustaining data loss. For
For example, 5x requires a
example, 5x protection means that the cluster
minimum of five nodes.
can recover from four drive or node failures.

Related concepts
Requested data protection

Requested protection for disk space usage

Increasing the requested protection of data also increases the amount of space that is consumed by the data on the cluster.
The parity overhead for N + M protection depends on the file size and the number of nodes in the cluster. The percentage of
parity overhead declines as the cluster gets larger.
The following table describes the estimated percentage of overhead depending on the requested protection and the size of the
cluster or node pool. The table does not show recommended protection levels that are based on cluster size.

Table 92. Disk Space Usage

Number [+1n] [+2d:1n] [+2n] [+3d:1n] [+3d:1n1d] [+3n] [+4d:1n] [+4d:2n] [+4n]
of nodes
3 2 +1 (33%) 4 + 2 — 6+3 3 + 3 (50%) — 8+4 — —
(33%) (33%) (33%)
4 3 +1 6+2 2+2 9+3 5 + 3 (38%) — 12 + 4 4+4 —
(25%) (25%) (50%) (25%) (25%) (50%)
5 4 +1 8+2 3+2 12 + 3 7 + 3 (30%) — 16 + 4 6+4 —
(20%) (20%) (40%) (20%) (20%) (40%)
6 5 +1 (17%) 10 + 2 4+2 15 + 3 9 + 3 (25%) 3+3 16 + 4 8+4 —
(17%) (33%) (17%) (50%) (20%) (33%)
7 6 +1 (14%) 12 + 2 5+2 15 + 3 11 + 3 (21%) 4+3 16 + 4 10 + 4 —
(14%) (29%) (17%) (43%) (20%) (29%)
8 7 +1 (13%) 14 + 2 6+2 15 + 3 13 + 3 (19%) 5+3 16 + 4 12 + 4 4+4
(12.5%) (25%) (17%) (38%) (20%) (25% ) (50%)
9 8 +1 (11%) 16 + 2 7+2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 6+3 16 + 4 14 + 4 5+4
(11%) (22%) (17%) (33%) (20%) (22%) (44%)

304 Data layout with FlexProtect

Table 92. Disk Space Usage (continued)
Number [+1n] [+2d:1n] [+2n] [+3d:1n] [+3d:1n1d] [+3n] [+4d:1n] [+4d:2n] [+4n]
of nodes
10 9 +1 (10%) 16 + 2 8+2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 7+3 16 + 4 16 + 4 6+4
(11%) (20%) (17%) (30%) (20%) (20%) (40%)
12 11 +1 (8%) 16 + 2 10 + 2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 9+3 16 + 4 16 + 4 8+4
(11%) (17%) (17%) (25%) (20%) (20%) (33%)
14 13 + 1 16 + 2 12 + 2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 11 + 3 16 + 4 16 + 4 10 + 4
(7%) (11%) (14%) (17%) (21%) (20%) (20%) (29%)
16 15 + 1 16 + 2 14 + 2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 13 + 3 16 + 4 16 + 4 12 + 4
(6%) (11%) (13%) (17%) (19%) (20%) (20%) (25%)
18 16 + 1 16 + 2 16 + 2 15 + 3 15+3 (17%) 15 + 3 16 + 4 16 + 4 14 + 4
(6%) (11%) (11%) (17%) (17%) (20%) (20%) (22%)
20 16 + 1 16 + 2 16 + 2 16 + 3 16 + 3 (16%) 16 + 3 16 + 4 16 + 4 16 + 4
(6%) (11%) (11%) (16%) (16%) (20%) (20% ) (20%)
30 16 + 1 16 + 2 16 + 2 16 + 3 16 + 3 (16%) 16 + 3 16 + 4 16 + 4 16 + 4
(6%) (11%) (11%) (16%) (16%) (20%) (20%) (20%)

The parity overhead for mirrored data protection is not affected by the number of nodes in the cluster. The following table
describes the parity overhead for requested mirrored protection.

Table 93. Requested Mirrored Protection Specifications

2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x

50% 67% 75% 80% 83% 86% 88%

Related concepts
Requested data protection

Data layout with FlexProtect 305

 21
Large file size support
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Large file support
• Feature enablement requirements
• Restrictions after enabling large file support

Large file support

You can create files with a maximum size of 16 TiB.
OneFS can support a maximum file size of 16 TiB on supported cluster configurations when SyncIQ partner clusters are
also running version 8.2.2 or later on supported cluster configurations . You must ensure that your cluster(s) are one of the
supported cluster configurations. See: Supported cluster configurations.
The isi_large_file -c command is used to check if feature requirements are met on cluster. The isi_large_file -l
command is used to show current large file settings.
After the feature is enabled, files can be created up to a size of 16 TiB on the cluster by any of the supported protocols.
First, the cluster(s) must be brought up to the feature release version and committed. Second, a feature enable script must be
run. This enable script ensures that the cluster meets the requirements to run the feature.

Feature enablement requirements

The isi_large_file -c command assesses the cluster configuration and the existing SyncIQ policies to determine if they
meet the requirements for the large file feature.
Disk Pool Requirements
Before you enable the feature, the isi_large_file -c command is used to check all disk pools to verify that your cluster is
one of the supported configurations.
SyncIQ Policy Requirements
Before you enable the feature, all SyncIQ policies are checked to ensure that all remote clusters are running a release that
supports this feature. In addition to all the remote clusters running a release that supports this feature, the clusters must be
checked to ensure that they also meet the disk pool requirements. This activity is done by running and passing the checks that
the isi_large_file -c command performs. No cluster in the SyncIQ chain of policies should enable the feature unless all
those clusters can pass the isi_large_file -c command check.
After the feature is enabled, you cannot disable it.

Restrictions after enabling large file support

After the isi_large_file -e command is enabled, there are certain restrictions that you may notice.
SyncIQ policies after enabling
The new SyncIQ policy partner clusters must have large file feature enabled. A new SyncIQ policy targeting a cluster without the
large file feature enabled fails to sync.
Disk pool management commands after enabling

306 Large file size support

Disk pool commands that deviate from the protection settings that are described in the list of supported hardware
configurations or in other ways reduce the size of disk pools. This situation may result in CELOG reports indicating that your disk
pools do not meet requirements for the large file feature. As a result, you might see that the performance degrades with the use
of large files.

Large file size support 307

 22
NDMP backup and recovery
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• NDMP backup and recovery overview
• NDMP two-way backup
• NDMP three-way backup
• Support for NDMP sessions on Generation 6 hardware
• Setting preferred IPs for NDMP three-way operations
• NDMP multi-stream backup and recovery
• Snapshot-based incremental backups
• NDMP backup and restore of SmartLink files
• NDMP protocol support
• Supported DMAs
• NDMP hardware support
• NDMP backup limitations
• NDMP performance recommendations
• Excluding files and directories from NDMP backups
• Configuring basic NDMP backup settings
• Managing NDMP user accounts
• NDMP environment variables overview
• Managing NDMP contexts
• Managing NDMP sessions
• Managing NDMP Fibre Channel ports
• Managing NDMP preferred IP settings
• Managing NDMP backup devices
• NDMP dumpdates file overview
• NDMP restore operations
• Sharing tape drives between clusters
• Managing snapshot based incremental backups
• Managing cluster performance for NDMP sessions
• Managing CPU usage for NDMP sessions

NDMP backup and recovery overview

OneFS enables you to back up and recover file-system data using the Network Data Management Protocol (NDMP). From a
backup server, you can direct backup and recovery processes between a PowerScale cluster and backup devices such as tape
devices, media servers, and virtual tape libraries (VTLs).
Some of the NDMP features are described below:
● NDMP supports two-way and three-way backup models.
● With certain data management applications, NDMP supports backup restartable extension (BRE). The NDMP BRE allows
you to resume a failed backup job from the last checkpoint that was taken before the failure. The failed job is restarted
automatically and cannot be scheduled or started manually.
● You do not have to activate a SnapshotIQ license on the cluster to perform NDMP backups. If you have activated a
SnapshotIQ license on the cluster, you can generate a snapshot through the SnapshotIQ tool, and then back up the same
snapshot. If you back up a SnapshotIQ snapshot, OneFS does not create another snapshot for the backup.
● You can back up WORM domains through NDMP.

308 NDMP backup and recovery

 NOTE: NDMP backups that are created with PowerScale OneFS [Link] are compatible only with [Link] and later releases:
they are not backwards compatible. The data restore path is possible from older OneFS source to a newer version of OneFS
only as the target storage.

Example: Restoring content from a backup created with PowerScale OneFS 9.0 to a cluster with PowerScale OneFS 9.5
is supported. However an attempt to restore content that is created from a cluster with OneFS 9.5 to a pre-OneFS 9.5
cluster is not supported.

NDMP two-way backup

The NDMP two-way backup is also known as the local or direct NDMP backup. To perform NDMP two-way backups, you must
connect your PowerScale cluster to a Backup Accelerator node which is synonymous with a Fibre Attached Storage node, and
attach a tape device to that node. You must then use OneFS to detect the tape device before you can back up to that device.
You can connect supported tape devices directly to the Fibre Channel ports of a Fibre Attached Storage node. Alternatively,
you can connect Fibre Channel switches to the Fibre Channel ports on the Fibre Attached Storage node, and connect tape
and media changer devices to the Fibre Channel switches. For more information, see your Fibre Channel switch documentation
about zoning the switch to allow communication between the Fibre Attached Storage node and the connected tape and media
changer devices.
If you attach tape devices to a Fibre Attached Storage node, the cluster detects the devices when you start or restart the node
or when you re-scan the Fibre Channel ports to discover devices. If a cluster detects tape devices, the cluster creates an entry
for the path to each detected device.
If you connect a device through a Fibre Channel switch, multiple paths can exist for a single device. For example, if you connect
a tape device to a Fibre Channel switch, and then connect the Fibre Channel switch to two Fibre Channel ports, OneFS creates
two entries for the device, one for each path.
NOTE: Generation 6 nodes added to an InfiniBand back end network are supported with the A100 Backup Accelerator as
part of an NDMP 2-way backup solution. The A100 Backup Accelerator is not supported as part of an NDMP two-way
backup solution with an all-Generation 6 cluster with an Ethernet back end.

NDMP three-way backup

The NDMP three-way backup is also known as the remote NDMP backup.
During a three-way NDMP backup operation, a data management application (DMA) on a backup server instructs the cluster to
start backing up data to a tape media server that is either attached to the LAN or directly attached to the DMA. The NDMP
service runs on one NDMP Server and the NDMP tape service runs on a separate server. Both the servers are connected to
each other across the network boundary.

Support for NDMP sessions on Generation 6 hardware

You can enable two-way NDMP sessions by configuring them with the optional 2x10GbE + 2x8GB Fibre Channel network
interface card (NIC) on Generation 6 nodes. A 2x10GE + 2x8GB Fibre Channel NIC is a hybrid host bus adapter (HBA) that
enables two-way NDMP sessions over the Fibre Channel port. Contact Dell EMC Professional Services to enable support for the
2x10GbE + 2x8GB Fibre Channel NIC.

Setting preferred IPs for NDMP three-way operations

If you are using any data management application (DMA) for an NDMP three-way operation in an environment with multiple
network interfaces, you can apply a preferred IP setting across a PowerScale cluster or to one or more subnets that are defined
in OneFS.
The IP address on the NDMP server that receives the incoming request from the DMA decides the scope and precedence for
setting the preference. By default the backup stream originates from the first external IP address of the node. If you want to
use a different IP address then use Set Preferred IP. The Preferred IP setting does not specify an IP address directly, instead,
it determines the subnet from which the backup has been sourced.

NDMP backup and recovery 309

You can have one preferred IP setting per cluster or per network subnet.
You can specify a list of NDMP preferred IPs through the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips command.

NDMP multi-stream backup and recovery

You can use the NDMP multi-stream backup feature, in conjunction with certain data management applications (DMAs), to
speed up backups.

NOTE: To use Multistreaming, disable the Backup Restartable extension (BRE), if you are using Networker as DMA.

With multi-stream backup, you can use your DMA to specify multiple streams of data to back up concurrently. OneFS considers
all streams in a specific multi-stream backup operation to be part of the same backup context. A multi-stream backup context is
deleted if a multi-stream backup session is successful. If a specific stream fails, the backup context is retained for five minutes
after the backup operation completes and you can retry the failed stream within that time period.
If you used the NDMP multi-stream backup feature to back data up to tape drives, you can also recover that data in multiple
streams, depending on the DMA. Multi-stream backups are supported with CommVault Simpana version 11.0 Service Pack 3
and NetWorker version 9.0.1. If you back up data using CommVault Simpana, a multi-stream context is created, but data is
recovered one stream at a time.

Snapshot-based incremental backups

You can implement snapshot-based incremental backups to increase the speed at which these backups are performed.
During a snapshot-based incremental backup, OneFS checks the snapshot that is taken for the previous NDMP backup
operation and compares it to a new snapshot. OneFS then backs up all files that were modified since the last snapshot was
made.
Dell Technologies recommends snapshot-based incremental backup only when the change rate is under 2%.
You can perform incremental backups without activating a SnapshotIQ license on the cluster. Although SnapshotIQ offers
several useful features, it does not enhance snapshot capabilities in NDMP backup and recovery.
Set the BACKUP_MODE environment variable to SNAPSHOT to enable snapshot-based incremental backups and ensure that the
DMA is sending the correct BASE_DATE and BACKUP_OPTIONS. If you enable snapshot-based incremental backups, OneFS
retains each snapshot that is taken for NDMP backups until a new backup of the same or lower level is performed. However, if
you do not enable snapshot-based incremental backups, OneFS automatically deletes each snapshot that is generated after the
corresponding backup is completed or canceled. Also, BACKUP_OPTIONS changes how many snapshots are kept and if periodic
manual deletion is needed.
NOTE: A snapshot-based incremental backup shares the dumpdates entries in the dumpdates database along with the
other level-based backups. Therefore, ensure that you do not run snapshot-based backups and regular level-based backups
in the same backup paths. For example, ensure not to run a level 0 backup and snapshot-based incremental backup in the
same backup path or the opposite way.
After setting the BACKUP_MODE environment variable, snapshot-based incremental backup works with certain data
management applications (DMAs) as listed in the next table.

Table 94. DMA support for snapshot-based incremental backups

DMA DMA-integrated
Generic Enabled only through an environment variable.
Backbone Enabled only through an environment variable.
CommVault Yes, and can be enabled through the NDMP environment
variable.
Dell NetWorker Yes, and can be enabled through the NDMP environment
variable.
Veritas Enabled only through an environment variable.
Tivoli Enabled only through a cluster-based environment variable.

310 NDMP backup and recovery

Table 94. DMA support for snapshot-based incremental backups (continued)
DMA DMA-integrated
Veritas Backup Exec Enabled only through a cluster-based environment variable.

Related concepts
Snapshot-based incremental backups

NDMP backup and restore of SmartLink files

You can perform NDMP backup and restore operations on data that has been archived to the cloud.
Backup and restore capabilities with CloudPools data include:
● Archiving SmartLink files when backing up from a cluster
● Restoring data, including SmartLink files, to the same cluster
● Restoring data, including SmartLink files, to another cluster
● Backing up version information with each SmartLink file, and restoring the Smartlink file after verifying the version
compatibility on the target cluster
You specify how files are backed up and restored by setting the NDMP environment variables BACKUP_OPTIONS and
RESTORE_OPTIONS. See Administering NDMP in the PowerScale OneFS CLI Administration Guide for details about configuring
the backup settings and managing NDMP environment variables.
NOTE: DeepCopy and ComboCopy backups recall file data from the cloud. The data is not stored on disks. Recall of file
data may incur charges from cloud vendors.
With NDMP backup, by default, CloudPools supports the backup of SmartLink files that contain cloud metadata such as location
of the object. Other details such as version information, account information, local cache state, and unsynchronized cache data
that are associated with the SmartLink file are also backed up.
To prevent data loss when recovering SmartLink files with incompatible versions, use the NDMP combo copy backup option.
Use this option to back up SmartLink files with full data. Full data includes metadata and user data. Use the NDMP combo copy
option by setting the BACKUP_OPTIONS environment variable.
When the combo copy option is used for backup, you can use the combo copy, shallow copy, or deep copy restore options to
recover SmartLink files. You can specify these options by setting appropriate values to the RESTORE_OPTIONS environment
variable:
● The combo copy restore option restores SmartLink files from the backup stream only if their version is compatible with
the OneFS version on the target cluster. If the SmartLink file version is incompatible with the OneFS version on the target
cluster, a regular file is restored.
● If the version check operation on the target cluster is successful, the shallow copy restore operation restores the backed-up
SmartLink file as a SmartLink file on the target cluster.
● If the version check operation on the target cluster fails, the deep copy restore operation forces the recovery of the
SmartLink files as regular files on the target cluster .
● If you do not specify any restore operation, NDMP restores SmartLink files using the combo copy restore operation by
default.
● When you specify multiple restore options, the combo copy restore operation has the highest priority. The shallow copy
restore operation has the next highest priority. The deep copy restore operation has the lowest priority.
In CloudPools settings, you can set three retention periods that affect backed up SmartLink files and their associated cloud
data:
● Full Backup Retention Period for NDMP takes effect when the SmartLink file is backed up as part of a full backup. The
default is five years.
● Incremental Backup Retention Period for Incremental NDMP Backup and SyncIQ takes effect when a SmartLink file is
backed up as part of an incremental backup. The default is five years.
● Cloud Data Retention Period defines the duration that data in the cloud is kept when its related SmartLink file is deleted. The
default is one week.
CloudPools ensures the validity of a backed-up SmartLink file within the cloud data retention period. Set the retention periods
appropriately to ensure that when the SmartLink file is restored from tape, it remains valid. CloudPools disallows restoring invalid
SmartLink files.

NDMP backup and recovery 311

CloudPools ensures that a backed-up SmartLink file is still valid by checking the retention periods that are stored for the file. If
the retention time is past the restore time, CloudPools prevents NDMP from restoring the SmartLink file.
CloudPools ensures that the account under which the SmartLink files were originally created is not deleted. If it is deleted, both
NDMP backup and restore of SmartLink files fail.

NDMP protocol support

You can back up the PowerScale cluster data through version 3 or 4 of the NDMP protocol.
OneFS supports the following features of NDMP versions 3 and 4:
● Full (level 0) NDMP backups
● Incremental (levels 1-9) NDMP backups and Incremental Forever (level 10)

NOTE: In a level 10 NDMP backup, only data changed since the most recent incremental (level 1-9) backup or the last
level 10 backup is copied. By repeating level 10 backups, you can be assured that the latest versions of files in your data
set are backed up without having to run a full backup.

● Token-based NDMP backups

● NDMP TAR backup type
● Dump backup type
● Path-based and dir/node file history format
● Direct Access Restore (DAR)
● Directory DAR (DDAR)
● Including and excluding specific files and directories from backup
● Backup of file attributes
● Backup of Access Control Lists (ACLs)
● Backup of Alternate Data Streams (ADSs)
● Backup Restartable Extension (BRE)
● Backup and restore of HDFS attributes
OneFS supports connecting to clusters through IPv4 or IPv6.

Supported DMAs
NDMP backups are coordinated by a data management application (DMA) that runs on a backup server.
NOTE: All supported DMAs can connect to a PowerScale cluster through the IPv4 protocol. However, only some of the
DMAs support the IPv6 protocol for connecting to a PowerScale cluster.

NDMP hardware support

OneFS can back up data to and recover data from tape devices and virtual tape libraries (VTLs).

Supported tape For NDMP three-way backups, the data management application (DMA) determines the tape devices
devices that are supported.
Supported tape For both the two-way and three-way NDMP backups, OneFS supports all of the tape libraries that are
libraries supported by the DMA.
Supported virtual For three-way NDMP backups, the DMA determines the virtual tape libraries that will be supported.
tape libraries

NDMP backup limitations

NDMP backups have the following limitations.
● Supports block sizes up to 512 KB.

312 NDMP backup and recovery

● Does not support more than 4 KB file path length.
● Does not back up file system configuration data, such as file protection level policies and quotas.
● Does not support recovering data from a file system other than OneFS.
● Fibre Attached Storage nodes cannot interact with more than 4096 tape paths.
● The maximum length of the FILESYSTEM environment variable supported for a backup operation is 1024.
● Do not attempt to backup all of /ifs. This will fail.

NDMP performance recommendations

Consider the following recommendations to optimize OneFS NDMP backups.

General performance recommendations

● Install the latest patches for OneFS and your data management application (DMA).
● To obtain optimal throughput per session, Dell Technologies recommends not to run the maximum number of NDMP
concurrent sessions which is eight per Fiber Attached Storage node.
● NDMP backups result in high Recovery Point Objectives (RPOs) and Recovery Time Objectives (RTOs). You can reduce
your RPO and RTO by attaching one or more Fiber Attached Storage nodes to the cluster and then running two-way NDMP
backups.
● The throughput for a PowerScale cluster during the backup and recovery operations depends on the dataset and is
considerably reduced for small files and deep directory structures (>13).
● If you are backing up large numbers of small files, set up a separate schedule for each directory.
● If you are performing NDMP three-way backups, run multiple NDMP sessions on multiple nodes in your PowerScale cluster.
● Recover files through Directory DAR (DDAR) if you recover large numbers of files frequently.
● Use the largest tape record size available for your version of OneFS to increase throughput.
● If possible, do not include or exclude files from backup. Including or excluding files can affect backup performance, due to
filtering overhead.

SmartConnect recommendations
● A two-way NDMP backup session with SmartConnect requires a Fiber Attached Storage node for backup and recovery
operations. However, a three-way NDMP session with SmartConnect does not require Fiber Attached Storage nodes for
these operations.
● For an NDMP two-way backup session with SmartConnect, connect to the NDMP session through a dedicated
SmartConnect zone consisting of a pool of Network Interface Cards (NICs) on the Fiber Attached Storage nodes.
● For a two-way NDMP backup session without SmartConnect, initiate the backup session through a static IP address or fully
qualified domain name of the Fiber Attached Storage node.
● For a three-way NDMP backup operation, the front-end Ethernet network or the interfaces of the nodes are used to serve
the backup traffic. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure a DMA to initiate an NDMP session only using the nodes
that are not already overburdened by serving other workloads or connections.

Fiber Attached Storage recommendations

● Assign static IP addresses to Fiber Attached Storage nodes.
● Attach more Fiber Attached Storage nodes to larger clusters. The recommended number of Fiber Attached Storage nodes is
listed in the following table.

Table 95. Nodes Per Fiber Attached Storage Node

Node type Recommended number of nodes per Fiber Attached
Storage node
X-Series 3
NL-Series 3
S-Series 3

NDMP backup and recovery 313

 Table 95. Nodes Per Fiber Attached Storage Node (continued)
Node type Recommended number of nodes per Fiber Attached
Storage node
HD-Series 3
● Attach more Fiber Attached Storage nodes if you are backing up to more tape devices.

DMA-specific recommendations
● Enable parallelism for the DMA if the DMA supports this option. This allows OneFS to back up data to multiple tape devices
simultaneously.

Excluding files and directories from NDMP backups

You can exclude files and directories from NDMP backup operations by specifying NDMP environment variables through a data
management application (DMA). If you include a file or directory, all other files and directories are automatically excluded from
backup operations. If you exclude a file or directory, all files and directories except the excluded file or directory are backed up.
You can include or exclude files and directories by specifying the following character patterns. The examples that are given in
the table are valid only if the backup path is /ifs/data.

Table 96. NDMP File and Directory Matching Wildcards

Character Description Example Includes or excludes the following directories
* Wildcard for any archive* archive1
character or characters
src/archive42_a/media

[] A range of letters or data_store_[a-f] /ifs/data/data_store_a

numbers
data_store_[0-9] /ifs/data/data_store_c
/ifs/data/data_store_8

? Any single character user_? /ifs/data/user_1

/ifs/data/user_2

\ Include a blank space user\ 1 /ifs/data/user 1

// Use to indicate a single ifs//data//archive /ifs/data/archive

slash (/)
*** Takes the place of a
single asterisk (*)
.. Ignores the pattern if it is ../home/john home/john
at the beginning of a path

NOTE: " " are required for Veritas NetBackup when multiple patterns are specified. The patterns are not limited to
directories.
Unanchored patterns such as home or user1 target a string of text that might belong to many files or directories. If a pattern
contains '/', it is an anchored pattern. An anchored pattern is always matched from the beginning of a path. A pattern in the
middle of a path is not matched. Anchored patterns target specific file pathnames, such as ifs/data/home. You can include
or exclude either type of patterns.
If you specify both the include and exclude patterns, the include pattern is first processed followed by the exclude pattern.
If you specify both the include and exclude patterns, any excluded files or directories under the included directories would not be
backed up. If the excluded directories are not found in any of the included directories, the exclude specification would have no
effect.
NOTE: Specifying unanchored patterns can degrade the performance of backups. It is recommended that you avoid
unanchored patterns whenever possible.

314 NDMP backup and recovery

Configuring basic NDMP backup settings
You can configure NDMP backup settings to control how these backups are performed on the PowerScale cluster. You can also
configure OneFS to interact with a specific data management application (DMA) for NDMP backups.

Configure and enable NDMP backup

OneFS prevents NDMP backups by default. Before you can perform NDMP backups, you must enable NDMP backups and
configure NDMP settings.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the Service area, click Enable NDMP Service.
3. Optional: From the DMA vendor list, select the name of the DMA vendor to manage backup operations. If your DMA vendor
is not included in the list, select generic. However, note that any vendors not included on the list are not officially supported
and might not function as expected.
4. In the NDMP Administrators area, click Add an NDMP Administrator to add a new administrator.
The Add NDMP Administrator dialog appears.
5. Enter an administrator name and password, confirm the password, and click Add NDMP Administrator.
6. Click Save Changes to save all the settings. Alternatively, click Revert Changes to undo the changes and revert back to
the previous settings.

View NDMP backup settings

You can view current NDMP backup settings. These settings define whether NDMP backup is enabled, the port through which
your data management application (DMA) connects to the PowerScale cluster, and the DMA vendor that OneFS is configured to
interact with.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings and view NDMP backup settings.
2. In the Settings area, review NDMP backup settings.

Disable NDMP backup

You can disable NDMP backup if you no longer want to use this backup method.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the Service area, clear the Enable NDMP service check box to disable NDMP backup.

Managing NDMP user accounts

You can create, delete, and modify the passwords of NDMP user accounts.

Create an NDMP administrator account

Before you can perform NDMP backups, you must create an NDMP administrator account through which your data
management application (DMA) can access the PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the NDMP Administrators area, click Add an NDMP Administrator.
The Add NDMP Administrator dialog appears.
3. In the Add NDMP Administrator dialog box, in the Name field, type a name for the account.
NOTE: The NDMP administrator that you create in this step is applicable only for NDMP operations. You cannot link this
NDMP administrator to any other user, group, or identity on the cluster.

4. In the Password and Confirm password fields, type the password for the account.

NDMP backup and recovery 315

 NOTE: There are no special password policy requirements for an NDMP administrator.

5. Click Add NDMP Administrator.

View NDMP user accounts

You can view information about NDMP user accounts.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the NDMP Administrators area, review information about an NDMP administrator by selecting the check box
corresponding to an administrator and clicking View/Edit.

Modify the password of an NDMP administrator account

You can modify the password of an NDMP administrator account.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the NDMP Administrators area, select the check box next to the desired administrator name and click View/Edit.
The View NDMP Administrator Details dialog box appears.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit NDMP Administrator Details dialog box appears.
4. Type a new password, confirm the password, and then click Save Changes.

Delete an NDMP administrator account

You can delete an NDMP administrator account.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > NDMP Settings.
2. In the NDMP Administrators area, select the check box next to the desired administrator name and click Delete.
The administrator name is removed from the list of NDMP administrators.

NDMP environment variables overview

NDMP environment variables are associated with paths. When an environment variable path matches with the path of a backup
or a recovery operation, the environment variable is applied to that operation.
All the environment variables reside under the /ifs directory. There are two other virtual paths, namely, /BACKUP and /
RESTORE that contain environment variables. The environment variables under this path can be applied globally. The
environment variables under /BACKUP are applied to all the backup operations. The environment variables under /RESTORE
are applied to all the recovery operations. The global environment variables are applied only after the path-specific environment
variables are applied. So, the path-specific variables take precedence over the global variables.

Managing NDMP environment variables

In OneFS, you can manage NDMP backup and recovery operations by specifying default NDMP environment variables. You can
also override default NDMP environment variables through your data management application (DMA).
You can add, view, edit, and delete environment variables. The environment variables can be managed on a per-backup-path
basis. They are appended to the environment variables passed from a DMA in a backup or recovery session.
The following table lists the DMAs that allow you to directly set environment variables:

Table 97. DMA Support for Environment Variable Settings

DMA Supported directly on the DMA Supported through OneFS command-line
interface
Generic Yes Yes
BakBone No Yes

316 NDMP backup and recovery

Table 97. DMA Support for Environment Variable Settings (continued)
DMA Supported directly on the DMA Supported through OneFS command-line
interface
CommVault No Yes
Dell Technologies No Yes
Veritas No Yes
Tivoli No Yes
Veritas NetBackup Yes Yes
Veritas Backup Exec No Yes

In case you cannot set an environment variable directly on a DMA for your NDMP backup or recovery operation, log in to an
PowerScale cluster through an SSH client and set the environment variable on the cluster through the isi ndmp settings
variables create command.

NDMP environment variable settings

You can view the NDMP environment variable settings and manage them as necessary.
The following settings appear in the Variables table:

Table 98. Environment Variable Settings

Setting Description
Add Variables Add new path environment variables along with their values.
Path The path under the /ifs directory to store new environment
variables. If Path is set to "/BACKUP", the environment
variable is applied to all the backup operations. If Path is set
to "/RESTORE", the environment variable is applied to all the
restore operations.
Add Name/Value Add a name and value for the new environment variable.
Name Name of the environment variable.
Value Value set for the environment variable
Action Edit, view, or delete an environment variable at a specified
path.

Add an NDMP environment variable

You can add environment variables at a specified path that can be applied per-backup-path or globally.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. Click Add Variables to open the Add Path Variables dialog box.
3. In the Variable Settings area, specify the following parameters:
a. Specify or browse to a path under /ifs to store the environment variable.
NOTE:
● To set a global environment variable for backup and recovery operations, specify the /BACKUP path for a backup
operation and the /RESTORE path for a recovery operation.
● The backup path must include .snapshot/<snapshot name> when running a backup of a user-created
snapshot.

b. Click Add Name/Value, specify an environment variable name and value, and then click Create Variable.

NDMP backup and recovery 317

View NDMP environment variables
You can view details about the NDMP environment variables
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Variables table, click the check box corresponding to an environment variable and then click View/Edit.
3. In the Display Path Variables dialog box, review the details.

Edit an NDMP environment variable

You can edit an NDMP environment variable.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Variables table, click the check box corresponding to an environment variable and then click View/Edit.
3. In the Display Path Variables dialog box, click Edit Path Variables.
4. In the Edit Variables dialog box, click Add Name/Value and specify a new name and value for the environment variable.

Delete an NDMP environment variable

You can delete an NDMP environment variable.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Variables table, click the check box corresponding to an environment variable and then click Delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.
You can also delete an NDMP environment variable through the Edit Variables dialog box that appears when you click View/
Edit and then click Edit Path Variables.

NDMP environment variables

You can specify the default settings of NDMP backup and recovery operations through NDMP environment variables. You can
also specify NDMP environment variables through your data management application (DMA).
Veritas NetBackup and NetWorker are the only two DMAs that allow you to directly set environment variables and propagate
them to OneFS.

Table 99. Environment Variables

Environment variable Valid values Default Description
BACKUP_FILE_LIST <file-path> None Triggers a file list backup.
Only NetWorker and Veritas NetBackup can pass
environment variables to OneFS.

BACKUP_MODE TIMESTAMP TIMESTAMP Enables or disables snapshot-based incremental

backups. To enable snapshot-based incremental
SNAPSHOT
backups, specify SNAPSHOT.
BACKUP_OPTIONS 0x00000400 0 This environment variable controls the behavior
of the backup operations.
0x00000200
The following settings are applicable only
0x00000100
to datasets containing the CloudPools-driven
0x00000001 SmartLink files:
0x00000002 0x00000400 Backs up SmartLink
0x00000004 files with full data.
This is the combo copy
backup option.

0x00000200 Backs up all the cache

data. This is the

318 NDMP backup and recovery

Table 99. Environment Variables (continued)
Environment variable Valid values Default Description

shallow copy backup

option.
0x00000100 Reads SmartLink file
data from the cloud
and backs up the
SmartLink files as
regular files. This is the
deep copy option.

0x00000001 Always adds

DUMP_DATE into the
list of environment
variables at the end
of a backup operation.
The DUMP_DATE
value is the time
when the backup
snapshot was taken.
A DMA can use
the DUMP_DATE value
to set BASE_DATE
for the next backup
operation.

0x00000002 Retains only the

last successful backup
snapshot of a token-
based backup in the
dumpdates file. Since
a token-based backup
has no LEVEL, its level
is set to 10 by default.
The snapshot allows
a faster-incremental
backup as the next
incremental backup
after the token-based
backup is done.

0x00000004 Retains all previous

successful backup
snapshots.
NOTE: This option
should only be
enabled if the
PowerScale is
not managing the
backup snapshot.

NOTE: Be sure
to periodically
manually delete
any older unneeded
snapshots since
OneFS will not
know which are
not needed and will

NDMP backup and recovery 319

Table 99. Environment Variables (continued)
Environment variable Valid values Default Description

not delete them

automatically.
After a faster-
incremental backup,
the prior snapshot is
saved at level 10. In
order to avoid two
snapshots at the same
level, the prior
snapshot is kept at a
lower level in the
dumpdates file. This
allows the BASE_DATE
and
BACKUP_MODE=snap
shot settings to
trigger a faster-
incremental backup
instead of a token-
based backup. The
environment variable
settings prompt the
NDMP server to
compare the
BASE_DATE value
against the timestamp
in the dumpdates file
to find the prior
backup. Even though
the DMA fails the
latest faster-
incremental backup,
OneFS retains the prior
snapshot. The DMA
can then retry the
faster-incremental
backup in the next
backup cycle using the
BASE_DATE value of
the prior backup.

DIRECT Y N Enables or disables Direct Access Restore (DAR)

and Directory DAR (DDAR). The following values
N
are valid:

Y Enables DAR and

DDAR.
N Disables DAR and
DDAR.

EXCLUDE <file-matching-pattern> None If you specify this option, OneFS does not back
up files and directories that meet the specified
pattern. Separate multiple patterns with a space.
FILES <file-matching-pattern> None If you specify this option, OneFS backs up only
files and directories that meet the specified
pattern. Separate multiple patterns with a space.
NOTE: As a rule, files are matched first and
then the EXCLUDE pattern is applied.

320 NDMP backup and recovery

Table 99. Environment Variables (continued)
Environment variable Valid values Default Description
HIST <file-history-format> Y Specifies the file history format.
The following values are valid:

D Specifies directory or
node file history.
F Specifies path-based
file history.
Y Specifies the default
file history format
that is determined by
your NDMP backup
settings.
N Disables file history.

LEVEL <integer> 0 Specifies the level of NDMP backup to perform.

The following values are valid:

0 Performs a full NDMP

backup.
1-9 Performs an
incremental backup at
the specified level.
10 Performs Incremental
Forever backups.

MSB_RETENTION_PERIOD Integer 300 sec For a multistream backup session, specifies the
backup context retention period.
MSR_RETENTION_PERIOD 0 through 60*60*24 600 sec For a multistream restore session, specifies the
recovery context retention period within which a
recovery session can be retried.
RECURSIVE Y Y For restore sessions only. Specifies that the
restore session should recover files or sub-
N
directories under a directory automatically.
RESTORE_BIRTHTIME Y N Specifies whether to recover the birth time for a
recovery session.
N

RESTORE_HARDLINK Y N For a single-threaded restore session, determines

_BY_TABLE whether OneFS recovers hard links by building
N
a hard-link table during recovery operations.
Specify this option if hard links are incorrectly
backed up and recovery operations are failing.
If a recovery operation fails because hard
links were incorrectly backed up, the following
message appears in the NDMP backup logs:

Bad hardlink path for <path>

NOTE: This variable is not effective for a

parallel restore operation.

RESTORE_OPTIONS 0x00000001 0 This environment variable controls the behavior

of the restore operations.
0x00000002
0x00000004

NDMP backup and recovery 321

Table 99. Environment Variables (continued)
Environment variable Valid values Default Description

0x00000100 0x00000001 Performs a single-

0x00000200 threaded restore
operation.
0x00000002 Restores attributes to
the existing directories.
0x00000004 Creates intermediate
directories with default
attributes. The default
behavior is to get
attributes from the
first object under a
given directory.

The following settings are applicable only to

datasets backed up with the combo copy backup
option:

0x00000100 Forces deep copy

restoration of the
SmartLink files. That
is, restores the backed
up SmartLink file as
a regular file on the
target cluster.

0x00000200 Forces shallow copy

restoration of the
SmartLink files. That
is, restores the backed
up SmartLink file as a
SmartLink file on the
target cluster.

UPDATE Y Y Determines whether OneFS updates the

dumpdates file. The default is to perform a
N
combo copy restore.

Y OneFS updates the

dumpdates file.
N OneFS does
not update the
dumpdates file.

Related concepts
Excluding files and directories from NDMP backups

Setting environment variables for backup and restore operations

You can set environment variables to support the backup and restore operations for your NDMP session.
You can set environment variables through a data management application (DMA) or the command-line interface. Alternatively,
you can set global environment variables. The precedence to apply their settings for a backup or restore operation follows:
● The environment variables specified through a DMA have the highest precedence.
● Path-specific environment variables specified by the isi ndmp settings variables take the next precedence.
● Global environment variable settings of "/BACKUP" or "/RESTORE" take the lowest precedence.
You can set environment variables to support different types of backup operations as described in the following scenarios:

322 NDMP backup and recovery

● If the BASE_DATE environment variable is set to any value and if you set the BACKUP_MODE environment variable to
SNAPSHOT, the LEVEL environment variable is automatically set to 10 and an Incremental Forever backup is performed.
● If the BASE_DATE environment variable is set to 0, a full backup is performed.
● If the BACKUP_MODE environment variable is set to snapshot and the BASE_DATE environment variable is not set to 0,
the entries in the dumpdates file are read and compared with the BASE_DATE environment variable. If an entry is found
and a prior valid snapshot is found, a faster incremental backup is performed.
● If the BACKUP_MODE environment variable is set to snapshot, the BASE_DATE environment variable is not set to 0, and if
no entries are found in the dumpdates file and no prior valid snapshots are found, a token-based backup is performed using
the value of the BASE_DATE environment variable.
● If the BASE_DATE environment variable is set, the BACKUP_OPTIONS environment variable is set to 0x00000001 by
default.
● If the BACKUP_MODE environment variable is set to snapshot, the BACKUP_OPTIONS environment variable is set to
0x00000002 by default and only the last successful backup snapshot is retained.
● If the BACKUP_OPTIONS environment variable is set to 0x00000004 , all previous successful backup snapshots are saved
and should be periodically manually deleted as they are not needed.

Managing NDMP contexts

Each NDMP backup, restore, restartable backup, and multi-stream backup process creates a context. The NDMP server stores
the corresponding working files in the context. You can view or delete a context.
NOTE: If you delete a restartable backup context, you cannot restart the corresponding backup session.

NDMP context settings

You can view the details of NDMP contexts and manage those contexts.
The following settings appear in the Contexts table:

Table 100. Context Settings

Setting Description
Type The context type. It can be one of backup, restartable backup,
or restore.
ID An identifier for a backup or restore job. A backup or restore
job consists of one or more streams all of which are identified
by this ID. This identifier is generated by the NDMP backup
daemon.
Start Time The time when the context started in month date time year
format.
Actions View or delete a selected context.
Status Status of the context. The status shows up as active if a
backup or restore job is initiated and continues to remain
active until the backup stream has completed or errored out.
Path The path where all the working files for the selected context
are stored.
MultiStream Specifies whether the multistream backup process is enabled.
Lead Session ID The identifier of the first backup or restore session
corresponding to a backup or restore operation.
Sessions A table with a list of all the sessions that are associated with
the selected context.

NDMP backup and recovery 323

View NDMP contexts
You can view information about the NDMP backup, restartable backup, and recovery contexts.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Contexts.
2. In the Contexts table, click the check box corresponding to a context that you want to review and click View Details.
3. Review the information about the context in the Display Backup Context dialog box.

Delete an NDMP context

You can delete an NDMP context.
Backup and restore contexts have retention periods beyond which the contexts are deleted automatically. However, you can
choose to delete a context before its retention period to free up resources. You cannot delete contexts with active sessions.
Also, you cannot delete backup contexts with active BRE contexts. You can delete BRE contexts only if they are not a part of
active sessions.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Contexts.
2. In the Contexts table, select a context and click Delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Managing NDMP sessions

You can view the status of NDMP sessions or terminate a session that is in progress.

NDMP session information

Data management applications (DMAs) establish sessions with the NDMP daemon running on the Fiber Attached Storage node.
The communication from the DMA with the NDMP daemon is managed under the context of a session.
The following items appear in the Sessions table:

Table 101. Session Information

Item Description
Session Specifies the unique identification number that OneFS assigns to the session.
Elapsed Specifies the time that has elapsed since the session started.
Transferred Specifies the amount of data that was transferred during the session.
Throughput Specifies the average throughput of the session over the past five minutes.
Client/Remote Specifies the IP address of the backup server that the data management application
(DMA) is running on. If an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation is running, the
IP address of the remote tape media server also appears.
Mover/Data Specifies the current state of the data mover and the data server. The first word
describes the activity of the data mover. The second word describes the activity of the
data server.
The data mover and data server send data to and receive data from each other
during backup and restore operations. The data mover is a component of the backup
server that receives data during backups and sends data during restore operations. The
data server is a component of OneFS that sends data during backups and receives
information during restore operations.
NOTE: When a session ID instead of a state appears, the session is automatically
redirected.
The following states might appear:

Active The data mover or data server is sending or receiving data.

324 NDMP backup and recovery

Table 101. Session Information (continued)
Item Description

Paused The data mover is temporarily unable to receive data. While

the data mover is paused, the data server cannot send data to
the data mover. The data server cannot be paused.
Idle The data mover or data server is not sending or receiving data.
Listen The data mover or data server is waiting to connect to the
data server or data mover.

Operation Specifies the type of operation (backup or restore) that is in progress. If no operation is
in progress, this field is blank.

B ({M} {F} [L[0-10] Where:

| T0 | Ti | S[0-10]] {r
| R})+ [ a ]—a is required
{ a }—a is optional
a | b—a or b but not simultaneously
A(B)—The session is an agent session for a redirected backup
operation
M—Multistream backup
F—File list
L—Level-based
T—Token-based
S—Snapshot mode
s—Snapshot mode and a full backup (when root dir is new)
r—Restartable backup
R—Restarted backup
+—Backup is running with multiple state threads for better
performance
0-10—Dump Level

R ({M|s}[F | D | S] Where:
{h})
A(B)—The session is an agent session for a redirected restore
operation
M—Multistream restore
s—Single-threaded restore (when RESTORE_OPTIONS=1)
F—Full restore
D—DAR
S—Selective restore
h—Restore hardlinks by table

Source/Destination If an operation is in progress, this setting specifies the /ifs directories that are
affected by the operation. If a backup is in progress, this setting displays the path of the
source directory that is being backed up. If a restore operation is in progress, displays
the path of the directory that is being restored along with the destination directory to
which the tape media server is restoring data. If you are restoring data to the same
location that you backed up your data from, the same path appears twice.
Device Specifies the name of the tape or media changer device that is communicating with the
PowerScale cluster.

NDMP backup and recovery 325

Table 101. Session Information (continued)
Item Description
Mode Specifies how OneFS is interacting with data on the backup media server through the
following options:

Read/Write OneFS is reading and writing data during a backup operation.

Read OneFS is reading data during a restore operation.
Raw The DMA has access to tape drives, but the drives do not
contain writable tape media.

Actions Allows you to probe or delete a session.

NDMP backup and restore operations

Examples of active NDMP backup sessions indicated through the Operation field that is described in the previous table are as
shown:

B(T0): Token based full backup

B(Ti): Token based incremental backup
B(L0): Level based full backup
B(L5): Level 5 incremental backup
B(S0): Snapshot based full backup
B(S3): Snapshot based level 3 backup
B(FT0): Token based full filelist backup
B(FL4): Level 4 incremental filelist backup
B(L0r): Restartable level based full backup
B(S4r): Restartable snapshot based level 4 incremental backup
B(L7R): Restarted level 7 backup
B(FT1R): Restarted token based incremental filelist backup
B(ML0): Multi-stream full backup

Examples of active NDMP restore sessions indicated through the Operation field that is described in the previous table are as
shown:

R(F): Full restore

R(D): DAR
R(S): Selective restore
R(MF): Multi-stream full restore
R(sFh): single threaded full restore with restore hardlinks by table option

Related tasks
View NDMP sessions

View NDMP sessions

You can view information about active NDMP sessions.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Sessions.
2. In the Sessions table, review information about NDMP sessions.

Related references
NDMP session information

Abort an NDMP session

You can abort an NDMP backup or restore session at any time.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Sessions.
2. In the Sessions table, click the check box corresponding to the session you want to abort, and click Delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

326 NDMP backup and recovery

Managing NDMP Fibre Channel ports
You can manage the Fibre Channel ports that connect tape and media changer devices to a Fibre Attached Storage node. You
can also enable, disable, or modify the settings of an NDMP Fibre Channel port.

NDMP backup port settings

OneFS assigns default settings to each Fibre Channel port on the Fiber Attached Storage node that is attached to the
PowerScale cluster. These settings identify the port and determine how the port interacts with the NDMP backup devices.
The following settings appear in the Ports table:

Table 102. Backup Port Settings

Setting Description
LNN Specifies the logical node number of the Fiber Attached Storage node.
Port Specifies the name and port number of the Fiber Attached Storage node.
Topology Specifies the type of Fibre Channel topology that is supported by the port. Options are:

Point to Point A single backup device or Fiber Channel switch that is directly connected
to the port.
Loop Multiple backup devices that are connected to a single port in a circular
formation.
Auto Automatically detects the topology of the connected device. This is the
recommended setting and is required for a switched-fabric topology.

WWNN Specifies the worldwide node name (WWNN) of the port. This name is the same for each port on a
given node.
WWPN Specifies the worldwide port name (WWPN) of the port. This name is unique to the port.
Rate Specifies the rate at which data is sent through the port. The rate can be set to 1 Gb/s, 2
Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, 8 Gb/s, and Auto. 8 Gb/s is available for A100 nodes only. If set to Auto, the
Fibre Channel chip negotiates with connected Fibre Channel switch or Fibre Channel devices to
determine the rate. Auto is the recommended setting.

Actions Allows you to view and edit the port settings.

Related tasks
Modify NDMP backup port settings
View NDMP backup ports

Enable or disable an NDMP backup port

You can enable or disable an NDMP backup port.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Ports.
2. In the row of a port, click View/Edit.
The View Port dialog box appears.
3. Click the Edit Port button.
The Edit Port dialog box appears.
4. From the State drop-down list, select Enable or Disable.
5. Click the Save Changes button.

NDMP backup and recovery 327

View NDMP backup ports
You can view information about Fibre Channel ports of Fibre Attached Storage nodes attached to an PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Ports.
2. In the Ports table, review information about NDMP backup ports. For more detailed information about a specific port, click
the View/Edit button corresponding to that port.

Related references
NDMP backup port settings

Modify NDMP backup port settings

You can modify the settings of an NDMP backup port.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Ports.
2. Click the View/Edit button corresponding to the port you want to modify.
The View Port dialog box appears.
3. Click the Edit Port button.
The Edit Port dialog box appears.
4. Edit the settings in the Edit Port dialog box, and click Save Changes when finished.

Related references
NDMP backup port settings

Managing NDMP preferred IP settings

If you are performing NDMP three-way operations using Avamar in an environment with multiple network interfaces, you can
create, modify, delete, list, and view cluster-wide or subnet-specific NDMP preferred IP settings.
You can manage NDMP preferred IP settings only through the OneFS command-line interface.

Create an NDMP preferred IP setting

If you are performing an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation using Avamar, you can create a cluster-wide or a
subnet-specific NDMP preferred IP setting.
● Create an NDMP preferred IP setting by running the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips create command.
For example, run the following command to apply a preferred IP setting for a cluster:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips create cluster groupnet0.subnet0,10gnet.subnet0

Run the command as shown in the following example to apply a preferred IP setting for a subnet group:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips create 10gnet.subnet0 10gnet.subnet0,groupnet0.subnet0

Modify an NDMP preferred IP setting

If you are performing an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation using Avamar, you can modify an NDMP preferred IP
setting by adding or deleting a subnet group.
● Modify an NDMP preferred IP setting by running the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips modify command.
For example, run the following commands to modify the NDMP preferred IP setting for a cluster:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips modify 10gnet.subnet0 --add-data-subnets

10gnet.subnet0,groupnet0.subnet0

328 NDMP backup and recovery

 Run the command as shown in the following example to modify the NDMP preferred IP setting for a subnet:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips modify 10gnet.subnet0 --remove-data-subnets

groupnet0.subnet0

List NDMP preferred IP settings

If you are performing an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation using Avamar, you can list all the NDMP preferred IP
settings.
● List the NDMP preferred IP settings by running the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips list command.
For example, run the following command to list the NDMP preferred IP settings:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips list

View NDMP preferred IP settings

If you are performing an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation using Avamar, you can view the NDMP preferred IP
settings for a subnet or cluster.
● View an NDMP preferred IP setting by running the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips view command.
For example, run the following command to view the NDMP preferred IP setting for a subnet:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips view --scope=10gnet.subnet0

Delete NDMP preferred IP settings

If you are performing an NDMP three-way backup or restore operation using Avamar, you can delete an NDMP preferred IP
setting for a subnet or cluster.
● Delete NDMP preferred IP settings by running the isi ndmp settings preferred-ips delete command.
For example, run the following command to delete the preferred IP setting for a subnet:

isi ndmp settings preferred-ips delete --scope=10gnet.subnet0

Managing NDMP backup devices

After you attach a tape or media changer device to a Fibre Attached Storage node, you must configure OneFS to detect and
establish a connection to the device. After the connection between the cluster and the backup device is established, you can
modify the name that the cluster has assigned to the device, or disconnect the device from the cluster.
In case the virtual tape library (VTL) device has multiple LUNs, you must configure LUN0 so that all the LUNs are detected
properly.

NDMP backup device settings

OneFS creates a device entry for each device that you attach to the cluster through a Fiber Attached Storage node.
The following table describes the settings that you can review for an added tape or media changer device in the Devices table
and also through the View Tape Devices dialog box that appears when you select a device and click View/Edit:

Table 103. Backup Device Settings

Setting Description
Name Specifies a device name that is assigned by OneFS.
State Indicates whether the device is in use. If data is being backed up to or restored from the device,
Read/Write appears. If the device is not in use, Closed appears.

NDMP backup and recovery 329

Table 103. Backup Device Settings (continued)
Setting Description
WWNN Specifies the worldwide node name of the device.
Product (Vendor/ Specifies the name of the device vendor and the model name or number of the device.
Model/Revision)
Serial Number Specifies the serial number of the device.
Actions Allows you to view, edit, or delete a device.
Path Specifies the name of the Fiber Attached Storage node that is attached to the device and the port
numbers to which the device is connected.
LUN Specifies the logical unit number (LUN) of the device.
State Specifies whether the device is active or inactive.
WWPN Specifies the worldwide port name (WWPN) of the port on the tape or media changer device.
Port ID Specifies the port ID of the device that binds the logical device to the physical device.
Open Count A counter of the active and open connections to the device.
Device Name Specifies the regular device name that appears under the FreeBSD operating system.
Pass Name Specifies the pass-through device name that appears under the FreeBSD operating system.

Related tasks
Detect NDMP backup devices
View NDMP backup devices

Detect NDMP backup devices

If you connect a tape device or media changer to a Fibre Attached Storage node, you must configure OneFS to detect the
device. Only then can OneFS back up data to and restore data from the device. In OneFS, you can scan a specific PowerScale
node, a specific port, or all ports on all nodes.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Devices.
2. Click the Discover Devices link.
The Discover Devices dialog appears.
3. Optional: To scan only a specific node for NDMP devices, from the Node list, select a node.
4. Optional: To scan only a specific port for NDMP devices, from the Ports list, select a port.
If you specify a port and a node, only the specified port on the node is scanned. However, if you specify only a port, the
specified port will be scanned on all nodes.

5. Optional: To remove entries for devices or paths that have become inaccessible, select the Delete inaccessible paths or
devices check box.
6. Click Submit.
For each device that is detected, an entry is added to either the Tape Devices or Media Changers tables.

Related references
NDMP backup device settings

View NDMP backup devices

You can view information about tape and media changer devices that are currently attached to your PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Devices.
2. In the Tape Devices and Media Changer Devices tables, review the information about NDMP backup devices.

330 NDMP backup and recovery

Related references
NDMP backup device settings

Modify the name of an NDMP backup device

You can modify the name of an NDMP backup device in OneFS.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Devices.
2. In the Tape Devices table, or the Media Changer Devices table, click the check box corresponding to the name of a
backup device entry.
3. Click View/Edit.
The View Tape Devices or View Media Changers dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Tape Device.
The Edit Tape Devices or Edit Media Changers dialog box appears.
5. Edit the device name.
6. Click Save Changes.

Delete an entry for an NDMP backup device

If you physically remove an NDMP device from an PowerScale cluster, OneFS retains the entry for the device. You can delete
a device entry for a removed device. You can also remove the device entry for a device that is still physically attached to the
cluster; this causes OneFS to disconnect from the device.
If you remove a device entry for a device that is connected to the cluster, and you do not physically disconnect the device,
OneFS will detect the device the next time it scans the ports. You cannot remove a device entry for a device that is currently in
use.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Devices.
2. In the Tape Devices table or the Media Changer Devices table, click the check box corresponding to the device that you
want to remove.
3. Click Delete.
4. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.

NDMP dumpdates file overview

When you set the UPDATE environment variable to Y, the NDMP daemon maintains a dumpdates file to record all but
the token-based backup sessions. The timestamp within the dumpdates file helps identify the changed files for the next
level-based backup. The entries within the dumpdates file also provide information about the last backup session at a given
path and the type of backup session which can be a full, level-based incremental, or snapshot-based backup. This information
determines the type of incremental backup you must run subsequently. The entries within the dumpdates file may be obsolete
when the backup path is removed. In such a case, all the obsolete entries can be removed from the dumpdates file.

Managing the NDMP dumpdates file

You can view or delete entries in the NDMP dumpdates file.

NDMP dumpdates file settings

You can view details about the entries in the NDMP dumpdates file and delete them if required.
The following settings appear in the Dumpdates table:

NDMP backup and recovery 331

Table 104. Dumpdates File Settings
Setting Description
Date Specifies the date when an entry was added to the
dumpdates file.

ID The identifier for an entry in the dumpdates file.

Level Specifies the backup level.

Path Specifies the path where the dumpdates file is saved.

Snapshot ID Identifies changed files for the next level of backup. This ID
is applicable only for snapshot-based backups. In all the other
cases, the value is 0.
Actions Deletes an entry from the dumpdates file.

View entries in the NDMP dumpdates file

You can view all the entries in the NDMP dumpdates file.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Dumpdates table, view information about the entries in the NDMP dumpdates file.

Delete entries from the NDMP dumpdates file

You can delete entries from the NDMP dumpdates file.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Dumpdates table, click Delete against the entry that you want to delete.
3. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.

NDMP restore operations

NDMP supports the following types of restore operations:
● NDMP parallel restore (multi-threaded process)
● NDMP serial restore (single-threaded process)

NDMP parallel restore operation

Parallel (multi-threaded) restore enables faster full or partial restore operations by writing data to the cluster as fast as the data
can be read from the tape. Parallel restore is the default restore mechanism in OneFS.
The restore operation can restore multiple files concurrently through the parallel restore mechanism.

NDMP serial restore operation

For troubleshooting or for other purposes, you can run a serial restore operation which uses fewer system resources. The serial
restore operation runs as a single-threaded process and restores one file at a time to the specified path.

Specify a NDMP serial restore operation

You can use the RESTORE_OPTIONS environment variable to specify a serial (single-threaded) restore operation.
1. In your data management application, configure a restore operation as you normally would.
2. Make sure that the RESTORE_OPTIONS environment variable is set to 1 on your data management application.

332 NDMP backup and recovery

 If the RESTORE_OPTIONS environment variable is not already set to 1, specify the isi ndmp settings variables
modify command from the OneFS command line. The following command specifies serial restore for the /ifs/data/
projects directory:

isi ndmp settings variables modify /ifs/data/projects RESTORE_OPTIONS 1

The value of the path option must match the FILESYSTEM environment variable that is set during the backup operation.
The value that you specify for the name option is case sensitive.
3. Start the restore operation.

Sharing tape drives between clusters

Multiple PowerScale clusters or an PowerScale cluster and a third-party NAS system can be configured to share a single tape
drive, which helps to maximize the use of the tape infrastructure in your data center.
In your data management application (DMA), you must configure NDMP to control the tape drive and ensure that it is shared
properly.
NOTE: Library Media Changers cannot be shared unless the library is partitioned.

The following configurations are supported.

Table 105. Supported DMA Configurations

Supported DMAs Tested configurations
● NetWorker 8.0 and later ● Backup Accelerator node or Fiber Attached Storage node with
● Veritas NetBackup 7.5 and later a second Backup Accelerator node or Fiber Attached Storage
node.
● Backup Accelerator node or Fiber Attached Storage node with a
NetApp storage system

NetWorker sees the tape drive sharing capability as DDS (dynamic drive sharing). Veritas NetBackup uses the term SSO (shared
storage option). Consult your DMA vendor documentation for configuration instructions.

Managing snapshot based incremental backups

After you enable snapshot-based incremental backups, you can view and delete the snapshots created for these backups.

Related references
NDMP environment variables

Enable snapshot-based incremental backups for a directory

You can configure OneFS to perform snapshot-based incremental backups for a directory by default. You can also override the
default setting in your data management application (DMA).
● Run the isi ndmp settings variable create command.
The following command enables snapshot-based incremental backups for /ifs/data/media:

isi ndmp settings variables create /ifs/data/media BACKUP_MODE SNAPSHOT

Related references
NDMP environment variables

NDMP backup and recovery 333

View snapshots for snapshot-based incremental backups
You can view snapshots generated for snapshot-based incremental backups.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Dumpdates table, view information about the snapshot-based incremental backups.

Related concepts
Excluding files and directories from NDMP backups

Delete snapshots for snapshot-based incremental backups

You can delete snapshots created for snapshot-based incremental backups.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not delete snapshots created for snapshot-based incremental backups. If all
snapshots are deleted for a path, the next backup performed for the path is a full backup.
1. Click Data Protection > NDMP > Environment Settings.
2. In the Dumpdates table, click Delete against the entry that you want to delete.
3. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.

Related references
NDMP environment variables

Managing cluster performance for NDMP sessions

NDMP Redirector distributes NDMP loads automatically over nodes by using the optional 2x10GbE + 2x8GB Fibre Channel
NIC on Generation 6 nodes. You can enable NDMP Redirector to automatically distribute NDMP two-way sessions to nodes
with lesser loads. The load-distribution capability results in improved cluster performance when multiple NDMP operations are
initiated.
NDMP Redirector checks for the following before redirecting the NDMP operation:
● CPU usage
● The number of running NDMP operations
● The availability of tape devices

Enable NDMP Redirector to manage cluster performance

You must enable NDMP Redirector in order to automatically distribute NDMP two-way sessions to nodes with lesser loads.
Make sure that the cluster is committed before enabling NDMP Redirector.
1. Run the following command through the command line interface to enable NDMP Redirector:

isi ndmp settings global modify --enable-redirector true

2. View the setting change by running the following command:

isi ndmp settings global modify

A sample output of the previous command is shown:

Service: False
Port: 10000
DMA: generic
Bre Max Num Contexts: 64
Context Retention Duration: 300

334 NDMP backup and recovery

 Smartlink File Open Timeout: 10
Enable Redirector: True

Managing CPU usage for NDMP sessions

NDMP Throttler manages the CPU usage during NDMP two-way sessions on 6th Generation nodes. The nodes are then
available to adequately support other system activities.

Enable NDMP Throttler

You must enable NDMP Throttler in order to manage CPU usage of NDMP sessions on 6th Generation nodes.
1. Run the following command through the command line interface to enable NDMP Throttler:

isi ndmp settings global modify --enable-throttler true

2. View the setting change by running the following command:

isi ndmp settings global view

A sample output of the previous command is shown:

Service: False
Port: 10000
DMA: generic
Bre Max Num Contexts: 64
Context Retention Duration: 600
Smartlink File Open Timeout: 10
Enable Throttler: True
Throttler CPU Threshold: 50

3. If required, change the throttler CPU threshold as shown in the following example:

isi ndmp settings global modify -–throttler-cpu-threshold 80

NDMP backup and recovery 335

 23
File retention with SmartLock
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• SmartLock overview
• Compliance mode
• Enterprise mode
• SmartLock directories
• Replication and backup with SmartLock
• SmartLock license functionality
• SmartLock considerations
• Set the compliance clock
• View the compliance clock
• Creating a SmartLock directory
• Managing SmartLock directories
• Managing files in SmartLock directories

SmartLock overview
With the SmartLock software module, you can protect files on a PowerScale cluster from being modified, overwritten, or
deleted. To protect files in this manner, you must activate a SmartLock license.
With SmartLock, you can identify a directory in OneFS as a WORM domain. WORM stands for write once, read many. All files
within the WORM domain can be committed to a WORM state, meaning that those files cannot be overwritten, modified, or
deleted.
After a file is removed from a WORM state, you can delete the file. However, you can never modify a file that has been
committed to a WORM state, even after it is removed from a WORM state.
In OneFS, SmartLock can be deployed in one of two modes: compliance mode or enterprise mode.

Compliance mode
SmartLock compliance mode enables you to protect your data in compliance with U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission rule
17a-4. Rule 17a-4 is aimed at securities brokers and dealers, and specifies that records of all securities transactions must be
archived in a nonrewritable, nonerasable manner.
NOTE: A valid SmartLock license is required to configure a node in compliance mode. You can configure a PowerScale
cluster for SmartLock compliance mode only during the initial cluster configuration process, before you activate a
SmartLock license. A cluster cannot be converted to SmartLock compliance mode after the cluster is initially configured and
put into production.
Configuring a cluster for SmartLock compliance mode disables the root user. You cannot to log in to that cluster through the
root user account. Instead, you can log in to the cluster through the compliance administrator account that is configured during
initial SmartLock compliance mode configuration.
When you are logged in to a SmartLock compliance mode cluster through the compliance administrator account, you can
perform administrative tasks through the sudo command.

336 File retention with SmartLock

Enterprise mode
You can create SmartLock domains and apply WORM status to files by activating a SmartLock license on a cluster in standard
configuration. This is referred to as SmartLock enterprise mode.
SmartLock enterprise mode does not conform to SEC regulations, but does enable you to create SmartLock directories and
apply SmartLock controls to protect files so that they cannot be rewritten or erased. In addition, the root user account remains
on your system.

SmartLock directories
In a SmartLock directory, you can commit a file to a WORM state manually or you can configure SmartLock to commit the file
automatically. Before you can create SmartLock directories, you must activate a SmartLock license on the cluster.
You can create two types of SmartLock directories: enterprise and compliance. However, you can create compliance directories
only if the PowerScale cluster has been set up in SmartLock compliance mode during initial configuration.
Enterprise directories enable you to protect your data without restricting your cluster to comply with regulations defined by U.S.
Securities and Exchange Commission rule 17a-4. If you commit a file to a WORM state in an enterprise directory, the file can
never be modified and cannot be deleted until the retention period passes.
However, if you own a file and have been assigned the ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE privilege, or you are logged in through
the root user account, you can delete the file through the privileged delete feature before the retention period passes.
The privileged delete feature is not available for compliance directories. Enterprise directories reference the system clock to
facilitate time-dependent operations, including file retention.
Compliance directories enable you to protect your data in compliance with the regulations defined by U.S. Securities and
Exchange Commission rule 17a-4. If you commit a file to a WORM state in a compliance directory, the file cannot be modified
or deleted before the specified retention period has expired. You cannot delete committed files, even if you are logged in
to the compliance administrator account. Compliance directories reference the compliance clock to facilitate time-dependent
operations, including file retention.
You must set the compliance clock before you can create compliance directories. You can set the compliance clock only once,
after which you cannot modify the compliance clock time. You can increase the retention time of WORM committed files on an
individual basis, if desired, but you cannot decrease the retention time.
The compliance clock is controlled by the compliance clock daemon. Root and compliance administrator users could disable
the compliance clock daemon, which would have the effect of increasing the retention period for all WORM committed files.
However, this is not recommended.
NOTE: Using WORM exclusions, files inside a WORM compliance or enterprise domain can be excluded from having a
WORM state. All the files inside the excluded directory will behave as normal non-Smartlock protected files. For more
information, see the OneFS CLI Administration Guide.

Replication and backup with SmartLock

OneFS enables both compliance and enterprise SmartLock directories to be replicated or backed up to a target cluster.
If you are replicating SmartLock directories with SyncIQ, it is recommended that you configure all nodes on the source and
target clusters with Network Time Protocol (NTP) peer mode to ensure that the node clocks are synchronized. For compliance
clusters, it is recommended that you configure all nodes on the source and target clusters with NTP peer mode before you set
the compliance clocks. Configuring all nodes with NTP peer mode sets the source and target clusters to the same time initially
and helps to ensure compliance with U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission rule 17a-4.
NOTE: If you replicate data to a SmartLock directory, do not configure SmartLock settings for that directory until you are
no longer replicating data to the directory. Configuring an autocommit time period for a SmartLock target directory, for
example, can cause replication jobs to fail. If the target directory commits a file to a WORM state, and the file is modified on
the source cluster, the next replication job will fail because it cannot overwrite the committed file.
If you back up data to an NDMP device, all SmartLock metadata relating to the retention date and commit status is transferred
to the NDMP device. If you recover data to a SmartLock directory on the cluster, the metadata persists on the cluster.
However, if the directory that you recover data to is not a SmartLock directory, the metadata is lost. You can recover data to a
SmartLock directory only if the directory is empty.

File retention with SmartLock 337

For information about the limitations of replicating and failing back SmartLock directories with SyncIQ, see SmartLock
replication limitations.

SmartLock license functionality

You must activate a SmartLock license on a PowerScale cluster before you can create SmartLock directories and commit files to
a WORM state.
If a SmartLock license becomes inactive, you will not be able to create new SmartLock directories on the cluster, modify
SmartLock directory configuration settings, or delete files committed to a WORM state in enterprise directories before their
expiration dates. However, you can still commit files within existing SmartLock directories to a WORM state.
If a SmartLock license becomes inactive on a cluster that is running in SmartLock compliance mode, root access to the cluster is
not restored.

SmartLock considerations
● If a file is owned exclusively by the root user, and the file exists on a PowerScale cluster that is in SmartLock compliance
mode, the file will be inaccessible: the root user account is disabled in compliance mode. For example, if a file is assigned
root ownership on a cluster that has not been configured in compliance mode, and then the file is replicated to a cluster
in compliance mode, the file becomes inaccessible. This can also occur if a root-owned file is restored onto a compliance
cluster from a backup.
● It is recommended that you create files outside of SmartLock directories and then transfer them into a SmartLock directory
after you are finished working with the files. If you are uploading files to a cluster, it is recommended that you upload the
files to a non-SmartLock directory, and then later transfer the files to a SmartLock directory. If a file is committed to a
WORM state while the file is being uploaded, the file will become trapped in an inconsistent state.
● Files can be committed to a WORM state while they are still open. If you specify an autocommit time period for a directory,
the autocommit time period is calculated according to the length of time since the file was last modified, not when the file
was closed. If you delay writing to an open file for more than the autocommit time period, the file is automatically committed
to a WORM state, and you will not be able to write to the file.
● In a Microsoft Windows environment, if you commit a file to a WORM state, you can no longer modify the hidden or archive
attributes of the file. Any attempt to modify the hidden or archive attributes of a WORM committed file generates an error.
This can prevent third-party applications from modifying the hidden or archive attributes.
● You cannot rename a SmartLock compliance directory. You can rename a SmartLock enterprise directory only if it is empty.
● You can only rename files in SmartLock compliance or enterprise directories if the files are uncommitted.
● You cannot move:
○ SmartLock directories within a WORM domain
○ SmartLock directories in a WORM domain into a directory in a non-WORM domain.
○ directories in a non-WORM domain into a SmartLock directory in a WORM domain.

Set the compliance clock

Before you can create SmartLock compliance directories, you must set the compliance clock.
Setting the compliance clock configures the clock to the same time as the PowerScale cluster system clock. Before you set the
compliance clock, ensure that the system clock is set to the correct time. If the compliance clock later becomes unsynchronized
with the system clock, the compliance clock will slowly correct itself to match the system clock. The compliance clock corrects
itself at a rate of approximately one week per year.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. Click Start Compliance Clock.

View the compliance clock

You can view the current time of the compliance clock.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. In the Compliance Clock area, view the compliance clock.

338 File retention with SmartLock

Creating a SmartLock directory
You can create a SmartLock directory and configure settings that control how long files are retained in a WORM state and
when files are automatically committed to a WORM state. You cannot move or rename a directory that contains a SmartLock
directory.

Retention periods
A retention period is the length of time that a file remains in a WORM state before being released from a WORM state. You can
configure SmartLock directory settings that enforce default, maximum, and minimum retention periods for the directory.
If you manually commit a file, you can optionally specify the date that the file is released from a WORM state. You can configure
a minimum and a maximum retention period for a SmartLock directory to prevent files from being retained for too long or too
short a time period. It is recommended that you specify a minimum retention period for all SmartLock directories.
For example, assume that you have a SmartLock directory with a minimum retention period of two days. At 1:00 PM on Monday,
you commit a file to a WORM state, and specify the file to be released from a WORM state on Tuesday at 3:00 PM. The file will
be released from a WORM state two days later on Wednesday at 1:00 PM, because releasing the file earlier would violate the
minimum retention period.
You can also configure a default retention period that is assigned when you commit a file without specifying a date to release
the file from a WORM state.

Autocommit time periods

You can configure an autocommit time period for SmartLock directories. An autocommit time period causes files that have been
in a SmartLock directory for a period of time without being modified to be automatically committed to a WORM state.
If you modify the autocommit time period of a SmartLock directory that contains uncommitted files, the new autocommit time
period is immediately applied to the files that existed before the modification. For example, consider a SmartLock directory
with an autocommit time period of 2 hours. If you modify a file in the SmartLock directory at 1:00 PM, and you decrease the
autocommit time period to 1 hour at 2:15 PM, the file is instantly committed to a WORM state.
If a file is manually committed to a WORM state, the read-write permissions of the file are modified. However, if a file is
automatically committed to a WORM state, the read-write permissions of the file are not modified.

Create an enterprise directory for a non-empty directory

You can make a non-empty directory into a SmartLock enterprise directory. This procedure is available only through the
command-line interface (CLI).
Before creating a SmartLock directory, be aware of the following conditions and requirements:
● You cannot create a SmartLock directory as a subdirectory of an existing SmartLock directory.
● Hard links cannot cross SmartLock directory boundaries.
● Creating a SmartLock directory causes a corresponding SmartLock domain to be created for that directory.
Run the isi job jobs start command.
The following command creates a SmartLock enterprise domain for /ifs/data/smartlock:

isi job jobs start DomainMark --root /ifs/data/smartlock --dm-type Worm

Create a SmartLock directory

You can create a SmartLock directory and commit files in that directory to a WORM state.
Before creating a SmartLock directory, be aware of the following conditions and requirements:
● You cannot create a SmartLock directory as a subdirectory of an existing SmartLock directory.
● Hard links cannot cross SmartLock directory boundaries.

File retention with SmartLock 339

● Creating a SmartLock directory causes a corresponding SmartLock domain to be created for that directory.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. Click Create Domain.
3. From the Type list, specify whether the directory is an enterprise directory or a compliance directory.
Compliance directories enable you to protect your data in compliance with the regulations defined by U.S. Securities and
Exchange Commission rule 17a-4. Enterprise directories enable you to protect your data without complying with those
restrictions.
This option is available only if the cluster is in SmartLock compliance mode. If the cluster is not in compliance mode, all
SmartLock directories are enterprise directories.

4. From the Privileged Delete list, specify whether to enabled the root user to delete files that are currently committed to a
WORM state.
NOTE: This functionality is available only for SmartLock enterprise directories.

5. In the Path field, type the full path of the directory you want to make into a SmartLock directory.
The specified path must belong to an empty directory on the cluster.
6. Optional: To specify a default retention period for the directory, click Apply a default retention span and then specify a
time period.
The default retention period will be assigned if you commit a file to a WORM state without specifying a day to release the file
from the WORM state.
7. Optional: To specify a minimum retention period for the directory, click Apply a minimum retention span and then specify
a time period.
The minimum retention period ensures that files are retained in a WORM state for at least the specified period of time.
8. Optional: To specify a maximum retention period for the directory, click Apply a maximum retention span and then specify
a time period.
The maximum retention period ensures that files are not retained in a WORM state for more than the specified period of
time.
9. Click Create Domain.
10. Click Create.

Managing SmartLock directories

You can modify SmartLock directory settings, including the default, minimum, maximum retention period and the autocommit
time period.
A SmartLock enterprise directory can be renamed only if the directory is empty. A SmartLock compliance directory cannot be
renamed.

Modify a SmartLock directory

You can modify the SmartLock configuration settings for a SmartLock directory.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. In the Write Once Read many (WORM) Domains table, in the row of a SmartLock directory, click View / Edit.
3. Click Edit Domain.
4. Modify settings and then click Save Changes.

Delete a SmartLock directory

You can delete a SmartLock compliance mode directory and its corresponding compliance mode WORM domain (if needed)
using the CLI, but not the Web UI.
In order to do this, you must set the pending delete flag on the domain via the isi worm domain modify <domain>
--set-pending-delete CLI command. You cannot set the pending delete flag on an enterprise mode WORM domain. For
more information, see the OneFS CLI Administration Guide.

340 File retention with SmartLock

View SmartLock directory settings
You can view settings for SmartLock directory.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. In the Write Once Read many (WORM) Domains table, in the row of a SmartLock directory, click View / Edit.
3. In the View WORM Domain Details dialog box, view SmartLock directory settings.

SmartLock directory configuration settings

You can configure SmartLock directory settings that determine when files are committed to and how long files are retained in a
WORM state.

Path The path of the directory.

Root Logical Inode The LIN of the directory.

(LIN)
ID The numerical ID of the corresponding SmartLock domain.
Type The type of SmartLock directory.
Enterprise
Enterprise directories enable you to protect your data without restricting your
cluster to comply with regulations defined by U.S. Securities and Exchange
Commission rule 17a-4
Compliance
Compliance directories enable you to protect your data in compliance with the
regulations defined by U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission rule 17a-4.

Privileged Delete Indicates whether files committed to a WORM state in the directory can be deleted through the
privileged delete functionality. To access the privilege delete functionality, you must either be assigned
the ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE privilege and own the file you are deleting. You can also access
the privilege delete functionality for any file if you are logged in through the root or compadmin user
account.

on Files committed to a WORM state can be deleted through the isi worm
files delete command.
off Files committed to a WORM state cannot be deleted, even through the isi
worm files delete command.
disabled Files committed to a WORM state cannot be deleted, even through the isi
worm files delete command. After this setting is applied, it cannot be
modified.

Apply a default The default retention period for the directory. If a user does not specify a date to release a file from a
retention span WORM state, the default retention period is assigned.
Enforce a minimum The minimum retention period for the directory. Files are retained in a WORM state for at least the
retention time span specified amount of time, even if a user specifies an expiration date that results in a shorter retention
period.
Enforce a maximum The maximum retention period for the directory. Files cannot be retained in a WORM state for more
retention time span than the specified amount of time, even if a user specifies an expiration date that results in a longer
retention period.
Automatically The autocommit time period for the directory. After a file exists in this SmartLock directory without
commit files after being modified for the specified time period, the file is automatically committed to a WORM state.
a specific period of
time
Override retention The override retention date for the directory. Files committed to a WORM state are not released
periods and protect from a WORM state until after the specified date, regardless of the maximum retention period for the
all files until a directory or whether a user specifies an earlier date to release a file from a WORM state.
specific date

File retention with SmartLock 341

Managing files in SmartLock directories
You can commit files in SmartLock directories to a WORM state by removing the read-write privileges of the file. You can also
set a specific date at which the retention period of the file expires. Once a file is committed to a WORM state, you can increase
the retention period of the file, but you cannot decrease the retention period of the file. You cannot move a file that has been
committed to a WORM state, even after the retention period for the file has expired.
The retention period expiration date is set by modifying the access time of a file. In a UNIX command line, the access time
can be modified through the touch command. Although there is no method of modifying the access time through Windows
Explorer, you can modify the access time through Windows Powershell. Accessing a file does not set the retention period
expiration date.
If you run the touch command on a file in a SmartLock directory without specifying a date on which to release the file from a
SmartLock state, and you commit the file, the retention period is automatically set to the default retention period specified for
the SmartLock directory. If you have not specified a default retention period for the SmartLock directory, the file is assigned a
retention period of zero seconds. It is recommended that you specify a minimum retention period for all SmartLock directories.

Set a retention period through a UNIX command line

You can specify when a file will be released from a WORM state through a UNIX command line.
1. Open a connection to any node in the PowerScale cluster through a UNIX command line and log in.
2. Set the retention period by modifying the access time of the file through the touch command.
The following command sets an expiration date of June 1, 2025 for /ifs/data/[Link]:

touch -at 202506010000 /ifs/data/[Link]

Other touch command input formats are also allowed to modify the access time of files. For example, the command:

touch -a MMDDhhmm[yy] [file]

can modify the access time in some versions of FreeBSD.

Other commands that modify the access time have the same effect of modifying the retention period. For example, the
command:

cp -p <source> <destination>

copies the contents of source to destination, and then updates the attributes of destination to match the attributes of
source, including setting the same access time.

Set a retention period through Windows Powershell

You can specify when a file will be released from a WORM state through Microsoft Windows Powershell.
1. Open the Windows PowerShell command prompt.
2. Optional: Establish a connection to the PowerScale cluster by running the net use command.
The following command establishes a connection to the /ifs directory on [Link]:

net use "\\[Link]\ifs" /user:root password

3. Specify the name of the file you want to set a retention period for by creating an object.
The file must exist in a SmartLock directory.

The following command creates an object for /smartlock/[Link]:

$file = Get-Item "\\[Link]\ifs\smartlock\[Link]"

4. Specify the retention period by setting the last access time for the file.
The following command sets an expiration date of July 1, 2015 at 1:00 PM:

$[Link] = Get-Date "2015/7/1 1:00 pm"

342 File retention with SmartLock

Commit a file to a WORM state through a UNIX command line
You can commit a file to a WORM state through a UNIX command line.
To commit a file to a WORM state, you must remove all write privileges from the file. If a file is already set to a read-only state,
you must first add write privileges to the file, and then return the file to a read-only state.
1. Open a connection to the PowerScale cluster through a UNIX command line interface and log in.
2. Remove write privileges from a file by running the chmod command.
The following command removes write privileges of /ifs/data/smartlock/[Link]:

chmod ugo-w /ifs/data/smartlock/[Link]

Commit a file to a WORM state through Windows Explorer

You can commit a file to a WORM state through Microsoft Windows Explorer. This procedure describes how to commit a file
through Windows 7.
To commit a file to a WORM state, you must apply the read-only setting. If a file is already set to a read-only state, you must
first remove the file from a read-only state and then return it to a read-only state.
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the file you want to commit to a WORM state.
2. Right-click the folder and then click Properties.
3. In the Properties window, click the General tab.
4. Select the Read-only check box, and then click OK.

Override the retention period for all files in a SmartLock directory

You can override the retention period for files in a SmartLock directory. All files committed to a WORM state within the
directory will remain in a WORM state until after the specified day.
If files are committed to a WORM state after the retention period is overridden, the override date functions as a minimum
retention date. All files committed to a WORM state do not expire until at least the given day, regardless of user specifications.
1. Click File System > SmartLock > WORM.
2. In the Write Once Read many (WORM) Domains table, in the row of a SmartLock directory, click View / Edit.
3. Click Edit Domain.
4. Click Override retention periods and protect all files until a specific date and then specify a date.
5. Click Save Changes.

Delete a file committed to a WORM state

You can delete a WORM committed file in an enterprise WORM domain before the expiration date through the privileged delete
functionality. This procedure is available only through the CLI.
● Privileged delete functionality must not be permanently disabled for the SmartLock directory that contains the file.
● You must either be the owner of the file and have the ISI_PRIV_IFS_WORM_DELETE and ISI_PRIV_NS_IFS_ACCESS
privileges, or be logged in through the root user account.
1. Open a connection to the PowerScale cluster through a UNIX command line and log in.
2. If privileged delete functionality was disabled for the SmartLock directory, modify the directory by running the isi worm
domains modify command with the --privileged-delete option.
The following command enables privileged delete for /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1:

isi worm domains modify /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1 \

--privileged-delete true

3. Delete the WORM committed file by running the isi worm files delete command.

File retention with SmartLock 343

 The following command deletes /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1/file:

isi worm files delete /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1/file

The system displays output similar to the following:

Are you sure? (yes, [no]):

4. Type yes and then press ENTER.

View WORM status of a file

You can view the WORM status of an individual file. This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a connection to the PowerScale cluster through a UNIX command line.
2. View the WORM status of a file by running the isi worm files view command.
For example, the following command displays the WORM status of a file:

isi worm files view /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1/file

The system displays output similar to the following:

WORM Domains
ID Root Path
------------------------------------
65539 /ifs/data/SmartLock/directory1

WORM State: COMMITTED

Expires: 2015-06-01T00:00:00

344 File retention with SmartLock

 24
Protection domains
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Protection domains overview
• Protection domain considerations
• Create a protection domain
• Delete a protection domain

Protection domains overview

Protection domains are markers that prevent modifications to files and directories. If a domain is applied to a directory, the
domain is also applied to all of the files and subdirectories under the directory. You can specify domains manually; however,
OneFS usually creates domains automatically.

Protection domain considerations

You can manually create protection domains before they are required by OneFS to perform certain actions. However, manually
creating protection domains can limit your ability to interact with the data marked by the domain.
● Copying a large number of files into a protection domain might take a very long time because each file must be marked
individually as belonging to the protection domain.
● You cannot move directories in or out of protection domains. However, you can move a directory contained in a protection
domain to another location within the same protection domain.
● Creating a protection domain for a directory that contains a large number of files will take more time than creating a
protection domain for a directory with fewer files. Because of this, it is recommended that you create protection domains for
directories while the directories are empty, and then add files to the directory.
● If a domain is currently preventing the modification or deletion of a file, you cannot create a protection domain for a
directory that contains that file. For example, if /ifs/data/smartlock/[Link] is set to a WORM state by a
SmartLock domain, you cannot create a SnapRevert domain for /ifs/data/.

NOTE: If you use SyncIQ to create a replication policy for a SmartLock compliance directory, the SyncIQ and SmartLock
compliance domains must be configured at the same root directory level. A SmartLock compliance domain cannot be nested
inside a SyncIQ domain.

Create a protection domain

You can create SyncIQ domains or SnapRevert domains to facilitate snapshot revert and failover operations. You cannot create
a SmartLock domain. OneFS automatically creates a SmartLock domain when you create a SmartLock directory.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types area, in the DomainMark row, from the Actions column, select Start Job.
3. In the Domain Root Path field, type the path of the directory you want to create a protection domain for.
4. From the Type of domain list, specify the type of domain you want to create.
5. Ensure that the Delete this domain check box is cleared.
6. Click Start Job.

Protection domains 345

Related concepts
Protection domains overview

Delete a protection domain

You can delete SyncIQ domains or SnapRevert domains if you want to move directories out of the domain. You cannot delete a
SmartLock domain. OneFS automatically deletes a SmartLock domain when you delete a SmartLock directory.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types area, in the DomainMark row, from the Actions column, select Start Job.
3. In the Domain Root Path field, type the path of the directory you want to delete a protection domain for.
4. From the Type of domain list, specify the type of domain you want to delete.
5. Select Delete this domain.
6. Click Start Job.

Related concepts
Protection domains overview

346 Protection domains

 25
Data-at-rest-encryption
Topics:
• Data-at-rest encryption overview
• Self-encrypting drives
• Data security on self-encrypting drives
• Data migrations and upgrades to a cluster with self-encrypting drives
• Enabling external key management
• Migrate nodes and SEDs to external key management
• Chassis and drive states
• Smartfailed drive REPLACE state
• Smartfailed drive ERASE state

Data-at-rest encryption overview

You can enhance data security on a cluster that contains only self-encrypting-drive nodes, providing data-at-rest encryption
(DARE) protection.
For more information about data-at-rest encryption, see the OneFS Data-at-Rest Encryption whitepaper.

Self-encrypting drives
Self-encrypting drives store data on a cluster that is specially designed for data-at-rest encryption.
Data-at-rest encryption on self-encrypting drives occurs when data that is stored on a device is encrypted to prevent
unauthorized data access. All data that is written to the storage device is encrypted when it is stored, and all data that is
read from the storage device is decrypted when it is read. The stored data is encrypted with a 256-bit data AES encryption key
and decrypted in the same manner. OneFS controls data access by combining the drive authentication key with data-encryption
keys.

NOTE: All nodes in a cluster must be of the self-encrypting drive type. Mixed nodes are not supported.

Data security on self-encrypting drives

Self-encrypting drives guarantee data security with the use of encryption keys.
Data on self-encrypting drives is protected from unauthorized access by authenticating with encryption keys. Encryption
keys can be hosted on the local drive or on an external key management server. Successful authentication with encryption
keys unlocks the drive for data access. For specific information about supported external key management servers, see the
PowerScale Supportability and Compatibility Guide.
The data on self-encrypting drives is rendered inaccessible in the following conditions:
● When a self-encrypting drive is smartfailed, drive authentication keys are deleted, making the drive unreadable. When you
smartfail and then remove a drive, it is cryptographically erased.

NOTE: Smartfailing a drive is the preferred method for removing a self-encrypting drive.

● When a self-encrypting drive loses power, the drive locks to prevent unauthorized access. When power is restored, data is
again accessible when the appropriate drive authentication key is provided.
● When a cluster using external key management loses network connection to the external key management server, the drives
are locked until the network connection is restored.

Data-at-rest-encryption 347
Data migrations and upgrades to a cluster with self-
encrypting drives
You can have data from your existing cluster migrated or upgraded to a cluster of nodes made up of self-encrypting drives
(SEDs). As a result, all migrated and future data on the new cluster are encrypted.
Upgrading from a cluster with SEDs using on-disk keys to a cluster with SEDs using an external key management server retains
the on-disk keys. After the upgrade, you must migrate your drives to the external key management server.
NOTE: Data migration and upgrades to a cluster with SEDs must be performed by PowerScale Professional Services. For
more information, contact your Dell Technologies representative.

Enabling external key management

You can enable external key management for self-encrypting drives (SED).
A OneFS cluster of nodes made up of self-encrypting drives (SEDs)
A KMIP 1.2 compatible external key management server
Certificates using X.509 PKI for TLS mutual authentication
Network connectivity between the OneFS cluster and the external key management server
To enable external key management, follow these steps:
1. Click Access > Key Management.
2. Click the Key Server tab.
3. Click the Enable Key Management checkbox.
4. Enter the Server Host address.
5. Enter the Server Port.
6. Enter the Server Certificate.
7. Enter the Client Certificate.
8. Enter the Client Certificate Password.
9. Click Submit.
OneFS confirms the connectivity between the OneFS server and the external key management server. Once confirmed, the
external key management server is ready for SEDs to be migrated.

Migrate nodes and SEDs to external key management

Once the external key management server is enabled, you can migrate the key authentication for each of your OneFS nodes.
External key management enabled.
To migrate the key authentication for your nodes and SEDs, follow these steps:
1. Click Access > Key Management.
2. Click the Keys tab.
Here, you can view the key IDs, nodes, status, and location.
3. Click Migrate All to migrate key authentication for all nodes.
4. Click Migrate to begin the process.
OneFS begins migrating the key authentication for each node. You can track migration progress and completion on the Keys
tab.

348 Data-at-rest-encryption
Chassis and drive states
You can view chassis and drive state details in the OneFS WebUI under Cluster Management → Hardware Configuration.
In a cluster, the combination of nodes in different degraded states determines whether read requests, write requests, or both
work. A cluster can lose write quorum but keep read quorum. OneFS provides details about the status of chassis and drives in
your cluster. The following table describes all the possible states that you may encounter in your cluster.

Table 106. Chassis and Drive State

State Description Interface Error state
HEALTHY All drives in the node are functioning correctly. Command-line
interface, web
administration interface
L3 A solid state drive (SSD) was deployed as level 3 Command-line interface
(L3) cache to increase the size of cache memory
and improve throughput speeds.
SMARTFAIL or The drive is being removed safely from the file Command-line
Smartfail or system, either because of an I/O error or by user interface, web
restripe in request. Nodes or drives in a smartfail or read- administration interface
progress only state affect only write quorum.
NOT AVAILABLE A drive is unavailable for various reasons. You can Command-line X
click the bay to view detailed information about interface, web
this condition. administration interface
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state includes the ERASE and
SED_ERROR command-line interface states.

SUSPENDED This state indicates that drive activity is Command-line

temporarily suspended, and the drive is not in interface, web
use. The state is manually initiated and does not administration interface
occur during normal cluster activity.
NOT IN USE A node in an offline state affects both read and Command-line
write quorum. interface, web
administration interface
REPLACE The drive was smartfailed successfully and is Command-line interface
ready to be replaced. only
STALLED The drive is stalled and undergoing stall Command-line interface
evaluation. Stall evaluation is the process of only
checking drives that are slow or having other
issues. Depending on the outcome of the
evaluation, the drive may return to service or be
smartfailed. STALLED is a transient state.
NEW The drive is new and blank. NEW is the state Command-line interface
that a drive is in when you run the isi dev only
command with the -a add option.
USED The drive was added and contained a Command-line interface
PowerScaleGUID but the drive is not from this only
node. This drive will likely be formatted into the
cluster.
PREPARING The drive is undergoing a format operation. Command-line interface
The drive state changes to HEALTHY when the only
format is successful.
EMPTY No drive is in this bay. Command-line interface
only

Data-at-rest-encryption 349
Table 106. Chassis and Drive State (continued)
State Description Interface Error state
WRONG_TYPE The drive type is wrong for this node. For Command-line interface
example, a non-SED drive in a SED node, SAS only
instead of the expected SATA drive type.
BOOT_DRIVE Unique to the A100 drive, which has boot drives Command-line interface
in its bays. only
SED_ERROR The drive cannot be acknowledged by the OneFS Command-line X
system. interface, web
NOTE: In the web administration interface, administration interface
this state is in Not available.

ERASE The drive is ready for removal but needs your Command-line interface
attention because the data has not been erased. only
You can erase the drive manually to guarantee
that data is removed.
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state is included in Not available.

INSECURE Data on the self-encrypted drive is accessible Command-line interface X

by unauthorized personnel. Self-encrypting drives only
should never be used for non-encrypted data
purposes.
NOTE: In the web administration interface,
this state is labeled Unencrypted SED.

UNENCRYPTED Data on the self-encrypted drive is accessible Web administration X

by unauthorized personnel. Self-encrypting drives interface only
should never be used for non-encrypted data
purposes.
NOTE: In the command-line interface, this
state is labeled INSECURE.

Smartfailed drive REPLACE state

You can see different drive states during the smartfail process.
If you run the isi dev list command while the drive in bay 1 is being smartfailed, the system displays output similar to the
following example:

Node 1, [ATTN]
Bay 1 Lnum 11 [SMARTFAIL] SN:Z296M8HK 000093172YE04 /dev/da1
Bay 2 Lnum 10 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8N5 00009330EYE03 /dev/da2
Bay 3 Lnum 9 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296LBP4 00009330EYE03 /dev/da3
Bay 4 Lnum 8 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296LCJW 00009327BYE03 /dev/da4
Bay 5 Lnum 7 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8XB 00009330KYE03 /dev/da5
Bay 6 Lnum 6 [HEALTHY] SN:Z295LXT7 000093172YE03 /dev/da6
Bay 7 Lnum 5 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8ZF 00009330KYE03 /dev/da7
Bay 8 Lnum 4 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SD 00009330EYE03 /dev/da8
Bay 9 Lnum 3 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QA 00009330EYE03 /dev/da9
Bay 10 Lnum 2 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8Q7 00009330EYE03 /dev/da10
Bay 11 Lnum 1 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SP 00009330EYE04 /dev/da11
Bay 12 Lnum 0 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QZ 00009330JYE03 /dev/da12

If you run the isi dev list command after the smartfail completes successfully, the system displays output similar to the
following example, showing the drive state as REPLACE:

Node 1, [ATTN]
Bay 1 Lnum 11 [REPLACE] SN:Z296M8HK 000093172YE04 /dev/da1
Bay 2 Lnum 10 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8N5 00009330EYE03 /dev/da2
Bay 3 Lnum 9 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296LBP4 00009330EYE03 /dev/da3

350 Data-at-rest-encryption
 Bay 4 Lnum 8 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296LCJW 00009327BYE03 /dev/da4
Bay 5 Lnum 7 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8XB 00009330KYE03 /dev/da5
Bay 6 Lnum 6 [HEALTHY] SN:Z295LXT7 000093172YE03 /dev/da6
Bay 7 Lnum 5 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8ZF 00009330KYE03 /dev/da7
Bay 8 Lnum 4 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SD 00009330EYE03 /dev/da8
Bay 9 Lnum 3 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QA 00009330EYE03 /dev/da9
Bay 10 Lnum 2 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8Q7 00009330EYE03 /dev/da10
Bay 11 Lnum 1 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SP 00009330EYE04 /dev/da11
Bay 12 Lnum 0 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QZ 00009330JYE03 /dev/da12

If you run the isi dev list command while the drive in bay 3 is being smartfailed, the system displays output similar to the
following example:

Node 1, [ATTN]
Bay 1 Lnum 11 [REPLACE] SN:Z296M8HK 000093172YE04 /dev/da1
Bay 2 Lnum 10 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8N5 00009330EYE03 /dev/da2
Bay 3 Lnum 9 [SMARTFAIL] SN:Z296LBP4 00009330EYE03 N/A
Bay 4 Lnum 8 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296LCJW 00009327BYE03 /dev/da4
Bay 5 Lnum 7 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8XB 00009330KYE03 /dev/da5
Bay 6 Lnum 6 [HEALTHY] SN:Z295LXT7 000093172YE03 /dev/da6
Bay 7 Lnum 5 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8ZF 00009330KYE03 /dev/da7
Bay 8 Lnum 4 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SD 00009330EYE03 /dev/da8
Bay 9 Lnum 3 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QA 00009330EYE03 /dev/da9
Bay 10 Lnum 2 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8Q7 00009330EYE03 /dev/da10
Bay 11 Lnum 1 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8SP 00009330EYE04 /dev/da11
Bay 12 Lnum 0 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8QZ 00009330JYE03 /dev/da12

Smartfailed drive ERASE state

At the end of a smartfail process, OneFS attempts to delete the authentication key on a drive if it is unable to reset the key.
NOTE:
● To securely delete the authentication key on a single drive, smartfail the individual drive.
● To securely delete the authentication key on a single node, smartfail the node.
● To securely delete the authentication keys on an entire cluster, smartfail each node and run the isi_reformat_node
command on the last node.
Upon running the isi dev list command, the system displays output similar to the following example, showing the drive
state as ERASE:

Node 1, [ATTN]
Bay 1 Lnum 11 [REPLACE] SN:Z296M8HK 000093172YE04 /dev/da1
Bay 2 Lnum 10 [HEALTHY] SN:Z296M8N5 00009330EYE03 /dev/da2
Bay 3 Lnum 9 [ERASE] SN:Z296LBP4 00009330EYE03 /dev/da3

Drives showing the ERASE state can be safely retired, reused, or returned.
Any further access to a drive showing the ERASE state requires the authentication key of the drive to be set to its default
manufactured security ID (MSID). This action erases the data encryption key (DEK) on the drive and renders any existing data
on the drive permanently unreadable.

Data-at-rest-encryption 351
 26
S3 Support
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• S3
• Server Configuration
• Bucket handling
• Object handling
• Authentication
• Access key management

S3
OneFS supports the Amazon Web Services Simple Storage Service (AWS S3) protocol for reading data from and writing data to
the OneFS platform.
S3 on OneFS enables the usage of Amazon Web Services Simple Storage Service (AWS S3) protocol to store data in the form
of objects on top of the OneFS file system storage. The data resides under a single namespace. The AWS S3 protocol becomes
a primary resident of the OneFS protocol stack, along with NFS, SMB, and HDFS. The technology allows multiprotocol access to
objects and files.
The S3 protocol supports bucket and object creation, retrieving, updating, and deletion. Object retrievals and updates are
atomic. Bucket properties can be updated. Objects are accessible using NFS and SMB as normal files, providing cross-protocol
support.

S3A
S3A is supported in OneFS [Link] and later versions. S3A is an open-source connector that allows big data applications such
as Apache Hadoop, Spark, and Hive to efficiently access and interact with data that is stored in Amazon S3 and S3-compatible
storage. The S3A protocol uses the s3a:// URI scheme.
To access OneFS data using the S3A protocol, perform the following using the web interface or the command-line interface:
● Enable the OneFS S3 service.
● Create an S3 bucket.
● Generate S3 user IDs and access keys to authenticated users for access.
● Configure your application to use the OneFS S3 service. For more information, see Apache Hadoop Amazon Web Services
support - Connecting to an Amazon S3 bucket through the S3A connector.
Some S3A clients only work if OneFS uses MD5 as ETag.
NOTE: By default, S3A uploads files as a temporary file first, then copies it to the target file name to mimic a rename. This
action is unnecessary because S3 provides an atomicity guarantee. Consider using the direct upload option. For example,
hadoop fs has the -d option and Apache Hadoop DistCp (Distributed Copy) has the --direct option.

S3 concepts
This section describes some of the key concepts related to the S3 protocol.
Buckets: A bucket is a container for objects stored in S3. Every object is contained in a bucket. Buckets organize the S3
namespace at the highest level, identify the account responsible for storage and data transfer charges, and play a role in access
control.
Objects: Objects are the fundamental entities stored in S3. An object is uniquely identified within a bucket by a key name and
version ID. Objects consist of object data, metadata and others. Key is the object name, value is the data portion that is not

352 S3 Support
visible by users, and metadata is the data about the data and is a set of name-value pairs that describe the object for example,
content-type, size, last modified. Custom metadata can also be specified at the time the object is stored.
Keys: A key is the unique identifier for an object within a bucket. Every object in a bucket has a key and a value.
An Account ID and a secret key are used to authenticate a user. The Account ID and secret key are created by the Administrator
and mapped to users (such as UNIX, AD, LDAP, and so on).

Server Configuration
The S3 settings are defined in the registry.
The server configuration settings for the S3 protocol are separated into global service configuration and per-zone configuration.

Global S3 settings
You can enable and disable the S3 service on the OneFS cluster, set ports for HTTP and HTTPS for the S3 protocol across the
cluster.
You can view or modify the global S3 settings for service related parameters from the Global settings page.

Enable S3 service
You can enable the S3 service.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Global settings tab.
The Global settings page appears.
3. Under the View/Edit Settings area, select the Enable S3 service check box.
The S3 service is enabled.

Disable S3 service
You can disable the S3 service.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Global settings tab.
The Global settings page appears.
3. Under the View/Edit Settings area, clear the Enable S3 service check box.
The S3 service is disabled.

View ports
You can view already configured HTTPS and HTTP ports.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Global settings tab.
The Global settings page appears.
3. Under the View/Edit Settings area, view the details. The default values for the ports are:
● HTTPS: 9021
● HTTP: 9020
If the Enable S3 HTTP check box is clear, only S3 HTTPS is supported.

Modify ports
You can modify already configured HTTPS and HTTP ports.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Global settings tab.

S3 Support 353
 The Global settings page appears.
3. Under the View/Edit Settings area, select the Enable S3 HTTP check box to enable S3 HTTP support.
If the Enable S3 HTTP is clear, only S3 HTTPS is supported.
4. Modify the port details. The default values for the ports are:
● HTTPS: 9021
● HTTP: 9020
You can modify the value for both the ports. Click the arrows inside the box or enter a value in the box.
Click Revert changes to go back to previous settings. Revert changes is enabled only if any changes are made.
5. Click Save changes.
Save changes is enabled only if you have modified the settings.
The changes are saved, and the following message appears.

Updated S3 global settings.

S3 global settings has been updated successfully.

S3 zone settings
Access zones provide default locations for creating buckets.
You can view or modify specific S3 settings of an access zone from the Zone settings page.
If you are creating a bucket, and a zone ID or name is not provided, the creation of the bucket defaults to the System zone.

View zone settings

View S3 zone-specific settings for setting the root-path for buckets in the zone.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Zone settings tab.
3. View the following fields:
● Current access zone: View the access zone. By default System zone is selected.
● Bucket root path: View the file path where the bucket is saved.
● Base domain: View the base domain. The default value is empty.

NOTE: A base domain is used as part of the object address where the virtual host style addressing is used. As a
result of setting the base domain, OneFS can understand which part of the address points to the bucket. Wildcard
subdomains listed under Network Groupnets must be enabled as well.

● Use MD5 for Etag on upload: The Use MD5 for Etag on upload check box is not selected by default.
● Validate given Content-MD5: The Validate given Content-MD5 check box is not selected by default.

Modify zone settings

Modify S3 zone-specific settings for setting root-path for buckets in zone.
1. Click Protocols > Object Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Zone settings tab.
3. In the Current access zone list, click the access zone whose settings you modify. By default System zone is selected.
The details that are related to the bucket root path and base domain are displayed.
4. Modify the following fields:
● Bucket root path: You can modify the bucket root path for any new bucket that is created.
a. Click Browse. The Select a path to a file dialog box appears.
b. Select the path on /ifs.
c. Click Select. The updated bucket root path appears in the Bucket root path box.
● Base domain: You can modify the base domain.

354 S3 Support
 NOTE: A base domain is used as part of the object address where the virtual host style addressing is used. As
a result of setting the base domain, OneFS can understand which part of the address points to the bucket. For
example, if you are using an addressing scheme that includes the bucket, you can have addresses of the form:
[Link]. In this example, you need to tell OneFS that [Link] is the base domain so
that it knows that mybucket is the bucket.

● Use MD5 for Etag on upload: Select the check box to use MD5 for Etag or clear the check box if it is already selected.
● Validate given Content-MD5: Select the check box to validate the given Content-MD5 or clear the check box if it is
already selected.
● Support locking: Select the check box o specify the default lock protection mode of Object Lock or Bucket Lock.
Selecting the default lock protection mode will automatically enable Compliance Clock Support, which is required for
object locking or bucket locking.
Click Revert changes to go back to previous settings. Revert changes is enabled only if any modifications are made.
5. Click Save Changes.
Save changes is enabled only if you have modified the settings.
The changes are saved, and the following message appears.

Updated S3 zone settings.

S3 zone settings has been updated successfully.

Certificates
Server certificates are a requirement for the server to set up a TLS handshake.
On a OneFS cluster, the certificate manager manages all the certificates. The certificate manager is designed to provide a
generic programmatic way for accessing and configuring certificates on the cluster.
The HTTPS certificates used by S3 are handled by the isi certificate manager. The Apache instance uses the same store.

Bucket handling
Buckets are the containers for objects. You can have one or more buckets. For each bucket, you can control access to it (who
can create, delete, and list objects in the bucket).
Buckets are a similar concept to exports in NFS and shares in SMB. A major difference between buckets and NFS export is that
any user with valid credentials can create a bucket on the server, and the bucket is owned by that user.
OneFS now supports these bucket and account operations:
● PUT bucket
● GET bucket (list objects in a bucket)
● GET bucket location
● DELETE bucket
● GET Bucket acl
● PUT Bucket acl
● HEAD Bucket
● List Multipart Uploads
● GET Service

Managing buckets
You can access the S3 bucket management feature from OneFS web administration interface.

You can now view, create, modify, and delete buckets.

S3 Support 355
List buckets
View a list of buckets. You can also sort and filter the list.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
The Buckets page appears with the list of buckets.
2. View the list of buckets in a tabular format. The four columns are: name, path, owner, and actions.
● You can filter the buckets by zone: In the Current access zone list, select the access zone. The buckets for the given
zone are displayed. The default selected value is System zone.
● You can filter the buckets by owner: In the Owner box, enter the name of the owner and click Apply. The buckets for
the given owner are displayed.
3. Click the arrows on the table header of the columns to sort the buckets based on name, path, and owner fields.
4. Click <<, <, and > to go to the first page, previous page, and next page respectively. Click Last to refresh and reload all the
buckets and go to page 1.

Create an s3 bucket
You can create an s3 bucket
1. Click Protocols > Object Storage (S3) .
● In the Current access zone list, select the access zone where you want to create the bucket. The default selected
value is System zone.
2. In the Buckets section, click Create Bucket.
The Create a Bucket dialog box appears.
3. Enter the following information in the Create a Bucket dialog box:
● Name: Enter the name of the bucket. The name must be between 3 and 63 characters in length. Bucket name cannot
contain characters other than a-z, 0-9, and '-'. This is a required field.
● Owner: Enter the name of the bucket owner. Click Select user to search for a user. Then, in the Search user dialog
box, enter the details in the User and Providers boxes and click Search. This is a required field.
● Path: Enter the file path to store the bucket. Click Browse to select a path to a directory and then click Select. Select
Create bucket path if it does not exist if a path does not exist. This is a required field.
● Description: Enter a description for the bucket. This is an optional field.
● Locking: Locking is disabled by default. Once you enable locking, you cannot disable it later. Check Enable to lock the
bucket. Select a Lock Protection Mode: Object Lock or Bucket Lock. Specify the default Retention Period in days
or years.

NOTE: Only the GOVERNANCE retention mode is allowed in PowerScale OneFS [Link].

● Access Logging: Enable or disable S3 server access logging. Access logging is enabled by default.
● Target Bucket: Click Select to select an Access Logging target bucket. This target bucket should be configured to
grant WRITE and FULL CONTROL ACL to the user. Target Bucket is a required field.
● Prefix for Log File: Enter the prefix for the S3 access log file.
● ACL: Click Add ACL, and then click Select user to search for the user. In the Permissions list, select the permission
for your bucket. When you specify ACLs, you must select the user or grantee and permissions for that user or grantee.
This is an optional field.
4. Click Create Bucket.
The bucket is successfully created, and the following message appears:

S3 bucket has been created successfully.

Click Cancel to exit the Create a Bucket dialog box.

View bucket details

View the details of a bucket.
1. Click Protocols > Object Storage (S3) .
2. On the Buckets page, you can see the list of buckets. Under the Actions column, click Edit/View next to the bucket
whose details you want to view.
The Edit and View bucket dialog box appears.

356 S3 Support
3. View the following information in the Edit and View bucket dialog box:
● Name: View the name of the bucket.
● Owner: View the name of the bucket owner.
● Path: View the file path where the bucket is stored.
● Description: View the description for the bucket.
● Locking: Check the Enable box to lock the bucket. Locking is disabled by default.
● Access Logging: Enable or disable S3 server access logging. Access logging is enabled by default.
● Target Bucket: Click the Select button to edit an existing target access logging bucket.
● Prefix for Log File: Enter the prefix for the S3 access log file.
● ACL: View details related to the access control list (ACL). You can view details that are related to the selected user and
the permission that is granted to the user (READ, WRITE, READ_ACP, WRITE_ACP, and FULL_CONTROL.)
Click Cancel to exit the Edit and View bucket dialog box.

Modify bucket details

Modify the details of an existing bucket.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. On the Buckets page, you can see the list of buckets. Under the Actions column, click Edit/View next to the bucket that
you want to modify.
The Edit and View bucket dialog box appears.
3. Modify the following information in the Edit and View bucket dialog box:
● Name: You cannot change the bucket name.
● Owner: You cannot change the bucket owner name.
● Path: You cannot change the directory path of the bucket.
● Description: Modify the description for the bucket.
● Locking: Check the Enable box to lock the bucket. Locking is disabled by default.
● Access Logging: Enable or disable access logging. Access logging is enabled by default.
● Target Bucket: Click the Select button to edit a bucket.
● Prefix for Log File: Enter the prefix for the S3 access log file.
● ACL: In the User area, click Select user to search for a user. From the Permissions list, select the permission that you
want to grant to the selected user.
4. Click Save Changes.
The modifications are saved.
Click Cancel to exit the View and Edit bucket dialog box.

Delete a bucket
You can delete a bucket.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. On the Buckets page, you can see the list of buckets. Under the Actions column, click Delete next to the bucket that you
want to delete.
The Confirm delete dialog box appears.
3. Click Delete. The bucket is deleted.
Click Cancel to exit the Confirm delete dialog box and return to the list of buckets.

Object handling
An object consists of a file and optionally any metadata that describes that file. To store an object in S3, you upload the file that
you want to store to a bucket. You can set permissions on the object and any metadata.
S3 stores data in the form of objects, which are key-value pairs. An object is identified using the key. The data is stored inside
the object as a value. In OneFS, you use files to represent objects. An object key points out to a path name and an object value
to the contents of the file.
An object can have associated metadata with size limits. There can be system metadata, which are generated for every object.
Also, there can be user metadata that applications create for selected objects.

S3 Support 357
Objects reside within buckets. The life cycle and access of an object depends on the policies and ACLs enforced on the bucket.
Also, each object can have its own ACLs.
An object key can have prefixes or delimiters, which are used to organize them efficiently.

Object key
The object key is the path of the file from the root of the bucket directory.
For OneFS the object key is treated as a file path from root. "/" is treated as the path for directories. The limitations on object
keys are listed below:
● Cannot use " / " (It is treated as a delimiter) .
● Cannot use ". " and ".." as a key or as a part of prefix.
● If snapshot is already present, .snapshot cannot be created.
● Maximum key length including prefix and delimiter is 1023 bytes.
● Key length or each prefix split by / is 255 bytes.
● Can use ASCII or UTF-8.
● Other OneFS data services may have a problem if path length as a file exceeds 1024 bytes.
● Cannot place object under the .isi_s3 directory.
● Cannot place file object if a directory with the same name already exists.

Object Metadata
An object can have two types of metadata, system metadata and user-defined metadata.
Both system and user-defined metadata are defined as a set of name-value pairs. In OneFS, system metadata gets stored as an
inode attribute and the user-defined metadata gets stored as an extended attribute of the file.

Multipart upload
The S3 protocol allows you to upload a large file as multiple parts rather than as a single request.
The client initiates a multipart upload with a POST request with the uploads the query parameter and the object key. On the
cluster, a unique userUploadId string is generated by concatenating the bucket ID and upload ID and returned to the client. The
pair of bucket ID and upload ID is also stored in a per-zone SBT. A directory, .s3_parts_userUploadID is created in the
target directory to store the parts. After getting created, the directory and kvstore entry persists until the multipart operation
is either completed or stopped. Parts are uploaded with a part number and stored in the temporary directory. A part has a
maximum size of 5 GB and the last part a minimum size of 5 MB. Complete multipart upload is handled by concatenating the
parts to a temporary file under the .isi_s3 directory. Once the concatenation succeeds, the temporary file is copied to the
target, the .s3_parts_userUploadID is deleted, and the SBT entry is removed.

Etag
S3 may use an MD5 checksum as an ETag. This value is specified in the HTTP header "Content-MD5."
The Etag consistency is implemented to S3 on OneFS protocol to calculate an MD5 hash for a single PUT object operation when
no Etag is provided. This feature provides compatibly with AWS S3 behavior and helps the S3 service to calculate and return the
MD5 hash for single object PUT operations when an Etag is not supplied by the client.
Two new configuration options, use-md5-for-etag and validate-content-md5 are added to control when the MD5
hash is calculated. The options are in the S3 zone settings and can be configured on a per-zone basis. By default, both options
are disabled and the MD5 hash is not calculated. If the validate-content-md5 is set to true, then the MD5 hash is
calculated provided the PUT object request has a Content-MD5 to check the content integrity. If use-md5-for-etag is set
to true, then the MD5 hash is calculated on request if no Content-MD5 is provided to store as the Etag . If both options are set
to true , the MD5 hash is always calculated.

358 S3 Support
PUT object
The PUT object operation allows you to add an object to a bucket. You must have the WRITE permission on a bucket to add an
object to it.
To emulate the atomicity guarantee of an S3 PUT object, objects are written to a temporary directory, .isi_s3 before getting
moved to the target path. On PUT, directories are implicitly created from writing the object. Implicitly created directories are
owned by the object owner and have permissions that are inherited from the parent directory.

Cross protocol locking

S3 object operations only operate in the shared mode lock domain.
The S3 protocol ignores byte range locks and other advisory locks. The PUT object operation takes a share mode lock
DENY_NONE on the target file with the delete access bit only for the rename operation on the target file which is released
upon completion. The GET operation takes a shared mode lock DENY_WRITE on the file with the read access bit to maintain
the atomicity during the read. This process ensures that the data is not modified from other clients or protocols during the GET
object operation.

Authentication
S3 uses its own method of authentication which relies on access keys that are generated for the user.
The access ID is sent in the HTTP request and is used to identify the user. The secret key is used in the signing algorithm.
There are two signing algorithms, Version 2 (v2) and Version 4 (v4).
S3 requests can either be signed or unsigned. A signed request contains an access ID and a signature. The access ID indicates
who the user is. The included signature value is the result of hashing several header values in the request with a secret key.
The server must use the access ID to retrieve a copy of the secret key, recompute the expected hash value of the request, and
compare against the signature sent. If they match, then the requester is authenticated, and any header value that was used in
the signature is now verified to be unchanged as well.
An S3 operation is only performed after the following criteria are met:
● Verify signatures that use AWS Signature Version 4 or AWS Signature Version 2 and validate it against the S3 request.
● Get user credential using access ID, once verification is complete.
● Perform authorization of user credential against bucket ACL.
● Perform traversal check of user credential against object path.
● Perform access check of user credential against object ACL.

Access keys
On OneFS, user keys are created using PAPI and stored in the kvstore.
The entry format in the kvstore is access_id:secret_key. The secret key is the randomly generated base64 string. The
access key is formatted as ZoneId_username_accid. In the S3 protocol, on receiving an authenticated request, the access
key is used to retrieve the secret key from the keystore. The signature is then generated on the server side, using the header
fields from the request and the user's secret key. If the signature matches, the request is successfully authenticated. The
username and zone information encoded in the access ID is used to generate the user security context and the request is
performed. By default, when a new key is created, the previous user key remains valid for 10 minutes. If you want, you can
change it up to 1440 minutes (24 hrs).

Access control
In S3, permissions on objects and buckets are defined by an ACL.
S3 supports five grant permission types: READ, WRITE, READ_ACP, WRITE_ACP, and FULL_CONTROL. The FULL_CONTROL
grant is a shorthand for all grants. Each ACE consists of one grantee and one grant. The grantee can either be a user or one
of the defined groups that OneFS S3 supports, Everyone and Authenticated Users. S3 ACLs are limited to a maximum of 100
entries.

S3 Support 359
ACL concepts
In S3, you must understand some concepts that are related to an ACL.
Grantee: S3 ACL grantees can be specified as either an ID or an email address to an AWS account. The ID is a randomly
generated value for each user. For the OneFS S3, only ID is supported and the ID is set to be the username or group of the
grantee.
S3 Groups: S3 has two predefined groups, Everyone and Authenticated Users. On OneFS, Everyone is translated to the
integrated World group SID S-1-1-0 and Authenticated Users is translated to the integrated group Authenticated User SID
S-1-5-11.
Canned ACL: When specifying ACLs in S3, the user can either specify the ACL as a list of grants or use a canned ACL.
The canned ACL is a predefined ACL list which is added to the file. The supported canned ACLS are private, public-read,
public-read-write, authenticated-read, bucket-owner-read, and bucket-owner-full-control.
Default ACL: When objects and buckets are created in S3 by a PUT operation, the user has the option of setting the ACL. If no
ACL is specified, then the private canned ACL is used by default, granting full control to the creator.

Object ACL
S3 ACLs are a legacy access control mechanism that predates Identity and Access Management (IAM).
On OneFS objects, ACLs are translated to NTFS ACLs and stored on-disk. The table below lists the mapping of S3 grants to
NTFS grants. The difference in the OneFSS3 implementation is that he WRITE grant is allowed on object ACLs. In S3, the
WRITE grant has no meaning as the S3 protocol does not allow modifying objects.
The WRITE grant instead allows an object to be modified through other access protocols. For translating S3 ACLs to NTFS
ACLs for the PUT object ACL operation, the translation of each entry occurs as shown in the table. The translation of the NTFS
ACL to S3 ACL, as needed in the GET object ACL, some entries may not be shown. As NTFS ACLs have a richer set of grants,
permissions that are not in the table are omitted. Deny ACEs are also omitted, as S3 ACLs do not support a deny entry.

Table 107. Mapping S3 Grants to NTFS Grants

S3 ACL NTFS Permissions
READ SYNCHRONIZE | READ_DATA | READ_ATTR | READ_EA
WRITE SYNCHRONIZE | WRITE_DATA | WRITE_ATTR | WRITE_EA | APPEND_DATA
READ_ACP READ_CONTROL
WRITE_ACP WRITE_DAC
FULL_CONTROL FILE_ALL_ACCESS

An S3 ACL can also have one of the following predefined groups as a grantee:
● Authenticated Users: Any signed request is in this group.
● All Users: Any request, signed or unsigned, is in this group.
● Log Delivery Group: This group represents the log server that writes server access logs in the bucket.
Object ACLs translate to the following S3 permissions:

Table 108. Equivalent S3 Permissions - Object ACLs

ACL S3 Permissions
READ s3:GetObject, s3:GetObjectVersion, s3:GetObjectTorrent
WRITE Not Applicable
READ_ACP s3:GetObjectAcl, s3:GetObjectVersionAcl
WRITE_ACP s3:PutObjectAcl, s3:PutObjectVersionAcl
FULL_CONTROL All the above

A difference in the OneFS implementation is the implicit owner ACE permission. In S3, the object owner is implicitly
granted FULL_CONTROL, regardless of the ACL on the file. For OneFS to emulate this behavior, an ACE entry granting
FULL_CONTROL to the object owner is appended to the end of any ACL set by S3.

360 S3 Support
Bucket ACL
S3 ACLs are a legacy access control mechanism that predates Identity and Access Management (IAM).
ACLs set on the bucket are written as part of the bucket configuration in Tardis. The ACLs define which S3 bucket operations
are allowed by which user.

Table 109. Grants for S3 Operation

Operation Grant Required
PUT Object WRITE
DELETE Object WRITE
Multipart Upload (Initiate, upload, WRITE
complete, and cancel)
List Multipart Upload READ
List Parts READ
HEAD Bucket READ
GET BUCKET (List Objects) READ
GET BUCKET ACL READ_ACP
PUT BUCKET ACL WRITE_ACP

Bucket ACLs translate to the following S3 permissions:

Table 110. Equivalent S3 Permissions - Bucket ACLs

ACL S3 Permissions
READ s3:ListBucket, s3:ListBucketVersions, s3:ListBucketMultipartUploads
WRITE s3:PutObject, s3:DeleteObject
READ_ACP s3:GetBucketAcl
WRITE_ACP s3:PutBucketAcl
FULL_CONTROL All the above

Directory permissions
In S3, directories may be implicitly related on a PUT object for keys with delimiters.
For directories related this way, the user issuing the PUT object request becomes the owner of the directory and the directory
mode gets copied from the parent.

S3 Permissions
The following is a list of S3 permissions which OneFS supports.
● AbortMultipartUpload
● DeleteObject
● DeleteObjectVersion
● GetObject
● GetObjectAcl
● GetObjectVersion
● GetObjectVersionAcl
● ListMultipartUploadParts
● PutObject
● PutObjectAcl

S3 Support 361
● PutObjectVersionAcl
● CreateBucket
● DeleteBucket
● ListBucket
● ListBucketVersions
● ListAllMyBuckets
● ListBucketMultipartUploads
● GetBucketAcl
● PutBucketAcl
Some of these permissions require special handling. The following permissions are handled outside of the bucket, and may be
handled in PAPI:

Table 111. S3 Permissions

Permissions Effect
ListAllMyBuckets This permission gives an IAM user the ability to list all their
buckets. However, it is only applied in user policies, which
OneFS does not support. OneFS users are automatically given
the ability to list their own buckets without must set this
permission. Also, a user with ISI_PRIV_S3 privilege can list
buckets using PAPI.
CreateBucket This permission gives the users the ability to create a bucket.
This can only be used in S3 user policies. Users are allowed or
denied this permission using PAPI bucket configuration.

The following permissions interact with file system ACLs and require extra handling:

Table 112. S3 Permissions

Permissions Effect
DeleteObject S3 gives a user permission to delete a particular object.
CreateBucket S3 gives a user permission to create or update a particular
object.
ListBucket S3 gives a user permission to list objects in the bucket.

You cannot bypass file system permissions. If a user has the ListBucket permission, but does not have read permission on a
directory, then the user cannot list the files in that directory.

Anonymous authentication
Requests sent without an authentication header in S3 are run as the anonymous user.
An anonymous user is mapped to the user 'nobody'.

Access key management

Access keys are used to sign the requests you send to the S3 protocol.
Access keys consist of two parts, an access key ID and a secret access key. Like a username and password, you must use both
the access key ID and secret access key together to authenticate your requests.
You must generate access key ID and secret access key for an authenticated user upon request. When the user makes an S3
request, the access key ID in request is used to look up the secret access key, and then the signing of request is verified. A PAPI
interface is provided for generating this pair for each identity and persists the pair to a cluster-wide store. Each request looks up
its credentials in this cluster-wide store, with a possible in-memory cache in the S3 protocol head.
To generate the access key ID and secret access key for an authenticated user upon request, the following rules apply:
● The access key ID can be a 16 to 128-byte string.

362 S3 Support
● A secret key of size 28 bytes is randomly generated, and the user cannot set it.
● You must store the access key ID and secret access key on disk, for high availability.
● There is a username (1 to 64-byte string) associated with the access key ID.
Users with the Administrator role are only authorized to generate access keys.
Users have only one access key ID. However, users may have at most two secret keys when the old key has an expiry date set.
If an Administrator creates a new secret key for a user and forgets to set the expiry time, the administrator cannot go back and
set the expiry time again. The new key is created and the old key is set to expire after 10 minutes, by default.

Managing keys
You can access the S3 key management feature from OneFS web administration interface.
You can generate secret keys and access IDs.

View key information

View key information for a user.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Key Management tab.
3. View the information related to the default access zone (System) like access key ID, secret key, creation, and expiry dates.
The details contain only valid (non-expired) keys. It returns empty response if no key is present in the persistent data store.

Generate secret key

The administrator can generate a secret key for a user.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Key Management tab.
3. In the Current access zone list, click the access zone (if any) the user belongs to.
4. Click Select user for whom you want to create the secret key.
The Search user dialog box appears.
5. In the Search user dialog box, enter the details in the User and Providers fields and click Search.
The name of the user and if there is any description that is associated with the user, appears in a tabular format. You can
click Reset to revert the search process.
6. Select the user from the table and click Select user.
The user is selected.
Click Close to exit the Search user dialog box.
7. Click Create a key.
Access ID and secret key are generated, and the following message appears:

Created S3 Key.
S3 key has been created successfully.

8. You can now view the secret key details in a tabular format. The columns are:
● Type: Displays the type of the key (existing or old)
● Secret Keys: Click Show key to view the key and Hide key to hide the key.
● Expiry time: The time for the existing key is not mentioned. If you have created more than one key, the expiry time of
the old key is displayed.
● Creating date: Displays the date and time when the key was created.

Generate another secret key

The administrator can generate more than one secret key for a user.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Key Management tab.

S3 Support 363
3. In the Current access zone list, click the access zone that the user belongs to.
4. Click Select user for whom you want to generate another secret key.
The Search user dialog box appears.
5. In the Search user dialog box, enter the details in the User and Providers fields and click Search.
The name of the user and if there is any description about the user, appears in a tabular format. You can click Reset to
revert the search process.
6. Select the user from the table and click Select user.
7. Click Create new key.
Click Show keys to view the details of the existing secret key.
The Create secret key dialog box appears.
8. In the Keep Existing key active for minutes box, enter the value (in minutes) when the existing key must expire. You can
also use the up and down arrows to adjust the values.
9. Click Create key.
The new secret key is generated, and the following message appears:

Created S3 Key.
S3 key has been created successfully.

The old key expires after the time limit that you have set.
The default expiry time is 10 minutes. The maximum time that you can set is 1440 minutes (24 hours) and an error similar to
the following appears of the time is exceeded:

Field: existing_key_expiry_time has error: The value must be less

than or equal to 1440.
Input validation failed.

Now that you have two secret keys, if you try to create a new key, the Force delete old key check box appear. You can
select the check box if you want to forcefully create the key. The first key that you had created is not valid anymore. Only
two keys appear at one time.

Delete secret key

The administrator can delete a secret key for a user.
1. Click Protocols > Objects Storage (S3) .
2. Click the Key Management tab.
3. In the Current access zone list, click the access zone the user belongs to.
4. Click Select user for whom you want to create the secret key.
The Search user dialog box appears.
5. In the Search user dialog box, enter the details in the User and Providers fields and click Search.
The name of the user and if there is any description that is associated with the user, appears in a tabular format. You can
click Reset to revert the search process.
6. Select the user from the table and click Select user.
The user is selected.
Click Close to exit the Search user dialog box.
7. You can now view the secret key details in a tabular format. The columns are:
● Type: Displays the type of the key (existing or old)
● Secret Keys: Click Show key to view the key and Hide key to hide the key.
● Expiry time: The time for the existing key is not mentioned. If you have created more than one key, the expiry time of
the old key is displayed.
● Creating date: Displays the date and time when the key was created.
8. Click Delete Keys on the left bottom of the table.
The key is deleted.

364 S3 Support
 27
SmartQuotas
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• SmartQuotas overview
• Quota types
• Default quota type
• Usage accounting and limits
• Disk usage calculations
• Quota notifications
• Quota notification rules
• Quota reports
• Creating quotas
• Managing quotas
• Managing quota notifications
• Email quota notification messages
• Managing quota reports
• Basic quota settings
• Advisory limit quota notification rules settings
• Soft limit quota notification rules settings
• Hard limit quota notification rules settings
• Limit notification settings
• Quota report settings

SmartQuotas overview
The SmartQuotas module is an optional quota-management tool that monitors and enforces administrator-defined storage limits.
Using accounting and enforcement quota limits, reporting capabilities, and automated notifications, SmartQuotas manages
storage use, monitors disk storage, and issues alerts when disk-storage limits are exceeded.
Quotas help you manage storage usage according to criteria that you define. Quotas are used for tracking—and sometimes
limiting—the amount of storage that a user, group, or directory consumes. Quotas help ensure that a user or department does
not infringe on the storage that is allocated to other users or departments. In some quota implementations, writes beyond the
defined space are denied, and in other cases, a simple notification is sent.
NOTE: Do not apply quotas to /ifs/.ifsvar/ or its subdirectories. If you limit the size of the /ifs/.ifsvar/
directory through a quota, and the directory reaches its limit, jobs such as File-System Analytics fail. A quota blocks older
job reports from being deleted from the /ifs/.ifsvar/ subdirectories to make room for newer reports.

The SmartQuotas module requires a separate license. For more information about the SmartQuotas module or to activate the
module, contact your Dell Technologies sales representative.

Quota types
OneFS uses the concept of quota types as the fundamental organizational unit of storage quotas. Storage quotas comprise a
set of resources and an accounting of each resource type for that set. Storage quotas are also called storage domains.
Storage quotas creation requires three identifiers:
● The directory to monitor
● Whether snapshots are tracked against the quota limit
● The quota type (directory, user, or group)

SmartQuotas 365
 NOTE: Do not create quotas of any type on the OneFS root (/ifs). A root-level quota may significantly degrade
performance.
You can choose a quota type from the following entities:

Directory A specific directory and its subdirectories.

NOTE: You cannot choose a default directory quota type using the Web UI. You can only create
a default directory quota using the CLI. However, you can manage default directory quotas using
the UI (modify the quota settings, link, and unlink subdirectories). All immediate subdirectories in
a default directory quota inherit the parent directory quota settings unless otherwise modified.
Specific directory quotas that you configure take precedence over a default directory.

User Either a specific user or default user (every user). Specific-user quotas that you configure take
precedence over a default user quota.
Group All members of a specific group or all members of a default group (every group). Any specific-group
quotas that you configure take precedence over a default group quota. Associating a group quota with
a default group quota creates a linked quota.

You can create multiple quota types on the same directory, but they must be of a different type or have a different snapshot
option. You can specify quota types for any directory in OneFS and nest them within each other to create a hierarchy of
complex storage-use policies.
Nested storage quotas can overlap. For example, the following quota settings ensure that the finance directory never exceeds 5
TB, while limiting the users in the finance department to 1 TB each:
● Set a 5 TB hard quota on /ifs/data/finance.
● Set 1 TB soft quotas on each user in the finance department.

Default quota type

Default quotas automatically create other quotas for users, groups, or immediate subdirectories in a specified directory.
There are three default quota types that you can configure on a specified directory: default user, default group, and default
directory. A default quota allows quota automation on an /ifs folder and specifies a policy for new entities that match
a trigger. For example, if a default user quota is configured on the /ifs/dir1 folder, the default-user@/ifs/dir1
becomes specific-user@/ifs/dir1 for each specific-user that is not otherwise defined. Default-user quota enforcement
is copied to a specific-user in the directory, and the inherited quota is called a linked quota. In this way, each user account gets
its own usage accounting.
NOTE: Configuration changes for linked quotas must be made on the parent quota that the linked quota is inheriting from.
Changes to the parent quota are propagated to all children. To override configuration from the parent quota, unlink the
quota first.
If a default directory quota is configured on the /ifs/parent folder, any immediate subdirectory created within that directory
automatically inherits quota configuration information from the default domain. Only immediate subdirectories inherit default
directory quotas; a subdirectory within an immediate subdirectory (a second-level or deeper subdirectory) will not inherit the
default directory quota. For example, you create a default-directory quota type on the /ifs/parent directory. Then you
create the /ifs/parent/child subdirectory. This subdirectory inherits the default directory quota settings. Then you create
the second-level /ifs/parent/child/grandchild subdirectory. This subdirectory does not inherit the default directory
quota settings.
You cannot choose a default quota type using the Web UI. You can only create default quotas using the CLI. However, you can
manage default quotas using the UI (modify the quota settings, link, and unlink subdirectories). Specific directory quotas that
you configure take precedence over a default directory. For more information on creating default quotas, see the OneFS CLI
Command Reference Guide.

366 SmartQuotas
Usage accounting and limits
Storage quotas can perform two functions: they monitor storage space through usage accounting, and they manage storage
space through enforcement limits.
You can configure OneFS quotas by usage type to track or limit storage use. The accounting option, which monitors disk-
storage use, is useful for auditing, planning, and billing. Enforcement limits set storage limits for users, groups, or directories.

Track storage The accounting option tracks but does not limit disk-storage use. Using the accounting option for a
consumption quota, you can monitor inode count and physical and logical space resources. Physical space is all
without specifying a the space that is used to store files and directories, including data, metadata, and data protection
storage limit overhead in the domain. There are two types of logical space:
● File system logical size: Logical size of files as per file system. Sum of all file sizes, excluding file
metadata and data protection overhead.
● Application logical size: Logical size of the file is apparent to the application. Used file capacity
from the application point of view, which is equal to or less than the file system logical size.
However, in the case of a sparse file, application logical size can be greater than file system logical
size. Application logical size includes capacity consumption on the cluster and data that is tiered to
the cloud.
Storage consumption is tracked using file system logical size by default, which does not include
protection overhead. As an example, by using the accounting option, you can do the following:
● Track the amount of disk space that is used by users or groups to bill each user, group, or
directory for only the disk space used.
● Review and analyze reports that help you identify storage usage patterns and define storage
policies.
● Plan for capacity and other storage needs.

Specify storage Enforcement limits include all the functionality of the accounting option, plus the ability to limit disk
limits storage and send notifications. Using enforcement limits, you can logically partition a cluster to control
or restrict how much storage that a user, group, or directory can use. For example, you can set
hard- or soft-capacity limits to ensure that adequate space is always available for key projects and
critical applications and to ensure that users of the cluster do not exceed their allotted storage
capacity. Optionally, you can deliver real-time email quota notifications to users, group managers, or
administrators when they are approaching or have exceeded a quota limit.

NOTE:

If a quota type uses the accounting-only option, enforcement limits cannot be used for that quota.
The actions of an administrator who is logged in as root may push a domain over a quota threshold. For example, changing the
protection level or taking a snapshot has the potential to exceed quota parameters. System actions such as repairs may push a
quota domain over the limit.
The system provides three types of administrator-defined enforcement thresholds.

Table 113. Threshold Types

Threshold type Description

Hard Limits disk usage to a size that cannot be exceeded. If an operation, such as a file write,
causes a quota target to exceed a hard quota, the following events occur:
● The operation fails
● An alert is logged to the cluster
● A notification is issued to specified recipients.
Writes resume when the usage falls below the threshold.

Soft Allows a limit with a grace period that can be exceeded until the grace period expires. When a
soft quota is exceeded, an alert is logged to the cluster and a notification is issued to specified
recipients; however, data writes are permitted during the grace period.
If the soft threshold is still exceeded when the grace period expires, data writes fail, and a
notification is issued to the recipients you have specified.

SmartQuotas 367
Table 113. Threshold Types (continued)
Threshold type Description

Writes resume when the usage falls below the threshold.

Advisory An informational limit that can be exceeded. When an advisory quota threshold is exceeded,
an alert is logged to the cluster and a notification is issued to specified recipients. Advisory
thresholds do not prevent data writes.

Disk usage calculations

For each quota that you configure, you can specify whether physical or logical space is included in future disk usage calculations.
You can configure quotas to include the following types of physical or logical space:

Table 114. Quota Spaces

Type of physical Description
or logical space to
include in the quota
Physical size Total on-disk space consumed to store File data blocks (non-sparse regions) + IFS
files in OneFS. Apart from file data, this metadata (ACLs, ExAttr, inode) + data protection
counts user metadata (for example, ACLs overhead
and user-specified extended attributes) and
data protection overhead. This accounts for
on-premises capacity consumption with data
protection.
File system logical size Approximation of disk usage on other systems File data blocks (non-sparse regions) + IFS
by ignoring protection overhead. The space metadata (Acls, ExAttr, inode)
consumed to store files with 1x protection. This
accounts for on-premises capacity consumption
without data protection.
Application logical size Apparent size of file that a user/application The physical size and file system logical size
observes. How an application sees space quota metrics count the number of blocks that
available for storage regardless of whether are required to store file data (block-aligned).
files are cloud-tiered, sparse, deduped, or The application logical size quota metric is not
compressed. It is the offset of the last byte block-aligned. In general, the application logical
of the file (end-of-file). Application logical size size is smaller than either the physical size or
is unaffected by the physical location of the file system logical size, as the file system logical
data, on or off the cluster, and includes size counts the full size of the last block of the
CloudPools capacity across multiple locations. file, whereas the application logical size considers
This accounts for on-premises and off-premise the data present in the last block. However,
capacity consumption without data protection. application logical size is higher for sparse files.

Most quota configurations are not required to include data protection overhead calculations, and are not required to include
physical space, but instead can include logical space (either file system logical size, or application logical size). If you do not
include data protection overhead in usage calculations for a quota, future disk usage calculations for the quota include only the
logical space that is required to store files and directories. Space that is required for the data protection setting of the cluster is
not included.
Consider an example user who is restricted by a 40 GB quota that does not include data protection overhead in its disk usage
calculations. (The 40 GB quota includes file system logical size or application logical size.) If your cluster is configured with
a 2x data protection level and the user writes a 10 GB file to the cluster, that file consumes 20 GB of space but the 10GB
for the data protection overhead is not counted in the quota calculation. In this example, the user has reached 25 percent of
the 40 GB quota by writing a 10 GB file to the cluster. This method of disk usage calculation is recommended for most quota
configurations.
If you include data protection overhead in usage calculations for a quota, future disk usage calculations for the quota include the
total amount of space that is required to store files and directories, in addition to any space that is required to accommodate
your data protection settings, such as parity or mirroring. For example, consider a user who is restricted by a 40 GB quota
that includes data protection overhead in its disk usage calculations. (The 40 GB quota includes physical size.) If your cluster is
configured with a 2x data protection level (mirrored) and the user writes a 10 GB file to the cluster, that file consumes 20 GB of

368 SmartQuotas
space: 10 GB for the file and 10 GB for the data protection overhead. In this example, the user has reached 50 percent of the 40
GB quota by writing a 10 GB file to the cluster.
NOTE: Cloned and deduplicated files are treated as ordinary files by quotas. If the quota includes data protection overhead,
the data protection overhead for shared data is not included in the usage calculation.
You can configure quotas to include the space that is consumed by snapshots. A single path can have two quotas that are
applied to it: one without snapshot usage, which is the default, and one with snapshot usage. If you include snapshots in the
quota, more files are included in the calculation than are in the current directory. The disk usage is the sum of the current
directory and any snapshots of that directory. You can see which snapshots are included in the calculation by examining
the .snapshot directory for the quota path.

NOTE: Only snapshots created after the QuotaScan job finishes are included in the calculation.

Quota notifications
Quota notifications are generated for enforcement quotas, providing users with information when a quota violation occurs.
Reminders are sent periodically while the condition persists.
Each notification rule defines the condition that is to be enforced and the action that is to be performed when the condition is
true. An enforcement quota can define multiple notification rules. When thresholds are exceeded, automatic email notifications
can be sent to specified users, or you can monitor notifications as system alerts or receive emails for these events.
Notifications can be configured globally, to apply to all quota domains, or be configured for specific quota domains.
Enforcement quotas support the following notification settings. A given quota can use only one of these settings.

Table 115. Notification Settings

Limit notification settings Description

Disable quota notifications Disables all notifications for the quota.

Use the system settings for quota notifications Uses the global default notification for the specified type of
quota.

Create custom notifications rules Enables the creation of advanced, custom notifications that
apply to the specific quota. Custom notifications can be
configured for any or all of the threshold types (hard, soft,
or advisory) for the specified quota.

Quota notification rules

You can write quota notification rules to generate alerts that are triggered by event thresholds.
When an event occurs, a notification is triggered according to your notification rule. For example, you can create a notification
rule that sends an email when a disk-space allocation threshold is exceeded by a group.
You can configure notification rules to trigger an action according to event thresholds (a notification condition). A rule can
specify a schedule, such as "every day at 1:00 AM," for executing an action or immediate notification of certain state transitions.
When an event occurs, a notification trigger may execute one or more actions, such as sending an email or sending a cluster
alert to the interface. The following examples demonstrate the types of criteria that you can use to configure notification rules.
● Notify when a threshold is exceeded; at most, once every 5 minutes
● Notify when allocation is denied; at most, once an hour
● Notify while over threshold, daily at 2 AM
● Notify while grace period expired weekly, on Sundays at 2 AM
Notifications are triggered for events grouped by the following categories:

Instant notifications Includes the write-denied notification, triggered when a hard threshold denies a write, and the
threshold-exceeded notification, triggered at the moment a hard, soft, or advisory threshold is
exceeded. These are one-time notifications because they represent a discrete event in time.

SmartQuotas 369
Ongoing Generated on a scheduled basis to indicate a persisting condition, such as a hard, soft, or advisory
notifications threshold being over a limit or a soft threshold's grace period being expired for a prolonged period.

Quota reports
The OneFS SmartQuotas module provides reporting options that enable administrators to manage cluster resources and analyze
usage statistics.
Storage quota reports provide a summarized view of the past or present state of the quota domains. After raw reporting data
is collected by OneFS, you can produce data summaries by using a set of filtering parameters and sort types. Storage-quota
reports include information about violators, grouped by threshold types. You can generate reports from a historical data sample
or from current data. In either case, the reports are views of usage data at a given time. OneFS does not provide reports on
data aggregated over time, such as trending reports, but you can use raw data to analyze trends. There is no configuration limit
on the number of reports other than the space needed to store them.
OneFS provides the following data-collection and reporting methods:
● Scheduled reports are generated and saved on a regular interval.
● Ad hoc reports are generated and saved at the request of the user.
● Live reports are generated for immediate and temporary viewing.
Scheduled reports are placed by default in the /ifs/.isilon/smartquotas/reports directory, but the location is
configurable to any directory under /ifs. Each generated report includes quota domain definition, state, usage, and global
configuration settings. By default, ten reports are kept at a time, and older reports are purged. You can create ad hoc reports at
any time to view the current state of the storage quotas system. These live reports can be saved manually. Ad hoc reports are
saved to a location that is separate from scheduled reports to avoid skewing the timed-report sets.

Creating quotas
You can create two types of storage quotas to monitor data: accounting quotas and enforcement quotas. Storage quota limits
and restrictions can apply to specific users, groups, or directories.
The type of quota that you create depends on your goal.
● Enforcement quotas monitor and limit disk usage. You can create enforcement quotas that use any combination of hard
limits, soft limits, and advisory limits.

NOTE: Enforcement quotas are not recommended for snapshot-tracking quota domains.

● Accounting quotas monitor, but do not limit, disk usage.

NOTE: Before using quota data for analysis or other purposes, verify that no QuotaScan jobs are running.

Create an accounting quota

You can create an accounting quota to monitor but not limit disk usage.
Optionally, you can include snapshot data, data-protection overhead, or both, in the accounting quota.
1. Click File system > SmartQuotas > Quotas and usage.
2. Click Create a quota.
The Create a quota dialog box appears.
3. From the Quota type list, select the target for this quota.
● Directory quota
● User quota
● Group quota
4. Depending on the target that you selected, select the entity that you want to apply the quota to. For example, if you
selected User quota from the Quota type list, you can target either all users or a specific user.
5. In the Path field, type the path for the quota, or click Browse, and then select a directory.
6. In the Description box, type something relevant about the quota.

370 SmartQuotas
 The maximum length for the description field is 1024 bytes.
7. In the Quota accounting area, select the options that you want to use.
● To include snapshot data in the accounting quota, select Include snapshots in the storage quota.
● To include the metadata and data protection overhead in the accounting quota, select Physical size.
● To include the physical size minus the metadata and data protection overhead, select File system logical size.
● To include capacity consumption on the cluster as well as data tiered to the cloud, select Application logical size. This
accounting quota does not measure file system space, but provides the application/user view of the used file capacity.
8. In the Quota limits area, select Track storage without specifying a storage limit.
9. Select how available space should be shown:
● Size of smallest hard or soft threshold
● Size of cluster
10. Click Create quota.
Before using quota data for analysis or other purposes, verify that no QuotaScan jobs are in progress by checking Cluster
management > Job operations > Job summary.

Create an enforcement quota

You can create an enforcement quota to monitor and limit disk usage.
You can create enforcement quotas that set hard, soft, and advisory limits.
1. Click File system > SmartQuotas > Quotas and usage.
2. Click Create a quota.
The Create a quota dialog box appears.
3. From the Quota type list, select the target for this quota.
● Directory quota
● User quota
● Group quota
4. Depending on the target that you selected, select the entity that you want to apply the quota to. For example, if you
selected User quota from the Quota type list, you can target either all users or a specific user.
5. In the Path field, type the path for the quota, or click Browse, and then select a directory.
6. In the Description box, type something relevant about the quota.
The maximum length for the description field is 1024 bytes.
7. In the Quota accounting area, select the options that you want to use.
● To include snapshot data in the accounting quota, select Include snapshots in the storage quota.
● To include the metadata and data protection overhead in the accounting quota, select Physical size.
● To include the physical size minus the metadata and data protection overhead, select File system logical size.
● To include capacity consumption on the cluster as well as data tiered to the cloud, select Application logical size. This
accounting quota does not measure file system space, but provides the application/user view of the used file capacity.
8. In the Quota limits area, select Specify storage limits.
9. Select the check box next to each limit that you want to enforce.
10. Type numerals in the fields and from the lists, select the values that you want to use for the quota.
11. Select how available space should be shown:
● Size of smallest hard or soft threshold
● Size of cluster
12. In the Quota notifications area, select the notification option that you want to apply to the quota.
13. Optional: If you selected the option to use custom notification rules, click the link to expand the custom notification type that
applies to the usage-limit selections.
14. Click Create quota.
Before using quota data for analysis or other purposes, verify that no QuotaScan jobs are in progress by checking Cluster
management > Job operations > Job summary.

SmartQuotas 371
Managing quotas
You can modify the configured values of a storage quota, and you can enable or disable a quota. You can also create quota limits
and restrictions that apply to specific users, groups, or directories.
Quota management in OneFS is simplified by the quota search feature, which helps you locate a quota or quotas by using filters.
You can unlink quotas that are associated with a parent quota, and configure custom notifications for quotas. You can also
disable a quota temporarily and then enable it when needed.

NOTE: Moving quota directories across quota domains is not supported.

Search for quotas

You can search for a quota using a variety of search criteria.

1. Click File system > SmartQuotas > Quotas and usage.

2. In the filter bar, select the options that you want to filter by.
● From the Filters list, select the quota type that you want to find (Directory, User, Group, Default user, or Default
group).
● To search for quotas that are over the limit, select Over limit from the Exceeded list.
● In the Path field, type a full or partial path. You can use the wildcard character (*) in the Path field.
● To search subdirectories, select Include children from the Recursive path list.
Quotas that match the search criteria appear in the Quotas and usage table.
An accounting or enforcement quota with a threshold value of zero is indicated by a dash (–). You can click the column
headings to sort the result set.
NOTE:

To clear the result set and display all storage quotas, click Reset.

Manage quotas
Quotas help you monitor and analyze the current or historical use of disk storage. You can search for quotas, and you can view,
modify, delete, and unlink a quota.
You must run an initial QuotaScan job for the default or scheduled quotas, or the data that is displayed may be incomplete.
Before you modify a quota, consider how the changes will affect the file system and end users.
NOTE:
● The options to edit or delete a quota display only when the quota is not linked to a default quota.
● The option to unlink a quota is available only when the quota is linked to a default quota.
1. Click File System > SmartQuotas > Quotas and usage.
2. Optional: In the filter bar, select the options that you want to filter by.
● From the Filters list, select the quota type that you want to find (Directory, User, Group, Default user, or Default
group).
● To search for quotas that are over the limit, select Over limit from the Exceeded list.
● In the Path field, type a full or partial path. You can use the wildcard character (*) in the Path field.
● To search subdirectories, select Include children from the Recursive path list.
Quotas that match the search criteria appear in the Quotas and usage table.
3. Optional: Locate the quota that you want to manage. You can perform the following actions:
● To review or edit this quota, click View Details.
● To delete the quota, click Delete.
● To unlink a linked quota, click Unlink.

NOTE: Configuration changes for linked quotas must be made on the parent (default) quota that the linked quota
is inheriting from. Changes to the parent quota are propagated to all children. If you want to override configuration
from the parent quota, you must first unlink the quota.

372 SmartQuotas
Export a quota configuration file
You can export quota settings as a configuration file, which can then be imported for reuse to another PowerScale cluster. You
can also store the exported quota configurations in a location outside of the cluster. This task may only be performed from the
OneFS command line interface.
You can pipe the XML report to a file or directory. The file can then be imported to another cluster.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. At the command prompt, run the following command:

isi_classic quota list --export

The quota configuration file displays as raw XML.

Import a quota configuration file

You can import quota settings in the form of a configuration file that has been exported from another PowerScale cluster. This
task can only be performed from the OneFS command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Navigate to the location of the exported quota configuration file.
3. At the command prompt, run the following command, where <filename> is the name of an exported configuration file:

isi_classic quota import --from-file=<filename>

The system parses the file and imports the quota settings from the configuration file. Quota settings that you configured
before importing the quota configuration file are retained, and the imported quota settings are effective immediately.

Managing quota notifications

Quota notifications can be enabled or disabled, modified, and deleted.
By default, a global quota notification is already configured and applied to all quotas. You can continue to use the global quota
notification settings, modify the global notification settings, or disable or set a custom notification for a quota.
Enforcement quotas support four types of notifications and reminders:
● Threshold exceeded
● Over-quota reminder
● Grace period expired
● Write access denied

If a directory service is used to authenticate users, you can configure notification mappings that control how email addresses
are resolved when the cluster sends a quota notification. If necessary, you can remap the domain that is used for quota email
notifications and you can remap Active Directory domains, local UNIX domains, or both.

Configure default quota notification settings

You can configure default global quota notification settings that apply to all quotas of a specified threshold type.
The custom notification settings that you configure for a quota take precedence over the default global notification settings.
1. Click File System > SmartQuotas > Settings.
2. In the Scheduled Reporting area, you can configure the following reporting options:
● In the Archive Directory field, type or browse to the directory where you want to archive the scheduled quota reports.
● In the Number of Scheduled Reports Retained field, type the number of reports that you want to archive.

SmartQuotas 373
 ● Select the reporting schedule options that you want, and then click
● Select Scheduled to enable scheduled reporting, or select Manual to disable scheduled reporting.
3. In the Manual Reporting area, you can configure the following reporting options:
● In the Archive Directory field, type or browse to the directory where you want to archive the manually-generated quota
reports.
● In the Number of Live Reports Retained field, type the number of reports that you want to archive.
4. In the Email Mapping area, define the mapping rule or rules that you want to use. To add a email mapping rule, click Add a
Mapping Rule, and then specify the settings for the rule.
5. In the Notification Rules area, define default notification rules for each rule type.
a. Click Add a Notification Rule.
The Create a Notification Rule dialog box opens.
b. From the Rule type list, select the rule type to use.
c. In the Rule Settings area, select the notify option to use.
6. Click Create Rule.
7. Click Save Changes.
Before using quota data for analysis or other purposes, verify that no QuotaScan jobs are in progress by checking Cluster
Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.

Configure custom quota notification rules

You can configure custom quota notification rules that apply only to a specified quota.
To configure a custom notification rule, an enforcement quota must exist or be in the process of being created. To configure
notifications for an existing enforcement quota, follow the procedure to modify a quota and then use these steps to set the
quota notification rules.
Quota-specific custom notification rules must be configured for that quota. If notification rules are not configured for a quota,
the default event notification configuration is used. For more information about configuring default notification rules, see Create
an event notification rule.
1. In the Edit Quota Details dialog box, select Create custom notification nules.
2. To add a notification rule, click Create a notification rule, and then select the values that you want to use for the
notification.
3. After you have completed configuring the settings for the notification, click Create Rule.
4. Click Save Changes.
Before using quota data for analysis or other purposes, verify that no QuotaScan jobs are in progress by checking Cluster
Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.

Map an email notification rule for a quota

Email notification mapping rules control how email addresses are resolved when the cluster sends a quota notification.
If required, you can remap the domain that is used for SmartQuotas email notifications. You can remap Active Directory
Windows domains, local UNIX domains, or NIS domains.

NOTE: You must be logged in to the web administration interface to perform this task.

1. Click File System > SmartQuotas > Settings.

2. Optional: In the Email Mapping area, click Add a Mapping Rule.
3. From the Type list, select the authentication provider type for this notification rule. The default is Local. To determine
which authentication providers are available on the cluster, browse to Access > Authentication Providers.
4. From the Current domain list, select the domain that you want to use for the mapping rule. If the list is blank, browse to
Cluster Management > Network Configuration, and then specify the domains that you want to use for mapping.
5. In the Map to domain field, type the name of the domain that you want to map email notifications to. This can be the same
domain name that you selected from the Current domain list. To specify multiple domains, separate the domain names with
commas.
6. Click Create Rule.

374 SmartQuotas
Email quota notification messages
If email notifications for exceeded quotas are enabled, you can customize PowerScale templates for email notifications or create
your own. Email notifications can be in either plain text format or in properly formatted HTML.
Plain text quota email templates
There are three plain text email notification templates that are provided with OneFS. The templates are in /etc/ifs and are
described in the following table:

Table 116. Quota Email Templates

Template Description
quota_email_template.txt A notification that the disk quota has been exceeded.
quota_email_grace_template.txt A notification that the disk quota has been exceeded (also
includes a parameter to define a grace period in the number of
days).
quota_email_test_template.txt A notification test message that you can use to verify that a
user is receiving email notifications.

If the default email notification templates do not meet your needs, you can configure your own custom email notification
templates by using a combination of text and SmartQuotas variables. Whether you choose to create your own templates or
modify the existing ones, ensure that the first line of the template file is a Subject: line. For example:

Subject: Disk quota exceeded

If you want to include information about the message sender, include a From: line immediately under the subject line. If you use
an email address, include the full domain name for the address. For example:

From: administrator@[Link]

In this example of the quota_email_template.txt file, a From: line is included. Also, the default text "Contact your
system administrator for details" at the end of the template is changed to name the administrator:

Subject: Disk quota exceeded

From: administrator@[Link]

The <ISI_QUOTA_DOMAIN_TYPE> quota on path <ISI_QUOTA_PATH> owned by

<ISI_QUOTA_OWNER> has exceeded the <ISI_QUOTA_TYPE> limit.
The quota limit is <ISI_QUOTA_THRESHOLD>, and <ISI_QUOTA_USAGE>
is currently in use. You may be able to free some disk space by
deleting unnecessary files. If your quota includes snapshot usage,
your administrator may be able to free some disk space by deleting
one or more snapshots. Contact Jane Anderson (janderson@[Link])
for details.

The following is an example of a what a user sees as an emailed notification (note that the SmartQuotas variables are resolved):

Subject: Disk quota exceeded

From: administrator@[Link]

The advisory disk quota on directory /ifs/data/sales_tools/collateral

owned by jsmith on production-Boris was exceeded.

The quota limit is 10 GB, and 11 GB is in use. You may be able

to free some disk space by deleting unnecessary files. If your
quota includes snapshot usage, your administrator may be able
to free some disk space by deleting one or more snapshots.
Contact Jane Anderson (janderson@[Link]) for details.

HTML quota email template

SmartQuotas 375
Quota notifications can also be formatted in HTML. An example of a properly formatted HTML quota notification template
containing a source image and SmartQuotas variables is as follows:

<html><body>
<img src="[Link]
PublishingImages/[Link]">
<h1>Quota Exceeded</h1><p></p>
<hr>
<p>The path <ISI_QUOTA_PATH> has exceeded the threshold <ISI_QUOTA_THRESHOLD> for this
<ISI_QUOTA_TYPE> quota.</p>
</body></html>

In this example, the <ISI_QUOTA_PATH>, <ISI_QUOTA_THRESHOLD>, and <ISI_QUOTA_TYPE> variables are substituted
with the values of the variables from the cluster in the body of the HTML email message. For example:
Quota Exceeded
The path /ifs/data/myfolder has exceeded the threshold 4.00G for this advisory quota.

Custom email notification template variable descriptions

An email template contains text, and, optionally, variables that represent values. You can use any of the SmartQuotas variables
in your templates.

Table 117. SmartQuota Variables

Variable Description Example
ISI_QUOTA_DOMAIN_TYPE Quota type. Valid values are: directory, user, group, default-directory
default-directory, default-user, default-group
ISI_QUOTA_EXPIRATION Expiration date of grace period Fri May 22 14:23:19 PST 2015
ISI_QUOTA_GRACE Grace period, in days 5 days
ISI_QUOTA_HARD_LIMIT Includes the hard limit information of the quota You have 30 MB left until you
to make advisory or soft email notifications more press the hard quota limit of 50
informational. MB.
ISI_QUOTA_NODE Hostname of the node on which the quota event someHost-prod-wf-1
occurred
ISI_QUOTA_OWNER Name of quota domain owner jsmith
ISI_QUOTA_PATH Path of quota domain /ifs/data

ISI_QUOTA_THRESHOLD Threshold value 20 GB

ISI_QUOTA_TYPE Threshold type Advisory
ISI_QUOTA_USAGE Disk space in use 10.5 GB

Customize email quota notification templates

You can customize PowerScale templates for email notifications. Customizing templates can be performed only from the OneFS
command line interface.
This procedure assumes that you are using the PowerScale templates, which are located in the /etc/ifs directory.
NOTE: It is recommend that you do not edit the templates directly. Instead, copy them to another directory to edit and
deploy them.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Copy one of the default templates to a directory in which you can edit the file and later access it through the OneFS web
administration interface. For example:

cp /etc/ifs/quota_email_template.txt /ifs/data/quotanotifiers/
quota_email_template_copy.txt

376 SmartQuotas
3. Open the template file in a text editor. For example:

edit /ifs/data/quotanotifiers/quota_email_template_copy.txt

The template appears in the editor.

4. Edit the template. If you are using or creating a customized template, ensure the template has a Subject: line.
5. Save the changes. Template files must be saved as .txt files.
6. In the web administration interface, browse to File System > SmartQuotas > Settings.
7. In the Notification Rules area, click Add a Notification Rule.
The Create a Notification Rule dialog box appears.
8. From the Rule type list, select the notification rule type that you want to use with the template.
9. In the Rule Settings area, select a notification type option.
10. Depending on the rule type that was selected, a schedule form might appear. Select the scheduling options that you want to
use.
11. In the Message template field, type the path for the message template, or click Browse to locate the template.
12. Optional: Click Create Rule

Managing quota reports

You can configure and schedule reports to help you monitor, track, and analyze storage use on a PowerScale cluster.
You can view and schedule reports and customize report settings to track, monitor, and analyze disk storage use. Quota reports
are managed by configuring settings that give you control over when reports are scheduled, how they are generated, where and
how many are stored, and how they are viewed. The maximum number of scheduled reports that are available for viewing in
the web-administration interface can be configured for each report type. When the maximum number of reports are stored, the
system deletes the oldest reports to make space for new reports as they are generated.

Create a quota report schedule

You can configure quota report settings to generate the quota report on a specified schedule.
These settings determine whether and when scheduled reports are generated, and where and how the reports are stored. If you
disable a scheduled report, you can still run unscheduled reports at any time.
1. Click File System > SmartQuotas > Settings.
2. Optional: On the Quota Settings page, in the Scheduled Reporting area, select Scheduled.
The schedule panel appears.
3. In the schedule panel, select the report frequency and reporting schedule options that you want to set.
4. Click Save Changes.
Reports are generated according to the scheduling criteria and can be viewed by clicking File System > SmartQuotas >
Generated Reports Archive.

Generate a quota report

In addition to scheduled quota reports, you can generate a report to capture usage statistics at a point in time.
Before you can generate a quota report, quotas must exist and no QuotaScan jobs can be running.
1. Click File System > SmartQuotas > Generated Reports Archive.
2. Click Create a Manual Report.
The new report appears in the Quota Reports list.

SmartQuotas 377
Locate a quota report
You can locate quota reports, which are stored as XML files, and use your own tools and transforms to view them. This task can
only be performed from the OneFS command-line interface.
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Navigate to the directory where quota reports are stored. The following path is the default quota report location:
/ifs/.isilon/smartquotas/reports
NOTE: If quota reports are not in the default directory, you can run the isi quota settings command to find the
directory where they are stored.

3. At the command prompt, run the ls command.

● To view a list of all quota reports in the directory, run the following command:

ls -a *.xml

● To view a specific quota report in the directory, run the following command:

ls <filename>.xml

Basic quota settings

When you create a storage quota, the following attributes must be defined, at a minimum. When you specify usage limits,
additional options are available for defining the quota.

Table 118. Unspecified Limit Options

Option Description

Path The directory that the quota is on.

Directory Quota Set storage limits on a directory.

User Quota Create a quota for every current or future user that stores
data in the specified directory.

Group Quota Create a quota for every current or future group that stores
data in the specified directory.

Include snapshots in the storage quota Count all snapshot data in usage limits. This option cannot
be changed after the quota is created.

Enforce the limits for this quota based on physical size Base quota enforcement on storage usage which includes
metadata and data protection.

Enforce the limits for this quota based on file system logical size Base quota enforcement on storage usage which does not
include metadata and data protection.

Enforce the limits for this quota based on application logical size Base quota enforcement on storage usage which includes
capacity consumption on the cluster and data that is tiered
to the cloud.

Track storage without specifying a storage limit Account for usage only.

Specify storage limits Set and enforce advisory, soft, or absolute limits.

378 SmartQuotas
Advisory limit quota notification rules settings
You can configure custom quota notification rules for advisory limits for a quota. These settings are available when you select
the option to use custom notification rules.

Table 119. Advisory Limit Notification Options

Option Description Exceeded Remains exceeded
Notify the owner Select to send an email Yes Yes
notification to the owner of
the entity.
Notify other contacts Select to send email Yes Yes
notifications to other
recipients and type the email
addresses of the recipients.
NOTE: You can only enter
one email address before
the cluster is committed.
After the cluster is
committed, you can enter
multiple comma-separated
email addresses. Duplicate
email addresses are
identified, and only unique
addresses are stored. You
can enter a maximum
of 1,024 characters of
comma-separated email
addresses.

Message template Type the path for the custom Yes Yes
template, or click Browse to
locate the custom template.
Leave the field blank to use
the default template.

Create cluster event Select to generate an event Yes Yes

notification for the quota
when exceeded.
Minimum notification interval Specify the time interval Yes No
to wait (in hours, days,
or weeks) before generating
the notification. This
setting minimizes duplicate
notifications.
Schedule Specify the notification and No Yes
alert frequency: daily, weekly,
monthly, yearly. Depending
on the selection, specify
intervals, day to send, time of
day, multiple email messages
per rule.

SmartQuotas 379
Soft limit quota notification rules settings
You can configure custom soft limit notification rules for a quota. These settings are available when you select the option to use
custom notification rules.

Table 120. Soft Limit Notification Options

Option Description Exceeded Remains Grace period Write access
exceeded expired denied
Notify owner Select to send an Yes Yes Yes Yes
email notification to
the owner of the
entity.
Notify other Select to send Yes Yes Yes Yes
contact(s) email notifications
to other recipients
and type the email
addresses of the
recipients.
NOTE: You can
only enter one
email address
before the
cluster is
committed.
After the
cluster is
committed, you
can enter
multiple
comma-
separated email
addresses.
Duplicate email
addresses are
identified, and
only unique
addresses are
stored. You can
enter a
maximum of
1,024
characters of
comma-
separated email
addresses.

Message template Type the path Yes Yes Yes Yes

for the custom
template, or
click Browse to
locate the custom
template.
Leave the field
blank to use the
default template.

Create cluster Select to Yes Yes Yes Yes

event generate an event

380 SmartQuotas
Table 120. Soft Limit Notification Options (continued)
Option Description Exceeded Remains Grace period Write access
exceeded expired denied
notification for the
quota.
Minimum Specify the time Yes No No Yes
notification interval interval to wait
(in hours, days,
or weeks) before
generating the
notification. This
minimizes duplicate
notifications.
Schedule Specify the No Yes Yes No
notification and
alert frequency:
daily, weekly,
monthly, yearly.
Depending on the
selection, specify
intervals, day to
send, time of
day, multiple email
messages per rule.

Hard limit quota notification rules settings

You can configure custom quota notification rules for hard limits for a quota. These settings are available when you select the
option to use custom notification rules.

Table 121. Hard Limit Notification Options

Option Description Write access denied Exceeded
Notify owner Select to send an email Yes Yes
notification to the owner of
the entity.
Notify other contacts Select to send email Yes Yes
notifications to other
recipients and type the email
addresses of the recipients.
NOTE: You can only enter
one email address before
the cluster is committed.
After the cluster is
committed, you can enter
multiple comma-separated
email addresses. Duplicate
email addresses are
identified, and only unique
addresses are stored. You
can enter a maximum
of 1,024 characters of
comma-separated email
addresses.

SmartQuotas 381
Table 121. Hard Limit Notification Options (continued)
Option Description Write access denied Exceeded
Message template Type the path for the custom Yes Yes
template, or click Browse to
locate the custom template.
Leave the field blank to use
the default template.

Create cluster event Select to generate an event Yes Yes

notification for the quota.
Minimum notification interval Specify the time interval Yes No
to wait (in hours, days,
or weeks) before generating
the notification. This
option minimizes duplicate
notifications.
Schedule Specify the notification and No Yes
alert frequency: daily, weekly,
monthly, yearly. Depending
on the selection, specify
intervals, day to send, time of
day, multiple email messages
per rule.

Limit notification settings

Enforcement quotas support the following notification settings for each threshold type. A quota can use only one of these
settings.

Table 122. Limit Notification Settings

Notification setting Description
Disable quota notifications Disable all notifications for the quota.
Use the system settings for quota notifications Use the default notification rules that you configured for the
specified threshold type.
Create custom notification rules Provide settings to create basic custom notifications that
apply only to this quota.

Quota report settings

You can configure quota report settings that track disk usage. These settings determine whether and when scheduled reports
are generated, and where and how reports are stored. When the maximum number of reports are stored, the system deletes the
oldest reports to make space for new reports as they are generated.

Table 123. Report Settings

Setting Description

Scheduled reporting Enables or disables the scheduled reporting feature.

● Off. Manually generated on-demand reports can be run at
any time.
● On. Reports run automatically according to the schedule
that you specify.

382 SmartQuotas
Table 123. Report Settings (continued)
Setting Description

Report frequency Specifies the interval for this report to run: daily, weekly,
monthly, or yearly. You can use the following options to
further refine the report schedule.
Generate report every. Specify the numeric value for the
selected report frequency; for example, every 2 months.
Generate reports on. Select the day or multiple days to
generate reports.
Select report day by. Specify the date or day of the week to
generate the report.
Generate one report per specified by. Set the time of day
to generate this report.
Generate multiple reports per specified day. Set the
intervals and times of the day to generate the report for that
day.

Scheduled report archiving Determines the maximum number of scheduled reports that
are available for viewing on the SmartQuotas Reports page.
Limit archive size for scheduled reports to a specified
number of reports. Type the integer to specify the maximum
number of reports to keep.
Archive Directory. Browse to the directory where you want
to store quota reports for archiving.

Manual report archiving Determines the maximum number of manually generated

(on-demand) reports that are available for viewing on the
SmartQuotas Reports page.
Limit archive size for live reports to a specified number of
reports. Type the integer to specify the maximum number of
reports to keep.
Archive Directory. Browse to the directory where you want
to store quota reports for archiving.

SmartQuotas 383
 28
Storage Pools
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Storage pools overview
• Storage pool functions
• Autoprovisioning
• Node pools
• Virtual hot spare
• Spillover
• Suggested protection
• Protection policies
• SSD strategies
• Other SSD mirror settings
• Global namespace acceleration
• L3 cache overview
• Tiers
• File pool policies
• Managing node pools in the web administration interface
• Managing L3 cache from the web administration interface
• Managing tiers
• Creating file pool policies
• Managing file pool policies
• Monitoring storage pools

Storage pools overview

OneFS organizes different node types into separate node pools. You can configure node pool membership to include node types
that you specify. You can also add node types to, and remove node types from, existing node pools. You can organize these
node pools into logical tiers of storage. By activating a SmartPools license, you can create file pool policies that store files in
these tiers automatically, based on criteria that you specify.
Without an active SmartPools license, OneFS manages all node pools as a single pool of storage. File data and metadata are
striped across the entire cluster so that data is protected, secure, and readily accessible. All files belong to the default file pool
and are governed by the default file pool policy. In this mode, OneFS provides functions such as autoprovisioning, virtual hot
spare (VHS), global namespace acceleration (GNA), L3 cache, and storage tiers.
When you activate a SmartPools license, additional functions become available, including custom file pool policies and spillover
management. With a SmartPools license, you can manage your dataset with more granularity to improve the performance of
your cluster.
The following table summarizes storage pool functions based on whether a SmartPools license is active.

Table 124. Function Statuses

Function Inactive SmartPools license Active SmartPools license
Automatic storage pool provisioning Yes Yes
Virtual hot spare Yes Yes
SSD strategies Yes Yes
L3 cache Yes Yes

384 Storage Pools

Table 124. Function Statuses (continued)
Function Inactive SmartPools license Active SmartPools license
Tiers Yes Yes
GNA Yes Yes
File pool policies No Yes
Spillover management No Yes

Storage pool functions

When a cluster is installed, and whenever nodes are added to the cluster, OneFS automatically groups nodes into node pools.
Autoprovisioning of nodes into node pools enables OneFS to optimize performance, reliability, and data protection on the
cluster.
OneFS uses specific criteria to determine how, or whether, to group nodes into node pools. Nodes are compatible if there
are no restrictions between them, or if existing restrictions can be overridden ("soft restrictions"). Nodes are equivalent if
no restrictions exist between them. Nodes are automatically provisioned together only if they are equivalent. If nodes are
compatible but not equivalent, you can manually move them into the same node pool.
Without an active SmartPools license, OneFS applies a default file pool policy to organize all data into a single file pool. With this
policy, OneFS distributes data across the entire cluster so that data is protected and readily accessible. When you activate a
SmartPools license, additional functions become available.
OneFS provides the following functions, with or without an active SmartPools license:

Autoprovisioning of Automatically groups equivalent nodes into node pools for optimal storage efficiency and protection.
node pools At least three equivalent nodes are required for autoprovisioning to work.
Tiers Groups node pools into logical tiers of storage. If you activate a SmartPools license for this feature,
you can create custom file pool policies and direct different file pools to appropriate storage tiers.
Default file pool Governs all file types and can store files anywhere on the cluster. Custom file pool policies, which
policy require a SmartPools license, take precedence over the default file pool policy.
Requested Specifies a requested protection setting for the default file pool, per node pool, or even on individual
protection files. You can leave the default setting in place, or choose the suggested protection calculated by
OneFS for optimal data protection.
Virtual hot spare Reserves a portion of available storage space for data repair in the event of a disk failure.
SSD strategies Defines the type of data that is stored on SSDs in the cluster. For example, storing metadata for
read/write acceleration.
L3 cache Specifies that SSDs in nodes are used to increase cache memory and speed up file system
performance across larger working file sets.
Global namespace Activates global namespace acceleration (GNA), which enables data stored on node pools without
acceleration SSDs to access SSDs elsewhere in the cluster to store extra metadata mirrors. Extra metadata mirrors
accelerate metadata read operations.

When you activate a SmartPools license, OneFS provides the following additional functions:

Custom file pool Creates custom file pool policies to identify different classes of files, and stores these file pools
policies in logical storage tiers. For example, you can define a high-performance tier of node pools and an
archival tier of high-capacity node pools. Then, with custom file pool policies, you can identify file
pools based on matching criteria, and you can define actions to perform on these pools. For example,
one file pool policy can identify all JPEG files older than a year and store them in an archival tier.
Another policy can move all files that were created or modified within the last three months to a
performance tier.
Storage pool Enables automated capacity overflow management for storage pools. Spillover defines how to handle
spillover write operations when a storage pool is not writable. If spillover is enabled, data is redirected to a
specified storage pool. If spillover is disabled, new data writes fail and an error message is sent to the
client that is attempting the write operation.

Storage Pools 385

Autoprovisioning
When you add a node to a cluster, OneFS attempts to assign the node to a node pool. This process is known as
autoprovisioning, which helps OneFS to provide optimal performance, load balancing, and file system integrity across a cluster.
A node is not autoprovisioned to a node pool and made writable until at least three equivalent nodes are added to the cluster. If
you add only two equivalent nodes, no data is stored on these nodes until a third equivalent node is added.
If a node fails or is removed from the cluster so that fewer than three nodes remain, the node pool becomes underprovisioned.
In this case, the two remaining nodes are still writable. If only one node remains, the node is not writable, but remains readable.
New nodes added to your cluster are likely to be different from the nodes in existing node pools. Unless you add three new
equivalent nodes each time you upgrade your cluster, the new nodes are not autoprovisioned. However, you can add new node
types to existing node pools. You can add nodes one at a time to your cluster, and the new nodes can become fully functioning
peers within existing node pools.

Node pools
A node pool is a group of three or more nodes that forms a single pool of storage. As you add nodes to the cluster, OneFS
attempts to automatically provision the new nodes into node pools.
To autoprovision a node, OneFS requires that the new node be equivalent to the other nodes in the node pool. If the new node
is equivalent, OneFS provisions the new node to the node pool. All nodes in a node pool are peers, and data is distributed across
nodes in the pool. Each provisioned node increases the aggregate disk, cache, CPU, and network capacity of the cluster.
We strongly recommend that you let OneFS handle node provisioning. However, if you have a special requirement or use case,
you can move nodes from an autoprovisioned node pool into a node pool that you define manually. The capability to create
manually-defined node pools is available only through the OneFS command-line interface, and should be deployed only after
consulting with Dell PowerScale Technical Support.
If you try to remove a node from a node pool for the purpose of adding it to a manual node pool, and the result would leave
fewer than three nodes in the original node pool, the removal fails. When you remove a node from a manually-defined node pool,
OneFS attempts to autoprovision the node back into an equivalent node pool.
If you add fewer than three equivalent nodes to your cluster, OneFS cannot autoprovision these nodes. In these cases, you can
add new node types to existing node pools. Adding the new node types can enable OneFS to provision the newly added nodes to
a compatible node pool.
Node pools can use SSDs either as storage or as L3 cache, but not both, with the following exception. PowerScale F200 and
F600 nodes are full SSD nodes and can only be used as storage. Enabling L3 cache on F200 and F600 nodes is not an option.
NOTE: Do not use NL nodes in node pools used for NFS or SMB. It is recommended that you use high performance nodes
to handle NFS and SMB workloads.

Node compatibilities
If there are compatibility restrictions between new nodes and the existing nodes in a node pool, OneFS cannot autoprovision the
new nodes. To enable new nodes to join a compatible node pool, add the new node type to the existing node pool. Modify node
pool compatibility using the command-line interface.
Add new node type to existing node pool
For example, suppose that your cluster has an X410 node pool and you add a newer X410 node. OneFS attempts to
autoprovision the new node to the X410 node pool. However, if the new X410 node has different RAM than the older X410
nodes, then OneFS cannot autoprovision the new node. To provision the new node into the existing X410 node pool, add the
new X410 node type to the existing X410 node pool.
Use the isi storagepool nodetypes list command to view the node types and their IDs, then isi storagepool
nodepools modify <nodepool_name> --add-node-type-ids=<new_nodetype_id> to add the new node type to
the existing node pool.
For example, suppose that your X410 node pool name is x410_nodepool and isi storagepool nodetypes list shows
the new node type ID as 12:

isi storagepool nodepools modify x410_nodepool --add-node-type-ids=12

386 Storage Pools

Can you add A300/A3000 nodes to an A200/A2000 node pool?
If you want to add a half chassis of A300 or A3000 to a given cluster of A2000 or A200, what are the requirements? Are
you required to add a full chassis of A300 or A3000, or is the option of using a half-populated chassis of A300/A3000 or
corresponding A300L/A3000L feasible?
● The answer is that it is possible to add only two nodes, however the drive capacities must match. In addition, the A300s that
you are adding must be configured so that the cache to L3 matches the A200s.
● If you are using SSDs for cache, then they do not need to match, because mismatched SSDs perform correctly if you are
using L3 cache. See the following table for compatibility requirements.
Compatibility Requirements (to add A300/A3000 nodes to an existing A200/A2000 node pool)

Table 125. Node Compatibility

Node type Compatible Node Type MLK Cache Compatibility Compatibility
Requirements
A200/A2000 Yes A3000L/A300L Compatible: Nodes are SATA disk capacity
hard coded with L3 must match
SSD cache disks do not
need to match

A200/A2000 Yes A3000/A300 Compatible: Nodes SATA disk capacity

must switch cache must match
disks to L3
SSD cache disks do not
need to match

Remove a node type from a node pool

You can also remove a node type from a node pool, for example, if you want to move that node type into its own pool. Using the
above example, to remove the X410 nodes with a different RAM capacity and node type ID 12 from the X410 node pool:

isi storagepool nodepools modify x410_nodepool --remove-node-type-ids=12

Performance considerations and incompatible node types determine compatibility restrictions. For example:
● Performance can be affected by adding a particular node type to an existing node pool.
● A particular node type can be incompatible with the nodes in an existing pool.
In that case, OneFS generates a message describing the compatibility issue.
NOTE: SSD compatibilities require that L3 cache is enabled on all nodes. If you attempt to move nodes with SSDs into a
node pool on which L3 cache is not enabled, the process fails with an error message. Ensure that the L3 cache is enabled
for the existing node pool and try again. L3 cache can only be enabled on nodes that have fewer than 16 SSDs and at least
a 2:1 ratio of HDDs to SSDs. On Generation 6 nodes that support SSD compatibility, the SSD count is ignored. If SSDs are
used for storage, then SSD counts must be identical on all nodes in a node pool. If SSD counts are left unbalanced, node
pool efficiency and performance can be less than optimal.
For example, the PowerScale F200 and F600 node types are incompatible with each other and with previous node types. You
cannot add F200 or F600 nodes to a node pool containing any other node types (for example, S210 or F800 nodes). They are
not hybrid nodes, so enabling L3 cache is not an option. They can be used as storage only.
The following table shows the compatibilities between specific PowerScale archive and hybrid nodes. Nodes in the same row of
the table are compatible. Compatible nodes can be provisioned into the same node pool. Nodes that are not compatible cannot
be provisioned into the same node pool.

Table 126. PowerScale Node Compatibility

PowerScale node Compatible PowerScale node
A2000 A3000 (OneFS [Link] and later)
A200 A300 (OneFS [Link] and later)
H400 A300 (OneFS [Link] and later)
H500 H700 (OneFS [Link] and later)
H5600 H7000 (OneFS [Link] and later)

Storage Pools 387

A300 nodes are compatible with A200 and H400 nodes. However, A200 and H400 nodes are not compatible with each other.
See Compatibility restrictions for more information.

Compatibility restrictions
OneFS enforces pool and node type restrictions for cluster configuration and node compatibility. Restrictions represent the rules
governing cluster configuration and node compatibility. They prevent performance degradation of the node types within a node
pool.
OneFS supports the following restriction types.
● Hard node type restriction: A rule that is not allowed. If you try to modify a cluster configuration in a way that generates a
hard restriction, the modification fails. OneFS presents a message that describes the restrictions that result in denying the
modification request.
● Soft node type restriction: A rule that is allowed but requires confirmation before being implemented. If you try to modify a
cluster configuration in a way that generates a soft restriction, OneFS presents an advisory notice. To continue, you must
confirm the modification.

NOTE: If the modification request results in both hard and soft restrictions, OneFS reports only the hard restrictions.

● Pool restriction: A rule that exists for a node pool.

○ Hard pool restriction: A rule that represents an invalid change to a node group. For example, you cannot modify a manual
node pool or modify a pool in a way that results in that pool being underprovisioned.
○ Soft pool restriction: A rule that represents a change to a node group that requires confirmation. Requesting a
modification that results in a soft pool restriction generates an advisory notice. To continue, you must confirm the
modification.
Some examples of hard and soft restrictions are as follows.
● There are hard node type restrictions for the PowerScale F200 and F600 node types.
○ F200 and F600 node types are incompatible with each other and with previous node types.
○ F200 node types can form node pools only with other compatible F200 nodes.
○ F600 node types can form node pools only with other compatible F600 nodes.
○ F200 and F600 nodes are storage only nodes and cannot be used as L3 cache.
○ F200 nodes must have the same SSD size to be considered compatible.
If you try to add F200 or F600 nodes to an incompatible node pool, the modification fails.
● A300 nodes are compatible with A200 and H400 nodes. However, A200 and H400 nodes are not compatible with each
other.
● There is a soft node type restriction for different RAM capacities. Any difference in RAM is allowed and there are no RAM
ranges for compatibilities. If you add a node to a node pool that has different RAM than existing nodes in that pool, OneFS
displays an advisory notice. Confirm the operation to add the node to the node pool.

Manual node pools

If the node pools automatically provisioned by OneFS do not meet your needs, you can configure node pools manually. You do
this by moving nodes from an existing node pool into the manual node pool.
This capability enables you to store data on specific nodes according to your purposes, and is available only through the OneFS
command-line interface.
CAUTION: It is recommended that you enable OneFS to provision nodes automatically. Manually created node
pools might not provide the same performance and efficiency as automatically managed node pools, particularly
if your changes result in fewer than 20 nodes in the manual node pool.

Virtual hot spare

Virtual hot spare (VHS) settings enable you to reserve disk space to rebuild the data in the event that a drive fails.
You can specify both a number of virtual drives to reserve and a percentage of total storage space. For example, if you specify
two virtual drives and 15 percent, each node pool reserves virtual drive space equivalent to two drives or 15 percent of their
total capacity (whichever is larger).

388 Storage Pools

You can reserve space in node pools across the cluster for this purpose by specifying the following options:
● At least 1–4 virtual drives.
● At least 0–20% of total storage.
OneFS calculates the larger number of the two factors to determine the space that is allocated. When configuring VHS settings,
be sure to consider the following information:
● If you deselect the option to Ignore reserved space when calculating available free space (the default), free-space
calculations include the space reserved for VHS.
● If you deselect the option to Deny data writes to reserved disk space (the default), OneFS can use VHS for normal data
writes. We recommend that you leave this option selected, or data repair can be compromised.
● If Ignore reserved space when calculating available free space is enabled while Deny data writes to reserved disk
space is disabled, it is possible for the file system to report utilization as more than 100 percent.
NOTE: VHS settings affect spillover. If the VHS option Deny data writes to reserved disk space is enabled while Ignore
reserved space when calculating available free space is disabled, spillover occurs before the file system reports 100%
utilization.

Spillover
When you activate a SmartPools license, you can designate a node pool or tier to receive spillover data when the hardware
specified by a file pool policy is full or otherwise not writable.
If you do not want data to spill over to a different location because the specified node pool or tier is full or not writable, you can
disable this feature.
NOTE: Virtual hot spare reservations affect spillover. If the setting Deny data writes to reserved disk space is enabled,
while Ignore reserved space when calculating available free space is disabled, spillover occurs before the file system
reports 100% utilization.

Suggested protection
Based on the configuration of your PowerScale cluster, OneFS automatically calculates the amount of protection that is
recommended to maintain Dell Technologies PowerScale stringent data protection requirements.
OneFS includes a function to calculate the suggested protection for data to maintain a theoretical mean-time to data loss
(MTTDL) of 5000 years. Suggested protection provides the optimal balance between data protection and storage efficiency on
your cluster.
By configuring file pool policies, you can specify one of multiple requested protection settings for a single file, for subsets of files
called file pools, or for all files on the cluster.
It is recommended that you do not specify a setting below suggested protection. OneFSperiodically checks the protection level
on the cluster, and alerts you if data falls below the recommended protection.

Protection policies
OneFS provides several protection policies to choose from when protecting a file or specifying a file pool policy.
The more nodes that you have in your cluster, up to 20 nodes, the more efficiently OneFS can store and protect data, and
the higher levels of requested protection the operating system can achieve. Depending on the configuration of your cluster and
how much data is stored, OneFS might not be able to achieve the level of protection that you request. For example, if you
have a three-node cluster that is approaching capacity, and you request +2n protection, OneFS might not be able to deliver the
requested protection.
The following table describes the available protection policies in OneFS.

Table 127. Protection Policies

Protection policy Summary
+1n Tolerate the failure of 1 drive or the failure of 1 node

Storage Pools 389

Table 127. Protection Policies (continued)
Protection policy Summary
+2d:1n Tolerate the failure of 2 drives or the failure of 1 node
+2n Tolerate the failure of 2 drives or the failure of 2 nodes
+3d:1n Tolerate the failure of 3 drives or the failure of 1 node
+3d:1n1d Tolerate the failure of 3 drives or the failure of 1 node and 1 drive
+3n Tolerate the failure of 3 drives or the failure of 3 nodes
+4d:1n Tolerate the failure of 4 drives or the failure of 1 node
+4d:2n Tolerate the failure of 4 drives or the failure of 2 nodes
+4n Tolerate the failure of 4 drives or the failure of 4 nodes
Mirrors: Duplicates, or mirrors, data over the specified number of nodes. For example, 2x results in
two copies of each data block.
2x
NOTE: Mirrors can use more data than the other protection policies, but might be
3x an effective way to protect files that are written nonsequentially or to provide faster
4x access to important files.

5x
6x
7x
8x

SSD strategies
OneFS clusters can contain nodes that include solid-state drives (SSD). OneFS autoprovisions nodes with SSDs into one or
more node pools. The SSD strategy defined in the default file pool policy determines how SSDs are used within the cluster, and
can be set to increase performance across a wide range of workflows. SSD strategies apply only to SSD storage.
You can configure file pool policies to apply specific SSD strategies as needed. When you select SSD options during the creation
of a file pool policy, you can identify the files in the OneFS cluster that require faster or slower performance. When the
SmartPools job runs, OneFS uses file pool policies to move this data to the appropriate storage pool and drive type.
The following SSD strategy options that you can set in a file pool policy are listed in order of slowest to fastest choices:

Avoid SSDs Writes all associated file data and metadata to HDDs only.
CAUTION: Use this option to free SSD space only after consulting with Dell Technologies
Support. Using this strategy can negatively affect performance.

Metadata read Writes both file data and metadata to HDDs. This is the default setting. An extra mirror of the file
acceleration metadata is written to SSDs, if available. The extra SSD mirror is included in the number of mirrors, if
any, required to satisfy the requested protection.
Metadata read/write Writes file data to HDDs and metadata to SSDs, when available. This strategy accelerates metadata
acceleration writes in addition to reads but requires about four to five times more SSD storage than the Metadata
read acceleration setting. Enabling GNA does not affect read/write acceleration.
Data on SSDs Uses SSD node pools for both data and metadata, regardless of whether global namespace
acceleration is enabled. This SSD strategy does not result in the creation of additional mirrors beyond
the normal requested protection but requires significantly increased storage requirements compared
with the other SSD strategy options.

Note the following considerations for setting and applying SSD strategies.
● To use an SSD strategy that stores metadata and/or data on SSDs, you must have SSD storage in the node pool or tier,
otherwise the strategy is ignored.
● If you specify an SSD strategy but there is no storage of the type that you specified, the strategy is ignored.

390 Storage Pools

● If you specify an SSD strategy that stores metadata and/or data on SSDs but the SSD storage is full, OneFS attempts to
spill data to HDD. If HDD storage is full, OneFS raises an out of space error.

Other SSD mirror settings

OneFS creates multiple mirrors for file system structures and, by default, stores one mirror for each of these structures on SSD.
You can specify that all mirrors for these file system structures be stored on SSD.
OneFS creates mirrors for the following file system structures:
● system B-tree
● system delta
● QAB (quota accounting block)
For each structure, OneFS creates multiple mirrors across the file system and stores at least one mirror on an SSD. Because
SSDs provide faster I/O than HDDs, OneFS can more quickly locate and access a mirror for each structure when needed.
Alternatively, you can specify that all mirrors created for those file system structures are stored on SSDs.
NOTE: The capability to change the default mirror setting for system B-tree, system delta, and QAB is available only in the
OneFS CLI, specifically in the isi storagepool settings command.

Global namespace acceleration

Global namespace acceleration (GNA) enables data on node pools without SSDs to have additional metadata mirrors on SSDs
elsewhere in the cluster. Metadata mirrors on SSDs can improve file system performance by accelerating metadata read
operations.
You can enable GNA only if 20 percent or more of the nodes in the cluster contain at least one SSD and 1.5 percent or more of
total cluster storage is SSD-based. For best results, before enabling GNA, make sure that at least 2.0 percent of total cluster
storage is SSD-based.
Even when enabled, GNA becomes inactive if the ratio of SSDs to HDDs falls below the 1.5 percent threshold, or if the
percentage of nodes containing at least one SSD falls below 20 percent. GNA is reactivated when those requirements are met
again. While GNA is inactive in such cases, existing SSD mirrors are readable, but newly written metadata does not get the extra
SSD mirror.
NOTE: Node pools with L3 cache enabled are effectively invisible for GNA purposes. All ratio calculations for GNA are
done exclusively for node pools without L3 cache enabled. So, for example, if you have six node pools on your cluster, and
three of them have L3 cache enabled, GNA is applied only to the three remaining node pools without L3 cache enabled. On
node pools with L3 cache enabled, metadata does not need an additional GNA mirror, because metadata access is already
accelerated by L3 cache.

L3 cache overview
You can configure nodes with solid state drives (SSDs) to increase cache memory and speed up file system performance across
larger working file sets.
OneFS caches file data and metadata at multiple levels. The following table describes the types of file system cache available on
a PowerScale cluster.

Table 128. File System Caches

Name Type Profile Scope Description
L1 cache RAM Volatile Local node Also known as front-end cache, holds copies of file system
metadata and data that is requested by the front-end
network through NFS, SMB, HTTP, and so on.
L2 cache RAM Volatile Global Also known as back-end cache, holds copies of file system
metadata and data on the node that owns the data.

Storage Pools 391

Table 128. File System Caches (continued)
Name Type Profile Scope Description
SmartCache Variable Non- Local node Holds any pending changes to front-end files waiting to be
volatile written to storage. This type of cache protects write-back
data through a combination of RAM and stable storage.
L3 cache SSD Non- Global Holds file data and metadata that is released from L2 cache,
volatile increasing L2 cache capacity.

NOTE: L3 cache can only be enabled on nodes that have fewer than 16 SSDs and at least a 2:1 ratio of HDDs to SSDs.

OneFS caches frequently accessed file and metadata in available random access memory (RAM). Caching enables OneFS to
optimize data protection and file system performance. When RAM cache reaches capacity, OneFS typically discards the oldest
cached data and processes new data requests by accessing the storage drives. This cycle is repeated each time the RAM cache
fills up.
You can deploy SSDs as L3 cache to reduce the cache cycling issue and further improve file system performance. L3 cache adds
to the available cache memory and provides faster access to data than hard disk drives (HDD).
As L2 cache reaches capacity, OneFS evaluates data to be released and, depending on your workflow, moves the data to L3
cache. In this way, more of the most frequently accessed data is held in cache, and overall file system performance is improved.
For example, consider a cluster with 128GB of RAM. Typically the amount of RAM available for cache fluctuates, depending
on other active processes. If 50 percent of RAM is available for cache, the cache size would be approximately 64GB. If this
same cluster had three nodes, each with two 200GB SSDs, the amount of L3 cache would be 1.2TB, approximately 18 times the
amount of available L2 cache.
L3 cache is enabled by default for new node pools. A node pool is a collection of nodes that are all the same equivalence class,
or for which compatibilities have been created. L3 cache applies only to the nodes where the SSDs reside. For the HD400 node,
which is primarily for archival purposes, L3 cache is on by default and cannot be turned off. On the HD400, L3 cache is used
only for metadata.
If you enable L3 cache on a node pool, OneFS manages all cache levels to provide optimal data protection, availability, and
performance. In addition, if a power failure occurs, the data on L3 cache is retained and still available after power is restored.
NOTE: Although some benefit from L3 cache is found in workflows with streaming and concurrent file access, L3 cache
provides the most benefit in workflows that involve random file access.

Migration to L3 cache
L3 cache is enabled by default on new nodes.
You can enable L3 cache as the default for all new node pools or manually for a specific node pool, either through the command
line or from the web administration interface. L3 cache can be enabled only on node pools with nodes that contain SSDs. When
you enable L3 cache, OneFS migrates data that is stored on the SSDs to HDD storage disks and then begins using the SSDs as
cache.
When you enable L3 cache, OneFS displays the following message:

WARNING: Changes to L3 cache configuration can have a long completion time. If this is a
concern, please contact Dell Technologies Support for more information.

You must confirm whether OneFS should proceed with the migration. After you confirm the migration, OneFS handles the
migration as a background process, and, depending on the amount of data stored on your SSDs, the process of migrating data
from the SSDs to the HDDs might take a long time.

NOTE: You can continue to administer your cluster while the data is being migrated.

392 Storage Pools

L3 cache on archive-class node pools
Some PowerScale nodes are high capacity units that are designed primarily for archival work flows, which involve a higher
percentage of data writes compared to data reads. On node pools made up of these archive-class nodes, SSDs are deployed for
L3 cache, which improves the speed of file system traversal activities such as directory lookup.
L3 cache with metadata that is only stored in SSDs provides the best performance for archiving data on these high-capacity
nodes. L3 cache is on by default, as described in the following table.

Table 129. Archive-class Nodes

Nodes Comments
HD-series For all node pools made up of HD-series nodes, L3 cache stores metadata only in SSDs and cannot
be disabled.
Generation 6 A-series For all node pools made up of Generation 6 A-series nodes, L3 cache stores metadata only in SSDs
and cannot be disabled.

Tiers
A tier is a user-defined collection of node pools that you can specify as a storage pool for files. A node pool can belong to only
one tier.
You can create tiers to assign your data to any of the node pools in the tier. For example, you can assign a collection of
node pools to a tier specifically created to store data that requires high availability and fast access. In a three-tier system, this
classification may be Tier 1. You can classify data that is used less frequently or that is accessed by fewer users as Tier-2 data.
Tier 3 usually comprises data that is seldom used and can be archived for historical or regulatory purposes.

File pool policies

File pool policies define sets of files—file pools—and where and how they are stored on your cluster. You can configure multiple
file pool policies with filtering rules that identify specific file pools and the requested protection and I/O optimization settings for
these file pools. Creating custom file pool policies requires an active SmartPools license.
The initial installation of OneFS places all files into a single file pool, which is subject to the default file pool policy. Without an
active SmartPools license, you can configure only the default file pool policy, which controls all files and stores them anywhere
on the cluster.
With an active SmartPools license, OneFS augments basic storage functions by enabling you to create custom file pool policies
that identify, protect, and control multiple file pools. With a custom file pool policy, for example, you can define and store a file
pool on a specific node pool or tier for fast access or archival purposes.
When you create a file pool policy, flexible filtering criteria enable you to specify time-based attributes for the dates that files
were last accessed, modified, or created. You can also define relative time attributes, such as 30 days before the current date.
Other filtering criteria include file type, name, size, and custom attributes. The following examples demonstrate a few ways you
can configure file pool policies:
● A file pool policy to set stronger protection on a specific set of important files.
● A file pool policy to store frequently accessed files in a node pool that provides the fastest reads or read/writes.
● A file pool policy to evaluate the last time files were accessed, so that older files are stored in a node pool best suited for
regulatory archival purposes.
When the SmartPools job runs, typically once a day, it processes file pool policies in priority order. You can edit, reorder, or
remove custom file pool policies at any time. The default file pool policy, however, is always last in priority order. Although you
can edit the default file pool policy, you cannot reorder or remove it. When custom file pool policies are in place, the settings in
the default file pool policy apply only to files that are not covered by another file pool policy.
When a new file is created, OneFS chooses a storage pool based on the default file pool policy, or, if it exists, a higher-priority
custom file pool policy that matches the file. If a new file was originally matched by the default file pool policy, and you later
create a custom file pool policy that matches the file, the file will be controlled by the new custom policy. As a result, the file
could be placed in a different storage pool the next time the SmartPools job runs.

Storage Pools 393

FilePolicy job
You can use the FilePolicy job to apply file pool policies.
The FilePolicy job supplements the SmartPools job by scanning the file system index that the File System Analytics (FSA) job
uses. You can use this job if you are already using snapshots (or FSA) and file pool policies to manage data on the cluster. The
FilePolicy job is an efficient way to keep inactive data away from the fastest tiers. Because the scan is done on the index, which
does not require many locks, ensure that you run the IndexUpdate job before running the FilePolicy job. In this way, you can
vastly reduce the number of times a file is visited before it is tiered down.
You must keep down-tiering data in ways they already have, such as file pool policies that move data based on a fixed age.
Adjust the data based on the fullness of their tiers.
To ensure that the cluster is correctly laid out and adequately protected, run the SmartPools job. Use the SmartPools job after
modifying the cluster, such as adding or removing nodes. You can also use the job for modifying the SmartPools settings (such
as default protection settings), and if a node is down.
To use this feature, you must schedule the FilePolicy job daily and continue running the SmartPools job at a lower frequency.
You can run the SmartPools job after events that may affect node pool membership.
You can use the following options when running the FilePolicy job:
● --directory-only: This option helps you to process directories and is done to redirect new file ingest.
● --policy-only: This option helps you to set policies. Make sure not to restripe.
● --ingest: This option helps you to use -directory-only and -policy-only in combination.
● --nop: This option helps you to calculate and report the work that you have done.

Managing node pools in the web administration

interface
You can manage node pools through the OneFS web administration interface. You must have the SmartPools or higher
administrative privilege.

Add node pools to a tier

You can group available node pools into tiers.
A node pool can only be added to one tier at a time. If no node pools are listed as available, they already belong to other tiers.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools page displays two groups: Tiers and pools and Compatibilities
2. In the Tiers and pools area, click x in the Action column of the tier to add the node pool to.
3. In the View Tier Details page, click Edit Tier.
The Edit Tier Details page is displayed.
4. In the Available Node Pools list, select a node pool and click Add.
The node pool moves to the Selected Node Pools for this Tier list.
5. Repeat step 4 for each node pool you intend to add. When all node pools have been added, click Save Changes.
A message informs you that the operation was successful. The View Tier Details page remains open.
6. Click Close.
The Tiers & Node Pools group now shows that the node pools are part of the tier.

Change the name or requested protection of a node pool

You can change the name or the requested protection of a node pool.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
2. In the Tiers & Node Pools group, click the name of the node pool that you want to modify.
The Node Pools Details page appears.
3. Enter a new name for the node pool, or specify a new requested protection level from the list, or do both.

394 Storage Pools

 A node pool name must start with a letter or an underscore character. A node pool name can only contain letters, numbers,
hyphens, underscores, or periods.

4. Click Save Changes.

Create a node class compatibility

OneFS automatically adds a new node of the same equivalence class to an existing node pool. For new nodes that are not
equivalence-class, you can create a node class compatibility to add these nodes to an existing node pool.
The following compatibilities are currently supported: S200/S210, X200/X210, X400/X410, and NL400/NL410. For example,
if you have a node pool made up of three or more S200 nodes, you can create a compatibility so that new S210 nodes are
automatically added to the S200 node pool.
NOTE: New nodes must have compatible RAM and the same drive configurations as their older counterparts to be
provisioned into existing node pools. If drive configurations are not the same because of SSD capacity or SSD count
differences, you can create SSD compatibilities, as well.
1. Select File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers & Node Pools and Compatibilities.
2. Click Create a compatibility.
The Create a Compatibility dialog box displays a drop-down list of compatibility types.
3. From the Compatibility Type list, select Node Class.
Two additional drop-down lists are added, First Node Class and Second Node Class.
4. In the First Node Class list, accept the current selection, or make a new selection.
5. In the Second Node Class list, accept the current selection, or make a new selection.
6. Click Create Compatibility.
A Confirm Create Compatibility dialog box appears, with one or more check boxes that you must select before
proceeding. The check boxes describe the results of the operation.
7. Select all check boxes, and then click Confirm.
The node class compatibility is created, and is also described in the Compatibilities list. For example, a message such as "The
S200 Node Class is now considered compatible with the S210 Node Class" is displayed. The result of the new compatibility
appears in the Tiers & Node Pools list. If the new nodes are node-class compatible, but remain unprovisioned, you still need
to create an SSD compatibility for the new nodes. If L3 cache is disabled on the targeted node pool, the new nodes remain
unprovisioned, and an error message is generated.

Merge compatible node pools

You can create a node class compatibility to merge multiple compatible node pools. Larger node pools, up to 20 nodes, enable
OneFS to protect data more efficiently, therefore providing more storage space for new data.
For example, if you have six S200 nodes in one node pool and three S210 nodes in a second node pool, you can create a
compatibility to merge the two node pools into one nine-node pool.
NOTE: Newer node types typically have better performance specifications than older node types, so merging them with
older node types can reduce overall performance. Also, when two node pools are merged, OneFS restripes the data, which
can take considerable time, depending on the size of your data set.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers & Node Pools and Compatibilities.
2. Click Create a compatibility.
The Create a Compatibility dialog box displays a drop-down list of compatibility types.
3. From the Compatibility Type list, select Node Class.
Two additional drop-down lists are added, First Node Class and Second Node Class.
4. In the First Node Class list, accept the current selection, or make a new selection.
5. In the Second Node Class list, accept the current selection, or make a new selection.
6. Click Create Compatibility.
A Confirm Create Compatibility dialog box appears, with one or more check boxes that you must select before
proceeding. The check boxes describe the results of the operation.
7. Select all check boxes, and then click Confirm.

Storage Pools 395

The node class compatibility is created, and is also described in the Compatibilities list. For example, a message such as "The
S200 Node Class is now considered compatible with the S210 Node Class" is displayed. The result of the new compatibility
appears in the Tiers & Node Pools list. If compatibility creation succeeds, but the node pools are not merged, you probably
need to create an SSD compatibility between the two node pools. If compatibility creation fails with an error message, L3 cache
is disabled on one or both of the node pools.

Delete a node class compatibility

You can delete a node class compatibility. As a result, any nodes that were provisioned to a node pool because of this
compatibility are removed from the node pool.
CAUTION: Deleting a node class compatibility could result in unintended consequences. For example, if you
delete a compatibility, and fewer than three compatible nodes are removed from the node pool, those nodes will
be removed from your cluster's available pool of storage. The next time the SmartPools job runs, data on those
nodes would be restriped elsewhere on the cluster, which could be a time-consuming process. If three or more
compatible nodes are removed from the node pool, these nodes will form their own node pool, and data will be
restriped. Any file pool policy pointing to the original node pool will now point to the node pool's tier, if one
existed, or, otherwise, to a new tier created by OneFS.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers & Node Pools and Compatibilities.
2. In the Compatibilities list, next to the compatibility that you want to delete, click Delete.
The Confirm Delete Compatibility dialog box appears with one or more check boxes that you must select before
proceeding.
3. Select all check boxes in the dialog box, and click Confirm.
The compatibility is deleted, and the new state of the affected nodes appears in the Tiers & Node Pools list.

Create an SSD compatibility

You can create SSD compatibilities both for capacity and count to enable new nodes to be provisioned to node pools with
different SSD specifications. SSD compatibilities can be created for the following node types: S200, S210, X200, X210, X400,
X410, NL400, and NL410.
For example, if you have a node pool made up of three S200 nodes with 100GB SSDs, and you install an S200 node with
an equal number of 200GB SSDs, the new S200 node is not autoprovisioned to the S200 node pool until you create an SSD
compatibility. If the nodes of the S200 node pool each have six SSDs, and the new S200 node has eight SSDs, you must also
create an SSD count compatibility to enable the new S200 node to be provisioned to the S200 node pool.
Similarly, if you have different generation nodes that are class-compatible, such as S200 and S210 nodes, you can create SSD
compatibilities between those node types.
1. Select File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers & Node Pools and Compatibilities.
2. Click Create a compatibility.
The Create a Compatibility dialog box displays a drop-down list of compatibility types.
3. From the Compatibility Type list, select SSD.
An additional drop-down list, Node Class, is added.
4. In the Node Class list, accept the current selection, or make a new selection, as appropriate.
5. If appropriate, also select the SSD Count Compatibility check box.
6. Click Create Compatibility.
A Confirm Create Compatibility dialog box appears, with one or more check boxes that you must select before
proceeding. The check boxes describe the results of the operation.
7. Select all check boxes, and then click Confirm.
The SSD compatibility is created and is also described in the Compatibilities list. For example, a message such as "S200 and
S210 nodes are SSD compatible" is displayed. The result of the SSD compatibility appears in the Tiers & Node Pools list, as
well. If L3 cache is turned off on any node pools that would be affected by the SSD compatibility, the SSD compatibility is not
created, and an error message is generated. To correct the situation, turn on L3 cache for those node pools.

396 Storage Pools

Delete an SSD compatibility
You can delete an SSD compatibility. If you do this, any nodes that are part of a node pool because of this compatibility are
removed from the node pool.
CAUTION: Deleting an SSD compatibility could result in unintended consequences. For example, if you delete
an SSD compatibility, and fewer than three compatible nodes are removed from a node pool as a result, these
nodes are removed from your cluster's available pool of storage. The next time the SmartPools job runs, data on
those nodes is restriped elsewhere on the cluster, which could be a time-consuming process. If three or more
compatible nodes are removed from the node pool, these nodes form their own node pool, but data is restriped.
Any file pool policy pointing to the original node pool points instead to the node pool's tier, if one existed, or,
otherwise, to a new tier created by OneFS.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers & Node Pools and Compatibilities.
2. In the Compatibilities list, next to the SSD compatibility that you want to delete, click Delete.
The Confirm Delete Compatibility dialog box appears with one or more check boxes that you must select before
proceeding. The check boxes describe the result of the operation.
3. Select all check boxes in the dialog box, and click Confirm.
The SSD compatibility is deleted, and the new state of the affected nodes appears in the Tiers & Node Pools list. For example,
a previously provisioned node is now unprovisioned.

Managing L3 cache from the web administration

interface
You can manage L3 cache globally or on specific node pools from the web administration interface. You must have the
SmartPools or higher administrative privilege. On HD400 nodes, L3 cache is turned on by default and cannot be turned off.

Set L3 cache as the default for node pools

You can set L3 cache as the default, so that when new node pools are created, L3 cache is enabled automatically.
L3 cache is only effective on nodes that include SSDs. If none of your clusters have SSD storage, there is no need to enable L3
cache as the default.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools Settings.
The Edit SmartPools Settings page appears.
2. Under Local Storage Settings, click Use SSDs as L3 Cache by default for new node pools.
3. Click Save Changes.
As you add new nodes with SSDs to your cluster, and OneFS designates new node pools, these node pools automatically have
L3 cache enabled. New node pools without SSDs do not have L3 cache enabled by default.

Set L3 cache on a specific node pool

You can turn on L3 cache for a specific node pool.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools page, showing a list of tiers and node pools, appears.
2. In the Tiers & Node Pools list, click View/Edit next to the target node pool.
The View Node Pool Details dialog box appears, showing the current settings of the node pool.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Node Pool Details dialog box appears.
4. Click the Enable L3 cache check box.
The check box is grayed out for node pools that do not have SSDs, or for which the setting cannot be changed.

Storage Pools 397

5. Click Save Changes.
The Confirm Change to L3 Cache Setting message box appears.
6. Click the Continue button.
The migration process to L3 cache begins and can take awhile, depending on the number and size of the SSDs in the node
pool. When the migration process is complete, the View Node Pool Details dialog box appears.
7. Click Close.

Restore SSDs to storage drives for a node pool

You can disable L3 cache for SSDs on a node pool and restore those SSDs to storage drives.
NOTE: On HD400 node pools, SSDs are only used for L3 cache, which is turned on by default and cannot be turned off. All
other node pools with SSDs for L3 cache can have their SSDs migrated back to storage drives.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
2. In the Tiers & Node Pools area of the SmartPools tab, select View/Edit next to the target node pool.
The View Node Pool Details dialog box appears, showing the current settings of the node pool.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Node Pool Details dialog box appears.
4. Clear the Enable L3 cache check box.
The setting is grayed out for node pools without SSDs, or for which the setting cannot be changed.
5. Click Save Changes.
The Confirm Change to L3 Cache Setting message box appears.
6. Click Continue.
The migration process to disable L3 cache begins and can take awhile, depending on the number and size of the SSDs in the
node pool. When the migration process is complete, the View Node Pool Details dialog box appears.
7. Click Close.

Managing tiers
You can move node pools into tiers to optimize file and storage management. Managing tiers requires the SmartPools or higher
administrative privilege.

Create a tier
You can group create a tier that contains one or more node pools. You can use the tier to store specific categories of files.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab appears with two sections: Tiers and pools and Compatibilities.
2. In the Tiers and pools section, click Create a tier.
3. In the Create a tier page that appears, enter a name for the tier.
4. For each node pool that you want to add to the tier, select a node pool from the Available Node Pools list, and click Add.
The node pool is moved into the Selected Node Pools for this Tier list.
5. Click Create Tier.
The Create a tier page closes, and the new tier is added to the Tiers and pools area. The node pools that you added
appear below the tier name.

Edit a tier
You can modify the name and change the node pools that are assigned to a tier.
A tier name can contain alphanumeric characters and underscores but cannot begin with a number.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two groups: Tiers and pools and Compatibilities.
2. In the Tiers and pools area, click the tier you want to edit.

398 Storage Pools

3. In the Edit Tier Details page, modify the following settings as needed:

Option Description
Tier Name To change the name of the tier, select and type over the existing name.
Node Pool Selection To change the node pool selection, select a node pool, and click either Add or Remove.
4. When you have finished editing tier settings, click Submit.

Delete a tier
You can delete a tier that has no assigned node pools.
If you want to delete a tier that does have assigned node pools, you must first remove the node pools from the tier.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays two lists: Tiers and pools and Compatibilities.
2. In the Tiers and pools list, go to the Actions column of the tier that you want to delete and click the X.
A message box asks you to confirm or cancel the operation.
3. Click Delete to confirm the operation.
The tier is removed from the Tiers and pools list.

Creating file pool policies

You can configure file pool policies to identify logical groups of files called file pools, and you can specify storage operations for
these files.
Before you can create file pool policies, you must activate a SmartPools license, and you must have the SmartPools or higher
administrative privilege.
File pool policies have two parts: file-matching criteria that define a file pool, and the actions to be applied to the file pool. You
can define file pools based on characteristics, such as file type, size, path, birth, change, and access timestamps, and combine
these criteria with Boolean operators (AND, OR).
In addition to file-matching criteria, you can identify a variety of actions to apply to the file pool. These actions include:
● Setting requested protection and data-access optimization parameters
● Identifying data and snapshot storage targets
● Defining data and snapshot SSD strategies
● Enabling or disabling SmartCache
For example, to free up disk space on your performance tier (S-series node pools), you could create a file pool policy to match
all files greater than 25 MB in size, which have not been accessed or modified for more than a month, and move them to your
archive tier (NL-series node pools).
You can configure and prioritize multiple file pool policies to optimize file storage for your particular work flows and cluster
configuration. When the SmartPools job runs, by default once a day, it applies file pool policies in priority order. When a file pool
matches the criteria defined in a policy, the actions in that policy are applied, and lower-priority custom policies are ignored for
the file pool.
After the list of custom file pool policies is traversed, if any of the actions are not applied to a file, the actions in the default file
pool policy are applied. In this way, the default file pool policy ensures that all actions apply to every file.
NOTE: You can reorder the file pool policy list at any time, but the default file pool policy is always last in the list of file pool
policies.
OneFS also provides customizable template policies that you can copy to make your own policies. These templates, however,
are only available from the OneFS web administration interface.

Storage Pools 399

Create a file pool policy
You can create a file pool policy to define a specific file set and specify SmartPools actions to be applied to the matched files.
These SmartPools actions include moving files to certain tiers or node pools, changing the requested protection levels, and
optimizing write performance and data access.
CAUTION:

If existing file pool policies direct data to a specific storage pool, do not configure other file pool policies with
anywhere for the Data storage target option. Because the specified storage pool is included when you use
anywhere, target specific storage pools to avoid unexpected results.

1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
2. Click Create a File Pool Policy.
3. In the Create a File Pool Policy dialog box, enter a policy name and, optionally, a description.
4. Specify the files to be managed by the file pool policy.
To define the file pool, you can specify file matching criteria by combining IF, AND, and OR conditions. You can define these
conditions with a number of file attributes, such as name, path, type, size, and timestamp information.
5. Specify SmartPools actions to be applied to the selected file pool.
You can specify storage and I/O optimization settings to be applied.
6. Click Create Policy.
The file pool policy is created and applied when the next scheduled SmartPools system job runs. By default, this job runs once a
day, but you also have the option to start the job immediately.

File-matching options for file pool policies

You can configure a file pool policy for files that match specific criteria.
The following file-matching options can be specified when you create or edit a file pool policy.
NOTE:

OneFS supports UNIX shell-style (glob) pattern matching for file name attributes and paths.
The following table lists the file attributes that you can use to define a file pool policy.

Table 130. File Attribute Specification

File attribute Specifies

Name Includes or excludes files based on the file name.

You can specify whether to include or exclude full or partial names that contain
specific text. Wildcard characters are allowed.

Path Includes or excludes files based on the file path.

You can specify whether to include or exclude full or partial paths that contain
specified text. You can also include the wildcard characters *, ?, and [ ].

File type Includes or excludes files based on one of the following file-system object types:
● File
● Directory
● Other

Size Includes or excludes files based on their size.

NOTE: File sizes are represented in multiples of 1024, not 1000.

Modified Includes or excludes files based on when the file was last modified.

400 Storage Pools

Table 130. File Attribute Specification (continued)
File attribute Specifies

In the web administration interface, you can specify a relative date and time,
such as "older than 2 weeks," or a specific date and time, such as "before
January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

Created Includes or excludes files based on when the file was created.
In the web administration interface, you can specify a relative date and time,
such as "older than 2 weeks," or a specific date and time, such as "before
January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

Metadata changed Includes or excludes files based on when the file metadata was last modified.
This option is available only if the global access-time-tracking option of the
cluster is enabled.
In the web administration interface, you can specify a relative date and time,
such as "older than 2 weeks," or a specific date and time, such as "before
January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.

Accessed Includes or excludes files based on when the file was last accessed based on the
following units of time:
In the web administration interface, you can specify a relative date and time,
such as "older than 2 weeks," or a specific date and time, such as "before
January 1, 2012." Time settings are based on a 24-hour clock.
NOTE: Because it affects performance, access time tracking as a file pool
policy criterion is disabled by default.

File attribute Includes or excludes files based on a custom user-defined attribute.

Valid wildcard characters

You can combine wildcard characters with file-matching options to define a file pool policy.
OneFS supports UNIX shell-style (glob) pattern matching for file name attributes and paths.
The following table lists the valid wildcard characters that you can combine with file-matching options to define a file pool
policy.

Table 131. Wildcard Character Specifications

Wildcard Description
* Matches any string in place of the asterisk.
For example, m* matches movies and m123.

[a-z] Matches any characters that are contained in the brackets, or a range of characters
separated by a hyphen. For example, b[aei]t matches bat, bet, and bit, and 1[4-7]2
matches 142, 152, 162, and 172.
You can exclude characters within brackets by following the first bracket with an exclamation
mark. For example, b[!ie] matches bat but not bit or bet.
You can match a bracket within a bracket if it is either the first or last character. For
example, [[c]at matches cat and [at.
You can match a hyphen within a bracket if it is either the first or last character. For
example, car[-s] matches cars and car-.

? Matches any character in place of the question mark. For example, t?p matches tap, tip,
and top.

Storage Pools 401

SmartPools settings
SmartPools settings include directory protection, global namespace acceleration, L3 cache, virtual hot spare, spillover, requested
protection management, and I/O optimization management.

Table 132. SmartPools Settings

Settings in Web Admin Settings in CLI Description Notes
Increase directory --protect-directories-one- Increases the amount of This setting should be enabled
protection to a higher level-higher protection for directories at a (the default).
level than its contents higher level than the directories
When this setting is disabled, the
and files that they contain, so
directory that contains a file pool
that data that is not lost can still
is protected according to your
be accessed.
protection-level settings, but the
When device failures result in devices that are used to store
data loss (for example, three the directory and the file may
drives or two nodes in a +2:1 not be the same. There is the
policy), enabling this setting potential to lose nodes with file
ensures that intact data is still data intact but not be able to
accessible. access the data because those
nodes contained the directory.
As an example, consider a cluster
that has a +2 default file
pool protection setting and no
additional file pool policies. OneFS
directories are always mirrored,
so they are stored at 3x, which is
the mirrored equivalent of the +2
default.
This configuration can sustain
a failure of two nodes before
data loss or inaccessibility. If this
setting is enabled, all directories
are protected at 4x. If the cluster
experiences three node failures,
although individual files may be
inaccessible, the directory tree is
available and provides access to
files that are still accessible.
In addition, if another file pool
policy protects some files at
a higher level, these too are
accessible in the event of a
three-node failure.

Enable global --global-namespace- Specifies whether to allow per- This setting is available only if
namespace acceleration acceleration-enabled file metadata to use SSDs in the 20 percent or more of the nodes
node pool. in the cluster contain SSDs and
● When disabled, restricts per- at least 1.5 percent of the total
file metadata to the storage cluster storage is SSD-based.
pool policy of the file, except If nodes are added to or removed
in the case of spillover. This is from a cluster, and the SSD
the default setting. thresholds are no longer satisfied,
● When enabled, allows per-file GNA becomes inactive. GNA
metadata to use the SSDs in remains enabled, so that when
any node pool. the SSD thresholds are met again,
GNA is reactivated.
NOTE: Node pools with L3
cache enabled are invisible
for GNA purposes. All ratio

402 Storage Pools

Table 132. SmartPools Settings (continued)
Settings in Web Admin Settings in CLI Description Notes

calculations for GNA are done

exclusively for node pools
without L3 cache enabled.

Use SSDs as L3 Cache --ssd-l3-cache-default- For node pools that include L3 cache is enabled by default
by default for new node enabled solid state drives, deploy the on new node pools. When you
pools SSDs as L3 cache. L3 cache enable L3 cache on an existing
extends L2 cache and speeds up node pool, OneFS performs a
file system performance across migration, moving any existing
larger working file sets. data on the SSDs to other
locations on the cluster.
OneFS manages all cache
levels to provide optimal
data protection, availability, and
performance. If there is a power
failure, the data on L3 cache is
retained and still available after
power is restored.

Virtual Hot Spare --virtual-hot-spare-deny- Reserves a minimum amount of If you configure both the
writes space in the node pool that can minimum number of virtual drives
--virtual-hot-spare-hide- be used for data repair in the and a minimum percentage of
spare event of a drive failure. total disk space when you
configure reserved VHS space,
--virtual-hot-spare-limit- To reserve disk space for use as
the enforced minimum value
drives a virtual hot spare, select from
satisfies both requirements.
the following options:
--virtual-hot-spare-limit- If this setting is enabled and
percent ● Ignore reserved disk space
Deny new data writes is
when calculating available
disabled, it is possible for the file
free space. Subtracts the
system utilization to be reported
space that is reserved for
at more than 100%.
the virtual hot spare when
calculating available free
space.
● Deny data writes to
reserved disk space.
Prevents write operations
from using reserved disk
space.
● VHS Space Reserved. You
can reserve a minimum
number of virtual drives (1-4),
and a minimum percentage of
total disk space (0-20%).

Enable global spillover --spillover-enabled Specifies how to handle write ● When enabled, redirects write
operations to a node pool that is operations from a node pool
not writable. that is not writable either
to another node pool or
anywhere on the cluster (the
default).
● When disabled, returns a
disk space error for write
operations to a node pool that
is not writable.
Spillover Data Target --spillover-target Specifies another storage pool to When spillover is enabled, but it
target when a storage pool is not is important that data writes do
--spillover-anywhere
writable.

Storage Pools 403

Table 132. SmartPools Settings (continued)
Settings in Web Admin Settings in CLI Description Notes

not fail, select anywhere for the

Spillover Data Target setting,
even if file pool policies send data
to specific pools.

Manage protection --automatically-manage- When this setting is enabled, When Apply to files with
settings protection SmartPools manages requested manually-managed protection
protection levels automatically. is enabled, this option overwrites
any protection settings that were
configured through File System
Explorer or the command-line
interface.

Manage I/O --automatically-manage- When enabled, uses SmartPools When Apply to files
optimization settings io-optimization technology to manage I/O with manually-managed I/O
optimization. optimization settings is
enabled, this option overwrites
any I/O optimization settings
that were configured through
File System Explorer or the
command-line interface

None --ssd-qab-mirrors Either one mirror or all mirrors for Improve quota accounting
the quota account block (QAB) performance by placing all QAB
are stored on SSDs mirrors on SSDs for faster I/O.
By default, only one QAB mirror is
stored on the SSD.
None --ssd-system-btree- Either one mirror or all mirrors for Increase file system performance
mirrors the system B-tree are stored on by placing all system B-tree
SSDs mirrors on SSDs for faster
access. Otherwise only one
system B-tree mirror is stored on
SSD.
None --ssd-system-delta- Either one mirror or all mirrors for Increase file system performance
mirrors the system delta are stored on by placing all system delta mirrors
SSDs on SSDs for faster access.
Otherwise only one system delta
mirror is stored on an SSD.

Managing file pool policies

You can modify, reorder, copy, and remove custom file pool policies. Although you can modify the default file pool policy, you
cannot reorder or remove it.
To manage file pool policies, you can perform the following tasks:
● Modify file pool policies
● Modify the default file pool policy
● Copy file pool policies
● Use a file pool policy template
● Reorder file pool policies
● Delete file pool policies

404 Storage Pools

Configure default file pool protection settings
You can configure default file pool protection settings. The default settings are applied to any file that is not covered by another
file pool policy.
CAUTION: If existing file pool policies direct data to a specific storage pool, do not add or modify a file pool
policy to the anywhere option for the Data storage target option. Target a specific file pool instead.

1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
2. In the File Pool Policies tab, next to Default Policy in the list, click View/Edit.
The View Default Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Edit Policy.
The Edit Default Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Apply SmartPools Actions to Selected Files section, choose the storage settings that you want to apply as the
default for Storage Target, Snapshot Storage Target, and Requested Protection.
5. Click Save Changes, and then click Close.
The next time the SmartPools job runs, the settings that you selected are applied to any file that is not covered by another file
pool policy.

Default file pool requested protection settings

Default protection settings include specifying the data storage target, snapshot storage target, requested protection, and SSD
strategy for files that are filtered by the default file pool policy.

Table 133. Default Protection Settings

Settings (Web Settings (CLI) Description Notes
Admin)
Storage Target --data-storage- Specifies the storage pool (node pool or tier) that NOTE: If GNA is not
target you want to target with this file pool policy. enabled and the storage
--data-ssd-strategy pool that you choose to
CAUTION:
target does not contain
If existing file pool policies direct data to SSDs, you cannot define
a specific storage pool, do not configure an SSD strategy.
other file pool policies with anywhere for
Use SSDs for metadata
the Data storage target option. Because
read acceleration writes
the specified storage pool is included when both file data and
you use anywhere, target-specific storage metadata to HDD storage
pools to avoid unintentional file storage pools but adds an
locations. additional SSD mirror if
possible to accelerate read
Select one of the following options to define your performance. Uses HDDs
SSD strategy: to provide reliability and
an extra metadata mirror
Use SSDs for Default. Write both file to SSDs, if available, to
metadata read data and metadata to improve read performance.
acceleration HDDs and metadata Recommended for most
to SSDs. Accelerates uses.
metadata reads only.
Uses less SSD space than When you select Use SSDs
the Metadata read/ for metadata read/write
write acceleration acceleration , the strategy
setting. uses SSDs, if available in
the storage target, for
Use SSDs for Write metadata to SSD performance and reliability.
metadata read/write pools. Uses more SSD The extra mirror can be
acceleration space than Metadata from a different storage
read acceleration, but pool using GNA enabled or
accelerates metadata from the same node pool.
reads and writes.

Storage Pools 405

Table 133. Default Protection Settings (continued)
Settings (Web Settings (CLI) Description Notes
Admin)

Use SSDs for data Neither the Use SSDs

Use SSDs for both data
and metadata for data and metadata
and metadata. Regardless
strategy nor the Use
of whether global
SSDs for data and
namespace acceleration
metadata strategy result in
is enabled, any SSD
the creation of additional
blocks reside on the
mirrors beyond the normal
storage target if there is
requested protection. Both
room.
file data and metadata
Avoid SSDs are stored on SSDs if
Write all associated file
available within the file pool
data and metadata to
policy. This option requires
HDDs only.
a significant amount of SSD
CAUTION: storage.
Use this to
free SSD space
only after
consulting with
Dell Technologies
Support; the
setting can
negatively affect
performance.

Snapshot storage --snapshot-storage- Specifies the storage pool that you want to target Notes for data storage
target target for snapshot storage with this file pool policy. The target apply to snapshot
--snapshot-ssd- settings are the same as those for data storage storage target
strategy target, but apply to snapshot data.

Requested --set-requested- Default of storage pool. Assign the default To change the requested
protection protection requested protection of the storage pool to the protection , select a new
filtered files. value from the list.
Specific level. Assign a specified requested
protection to the filtered files.

Configure default I/O optimization settings

You can configure default I/O optimization settings.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
2. In the File Pool Policies tab, next to Default Policy in the list, click View/Edit.
The View Default Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Edit Policy.
The Edit Default Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Apply SmartPools Actions to Selected Files section, under I/O Optimization Settings,choose the settings that you
want to apply as the default for Write Performance and Data Access Pattern.
5. Click Save Changes, and then click Close.
The next time the SmartPools job runs, the settings that you selected are applied to any file that is not covered by another file
pool policy.

406 Storage Pools

Default file pool I/O optimization settings
You can manage the I/O optimization settings that are used in the default file pool policy, which can include files with manually
managed attributes.
To allow SmartPools to overwrite optimization settings that were configured using File System Explorer or the isi set
command, select the Including files with manually-managed I/O optimization settings option in the Default Protection
Settings group. In the CLI, use the --automatically-manage-io-optimization option with the isi storagepool
settings modify command.

Table 134. Default I/O Optimization Settings

Setting (Web Setting (CLI) Description Notes
Admin)
Write Performance --enable-coalescer Enables or disables Enable SmartCache is the recommended setting for
SmartCache (also known optimal write performance. With asynchronous writes,
as the coalescer). the PowerScale server buffers writes in memory.
However, if you want to disable this buffering, It is
recommended that you configure your applications to
use synchronous writes. If that is not possible, disable
SmartCache.
Data Access --data-access- Defines the optimization Files and directories use a concurrent access pattern
Pattern pattern settings for accessing by default. To optimize performance, select the
concurrent, streaming, or pattern that is dictated by your workflow. For example,
random data types. a workflow heavy in video editing should be set
to Optimize for streaming access. That workflow
would suffer if the data access pattern was set to
Optimize for random access.

Modify a file pool policy

You can modify a file pool policy.
CAUTION: If existing file pool policies direct data to a specific storage pool, do not configure other file pool
policies with anywhere for the Data storage target option. Because the specified storage pool is included when
you use anywhere, target specific storage pools to avoid unintentional file storage locations.

1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
2. In the File Pool Policies list, next to the policy you want to modify, click View/Edit.
The View File Pool Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Edit Policy.
The Edit File Pool Policy Details dialog box is displayed.
4. Modify the policy settings, and then click Save Changes.
5. Click Close in the View File Pool Policy Details dialog box.
Changes to the file pool policy are applied when the next SmartPools job runs. You can also start the SmartPools job manually to
execute the policy immediately.

Prioritize a file pool policy

You can change the priority of custom file pool policies. File pool policies are evaluated in descending order according to their
position in the file pool policies list.
By default, new policies are inserted immediately above the default file pool policy, which is always last in the list and therefore
lowest in priority. You can give a custom policy higher or lower priority by moving it up or down in the list.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
The File Pool Policies tab displays two lists: File Pool Policies and Policy Templates.
2. In the File Pool Policies list, in the Order column, click an arrow icon next to a policy to move it up or down in the priority
order.

Storage Pools 407

3. Repeat the above step for each policy whose priority you want to change.
When the SmartPools system job runs, it processes the file pool policies in priority order. The default file pool policy is applied to
all files that are not matched by any other file pool policy.

Create a file pool policy from a template

You can create a new file pool policy from a policy template. The templates are pre-configured for typical work flows, such as
archiving older files or managing virtual machines (.vmdk files).
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
The File Pool Policies tab provides two lists: File Pool Policies and Policy Templates.
2. In the Policy Templates list, next to the template name that you want to use, click View/Use Template.
The View File Pool Policy Template Details dialog box opens.
3. Click Use Template.
The Create a File Pool Policy dialog box opens.
4. Required: Specify a policy name and description, and modify any of the policy settings.
5. Click Save Changes.
The new custom policy is added to the File Pool Policies list directly above the default policy.

Delete a file pool policy

You can delete any file pool policy except the default policy.
When you delete a file pool policy, its file pool is controlled either by another file pool policy or by the default policy the next time
the SmartPools job runs.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > File Pool Policies.
The File Pool Policies tab displays two lists: File Pool Policies and Policy Templates.
2. In the File Pool Policies list, next to the policy that you want to delete, click Delete.
3. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.
The file pool policy is removed from the File Pool Policies list.

Monitoring storage pools

You can access information on storage pool health and usage.
The following information is available:
● File pool policy health
● SmartPools health, including tiers, node pools, and subpools
● For each storage pool, percentage of HDD and SSD disk space usage
● SmartPools job status

Monitor storage pools

You can view the status of file pool policies, SmartPools, and settings.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > Summary.
The Summary tab displays two areas: the Status list and the Local Storage Usage graph.
2. In the Status list, check the status of policies, SmartPools, and SmartPools settings.
3. Optional: If the status of an item is other than Good, you can click View Details to view and fix any issues.
4. In the Local Storage Usage area, view the statistics associated with each node pool.
If node pool usage is unbalanced, for example, you might want to consider whether to modify your file pool policies.

408 Storage Pools

View subpools health
OneFS exposes unhealthy subpools in a list so that you can correct any issues.
A subpool is otherwise known as a disk pool, a collection of disks that is part of a node pool.
1. Click File System > Storage Pools > SmartPools.
The SmartPools tab displays three groupings: Tiers & Node Pools, Compatibilities, and Subpools Health.
2. In the Subpools Health area, review details of, and mitigate, any unhealthy subpools.

View the results of a SmartPools job

You can review detailed results from the last time the SmartPools job ran.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Reports.
The Jobs Reports tab displays a list of job reports.
2. In the Job Reports list, in the Type column, find the latest SmartPools job, and click View Details.
The View Job Report Details dialog box opens, displaying the job report.
3. Scroll through the report to see the results of each file pool policy.
4. Click Close in the View Job Report Details dialog box when you are finished.

Storage Pools 409

 29
Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze
(FSA)
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• FSAnalyze (FSA)
• Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze (FSA)

FSAnalyze (FSA)
The FSAnalyze job in OneFS gathers file system analytic information.
The FSAnalyze (FSA) job is used for namespace analysis. You can run FSA on demand or on a schedule through the command
line interface and PAPI. A successful FSA job produces analysis result. You may run FSA at least once a day.
Disk usage is a component of FSA that adds up the overall usage for any given directory. It gathers disk usage efficiently and
stores the results in a results database table, one row for every directory. FSA PAPI directory information endpoint exposes
stored result. The result for a directory may be compared with the result at a different time using the same PAPI endpoint. You
can run FSA on demand or on a schedule through the command line interface and PAPI. A successful FSA job produces analysis
result. You may run FSA at least once a day.
The FSA job runs in two modes. The SCAN mode scans the OneFS file system entirely. The INDEX mode is the default mode and
is more efficient. It relies on snapshots and change lists, updates, and walks a global metadata index.
FSA or IndexUpdate job is used to build the metadata index. The FSA job running in INDEX mode generates FSA Index.
IndexUpdate job generates Cluster Index. The disk usage component walks the metadata index.

Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze (FSA)

You can store a subset of files remotely.
A storage policy can lead to a subset of files that are stored remotely. The metadata or namespace is stored on a PowerScale
cluster and the data is stored on a remote machine, hosted by a cloud storage provider. This mechanism helps you to monitor
the usage of cloud and on-premises resources through the cluster.
The pool-based tree reporting feature is used to classify directory usage by storage level. The disk usage component is extended
to add up information by node pool. A file that is stored in cloud is tagged with a special node pool. The database table is
extended to have a node pool column, and a given directory has usage that the node pool records. The report for directory pool
usage can be accessed using the Job ID and PAPI endpoints.
The feature has storage impact from the running FSA and IndexUpdate jobs, which are otherwise optional. Snapshots are taken
and kept for the duration while the FSA job runs. FSA and IndexUpdate jobs creates and manages metadata indexes to track file
system metadata. A new FSA database is created for every FSA result that is generated.
The disk usage table, the biggest table within FSA database grows linearly with the number of node pools.

410 Pool-based tree reporting in FSAnalyze (FSA)

 30
System jobs
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• System jobs overview
• System jobs library
• Job operation
• Job performance impact
• Job priorities
• Managing system jobs
• Managing impact policies
• Viewing job reports and statistics

System jobs overview

The most critical function of OneFS is maintaining the integrity of data on your PowerScale cluster. Other important system
maintenance functions include monitoring and optimizing performance, detecting and mitigating drive and node failures, and
freeing up available space.
Maintenance functions use system resources and can take hours to run. This section describes the system maintenance
functions, called jobs and these jobs are managed by the Job Engine. Jobs run in the background.
NOTE: Job Engine does not manage all maintenance function jobs: system components such as SyncIQ and CloudPools
manage some maintenance functions. For example, SyncIQ creates jobs to synchronize source and target content, and
CloudPools creates jobs to upload and download data to and from the cloud.
The time that it takes for a job to run can vary depending on several factors, including:
● Other system jobs that are running.
● Other processes that are taking up CPU and I/O cycles while the job is running.
● The configuration of your cluster
● The size of your dataset
● How long since the last iteration of the job was run.
It is recommended that you have no more than three jobs running simultaneously.
Job Engine evaluates jobs to enable higher priority jobs and administrator tasks to proceed. Jobs have at least one phase and
each phase accomplishes something different. Job evaluation per phase includes:
● Ensuring that jobs that have the same exclusion sets do not run simultaneously.
● Running jobs at different priority and impact levels
● Temporarily suspending jobs (with no loss of progress)
If a power failure occurs, the Job Engine checkpoint system resumes jobs as close as possible to the point at which they were
interrupted. The checkpoint system monitors the tasks in the current job phase until they are completed. When the cluster is
back online and available, Job Engine resumes the job phase from the last checkpoint.
As a system administrator, through the Job Engine service, you can monitor, schedule, run, terminate, and apply other controls
to system maintenance jobs. The Job Engine provides statistics and reporting tools that you can use to determine how long
different system jobs take to run in your OneFS environment.

NOTE: To initiate any Job Engine tasks, you must have the role of SystemAdmin in the OneFS system.

System jobs 411

System jobs library
OneFS contains a library of system jobs that run in the background to help maintain your PowerScale cluster.
By default, system jobs are categorized as either manual or scheduled. You can run any job manually, and you can create a
schedule for most jobs according to your workflow. Some jobs are automatically started by other services in OneFS, like the
snapshotdelete job. Typically such jobs have mandatory input arguments, such as the Treedelete job. In addition, OneFS starts
some jobs automatically when particular system conditions arise. For example, FlexProtect or FlexProtectLin start when a drive
is smartfailed and there is no down device, to allow the job to reprotect the data.
The lower the priority value, the higher the job priority. For example, a job with priority value 1 has a higher priority than a job
with priority value 2 or higher.
The default protection, +2:+1, enables all jobs to run during a scan if there is no more than one failed device in each disk pool.
(FlexProtect ad FlexProtectLin continue to run even if there are failed devices.) OneFS does not check file protection. If you
have files with no protection setting, the job can fail.

Table 135. System job library

Job name Description Exclusion Impact Priority Operation
Set Policy
AutoBalance Rebalances disk space usage in a disk pool. Restripe Low 4 Manual
AutoBalanceLin OneFS checks the
[Link].lin_based_jobs setting
to determine whether to run AutoBalance
(FALSE) or AutoBalanceLin (TRUE).
JobEngine starts a rebalance job if there is
an imbalance of 5% of more between any
two drives in the same disk pool.
If MultiScan is enabled, AutoBalance or
AutoBalanceLin are run as part of MultiScan,
or automatically by the system when a
device joins (or rejoins) the cluster.
If none of these jobs are enabled, no
rebalancing is done.
AutoBalance is most efficient in clusters
that contain only hard disk drives (HDDs).
AutoBalanceLin is most efficient in clusters
when file system metadata is stored on solid
state drives (SSDs).
AVScan Performs an anti-virus scan on all files using None Low 6 Manual
an external anti-virus server, such as a
CAVA anti-virus server. Scans are scheduled
independently by the AV system, or run
manually.
ChangelistCreate Creates a list of changes between two None Low 5 Manual
snapshots with matching root paths. You
can specify these snapshots from the CLI.
CloudPoolsLin Performs a LIN-based scan for files that None Low 6 Manual
are managed by CloudPools. If a CloudPools
policy matches a given LIN, it either archives
or recalls the cloud files.
CloudPoolsTreewalk Performs a treewalk scan on a given file None Low 6 Manual
path to identify files to be managed by
CloudPools.
Collect Reclaims free space from previously Mark Low 4 Manual
unavailable nodes or drives. Collect is a
"mark and sweep" garbage collector: it

412 System jobs

Table 135. System job library (continued)
Job name Description Exclusion Impact Priority Operation
Set Policy
marks valid blocks in the first two phases
of its run, then reclaims all blocks that are
marked in-use but not marked. Runs as part
of MultiScan, or automatically by the system
when a device joins (or rejoins) the cluster.
ComplianceStoreDelete Scan for, and unlink, expired files in None Low 6 Scheduled
compliance stores. By default, runs on the
second Saturday of each month at 12am.
This job can also be run manually.
Dedupe* Scans a directory for redundant data blocks Dedupe Low 4 Manual
and deduplicates all redundant data that is
Restripe
stored in the directory. Available only if you
activate a SmartDedupe license.
DedupeAssessment Scans a directory for redundant data blocks Dedupe Low 6 Manual
and reports an estimate of the amount of
Restripe
space that could be saved by deduplicating
the directory.
DomainMark Associates a path, and the contents of that None Low 5 Manual
path, with a domain.
DomainTag Performs policy domain updates. Restripe Low 6 Manual
EsrsToDtcsMigration Migrate from obsolete ESRS to Dell None Low 5 Automatic after
Technologies connectivity services. upgrade is
committed.
FilePolicy Updates the file policies so that SmartPools Restripe Low 5 N/A
jobs can move the files where they should
FilePolicy
be.
Index

FlexProtect Scan the file system after a device failure to Restripe Medium 1 Manual
ensure that all files remain protected.
FlexProtectLin
OneFS checks the
[Link].lin_based_jobs setting
to determine whether to run FlexProtect or
FlexProtectLin.
FlexProtect and FlexProtectLin continue to
run even if there are failed devices, but not
devices that are down.
Depending on the size of your dataset, this
process can last for an extended period. The
cluster is said to be in a degraded state until
FlexProtect (or FlexProtectLin) finishes its
work. If other system jobs cannot be started
or have been paused, run the isi job
status command to see if a "Cluster Is
Degraded" message appears.
FlexProtect is most efficient on clusters
that contain only HDDs. FlexProtectLin is
most efficient when file system metadata is
stored on SSDs.
NOTE: Unlike HDDs and SSDs that
are used for storage, when an SSD
used for L3 cache fails, the drive
state should immediately change to

System jobs 413

Table 135. System job library (continued)
Job name Description Exclusion Impact Priority Operation
Set Policy

REPLACE without a FlexProtect job

running. An SSD drive that is used
for L3 cache contains only cache data
that does not have to be protected
by FlexProtect. After the drive state
changes to REPLACE, you can pull and
replace the failed SSD.

FSAnalyze* Gathers and reports information about all None Low 1 Scheduled
files and directories beneath the /ifs path.
This job requires you to activate an InsightIQ
license. Reports from this job are used by
InsightIQ users for system analysis purposes.
For more information, see the PowerScale
InsightIQ User Guide.
IndexUpdate Updates the file index which the FSA and None Low 5 Manual
FilePolicy jobs digest. This job should be run
periodically, before running any other jobs.
IntegrityScan Verifies file system integrity. Mark Medium 1 Manual
MediaScan Locates and clears media-level errors from Restripe Low 8 Scheduled
disks to ensure that all data remains
protected.
This job is scheduled to run the first
Saturday of every month, at 12 a.m.

MultiScan Performs the work of the AutoBalanceLin Restripe Low 4 Manual

and Collect jobs. Runs automatically on
Mark
group changes, including storage changes,
when a device comes back online or was
added to the cluster. The job engine
evaluates if there are unbalanced disk
pools, or if the cluster would benefit from
a garbage collector. If either of these
conditions are true, MultiScan automatically
starts. Multiscan runs the Collect job part
only when started manually, or after a
certain amount of time after the last
garbage collector, and when there is a
high probability that OneFS leaked blocks.
MultiScan always rebalances.
PasswordMigration When OneFS is upgraded from an older None Low 3 Automatic after
version, this job migrates passwords from upgrade is
the less secure to the more secure committed.
database.
PermissionRepair Uses a template file or directory as the basis None Low 5 Manual
for permissions to set on a target file or
directory. The target directory must always
be subordinate to the /ifs path. This job
must be manually started.
QuotaScan* Updates quota accounting for domains None Low 6 Manual
created on an existing file tree. Available
only if you activate a SmartQuotas license.
This job should be run manually in off-hours
after setting up all quotas, and whenever
setting up new quotas.

414 System jobs

Table 135. System job library (continued)
Job name Description Exclusion Impact Priority Operation
Set Policy
SetProtectPlus This job applies a default file policy across Restripe Low 6 Manual
the cluster. Runs only if a SmartPools
license is not active.
ShadowStoreDelete Frees up space that is associated with None Low 2 Scheduled
shadow stores. Shadow stores are hidden
files that are referenced by cloned and
deduplicated files.
ShadowStoreProtect Protects shadow stores that are referenced Restripe Low 6 Scheduled
by a logical i-node (LIN) with a higher level
of protection.
SmartPools* Enforces SmartPools file pool policies. Restripe Low 6 Scheduled
Available only if you activate a SmartPools
license. This job runs on a regularly
scheduled basis, and may automatically run
after a change is made. For example, after
creating a compatibility that merges node
pools.
SmartPoolsTree* Enforce SmartPools file policies on a Restripe Medium 5 Manual
subtree. Available only if you activate a
SmartPools license.
SnapRevert Reverts an entire snapshot back to head. None Low 5 Manual
SnapshotDelete Creates free space that is associated with None Medium 2 Manual
deleted snapshots. Triggered by the system
when you mark snapshots for deletion.
TreeDelete Deletes a specified file path in the /ifs None Medium 4 Manual
directory. TreeDelete is equivalent to rm
-rf but scales cluster-wide.

Undedupe Undedupe undoes the work that the dedupe Dedupe Medium 6 Manual
job performed, potentially increasing disk
Restripe
space usage.
Upgrade Upgrades the file system after a OneFS Restripe Medium 3 Manual
upgrade.
NOTE: The Upgrade job should be
run only when you are updating your
cluster with a major software version.
For complete information, see the
PowerScale OneFS Upgrade Planning
and Process Guide.

WormQueue Processes the WORM queue, which tracks None Low 6 Scheduled
the commit times for WORM files. After
a file is committed to WORM state, it is
removed from the queue.
* Available only if you activate an additional license.

Job operation
OneFS includes system maintenance jobs that run to ensure that your PowerScale cluster performs at peak health.
Through the Job Engine, OneFS runs a subset of these jobs automatically, as needed, to:
● Ensure file and data integrity.

System jobs 415

● Check for and mitigate drive and node failures.
● Optimize free space.
For other jobs, such as Dedupe, you can use Job Engine to start them manually or schedule them to run automatically at regular
intervals. Job Engine will not start a scheduled job if the job is running. The scheduled job starts after the running instance
finishes.
The Job Engine runs system maintenance jobs in the background and prevents jobs within the same classification (exclusion set)
from running simultaneously. The two most common exclusion sets that are enforced are: restripe and mark.
Restripe job types are:
● AutoBalance
● AutoBalanceLin
● DomainTag
● FilePolicy
● FlexProtect
● FlexProtectLin
● MediaScan
● MultiScan
● SetProtectPlus
● ShadowStoreProtect
● SmartPools
● SmartPoolsTree
● Upgrade
Mark job types are:
● Collect
● IntegrityScan
● MultiScan
MultiScan is a member of both the restripe and mark exclusion sets. You cannot change the exclusion set parameter for a job
type.
The Job Engine is sensitive to job priority. It is recommended that you have no more than three jobs of any priority running
simultaneously. Job priority is denoted as 1 through 10, with 1 being the highest and 10 being the lowest. The system uses job
priority when there is a conflict among running or queued jobs. For example, suppose that you manually start a job that has a
higher priority than three other jobs that are already running. Job Engine pauses the lowest-priority active job, runs the new job,
then restarts the older job at the point at which it was paused. Or, suppose that you start a job within the restripe exclusion set,
and another restripe job is already running. The system uses priority to determine which job should run (or remain running) and
which job should be paused (or remain paused).
Other job parameters determine whether jobs are enabled, their performance impact, and schedule. As a system administrator,
you can accept the job defaults or adjust these parameters to meet your requirements.
When a job starts, the Job Engine gathers all the tasks to be performed, and distributes them across the nodes of your cluster.
At any given time, one task belongs to one node. Multiple nodes do not share the work of one task. One node acts as job
coordinator. The job coordinator tracks the tasks in progress. It works with the other nodes to load-balance the work according
to the impact of the current job as determined by its policy: requested or configured. This distribution ensures that the tasks run
in parallel and the load is distributed throughout the cluster.
A job is a series of phases and each phase, a series of tasks. A task is completed when there are no more items to perform for
that task. Each node reports its task status to the job engine coordinator after the task is complete. The job engine coordinator
merges the task results into the job results, updates the progress of the job, and stops tracking this task. When there are no
more tasks to track, the phase is complete.
Checkpoints are taken periodically: when a job sends results or when the job is paused. The default checkpoint interval is 30
seconds. Some jobs request checkpoints at points of significant progress as well. If there is a power outage or if a job is paused,
the job can be restarted from the point at which it was interrupted. This is important because some jobs can take hours or even
days to run and can use considerable system resources.

Related references
System jobs library

416 System jobs

Job performance impact
The Job Engine service uses impact policies to monitor the impact of maintenance jobs on system performance. You can
manage the impact policies to determine when a job can run and the system resources that it consumes.
Job Engine monitors maintenance jobs to ensure that they do not interfere with regular cluster I/O activity or system
administration tasks. Job Engine provides default impact policies that you can use but not modify, as shown in the following
table.

Table 136. Job Performance Impact

Impact policy Allowed to run Resource consumption

LOW Any time of day. Low

MEDIUM Any time of day. Medium

HIGH Any time of day. High

OFF_HOURS Outside of business hours. Low

Business hours are defined as 9AM
to 5PM, Monday through Friday.
OFF_HOURS is paused during
business hours.

If your workflow requires an impact policy different from the defaults, you can create a custom policy with new settings.
Jobs with a low impact policy have the least impact on available CPU and disk I/O resources. Jobs with a high impact policy
have a significant impact. Job Engine limits the number of tasks that can process in parallel according to the impact policy.
However, if the impact of a job is under the impact limits, Job Engine can increase the number of tasks that are in process.
CAUTION: Job Engine can use more CPU and I/O even if doing so delays other system activities. Requesting a
HIGH impact for a job can be disruptive to the cluster and can affect the client connection.

Related concepts
Managing impact policies

Job priorities
Job priorities determine the precedence of a job when more than the maximum number of jobs attempt to run simultaneously.
The Job Engine assigns a priority value from 1 to 10 to every job, with 1 the most important and 10 the least important.
You can configure the maximum number of jobs that can run simultaneously. It is recommended that you run no more than
three jobs simultaneously. If more than the configured maximum number of jobs of different exclusion sets attempt to run
simultaneously, Job Engine manages priorities as follows:
● Suppose that the maximum number of jobs are running and a higher-priority job is queued. Job Engine pauses the job with
the lowest priority to allow the higher-priority job to run. Job Engine automatically resumes the paused job when one of the
other jobs completes.
● Suppose that fewer than the maximum number of jobs are running when a higher-priority job is queued. If a lower-priority job
has an exclusion set that overlaps the exclusion set of the new, higher-priority job, Job Engine pauses the lower-priority job
to allow the higher-priority job to run.
● In the case of a tie, Job Engine will continue running the job that is already running.

Managing system jobs

The Job Engine enables you to control periodic system maintenance tasks that ensure OneFS file system stability and integrity.
As maintenance jobs run, Job Engine ensures that jobs remain within specified impact settings for resource usage and impact
to other processes. However, it's possible to configure impact settings that enable the job to use resources to the point of
affecting performance.

System jobs 417

As system administrator, you can tailor these jobs to the specific workflow of your PowerScale cluster. You can view active jobs
and job history, modify job settings, and start, pause, resume, cancel, and update job instances.
You manage system jobs from the Cluster management > Job operations tab or using the isi job CLI commands. For general
information about the isi job commands, see the OneFS CLI Adminsitration Guide. For details about isi job subcommands
and syntax, see the OneFS CLI Command Reference.

View active jobs

If you are noticing slower system response while performing administrative tasks, you can view jobs that are currently running
on your PowerScale cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, view status information about all currently running jobs, job settings, and progress details.
a. You can perform bulk actions on the active jobs by selecting the Status check box, then selecting an action from the
Select a bulk action drop-down list.

Related references
System jobs library

View job history

If you want to check the last time that a critical job ran, you can view recent activity for a specific job, or for all jobs.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Reports.
The Job Reports table displays a chronological list of the job events that have occurred on the cluster. Event information
includes the time that the event occurred, the job responsible for the event, and event results.
2. Filter reports by job type by selecting the job from the Filter by Job Type drop-down list.
3. Click View Details next to a job name to view recent events for only that job.
Recent events for the job appear in the View Job Report Details window, and include information such as start time,
duration, and whether the job was successful.

Related references
System jobs library

Start a job
By default, only some system maintenance jobs are scheduled to run automatically. However, you can start any of the jobs
manually at any time.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types list, locate the job that you want to start, and then click Start Job.
The Start a Job dialog box appears.
3. Provide the details for the job, then click Start Job.

Related references
System jobs library

Pause a job
You can pause a job temporarily to free up system resources.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, click More for the job that you want to pause.
3. Click Pause Running Job in the menu that appears.
The job remains paused until you resume it.

418 System jobs

Related references
System jobs library

Resume a job
You can resume a paused job.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, click More for the job that you want to pause.
3. Click Resume Running Job in the menu that appears.
The job continues from the phase or task at which it was paused.

Related references
System jobs library

Cancel a job
If you want to free up system resources, or for any reason, you can permanently discontinue a running, paused, or waiting job.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, click More for the job that you want to cancel.
3. Click Cancel Running Job in the menu that appears.

Related references
System jobs library

Update a job
You can change the priority and impact policy of a running, waiting, or paused job.
When you update a job, only the current instance of the job runs with the updated settings. The next instance of the job returns
to the default settings for that job.

NOTE: To change job settings permanently, see "Modify job type settings."

1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.

2. In the Active Jobs table, click View/Edit for the job that you want to update.
3. Required: In the View Active Job Details window, click Edit Job.
a. Select a new priority level from the Priority drop-down list.
b. Select an impact policy level from the Impact Policy drop-down list.
4. Click Save Changes.
When you update a running job, the job automatically resumes. When you update a paused or idle job, the job remains in that
state until you restart it.

Related references
System jobs library

Modify job type settings

You can customize system maintenance jobs for your administrative workflow by modifying the default priority level, impact
level, and schedule for a job type.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
2. In the Job Types table, locate the row for the policy you want to modify and click View / Edit.

System jobs 419

 The View Job Type Details window appears, displaying current default settings, schedule, current state, and recent
activity.
3. Click Edit Job Type. The Edit Job Type Details window appears.
4. Modify the details you want to change. You can modify the default priority, the default impact policy, whether the job is
enabled, and whether the job runs manually or on a schedule.
5. Click Scheduled to modify a job schedule, then select the schedule option from the drop-down list.
6. Click Save Changes.
The modifications are saved and applied to all instances of that job type. The results are shown in the View Job Type
Details window.
7. Click Close.

Related references
System jobs library

Managing impact policies

For system maintenance jobs that run through the Job Engine service, you can create and assign policies that help control how
jobs affect system performance.
As system administrator, you can create, copy, modify, and delete impact policies, and view their settings.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

Create an impact policy

The Job Engine includes four impact policies, which you cannot modify or delete. However, you can create and configure new
impact policies.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Impact Policies.
2. Click Add an Impact Policy.
The Create Impact Policy window appears.
3. In the Name text field, type a name for the policy. This field is required.
4. Required: In the Description text field, type a comment about the impact policy.
Include information specific to the impact policy such as unique schedule parameters or logistical requirements that make the
impact policy necessary.

5. Click Add an Impact Policy Interval.

a. In the Add an Impact Policy Interval window, select the impact level and start and end times from the drop-down lists.
b. Click Add Impact Policy Interval.
The Add an Impact Policy Interval window disappears, and the settings you selected appear in the Impact Schedule
table.
6. Click Create Impact Policy.
Your copy of the impact policy is saved and is listed in alphabetical order in the Impact Policies table.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

Copy an impact policy

You can use a default impact policy as the template for a new policy by making and modifying a copy.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Impact Policies.
2. In the Impact Policies table, locate the row for the policy you want to copy and click More > Copy Impact Policy. The
Copy Impact Policy window appears.

420 System jobs

3. In the Name field, type a name for the new policy.
4. In the Description text field, type a description for the new policy.
Include information specific to the impact policy such as unique schedule parameters or logistical requirements that make the
impact policy necessary.

5. Click Add an Impact Policy Interval.

a. In the Add an Impact Policy Interval window, select the impact level and start and end times from the drop-down lists.
b. Click Add Impact Policy Interval.
The Add an Impact Policy Interval window closes, and the settings you selected appear in the Impact Schedule table.
6. Click Copy Impact Policy.
The copy of the impact policy is saved and is listed in alphabetical order in the Impact Policies table.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

Modify an impact policy

You can change the name, description, and impact intervals of a custom impact policy.
You cannot modify the default impact policies, HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, and OFF_HOURS. If you want to modify a policy, create
and modify a copy of a default policy.
1. Navigate to Cluster Management > Job Operations > Impact Policies.
2. In the Impact Policies table, click View / Edit for the policy you want to modify.
The Edit Impact Policy window appears.
3. Click Edit Impact Policy, and modify one or all of the following:

Policy description a. In the Description field, type a new overview for the impact policy.
b. Click Submit.

Impact schedule a. In the Impact Schedule area, modify the schedule of the impact policy by adding, editing, or
deleting impact intervals.
b. Click Save Changes.

The modified impact policy is saved and listed in alphabetical order in the Impact Policies table.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

Delete an impact policy

You can delete impact policies that you have created.
You cannot delete default impact policies, HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, and OFF_HOURS.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Impact Policies.
2. In the Impact Policies table, locate the custom impact policy that you want to delete, and then click More > Delete.
The Confirm Delete dialog box appears.
3. Click Delete.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

System jobs 421

View impact policy settings
You can view the impact policy settings for any job.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Types.
The Job Types table is displayed.
2. If necessary, scroll through the Job Types table to find a specific job.
The impact policy settings for the job are shown in the Job Types table.

Related concepts
Job performance impact

Viewing job reports and statistics

You can generate reports for system jobs and view statistics to better determine the amounts of system resources being used.
Most system jobs controlled by the Job Engine run at a low priority and with a low impact policy, and generally do not have a
noticeable impact on cluster performance.
A few jobs, because of the critical functions they perform, run at a higher priority and with a medium impact policy. These jobs
include FlexProtect and FlexProtect Lin, IntegrityScan, SmartPoolsTree, SnapshotDelete, TreeDelete, Undedupe, and Upgrade.
As a system administrator, if you are concerned about the impact a system job might have on cluster performance, you can view
job statistics and reports. These tools enable you to view detailed information about job load, including CPU and memory usage
and I/O operations.

View statistics for a job in progress

You can view statistics for a job in progress.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
You can view jobs that are running in the Active Jobs area.
2. Click the View/Edit option to the right of the job entry.
The View Active Jobs Details screen opens, where you can view statistics such as processed data, elapsed time, phase, and
progress, including an estimate of the time remaining for the job to complete.

View a report for a completed job

After a job finishes, you can view a report about the job.
A report for a job is not available until after the job is completed.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Reports.
The Job Reports page appears.
2. Locate the job whose report you want to view.
3. Click View Details.
The View Job Report Details screen appears, listing job statistics such as elapsed time, CPU and memory usage, and total
I/O operations.
4. When you are finished viewing the report, click Close.

422 System jobs

 31
Networking
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Networking overview
• About the internal network
• About the external network
• Configuring the internal network
• Managing IPv6
• Managing groupnets
• Managing external network subnets
• Managing IP address pools
• Managing SmartConnect Settings
• Managing network interface members
• Internal and external networks
• Managing node provisioning rules
• Managing routing options
• Managing DNS cache settings
• Managing host-based firewalls and DSCP settings
• Managing TCP ports

Networking overview
After you determine the topology of your network, you can set up and manage your internal and external networks. You can
configure and manage various network settings, including internal network settings, groupnets, subnets, IP address pools, and
SmartConnect settings, to ensure optimal network performance and security.
NOTE: Schedule your network updates to reduce service impacts as changes to any networking settings may cause loss of
connection to the cluster.
There are two types of networks on a cluster: Internal and External.

Internal Nodes communicate using a high-speed backend for internal communications and data transfer.
Depending on the node type, it could be an Ethernet or InfiniBand network. You can optionally
configure a second network of the same type (InfiniBand/Ethernet) to enable failover for redundancy.
NOTE: See Table 3 Network Connectivity for more details.

External Clients connect to the cluster through the external network primarily through Ethernet. Some node
models support Front End InfiniBand as well. The PowerScale cluster supports standard network
communication protocols, including NFS, SMB, S3, HDFS, HTTP, and FTP. The cluster supports a
large variety of network configurations and network interfaces, providing flexibility for a wide variety
of network deployments.
NOTE: See Table 3 Network Connectivity for more details.

Networking 423
About the internal network
A cluster must connect to at least one high-speed, low-latency InfiniBand or Ethernet switch for internal communications and
data transfer. The connection is also referred to as an internal network. The internal network is separate from the external
network by which users access the cluster.
Upon initial configuration of your cluster, OneFS creates an initial internal network. The interface to the default internal network
is int-a. You can add a second internal network for redundancy and failover. Failover allows continuous connectivity during path
failures. The interface to the secondary internal network is int-b, which is referred to as int-b/failover in the web administration
interface.
CAUTION: Only PowerScale nodes should be connected to your internal network. Information that is exchanged
on the backend network is not encrypted. Connecting anything other than PowerScale nodes to the internal
network creates a security risk.

NOTE: See the Network Connectivity table for more details.

Internal IP address ranges

The number of IP addresses assigned to the internal network determines how many nodes can be joined to the cluster.
When you initially configure the cluster, you specify one or more IP address ranges for the primary InfiniBand switch or Ethernet
switch. This range of addresses is used by the nodes to communicate with each other. It is recommended that you create a
range of addresses large enough to accommodate adding additional nodes to your cluster.
While all clusters will have, at minimum, one internal InfiniBand or Ethernet network (int-a), you can enable a second internal
network to support network failover (int-b/failover). You must assign at least one IP address range for the secondary network
and one range for failover.
If any IP address ranges defined during the initial configuration are too restrictive for the size of the internal network, you can
add ranges to the int-a network or int-b/failover networks, which might require a cluster restart. Other configuration changes,
such as deleting an IP address assigned to a node, might also require that the cluster be restarted.
NOTE: Generation 5 nodes support InfiniBand for the internal network. Generation 6 nodes support both InfiniBand and
Ethernet for the internal network. PowerScale F200 and F600 nodes support Ethernet for the internal network.

Internal network failover

You can configure an internal switch as a failover network to provide redundancy for intra-cluster communications.
In order to support an internal failover network, the int-a port on each node in the cluster must be physically connected to the
primary internal network switch, and the int-b port on each node must be connected to the other internal network switch.
After the ports are connected, you must configure two IP address ranges; an address range to support the int-b internal
interfaces, and an address range to support failover. The failover addresses enable seamless failover in the event that either the
int-a or int-b switches fail.

About the external network

You connect a client system to the cluster through the external network. External network configuration is composed of
groupnets, subnets, IP address pools, and network node provisioning rules.
Groupnets are the configuration level for managing multiple tenants on your external network. DNS client settings, such as
nameservers and a DNS search list, are properties of the groupnet. Groupnets reside at the top tier of the networking hierarchy.
You can create one or more subnets within a groupnet.
Subnets simplify external (front-end) network management and provide flexibility in implementing and maintaining the cluster
network. You can create IP address pools within subnets to partition your network interfaces according to workflow or node
type.
The IP address pool of a subnet consists of one or more IP address ranges. IP address pools can be associated with network
interfaces on cluster nodes. Client connection settings are configured at the IP address pool level.

424 Networking
An initial external network subnet is created during the setup of your cluster with the following configuration:
● An initial groupnet called groupnet0 with the specified global, outbound DNS settings to the domain name server list and
DNS search list, if provided.
● An initial subnet called subnet0 with the specified netmask, gateway, and SmartConnect service address.
● An initial IP address pool called pool0 with the specified IP address range, the SmartConnect zone name, and the network
interface of the selected node as the only pool member.
● An initial node provisioning rule called rule0 that automatically assigns the first network interface for all newly added nodes
to pool0.
● Adds subnet0 to groupnet0.
● Adds pool0 to subnet0 and configures pool0 to use the virtual IP of subnet0 as its SmartConnect service address.
● If you use IPv6 values in the above fields, then IPv6 is enabled on the cluster.
● After initial configuration, you can enable or disable IPv6 on the command-line interface.

IPv6 support
OneFS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 address formats on both on-premises and virtual cloud clusters. OneFS also supports dual
stack.
OneFS has been certified as meeting the USGv6 requirements developed by the US Government.
The following table describes the distinctions between IPv4 and IPv6.

Table 137. IPv4 and IPv6

IPv4 IPv6
32-bit addresses 128-bit addresses
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP); Duplicate Address
Detection (DAD)
Router Advertisement

A subnet can use either IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, but not both. You set the IP family when creating the subnet, and all IP address
pools that are assigned to the subnet must use the selected format.

Dual Stack
Dual stack means that a domain name can reference both IPv4 and IPv6 network pools. Dual stack networks always use IPV6
first, and fall back to IPV4 if IPV6 is not configured or available.
You can configure one subnet to be IPv4 and another to be IPv6. If a pool in both subnets has the same sc-dns-zone, and the
sc-subnet references the same subnet (for example, they both reference the IPv4 subnet), that IPv4 subnet can now resolve
for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
NOTE: Network pools (and their sc-dns-zones) can only be resolved by a single subnet at a time. By default, pools are
resolvable by their parent subnet (for example, subnet0 for subnet0.pool0). Setting the sc-subnet affects which subnet
is responsible for resolving that subnet. For example, setting sc-subnet=subnet1 for subnet0.pool0 means that
subnet0 can no longer resolve for subnet0.pool0 but subnet1 can resolve that subnet.

Related concepts
Subnets

IPv6 default configuration

IPv6 is enabled or disabled according to the following rules.

● On new clusters that are installed with OneFS [Link] and later:
○ If you use IPv6 configurations in the initial configuration wizard, IPv6 is enabled on the cluster. For example, if you
configure IPv6 external DNS servers, network pool IPs, SmartConnect service addresses, the wizard enables IPv6.

Networking 425
 ○ If you use only IPv4 configurations in the initial configuration wizard, IPv6 is disabled on the cluster. You can enable basic
IPv6 support at any time in the CLI using isi network external modify --ipv6-enabled true.
● On an existing OneFS cluster that has IPv6 enabled, an upgrade to OneFS [Link] or later does not change the IPv6
configurations. In this case, IPv6 remains enabled.
IPv6 configuration options are disabled by default when you first enable IPv6 support. You can enable each option using the isi
network external modify command.

IPv6 configuration
Enable, disable, and configure options for IPv6 using the isi network external modify command.
The following IPv6 options are available for configuration in the command.

Table 138. IPv6 options in the isi network external modify command
Option Description
--ipv6-enabled Enables or disables front-end interfaces to support IPv6.
--ipv6-auto-config-enabled Sets whether OneFS discovers and applies network settings from the
IPv6 router advertisements (RAs).
--ipv6-generate-link-local Specifies whether OneFS generates IPv6 link-local addresses on the
front-end network interfaces.
--ipv6-dad Enables or disables IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) globally on
OneFS. This option can set a global DAD timeout value. This global DAD
setting must be true to enable DAD on SSIPs or on network pools.
--ipv6-ssip-perform-dad Enables DAD on IPv6 SmartConnect Service IPs (SSIPs)
--ipv6-accept-redirects Controls whether OneFS processes ICMPv6 redirect messages.

You can also enable DAD on a network pool using the isi network pools modify or isi network pools create
commands.

Groupnets
Groupnets reside at the top tier of the networking hierarchy and are the configuration level for managing multiple tenants on
your external network. DNS client settings, such as nameservers and a DNS search list, are properties of the groupnet. You can
create a separate groupnet for each DNS namespace that you want to use to enable portions of the PowerScale cluster to have
different networking properties for name resolution. Each groupnet maintains its own DNS cache, which is enabled by default.
A groupnet is a container that includes subnets, IP address pools, and provisioning rules. Groupnets can contain one or more
subnets, and every subnet is assigned to a single groupnet. Each cluster contains a default groupnet named groupnet0 that
contains an initial subnet that is named subnet0, an initial IP address pool named pool0, and an initial provisioning rule named
rule0.
Each groupnet is referenced by one or more access zones. When you create an access zone, you can specify a groupnet. If a
groupnet is not specified, the access zone references the default groupnet. The default System access zone is automatically
associated with the default groupnet. Authentication providers that communicate with an external server, such as Active
Directory and LDAP, must also reference a groupnet. You can specify the authentication provider with a specific groupnet;
otherwise, the provider will reference the default groupnet. You can only add an authentication provider to an access zone if
they are associated with the same groupnet. Client protocols such as S3, SMB, NFS, and HDFS are supported by groupnets
through their associated access zones.

Related concepts
Managing groupnets
DNS name resolution

426 Networking
DNS name resolution
You can designate up to three DNS servers per groupnet to handle DNS name resolution.
DNS servers must be configured as an IPv4 or IPv6 address. You can specify up to six DNS search suffixes per groupnet; the
suffixes settings are appended to domain names that are not fully qualified.
Additional DNS server settings at the groupnet level include enabling a DNS cache, enabling server-side search, and enabling
DNS resolution on a rotating basis.

Related tasks
Specify a SmartConnect service subnet

Subnets
Subnets are networking containers that enable you to subdivide your network into smaller, logical IP networks.
On a cluster, subnets are created under a groupnet and each subnet contains one or more IP address pools. Both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported on OneFS; however, a subnet cannot contain a combination of both. When you create a subnet, you
specify whether it supports IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
You can configure the following options when you create a subnet:
● Gateway servers that route outgoing packets and gateway priority.
● Maximum transmission unit (MTU) that network interfaces in the subnet will use for network communications.
● SmartConnect service address, which is the IP address on which the SmartConnect module listens for DNS requests on this
subnet.
● SmartConnect service name, which is displayed when you create or modify a subnet. The SmartConnect service name field
is an optional field to answer nameserver, Start of Authority, and other DNS queries.
● VLAN tagging to allow the cluster to participate in multiple virtual networks.
How you set up your external network subnets depends on your network topology. For example, in a basic network topology
where all client-node communication occurs through direct connections, only a single external subnet is required. In another
example, if you want clients to connect through both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, you must configure multiple subnets.

Related concepts
VLANs
Managing external network subnets
IPv6 support

VLANs
Virtual LAN (VLAN) tagging is an optional setting that enables a cluster to participate in multiple virtual networks.
You can partition a physical network into multiple broadcast domains, or virtual local area networks (VLANs). You can enable a
cluster to participate in a VLAN which allows multiple cluster subnet support without multiple network switches; one physical
switch enables multiple virtual subnets.
VLAN tagging inserts an ID into packet headers. The switch refers to the ID to identify from which VLAN the packet originated
and to which network interface a packet should be sent.

Related tasks
Enable or disable VLAN tagging

Networking 427
IP address pools
IP address pools are assigned to a subnet and consist of one or more IP address ranges. You can partition nodes and network
interfaces into logical IP address pools. IP address pools are also utilized when configuring SmartConnect DNS zones and client
connection management.
Each IP address pool belongs to a single subnet. Multiple pools for a single subnet are available only if you activate a
SmartConnect Advanced license.
The IP address ranges assigned to a pool must be unique and belong to the IP address family (IPv4 or IPv6) specified by the
subnet that contains the pool.
You can add network interfaces to IP address pools to associate address ranges with a node or a group of nodes. For example,
based on the network traffic that you expect, you might decide to establish one IP address pool for storage nodes and another
for accelerator nodes.
SmartConnect settings that manage DNS query responses and client connections are configured at the IP address pool level.

Related concepts
Managing IP address pools

Link aggregation
Link aggregation, also known as network interface card (NIC) aggregation, combines the network interfaces on a physical node
into a single, logical connection to provide improved network throughput.
You can add network interfaces to an IP address pool singly or as an aggregate. A link aggregation mode is selected on a
per-pool basis and applies to all aggregated network interfaces in the IP address pool. The link aggregation mode determines
how traffic is balanced and routed among aggregated network interfaces.

Related concepts
Managing network interface members

SmartConnect module
The SmartConnect module specifies how the cluster DNS server handles connection requests from clients and the policies that
assign IP addresses to network interfaces, including failover and rebalancing.
You can think of SmartConnect as a limited implementation of a custom DNS server. SmartConnect answers only for the
SmartConnect zone names or aliases that are configured on it. Settings and policies that are configured for SmartConnect are
applied per IP address pool.
NOTE: Enable the gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol (gratuitous ARP, or GARP) on the network switch to ensure
consistent connectivity.
You can configure basic and advanced SmartConnect settings.

SmartConnect Basic
SmartConnect Basic is included with OneFS as a standard feature and does not require a license. SmartConnect Basic supports
the following:
● Specifying the DNS zone.
● Round-robin connection balancing method only
● Specifying a service subnet to answer DNS requests.
● Viewing the status of nodes in a specified network pool.
SmartConnect Basic enables you to add two SmartConnect Service IP addresses to a subnet.
SmartConnect Basic has the following limitations to IP address pool configuration:
● SmartConnect Basic only allows for static IP address allocation.
● You cannot specify an IP address failover policy.

428 Networking
● You cannot specify an IP address rebalance policy.
● You cannot create more than two IP address pools per network subnet.

SmartConnect Advanced
In OneFS [Link] and later, SmartConnect Advanced is included with OneFS as a standard feature and is autoenabled.
SmartConnect Advanced extends the settings available from SmartConnect Basic. SmartConnect Advanced supports the
following settings:
● Round-robin, CPU utilization, connection counting, and throughput balancing methods
● Static and dynamic IP address allocation
SmartConnect Advanced enables you to add a maximum of six SmartConnect Service IP addresses per subnet.
SmartConnect Advanced enables you to specify the following IP address pool configuration options:
● You can define an IP address failover policy for the IP address pool.
● You can define an IP address rebalance policy for the IP address pool.
● SmartConnect Advanced supports multiple IP address pools per external subnet to enable multiple DNS zones within a single
subnet.

Related concepts
Managing SmartConnect Settings

SmartConnect Multi-SSIP
OneFS supports defining more than one SmartConnect Service IP (SSIP) per subnet. Support for multiple SmartConnect
Service IPs (Multi-SSIP) ensures that client connections continue uninterrupted if an SSIP becomes unavailable.
The additional SSIPs provide fault tolerance and a failover mechanism to ensure continued load balancing of clients according to
the selected policy. Though the additional SSIPs are in place for failover, they are active and respond to DNS server requests.
SmartConnect Basic allows defining 2 SSIPs per subnet. SmartConnect Advanced allows defining up to 6 SSIPs per subnet. In
OneFS [Link] and later, SmartConnect Advanced is included with OneFS as a standard feature and is autoenabled.
NOTE: SmartConnect Multi-SSIP is not an additional layer of load balancing for client connections: additional SSIPs only
provide redundancy and reduce failure points in the client connection sequence. Do not configure the site DNS server to
perform load balancing for the SSIPs. Allow OneFS to perform load balancing through the selected SmartConnect policy to
ensure effective load balancing.
Configure DNS servers for SSIP failover to ensure that the next SSIP is contacted only if the first SSIP connection times out.
If the SSIPs are not configured in a failover sequence, the SSIP load balancing policy resets each time a new SSIP is contacted.
The SSIPs function independently: they do not track the current distribution status of the other SSIPs.
Configuring IP addresses as failover-only addresses is not supported on all DNS servers. To support Multi-SSIP as a failover
only option, it is recommended that you use a DNS server that supports failover addresses. If a DNS server does not support
failover addresses, Multi-SSIP still provides advantages over a single SSIP. However, increasing the number of SSIPs may affect
SmartConnect's ability to load balance.
NOTE: If the DNS server does not support failover addresses, test Multi-SSIP in a lab environment that mimics the
production environment to confirm the impact on SmartConnect's load balancing for a specific workflow. Only after
confirming workflow impacts in a lab environment should you update a production cluster.

SmartConnect zones and aliases

Clients can connect to the cluster through a specific IP address or though a domain that represents an IP address pool.
SmartConnect zone aliases enable you to view all the DNS names that a cluster answers for. You create Service Principal
Name (SPN) records in Active Directory or in MIT Kerberos for the SmartConnect zone names, as a component of the machine
account of the cluster. To create the SPN records, use the CLI isi auth command after you add the zone alias, similar to the
following:

isi auth ads spn check --domain=<[Link]> --repair

Networking 429
You can configure a SmartConnect DNS zone name for each IP address pool. The zone name must be a fully qualified domain
name. Add a new name server (NS) record that references the SmartConnect service IP address in the existing authoritative
DNS zone that contains the cluster. Provide a zone delegation to the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the SmartConnect
zone in your DNS infrastructure.
If you have a SmartConnect Advanced license, you can also specify a list of alternate SmartConnect DNS zone names for the IP
address pool.
When a client connects to the cluster through a SmartConnect DNS zone:
● SmartConnect handles the incoming DNS requests on behalf of the IP address pool.
● The service subnet distributes incoming DNS requests according to the connection balancing policy of the pool.
NOTE: Using SmartConnect zone aliases is recommended for making clusters accessible using multiple domain names. Use
of CNAMES is not recommended.

Related tasks
Modify a SmartConnect DNS zone

DNS request handling

SmartConnect handles all incoming DNS requests on behalf of an IP address pool if a SmartConnect service subnet has been
associated with the pool. If the sc-subnet field has not been set, the "parent" subnet assumes DNS responsibility for the IP
address pool.
The SmartConnect service subnet is an IP address pool setting. You can specify any subnet that has been configured with a
SmartConnect service IP address and references the same groupnet as the pool. You must have at least one subnet configured
with a SmartConnect service IP address in order to handle client DNS requests.
A SmartConnect service IP address should be used exclusively for answering DNS requests and cannot be an IP address that is
in any pool's IP address range. Client connections through the SmartConnect service IP address is not supported and result in
unexpected behavior or disconnection.
Once a SmartConnect service subnet has been associated with an IP address pool, the service subnet distributes incoming DNS
requests according to the pool's connection balancing policy. If a pool does not have a designated service subnet, incoming
DNS requests are answered by the subnet that contains the pool, provided that the subnet is configured with a SmartConnect
service IP address. Otherwise, the DNS requests are excluded.
NOTE: SmartConnect requires that you add a new name server (NS) record that references the SmartConnect service IP
address in the existing authoritative DNS zone that contains the cluster. You must also provide a zone delegation to the
fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the SmartConnect zone.

Related tasks
Configure a SmartConnect service IP address
Suspend or resume a node

IP address allocation
The IP address allocation policy specifies how IP addresses in the pool are assigned to an available network interface.
You can specify whether to use static or dynamic allocation. When a new pool is created, the default IP allocation method is
dynamic unless otherwise specified.

Static Assigns one IP address to each network interface added to the IP address pool, but does not
guarantee that all IP addresses are assigned.
Once assigned, the network interface keeps the IP address indefinitely, even if the network interface
becomes unavailable. To release the IP address, remove the network interface from the pool or
remove it from the node.
Without a license for SmartConnect Advanced, static is the only method available for IP address
allocation.
Dynamic Assigns IP addresses to each network interface added to the IP address pool until all IP addresses are
assigned. This guarantees a response when clients connect to any IP address in the pool.

430 Networking
 If a network interface becomes unavailable, its IP addresses are automatically moved to other available
network interfaces in the pool as determined by the IP address failover policy.
This method is only available with a license for SmartConnect Advanced.
Externally Managed In cloud deployments, the ExternallyManaged allocation method is available. This allocation
method was designed to allow cloud providers to dictate the placement of Primary IPs. Pools of this
allocation method are created and managed by SmartConnect, and thus cannot be edited or changed
from ExternallyManaged. Externally managed network pools can only be created by the system. Pools
cannot be changed to be externally managed, and pools cannot be changed from externally managed.
This configuration is to prevent accidental misconfigurations.

Related references
Supported IP allocation methods
Allocation recommendations based on file sharing protocols

Related tasks
Configure IP address allocation

IP address failover
When a network interface becomes unavailable, the IP address failover policy specifies how to handle the IP addresses that
were assigned to the network interface.
To define an IP address failover policy, you must have a license for SmartConnect Advanced, and the IP address allocation policy
must be set to dynamic. Dynamic IP allocation ensures that all of the IP addresses in the pool are assigned to available network
interfaces.
When a network interface becomes unavailable, the IP addresses that were assigned to it are redistributed to available
network interfaces according to the IP address failover policy. Subsequent client connections are directed to the new network
interfaces.
You can select one of the following connection balancing methods to determine how the IP address failover policy selects which
network interface receives a redistributed IP address:
● Round-robin
● Connection count
● Network throughput
● CPU usage

Related tasks
Configure an IP failover policy

Connection balancing
The connection balancing policy determines how the DNS server handles client connections to the cluster.
You can specify one of the following balancing methods:

Round-robin Selects the next available network interface on a rotating basis. Round-robin is the default method.
Without a SmartConnect license for advanced settings, this is the only method available for load
balancing.
Connection count Determines the number of open TCP connections on each available network interface and selects the
node with the fewest client connections.
Network throughput Determines the average throughput on each available network interface and selects the node with the
lowest utilization.
CPU usage Determines the average CPU utilization on each available network interface and selects the node with
lightest processor usage.

Networking 431
Related references
Supported connection balancing methods

Related tasks
Configure a connection balancing policy

IP address rebalancing
The IP address rebalance policy specifies when to redistribute IP addresses if one or more previously unavailable network
interfaces becomes available again.
To define an IP address rebalance policy, you must have a license for SmartConnect Advanced, and the IP address allocation
policy must be set to dynamic. Dynamic IP addresses allocation ensures that all of the IP addresses in the pool are assigned to
available network interfaces.
You can set rebalancing to occur manually or automatically:

Manual Does not redistribute IP addresses until you manually start the rebalancing process.
Upon rebalancing, IP addresses will be redistributed according to the connection balancing method
specified by the IP address failover policy defined for the IP address pool.
Automatic Automatically redistributes IP addresses according to the connection balancing method specified by
the IP address failover policy defined for the IP address pool.
Automatic rebalancing may also be triggered by changes to cluster nodes, network interfaces, or the
configuration of the external network.
NOTE: Rebalancing can disrupt client connections. Ensure the client workflow on the IP address
pool is appropriate for automatic rebalancing.

Related tasks
Manually rebalance IP addresses

SmartConnect diagnostics
You can view information about the status of the nodes in a network pool.
SmartConnect collects information about the status of nodes in network pools. Use the CLI command isi network pools
status <network pool id> to view whether each node in the network pool is operating optimally, needs attention, or is down.
The format of <network pool id> is [groupnetID.][Link].
The network pool status report displays summary information about the network pool and node status details:
● If all nodes are operating optimally, only summary information about the network pool displays.
● If some nodes are down or need attention, network pool summary and detailed information about the affected nodes
displays.
Use the --show-all option to display network pool summary information and detailed information for all the nodes in the
network pool.

Node provisioning rules

Node provisioning rules specify how new nodes are configured when they are added to a cluster.
If the new node type matches the type defined in a rule, the network interfaces on the node are added to the subnet and the IP
address pool specified in the rule.
For example, you can create a node provisioning rule that configures new PowerScale storage nodes, and another rule that
configures new accelerator nodes.
OneFS automatically checks for multiple provisioning rules when new rules are added to ensure there are no conflicts.

432 Networking
Related concepts
Managing node provisioning rules

Routing options
OneFS supports source-based routing and static routes which allow for more granular control of the direction of outgoing client
traffic on the cluster.
If no routing options are defined, by default, outgoing client traffic on the cluster is routed through the default gateway, which
is the gateway with the lowest priority setting on the node. If traffic is being routed to a local subnet and it not required to route
through a gateway, the traffic goes directly out through an interface on that subnet.
For example, if the following two subnets are configured on a node, traffic is routed to Gateway [Link] since the priority 1 on
that gateway is less than the priority of subnet0 (priority 10).

ID Subnet Gateway|Priority Pools SC Service Addrs

Linklayer Firewall Policy
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------
groupnet0.subnet0 [Link]/22 [Link]|10 pool0 [Link]-[Link] ethernet
default_subnets_policy
groupnet0.subnet1 [Link]/22 [Link]|1 pool1 [Link]-[Link] ethernet
default_subnets_policy
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------

Related concepts
Managing routing options

Source-based routing
Source-based routing (SBR) selects which gateway to direct outgoing client traffic through based on the source IP address in
each packet header.
When enabled, source-based routing automatically scans your network configuration to create client traffic rules. If you modify
your network configuration, for example, changing the IP address of a gateway server, source-based routing adjusts the rules.
Source-based routing is applied across the entire cluster.
In OneFS 9.8 and later, the IPv6 protocol is supported and source-based routing is enabled by default. Enabling or disabling
source-based routing goes into effect immediately. Packets in transit continue on their original courses, and subsequent traffic
is routed based on the status change. If the status of source-based routing changes during transmission, transactions that are
composed of multiple packets might be disrupted or delayed.
In the event where there is more than one matching route, rules that are made from static routes are evaluated first. If a
static route matches, static routes are prioritized over source-based rules. When a static route is added, the matching static
route is found first and takes precedence over source-based routing routes. If both source-based routing and static routes are
configured, the static routes always take priority for traffic that matches the static routes.
Source-based routing should be enabled if you have a large network with a complex topology. For example, if your network is a
multitenant environment with several gateways, traffic is more efficiently distributed with source-based routing.
Examples
In the following example, source-based routing is enabled on a PowerScale cluster that is connected to SubnetA and SubnetB.
Each subnet is configured with a SmartConnect zone and a gateway, also labeled A and B. When a client on SubnetA makes
a request to SmartConnect ZoneB, the response originates from ZoneB. The result is a ZoneB address as the source IP in the
packet header, and the response is routed through GatewayB. Without source-based routing, the default route is destination-
based, so the response is routed through GatewayA.
In another example, a client on SubnetC, which is not connected to the PowerScale cluster, makes a request to SmartConnect
ZoneA and ZoneB. The response from ZoneA is routed through GatewayA, and the response from ZoneB is routed through
GatewayB. In other words, the traffic is split between gateways. Without source-based routing, both responses are routed
through the same gateway.

Networking 433
Related tasks
Enable or disable source-based routing

Static routing
A static route directs outgoing client traffic to a specified gateway based on the IP address of the client connection.
You configure static routes by IP address pool, and each route applies to all nodes that have network interfaces as IP address
pool members.
You might configure static routing in order to connect to networks that are unavailable through the default routes or if you have
a small network that only requires one or two routes.

Related tasks
Add or remove a static route

Host-based firewall
The OneFS host-based firewall controls inbound traffic on the front-end network. You can enable default global firewall policies
that provide basic protection on the OneFS default ports. You can create custom policies and custom rules that define a firewall
for your specific network management and security requirements.

Enable and manage the firewall

Use the command-line interface or the Web UI to enable and manage the firewall.
The host-based firewall is disabled by default. You can enable it using either of the following:
● In the CLI, the isi network firewall setttings modify --enabled=true command
● In the Web UI, the Cluster management > Firewall configuration > Settings page
NOTE: The STIG hardening profile enables the firewall on the cluster.

You can manage the firewall policies using either the command-line interface or the Web UI. In either interface, you can:
● Modify existing policies and create policies.
● Clone existing policies and edit the clones.
● Reset global policies to original installed defaults.
● Create and modify rules.
● Assign policies to subnets and network pools.
Firewall management requires the ISI_PRIV_FIREWALL privilege.
● The integrated SystemAdmin role is granted with the ISI_PRIV_FIREWALL write permission.
● The integrated AuditAdmin role is granted with ISI_PRIV_FIREWALL read permission.
NOTE: The firewall uses the FreeBSD ipfw kernel model, which is the same model that source-based routing (SBR)
uses. The two features use different partitions in the same ipfw table. You may enable and disable firewall and SBR
independently.

Firewall policies
The firewall consists of policies that you apply to specified subnets or network pools.
A policy is a collection of rules that filters inbound packets. A rule can filter packets on the protocol, source address, source
port, and destination port. Each rule defines an action to take when a packet matches the rule. Each policy also has a defined
default action. The available actions are:
● allow—Accept the packet.
● deny—Silently drop the packet.
● reject—Drop the packet and send an error code to the sender.

434 Networking
To make a policy take effect, you associate the policy to one or more network pools or subnets. Use either the Web UI or the
isi network firewall policies modify command with the --add-pools or --add-subnets option.

Global policies
The firewall comes with predefined global policies. You can modify the global policies. You can reset the global policies back to
their original installed state.
The following table describes the global policies that are installed with OneFS.

Table 139. Global Policies

Policy Summary
default_pools_policy Rules for the inbound default ports for TCP and UDP services in OneFS. For a list of default
ports, see the "Network exposure" section in the "Product and Subsystem Security" chapter of
the OneFS Security Configuration Guide.
default_subnets_policy Rules for:
● DNS port 53
● Rule for ICMP
● Rule for ICMP6

Custom policies
You can create custom policies. As a convenience, you can clone any policy and edit the clone to create a custom policy. You
have complete control over the rules in custom policies.

Firewall rules
Firewall rules filter incoming network packets and define specific actions to take based on source network, source port,
destination port, and protocol on the cluster.
The ordering of rules in a policy can make a difference in the outcome. Each rule in a policy has an integer ID. Rules are applied
to a packet by ascending ID. Filtering stops at the first match. In general, you should order rules from most restrictive to least
restrictive.
You can change the ordering of rules in a policy by editing the policy. The Web UI lists all the rules in indexed order and makes it
convenient to rearrange them.

Maximum settings
The following predefined system settings affect the total permitted size of the firewall.

Table 140. System Settings

Name Description Value
MAX_INTERFACES Maximum number of L2 interfaces on a node, 500
including Ethernet, VLAN, LAGG interfaces.
MAX _SUBNETS Maximum number of subnets in the OneFS 100
cluster
MAX_POOLS Maximum number of network pools in the 100
OneFS cluster
DEFAULT_MAX_RULES Default value of max rules within a firewall 100
policy
MAX_RULES Maximum rules in a firewall policy 200
MAX_ACTIVE_RULES Upper limit of total active rules across the 5000
cluster

Networking 435
Table 140. System Settings (continued)
Name Description Value
MAX_INACTIVE_POLICIES Maximum number of policies that are not 200
applied to any network subnet or pool. These
policies are not written into the ipfw table.

Firewall and IPv6

IPv6 requires a rule that allows ICMP6. ICMP6 is critical for the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).
The default global policies include the required ICMP6 rule.
If you create a custom policy that is intended for IPv6-enabled subnets and pools, be sure to include a rule that allows ICMP6.
For convenience, consider cloning the global policy and customizing the rules in the cloned policy.

Firewall and FTP

The firewall is not compatible with FTP passive mode.
If FTP is enabled, it must be configured for active mode before firewall is enabled. In passive mode, FTP creates data
connections on random ephemeral ports. This behavior conflicts with the host-based firewall operation. Passive mode is the
default setting when FTP is enabled.
To set FTP to active mode, run the following command:

isi ftp setting modify --active-mode true

For most FTP clients, you must configure the client in FTP active mode. You should also check the firewall settings on the
client.

Firewall and ports

Global firewall policies contain rules for the OneFS default ports on all services. If your installation changes port settings, you
must customize policies.
Some OneFS services allow administrators to modify the ports on which the service daemon listens. The service ports can be
changed before and after the firewall is enabled. In either case, administrators must also update firewall policies when changing
ports.
For example, the OneFS system default for ssh is port 22. Administrators can use the isi ssh settings modify command
to change that port setting. If the port is changed, the firewall rules that are intended for that port are no longer applicable.
WARNING: The firewall policies do not automatically update when you reconfigure ports. This caveat applies to
both global and custom policies.

Configuring the internal network

You can modify the internal network settings of your cluster.
The following actions are available:
● Modify the IP address ranges of the internal network and the int-b/failover network
● Modify the internal network netmask
● Configure and enable an internal failover network
● Disable internal network failover
You can configure the int-b/failover network to provide backup in the event of an int-a network failure. Configuration involves
specifying a valid netmask and IP address range for the failover network.

436 Networking
Modify the internal IP address range
Each internal network requires an IP address range. The ranges should have a sufficient number of IP addresses for present
operating conditions as well as future expansion and addition of nodes. You can add, remove, or migrate IP addresses for both
the initial internal network (int-a) and secondary internal network (int-b/failover).
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Internal Network.
2. In the Internal Networks Settings area, select the network that you want to add IP addresses for.
● To select the int-a network, click int-a.
● To select the int-b/failover network, click int-b/Failover.
3. In the IP Ranges area, you can add, delete, or migrate your IP address ranges.
Ideally, the new range is contiguous with the previous one. For example, if your current IP address range is [Link]–
[Link], the new range should start with [Link].
4. Click Submit.
5. Restart the cluster, if needed.
● If you remove any IP address that are currently in use, you must restart the cluster.
● If you add IP address changes are within the internal network netmask, you do not need to restart the cluster.
● If you change the internal network netmask, you must restart the cluster.
● If you migrate the IP address ranges, you must restart the cluster.

Related concepts
Internal IP address ranges

Modify the internal network netmask

You can modify the netmask value for the internal network.
If the netmask is too restrictive for the size of the internal network, you must modify the netmask settings. It is recommended
that you specify a class C netmask, such as [Link], for the internal netmask. This netmask is large enough to
accommodate future nodes.
NOTE: For the changes in netmask value to take effect, you must reboot the cluster.

1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Internal Network.

2. In the Internal Network Settings area, select the network that you want to configure the netmask for.
● To select the int-a network, click int-a.
● To select the int-b/failover network, click int-b/Failover.
We recommend that the netmask values you specify for int-a and int-b/failover are the same. If you modify the netmask
value of one, modify the other.
3. In the Netmask field, type a netmask value.
You cannot modify the netmask value if the change invalidates any node addresses.
4. Click Submit.
A dialog box prompts you to reboot the cluster.
5. Specify when you want to reboot the cluster.
● To immediately reboot the cluster, click Yes. When the cluster finishes rebooting, the login page appears.
● Click No to return to the Edit Internal Network page without changing the settings or rebooting the cluster.

Related concepts
Internal IP address ranges

Configure and enable internal failover

You can enable an internal failover on your cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Internal Network.
2. In the Internal Network Settings area, click int-b/Failover.
3. In the IP Ranges area, for the int-b network, click Add range.

Networking 437
4. On the Add IP Range dialog box, enter the IP address at the low end of the range in the first IP range field.
5. In the second IP range field, type the IP address at the high end of the range.
Ensure that there is no overlap of IP addresses between the int-a and int-b/failover network ranges. For example, if the IP
address range for the int-a network is [Link]–[Link], specify a range of [Link] - [Link] for the int-b
network.
6. Click Submit.
7. In the IP Ranges area for the Failover network, click Add range.
Add an IP address range for the failover network, ensuring there is no overlap with the int-a network or the int-b network.
The Edit Internal Network page appears, and the new IP address range appears in the IP Ranges list.
8. In the Settings area, specify a valid netmask. Ensure that there is no overlap between the IP address range for the int-b
network or for the failover network.
We recommend that the netmask values you specify for int-a and int-b/failover are the same.
9. In the Settings area, for State, click Enable to enable the int-b and failover networks.
10. Click Submit.
The Confirm Cluster Reboot dialog box appears.
11. Restart the cluster by clicking Yes.

Related concepts
Internal network failover

Disable internal network failover

You can disable the int-b and failover internal networks.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Internal Network.
2. In the Internal Network Settings area, click int-b/Failover.
3. In the State area, click Disable.
4. Click Submit.
The Confirm Cluster Reboot dialog box appears.
5. Restart the cluster by clicking Yes.

Related concepts
Internal network failover

Managing IPv6
You can enable, disable, and configure IPv6 using the CLI.

Enable and configure IPv6

Use the CLI to enable and configure IPv6.
All IPv6 options are configurable with parameters in the isi network external modify command.
1. Enable IPv6.

isi network external modify --ipv6-enabled true

2. View configurable options that are related to IPv6.

a. Run isi network external modify with the --help option.

isi network external modify -h

b. In the help output, scroll to the IPv6 Options section.

438 Networking
3. Run isi network external modify with appropriate IPv6 options.
For example, to configure IPv6 to discover and apply network settings from the IPv6 Router Advertisement, run:

isi network external modify --ipv6-auto-config-enabled true

Enable duplicate address detection (DAD)

You can configure OneFS to perform IPv6 DAD globally on the cluster. Separate configurations are required to enable DAD on
Smartconnect Service IPs and on network pools.
Enable IPv6.
1. Enable IPv6 if it is not already enabled.

isi network external modify --ipv6-enabled true

2. Enable DAD on the cluster.

The following command enables DAD and specifies a DAD timeout value of 4 seconds. With this configuration, OneFS looks
for duplicate addresses for 4 seconds before accepting connections on the IP.

isi network external modify --ipv6-dad 4

To enable DAD without a timeout, run the following command:

isi network external modify --ipv6-dad enabled

NOTE: Enabling DAD without specifying a timeout results in using the default timeout, which is 5 seconds.

3. Optionally enable DAD on Smartconnect Service IPs.

isi network external modify --ipv6-ssip-perform-dad true

NOTE: DAD must also be enabled on the cluster, as defined in step 2.

4. Optionally enable DAD on a network pool.

isi network pools modify groupnet0.subnet0.pool0 --ipv6-perform-dad true

NOTE: DAD must also be enabled on the cluster, as defined in step 2.

View IPv6 settings

You can view the current IPv6 configuration values for the cluster and network pools.
1. To view IPv6 global settings, run the isi network external view command. Note that IPv6 settings are hidden when
IPv6 is disabled and if you do not run the command using the --verbose display option.

isi network external view

Client TCP Ports: 2049, 445, 20, 21, 80
Default Groupnet: groupnet0
SC Rebalance Delay: 0
Source Based Routing: False
SC Server TTL: 900

IPv6 Settings:
IPv6 Enabled: True
IPv6 Auto Configuration Enabled: False

Networking 439
 IPv6 Generate Link Local: False
IPv6 Accept Redirects: False
IPv6 DAD: Disabled
IPv6 SSIP Perform DAD: False

2. To view whether IPv6 duplicate address detection (DAD) is configured on a network pool, run the isi network pools
view <poolname> command.

isi network pools view groupnet0.subnet0.pool0

ID: groupnet0.subnet0.pool0
Groupnet: groupnet0
Subnet: subnet0
Name: pool0
Rules: rule0
Access Zone: System
Allocation Method: static
Aggregation Mode: lacp
Description: Initial pool
Firewall Policy: default_pools_policy
Linklayer: ethernet
Ifaces: 1:mgmt-1, 2:mgmt-1, 3:mgmt-1
IP Ranges: [Link]-[Link]
IPv6 Perform DAD: No
Rebalance Policy: auto
SC Failover Policy: round_robin
Static Routes: -
NFS RDMA RRoCE only: No

SmartConnect DNS Settings:

SC Suspended Nodes: -
SC Connect Policy: round_robin
SC Zone:
SC DNS Zone Aliases: -
SC Subnet:
SC TTL: 0

Managing groupnets
You can create and manage groupnets on a cluster.

Create a groupnet
You can create a groupnet and configure DNS client settings.
1. Click Cluster Management > Networking Configuration > External Network.
2. click Add a groupnet.
The Create Groupnet window opens.
3. In the Name field, type a name for the groupnet that is unique in the system.
The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and can include underscores or hyphens, but cannot include spaces
or other punctuation.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a descriptive comment about the groupnet.
The description cannot exceed 128 characters.
5. In the DNS Settings area, configure the following DNS settings you want to apply to the groupnet:
● DNS Servers
● DNS Search Suffixes
● DNS Resolver Rotate
● Server-side DNS Search
● DNS Cache
6. Click Add Groupnet.

440 Networking
Related concepts
Groupnets
DNS name resolution

Related references
DNS settings

DNS settings
You can assign DNS servers to a groupnet and modify DNS settings that specify DNS server behavior.

Table 141. DNS Settings

Setting Description
DNS Servers Sets a list of DNS IP addresses. Nodes issue DNS requests to
these IP addresses.
You cannot specify more than three DNS servers.

DNS Search Suffixes Sets the list of DNS search suffixes. Suffixes are appended to
domain names that are not fully qualified.
You cannot specify more than six suffixes.

Enable DNS resolver rotate Sets the DNS resolver to rotate or round-robin across DNS
servers.
Enable DNS server-side search Specifies whether server-side DNS searching is enabled,
which appends DNS search lists to client DNS inquiries
handled by a SmartConnect service IP address.
Enable DNS cache Specifies whether DNS caching for the groupnet is enabled.

Related concepts
Groupnets

Related tasks
Create a groupnet

Modify a groupnet
You can modify groupnet attributes including the name, supported DNS servers, and DNS configuration settings.
1. Click Cluster Management > Networking Configuration > External Network.
2. Click the View/Edit button in the row of the groupnet you want to modify.
3. From the View Groupnet Details window, click Edit.
4. From the Edit Groupnet Details window, modify the groupnet settings as needed.
5. Click Save changes.

Related concepts
Groupnets
DNS name resolution

Related references
DNS settings

Networking 441
Delete a groupnet
You can delete a groupnet from the system, unless it is associated with an access zone, an authentication provider, or it is the
default groupnet. Removal of the groupnet from the system might affect several other areas of OneFS and should be performed
with caution.
In several cases, the association between a groupnet and another OneFS component, such as access zones or authentication
providers, is absolute. You cannot modify these components so that they become associated with another groupnet.
When you must delete a groupnet, we recommend that you complete these tasks in the following order:
1. Delete IP address pools in subnets associated with the groupnet.
2. Delete subnets associated with the groupnet .
3. Delete authentication providers associated with the groupnet .
4. Delete access zones associated with the groupnet .
1. To delete a groupnet:
2. Click Cluster Management > Networking Configuration > External Network.
3. Click the More button in the row of the groupnet that you want to delete, and then click Delete Groupnet.
4. At the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Delete.
If you did not first delete access zones that are associated with the groupnet, the deletion fails, and the system displays an
error.

Related concepts
Groupnets

View groupnets
You can view a list of all groupnets on the system and view the details of a specific groupnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Networking Configuration > External Network.
The External Network table displays all groupnets in the system and displays the following attributes:
● Groupnet name
● DNS servers assigned to the groupnet
● The type of groupnet
● Groupnet description
2. Click the View/Edit button in a row to view the current settings for that groupnet.
The View Groupnet Details dialog box opens and displays the following settings:
● Groupnet name
● Groupnet description
● DNS servers assigned to the groupnet
● DNS search suffixes
● Whether DNS resolver is enabled
● Whether DNS search is enabled
● Whether DNS caching is enabled
3. Click the tree arrow next to a groupnet name to view subnets assigned to the groupnet.
The table displays each subnet in a new row within the groupnet tree.
4. When you have finished viewing groupnet details, click Close.

Related concepts
Groupnets

Managing external network subnets

You can create and manage subnets on a cluster.

442 Networking
Create a subnet
You can add a subnet to the external network. Subnets are created under a groupnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Add Subnet next to the groupnet that will contain the new subnet.
The system displays the Create Subnet window.
3. In the Name field, specify the name of the new subnet.
The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and can include underscores or hyphens, but cannot include spaces
or other punctuation.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a descriptive comment about the subnet.
The comment can be no more than 128 characters.
5. From the IP family area, select one of the following IP address formats for the subnet:
● IPv4
● IPv6
All subnet settings and IP address pools added to the subnet must use the specified address format. You cannot modify the
address family once the subnet has been created.
6. In the Netmask field, specify a subnet mask or prefix length, depending on the IP family you selected.
● For an IPv4 subnet, type a dot-decimal octet (x.x.x.x) that represents the subnet mask.
● For an IPv6 subnet, type an integer (ranging from 1 to 128) that represents the network prefix length.
7. In the Gateway Address field, type the IP address of the gateway through which the cluster routes communications to
systems outside of the subnet.
8. In the Gateway Priority field, type the priority (integer) that determines which subnet gateway will be installed as the
default gateway on nodes that have more then one subnet.
A value of 1 represents the highest priority.
9. In the MTU list, type or select the size of the maximum transmission units the cluster uses in network communication. Any
numerical value is allowed, but must be compatible with your network and the configuration of all devices in the network
path. Common settings are 1500 (standard frames) and 9000 (jumbo frames). Note that the InfiniBand subnet will only
support 2044 and is not adjustable.
Although OneFS supports both 1500 MTU and 9000 MTU, using a larger frame size for network traffic permits more
efficient communication on the external network between clients and cluster nodes. For example, if a subnet is connected
through a 10 GbE interface and NIC aggregation is configured for IP address pools in the subnet, we recommend that you
set the MTU to 9000. To benefit from using jumbo frames, all devices in the network path must be configured to use jumbo
frames.
10. If you plan to use SmartConnect for connection balancing, in the SmartConnect Service IP field, type the IP address that
will receive all incoming DNS requests for each IP address pool according to the client connection policy. You must have at
least one subnet configured with a SmartConnect service IP in order to use connection balancing.
11. In the SmartConnect Service Name field, specify the SmartConnect service name. The SmartConnect service name is an
optional field to answer nameserver, Start of Authority, and other DNS queries. It specifies the domain name corresponding
to the SmartConnect Service IP (SSIP) address, serving as the glue record in the DNS delegation tying the nameserver and
IP address.
12. In the Advanced Settings section, you can enable VLAN tagging if you want to enable the cluster to participate in virtual
networks.
NOTE: Configuring a VLAN requires advanced knowledge of network switches. Consult your network switch
documentation before configuring your cluster for a VLAN.

13. If you enable VLAN tagging, specify a VLAN ID that corresponds to the ID number for the VLAN set on the switch, with a
value from 1 through 4094.
14. Click Remove IP to remove a hardware load balancing IP.
15. Click Add Subnet.

Related concepts
Subnets
IPv6 support

Networking 443
Modify a subnet
You can modify a subnet on the external network.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the subnet that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Subnet Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Subnet Details window.
4. Modify the subnet settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Subnets

Delete a subnet
You can delete a subnet from the external network.
Deleting an subnet that is in use can prevent access to the cluster. Client connections to the cluster through any IP address
pool that belongs to the deleted subnet will be terminated.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Delete Subnet next to the subnet that you want to delete.
3. At the confirmation prompt, click Delete.

Related concepts
Subnets

View subnet settings

You can view setting details for a specific subnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the subnet that you want to view.
The system displays the View Subnet Details window.
3. Click Close to close the window.

Related concepts
Subnets

Configure a SmartConnect service IP address

You can set a SmartConnect service IP address in a subnet that will receive all incoming DNS requests for each IP address pool
that is configured to use this subnet as a SmartConnect service subnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the subnet that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Subnet Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Subnet Details window.
4. In the SmartConnect Service IP field, type the IP address.
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Subnets
DNS request handling

444 Networking
Enable or disable VLAN tagging
You can configure a cluster to participate in multiple virtual private networks, also known as virtual LANs or VLANs. Note that
Infiniband subnets do not support VLANs.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the subnet that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Subnet Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Subnet Details window.
4. Select the Allow VLAN Tagging checkbox to enable or disable VLAN tagging.
5. If you enable VLAN tagging, type a number between 1 and 4094 in the VLAN ID field. The number must correspond to the
VLAN ID number set on the switch.
6. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Subnets
VLANs

Add or remove an IP address range per subnet

You can add or remove an IP address range within a subnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the subnet that you want to modify.
The system displays the View subnet details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit subnet details window.
4. To add a range, in the SmartConnect service IPs area, enter a range of IP addresses you want to assign to the subnet.
Specify the range in the following format: low IP address - high IP address
If you want to use a single IP address, enter the same IP address into both fields.
5. To add another range, click Add an IP range.
The system provides fields in which you can enter the low and high IP addresses of the additional range.
6. To delete an IP address range, click Remove IP range next to the range you want to delete.
7. Click Save Changes.

Managing IP address pools

You can create and manage IP address pools on the cluster.

Create an IP address pool

You can add an IP address pool to the external network. Pools are created under a subnet.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Add Pool next to the subnet that will contain the new IP address pool.
The system displays the Create Pool window.
3. In the Name field, specify the name of the new IP address pool.
The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and can include underscores or hyphens, but cannot include spaces
or other punctuation.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a descriptive comment about the IP address pool.
The comment can be no more than 128 characters.
5. From the Access Zone list, select the access zone you want associated with the IP address pool
Clients connecting through IP addresses in this pool can access data only in the associated access zone.

Networking 445
6. In the IP range area, enter a range of IP addresses you want assigned to the IP address pool in the fields provided.
Specify the range in the following format: <lower_ip_address>–<higher_ip_address>.
7. Click Add Pool.

Related concepts
IP address pools

Modify an IP address pool

You can modify an IP address pool on the external network.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. Modify the IP address pool settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
IP address pools

Delete an IP address pool

You can use the web interface to delete IP address pool settings.
Deleting an IP address pool that is in use can prevent access to the cluster. Client connections to the cluster through any IP
address in the pool will be terminated.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Delete Pool next to the IP address pool that you want to delete.
3. At the confirmation prompt, click Delete.

Related concepts
IP address pools

View IP address pool settings

You can view setting details for a specific IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to view.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Close to close the window.

Related concepts
IP address pools

Add or remove an IP address range

You can add or remove an IP address range within IP address pool settings.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.

446 Networking
4. To add a range, in the IP range area, enter a range of IP addresses you want assigned to the IP address pool in the fields
provided.
Specify the range in the following format: low IP address - high IP address
5. To add an additional range, click Add an IP range.
The system provides fields in which you can enter the low and high IP addresses of the additional range.
6. To delete an IP address range, click Remove IP range next to the range you want to delete.
7. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
IP address pools

Managing SmartConnect Settings

You can configure SmartConnect settings within each IP address pool on the cluster, and view the status of nodes in a network
pool.

Modify a SmartConnect DNS zone

You can specify a SmartConnect DNS zone and alternate DNS zone aliases that will handle DNS requests for an IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the SmartConnect Basic area, specify the SmartConnect DNS zone in the Zone name field.
The SmartConnect DNS zone should be a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
5. Optional: From the SmartConnect Advanced area, specify any aliases for the SmartConnect DNS zone in the
SmartConnect Zone Aliases field.
A SmartConnect Advanced license is required to specify zone aliases.
6. Click Save Changes.
To use the SmartConnect zone you need to configure your DNS infrastructure to delegate the DNS zone. Add a new name
server (NS) record pointing at the SmartConnect service IP address, and then add a zone delegation to the new name server
for the FQDN of the SmartConnect zone name.

Related concepts
SmartConnect zones and aliases

Specify a SmartConnect service subnet

You can designate a subnet as the SmartConnect service subnet for an IP address pool. The service subnet answers all DNS
requests on behalf of the pool's SmartConnect DNS zone.
The subnet that you designate as the SmartConnect service subnet must have a SmartConnect service IP address configured,
and the subnet must be in the same groupnet as the IP address pool. For example, although a pool might belong to subnet3, you
can designate subnet5 as the SmartConnect service subnet as long as both subnets are under the same groupnet.
If a pool does not have a designated service subnet, incoming DNS requests are answered by the subnet that contains the pool,
provided that the subnet is configured with a SmartConnect service IP address. Otherwise, the DNS requests are excluded.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.

Networking 447
4. From the SmartConnect Basic area, select a subnet from the SmartConnect Service Subnet list.
To add a single IP address to a subnet, add the same IP address in both of the range fields.
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
DNS name resolution

Related tasks
Configure a SmartConnect service IP address

Suspend or resume a node

You can suspend and resume SmartConnect DNS responses for a node.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. To suspend a node:
a. In the SmartConnect Suspended Nodes area, click Suspend Nodes.
The system displays the Suspend Nodes window.
b. Select a logical node number (LNN) from the Available table, and then click Add.
c. Click Suspend Nodes.
d. At the confirmation window, click Confirm.
5. To resume a node:
a. From the SmartConnect Suspended Nodes table, click the Resume button next to the node number you want to
resume.
b. At the confirmation window, click Confirm.
6. Click Close.

Related concepts
DNS name resolution

Configure IP address allocation

You can specify whether the IP addresses in an IP address pool are allocated to network interfaces statically or dynamically.
To configure dynamic IP address allocation, you must activate a SmartConnect Advanced license.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the Allocation Method list in the SmartConnect Advanced Settings area, select one of the following allocation
methods:
● Static
● Dynamic
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
IP address allocation

448 Networking
Supported IP allocation methods
The IP address allocation policy specifies how the IP addresses in the pool are assigned to an available network interface.
When a new pool is created the default IP allocation method is dynamic. You can specify whether to use static or dynamic
allocation.

Static Assigns one IP address to each network interface added to the IP address pool, but does not
guarantee that all IP addresses are assigned.
Once assigned, the network interface keeps the IP address indefinitely, even if the network interface
becomes unavailable. To release the IP address, remove the network interface from the pool or
remove it from the cluster.
Without a license for SmartConnect Advanced, static is the only method available for IP address
allocation.
Dynamic Assigns IP addresses to each network interface added to the IP address pool until all IP addresses are
assigned. This guarantees a response when clients connect to any IP address in the pool.
If a network interface becomes unavailable, its IP addresses are automatically moved to other available
network interfaces in the pool as determined by the IP address failover policy.
This method is only available with a license for SmartConnect Advanced.
Externally Managed Assigns IP addresses to nodes in the cluster that are based on an external coordinator as indicated
by the External Manager field. Externally Managed is only used in cloud deployments to automate
the allocation of IPs within Primary IP network pools along with the configuration of these pools.
SmartConnect creates these pools and cannot be changed to any other allocation method.

Related concepts
IP address allocation

Allocation recommendations based on file sharing protocols

It is recommended that you select a static allocation method if your clients connect through stateful protocols and a dynamic
allocation method with stateless protocols.
The following table displays several common protocols and the recommended allocation method:

Table 142. Allocation recommendations

File sharing protocol Recommended allocation method
● HTTP Static
● HDFS
● FTP
● sFTP
● FTPS
● SyncIQ
● SmartSync
● NFSv3 Dynamic
● NFSv4
● S3
● SMB

Related concepts
IP address allocation

Configure a connection balancing policy

You can set a connection balancing policy for an IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.

Networking 449
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the SmartConnect Advanced area, select one of the following balancing methods from the Client Connection
Balancing Policy list:
● Round-robin

NOTE: Round-robin is the default setting and the only balancing method available without activating a
SmartConnect Advanced license.

● Connection count
● Throughput
● CPU usage
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Connection balancing

Supported connection balancing methods

The connection balancing policy determines how the DNS server handles client connections to the cluster.
You can specify one of the following balancing methods:

Round-robin Selects the next available node on a rotating basis. This is the default method. Without a
SmartConnect license for advanced settings, this is the only method available for load balancing.
Connection count Determines the number of open TCP connections on each available node and selects the node with
the fewest client connections.
Network throughput Determines the average throughput on each available node and selects the node with the lowest
network interface load.
CPU usage Determines the average CPU utilization on each available node and selects the node with lightest
processor usage.

Related concepts
Connection balancing

Configure an IP failover policy

You can set an IP failover policy for an IP address pool.
To configure an IP failover policy, you must activate a SmartConnect Advanced license.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the SmartConnect Advanced area, select one of the following failover methods from the IP Failover Policy list:
● Round-robin
● Connection count
● Throughput
● CPU usage
5. Click Save Changes.

450 Networking
Related concepts
IP address failover

Configure an IP rebalance policy

You can configure a manual or automatic rebalance policy for an IP address pool.
To configure a rebalance policy for an IP address pool, you must activate a SmartConnect Advanced license and set the
allocation method to dynamic.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the SmartConnect Advanced area, select one of the following rebalancing methods from the Rebalance Policy list:
● Automatic
● Manual
5. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
IP address rebalancing

Supported rebalancing methods

The IP address rebalance policy specifies when to redistribute IP addresses if one or more previously unavailable network
interfaces becomes available again.
You can set rebalancing to occur manually or automatically:

Manual Does not redistribute IP addresses until you manually issue a rebalance command through the
command-line interface.
Upon rebalancing, IP addresses will be redistributed according to the connection balancing method
specified by the IP address failover policy defined for the IP address pool.
Automatic Automatically redistributes IP addresses according to the connection balancing method specified by
the IP address failover policy defined for the IP address pool.
Automatic rebalance may also be triggered by changes to cluster nodes, network interfaces, or the
configuration of the external network.
NOTE: Rebalancing can disrupt client connections. Ensure the client workflow on the IP address
pool is appropriate for automatic rebalancing.

Manually rebalance IP addresses

You can manually rebalance a specific IP address pool or all of the pools on the external network.
You must activate a SmartConnect Advanced license.
1. To manually rebalance IP addresses in a pool:
a. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
b. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
c. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
d. From the Advanced Settings area, click Rebalance Pool IPs.
e. At the confirmation window, click Confirm.
f. Click Cancel to close the Edit Pool Details window.
2. To manually rebalance all IP address pools:
a. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Settings.

Networking 451
 b. Click Rebalance All IPs.
c. At the confirmation window, click Confirm.

Related concepts
IP address rebalancing

Managing network interface members

You can add and remove network interfaces to IP address pools.

Add or remove a network interface

You can configure which network interfaces are assigned to an IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. To add a network interface to the IP address pool:
a. From the Pool Interface Members area, select the interface you want from the Available table.
If you add an aggregated interface to the pool, you cannot individually add any interfaces that are part of the aggregated
interface.
b. Click Add.
5. To remove a network interface from the IP address pool:
a. From the Pool Interface Members area, select the interface you want from the In Pool table.
b. Click Remove.
6. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Managing network interface members
Link aggregation

Configure link aggregation

You can combine multiple, physical external network interfaces on a node into a single logical interface through link aggregation.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. From the Pool Interface Members area, select the aggregated interface you want from the Available table and click Add.
5. From the Advanced Settings area, select one of the following link aggregation methods from the Aggregation Mode list:
● Round-robin
● Failover
● LACP
● Load Balance
6. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Link aggregation

452 Networking
Link aggregation modes
The link aggregation mode determines how traffic is balanced and routed among aggregated network interfaces. The
aggregation mode is selected on a per-pool basis and applies to all aggregated network interfaces in the IP address pool.
OneFS supports dynamic and static aggregation modes. A dynamic aggregation mode enables nodes with aggregated interfaces
to communicate with the switch so that the switch can use an analogous aggregation mode. Static modes do not facilitate
communication between nodes and the switch.

NOTE: Frontend InfiniBand interfaces do not support link aggregation.

OneFS provides support for the following link aggregation modes:

Link Aggregation Dynamic aggregation mode that supports the IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Control Protocol (LACP). You can configure LACP at the switch level, which allows the node to negotiate interface
(LACP) aggregation with the switch. LACP balances outgoing traffic across the interfaces based on hashed
protocol header information that includes the source and destination address and the VLAN tag, if
available. This option is the default aggregation mode.
Loadbalance (FEC) Static aggregation method that accepts all incoming traffic and balances outgoing traffic over
aggregated interfaces based on hashed protocol header information that includes source and
destination addresses.
Active/Passive Static aggregation mode that switches to the next active interface when the primary interface
Failover becomes unavailable. The primary interface handles traffic until there is an interruption in
communication. At that point, one of the secondary interfaces will take over the work of the primary.
Round-robin Static aggregation mode that rotates connections through the nodes in a first-in, first-out sequence,
handling all processes without priority. Balances outbound traffic across all active ports in the
aggregated link and accepts inbound traffic on any port.
NOTE: This method is not recommended if your cluster is handling TCP/IP workloads.

Related tasks
Configure link aggregation

Link aggregation mapping

Network interfaces that can be added to an IP address pool as an aggregated interface are included when viewing a list of
network interfaces on a node. The following table shows examples of how aggregated interfaces are mapped to non-aggregated
interfaces.

Table 143. Link aggregation mapping

Logical Network Interface (LNI) Aggregated LNI
ext-1 ext-agg = ext-1 + ext-2
ext-2

ext-1 ext-agg = ext-1 + ext-2

ext-2 10gige-agg-1 = 10gige-1 + 10gige-2
10gige-1
10gige-2

Related tasks
Configure link aggregation

Networking 453
Internal and external networks
A cluster includes two networks: an internal network to exchange data between nodes and an external network to handle client
connections.
Nodes exchange data through the internal network with a proprietary, unicast protocol over InfiniBand (IB) or Ethernet,
depending on the node model. Each node includes redundant InfiniBand or Ethernet ports for a second internal network in case
the first port fails. Ethernet is the only supported external network.

Supported network configurations are as follows:

Table 144. Network Connectivity

Generation/Node Type External Network Configurations Internal Network Configurations
Generation 5
X210 1 GigE, 10 GigE IB

Generation 6
A200 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

A2000 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

F800 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

F810 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE

H400 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE or IB

H500 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

H5600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

H600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE 40 GbE or IB

PowerScale Archive
A300 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, or IB

A3000 10 GbE, 25 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Hybrid
H700 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

H7000 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Nodes
B100 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F200 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F210 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or

10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE
IB

F600 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

F710 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or

40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or IB
IB

F900 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

454 Networking
Table 144. Network Connectivity (continued)
Generation/Node Type External Network Configurations Internal Network Configurations
F910 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or
40 GbE, 100 GbE, 200 GbE, or IB
IB

P100 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE 10 GbE, 25 GbE, 40 GbE, 100 GbE, or IB

PowerScale Archive, Hybrid, and PowerScale Flash nodes support InfiniBand and Ethernet for the internal network. You can mix
Generation 5, PowerScale, and PowerScale F200 and F600 nodes in the same cluster.
Clients reach the cluster using Ethernet or InfiniBand on the frontend network. Since every node includes Ethernet ports, the
cluster bandwidth scales with performance and capacity as nodes are added.

NOTE: InfiniBand for the frontend network is only supported on F710 and F910 node types.

CAUTION: Only Isilon or PowerScale nodes should be connected to the internal network, depending on the node
model. Information that is exchanged on the backend network is not encrypted. Connecting anything other than
Isilon or PowerScale nodes to the internal network creates a security risk.

Managing node provisioning rules

You can create and manage node provisioning rules that automate the configuration of new network interfaces.

Create a node provisioning rule

You can create a node provisioning rule to specify how network interfaces on new nodes are configured when the nodes are
added to the cluster. Node provisioning rules are created under an IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Add Rule next to the IP address pool that will contain the new node provisioning rule.
The system displays the Create Rule window.
3. From the Name field, specify the name of the new node provisioning rule.
4. Optional: In the Description field, type a descriptive comment about the rule.
The comment can be no more than 128 characters.
5. From the Interface Type list, select the network interface type that will be added to the pool when the new node is added
to the cluster.
6. From the Node Type list, select one of the following node types:
● Any
● Storage
● Accelerator
● Backup accelerator
The rule is applied when a node matching the selected type is added to the cluster.
7. Click Add rule.

Related concepts
Node provisioning rules

Modify a node provisioning rule

You can modify node provisioning rule settings.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the node provisioning rule that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Rule Details window.

Networking 455
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Rule Details window.
4. Modify the node provisioning rule settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Node provisioning rules

Delete a node provisioning rule

You can delete a node provisioning rule that is no longer necessary.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click More > Delete Rule next to the node provisioning rule that you want to delete.
3. At the confirmation prompt, click Delete.

Related concepts
Node provisioning rules

View node provisioning rule settings

You can view setting details for a specific node provisioning rule.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the node provisioning rule that you want to view.
The system displays the View Rule Details window.
3. Click Close to close the window.

Related concepts
Node provisioning rules

Managing routing options

You can provide additional control of the direction of outgoing client traffic through source-based routing or static route
configuration.
If both source-based routing and static routes are configured, the static routes will take priority for traffic that matches the
static routes.

Enable or disable source-based routing

You can enable or disable source-based routing globally on the cluster.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Settings.
2. Select or deselect the Enable source based routing checkbox.
3. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Source-based routing

Add or remove a static route

You can configure static routes to direct outgoing traffic to specific destinations through a specific gateway. Static routes are
configured at the IP address pool level.
Static routes must match the IP address family (IPv4 or IPv6) of the IP address pool they are configured within.

456 Networking
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. To add a static route:
a. From the Static Routes area, click Add static route.
The system displays the Create Static Route window.
b. In the Subnet field, specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the subnet that traffic will be routed to.
c. In the Netmask or Prefixlen field, specify the netmask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) of the subnet you provided.
d. In the Gateway field, specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the gateway that traffic will be routed through.
e. Click Add Static Route.
5. To remove a static route, from the Static Routes table, click the Remove button next to the route you want to delete.
6. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
Static routing

Managing DNS cache settings

You can set DNS cache settings for the external network.

Flush the DNS cache

You can simultaneously flush the DNS cache of each groupnet that has enabled DNS caching.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > DNS Cache.
2. From the Actions area, click Flush DNS Cache.
3. At the confirmation window, click Confirm.

Modify DNS cache settings

You can modify global settings that are applied to the DNS cache of each groupnet that has enabled DNS caching.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > DNS Cache.
2. Modify the DNS cache settings, and then click Save Changes.

DNS cache settings

You can configure settings for the DNS cache.

Table 145. DNS cache settings

Setting Description
TTL No Error Minimum Specifies the lower boundary on time-to-live for cache hits.
The default value is 30 seconds.

TTL No Error Maximum Specifies the upper boundary on time-to-live for cache hits.
The default value is 3600 seconds.

TTL Nonexistent Domain Minimum Specifies the lower boundary on time-to-live for nxdomain.
The default value is 15 seconds.

TTL Nonexistent Domain Maximum Specifies the upper boundary on time-to-live for nxdomain.

Networking 457
Table 145. DNS cache settings (continued)
Setting Description

The default value is 3600 seconds.

TTL Other Failures Minimum Specifies the lower boundary on time-to-live for non-
nxdomain failures.
The default value is 0 seconds.

TTL Other Failures Maximum Specifies the upper boundary on time-to-live for non-
nxdomain failures.
The default value is 60 seconds.

TTL Lower Limit For Server Failures Specifies the lower boundary on time-to-live for DNS server
failures.
The default value is 300 seconds.

TTL Upper Limit For Server Failures Specifies the upper boundary on time-to-live for DNS server
failures.
The default value is 3600 seconds.

Eager Refresh Specifies the lead time to refresh cache entries that are
nearing expiration.
The default value is 0 seconds.

Cache Entry Limit Specifies the maximum number of entries that the DNS cache
can contain.
The default value is 65536 entries.

Test Ping Delta Specifies the delta for checking the cbind cluster health.
The default value is 30 seconds.

Managing host-based firewalls and DSCP settings

The OneFS host-based firewall controls inbound traffic on the frontend network. You can enable default global policies or create
custom policies and rules that are based on your network management and security requirements.
In OneFS 9.9.0 and later, the Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) setting allows you to configure Cost of Service (CoS)
and Quality of Service (QoS) values on outgoing IP packets for four types of network traffic:
1. Transactional data: Data protocols such as SMB, NFS, HDFS (setdscp 18)
2. Network management: WebUI, SSH, SMTP, SNMP, syslog (setdscp 16)
3. Bulk data: Datamover, SyncIQ, backup (setdscp 10)
4. Best effort: All IP packets that are not matched to the other three DSCP rules (setdscp 0)
When IP packets are outgoing from the frontend ports, they are matched to these four rules. If DSCP is enabled and a match is
found on the source or destination port, the firewall engine marks the DSCP bits to the value specified in the corresponding rule.
This functionality applies only if both the firewall service and the DSCP setting are enabled.
The DSCP values are applied consistently throughout the cluster and are preserved across upgrades.

Enable or disable the DSCP setting

You can modify the OneFS DSCP setting to enable it. The default DSCP setting is disabled.
1. When the firewall service or DSCP is disabled, all DSCP settings can be changed. The settings are not applied until both the
firewall and DSCP are enabled. To modify the DSCP setting, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration > DSCP
Setting.
2. Click the DSCP Setting toggle switch to enable or disable DSCP on the cluster.

458 Networking
3. Click Reset Default Settings to reset the default DSCP setting to disabled.
4. Under the DSCP Rules section, click Edit Rule to modify a rule name, DSCP value, and the source or destination port list.
Select the checkbox to Include All Source Port IPs and Include All Destination Port IPs.

Modify the OneFS firewall service

You can modify the OneFS firewall service settings.
1. When the firewall service is enabled, all external network traffic is filtered according to the firewall policies and rules. To
modify the firewall service, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration > Settings.
2. Click the toggle switch to enable or disable the firewall service on the cluster.

Create a firewall policy

You can create custom firewall policies.
1. Click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration > Firewall Policies tab.
2. Click Create Policy.
3. In the Create Policy window, configure the following settings that you want to apply to this policy:
● Policy Name
● Description
● Default Action of Allow or Deny.
4. Click Save.

View a firewall policy

You can view a list of all firewall policies on the cluster, or view the details of a specific policy.
1. To view a firewall policy, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, you can view the list of firewall policies. Expand a policy to view the rules associated with that
policy.

Create a firewall rule

You can create a custom firewall rule to add to a default or custom policy.
1. Click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration > Firewall Policies tab.
2. Expand the policy that you want to create a rule for.
3. Click Add Rule.
4. In the Add Rule window, configure the following settings that you want to apply to this rule:
● Rule name
● Description
● Index: indicates which order to apply the rules in a given policy.
● Action: Allow, Deny or Reject.
● Protocol: ALL, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMP6.
● Destination ports: indicates the destination ports. Separate multiple values with a comma.
● Source ports: indicates the source ports. Separate multiple values with a comma.
● Source networks: indicates the source networks. Separate multiple values with a comma.
5. Click Save.

View a firewall rule

You can view the details of a specific firewall rule.
1. To view a firewall rule, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, expand a policy to view the associated rules.

Networking 459
Modify a firewall rule
You can modify an existing firewall rule.
1. To modify a firewall rule, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, expand the policy that contains the rule you want to delete. Locate the rule and click the
pencil icon to edit the rule.
3. Click Save.

Delete a firewall rule

You can delete an existing firewall rule that you no longer need.
1. To delete a firewall rule, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, expand the policy that contains the rule you want to delete. Locate the rule and click the X to
delete the rule. You are asked to confirm.

Clone a firewall policy

You can clone a firewall policy and all its rules to a new policy. Cloning is helpful when you intend to create a policy based on a
complex existing policy.
1. To clone a firewall policy, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, locate the policy that you want to clone and click More Actions > Clone policy.
3. Edit the policy details and click Save.

Delete a firewall policy

You can delete a firewall policy that you no longer need.
1. To clone a firewall policy, click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration. To clone a firewall policy, click Cluster
Management > Firewall Configuration.
2. On the Firewall Policies tab, locate the policy that you want to clone and click More Actions > Delete. You are asked to
confirm. The default_subnets_policy and default_pools_policy cannot be deleted.

Associate a network subnet or pool to a firewall policy

You can associate a network subnet or a pool to a firewall policy.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network configuration.
2. On the External network tab, you can select a subnet or a pool and click View/Edit.
3. In the Edit subnet details window, click Edit.
4. Scroll to the Firewall policy section and in the drop-down, select the policy to associate with this pool.
5. Click Save changes.

Reset the global default firewall policies

You can reset the global OneFS firewall policies.
1. Click Cluster Management > Firewall Configuration > Settings.
2. Click the button to Reset default policies.
3. Click Reset to confirm the action.

460 Networking
Managing TCP ports
You can modify the list of client TCP ports available to the external network.
OneFS uses TCP ports that are configured in the WebUI under Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Settings
to drop TCP sessions on failover. This configuration can assist with protocol failover for the following reason: If a client is
connected to IP X on node Y and the IP moves, the TCP connection may take some time to notice the change and failover. But
if you configure the port it is using (for example, port 111 for NFS), OneFS will explicitly end the TCP session. This reduces the
time that is required for the connection to failover.

Add or remove TCP ports

You can add and remove TCP ports from the list of ports available for the external network.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > Settings.
2. To add a TCP port:
a. From the TCP Ports area, click Add TCP Ports.
The system displays the Add TCP Ports window.
b. In the TCP Ports field, type a port number.
c. Optional: Click Add another port to specify additional port numbers.
d. Click Add Ports.
3. To remove a TCP port, from the TCP Ports table, click the Remove button next to the port you want to delete.
4. Click Save Changes.

Networking 461
 32
NFSoRDMA
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• RDMA support for NFSoRDMA
• Enable NFSoRDMA
• Disable NFSoRDMA
• View interface details of a node
• View IP address pool details
• Create an IP address pool with NFSoRDMA capabilities
• Modify an existing IP address pool

RDMA support for NFSoRDMA

The Network File System over Remote Direct Memory Access (NFSoRDMA) feature lets you perform memory-to-memory
transfer of data over high-speed networks. In OneFS [Link] and later releases, NFSv4 is supported. In previous versions of
OneFS, only NFSv3 was supported.
Network adapters that have RDMA support (known as RNICs) are used to transfer data directly, while using minimal amount of
CPU, resulting in increased throughput. For applications that access large datasets on remote NFS, this feature enables:
● Increased single-stream throughput to leverage the full throughput of high-speed networks where the network interface
controllers coordinate the transfer of large amounts of data at line speed.
● Low latency to provide fast responses to network requests, and, as a result, makes remote file storage feel as if it is directly
attached storage.
● Low CPU utilization to use fewer CPU cycles when transferring data over the network, which leaves more power available to
other applications running on the client.
The NFSoRDMA feature adds another front-end network transport communication mechanism between the client and OneFS
node. The front-end network transport communication provides remote data transfer directly to and from memory without CPU
intervention. This feature improves CPU utilization on the client machine and improve read or write throughput.
The NFSv4 over RDMA feature requires that clients have RDMA drivers and appropriate NFSv4 over RDMA clients on their
system to be compatible.
The NFSoRDMA is supported for only NFSv3/NFSv4 and not supported for VLAN and Aggregated interfaces.
NOTE: The NFSoRDMA feature requires that you have the Node Firmware Package (NFP) version 11.6.1 installed on your
cluster, and the following patch for your version of OneFS:
● OneFS [Link] or later - no patch required
● OneFS 9.4 - patch [Link] or later
● OneFS 9.3 - patch [Link] or later
● OneFS 9.2.1 - patch [Link] or later
For more information about NFP versions, see the release notes.

Enable NFSoRDMA
You can enable NFSoRDMA on clusters that have RDMA capable NICs.
Log in to the OneFS web administration interface as a user with the administrator role.
1. Click Protocols > UNIX sharing (NFS) > Global settings.
2. In the Edit NFS global settings area, select the NFSoRDMA check box.

462 NFSoRDMA
 This checkbox is applicable to both NFSv3 and NFSv4.
3. Click Save.
The NFSoRDMA feature is enabled.
If you enable NFSoRDMA and the cluster does not have RDMA capable NICs, the following warning appears but the settings
are saved.

Cluster does not have any RDMA capable NICs

Disable NFSoRDMA
You can disable the NFS share with interface having NFSoRDMA capabilities.
Log in to the OneFS web administration interface as a user with the administrator role.
1. Click Protocols > UNIX sharing (NFS) > Global settings.
2. In the Edit NFS global settings area, clear the NFSoRDMA check box.
This checkbox is applicable to both NFSv3 and NFSv4.
3. Click Save.
The NFSoRDMA feature is disabled.

View interface details of a node

You can enable the NFS share with an interface having NFSoRDMA capabilities.
Log in to the OneFS web administration interface as a user with the administrator role.
1. Click Cluster management > Hardware configuration.
2. In the Hardware configuration page, click Cluster.
3. Click View details next to the node whose interface details you want to view.
The Interface details window appears.
4. View the interface details. Under interface flags, the SUPPORTS_RDMA_RRoCE flag property appears, denoting the
ability of NFSoRDMA for that interface.
Click Close to exit the Interface details window.

View IP address pool details

You can view if the NFSoRDMA feature is enabled or disabled for a specific IP address pool.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to view.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Under the Pool interface members area, you can view if NFSoRDMA is enabled or disabled.

Create an IP address pool with NFSoRDMA

capabilities
You can enable NFSoRDMA to filter out the interfaces that have NFSoRDMA capabilities and create an IP address pool with
only NFSoRDMA capabilities.
1. Click Cluster management > Network configuration > External network.
2. Click More > Add pool next to the subnet that will contain the new IP address pool.
The system displays the Create Pool window.
3. Under the Pool interface members section, select the Pool requires RDMA capable interfaces check box. For entering
the other details while creating the pool, see Create an IP address pool.

NFSoRDMA 463
 To ensure that NFS over RDMA is working as expected, make sure that the NFSoRDMA option is enabled in NFS global
settings. This checkbox is applicable to both NFSv3 and NFSv4.
4. Click Add pool.
An IP address pool with NFSoRDMA capabilities is created.
You can clear the Pool requires RDMA capable interfaces check box to disable NFSoRDMA capabilities from the IP
address pool.

Modify an existing IP address pool

You can enable NFSoRDMA on the pool by modifying an existing IP address pool on the external network.
1. Click Cluster Management > Network Configuration > External Network.
2. Click View/Edit next to the IP address pool that you want to view or modify.
The system displays the View Pool Details window.
3. Click Edit.
The system displays the Edit Pool Details window.
4. Select the Enable NFSoRDMA check box.
This checkbox is applicable to both NFSv3 and NFSv4.
The Confirm Action dialog box appears with the following message:

On enabling NFSoRDMA on the pool, interfaces selected in the pool which are not
NFSoRDMA enabled will be removed. Do you want to procced?

5. Click Proceed to enable NFSoRDMA on the pool.

Click Cancel to exit the Confirm Action dialog box.

464 NFSoRDMA
 33
Smart QoS
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Smart QoS
• Workload monitoring
• Create a standard dataset
• Pin a workload
• Throttle a workload
• Additional information

Smart QoS
You can define and monitor performance-related issues on the cluster using OneFS Smart QoS monitoring.
As clusters increase in size and the number of competing workloads place demands on system resources, more visibility is
required to share cluster resources equitably. Smart QoS provides you with fine-grained accounting of the dynamic resources
which helps in the better utilization and performance of the cluster.
OneFS supports Smart QoS monitoring with several protocols, including NFS, SMB, and S3. You can use Smart QoS monitoring
to define performance datasets to enable tracking any combination of directories, shares, users, clients, and access zones. You
can view the associated performance statistics, including protocols operations, disk operations, read/write bandwidth, and CPU.
You can configure customized settings and filters to match specific workloads for a dataset that meets the required criteria.
Reported statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds. The performance dataset data is available to you through the CLI and PAPI.

Workload monitoring
Workload monitoring is a key for show-back and charge-back resource accounting.
Workload is a set of identification metrics and resource consumption metrics. For example:

{username bob zone_name System}

{cpu 1.2 s, bytes_in 10 K, bytes_out 20 M,...}

Indicates that the user bob in the zone System consumed 1.2 s of CPU with 10 Kb bytes in and 20 Mb bytes out, and so on.
Dataset is a specification of identification metrics to aggregate workloads by, and the workloads collected that match
that specification. For instance, the workload above would be in a dataset that specified identification metrics {username,
zone_name}.
Filter is a method for including only workloads that match specific identification metrics. For example, take the following
workloads for a dataset with filter {zone_name:System}:
● {username:bob , zone_name:System} would be included.
● {username:mary , zone_name:System} would be included.
● {username:bob , zone_name:Quarantine} would not be included.
A performance dataset automatically collects a list of the top workloads, with pinning and filtering to allow further customization
to that list.

Create a standard dataset

You can create a new dataset.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.

Smart QoS 465

2. Click Create Performance Dataset.
3. Enter the dataset name and select the identification metrics that the dataset will monitor.
4. Click Save.

View datasets
You can view the list of configured performance datasets.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. Select the tab for an individual dataset to view the details of that dataset.

Modify details of dataset

You can modify the name of a configured dataset.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset that you want to rename, click Rename Dataset.
3. Enter a new dataset name and click Save.

Delete dataset
You can delete a dataset.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset that you want to delete, click Delete Dataset.
3. Click Delete to confirm.

Pin a workload
If you want a workload to be always visible, you can pin it.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab of the dataset that contains the workload that you want to pin, click Pin Workload.
3. Select the identification metrics and set the optional Protocol Ops limit to throttle the workload.
4. If you are throttling the workload, click Pin and Throttle Workload.
5. If you are not throttling the workload, click Pin workload.
6. If you have other workloads to pin, check the box for Pin another workload before clicking Pin and Throttle Workload or
Pin workload.

View a pinned workload

You can view the details of a pinned workload.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset that has the pinned workload that you want to view, click the Pinned Workloads tab.

Unpin a workload
You can unpin a workload.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset that has the pinned workload that you want to unpin, in the Actions column, click Unpin.
3. Click Unpin to confirm.

466 Smart QoS

Throttle a workload
You can set a protocol operations limit on a pinned workload.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset with the workload that you want to throttle, click the Pinned Workloads tab.
3. In the Actions column, click Throttle Workload.
4. Enter an integer value limit for throttling.
NOTE: Setting a protocol operation limit on the root of /ifs or on the System access zone can cause performance
degradation.
5. Click Save to confirm.

Modify a workload throttle

You can modify the protocol operations limit on a pinned workload.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset with the throttled workload, click the Pinned Workload tab.
3. Click More.
4. Click Edit Throttle.
5. Enter a new integer value limit for throttling.
6. Click Save to confirm.

Remove a workload throttle

You can remove the protocol operations limit from a pinned workload.
1. Click Cluster management > Smart QoS.
2. On the tab for the dataset with the throttled workload, click the Pinned Workload tab.
3. In the Actions column, click Remove Throttle.
4. Click Remove Throttle to confirm.

Additional information
These pointers provide you with some tips regarding the feature.
● Name lookup failures, for example UID to username mappings, are reported in an additional column in the statistics output.
● When using a username or group name for Smart QoS metrics, the zone name of the user or group must be specified in
order for the username or group to resolve.
● Statistics are updated every 30 s. A newly created dataset does not show up in the statistics. Similarly, an old dataset might
show up until that update occurs.
● Some identification metrics may not be available until post commit when upgrading.
● export_id and share_name metrics can be combined in a dataset.
○ Dataset with both metrics list workloads with either export_id or share_name.
○ Dataset with only the share_name metric excludes NFS workloads.
○ Dataset with only export_id metric excludes SMB workloads.
● Paths and Non-Primary groups are only reported if they are pinned or have a filter that is applied.
● Paths and Non-Primary groups might result in work being accounted twice within the same dataset, as they can match
multiple workloads. The total amount that is overaccounted within a dataset is aggregated into the Overaccounted workload.

Smart QoS 467

 34
Antivirus
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Antivirus overview
• On-access scanning
• ICAP Antivirus policy scanning
• Individual file scanning using ICAP
• WORM files and antivirus
• Antivirus scan reports
• ICAP servers
• CAVA servers
• ICAP threat responses
• CAVA threat responses
• Configuring global antivirus settings
• Managing ICAP servers
• Managing CAVA servers
• Create an antivirus policy
• Managing ICAP antivirus policies
• Managing antivirus scans
• Managing antivirus threats
• Managing antivirus reports

Antivirus overview
You can scan the files that you store on a PowerScale cluster for viruses, malware, and other security threats by integrating
with third-party scanning services through the Internet Content Adaptation Protocol (ICAP) or the Common AntiVirus Agent
(CAVA).
OneFS sends files through ICAP or CAVA to a server running third-party antivirus scanning software. These servers are called
ICAP servers or CAVA servers. These servers scan files for viruses.
After a server scans a file, it notifies OneFS of whether the file is a threat. If a threat is detected, OneFS notifies system
administrators by creating an event, displaying near real-time summary information, and documenting the threat in an antivirus
scan report. You can configure OneFS to request that ICAP or CAVA servers attempt to repair infected files. You can also
configure OneFS to protect users against potentially dangerous files by truncating or quarantining infected files.
Before OneFS sends a file for scanning, it ensures that the scan is not redundant. If a scanned file has not been modified since
the last scan, the file will not be scanned again unless the virus database on the antivirus server has been updated since the last
scan.

NOTE: Antivirus scanning is available only on nodes in the cluster that are connected to the external network.

On-access scanning
You can configure OneFS to send files to be scanned before they are opened, after they are closed, or both. This can be done
through file access protocols such as SMB, NFS, and SSH. Sending files to be scanned after they are closed is faster but less
secure. Sending files to be scanned before they are opened is slower but more secure.
If OneFS is configured to ensure that files are scanned after they are closed, when a user creates or modifies a file on the
cluster, OneFS queues the file to be scanned. OneFS then sends the file to an ICAP or CAVA server to be scanned when
convenient. In this configuration, users can always access files without any delay. However, it is possible that after a user

468 Antivirus
modifies or creates a file, a second user might access the file before the file is scanned. If a virus was introduced to the file from
the first user, the second user will be able to access the infected file. Also, if an ICAP or CAVA server is unable to scan a file, the
file will still be accessible to users.
If OneFS ensures that files are scanned before they are opened, when a user attempts to download a file from the cluster,
OneFS first sends the file to an ICAP or CAVA server to be scanned. The file is not sent to the user until the scan is complete.
Scanning files before they are opened is more secure than scanning files after they are closed, because users can access only
scanned files. However, scanning files before they are opened requires users to wait for files to be scanned. You can also
configure OneFS to deny access to files that cannot be scanned by an ICAP or CAVA server, which can increase the delay. For
example, if no ICAP or CAVA servers are available, users will not be able to access any files until the servers become available
again.
If you configure OneFS to ensure that files are scanned before they are opened, it is recommended that you also configure
OneFS to ensure that files are scanned after they are closed. Scanning files as they are both opened and closed will not
necessarily improve security, but it will usually improve data availability when compared to scanning files only when they are
opened. If a user wants to access a file, the file may have already been scanned after the file was last modified, and will not
need to be scanned again if the antivirus server database has not been updated since the last scan.

NOTE: When scanning, do not exclude any file types (extensions). This ensures that any renamed files are caught.

Related tasks
Configure on-access scanning settings

ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

ICAP supports setting antivirus policies. You can use the OneFS Job Engine to create ICAP antivirus scanning policies that send
files from a specified directory to be scanned. ICAP antivirus policies can be run manually at any time, or configured to run
according to a schedule.
ICAP antivirus policies target a specific directory on the cluster. You can prevent an antivirus policy from sending certain files
within the specified root directory based on the size, name, or extension of the file. On-access scans also support filtering by
size, name, and extensions, using the isi antivirus icap settings command. ICAP antivirus policies do not target
snapshots. Only on-access scans include snapshots.

Related concepts
Managing ICAP antivirus policies

Related tasks
Create an antivirus policy

Individual file scanning using ICAP

You can send a specific file to an ICAP server to be scanned at any time.
If a virus is detected in a file but the ICAP server is unable to repair it, you can send the file to the ICAP server after the virus
database had been updated, and the ICAP server might be able to repair the file. You can also scan individual files to test the
connection between the cluster and ICAP servers.

WORM files and antivirus

WORM (write-once, read-many) files can be scanned and quarantined by antivirus software, but cannot be repaired or deleted
until their retention period expires.
The SmartLock software module enables you to identify a directory in OneFS as a WORM domain. All files within the WORM
domain will be committed to a WORM state, meaning that those files cannot be overwritten, modified, or deleted.
As with other files in OneFS, WORM files can be scanned for viruses and other security threats. However, because of their
protected read-only nature, WORM files cannot be repaired or deleted during an antivirus scan. If a WORM file is found to be a
threat, the file is quarantined.

Antivirus 469
When practical, you can initiate an antivirus scan on files before they are committed to a WORM state.

Antivirus scan reports

OneFS generates reports about antivirus scans. Each time that an ICAP antivirus policy is run, OneFS generates a report for
that policy. OneFS also generates a report every 24 hours that includes all on-access scans that occurred during the day.
Antivirus scan reports contain the following information:
● The time that the scan started.
● The time that the scan ended.
● The total number of files scanned.
● The total size of the files scanned.
● The total network traffic sent.
● The network throughput that was consumed by virus scanning.
● Whether the scan succeeded.
● The total number of infected files detected.
● The names of infected files.
● The threats associated with infected files.
● How OneFS responded to detected threats.

Related concepts
Managing antivirus reports

Related tasks
Configure antivirus report retention settings
View antivirus reports

ICAP servers
The number of ICAP servers that are required to support a PowerScale cluster depends on how virus scanning is configured, the
amount of data a cluster processes, and the processing power of the ICAP servers.
If you intend to scan files exclusively through anti-virus scan policies, it is recommended that you have a minimum of two ICAP
servers per cluster. If you intend to scan files on access, it is recommended that you have at least one ICAP server for each
node in the cluster.
If you configure more than one ICAP server for a cluster, ensure that the processing power of each ICAP server is relatively
equal. OneFS distributes files to the ICAP servers on a rotating basis, regardless of the processing power of the ICAP servers. If
one server is more powerful than another, OneFS does not send more files to the more powerful server.
CAUTION: When files are sent from the cluster to an ICAP server, they are sent across the network in
cleartext. Ensure that the path from the cluster to the ICAP server is on a trusted network. Authentication
is not supported. If authentication is required between an ICAP client and ICAP server, hop-by-hop Proxy
Authentication must be used.

Related concepts
Managing ICAP servers

Related tasks
Add and connect to an ICAP server

470 Antivirus
CAVA servers
CAVA uses industry-standard Server Message Block (SMB) protocol versions 2 and 3 in a Microsoft Windows Server
environment. CAVA uses third-party antivirus software to identify and eliminate known viruses before they infect files on the
system.
You can use the CAVA calculator and the CAVA sizing tool to determine the number of antivirus servers that the system
requires. It is recommended that you start with one Common Event Enabler (CEE) server per two nodes and adjust the number
as needed. For information about the sizing tool and using CAVA on Windows platforms, see the chapter Monitoring and Sizing
the Antivirus Agent in the Dell Technologies latest version of the CEE document Using the Common Event Enabler on Windows.

ICAP threat responses

You can configure the system to repair, quarantine, or truncate any files that the ICAP server detects viruses in.
OneFS and ICAP servers react in one or more of the following ways when threats are detected:

Alert All threats that are detected cause an event to be generated in OneFS at the warning level, regardless
of the threat response configuration.
Repair The ICAP server attempts to repair the infected file before returning the file to OneFS.
Quarantine OneFS quarantines the infected file. A quarantined file cannot be accessed by any user. However, a
quarantined file can be removed from quarantine by the root user if the root user is connected to the
cluster through secure shell (SSH). If you back up your cluster through NDMP backup, quarantined
files remain quarantined when the files are restored. If you replicate quarantined files to another
PowerScale cluster, the quarantined files continue to be quarantined on the target cluster. However,
transferring anti-virus files attributes using SyncIQ is not supported.
NOTE: A potentially harmful file that was scanned and quarantined on the primary side is
replicated on the target side without the quarantine flag. This means that file is potentially
accessible on the target although read only. Workaround: Switch the scan policy to scan-on-read
during failover.
Quarantines operate independently of access control lists (ACLs).
Truncate OneFS truncates the infected file. When a file is truncated, OneFS reduces the size of the file to zero
bytes to render the file harmless.

You can configure OneFS and ICAP servers to react in one of the following ways when threats are detected:

Repair or quarantine Attempts to repair infected files. If an ICAP server fails to repair a file, OneFS quarantines the file. If
the ICAP server repairs the file successfully, OneFS sends the file to the user. Repair or quarantine
can be useful if you want to protect users from accessing infected files while retaining all data on a
cluster.
Repair or truncate Attempts to repair infected files. If an ICAP server fails to repair a file, OneFS truncates the file. If the
ICAP server repairs the file successfully, OneFS sends the file to the user. Repair or truncate can be
useful if you do not care about retaining all data on your cluster, and you want to free storage space.
However, data in infected files will be lost.
Alert only Only generates an event for each infected file. It is recommended that you do not apply this setting.
Repair only Attempts to repair infected files. Afterwards, OneFS sends the files to the user, whether or not the
ICAP server repaired the files successfully. It is recommended that you do not apply this setting. If you
only attempt to repair files, users will still be able to access infected files that cannot be repaired.
Quarantine Quarantines all infected files. It is recommended that you do not apply this setting. If you quarantine
files without attempting to repair them, you might deny access to infected files that could have been
repaired.
Truncate Truncates all infected files. It is recommended that you do not apply this setting. If you truncate files
without attempting to repair them, you might delete data unnecessarily.

Related tasks
Configure antivirus threat response settings

Antivirus 471
CAVA threat responses
You configure CAVA threat responses in the antivirus software you use.
See your CAVA antivirus software documentation for information about how to configure your CAVA software to perform threat
handling.

Configuring global antivirus settings

You can configure global antivirus settings that are applied to all antivirus scans by default.

Exclude files from antivirus scans

You can exclude files from antivirus scans.
NOTE: The settings that are listed below apply to all antivirus scans. All settings apply to on-access scanning only, and
policy scan settings are per-policy under the Policy tab.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Settings.
2. Optional: To exclude files based on file size, in the Maximum File Scan Size area, specify the largest file size that you want
to scan.
3. To exclude files based on file name, perform the following steps:
a. Select Enable filters.
b. In the Filter Matching area, specify whether you want to scan all files that match a specified filter or all files that do not
match a specified filter.
c. Specify one or more filters.
i. Click Add Filters.
ii. Specify the filter.
You can include the following wildcard characters:

Table 146. Wildcard characters

Wildcard character Description
* Matches any string in place of the asterisk. For example,
specifying m* would match movies and m123.

[ ] Matches any characters that are contained in the

brackets, or a range of characters separated by a dash.
For example, specifying b[aei]t would match bat,
bet, and bit.
For example, specifying 1[4-7]2 would match 142,
152, 162, and 172.
You can exclude characters within brackets by following
the first bracket with an exclamation mark.
For example, specifying b[!ie] would match bat but
not bit or bet.
You can match a bracket within a bracket if it is either
the first or last character.
For example, specifying [[c]at would match cat and
[at.
You can match a dash within a bracket if it is either the
first or last character.
For example, specifying car[-s] would match cars
and car-.

472 Antivirus
 Table 146. Wildcard characters (continued)
Wildcard character Description

? Matches any character in place of the question mark.

For example, specifying t?p would match tap, tip, and
top.

iii. Click Add Filters.

4. Click Save Changes.

Configure on-access scanning settings

You can configure OneFS to automatically scan files as they are accessed by users. On-access scans operate independently of
antivirus policies.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Settings.
2. In the On-Access Scans area, specify whether you want files to be scanned as they are accessed.
● To require that all files be scanned before they are opened by a user, select Enable scan of files on open, and then
specify whether you want to allow access to files that cannot be scanned by selecting or clearing Enable file access
when scanning fails.
● To scan files after they are closed, select Enable scan of files on close.
3. In the All Scans area, in the Path Prefixes field, specify the directories that you want to apply on-access settings to.
4. Click Save Changes.

Related concepts
On-access scanning

Configure antivirus threat response settings

You can configure how OneFS responds to detected threats.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Settings.
2. In the Action On Detection area, specify how you want OneFS to react to potentially infected files.

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

Configure antivirus report retention settings

You can configure how long OneFS retains antivirus reports before automatically deleting them.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Settings.
2. In the Reports area, specify how long you want OneFS to keep reports.

Related concepts
Antivirus scan reports

Enable or disable antivirus scanning

You can enable or disable all antivirus scanning.
This procedure is available only through the web administration interface.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Summary.
2. In the Service area, select or clear Enable Antivirus service.

Antivirus 473
Managing ICAP servers
Before you can send files to be scanned on an ICAP server, you must configure OneFS to connect to the server. You can test,
modify, and remove an ICAP server connection. You can also temporarily disconnect and reconnect to an ICAP server.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Add and connect to an ICAP server

You can add and connect to an ICAP server. After a server is added, OneFS can send files to the server to be scanned for
viruses.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers area, click Add an ICAP Server.
3. Optional: To enable the ICAP server, click Enable ICAP Server.
4. In the Create ICAP Server dialog box, in the ICAP Server URL field, type the IPv4 or IPv6 address of an ICAP server.
5. Optional: To add a description of the server, type text into the Description field.
6. Click Add Server.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Test an ICAP server connection

You can test the connection between the OneFS and an ICAP server. This procedure is available only through the web
administration interface.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers table, in the row for the ICAP server, click View / Edit.
If the cluster is connected to the ICAP server, in the Details area, active will appear in the Status field.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Modify ICAP connection settings

You can modify the IP address and optional description of ICAP server connections.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers table, in the row for an ICAP server, click View / Edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Modify settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Related tasks
Test an ICAP server connection

474 Antivirus
Temporarily disconnect from an ICAP server
If you want to prevent OneFS from sending files to an ICAP server, but want to retain the ICAP server connection settings, you
can temporarily disconnect from the ICAP server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers table, in the row for an ICAP server, click View / Edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Clear the Enable ICAP Server box and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Related tasks
Reconnect to an ICAP server

Reconnect to an ICAP server

You can reconnect to an ICAP server that you have temporarily disconnected from.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP > Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers table, in the row for an ICAP server, click View / Edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Select Enable ICAP Server, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Related tasks
Temporarily disconnect from an ICAP server

Remove an ICAP server

You can permanently disconnect from the ICAP server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP > Servers.
2. In the ICAP Servers table, in the row for an ICAP server, click Delete.

Related concepts
ICAP servers

Related tasks
Add and connect to an ICAP server

Managing CAVA servers

To enable scanning files on a CAVA server, you create (or modify) the CAVA server configuration.
Each node can have multiple connections to the CAVA server. The number of connections is based on an internal algorithm.

Antivirus 475
Add and connect to a CAVA server
You can add and connect to a CAVA server. After a server is added, OneFS can send files to the server to be scanned for
viruses.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Servers area, click Add server.
3. Optional: To enable the CAVA server, click Enable this server checkbox.
4. In the Create CAVA antivirus server dialog box, in the Server URL field, type the IPv4 or IPv6 address or URL of a CAVA
server.
5. In the Server name field, type the name of the server.
6. Click Add Server.

List or view CAVA servers

You can list or view the connection to a CAVA server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Servers table, in the row for an CAVA server, click View / Edit.

Modify CAVA connection settings

You can modify the server name and IP address of CAVA server connections.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Servers table, in the row for an CAVA server, click View / Edit.
3. Modify settings, and then click Save Changes.

Disable connection to a CAVA server

You can disable the connection to a CAVA server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Servers area, next to the server to disable, click View/Edit.
3. Optional: To disable the CAVA server, uncheck the Enable this server checkbox.
4. Click Save changes.

Delete connection to a CAVA server

You can delete the connection to a CAVA server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Servers area, next to the server to disable, click Delete.
3. On the confirmation dialog, click Delete.

Add a job to a CAVA server

You can add a job to a CAVA server. CAVA jobs are similar to ICAP policies: you use them to configure and manage antivirus
scans.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Jobs area, click the Add job button.
3. Optional: Add a name in the Job name field and make other configuration settings.
4. Click Add job.

476 Antivirus
View an IP pool in a CAVA server
You can add an IP pool to a CAVA server. The purpose of creating an IP pool is to facilitate the connections from anti-virus
applications. This dedicated IP pools should only be used by the anti-virus applications. To achieve that, Dell EMC recommends
the IP ranges in this IP pool must be exclusive and only available to the CAVA servers.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Settings area, view the IP Pool field.
3. Optional: Note: To add an IP pool, click Cluster management > Network configuration.

Create an Active Directory authentication provider for the

AvVendor access zone
All the anti-virus application servers and PowerScale cluster should be in the same domain.
See the section Managing Active Directory Providers in the Authentication chapter of this guide for details about how to join
and Active Directory domain.
1. Click Access > Authentication providers > Active Directory.
2. In the Active Directory providers area, click Join a domain.
3. In the Add an Active Directory provider dialog box, check the Enable authentication and identity managemnet
through authentication provider checkbox.
4. Click Join.

Update the role in the access zone

The CHECK$ share is a hidden share that allows access to all files on the cluster. It is used exclusively by the antivirus software
running on a Windows server. Since the CHECK$ share allows access to all files on the cluster, any user accessing the share
must have a unique privilege. The hidden ISI_PRIV_AV_VENDOR privilege within AVVendor role will be added to give the user
account used by the antivirus software access to the CHECK$ share.
1. Click Access > Memberships and roles > Roles.
2. In the Roles area, click the name of the user to update and click View/Edit.
3. Optional: In the View role details dialog, click Edit role.
4. Assign the user to the role AVVendor.
5. Click Save changes.

Scan CloudPool files in a CAVA server

You can scan files in CloudPools using a CAVA configuration. Note that by default, scanning of CloudPools files is disabled to
prevent the unexpected cost of file callback.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > CAVA.
2. In the Settings area, next to the scan zone, click the View/Edit button.
3. In the Scan zone details area, click the Scan cloudpools files checkbox.

Create an antivirus policy

You can create an antivirus policy that causes specific files to be scanned for viruses each time the policy is run.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Policies.
2. Click Create an Antivirus Policy.
3. Optional: To enable the policy, click Enable antivirus policy.
4. In the Policy Name field, type a name for the antivirus policy.
5. Optional: To specify an optional description of the policy, in the Description field, type a description.
6. In the Paths field, specify the directory that you want to scan.

Antivirus 477
 Optionally, click Add another directory path to specify additional directories.
7. In the Recursion Depth area, specify how much of the specified directories you want to scan.
● To scan all subdirectories of the specified directories, click Full recursion.
● To scan a limited number of subdirectories of the specified directories, click Limit depth and then specify how many sub
directories you want to scan.
8. Optional: To scan all files regardless of whether OneFS has marked files as having been scanned, or if global settings specify
that certain files should not be scanned, select Enable force run of policy regardless of impact policy.
9. Optional: To modify the default impact policy of the antivirus scans, from the Impact Policy list, select a new impact policy.
10. In the Schedule area, specify whether you want to run the policy according to a schedule or manually.
Scheduled policies can also be run manually at any time.

Run the policy only manually. Click Manual

Run the policy according to a schedule. a. Click Scheduled.
b. Specify how often you want the policy to run.
11. Click Create Policy.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

Managing ICAP antivirus policies

Antivirus policies are specific to ICAP. You can modify and delete ICAP antivirus policies. You can also temporarily disable
antivirus policies if you want to retain the policy but do not want to scan files.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

Modify an antivirus policy

You can modify an antivirus policy.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Policies.
2. In the Antivirus Policies table, in the row of the antivirus policy that you want to modify, click View / Edit.
3. In the View Antivirus Policy Details dialog box, click Edit.
4. Modify settings, and then click Save Changes.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

Delete an antivirus policy

You can delete an antivirus policy.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Policies.
2. In the Antivirus Policies table, in the row for the antivirus policy you want to delete, click More > Delete.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

478 Antivirus
Enable or disable an antivirus policy
You can temporarily disable antivirus policies if you want to retain the policy but do not want to scan files.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Policies.
2. In the Antivirus Policies table, in the row for the antivirus policy you want to enable or disable, click More > Enable Policy
or More > Disable Policy.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

View antivirus policies

You can view antivirus policies.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Policies.
2. In the Antivirus Policies table, view antivirus policies.

Related concepts
ICAP Antivirus policy scanning

Managing antivirus scans

You can scan multiple files for viruses by manually running an antivirus policy, or scan an individual file without an antivirus
policy. You can also stop antivirus scans.

Scan a file
You can manually scan an individual file for viruses.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi antivirus scan command.
The following command scans the /ifs/data/virus_file file for viruses:

isi antivirus scan /ifs/data/virus_file

Manually run an ICAP antivirus policy

You can manually run an ICAP antivirus policy at any time.
This procedure is available only through the web administration interface.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > ICAP > Policies.
2. In the Antivirus Policies table, in the row for a policy, click More > Run Policy.

Stop a running antivirus scan

You can stop a running antivirus scan. This procedure is available only through the web administration interface.
1. Click Cluster Management > Job Operations > Job Summary.
2. In the Active Jobs table, in the row with type AVScan, click More > Cancel Running Job.

Antivirus 479
Managing antivirus threats
You can repair, quarantine, or truncate files in which threats are detected. If you think that a quarantined file is no longer a
threat, you can rescan the file or remove the file from quarantine.

Manually quarantine a file

You can quarantine a file to prevent the file from being accessed by users.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Detected Threats.
2. In the Antivirus Threat Reports table, in the row of a file, click More > Quarantine File .

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

Rescan a file
You can rescan a file for viruses if, for example, you believe that a file is no longer a threat.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the isi antivirus scan command.
For example, the following command scans /ifs/data/virus_file:

isi antivirus scan /ifs/data/virus_file

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

Remove a file from quarantine

You can remove a file from quarantine if, for example, you believe that the file is no longer a threat.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Detected Threats.
2. In the Antivirus Threat Reports table, in the row of a file, click More > Restore File.

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

Manually truncate a file

If a threat is detected in a file, and the file is irreparable and no longer needed, you can manually truncate the file.
This procedure is available only through the command-line interface (CLI).
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) connection to any node in the cluster and log in.
2. Run the truncate command on a file.
The following command truncates the /ifs/data/virus_file file:

truncate -s 0 /ifs/data/virus_file

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

480 Antivirus
View threats
You can view files that have been identified as threats by an ICAP server.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Detected Threats.
2. In the Antivirus Threat Reports table, view potentially infected files.

Related concepts
ICAP threat responses

Related references
Antivirus threat information

Antivirus threat information

You can view information about the antivirus threats that are reported by an ICAP server.

Name Displays the name of the detected threat as it is recognized by the ICAP server.
Path Displays the file path of the potentially infected file.
Remediation Indicates how OneFS responded to the file when the threat was detected.
Policy Displays the ID of the antivirus policy that caused the threat to be detected.
Detected Displays the time that the threat was detected.
Actions Displays actions that can be performed on the file.

Managing antivirus reports

You can view antivirus reports through the web administration interface. You can also view events that are related to antivirus
activity.

View antivirus reports

You can view antivirus reports.
1. Click Data Protection > Antivirus > Reports.
2. In the Antivirus Scan Reports table, in the row for a report, click View Details.

Related concepts
Antivirus scan reports

View antivirus events

You can view events that relate to antivirus activity.
1. Click Cluster Management > Events and Alerts > Events.
2. In the Event Groups table, view all events.
All events related to antivirus scans are classified as warnings. The following events are related to antivirus activities:
AVScan Infected File Found
A threat was detected by an antivirus scan. These events refer to specific reports on the Antivirus
Reports page but do not provide threat details.
No ICAP Servers available
OneFS is unable to communicate with any ICAP servers.

Antivirus 481
 ICAP Server Misconfigured, Unreachable or Unresponsive
OneFS is unable to communicate with an ICAP server.

482 Antivirus
 35
File System Explorer
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• File System Explorer overview
• Browse the file system
• Create a directory
• Modify file and directory properties
• View file and directory properties
• File and directory properties

File System Explorer overview

The File System Explorer is a web-based interface that enables you to manage the content stored on your cluster. You can
use the File System Explorer to navigate the PowerScale file system (/ifs), add directories, and manage file and directory
properties including data protection, I/O optimization, and UNIX permissions.
PowerScale file system directory permissions are initially set to allow full access for all users. Any user can delete any file,
regardless of the permissions on the individual file. Depending on your environment, you should establish appropriate permission
restrictions through the File System Explorer.
File System Explorer supports access zones. By default, the root user and sysadmin have access to the top-level access zone,
System (/ifs). Other users can be restricted to specific access zones—for example, /ifs/home.
You can view and configure file and directory properties from within Windows clients that are connected to the cluster.
However, because Windows and UNIX permissions differ from one another, you must be careful not to make any unwanted
changes that affect file and directory access.

Browse the file system

You can browse the PowerScale file system, /ifs, through the File system explorer.
1. Click File System > File system explorer.
2. View files and directories.
You can click on a directory to view its contents.

Create a directory
You can create a directory in the /ifs directory tree through the File system explorer.
1. Click File System > File system explorer.
2. Navigate to the directory that you want to add the directory to.
3. Click Create Directory.
4. In the Create a directory dialog box, in the Directory name field, enter a name for the directory.
5. In the User field, enter the name of the user, or browse for the user.
6. In the Group field, enter the name of the group the user belongs to or browse for the group.
7. In the Permissions area, assign permissions to the directory.
8. In the File name limits area, from the Restrict name length list, select one of the following options:
● Inherited (255 characters, 255 bytes)
● Restricted (255 characters, 255 bytes)

File System Explorer 483

 ● Full length (255 characters, 1024 bytes)
9. Click Create directory.

Modify file and directory properties

You can modify file and directory properties through File system explorer.
1. Click File System > File system explorer.
2. Navigate to the file or directory that you want to modify.
3. In the row of the file or directory, click View / Edit.
4. Modify the file or directory properties, and then click Save.

View file and directory properties

You can view file and directory properties through the File system explorer.
1. Click File System > File system explorer.
2. Navigate to the file or directory that you want to view.
3. In the row of the file or directory, click View / Edit.

File and directory properties

The following file and directory properties are displayed in the File System Explorer:

Properties
Path Displays the absolute path of the file or directory.
File Size Displays the logical size of the file or directory.
Space Used Displays the physical size of the file or directory.
Last Modified Displays the time that the file or directory was last modified.
Last Accessed Displays the time that the file or directory was last accessed.

UNIX Permissions
User Displays the permissions assigned to the owner of the file or directory.
Group Displays the permissions assigned to the group of the file or directory.
Others Displays the permissions assigned to other users for the file or directory.

484 File System Explorer

 36
Multi-Party Authorization
This section contains the following topics:
Topics:
• Multi-Party Authorization

Multi-Party Authorization
Multi-Party Authorization (MPA) provides an additional layer of protection by requiring administrative approval to perform
certain privileged actions. Enabling MPA minimizes the risk of system damage stemming from a malicious attempt or an
accident.
When enabled, certain actions require approval from dedicated Approval Administrators to perform. In order to enable MPA, a
minimum of two users must be registered as the Approval Administrators in the System zone.
The ApprovalAdmin role has the ISI_PRIV_MPA_APPROVAL privilege which allows for all MPA approval operations. An
Approval Admin can approve or reject any MPA requests submitted by users, but no single user or Approver Admin can approve
its own request.
Any authorized user can create an MPA request through the command-line interface, the API, or the web administration
interface. The ISI_PRIV_MPA_REQUEST privilege is required for manual creation. Also, if a user attempts to perform one of
the privileged actions, an MPA request is automatically created on their behalf.
There is no notification for requests that are created or approved. Approval Admins and users who have created a request must
check the dashboard to review and act on requests.
Once MPA has been enabled, it cannot be disabled. MPA is not supported in compliance mode.
For MPA-related privileges and roles, see Multi-Party Authorization privileges and roles.

Request expiry times

Approval Admins can view the details of requests and approve or reject requests. Approval Admins can also provide a time for
an approved request to expire. If an expiration time is not provided, then the approval is valid based on default expiry times.
Users who have submitted requests can cancel the request. All requests have default expiry times.

Table 147. Request expiry times

Status Default expiry time Description
Pending 7 days The request is waiting for approval.
Expired requests cannot be updated.
Approved 7 days Request is approved and can be used
for execution for a specified action.
Approval expires after seven days, if an
expiration date is not provided during
approval.
Rejected 30 days The request is rejected and will be
removed from the system after 30
configured days.
Completed 30 days Request moves to completed state from
approved state once approved request
expiry time is reached. Requests will be
removed from the system after 30 days.

Multi-Party Authorization 485

Table 147. Request expiry times (continued)
Status Default expiry time Description
Canceled 7 days Requests can be cancelled while in a
pending state; requests will be removed
from the system after seven days.

Multi-Party Authorization privileged actions

These actions require approval from Approval Administrators.
The following actions are privileged and require approval from an Approval Admin before they can be performed. For some
actions, only autocreation of a request is allowed. A request is autocreated if there is not already a pending request when an
action is attempted. In this event, an error message indicates that the attempted action is a privileged action and a request to
perform the action is pending approval. The message will also direct the user to check MPA to view the status of the request.
If a request has been approved by an Approval Admin, the action is allowed .

Table 148. Privileged actions

Component Action Description Manual request Auto request creation
creation allowed allowed
MPA Register Approval Registering approval No Yes
Admin admin will be a privilege
action after MPA is
enabled.
Privileged CLI CLI MPA Check Multi-Party No Yes
Authorization check to
perform specific CLI
command.
Hardening engine Apply hardening Applying a Hardening Yes Yes
Profile, such as root-
lockdown, STIG.
Hardening engine Disable hardening Disabling a Hardening Yes Yes
Profile, such as root-
lockdown, STIG.
Object Storage (S3) Reduce immutable Reduction in bucket Yes Yes
bucket retention retention for an
immutable bucket.
Object Storage (S3) Modify server access Changing the Yes Yes
logging configuration configuration of access
logging for a bucket.
Platform Reduce immutable Reduction in bucket Yes Yes
bucket retention retention for an
immutable bucket.
Platform Modify server access Changing the Yes Yes
logging configuration configuration of access
logging for a bucket.
Platform Disable syslog access Disables syslog access Yes Yes
logging configuration logging configuration.
Snapshot Delete snapshot Delete a given snapshot No Yes
Snapshot Modify snapshot Modify a given No Yes
snapshot
Snapshot Delete snapshot Delete a given snapshot No Yes
schedule schedule

486 Multi-Party Authorization

Table 148. Privileged actions (continued)
Component Action Description Manual request Auto request creation
creation allowed allowed
Snapshot Modify snapshot Modify a given No Yes
schedule snapshot schedule

Register an Approval Administrator

Users who are either a member of the ApprovalAdmin role, or who have the ISI_PRIV_MPA_APPROVAL privilege can register as
an Approval Administrator. To register a user as an Approval Administrator, you need a time-based one-time password (TOTP)
application, such as Google Authenticator or Microsoft Authenticator.
1. Log in as the user to register as an Approval Administrator, click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. Click Registration > Registration button.
3. A window appears to direct the user to download one of the supported authenticator applications. After installing the chosen
app, click Next.
4. Set up Two-Factor Authentication (2FA); choose an option:
a. Scan the QR code using the authenticator app: scan the QR code and check the box for "I have scanned the QR Code" >
click Next > enter the code from the authenticator app > click Register.
b. Copy the Secret Key: this option can be used with local authenticator apps. Select the radio button for Copy Secret Key
> click the link for "Copy Secret Key" > check the box for "I have copied the Secret Key" > click Next. Paste the secret
key into your authenticator application. Enter the code from your authenticator app into the Authentication Code box >
click Register.

Enable Multi-Party Authorization

You can enable Multi-Party Authorization (MPA).
At least two Approval Administrators must be registered to enable MPA. A user who is a member of the Security Admin role, or
who has the ISI_PRIV_MPA_SETTINGS_GLOBAL privilege can enable MPA.
1. Click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click the button to Enable.
4. When asked to confirm, click Yes.

Add a member to the ApprovalAdmin role

You can add a member to the ApprovalAdmin role.
1. Click Access > Membership and roles.
2. Click the Roles tab
3. In the Actions column of the ApprovalAdmin role, click View/Edit.
4. The Edit role details window appears. The workflow navigation bar Basic settings step is highlighted. Click Next.
5. Click Add Member.
6. The Search member window appears. Select the radio button for Users, Groups, or Well-known SIDs.
7. Enter the username, select the Provider, and click Search.
8. Select the user that you want to add and click Select user.
9. On the Edit role details window, review the information and click Next.
10. In the Privileges step, select the permissions for each privilege and click Next.
11. Review the summary of changes and click Back to make edits, Cancel to cancel the changes, or Submit to submit the
changes.

Multi-Party Authorization 487

View a pending request
You can view a pending request.
1. Click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. At the top of the window, select the zone to view requests from a specific access zone.
3. On the Requests tab, click the Pending Approval tab.
4. Click the button to View.
5. From the View Request Details window, Approval Admins can Reject or Approve the request.

Approve a pending request

You can approve a pending request.
1. Click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. On the Requests tab, click the Pending Approval tab.
3. Select the request and click Approve.
4. Enter the Security Code from your authenticator app, enter a comment.
5. Optional: enter a date when the approval expires.
6. Click Approve.

Reject a pending request

You can reject a pending request.
1. Click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. On the Requests tab, click the Pending Approval tab.
3. Select the request and click Reject.
4. Enter the Security Code from your authenticator app, enter a comment.
5. Click Reject.

Cancel a pending request

You can cancel a pending request.
1. Click Access > Multi-Party Authorization.
2. On the Requests tab, click the Pending Approval tab.
3. Select the request and click Cancel.

488 Multi-Party Authorization